Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutR-2008-087 Gardner Park Well - Professional Services ContractA RESOLUTION RESOLUTION NO. R-2008-87 authorizing the City Manager to execute the attached and incorporated engineering and consulting services agreement with Golder Associates, Inc for engineering and consulting services` associated with the design and preparation bid documents for the Gardner Park Well; also authorizing the execution of other documents related to the design, contract administration and construction associated with completion of the Gardner Park Well WHEREAS, the City of Yakima Water/Irrigation Division requires engineering, consulting services and construction associated with the Gardner Park Well; and WHEREAS, the City of Yakima Water/Irrigation Division representatives have complied with the provisions of RCW 39.80 which concerns the procurement of engineering and architectural services by a city; and WHEREAS, the City of Yakima Water/Irrigation Division representatives will continue to comply with the provisions of RCW 39.80 which concerns the procurement of engineering and architectural services by a city for future engineering and architectural services; and WEREAS, Golder Associates, Inc. has the necessary expertise and experience to perform and provide the required engineering and construction management services and is willing to do so in accordance with the attached agreement; and WHEREAS, the City Council deems it to be in the best interest of the City to enter into an agreement with Golder Associates, for engineering and consulting services associated with the design and construction of the Gardner Park Well; and WHEREAS, the City Council deems it to be in the best interest of the City to authorize the City Manager to execute all other documents related to the design, contract administration and construction associated with the Gardner Park Well; Now, Therefore, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF YAKIMA: The City Manager is hereby authorized and directed to execute the attached and incorporated engineering and consulting services agreement with Golder Associates, Inc. for engineering and consulting services associated with the design of the Gardner Park Well; together with all other documents related to the design, contract administration and construction associated with Gardner Park Well. ADOPTED BY THE CITY COUNCIL this 3'd day of J ATTEST: . City Clerk 008. David Edler, Mayor AGREEMENT BETWEEN CITY OF YAKIMA, WASHINGTON AND GOLDER ASSOCIATES FOR PROFESSIONAL SERVICES THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into on this ,not day of-PPcevr+.kd , 2008, by and between the City of Yakima, Washington, a municipal corporation with principal offices at 129 North Second Street, Yakima, WA 98901, hereinafter referred to as "CITY", and GOLDER ASSOCIATES, INC., with an office at 18300 NE Union Hill Road, Suite 200, Redmond, WA 98052 and which corporation and its principal engineers performing this Agreement are licensed and registered to do .business in the State of Washington, hereinafter referred to as "ENGINEER," for Gardner Well Design Services, herein called the "PROJECT." WITNESSETH: RECITALS WHEREAS, CITY desires to retain the ENGINEER to provide engineering services for Well Installation and Testing for the Gardner Park Well, as described in this Agreement and subsequent Amendments thereto; and, WHEREAS, ENGINEER represents that it has available and offers to provide personnel with knowledge and experience necessary to satisfactorily accomplish the work within the required time and that it has no conflicts of interest prohibited by law from entering into this Agreement; NOW, THEREFORE, CITY and ENGINEER agree as follows: SECTION 1 INCORPORATION OF RECITALS 1.1 The above recitals are incorporated into these operative provisions of the Agreement. SECTION 2 SCOPE OF SERVICES 2.0.1 ENGINEER agrees to perform those services described hereafter. Unless modified in writing by both parties, duties of ENGINEER shall not be construed to exceed those services specifically set forth herein. 2.0.2 ENGINEER shall use its best efforts to maintain continuity in personnel and shall assign Chris Pitre, L.Hg., as Project Manager and David Banton as • Principal -in -Charge throughout the term of this Agreement unless other personnel are approved by the CITY. 2.1 Basic Services: ENGINEER agrees to perform those tasks described in Exhibit A, entitled "GARDNER WELL INSTALLATION HYDROGEOLOGICAL SERVICES SCOPE OF WORK " (WORK) which is attached hereto and made a part of this Agreement as if fully set forth herein. 2.2 Additional Services: CITY and ENGINEER agree that not all WORK to be performed by ENGINEER can be defined in detail at the time this Agreement is executed, and that additional WORK related to the Project and not covered in Exhibit A may be needed during performance of this Agreement. CITY may, at anytime, by written order, direct the ENGINEER to revise portions of the PROJECT WORK previously completed in a satisfactory manner, delete portions 'of the PROJECT, or request that the ENGINEER perform additional WORK beyond the scope of the PROJECT WORK. Such changes hereinafter shall be referred to as "Additional Services." 2.2.1 If such Additional Services cause an increase or decrease in the ENGINEER'S cost of, or time required for, performance of any services under this Agreement, a contract price and/or completion time adjustment pursuant to this Agreement shall be made and this Agreement shall be modified in writing accordingly. 2.2.2 Compensation for each such request for Additional Services shall be negotiated by the CITY and the ENGINEER according to the provisions set forth in Exhibit C, attached hereto and incorporated herein by this reference, and if so authorized, shall be considered part of the PROJECT WORK. The ENGINEER shall not perform any Additional Services until so authorized by CITY and agreed to by the ENGINEER in writing. 2.3 The ENGINEER must assert any claim for adjustment in writing within thirty (30) days from the date of the ENGINEER's receipt of the written notification of change. SECTION 3 CITY'S RESPONSIBILITIES 3.1 CITY -FURNISHED DATA: The CITY will provide to the ENGINEER all technical data in the CITY'S possession relating to the ENGINEER'S services on the PROJECT including information on any pre-existing conditions known to the CITY that constitute hazardous waste contamination on the PROJECT site as determined by an authorized regulatory agency. 3.2 ACCESS TO FACILITIES AND PROPERTY: The CITY will make its facilities reasonably accessible to ENGINEER as required for ENGINEER'S performance of its services and will provide labor and safety equipment as reasonably required by ENGINEER for such access. 3.3 TIMELY REVIEW: The CITY will examine the ENGINEER'S studies, reports, sketches, drawings, specifications, proposals, and other documents; obtain advice of an attorney, insurance counselor, accountant, auditor, bond and financial advisors, and other consultants as CITY deems appropriate; and render in writing decisions required of CITY in a timely manner: Such examinations and decisions, however, shall not relieve the ENGINEER of any contractual obligations nor of its duty to render professional services meeting the standards of care for its profession. 3.4 CITY shall appoint a CITY'S Representative with respect to WORK to be performed under this Agreement. CITY'S Representative shall have complete authority to transmit instructions and receive information. ENGINEER shall be entitled to reasonably rely on such instructions made by the CITY'S Representative unless otherwise directed in writing by the CITY, but ENGINEER shall be responsible for bringing to the attention of the CITY'S Representative any instructions which the ENGINEER believes are inadequate, incomplete, or inaccurate based upon the ENGINEER'S knowledge. 3.5 Any documents, services, and reports provided by the CITY to the ENGINEER are available solely as additional information to the ENGINEER and will not relieve the ENGINEER of its duties and obligations under this Agreement or at law. The ENGINEER shall be entitled to reasonably rely upon the accuracy and the completeness of such documents, services and reports, but shall be responsible for exercising customary professional care in using and reviewing such documents, services, and reports and drawing conclusions therefrom. SECTION 4 AUTHORIZATION, PROGRESS, AND COMPLETION 4.1 In signing this Agreement, CITY grants ENGINEER specific authorization to proceed with WORK described in Exhibit A. The time for completion is defined in Exhibit A, or as amended. SECTION 5. COMPENSATION 5.1 COMPENSATION ON A TIME SPENT BASIS AT SPECIFIC HOURLY RATES: For the services described in Exhibit A, compensation shall be according to Exhibit C - Schedule of Rates, attached hereto and incorporated herein by this reference, on a time spent basis plus reimbursement for direct non -salary expenses. 5.1.1 DIRECT NON -SALARY EXPENSES: Direct Non -Salary Expenses are those costs incurred on or directly for the PROJECT including, but not limited to, necessary transportation costs, including current rates for ENGINEER'S vehicles; meals and lodging; laboratory tests and analyses; printing, binding and reproduction charges; all costs associated with other outside nonprofessional services and facilities; special CITY - requested and PROJECT -related insurance and performance warranty, costs;, and other similar costs. Reimbursement for Direct Non -Salary Expenses will be on the basis of actual charges plus fifteen percent (15%) and on the basis of current rates when fumished by ENGINEER. Estimated Direct Non -Salary Expenses are shown in Exhibit C. 5.1.1.1 Travel costs, including transportation, lodging, subsistence, and incidental expenses incurred by employees of the ENGINEER and each of the Subconsultants in connection with PROJECT WORK; provided, as follows: • That a maximum of U.S. INTERNAL REVENUE SERVICE allowed cents per mile will be paid for the operation, maintenance, and depreciation costs of company or individually owned vehicles for that portion of time they are used for PROJECT WORK. ENGINEER, whenever possible, will use the least expensive form of ground transportation. • That reimbursement for meals inclusive of tips shall not exceed a maximum of forty dollars ($40) per day per person. This rate may be adjusted on a yearly basis. • That accommodation shall be at a reasonably priced hotel/motel. • That air travel shall be by coach class, and shall be used only when absolutely necessary. 5.1.2 Telephone charges, computer charges, in-house reproduction charges, first class postage, and FAX charges are not included in the direct expense costs, but are considered included in the Schedule of Specific Hourly Billing Rates. 5.1.3 Professional Subconsultants. Professional Subconsultants are those costs for engineering, architecture, geotechnical services and similar professional services approved by the CITY. Reimbursement for Professional Subconsultants will be on the basis of 1.10 times the actual costs billed by the Professional Subconsultant for services provided to the CITY through this Agreement. Estimated Subconsultant costs are shown in Exhibit B. 5.2 Unless specifically authorized in writing by the CITY, the total budgetary amount for this PROJECT shall not exceed One Hundred and Thirty Seven Thousand, Five Hundred and Twenty Nine Dollars ($137,529.00). The ENGINEER will make reasonable efforts to complete the WORK within the budget and will keep CITY informed of progress toward that end so that the budget or WORK effort can be adjusted, if found necessary. The ENGINEER is not obligated to incur costs beyond the indicated budget, as may be adjusted, nor is the CITY obligated to pay the ENGINEER beyond these limits. When any budget has been increased, the ENGINEER'S excess costs expended prior to such increase will be allowable to the same extent as if such costs had been incurred after the approved increase, and provided that the City was informed in writing at the time such costs were incurred. 5.3 The ENGINEER will use its best efforts to submit to the City's Representative by the tenth (10th) day of each calendar month an invoice for payment for PROJECT services completed through the accounting cut-off day of the previous month. Such invoices shall be for PROJECT services and WORK performed and costs incurred prior to the date of the invoice and not covered by previously submitted invoices. The ENGINEER shall submit with each invoice a summary of time expended on the PROJECT for the current billing period, copies of subconsultant invoices, and any other supporting materials determined by the City necessary to substantiate the costs incurred. CITY will use its best efforts to pay such invoices within thirty (30) days of receipt and upon approval of the WORK done and amount billed. CITY will notify the ENGINEER promptly if any problems are noted with the invoice. CITY may question any item in an invoice, noting to ENGINEER the questionable item(s) and withholding payment for such item(s). The ENGINEER may resubmit such item(s) in a subsequent invoice together with additional supporting information required. 5.4 If payment is not made within sixty (60) days following receipt of approved invoices, interest on the unpaid balance shall accrue beginning with the sixty-first (61) day at the rate of 1.0% per month. or the maximum interest rate permitted by law, whichever is less; provided, however, that no interest shall accrue pursuant to Chapter 39.76 RCW when before the date of timely payment a notice of dispute is issued in good faith by the CITY to the ENGINEER pursuant to the terms of RCW 39.76.020(4). 5.5 Final payment of any balance due the ENGINEER for PROJECT services will be made within forty-five (45) days after satisfactory completion of the services required by this Agreement as evidenced by written acceptance by CITY and after such audit or verification as CITY may deem necessary and execution and delivery by the ENGINEER of a release of all known payment claims against CITY arising under or by virtue of this Agreement, other than such payment claims, if any, as may be specifically exempted by the ENGINEER from the operation of the release in stated amounts to be set forth therein. 5.6 Payment for any PROJECT services and WORK shall not constitute a waiver or release by CITY of any claims, right, or remedy it may have against the ENGINEER under this Agreement or by law, nor shall such payment constitute a waiver, remission, or discharge by CITY of any failure or fault of the ENGINEER to satisfactorily perform the PROJECT WORK as required under this Agreement. SECTION 6 RESPONSIBILITY OF ENGINEER 6.1 The ENGINEER shall be responsible for the professional quality, technical adequacy and accuracy, timely completion, and the coordination of all plans, design, drawings, specifications, reports, and other services fumished by the ENGINEER under this Agreement. The ENGINEER shall, without additional compensation, correct or review any errors, omissions, or other deficiencies in its plans, designs, drawings, specifications, reports, and other services. The ENGINEER shall perform its WORK according to generally accepted civil engineering standards of care and consistent with achieving the PROJECT WORK within budget, on time, and in compliance with applicable laws, regulations, and permits. 6.2 CITY'S review or approval of, or payment for, any plans, drawings, designs, specifications, reports, and incidental WORK or services furnished hereunder shall not in any way relieve the ENGINEER of responsibility for the technical adequacy, completeness, or accuracy of its WORK and the PROJECT WORK. CITY'S review, approval, or payment for any of the services shall not be construed to operate as a waiver of any rights under this Agreement or at law or any cause of action arising out of the performance of this Agreement. 6.3 In performing WORK and services hereunder, the ENGINEER and its subcontractors, subconsultants, employees, agents, and representatives shall be acting as independent contractors and shall not be deemed or construed to be employees or agents of CITY in any manner whatsoever. The ENGINEER shall not hold itself out as, nor claim to be, an officer or employee of CITY by reason hereof and will not make any claim, demand, or application to or for any right or privilege applicable to an officer or employee of CITY. The ENGINEER shall be solely responsible for any claims for wages or compensation by ENGINEER employees, agents, and representatives, including subconsultants and subcontractors, and shall save and hold CITY harmless therefrom. 6.4 INDEMNIFICATION: (a) ENGINEER agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the CITY, its elected officials, agents, officers, and employees (hereinafter "parties protected") from (1) claims, demands, liens, lawsuits, administrative and other proceedings, and (2) judgments, awards, losses, liabilities, damages, penalties, fines, costs and expenses (including legal fees, costs, and disbursements) of any kind claimed by third parties arising out of, or related to any death, injury, damage or destruction to any person or any property to the extent caused by any negligent act, action, default, error or omission or willful misconduct arising out of the Engineer's performance under this Agreement. In the event that any lien is placed upon the City's property or any of the City's officers, employees or agents as a result of the negligence or willful misconduct of the Engineer, the Engineer shall at once cause the same to be dissolved and discharged by giving bond or otherwise. ..... ............ (b) CITY agrees to indemnify, defend, and hold the ENGINEER harmless from loss, cost, or expense, including legal fees, of any kind claimed by third parties, including without limitation such loss, cost, or expense resulting from injuries to persons or damages to property, caused solely by the negligence or willful misconduct of the CITY, its employees, or agents in connection with the PROJECT. (c) If the negligence or willful misconduct of both the ENGINEER and the CITY (or a person identified above for whom each is liable) is a cause of such third party claim, the Toss, cost, or expense shall be shared between the ENGINEER and the CITY in proportion to their relative degrees of negligence or willful misconduct and the right of indemnity will apply for such proportion. 6.5 In any and all claims by an employee of the ENGINEER, any subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligations under this Agreement shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or types of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for the ENGINEER or a subcontractor under workers' or workmens' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. The ENGINEER specifically and expressly waives its immunity under the Industrial Insurance Act, Title 51, RCW. Such waiver has been mutually negotiated by the ENGINEER and the CITY as evidenced by their specific and express initialing of this paragraph. ENGINEER'S INITIALS CITY'S INITIALS 6.6 It is understood that any resident engineering or inspection provided by ENGINEER is for the purpose of determining compliance with the technical provisions of PROJECT specifications and does not constitute any form of guarantee or insurance with respect to the performance of a contractor. ENGINEER does not assume responsibility for methods or appliances used by a contractor, for the safety of construction work, or for compliance by contractors with laws and regulations. CITY shall use its best efforts to ensure that the construction contract requires that the contractor(s) indemnify and name CITY, the CITY'S and the ENGINEER'S officers, principals, employees, agents, representatives, and engineers as additional insureds on contractor's insurance policies covering PROJECT, exclusive of insurance for ENGINEER professional liability. 6.7 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATIONS: In soils, foundation, groundwater, and other subsurface investigations, the actual characteristics may vary significantly between successive test points and sample intervals and at locations other than where observation, exploration, and investigations have been made. Because of the inherent uncertainties in subsurface evaluations, changed or unanticipated underground conditions may occur that could affect total PROJECT cost and/or execution. These conditions and cost/execution effects are not the responsibility of the ENGINEER, to the extent that ENGINEER has exercised the applicable standard of professional care and judgment in such investigations. SECTION 7 PROJECT SCHEDULE AND BUDGET 7.1 The general PROJECT schedule and the budget for both the entire PROJECT and its component tasks shall be as set forth in this Agreement and attachments. The project schedule and performance dates for the individual tasks shall be mutually agreed to by the CITY and the ENGINEER within fifteen (15) days after execution of this Agreement. The performance dates and budgets for tasks may be modified only upon written agreement of the parties hereto. The performance date for tasks and the completion date for the entire PROJECT shall not be extended, nor the budget increased because of any unwarranted delays attributable to the ENGINEER, but may be extended or increased by the CITY in the event of a delay caused by special services requested by the CITY or because of unavoidable delay caused by any governmental action or other conditions beyond the control of the ENGINEER which could not be reasonably anticipated. 7.2 Not Tater than the tenth day of each calendar month during the performance of the PROJECT, the ENGINEER shall submit to the CITY'S Representative a copy of the current schedule and a written narrative description of the WORK accomplished by the ENGINEER and subconsultants on each task, indicating a good faith estimate of the percentage completion thereof on the last day of the previous month. Additional oral or written reports shall be prepared at the request of the CITY for presentation to other governmental agencies and/or to the public. SECTION 8 REUSE OF DOCUMENTS 8.1 All intemal WORK products of the ENGINEER are instruments or service of this PROJECT. There shall be no reuse, change, or alteration by the CITY or others acting through or on behalf of the CITY without written permission of the ENGINEER, which shall not be unreasonably withheld and will be at the CITY'S sole risk. The CITY agrees to indemnify the ENGINEER and its officers, employees, subcontractors, and affiliated corporations from all claims, damages, losses, and costs including, 'but not limited to, litigation expenses and attomey's fees arising out of or related to such unauthorized reuse, change, or alteration; provided, however, that the ENGINEER will not be indemnified for such claims, damages, losses, and costs including, without limitation, litigation expenses and attorney fees where caused by the ENGINEER's own negligent acts or omissions. 8.2 The ENGINEER agrees that ownership of any plans, drawings, designs, specifications, computer programs, technical reports, operating manuals, calculations, notes, and other WORK submitted or which are specified to be delivered under this Agreement or which are developed or produced and paid for under this Agreement, whether or not complete, shall be vested in the CITY. 8.3 All rights to patents, trademarks, copyrights, and trade secrets owned by ENGINEER (hereinafter "Intellectual Property") as well as any modifications, updates or enhancements to saki Intellectual Property during the performance of the WORK remain the property of ENGINEER, and ENGINEER does not grant CITY any right or license to such Intellectual Property. SECTION 9 AUDIT AND ACCESS TO RECORDS 9.1 The ENGINEER, including its subconsultants, shall maintain books, records, documents and other evidence directly pertinent to performance of the WORK under this Agreement in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles and practices consistently applied. The CITY or the CITY'S duly authorized representative shall have access to such books, records, documents, and other evidence for inspection, audit, and copying for a period of three years after completion of the PROJECT. The CITY shall also have access to such books, records, and documents during the performance of the PROJECT WORK, if deemed necessary by the CITY, to verify the ENGINEER'S WORK and invoices. 9.2 Audits conducted pursuant to this section shall be in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards and established procedures and guidelines of the reviewing or auditing agency. 9.3 The ENGINEER agrees to the disclosure of all information and reports resulting from access to records pursuant to this section provided that the ENGINEER is afforded the opportunity for an audit exit conference and an opportunity to comment and submit any supporting documentation on the pertinent portions of the draft audit report and that the final audit report will include written comments, if any, of the ENGINEER. 9.4 The ENGINEER shall ensure that the foregoing paragraphs are included in each subcontract for WORK on the Project. 9.5 Any charges of the ENGINEER paid by the CITY which are found by an audit to be inadequately substantiated shall be reimbursed to the CITY. SECTION 10 . INSURANCE 10.1 Prior to beginning WORK under this Agreement, the ENGINEER shall provide Certificates of Insurance satisfactory to the CITY as evidence that policies providing the following coverage and limits of insurance are in full force and effect. The CITY and the CITY'S officers, principals, employees, representatives, and agents shall be designated as additional insureds on all such policies except for professional liability and Worker's Compensation. Such insurance shall be primary to the extent covered as additional insureds and other insurance maintained or carried by the CITY shall be separate and distinct and shall not be contributing with the insurance listed hereunder. 10.1.1 Commercial general liability insurance, including personal injury liability, blanket contractual liability, and broad -form property damage liability coverage. The combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage shall not be Tess than one million dollars ($1,000,000) per occurrence/aggregate. 10.1.2. Automobile bodily injury and property damage liability insurance covering owned, non - owned, rented, and hired cars. The combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage shall not be Tess than one million dollars ($1,000,000) per occurrence. 10.1.3. Statutory workers' compensation and employer's liability insurance as required by state law. 10.1.4. Professional liability insurance. The limit of professional liability insurance coverage shall not be less than one million dollars ($1,000,000) for any one claim and policy aggregate. Failure of either or all of the additional insureds to report a claim under such insurance shall not prejudice the rights of the CITY, its officers, employees, agents, and representatives thereunder. The CITY and the CITY'S officers, principals, employees, representatives, and agents shall have no obligation for payment of premiums because of being named as additional insureds under such insurance. None of the policies issued pursuant to the requirements contained herein shall be canceled, allowed to expire, or changed in any manner that affects the rights of the City until thirty (30) days after written notice to the CITY of such intended cancellation, expiration or change. SECTION 11 SUBCONTRACTS 11.1 ENGINEER shall be entitled, to the extent determined appropriate by ENGINEER, to subcontract any portion of the WORK to be performed under this Agreement. 11.2 Any subconsultants or subcontractors to the ENGINEER utilized on this PROJECT, including any substitutions thereof, will be subject to prior approval by CITY, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld. Each subcontract shall be subject to review by the CITY'S Representative, if requested, prior to the subconsultant or subcontractor proceeding with the WORK. Such review shall not constitute an approval as to the legal form or content of such subcontract. The ENGINEER shall be responsible forthe architectural and engineering performance, acts, and omissions of all persons and firms performing subcontract WORK. 11.3 CITY does not anticipate ENGINEER subcontracting with any additional persons or firms for the purpose of completing this Agreement. 11.4 The ENGINEER shall submit, along with its monthly invoices, a description of all WORK completed by subconsultants and subcontractors during the preceding month and copies of all invoices thereto. SECTION 12 ASSIGNMENT 12.1 This Agreement is binding on the heirs, successors and assigns of the parties hereto. This Agreement may not be assigned by CITY or ENGINEER without prior written consent of the other, which consent will not be unreasonably withheld. It is expressly intended and agreed that no third party beneficiaries are created by this Agreement, and that the rights and remedies provided herein shall inure only to the benefit of the parties to this Agreement. SECTION 13 INTEGRATION 13.1 This Agreement represents the entire understanding of CITY and ENGINEER as to those matters contained herein. No prior oral or written understanding shall be of any force or effect with respect to those matters covered herein. This Agreement may not be modified or altered except in writing signed by both parties. SECTION 14 JURISDICTION AND VENUE 14.1 This Agreement shall be administered and interpreted under the laws of the State of Washington. Jurisdiction of litigation arising from this Agreement shall be in that state. If any part of this Agreement is found to conflict with applicable laws, such part shall be inoperative, null, and void insofar as it conflicts with said laws, but the remainder of this Agreement shall be in full force and effect. Venue of all disputes shall be Yakima County, State of Washington. SECTION 15 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT and NONDISCRIMINATION 15.1 In connection with the Services under this Agreement, ENGINEER agrees to comply with the applicable provisions of State and Federal Equal Employment Opportunity and Nondiscrimination statutes and regulations. SECTION 16 SUSPENSION OF WORK 16.1 CITY may suspend, in writing by certified mail, all or a portion of the WORK under this Agreement if unforeseen circumstances beyond CITY'S control are interfering with normal progress of the WORK. ENGINEER may suspend, in writing by certified mail, all or a portion of the WORK under this Agreement if unforeseen circumstances beyond ENGINEER's control are interfering with normal progress of the WORK. ENGINEER may suspend WORK on PROJECT in the event CITY does not pay invoices when due, except where otherwise provided by this Agreement. The time for completion of the WORK shall be extended by the number of days WORK is suspended. If the period of suspension exceeds ninety (90) days, the terms of this Agreement are subject to renegotiation, and both parties are granted the option to terminate WORK on the suspended portion of Project in accordance with SECTION 17. SECTION 17 TERMINATION OF WORK 17.1 Either party may terminate this Agreement, in whole or in part, if the other party materially breaches its obligations under this Agreement and is in default through no fault of the terminating party. However, no such termination may be effected unless the other party is given: (1) not less than fifteen (15) calendar days written notice delivered by certified mail, return receipt requested, of intent to terminate; and (2) an opportunity for consultation and for cure with the terminating party before termination. Notice shall be considered issued within seventy-two (72) hours of mailing by certified mail to the place of business of either party as set forth in this Agreement. 17.2 In addition to termination under subsection 17.1 of this Section, CITY may terminate this Agreement for its convenience, in whole or in part, provided the ENGINEER is given: (1) not less than fifteen (15) calendar days written notice delivered by certified mail, return receipt requested, of intent to terminate; and (2) an opportunity for consultation with CITY before termination. 17.3 If CITY terminates for default on the part of the ENGINEER, an adjustment in the contract price pursuant to the Agreement shall be made, but (1) no amount shall be allowed for anticipated profit on unperformed services or other WORK, and (2) any payment due to the ENGINEER at the time of termination may be adjusted to the extent of any additional costs or damages CITY has incurred, or is likely to incur, because of the ENGINEER'S breach. In such event, CITY shall consider the amount of WORK originally required which was satisfactorily completed to date of ,termination, whether that WORK is in a form or of a type which is usable and suitable to CITY at 'the date of termination and the cost to CITY of completing the WORK itself or of employing another firm to complete it. Under no circumstances shall payments made under this provision !exceed the contract price. In the event of default, the ENGINEER agrees to pay CITY for any hand all damages, costs, and expenses whether directly, indirectly, or consequentially caused by said default. This provision shall not preclude CITY from filing claims and/or commencing litigation to secure compensation for damages incurred beyond that covered by contract retainage or other withheld payments. 17.4 ; If the ENGINEER terminates for default on the part of CITY or if CITY terminates for convenience, the adjustment pursuant to the Agreement shall include payment for services satisfactorily performed to the date of termination, in addition to termination settlement costs the ENGINEER reasonably incurs relating to commitments which had become firm before the termination, unless CITY determines to assume said commitments. 17.5 ' Upon receipt of a termination notice under subsections 17.1 or 17.2 above, the ENGINEER shall (1) promptly discontinue all services affected (unless the notice directs otherwise), and (2) deliver or otherwise make available to CITY all originals of data, drawings, specifications, calculations, reports, estimates, summaries, and such other information, documents, and materials as the ENGINEER or its subconsultants may have accumulated or prepared in performing this Agreement, whether completed or in progress, with the ENGINEER retaining copies of the same. 17.6 I Upon termination under any subparagraph above, CITY reserves the right to prosecute the WORK to completion utilizing other qualified firms or individuals; provided, the ENGINEER shall have no responsibility to prosecute further WORK thereon. 17.7 If, after termination for failure of the ENGINEER to fulfill contractual obligations, it is determined that the ENGINEER has not so failed, the termination shall be deemed to have been effected for the convenience of CITY. In such event, the adjustment pursuant to the Agreement shall be determined as set forth in subparagraph 17.4. of this Section. 17.8 If, because of death, unavailability or any 'other occurrence, it becomes impossible for any key personnel employed by the ENGINEER in PROJECT WORK or for any corporate officer of the ENGINEER to render his services to the PROJECT, the ENGINEER shall not be relieved of its obligations to complete performance under this Agreement without the concurrence and written approval of CITY. If CITY agrees to termination of this Agreement under this provision, payment shall be made as set forth in subparagraph 17.3 of this Section. SECTION 18 ARBITRATION 18.1 ! All claims, counterclaims, disputes, and other matters in question arising out of, or relating to, this AGREEMENT or the breach thereof may be decided by arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association then obtaining. Either CITY or ENGINEER may initiate a request for such arbitration, but consent of the other party to such arbitration shall be a necessary precondition to arbitration. SECTION 19 NOTICE 19.1 Any notice required to be given under the terms of this Agreement shall be directed to the party at the address set forth below. Notice shall be considered issued and effective upon receipt thereof by the addressee -party, or seventy-two hours after mailing by certified mail to the place of business set forth below, whichever is earlier. CITY: City of Yakima 2301 Fruitvale Boulevard Yakima, WA 98902. Attn: Mr. David Brown, Water/Irrigation Manager ENGINEER: Golder Associates, Inc. 18300 NE Union Hill Road, Suite 200 Redmond Washington 98052-3333 Attn: Chris Pitre, Associate, Water Resources IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this agreement to be executed by their respective authorized officers or representatives as of the day and year first above written. CITY OF YAKIMA GOLDE Signature Printed Name: R.A. Zais, Jr. Title: City Manager Date: / I I . OS' Attest Signatu SSOCIA INC. Printed Name Title: ///167u0_3(1- �2d1 r l6. Date: Deborah Moore, City Clerk City Contract No. 2008 - Resolution No. R-2008-87 r STATE OF WASHINGTON ) ss. COUNTY OF YAKIMA ) I certify that I know or have satisfactory evidence that R.A. ZAIS, JR. is the person who appeared before me, and said person acknowledged that he signed this instrument, on oath stated that he was authorized to execute the instrument, and acknowledged it as the CITY MANAGER of the CITY OF YAKIMA, to be the free and voluntary act of such party for the uses and purposes mentioned in the instrument. Dated: i / / ! 8 / f' Seal or Stamp EXPoi,e \o \C1 do : 0 , �S STATE OF WASHINGTON COUNTY OF der 22/ Oam,4 (Signature) Deputy City Clerk Title Linda M. Watkins Printed Name My commission expires: 3_15- 20 /6 ) ss. I certify that I know or have satisfactory evidence that DOUG DUNSTER, is the person who appeared before me, and said person acknowledged that he/she signed this instrument, on oath stated that he/she was authorized to execute the instrument, and acknowledged it as the REDMOND OFFICE MANAGER of Golder Associates to be the free and voluntary act of such party for the uses and purposes mentioned in the instrument. Dated: /O D - ae76/ Seal or Stamp (Sig ature)` /(1(,./6<''y c_ Title /ev'rr /. rr 2�SL Printed Name My commission expires: ` Maio EXHIBIT A GARDNER WELL INSTALLATION HYDROGEOLOGICAL SERVICES SCOPE OF WORK During the termof. this AGREEMENT, the ENGINEER shall perform professional services in connection with the following project: The City of Yakima (City) wishes to install a municipal supply well at the Gardner Park site. Golder Associates Inc. (Golder) will provide hydrogeological services. WELL INSTALLATION AND TESTING SUMMARY A drilling contractor retained by the City of Yakima will install a well with limited observation of a Golder hydrogeologist. Following is the anticipated schedule of work for the project: • • Install a 24 -inch casing from ground surface to a depth of -500 feet, cemented in place. ' This will provide good control on flowing artesian conditions that are expected at the site. • Drill a 22 -inch borehole to a total depth of -1,200 feet. • Install a sand -packed 16 -inch nominal screen assembly. Cutting samples from the borehole will be collected during drilling and analyzed to assist in design of the screen assembly. A borehole geophysical survey may be conducted in order to identify possible zones of production and further inform the screen design. The screen will be installed under the observation of Golder field personnel. The well will be located in the City of Yakima's Gardner Park and will require a solid casing from ground surface to 700 feet depth. The borehole will be developed to establish a hydraulic connection between the well screen and the aquifer. Pumping tests will be conducted to evaluate well efficiency and aquifer properties and to develop a recommendation for a production pumping rate. Water samples will be collected for use in source analyses and approval by the Washington Department of Health. A summary of the tasks and associated budget is presented on the next page. Detailed itemization of expenses is provided in attached tables. Summary Cost and Schedule i Task Cost Schedule Task 1,01: Production Well Drilling Oversight $21,718 Concurrent with drilling contractor's schedule. Task 1'02: Geophysical Survey/ :Cuttings Analysis $15,802 Within one week of completion of drilling. Task 103: Well Design $6,167 Within two weeks of completion of drilling. Task 104: Oversight of Screen Installation and Development $21,135 Concurrent with drilling contractor's schedule. Task 105: Pumping Tests and Water Quality Sampling $22 928 Within three weeks of completion of well development. Task 106: Analysis and Reporting $20,209 Draft — within one month of completion of pumping tests: Final — within one month of resolving draft edits/comments with the City. Task 107: Project Management & Ecology Coordination $9,571 Duration of project, estimated at four months. Task 108: Contingency $20,000 As needed. 14 Total: $137,529 Effort may be redistributed among tasks within the total authorized budget. Detailed task descriptions follow. Task 101: Production Well Drilling Oversight Purpose: To oversee the borehole drilling and identify subsurface conditions, including documentation of drilling activities, potentially productive aquifer zones, and field water quality indicators, including assisting in compliance with Ecology provisions. • Description: Golder will provide a hydrogeologist to oversee and document the drilling and installation of the well starting at a depth of approximately 600 feet below ground surface. Formation samples will be collected at a minimum of 10 -foot intervals and logged geologically throughout the hole. Golder field personnel will be on site during periods of drilling, including: • ! Attendance by the Golder project manager and field staff at a pre -construction meeting with the drilling contractor and the City. .• Periodic site visits during drilling of the first 600 feet, and more frequently during drilling of the production zone below 600 feet depth, to monitor progress and for quality assurance of logging and drilling procedures. Golder field personnel may direct the drilling contractor to stop drilling periodically in order to conduct airlift pumping tests and estimate water production from zones of interest. Assumptions: It is assumed that: • The City will be responsible for staking the well location and conducting a utility locate before drilling starts. • The City will provide inspection of production casing materials. • The level of effort is estimated to provide periodic oversight to a depth of 600 feet below ground surface, increased oversight of drilling through the production zone (e.g., below 600 feet depth). Difficult drilling conditions may require additional oversight that is not included in this scope of work. Deliverables: The following materials will be delivered to the City: • Minutes of the pre -construction meeting. • Field report sheets reporting activities when Golder staff are in the field. • Review and approval of Contractor invoices. Cost: A budget of approximately $21,718 is allocated to this task. Task 102: Geophysical Logging/Cuttings Analysis Purpose: To complement field observations during drilling for use in the identification of the most potentially productive aquifer zones encountered during drilling. Description: Formation samples will be submitted to a geotechnical laboratory for grain size analysis for use in designing the well screen and possible gravel pack (Task 103). A borehole geophysical survey may be conducted in order to identify possible zones of production. If the borehole is drilled open -hole, the geophysical log may include: natural gamma, caliper, resistivity, apparent conductivity, natural conductivity, and spontaneous potential. If the borehole is cased upon the completion of drilling, the geophysical survey may include: full wave sonic, and natural gamma. Deliverables: The results of the geophysical logging and sieve analyses will be provided in a technical memo as part of Task 103 (well design) and incorporated into the final well installation report. Cost: A budget of $15,802 is allocated to this task. Task 103: Well Design Purpose: To design a well screen assembly. Description: The well design may consist of solid casing to a minimum depth of 700 feet in accordance with Ecology requirements. The screen assembly will likely consist of several discrete screened intervals of between approximately 10 and 30 feet in length, separated by sections of solid (blank) casing. Screen slot size will be determined from the soil grain size in the proposed screened intervals, geophysical data and, if used, filter pack specifications. Assumptions: It is assumed that: • The gravel pack will consist of an engineered grain size , distribution and will fill the ;annular space (between the formation and the well screen) estimated to be between two to three inches wide; and, • 'The gravel pack will be installed continuously from the bottom of the solid casing to the ;total depth of the hole (i.e., the full length of the screen assembly). Deliverables: A brief technical memo will be prepared outlining the results of any geophysical logging and the sieve analyses. The memo will include the recommended screen design.and the transmitting capacity of the screen (Task 102). Upon confirmation from the City, Golder will contact the drilling contractor with the specifications of the well screen. The contractor will then order the well screen and gravel pack, if required. Cost: A budget of $6,167 is allocated to this task. Task 104: Screen Install and Development Purpose: To oversee the installation and development of the well screen to ensure that the well is installed according to specifications and that hydraulic connection is established between the well and the aquifer. Description: A Golder hydrogeologist will provide oversight and observation and documentation of the installation of the well screen and filter pack. Upon placement of the well screen and gravel pack, a Golder hydrogeologist will provide limited oversight during the development of the well. Development will proceed until the discharge water is visibly clear of sand, and/or minimal or stable amounts of sand accumulates in the well sump during the development process. Deliverables: Golder will provide the City with a draft as -built of the well completion. The well completion, a geologic log and documentation of field activities will be provided in the report (Task 106). Cost: A budget of $21,135 is allocated to this task. Task 105: Well Testing Purpose: Step -rate and constant -rate pumping tests and water quality analysis of the well will be conducted in order to assess the: • Performance (efficiency and specific capacity) of the well at different pumping rates; • Aquifer hydraulic properties and boundary conditions (transmissivity [T] and storativity [S]); • Groundwater quality during pumping and for Washington Department of Health source approval purposes; and, • Condition of the well upon completion. Description: The step -rate pumping test and a constant -rate pumping test will be performed upon completion of well development. The City will obtain permission and any associated permitting for the discharge of water during pumping tests. The step -rate pumping test will involve an up to eight-hour step -rate pumping test to estimate the optimum pumping rate for the constant rate test. In addition, the step -rate pumping test will provide data necessary to assess the efficiency of the well. The constant rate test will be run for up to 72 hours at rates that may be up to 3,200 gpm. Water level data will be collected with a transducer and datalogger. Water quality field parameters will be measured in the field using a flow-through cell to obtain wellhead measurements of field physical parameters (e.g., pH, pe, conductivity, turbidity). In addition, samples will be collected periodically for laboratory analysis during the test (e.g., after 4, 12, 24, 48 and 72 hours of pumping) for iron and manganese. These analyses will be used to assess changes in water quality during the test. A comprehensive water quality sample will be collected at the end of the test for laboratory analysis for all constituents required for new drinking water source approval by WDOH. During the pumping tests, water levels in up to four observation wells will be monitored and automatically recorded with pressure transducers/data loggers. Water level data at the Airport and Kissel Wells will be collected with transducers and dataloggers already installed (the city will ensure proper calibration and ability to collect the data). Golder will install transducers in the Ahtanum Youth well (Golder will request permission from Ecology) and the Cahalan Well (the City will obtain access from the City of Union Gap; instrumentation will only occur if an access port of adequate size exists at the wellhead). All automated readings will be backed up by limited manual readings using an electronic water level indicator. Water level measurements using the pressure transducers will be collected for one week prior to, and following, testing to document trends in the aquifer. Golder will conduct a video log of the well will after completion of the pumping test and removal of the test pump. Assumptions: It is assumed that: • The budget does not anticipate any pumping equipment breakdowns or allow for repetition of pumping tests. • Discharge of water at rates of up to 3,200 gallons per minute for three days will be a sanitary sewer within 200 feet of the wellhead, and the sanitary sewer is capable of receiving and transmitting the water away from the site. No permits are needed for the discharge of water at this site. • The City will be responsible for the collection of water level data at the Airport and Kissel Wells with transducers and dataloggers that are already installed (the city will ensure proper calibration and ability to collect the data). The City will obtain access for Golder to the City of Union Gap Cahalan Well. • Golder will provide oversight of the initiation and cessation of all pumping cycles, including oversight of the step -rate pumping test, and collection of limited manual water level measurements. The drilling contractor and/or the City will collect supplemental manual water level measurements as back up to the possibility of the failure of automated water level data collection. Deliverables: The results of the pumping tests will be incorporated into a comprehensive report for this project (Task 106). Laboratory and field water quality data will be included in an appendix to this report. Well and aquifer hydraulic parameters will be estimated, and a recommendation will be provided on the production pumping rate and production pump settings. A video of the well log will be provided on a Digital Video Disk. Cost: A budget of $22,928 is allocated to this task. Task 106: Analysis and Reporting Purpose: To document all drilling and testing activities in a single report that will act as a reference for City staff, and to assist in meeting Ecology and DOH permitting requirements. Description: The report will summarize work conducted in this project. Well construction activities will be documented and an as -built of the well will be prepared. A geologic log will be included. The pumping tests will' be analyzed to estimate specific capacity and well efficiency using standard analytical methods. Drawdown in the aquifer and drawdown inside the well due to well constriction techniques (e.g., well efficiency) will be estimated. The analysis will be used to establish the baseline well performance. The baseline well performance can be used to evaluate any changes in well performance during future operations. Water level data from the constant rate test will be used to estimate aquifer properties of transmissivity and storativity. A recommended production pumping rate and estimated dynamic water levels in the well will be provided for use in developing production pump specifications. Deliverables: A well completion report will be prepared documenting the construction and testing of the new well including well construction diagrams, pumping test analyses, and water quality data. The geophysical survey/grain size analysis memo and (Task 103) will be included as appendices to the final report. Two hardcopies and an electronic copy of a draft report will be delivered to the City for review within 30 days of the receipt of final required data (e.g., receipt of laboratory data). The City will provide suggested edits. A phone conference may be held to discuss findings of the report. Golder will incorporate edits/comments from the City into a final report and deliver eight hardcopies and one electronic copy on a compact disk the City within 30 days of resolution of comments. Cost: A budget of $20,209 is allocated to this task. Task 107: Project Management Purpose: To ensure that the project is completed on time and on budget, to coordinate project contracting and subcontracting, and to ensure quality work and good communication with the client and keep the project moving forward. Description: Monthly progress reports will be provided with invoices. Any changes in the project schedule or scope will be summarized, including causes and basis of authorization. More frequent telephone communication will be made on a weekly or as -needed basis. Project expenditures will be tracked internally on a weekly basis. Total budget, expended budget, and remaining budget will be summarized by task in each invoice. Assumptions: No budget is provided for meetings. Deliverables: Progress reports will be submitted with monthly invoices. Memoranda and e- mails as needed. Cost:; A budget of $8,000 is allocated to this task. Task 108: Contingency Purpose: To ensure that the project is completed on time and on budget, to coordinate project A contingency is included in this scope of work to address any items that may be needed but are not included in the above tasks. Possible items may be: • Difficult drilling conditions. • Application to Ecology to allow a screened interval shallower than 700 feet (e.g., if deeper zones are not interpreted to be sufficiently productive). Assumptions: Access to contingency funds will only occur on the explicit authorization of the City. Cost: A budget of $20,000 is allocated to this task. EXHIBIT "B" SUMMARY OF LABOR HOURS AND FEES i Task Hours Labor Overhead Direct Costs Total Cost (US$) Task 101: Production Well Drilling Oversight 167 $17,541 $4,177 $21,718 Task 102: Geophysical Surveys/Cuttings Analysis 58 $5,716 $10,086 $15,802 Task 103: Well Design 51 $5,873 $294 $6,167 Task 104: Screen Install and Development 178 $18,015 $3,120 $21,135 Task 105: Pumping Tests and Water Quality Sampling 123 $12,421 $10,507 $22,928 Task 106: Analysis and Reporting 181 $19,247 $962 $20,209 Task 107: Project Management 59 $9,115 $456 $9,571 Task 108: Contingency - - - $20,000 Total: 816.5 $87,928 $29,601 $137,529 Overhead Direct Costs include communication fee, travel, accommodation, per diem, laboratory, equipment rental, and subcontractors. Laboratory costs, subcontractors and other expenses include a 15% administrative and financial i carrying costs. A 5% communication fee on labor fees includes phone, fax, photocopies & software programs. EXHIBIT "C" SCHEDULE OF RATES FOR GOLDER ASSOCIATES (Through December 31, 2009) Invoices from Golder Associates Inc. include aII labor charges, other direct costs, and costs associated with in-house services. Charges include only those services directly attributable to the execution of the work. Time spent when traveling in the interest of work will be charged in accordance with the hourly rates. An additional 50% will be added to the applicable labor rate for expert testimony, including time spent in depositions and the preparation and presentations of testimony. An additional charge may be assessed when employees are asked to be on an extended assignment away from their home office. Labor charges are based upon standard hourly billing rates for each category of staff. The billing rates include costs for salary, payroll taxes, insurance associated with employment, benefits (including holiday, sick leave, and vacation), administrative overheads, and profit. Rates by labor category are as follows: Personnel Level LA1 LA2 LA3 LT1 LT2 LT3 LD1 LD2 LD3 LV1 LV2 LV3 LV4 LV5 LV6 LV7 LV8 Personnel Category Admin Support Staff Admin Support Senior Admin Support Technician Staff Technician Senior Technician Draftsperson Staff Draftsperson Senior Draftsperson Engineer/Scientist Staff Engineer/Scientist Project Engineer/Scientist Senior Project Engineer/Scientist Senior Engineer/Scientist Senior Consultant Practice/Program Leader Senior Practice/Program Leader Hourly Rate (U.S. $) $50 - $80 $55 - $85 $90-$115 $55 - $75 $80 - $95 $100 - $120 $55 - $75 $80 - $95 $100 - $115 $65 - $110 $85 - $115 $80 - $135 $105 - $175 $120 - $185 $145 - $215 $200 - $225 $230 - $270 Other direct costs, including materials, travel, subsistence, and subcontractor costs, will be invoiced at cost plus a general and administrative fee of 15%. Subconsultant costs will be invoiced at cost plus a general and administrative fee of 10% Office Service Fee: Project non -labor office costs including telephone, fax transmissions, personal computers, and in-house photocopying will be billed at 5% of the total labor fees (this does not include large -volume copying by an external printing facility). This Office Service Fee does not include CAD computers, color photocopies, or drawing reproduction. These services will be billed at the following rates: SERVICE RATE CAD Computers Color Photocopies* Color Plotter (D&E size)* Print Room Labor* $20.00/hour $0.75/page (8.5 x 11) $12.00/plot $45.00 *Additional copy center pricing can be provided upon request Rates for laboratory services and use of equipment owned by Golder Associates Inc. will be provided upon request. AGREEMENT BETWEEN CITY OF YAKIMA, WASHINGTON AND GOLDER ASSOCIATES FOR PROFESSIONAL SERVICES THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into on this ; 0 day of '‘J.6066 , 2008, by and between the City of Yakima, Washington, a municipal corporation with principal offices at 129 North Second Street, Yakima, WA 98901, hereinafter referred to as "CITY", and GOLDER ASSOCIATES, INC., with an office at 18300 NE Union Hill Road, Suite 200, Redmond, WA 98052 and which corporation and its principal engineers performing this Agreement are licensed and registered to do business in the State of Washington, hereinafter referred to as "ENGINEER," for Gardner Park Well Design Services, herein called the "PROJECT." WITNESSETH: RECITALS WHEREAS, CITY desires to retain the ENGINEER to provide engineering services for design and construction of Gardner Park Well Design Services, as described in this Agreement and subsequent Amendments thereto; and WHEREAS, ENGINEER represents that it has available and offers to provide personnel with knowledge and experience necessary to satisfactorily accomplish the work within the required time and that it has no conflicts of interest prohibited by law from entering into this Agreement; NOW, THEREFORE, CITY and ENGINEER agree as follows: SECTION 1 INCORPORATION OF RECITALS 1.1 The above recitals are incorporated into these operative provisions of the Agreement. SECTION 2 SCOPE OF SERVICES 2.0.1 ENGINEER agrees to perform those services described hereafter. Unless modified in writing by both parties, duties of ENGINEER shall not be construed to exceed those services specifically set forth herein. 2.0.2 ENGINEER shall use its best efforts to maintain continuity in personnel and shall assign Chris Pitre, PE, as Project Manager and David Banton as Principal -in -Charge throughout the term of this Agreement unless other personnel are approved by the CITY. 2.1 Basic Services: ENGINEER agrees to perform those tasks described in Exhibit A, entitled "CITY OF YAKIMA — GARDNER PARK WELL PRELIMINARY WORK" (WORK) which is attached hereto and made a part of this Agreement as if fully set forth herein. 2.2 Additional Services: CITY and ENGINEER agree that not all WORK to be performed by ENGINEER can be defined in detail at the time this.Agreement is executed, and that additional WORK related to the Project and not covered in Exhibit A may be needed during performance of this Agreement. CITY may, at any time, by written order, direct the ENGINEER to revise portions of the PROJECT WORK previously completed in a satisfactory manner, delete portions of the PROJECT, or request that the ENGINEER perform additional WORK beyond the scope of the PROJECT WORK. Such changes hereinafter shall be referred to as "Additional Services." 2.2.1 If such Additional Services cause an increase or decrease in the ENGINEER'S cost of, or time required for, performance of any services under this Agreement, a contract price Page 1 and/or completion time adjustment pursuant to this Agreement shall be made and this Agreement shall be modified in writing accordingly. 2.2.2 Compensation for each such request for Additional Services shall be negotiated by the CITY and the ENGINEER according to the provisions set forth in Exhibit B, attached hereto and incorporated herein by this reference, and if so authorized, shall be considered part of the PROJECT WORK. The ENGINEER shall not perform any Additional Services until so authorized by CITY and agreed to by the ENGINEER in writing. 2.3 The ENGINEER must assert any claim for adjustment in writing within thirty (30) days from the date of the ENGINEER's receipt of the written notification of change. SECTION '3 CITY'S RESPONSIBILITIES 3.1 CITY -FURNISHED DATA: The CITY will provide to the ENGINEER all technical data in the CITY'S possession relating to the ENGINEER'S services on the PROJECT including information on any pre-existing conditions known to the CITY that constitute hazardous waste contamination on the PROJECT site as determined by an authorized regulatory agency. 3.2 ACCESS TO FACILITIES AND PROPERTY: The CITY will make its facilities reasonably accessible to ENGINEER as required for ENGINEER'S performance of its services and will provide labor and safety equipment as reasonably required by ENGINEER for such access. 3.3 TIMELY REVIEW: The CITY will examine the ENGINEER'S studies, reports, sketches, drawings, specifications, proposals, and other documents; obtain advice of an attorney, insurance counselor, accountant, auditor, bond and financial advisors, and other consultants as CITY deems appropriate; and render in writing decisions required of CITY in a timely manner. Such examinations and decisions, however, shall not relieve the 'ENGINEER of any contractual obligations nor of its duty to render professional services meeting the standards of care for its profession. 3.4 CITY shall appoint a CITY'S Representative with respect to WORK to be performed under this Agreement. CITY'S Representative shall have complete authority to transmit instructions and receive information. ENGINEER shall be entitled to reasonably rely on such instructions made by the CITY'S Representative unless otherwise directed in writing by the CITY, but ENGINEER shall be responsible for bringing to the attention of the CITY'S Representative any instructions which the ENGINEER believes are inadequate, incomplete, or inaccurate based upon the ENGINEER'S knowledge. 3.5 Any documents, services, and reports provided by the CITY to the ENGINEER are available solely as additional information to the ENGINEER and will not relieve the ENGINEER of its duties and obligations under this Agreement or at law. The ENGINEER shall be entitled to reasonably rely upon the accuracy and the completeness of such documents, services and reports, but shall be responsible for exercising customary professional care in using and reviewing such documents, services, and reports and drawing conclusions therefrom. SECTION 4 AUTHORIZATION, PROGRESS, AND COMPLETION 4.1 In signing this Agreement, CITY grants ENGINEER specific authorization to proceed with WORK described in Exhibit A. The time for completion is defined in Exhibit A, or as amended. SECTION 5 COMPENSATION 5.1 COMPENSATION ON A TIME SPENT BASIS AT SPECIFIC HOURLY RATES: For the services described in Exhibit A, compensation shall be according to Exhibit C - Schedule of Specific Hourly Rates, attached hereto and incorporated herein by this reference, on a time spent basis plus reimbursement for direct non -salary expenses. Page 2 5.1.1 DIRECT NON -SALARY EXPENSES: Direct Non -Salary Expenses are those costs incurred on or directly. for the PROJECT including, but not limited to, necessary transportation costs, including current rates for ENGINEER'S vehicles; meals and lodging; laboratory tests and analyses; printing, binding and reproduction charges; all costs associated with other outside nonprofessional services and facilities; special CITY - requested and PROJECT -related insurance and performance warranty costs; and other similar costs. Reimbursement for Direct Non -Salary Expenses will be on the basis of actual charges plus fifteen percent (15%) and on the basis of current rates when furnished by ENGINEER. Estimated Direct Non -Salary Expenses are shown in Exhibit B. 5.1.1.1 Travel costs, including transportation, lodging, subsistence, and incidental expenses incurred by employees of the ENGINEER and each of the Subconsultants in connection with PROJECT WORK; provided, as follows: • That a maximum of U.S. INTERNAL REVENUE SERVICE allowed cents per mile will be paid for .the operation, maintenance, and depreciation costs of company or individually owned vehicles for that portion of time they are used for PROJECT WORK. ENGINEER, whenever possible, will use the least expensive form of ground transportation. • That reimbursement for meals inclusive of tips shall not exceed a maximum of forty dollars ($40) per day per person. This rate may be adjusted on a yearly basis. • That accommodation shall be at a reasonably priced hotel/motel. • That air travel shall be by coach class, and shall be used only when absolutely necessary. 5.1.2 Telephone charges, computer charges, in-house reproduction charges, first class postage, and FAX charges are not included in the direct expense costs, but are considered included in the Schedule of Specific Hourly Billing Rates. 5.1.3 Professional Subconsultants. Professional Subconsultants are those costs for engineering, architecture, geotechnical services and similar professional services approved by the CITY. Reimbursement for Professional Subconsultants will be on the basis of 1.10 times the actual costs billed by the Professional Subconsultant for services provided to the CITY through this Agreement. Estimated Subconsultant costs are shown in Exhibit B. 5.2 Unless specifically authorized in writing by the CITY, the total budgetary amount for this PROJECT shall not exceed Twenty Nine Thousand Eight Hundred Forty Nine Dollars ($29,849.00). The ENGINEER will make reasonable efforts to complete the WORK within the budget and will keep CITY informed of progress toward that end so that the budget or WORK effort can be adjusted if found necessary. The ENGINEER is not obligated to incur costs beyond the indicated budget, as may be adjusted, nor is the CITY obligated to pay the ENGINEER beyond these limits. When any budget has been increased, the ENGINEER'S excess costs expended prior to such increase will be allowable to the same extent as if such costs had been incurred after the approved increase, and provided that the City was informed in writing at the time such costs were incurred. 5:3 The ENGINEER will use its best efforts to submit to the City's Representative by the tenth (10t) day of each calendar month an invoice for payment for PROJECT services completed through the accounting cut-off day of the previous month. Such invoices shall be for PROJECT services and WORK performed and costs incurred prior to the date of the invoice and not covered by previously submitted invoices. The ENGINEER shall submit with each invoice a summary of time expended on the PROJECT for the current billing period, copies of subconsultant invoices, and any other supporting materials determined by the City necessary to substantiate the costs incurred. CITY will use its best efforts to pay such invoices within thirty (30) days of receipt and upon approval of the WORK done and amount billed. CITY will notify the ENGINEER promptlyif any problems are noted with the invoice. CITY may question any item in an invoice, noting to ENGINEER the questionable item(s) and withholding payment for such item(s). The ENGINEER Page 3 may resubmit such item(s) in a subsequent invoice together with additional supporting information required. 5.4 If payment is not made within sixty (60) days following receipt of approved invoices, interest on the unpaid balance shall accrue beginning with the sixty-first (61) day at the rate of 1.0% per month or the maximum interest rate permitted by law, whichever is less; provided, however, that no interest shall accrue pursuant to Chapter 39.76 RCW when before the date of timely payment a notice of dispute is issued in good faith by the CITY to the ENGINEER pursuant to the terms of RCW 39.76.020(4). 5.5 Final payment of any balance due the ENGINEER for PROJECT services will be made within forty-five (45) days after satisfactory completion of the services required by this Agreement as evidenced by written acceptance by CITY and after such audit or verification as CITY may deem necessary and execution and delivery by the ENGINEER of a release of all known payment claims against CITY arising under or by virtue of this Agreement, other than such payment claims, if any, as may be specifically exempted by the ENGINEER from the operation of the release in stated amounts to be set forth therein. 5.6 Payment for any PROJECT services and WORK shall not constitute a waiver or release by CITY of any claims, right, or remedy it may have against the ENGINEER under this Agreement or by law, nor shall such payment constitute a waiver, remission, or discharge by CITY of any failure or fault of the ENGINEER to satisfactorily perform the PROJECT WORK as required under this Agreement. SECTION 6 • RESPONSIBILITY OF ENGINEER 6.1 The ENGINEER shall be responsible for the professional quality, technical adequacy and accuracy, timely completion, and the coordination of all plans, design, drawings, specifications, reports, and other services fumished by the ENGINEER under this Agreement. The ENGINEER shall, without additional compensation, correct -or review any errors, omissions, or other deficiencies in its plans, designs, drawings, specifications, reports, and other services. The ENGINEER shall perform its WORK according to generally accepted civil engineering standards of care and consistent with achieving the PROJECT WORK within budget, on time, and in compliance with applicable laws, regulations, and permits. 6.2 CITY'S review or approval of, or payment for, any plans, drawings, designs, specifications, reports, and incidental WORK or services furnished hereunder shall not in any way relieve the ENGINEER of responsibility for the technical adequacy, completeness, or accuracy of its WORK and the PROJECT WORK. CITY'S review, approval, or payment for any of the services shall not be construed to operate as a waiver of any rights under this Agreement or at law or any cause of action arising out of the performance of this Agreement. 6.3 In performing WORK and services hereunder, the ENGINEER and its subcontractors, subconsultants, employees, agents, and representatives shall be acting as independent contractors and shall not be deemed or construed to be employees or agents of CITY in any manner whatsoever. The ENGINEER shall not hold itself out as, nor claim to be, an officer or employee of CITY by reason hereof and will not make any claim, demand, or application to or for any right or privilege -applicable to an officer or employee of CITY. The ENGINEER shall be solely responsible for any claims for wages or compensation by ENGINEER employees, agents, and representatives, including subconsultants and subcontractors, and shall save and hold CITY harmless therefrom. 6.4 INDEMNIFICATION: (a) ENGINEER agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the CITY, its elected officials, agents, officers, and employees (hereinafter "parties protected") from (1) claims, demands, liens, lawsuits, administrative and other proceedings, and (2) judgments, awards, losses, liabilities, damages, penalties, fines, costs and expenses (including legal fees, costs, and disbursements) of any kind claimed by third parties arising out of, or related to any death, injury, damage or destruction to any person or Page 4 any property to the extent caused by any negligent act, action, default, error or omission or willful misconduct arising out of the Engineer's performance under this Agreement. In the event that any lien is placed upon the City's property or any of the City's officers, employees or agents as a result of the negligence or willful misconduct of the Engineer, the Engineer shall at once- cause the same to be dissolved and discharged by giving bond or otherwise. (b) CITY agrees to indemnify, defend, and hold the ENGINEER harmless from loss, cost, or expense, including legal fees, of any kind daimed by third parties, including without limitation such Toss, cost, or expense resulting from injuries to persons or damages to property, caused solely by the negligence or willful misconduct of the CITY, its employees, or agents in connection with the PROJECT. (c) If the negligence or willful misconduct of both the ENGINEER and the CITY (or a person identified above for whom each is liable) is a cause of such third party claim, the Toss, cost, or expense shall be shared between the ENGINEER and the CITY in proportion to their relative degrees of negligence or willful misconduct and the right of indemnity will apply for such proportion. 6.5 In any and all claims by an employee of the ENGINEER, any subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligations under this Agreement shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or types of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for the ENGINEER or a subcontractor under workers' or workmens' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. The ENGINEER specifically and expressly waives its immunity under the Industrial Insurance Act, Title 51, RCW. Such waiver has been mutually negotiated by the ENGINEER and the CITY asevidenced by their specific and express initialing of this paragraph. ENGINEER'S INITIALS CITY'S INITIALS 6.6 It is understood that any resident engineering or inspection provided by ENGINEER is for the purpose of determining compliance with the technical provisions of PROJECT specifications and does not constitute any form of guarantee or insurance with respect to the performance of a contractor. ENGINEER does not assume responsibility for methods or appliances used by a contractor, for the safety of construction work, or for compliance by contractors with laws and regulations. CITY shall use its best efforts to ensure that the construction contract requires that the contractor(s) indemnify and name CITY, the CITY'S and the ENGINEER'S officers, principals, employees, agents, representatives, and engineers as additional insureds on contractor's insurance policies covering PROJECT, exclusive of insurance for ENGINEER professional liability. 6.7 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATIONS: In soils, foundation, groundwater, and other subsurface investigations, the actual characteristics may vary significantly between successive test points and sample intervals and at locations other than where observation, exploration, and investigations have been made. Because of the inherent uncertainties in subsurface evaluations, changed or unanticipated underground conditions may occur that could affect total PROJECT cost and/or execution. These conditions and cost/execution effects are not the responsibility of the ENGINEER, to the extent that ENGINEER has exercised the applicable standard of professional care and judgment in such investigations. SECTION 7 PROJECT SCHEDULE AND BUDGET 7.1 The general PROJECT schedule and the budget for both the entire PROJECT and its component tasks shall be as set forth in this Agreement and attachments. The project schedule and performance dates for the individual tasks shall be mutually agreed to by the CITY and the ENGINEER within fifteen (15) days after execution of this Agreement. The•performance dates and budgets for tasks may be modified only upon wntten agreement of the parties hereto. The performance date for tasks and the completion date for the entire PROJECT shall not be extended, nor the budget increased because of any unwarranted delays attributable to the Page 5 ENGINEER, but may be extended or increased by the CITY in the event of a delay caused by special services requested by the CITY or because of unavoidable delay caused by any govemmental action or other conditions beyond the control of the ENGINEER which could not be reasonably anticipated. 7.2 Not later than the tenth day of each calendar month during the performance of the PROJECT, the ENGINEER shall submit to the CITY'S Representative a copy of the current schedule and a written narrative description of the WORK accomplished by the ENGINEER and subconsultants on each task, indicating a good faith estimate of the percentage completion thereof on the last day of the previous month. Additional oral or written reports shall be prepared at the request of the CITY for presentation to other governmental agencies and/or to the public. SECTION 8 REUSE OF DOCUMENTS 8.1 All internal WORK products of the ENGINEER are instruments or service of this PROJECT. There shall be no reuse, change, or alteration by the CITY or others acting through or on behalf of the CITY without written permission of the ENGINEER, which shall not be unreasonably withheld and will be at the CITY's sole risk. The CITY agrees to indemnify the ENGINEER and its officers, employees, subcontractors, and affiliated corporations from all claims, damages, losses, and costs including, but not limited to, litigation expenses and attorney's fees arising out of or related to such unauthorized reuse, change, or alteration; provided, however, that the ENGINEER will not be indemnified for such claims, damages, losses, and costs including, without limitation, litigation expenses and attorney fees where caused by the ENGINEER's own negligent acts or omissions. 8.2 The ENGINEER agrees that ownership of any plans, drawings, designs, specifications, computer programs, technical reports, operating manuals, calculations, notes, and other WORK submitted or which are specified to be delivered under this Agreement or which are developed or produced and paid for under this Agreement, whether or not complete, shall be vested in the CITY. 8.3 All rights to patents, trademarks, copyrights, and trade secrets owned by ENGINEER (hereinafter "Intellectual Property") as well as any modifications, updates or enhancements to said Intellectual Property during the performance of the WORK remain the property of ENGINEER, and ENGINEER does not grant CITY any right or license to such Intellectual Property. SECTION 9 AUDIT AND ACCESS TO RECORDS 9.1 The ENGINEER, including its subconsultants, shall maintain books, records, documents and other evidence directly pertinent to performance of the WORK under this Agreement in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles and practices consistently applied. The CITY or the CITY'S duly authorized representative, shall have access to such books, records, documents, and other evidence for inspection, audit, and copying for a period of three years after completion of the PROJECT. The CITY shall also have access to such books, records, and documents during the performance of the PROJECT WORK, if deemed necessary by the CITY, to verify the ENGINEER'S WORK and invoices. 9.2 Audits conducted pursuant to this section shall be in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards and established procedures and guidelines of the reviewing or auditing agency. 9.3 The ENGINEER agrees to the disclosure of all information and reports resulting from access to records pursuant to this section provided that the ENGINEER is afforded the opportunity for an audit exit conference and an opportunity to comment and submit any supporting documentation on the pertinent portions of the draft audit report and that the final audit report will include written comments, if any, of the ENGINEER. 9.4 The ENGINEER shall ensure that the foregoing paragraphs are included in each subcontract for WORK on the Project. 9.5 Any charges of the ENGINEER paid by the CITY which are found by an audit to be inadequately substantiated shall be reimbursed to the CITY. Page 6 SECTION 10 INSURANCE 10.1 Prior to beginning WORK under this Agreement, the ENGINEER shall provide Certificates of Insurance satisfactory to the CITY as evidence that policies providing the following coverage and limits of insurance are in full force and effect. The CITY and the CITY'S officers, principals, employees, representatives, and agents shall be designated as additional insureds on all such policies except for professional liability and Worker's Compensation. Such insurance shall be primary to the extent covered as additional insureds and other insurance maintained or carried by the CITY shall be separate and distinct and. shall not be contributing with the insurance•listed hereunder. 10.1.1 Commercial general liability insurance, including personal injury liability, blanket contractual liability, and broad -form property damage liability coverage. The combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage shall not be less than one million dollars ($1,000,000) per occurrence/aggregate. 10.1.2. Automobile bodily injury and property damage liability insurance covering owned, non - owned, rented, and hired cars. The combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage shall not be less than one million dollars ($1,000,000) per occurrence. 10.1.3. Statutory workers' compensation and employer's liability insurance as required by state law. 10.1.4. Professional liability insurance. The limit of professional liability insurance coverage shall not be less than one million dollars ($1,000,000) for any one claim and policy aggregate. Failure of either or all of the additional insureds to report a claim under such insurance shall not prejudice the rights of the CITY, its officers, employees, agents, and representatives thereunder. The CITY and the CITY'S officers, principals, employees, representatives, and agents shall have no obligation for payment of premiums because of being named as additional insureds under such insurance. None of the policies issued pursuant to the requirements contained herein shall be canceled, allowed to expire, or changed in any manner that affects the rights of the City until thirty (30) days after written notice to the CITY of such intended cancellation, expiration or change. SECTION 11 SUBCONTRACTS 11.1 ENGINEER shall be entitled, to the extent determined appropriate by ENGINEER, to subcontract any portion of the WORK to be performed under this Agreement. 11.2 Any subconsultants or subcontractors to the ENGINEER utilized on this PROJECT, including any substitutions thereof, will be subject to prior approval by CITY, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld. Each subcontract shall be 'subject to review by the CITY'S Representative, if requested, prior to the subconsultant or subcontractor proceeding with the WORK. Such review shall not constitute an approval as to the legal form or content of such subcontract. The ENGINEER shall be responsible for the architectural and engineering performance, acts, and omissions of all persons and firms performing subcontract WORK. 11.3 CITY does not anticipate ENGINEER subcontracting with any additional persons or firms for the purpose of completing this Agreement. 11.4 The ENGINEER shall submit, along with its monthly invoices, a description of all WORK completed by subconsultants and subcontractors during the preceding month and copies of all invoices thereto. SECTION 12 ASSIGNMENT Page 7 12.1 This Agreement is binding on the heirs, successors and assigns of the parties hereto. This Agreement may not be assigned by CITY or ENGINEER without prior written consent of the other, which consent will not be unreasonably withheld. It is expressly intended and agreed that no third party beneficiaries are created by this Agreement, and that the rights and remedies provided herein shall inure only to the benefit of the parties to this Agreement. SECTION 13 INTEGRATION 13.1 This Agreement represents the entire understanding of CITY and ENGINEER as to those matters contained herein. No prior oral or written understanding shall be of any force, or effect with respect to those matters covered herein. This Agreement may not be modified or altered except in writing signed by both parties. SECTION 14 JURISDICTION AND VENUE 14.1 This Agreement shall be administered and interpreted under the laws of the State of Washington. Jurisdiction of litigation arising from this Agreement shall be in that state. If any part of this Agreement is found to conflict with applicable laws, such part shall be inoperative, null, and void insofar as it conflicts with said laws, but the remainder of this Agreement shall be in full force and effect. Venue of all disputes shall be Yakima County, State of Washington. SECTION 15 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT and NONDISCRIMINATION 15.1 In connection with the Services under this Agreement, ENGINEER agrees to comply with the applicable provisions of State and Federal Equal Employment Opportunity and Nondiscrimination statutes and regulations. SECTION 16 SUSPENSION OF WORK 16.1 CITY may suspend, in writing by certified mail, all or a portion of the WORK under this Agreement if unforeseen circumstances beyond CITY'S control are interfering with normal progress of the WORK. ENGINEER may suspend, in writing by certified mail, all or a portion of the WORK under this Agreement if unforeseen circumstances beyond ENGINEER's control are interfering with normal progress of the WORK. ENGINEER may suspend WORK on PROJECT in the event CITY does not pay invoices when due, except where otherwise provided by this Agreement. The time for completion of the WORK shall be extended by the number of days WORK is suspended. If the period of suspension exceeds ninety (90) days, the terms of this Agreement are subject to renegotiation, .and both parties are granted the option to terminate WORK on the suspended portion of Project in accordance with SECTION 17. SECTION 17 TERMINATION OF WORK 17.1 Either party may terminate this Agreement, in whole or. in part, if the other party materially breaches its obligations under this Agreement and is in default through no fault of the terminating party. However, no such termination may be effected unless the other party is given: (1) not less than fifteen (15) calendar days written notice delivered by certified mail, return receipt requested, of intent to terminate; and (2) an opportunity for consultation and for cure with the terminating party before termination. Notice shall be considered issued within seventy-two (72) hours of mailing by certified mail to the place of business of either party as set forth in this Agreement. 17.2 In addition to termination under subsection 17.1 of this Section, CITY may terminate this Agreement for its convenience, in whole or in part, provided the ENGINEER is given: (1) not Tess than fifteen (15) calendar days written notice delivered by certified mail, return receipt requested, of intent to terminate; and (2) an opportunity for consultation with CITY before termination. 17.3 If CITY terminates for default on the part of the ENGINEER, an adjustment in the contract price pursuant to the Agreement shall be made, but (1) no amount shall be allowed for anticipated profit on unperformed services or other WORK, and (2) any payment due to the ENGINEER at Page 8 the time of termination may be adjusted to the extent of any additional costs or damages CITY has incurred, or is likely to incur, because of the ENGINEERS breach. In such event, CITY shall consider the amount of WORK originally required which was satisfactorily completed to date of termination, whether that WORK is in a form or of a type which is usable and suitable to CITY at the date of termination and the cost to CITY of completing the WORK itself or of employing another firm to complete it. Under no circumstances shall payments made under this provision exceed the contract price. In the event of default, the ENGINEER agrees to pay CITY for any and all damages, costs, and expenses whether directly, indirectly, or consequentially caused by said default. This provision shall not preclude CITY from filing claims and/or commencing litigation to secure compensation for damages incurred beyond that covered by contract retainage or other withheld payments. 17.4 If the ENGINEER terminates for default on the part of CITY or if CITY terminates for convenience, the adjustment pursuant to the Agreement shall include payment for services satisfactorily performed to the date of termination, in addition to termination settlement costs the ENGINEER reasonably incurs relating to commitments which had become firm before the termination, unless CITY determines to assume said commitments. 17.5 Upon receipt of a termination notice under subsections 17.1 or 17.2 above, the ENGINEER shall (1) promptly discontinue all services affected (unless the notice directs otherwise), and (2) deliver or otherwise make available to CITY all originals of data, drawings, specifications, calculations, reports, estimates, summaries, and such other information, documents, and materials as the ENGINEER or its subconsultants may have accumulated or prepared in performing this Agreement, whether completed or in progress, with the ENGINEER retaining copies of the same. 17.6 Upon termination under any subparagraph above, CITY reserves the right to prosecute the WORK to completion utilizing other qualified firms or individuals; provided, the ENGINEER shall have no responsibility to prosecute further WORK thereon. 17.7 If, after termination for failure of the ENGINEER to fulfill contractual obligations, it is determined that the ENGINEER has not so failed, the termination shall be deemed to have been effected for the convenience of CITY. In such event, the adjustment pursuant to the Agreement shall be determined as set forth in subparagraph 17.4 of this Section. 17.8 If, because of death, unavailability or any other occurrence, it becomes impossible for any key personnel employed by the ENGINEER in PROJECT WORK or for any corporate officer of the ENGINEER to render his services to the PROJECT, the ENGINEER shall not be relieved of its obligations to complete performance under this Agreement without the concurrence and written approval of CITY. If CITY agrees to termination of this Agreement under this provision, payment shall be made as set forth in subparagraph 17.3 of this Section. SECTION 18 ARBITRATION 18,1 All claims, counterclaims, disputes, and other matters in question arising out of, or relating to, this AGREEMENT or the breach thereof may be decided by arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association then obtaining. Either CITY or ENGINEER may initiate a request for such arbitration, but consent of the other party to such arbitration shall be a necessary precondition to arbitration. SECTION 19 NOTICE 19.1 Any notice required to be given under the terms of this Agreement shall be directed to the party at the address set forth below. Notice shall be considered issued and effective upon receipt thereof by the addressee -party, or seventy-two hours after mailing by certified mail to the place of business set forth below, whichever is earlier. CITY: City of Yakima • 2301 Fruitvale Boulevard Yakima, WA 98902 Attn: Mr. David Brown, Water and Irrigation Manager Page 9 ENGINEER: Golder Associates, Inc. 18300 NE Union Hill Road, Suite 200 Redmond Washington 98052-3333 Attn: Chris Pitre, Associate, Water Resources IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this agreement to be executed by their respective authorized officers or representatives as of the day and year first above written. CITY OF YAKIMA GOL Signature Punted Name: R.A. Zais, Jr. Title: City Manager Date: /•S '2? Attest /L/a Deborah Moore, City Clerk City Contract No. Resolution No. 2008- 79 R-2008- We ASSOCIS INC. 1: Signature Printed Name: Title: 1►' 1 CZA ��, t l �t`$ vt C:14 Date: /r/.Z C.) C6 Page 10 STATE OF WASHINGTON ) ss. COUNTY OF YAKIMA ) I certify that I know or have satisfactory evidence that R.A. ZAIS, JR. is the person who appeared before me, and said person acknowledged that he signed this instrument, on oath stated that he was authorized to execute the instrument, and acknowledged it as the CITY MANAGER of the CITY OF YAKIMA', to be the free and voluntary act of such party for the uses and purposes mentioned in the instrument. Dated:'/)/ Seal Seal or Stamp //VD4 `/ . Idi4TK//Yrs Printed Name My commission expires: L3—A5--2D/0 Page 11 STATE OF WASHINGTON COUNTY OF ) ss. I certify that I know or have satisfactory evidence that DOUG DUNSTER, is the person who appeared before me, and said person acknowledged that he/she signed this instrument, on oath stated that he/she was authorized to execute the instrument, and acknowledged it as the REDMOND OFFICE MANAGER of Golder Associates to be the free and voluntary act of such party for the uses and purposes mentioned in the instrument. a Dated: ` /0— 7 Seal or Stamp (Sign ure)� cz- / Title 7trr6/ , 2 Printed Naive My commission expires: g/6 Page 12 EXHIBIT A CITY OF YAKIMA - GARDNER PARK WELL PRELIMINARY WORK SCOPE OF WORK During the term of this AGREEMENT, the ENGINEER shall perform professional services in connection with the following project: A scope of work is presented here to prepare a preliminary report in preparation of installing a new well for the City of Yakima at Gardner Park. This scope of work covers the following tasks: Task 1 — Evaluation of Well Site Selection Task 2 — Bid Specifications Task 3 — Review of Drilling Contractor Bids Task 4 — Engineering Design Estimates Task 5 — Pubic Meeting Support Task 6 — Task Project Management Task 7 — Contingency Detailed descriptions of the services to be provided follows. Task 1 — Evaluation of Well Site Selection Purpose: To identify and address outstanding concems associated with the selection of Gardener Park as a well site. Background: Gardner Park has been selected as a site for a new municipal supply well based on regional hydrogeological assessments. A change to water right certificate (GWC 2851-A; G4*04412C; Ranney Well) has been approved. A Determination of Non -Significance (DNS) has been found with respect to the water right change under the State 'Environmental Policy, Act (SEPA). Description: • Review of local well Togs from the Washington Department of Ecology (Ecology) web site to design the completion details of a new well (e.g., well depth) and susceptibility of a new well to contamination. • Contaminant source inventory for wellhead protection purposes. A database search of potential contaminant sources within a one -mile radius of Gardner Park will be commissioned from EDR, Inc., and GIS -based figures will be prepared showing the distribution of these potential contamination sources. • An application for a variance will be submitted to the Yakima Health District for a sanitary set -back less than 100 -foot around the well. Yakima County Health District is responsible for issuing Notice of Intent ("start card") for drilling, including pre -drilling site inspection and approval of sanitary setback variances. The County contact is: Gordon Kelly Yakima Health District 104 North 1st Street, Suite 204 Page 13 Yakima, WA 98901 Ph (509) 575-4040 Fax (509) 575-7894 gordon.kel Ivnco.yakima. wa.us Assumptions: • The City of Yakima will provide air photo coverage for the one -mile radius. around Gardner Park. Alternatively, Golder will obtain available air photo coverage at no cost from the United States Department of Agriculture Farm Bureau (1 -meter color resolution). • The City will conduct any site visit required by the Yakima Health District in relation to a sanitary setback variance. • It is expected that SEPA compliance has been adequately satisfied through the water right change process. Deliverables: A technical memorandum will be prepared compiling the findings of this task, including a request for a sanitary setback variance. Schedule: This work will be completed one month of authorization to proceed. Cost: A budget of approximately $5,700 is allocated to this task. Task 2: Develop Bid Specifications Purpose: To prepare bid specifications for the drilling, installation and testing of a new well. Description: Well installation bid specifications will be developed and terms for the construction work will be determined with consideration to the hydrogeologic setting of the Gardner Park site. Specifications will include drilling, installation and development of the well, pumping tests, and restoration of the site to pre -construction conditions. The pumping test will include a step test to determine well performance and a 72 -hour constant -rate pumping test for the assessment of aquifer parameters, sustainable yield, and collection of water quality samples. Specifications will conform to Ecology requirements and to AWWA standards for well construction and testing, and will address possible flowing artesian conditions that may be encountered. Assumptions: • The City will provide a template for municipal construction bidding. • The intent is to install a well with a production capacity of up to 3,000 gallons per minute (gpm), subject to field conditions and aquifer properties encountered during drilling. • The well will be approximately 1,000 feet deep (subject to final design). • A nominal production casing diameter will be 20 inches, and the screen assembly will be 16 inches diameter (subject to final design). • The City will advertise and provide copies of the bid package to interested bidders. • The City will specify how water from the pumping tests will be conveyed away from the site (e.g., storm or sanitary sewer; the well may produce yields in excess of 3,000 gpm). • No permit is required for the discharge of pumping test water. Page 14 Deliverables: A draft copy of the. bid specifications will be provided to the City for review. A phone conference will be held between the City and Golder to discuss modifications of the draft for the final set of bid specifications. Comments will be incorporated into a final bid package. Golder will deliver 20 hardcopies and one electronic copy to the City. A senior Golder person will attend a pre-bid conference. Schedule: A draft bid package will be submitted to the City for review within two months of authorization to proceed. This schedule is subject to timely determination of means of conveying pumping test discharge water away from the site and approval of the sanitary setback variance. Cost: A budget of approximately $7,400 is allocated to this task. Task 3: Review Drilling Contractor Bids Purpose: To review bids for the well drilling, construction and testing of the well and to provide a recommendation to the City. Description: Golder will collect the submittal packages from the City and summarize each submittal for comparison. Golder will present the City with a comparative analysis of the bids. Assumptions: • The City will coordinate collection of bid submittals and deliver the bid packages to Golder for review. • Gathering additional information from bidders and/or response to protests are not included in this task. • The City will contact the selected bidder. Deliverables: A technical memorandum summarizing and comparing the bid packets will be delivered to the City for review. Schedule: A technical memorandum will be issued within two weeks of receiving complete bid submittals from the City. Cost: A budget of approximately $1,400 is allocated to this task. Task 4 — Engineering Design Cost Estimates Purpose: To develop cost estimates for the engineering and design services,required for constructing the Gardner Park Well in Yakima, Washington. These costs will be developed for City of Yakima planning services. The construction and capital costs for the Gardner Park Well have been estimated by the City of Yakima through the Public Works Trust Fund contract. Description: The engineering and design services estimate will include a detailed scope of work and level of effort for developing the designs (engineering and electrical) for the new Gardner Park Well. The design will include: • Well house designand layout. This design will include local park restrooms and drinking fountains as requested by the City. The well house design will also consider security (lighting and fencing) and anti -vandal design elements. Page 15 • Wellhead, pump/motor, piping and appurtenance design. Design components include: o Pump, motor, VFD and motor control system, o ASR bypass piping as applicable, o Flow meters and valves, o Waste discharge system, o Water treatment systems per City requirements (chlorine and fluoride), and o Connection to the distribution system. • Telemetry/Electrical design for the connection of the new well to the City of Yakima telemetry system. Design to be prepared by a sub -contractor to Golder. Department of Health approval and other necessary state and local permitting services specific to pipes and pumps will also be provided. Department of Ecology and/or National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permits may be required for the operational waste discharge system. We will coordinate local permits with the City, including building and plumbing permits. If requested by the City, additional services can be included within this work including hydraulic analyses, near -well distribution system upgrades as needed, and water system plan updates. Assumptions: This task assumes that information regarding the existing system is readily available from the City, including CAD/GIS coverage and existing system hydraulic analyses. Additionally, any specifications and standard details to be used in the design will be provided by the City. Deliverable: The design cost estimates will be prepared as a detailed Scope of Work and associated budget. Schedule: A draft of the design SOW and cost estimates will be provided to the City in June 2008. The final SOW and cost estimates will be provided in August 2008. Budget: A budget of $4,000 is allocated to this task. Task 5: Public meeting Support Purpose: To support city staff in public outreach to neighbors of the Gardner Park well site. Description: A short Power Point presentation will be prepared describing construction and operation activities associated with the new well. Golder will attend two public meetings. Deliverables: A Power Point presentation and attendance at two public meetings. Cost: A budget of approximately $4,100 is allocated to this task. Task 6: Project Management Purpose: To ensure that the project is completed on time and on budget, to coordinate project tasks, and to ensure quality work and good communication with the City and keep the project Page 16 moving forward. To prepare responses to unforeseen events within the limitations of the allocated budget. Description: Monthly progress reports will be provided with invoices. Any changes in the project schedule or scope will be surrimarized, including causes and basis of authorization. More frequent telephone communication will.be made on a weekly or as -needed basis. Project expenditures will be tracked internally on a weekly basis. Total budget, expended budget, and remaining budget will be summarized by task in each invoice. Deliverables: Progress reports will be submitted with monthly invoices. Cost: A budget of approximately $2,200 is allocated to this task. Task 6: Contingency Purpose: To provide responsive service to unforeseen needs. Description: Golder will conduct work that is not contained within Tasks 1-5 of this scope of work at the direction of the City of Yakima within the limits of the allocated budget. Deliverables: To be determined at time of assignment. Cost: A budget of approximately $5,000 is allocated to this task. BUDGET SUMMARY A detailed itemization of costs are presented in an attached table, and are summarized below. Summary Budget Task Budget Task 1 - Evaluation of Well Site Selection $5,712 Task 2 — Bid Specifications $7,418 Task 3 —Review Contractor Bids $1,362 Task 4 — Engineering Design Estimates $4,066 Task 5 — Public Meeting Support $4,084 Task 6 — Project Management $2,207 Task 6 — Contingency $5,000 Total $29,849 Page 17 Gardner Well Preliminary Work City of Yakima By: CVP/CC 983-1268-300 May 72, 2008 EXHIBIT B Professional Fees GOLDER FEE ESTIMATE Phase 1 - Gardner Well TASK Principal Associate Senior Engr Project Engr Field Engr GIS/CAD Graphics Clerical Total Hours Labor Expenses (note) Cost/ Task Sub -Tasks DB CVP/CS CC EA Rate/hr ($$) $180 $160 $140 $105 $85 $80 $60 Task 1 —Well Site Evaluation 2 8 32 4 1 47 $4,740 $972 $5,712 Task 2 — Specifications 2 16 40 4 2 64 $6,760 $658 $7,418 Task 3 —Review Contractor Bids 1 2 8 1 12 $1,240 $122 $1,362 Task 4 — Engineering Design 1 10 20 1 32 $3,720 $346 $4,066 Task 5 - Public Meeting Support 20 4 1 25 $3,580 $504 $4,084 Task 6 — Project Management 1 8 2 2 2 15 $2,030 $177 $2,207 Task 7. — Contingency $5,000 Total Cost Phase 1: $ 29,849 Note: Expenses include 5% office fee and $10fhr computer charges for half of the labor hours, and rental car for public meetings. Page 18 1 EXHIBIT "C" SCHEDULE OF RATES FOR GOLDER ASSOCIATES (January 1, 2008, Through December 31, 2008) Invoices from Golder Associates Inc. include all labor charges, other direct costs, and costs associated with in-house services. Charges include only those services directly attributable to the execution of the work. Time spent when traveling in the interest of work will be charged in accordance with the hourly rates. An additional 50% will be added to the applicable labor rate for expert testimony, including time spent in depositions and the preparation and presentations of testimony. An additional charge may be assessed when employees are asked to be on an extended assignment away from their home office. Labor charges are based upon standard hourly billing rates for each category of staff. The billing rates include costs for salary, payroll taxes, insurance associated with employment, benefits (including holiday, sick leave, and vacation), administrative overheads, and profit. Rates by labor category are as follows: Personnel Personnel Level LA1 LA2 LA3 LT1 LT2 LT3 LD1 LD2 LD3 LV1 LV2 LV3 LV4 LV5 LV6 LV7 LV8 Category Admin Support Staff Admin Support Senior Admin Support Technician Staff Technician Senior Technician Draftsperson Staff Draftsperson Senior Draftsperson Engineer/Scientist Staff Engineer/Scientist Project Engineer/Scientist Senior Project Engineer/Scientist Senior Engineer/Scientist Senior Consultant Practice/Program Leader Senior Practice/Program Leader Hourly Rate (U.S. $) $50 - $80 $55 - $85 $90-$115 $55 - $75 $80 - $95 $100 - $120 $55 - $75 $80 - $95 $100 - $115 $65 - $110 $85 - $115 $80 - $135 $105 - $175 $120 - $185 $145 - $215 $200 - $225 $230 - $270 Other direct costs, including materials, travel, subsistence, and subcontractor costs, will be invoiced at cost plus a minimum general and administrative fee of 15%. Office Service Fee: Project non -labor office costs including telephone, fax transmissions, personal computers, and in-house photocopying will be billed at 5% of the total labor fees (this does not include large -volume copying by an extemal printing facility). This Office Service Fee does not include CAD computers, color photocopies, or drawing reproduction. These services will be billed at the following rates: SERVICE RATE CAD Computers Color Photocopies* Color Plotter (D&E size)* Print Room Labor* $20.00/hour $0.75/page (8.5 x 11) $12.00/plot $45.00 *Additional copy center pricing can be provided upon request. Rates for laboratory services and use of equipment owned by Golder Associates Inc. will be provided upon request. Page 19 AGREEMENT FOR PROFESSIONAL SERVICES ADDENDUM NO. 1 This Addendum, hereinafter identified as Addendum No. 1, is hereby entered into and made a part of the Agreement between City of Yakima, Washington, and Golder Associates, for Professional Services first entered into on the Second day of December, 2008 by the CITY OF YAKIMA, hereinafter called the "CITY," and GOLDER ASSOCIATES, hereinafter called the "ENGINEER." WITNESSETH: That in consideration of the mutual covenants and agreements herein contained, the parties hereto do mutually agree to amend, revise, and/or add the following to the referenced Agreement: SECTION 2 - SCOPE OF SERVICES 2.1 Basic Services: ENGINEER agrees to perform additional work tasks described in the attached Addendum No. 1 Exhibit A: Design of the Gardner Park Well Pump House - Engineering Design and Construction Oversight. SECTION 5 — COMPENSATION 5.1 COMPENSATION ON A TIME SPENT BASIS AT SPECIFIC HOURLY RATES For the services described in the attached Addendum No. 1 Exhibit A, compensation shall be on a time spent plus expenses basis with estimated fees shown on the attached Addendum No. 1. Exhibit B at the ENGINEER's normal hourly billing rates shown on Exhibit C of the original agreement. IN WITNESS WHER iOF the parties hereto duly enter into and execute this Addendum No. 1, as of this �f VV day of 4 g , 2009. CITY OF YAKIMA Signature Printed Name: R. A. Zais, Jr. Title. City Manager City Clerk City Contract No. 2008-12 Resolution No. R-2008-87 Printed Name: Doug Dunster Title: Managing Principal Date: /2-00) May 29, 2009 1 983-1268.400 Addendum No. 1 to City of Yakima Contract 2008-124 Exhibit A Engineering Design and Construction Oversight for the Gardner Park Well SCOPE OF WORK Presented is a Scope of Work for Golder Associates Inc (Golder) to provide engineering design and construction oversight to connect the new Gardner Well to the City of Yakima's (City) distribution system. The Gardner Well has recently been installed and tested by Golder, and is capable of providing 3,000 gpm. This well will be connected to the distribution main on Cornell Avenue, a portion of which will be upsized to provide higher flows. A budget summary is provided below, and additional budget itemization is provided in Exhibit B. Task Cost Task 301: Pump and Motor Design $9,461 Task 302 Well House Design $41,037 Task 303: Electrical Design/Coordination $49,908 Task 304 Documentation for DOH Approval $11,701 Task 305. Construction Observation $24,605 Task 306- Project Management $10,876 TOTAL: $147,588 This work is authonzed as an addendum to, and conducted according to, City Contract 2008-124, Resolution No R-2008-87, signed by the City of Yakima on November 18, 2008, and signed by Golder Associates Inc on December 2, 2008. Tasks were developed in consultation with the City of Yakima (City). A more detailed fee estimate for each task is provided Exhibit B. Budget may be reallocated among tasks as long as the total authonzed budget is not exceeded. The City has submitted an application for an Aquifer Storage and Recovery (ASR) permit. Candidate wells that may be part of an ASR program include the Kissel, Gardner and other wells The Kissel Well has already been retrofitted to accommodate recharge. Engineering design of the Gardner Well will include valving and bypass plumbing to allow recharge from the distribution system into the well. Task 301— Pump and Wellhead Design Working with the City, and using information gained from pumping tests (e.g., well yield, drawdown) and system information (e.g., system pressure, pipe sizes, etc.), Golder will recommend a pumping system that integrates the well into the City's existing drinking water system and operations. The pumping system will include a pump, motor, variable frequency golder yakima engineering sow 052909 Mav 29, 2009 2 983-1268.400 dnve (VFD), and motor control system. The City would like a submersible pump to reduce motor noise and heat. Golder will coordinate with our electrical engineering consultant, Conley Engineering, to ensure these components will interface with the City's existing telemetry and SCADA system Assumptions: System pressure information will be provided by the City to Golder prior to starting this task. A hydraulic analysis of the entire system is not included in this scope of work, but can be performed upon request and agreement of appropriate budget. - A submersible pump will be used. Deliverable: Pump and motor system specifications, to be included in design package (see Task 302) Task 302: Well House Design and Connection to Distribution System This task includes the engineering design of a building to house the new well and the piping necessary to connect the well to the distribution system. Specific scope items include • Well house design and layout. The well house building will house the wellhead and piping appurtenances The well house design will include ventilation, security (lighting and fencing), and anti -vandal design elements such as graffiti -resistant exterior building coatings. As discussed with the City, the well house will consist of a pre-engineered concrete masonry block building. Golder will work with the supplier of the pre- engineered building, who will supply design drawings and installation details The well house design drawings will be provided as a separate package to the engineering design. Additional site improvements such as parking and stormwater management are not included in this task. o The building may need additional sound proofing if a submersible pump is not used (see Task 301) Design of sound -proofing is not included in this scope of work based on the assumption that a submersible pump will be used. o Details of a water supply line at the well house to allow truck fill (backflow preventor, etc ) • Piping and appurtenance design. Golder will prepare the design for the hydraulic connection of the new well to the distribution system. The design will be provided to the City in engineering plan sets, including drawings and specifications. Design components include o ASR bypass piping with necessary appurtenances and the ability to connect to the telemetry system. o Appurtenances that meet DOH requirements including flow meters, valves, check valves, pressure sensors/switches and other hydraulic controls and instrumentation as necessary golden yakima engineering sow 052909 May 29, 2009 3 983-1268.400 o Waste discharge system which will discharge to the sanitary sewer o Water treatment systems, per the City's expressed preference — Acu-Tab Chlonne system provided by Correct Equipment, and a package type sodium fluonde feed system o Connection to the main in Cornell Avenue Currently, the main is 8 -inches in diameter However, a portion of the main (approximately 50 to 75 feet) will be increased to 12 -inches or 16 -inches to provide 3,000 gpm along Cornell Avenue and Pierce Street. o Pad for the standby generator, if required. • Review coordination with the City. Golder will coordinate with the City regarding review of the engineering plan sets. Review comments are assumed to be transmitted electronically, or verbally dunng teleconferences between Golder and the City. Assumptions: - This task assumes information regarding the existing system will be provided by the City, including CAD/GIS coverage and existing system pressures The City's EPANET model will be provided to Golder to determine the increased size of the main in Cornell Avenue to deliver 3,000 gpm to Pierce Street and Washington Avenue We assume there will be no other changes to the hydraulic model or system operation. - Any specifications and standard details to be used in the design will be provided by the City before Golder starts design work. - Bid and contract templates will be provided by the City. Deliverables: Two (2) hard copies of the engineering plan set including drawings and technical specifications. Plan sets will be submitted at 60% design, 90% design, and 100% (Final) design. Drawings will be submitted as half-size (11" x 17") Task 303: Electrical/SCADA/Telemetry Specifications This task includes design of the control systems to operate the new well. Specific project tasks to be completed include: 1. Preparation of electncal plan drawings, diagrams, and details format for Design Construction Documents for a new well house. 2. Provide technical specifications and design drawings in AutoCAD 2008 for the installation of a new well pump motor, and VFD controller estimated at 300 hp Technical specifications and design drawings will include instrumentation, controls, telemetry and protective equipment. Controls will allow for remote and local (manual) control of the pump. Local instrumentation will include as a minimum the following. a. Hand/Off/Auto (HOA) pump selector switch. b Voltage and amperage readouts. c Hour meter d. Discharge pressure readout. e Well water level readout. golder yakima engineering sow 052909 Mav 29, 2009 4 983-1268.400 f. Well flow readout. 3 Preparation of electrical specifications 4 Coordination with Pacific Power, City of Yakima and Golder regarding the location of electrical services(s) for project components including new domestic well pump and pump house. Recommended electrical service entrance requirements. 5 Evaluation of energy incentives/rebates from Pacific Power 6. Evaluation of Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) options and associated communications protocols, and make recommendations and design one selected option. 7. Determine standby power generator requirements for the new domestic water well pump and, if elected by the City, include a standby engine generator in the electrical design. 8. Design to include telemetry system from the new well to the existing water treatment plant. Also to include testing of potential radio paths between the well and the existing repeater/plant site with preparation of a summary letter report describing the results of that testing. 9. Preparation of design documents for the new telemetry system that can be used for bidding or to obtain quotes for purchase and installation of the telemetry equipment. (These documents can be divided into separate purchase and installation packages ) 10. Provide engineer's projection of the electrical construction costs 11 Programming for the new telemetry system PLC, and OI (Operator Interface) Programming will be based on control algorithms developed in conjunction with the City. Programming modifications to the City's existing Human Machine Interface will be similar to that of existing wells and will include the following functionality a. Power failure b RTU communications failure c. Well pump ready (HOA switch in Auto) d. Well pump running/failed. e. Well flow f. Well discharge pressure g. Well water level/low level alarm with low water level pump cut-out. h. Smoke/Heat alarm. i Chlorination failure 12. Construction administration including submittal review, answering contractor technical questions, periodic observation of construction, review of payment requests and electrical punch list/closeout. 13 Provide electrical record (as -built) drawings in electronic and paper form based on red line drawings provided by the Contractor 14. Traimng and support for the telemetry system including initial operator training, O&M manual, follow-up training, and ongoing support for one year. Deliverables: Electrical Design to be submitted within the engineering plan set at 60%, 90% and 100% submittals (Task 302) golder yakima engineering sow 052909 May 29, 2009 5 983-1268.400 Task 304: Documentation for DOH Source Approval and Permitting This task includes packaging and submitting the required documentation to the Dnnking Water Eastern Regional Office of Washington State Department of Health (DOH) to receive source approval. Specific scope items include. • Provide DOH with well construction data (e.g., well construction details and water quality results) • Provide a Construction Documents Package for DOH which includes a Project Report, Project Approval Application, Water Rights Self -Assessment form, engineering calculations, and final design drawings and specifications Assumptions: The Contractor will obtain all required local permits (building, plumbing, etc.). Additionally, it is assumed that Department of Ecology and/or National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permits will not be required for the waste discharge from the Gardner Well, based on discussions with the City. Deliverables: Two (2) copies of Well Construction Data and two (2) complete sets of Construction Documents both to DOH and the City and supporting documentation (if needed) for permit support, within the limitations of available budget. Task 305: Construction Support Services and As -Built Documentation Golder will provide bidding and construction support services to the City. Golder will prepare bid documents (using City template bid documents) and assist the City in reviewing the bids Golder will also review and respond to Contractor's submittals. Field visits will be performed to ensure that construction is progressing in accordance with engineering drawings and specifications. This task assumes two visits dunng construction and a final visit to inspect the system and prepare as -built drawings Assumptions: - Bid document templates will be provided by the City - Any additional oversight required will be provided by City staff. Deliverables: Submittal response forms, provided electronically to the City and the Contractor for all submittals. Two (2) copies of half-size as -built (record) drawings to the City as well as electronic versions provided on compact disk. Task 306 — Project Management This task includes time to manage the project and coordinate with the City to ensure a successful project, completed on-time and on -budget. Any changes in project schedule or scope will be communicated to the City. Monthly progress reports will be submitted with invoices Additionally, this task includes time for two meetings with the City, as needed. golder yakima engineering sow 052909 May 29, 2009 6 983-1268.400 Deliverables: Monthly progress reports will be submitted with invoices. SCHEDULE Work will proceed immediately upon receipt of authonzation and all required information. We estimate that the 60% design will be completed within 12 weeks The 90% design should be complete within 8 weeks after receipt of review comments from the City on the 60% design. The final (100%) design will be completed within 4 weeks after the receipt of 90% review comments from the City The DOH Construction Documents package will be completed approximately at the same time as the final design package. Once submitted to DOH, review time takes a minimum of 90 days, and response and implementation of comments can take up to several weeks, depending on the level of effort needed to address DOH comments The anticipated project schedule is Anticipated Project Schedule (mid-June 2009 start date assumed) Milestone Date 60% Design September 2009 City Review October 2009 90% Design December 2009 City Review January 2010 100% Design February 2010 DOH & City Review May 2010 Bid Solicitation June 2010 Contractor Selection July 2010 Start of Construction August 2010 Completion of Construction November 2010 golder yakima engineering sow 052909 May 29, 2009 7 983-1268.400 EXHIBIT B SUMMARY OF ESTIMATED LABOR HOURS AND FEES Task Labor Hours Labor Cost ODC Cost2'3'4 Total Cost Task 301 Pump and Motor Design 76 $9,010 $451 $9,461 Task 302: Well House Design 340 $38,892 $2,145 $41,037 Task 303: Electrical Design/Coordination' 32 $3,722 $46,186 $49,908 Task 304- Documentation for DOH Approval 98 $11,144 $557 $11,701 Task 305 Construction Oversight 194 $22,422 $2,183 $24,605 Task 306. Project Management 73 $10,027 $849 $10,876 TOTAL: 813 $95,217 $52,371 $147,588 1. Includes $40,000 for electrical sub -consultant. 2. Overhead Direct Costs (ODCs) include communication fee, laboratory and equipment rental. 3. 5% communication fee on labor fees includes phone, fax, copying, etc. 4 15% handling and B&O tax on laboratory, subconsultants, and other services and expenses. golder vakima engineering sow 052909 Addendum No. 2 - Exhibit A: Scope of Work for Architectural/StructuralMechanical Design and Related Services for the Gardner Park Well This Scope of Work includes the tasks that Golder Associates Inc. (Golder) will conduct for the architectural and structural design of the well house for the Gardner Well for the City of Yakima (City). Per our original SOW, the well house building was assumed to be a pre-engineered CMU building, with drawings and engineering provided by the building supplier. Per discussions with the City, Golder will now provide the building design. This Addendum No. 2 SOW includes this design as discussed with the City as well as additional optional subtasks. This supplemental Gardner Park Well work is authorized as an addendum to, and conducted according to, City Contract 2008-124, Resolution No. R-2008-87, originally signed by the City of Yakima on November 18, 2008, and signed Golder Associates Inc. on December 2, 2008. A fee estimate for Addendum No. 2 is provided in a table, Exhibit B, at the end of this scope of work, including a breakdown by optional subtask. Task 307 — Well House Architectural and Structural Design This task includes several sub -tasks to be evaluated and accepted/denied per the City's direction. Subtask A — Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Design Documents This task includes the architectural. structural and related building mechanical engineering (i.e.: HVAC) design services for the Gardner Park well house. A slab -on -grade, single story concrete masonry block (CMU) building with the anti -graffiti sealer (already specified) is the preferred and most economical solution for the City. This well house will be approximately 900 square feet with an anticipated building cost range of $150 to $180 per square foot. We anticipate using CMU for both exterior and interior walls with a sloped metal roof to help visually connect the building to other City well houses. This design will include standard elements to dampen the sound of the pump motor; however, a sub -task is included for a separate acoustical analysis, design and recommendations. Optional Subtask B — Bidding, Construction Admin and Project Closeout This task includes the additional time necessary to address bidding and submittal review for architectural, structural and HVAC components of the well house. This includes: responding to contractor questions during the bidding period, reviewing/approving requested product substitutions prior to bid, issuing addenda items, assisting with preconstruction conference, responding to contractor questions during construction, reviewing/approving contractor submittals, shop drawings and substation requests, reviewing change order proposals, and providing the project punch -list. Additionally, this task includes two project meetings - one during design and one during construction. Prior experiences attest to the value of meeting with the authority of jurisdiction/permitting agency during the design process to review the design to address any concerns they may have regarding the project — and to address those concerns - prior to contractor award. This task also includes one site visit during construction, which we anticipate would be during the installation of the roof. Optional Subtask D — Acoustical Design and Soundproofmg Recommendations The original SOW did not include tasks or budget for soundproofing design since it was assumed the well pump would be submersible. However, due to the required vertical turbine pump, soundproofing elements are recommended. The architectural design (Subtask A) will include sound attenuating elements, such as higher gauge doors and placement/selection of louvers. However, per conversations with the building supplier used in the previous design submittals, it has been brought to our attention that the structure may require an acoustical analysis and design to ensure the building and components reduce sound levels to acceptable levels. This optional subtask includes budget to perform the analysis and develop additional recommendations and a report for the City. This analysis could be performed at the approximate 30 to 60% design level and recommendations implemented prior to the finalization of the design. Task 307 Assumptions: This SOW assumes the overall building layout and design will be unchanged from the footprint previously developed. Additional analyses, specific for this architectural design, are not included in this scope or fee and existing information will be used in the design.1 Deliverables: Golder anticipates submitting electronic plan sets (11x17) from the architect and structural engineers to the City. Two submittals are anticipated: a draft set to the City for review and comment and a final set for bidding and construction. SCHEDULE We will start work immediately upon receipt of notice to proceed. We anticipate on completing the draft design within 3 weeks of notice to proceed. The final design is anticipated to be complete within 3 weeks of receipt of comments from the City. EXHIBIT B SUMMARY OF ESTIMATED FEES FOR SUB -TASKS ASSOCIATED WITH TASK 307 Task Total Cost Architectural Design and Construction Documents $12,700 Optional Subtask B - Architectural/Structural/HVAC Construction Admin Services $4,890 Optional Subtask D - Acoustical Engineering Analysis and Recommendations $3,680 1. Task includes SI 1.400 for architectural and stnietural suh-consultant 2. Construction Admin fees are those fees incurred directly by the architect and structural sub - consultant. Golder construction admin fees for this project are already included in the existing SOW and agreement with the City. 3. Overhead Direct Costs (ODCs) include communication fee, laboratory and equipment rental. 4. 5% communication fee on labor fees includes phone, fax and black and white photocopies. 5. Laboratory costs, subconsultants, and other expenses include a 15% mark up. This addendum SOW assumes the information available for the architectural design is the same as used for the original engineering design SOW and additional analyses such as geotechnical analysis, civil engineering, surveying, material testing and special inspections are not required. Information developed in the engineering design, such as the electrical design, will be incorporated into the architectural design. AGREEMENT FOR PROFESSIONAL SERVICES ADDENDUM NO. 2 This Addendum, hereinafter identified as Addendum No. 2, is hereby entered into and made a part of the Agreement between City of Yakima, Washington, and Golder Associates, for Professional Services first entered into on the Second day of December, 2008 by the CITY OF YAKIMA, hereinafter called the "CITY," and GOLDER ASSOCIATES, hereinafter called the "ENGINEER." WITNESSETH: That in consideration of the mutual covenants and agreements herein contained, the parties hereto do mutually agree to amend, revise, and/or add the following to the referenced Agreement: SECTION 2 - SCOPE OF SERVICES 2.1 Basic Services: ENGINEER agrees to perform additional work tasks described in the attached Addendum No. 2 Exhibit A: Scope of Work for Architectural/Structural/Mechanical Design and Related Services for the Gardner Park Well. SECTION 5 — COMPENSATION 5.1 COMPENSATION ON A TIME SPENT BASIS AT SPECIFIC HOURLY RATES: For the services described in the attached Addendum No. 2 Exhibit A, compensation shall be on a time spent plus expenses basis with estimated fees shown on the attached Addendum No. 2. Exhibit B at the ENGINEER's normal hourly billing rates shown on Exhibit C of the original agreement. IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto duly enter into and execute this Addendum No. 1, as of this / > day of 4-p,' ) , 2.189 20i0. CITY OF YAKIMA Golder Associates. Signat +a ()Ave_ Printed Name: ! -Zais, Jr. Title: City Manager Date: Attest 7 City Clerk City Contract No. 2008-124 Resolution No. R-2008-87 Signature Printed NameF Mike Brown Title: Managing Principal Date: hz//0 AGREEMENT FOR PROFESSIONAL SERVICES ADDENDUM NO. 3 This Addendum, hereinafter identified as Addendum No. 3, is hereby entered into and made a part of the Agreement between City of Yakima, Washington, and Golder Associates, for Professional Services first entered into on the Second day of December, 2008 by the CITY OF YAKIMA, hereinafter called the "CITY," and GOLDER ASSOCIATES, hereinafter called the "ENGINEER." WITNESSETH: That in consideration of the mutual covenants and agreements herein contained, the parties hereto do mutually agree to amend, revise, and/or add the following to the referenced Agreement SECTION 2 - SCOPE OF SERVICES 2.1 Basic Services: ENGINEER agrees to perform additional work tasks described in the attached Addendum No. 3 Exhibit A: Task 305 Budget Extension for the Gardner Park Well. SECTION 5 — COMPENSATION 5.1 COMPENSATION ON A TIME SPENT BASIS AT SPECIFIC HOURLY RATES: For the services described in the attached Addendum No. 3 Exhibit A, compensation shall be on a time spent plus expenses basis with estimated fees shown on the attached Addendum No. 3 Exhibit B at the ENGINEER's normal hourly billing rates shown on Exhibit C of the original agreement. IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto duly enter into and execute this Addendum No. Y, as of this 1271 day of 4/7121 , 2011. . CITY OF YAKIMA Golder Associates, Inc. Printed Name: R. A. Zais, Jr. Title: City Manager Date: 46//21 if Attest City Clerk City Contract No. 2008-124 Resolution No. R-2008-87 Signature _prlicinted Name: Michael L. Brown Title: Managing Principal - Date: /5•"—//!' Addendum No. 3 Exhibit A: Task 305 Budget Extension for the Gardner Park Well Addendum No. 3 expands the budget and scope for "Task 305: Construction Observation" as part of the on-going engineering support provided by Golder Associates Inc. (Golder) to connect the Gardner Well to the City of Yakima's (City) distribution system. Task 305, as approved in the original contract, included the bid document preparation, bidding support, and construction support. However, as previously discussed with the City, the effort to complete this task was underestimated. Additionally, the construction of the well house requires additional oversight than originally scoped (pre - manufactured structure). The scope has been expanded to include additional coordination time during construction. The remaining approved budget available is approximately $1,500. We are aware that the City is proceeding to the construction phase and we are requesting approval for the budget extension and additional scope. Exhibit C provides the fee estimate associated with the addendum described below. This supplemental work is authorized as an addendum to, and conducted according to, City Contract 2008-124, Resolution No. R-2008-87, originally signed by the City of Yakima on November 18, 2008, and signed by Golder Associates Inc. on December 2, 2008. The scope of work detailed below describes the effort required to complete the associated tasks with Task 305, as follows: Construction Administration: This task includes time for responding to contractor questions, reviewing/approving contractor submittals, shop drawings and substitution requests, and reviewing change order proposals. Golder expanded the scope to include additional coordination time with the electrical engineer and architect and our participation in the preconstruction conference. Construction Execution: This task includes a total of five (5) field visits. Three field visits will occur during construction milestones including pump installation and building plumbing. An additional field visit will be performed for the (4) pre -startup visit to develop the punch list, as well as the (5) actual system startup visit. The budget for field visits includes time for preparing our health and safety plan (a requirement for Golder projects), travelling, completing the site visits, preparing field note documentation, and following- up with the City to address questions in the field. We anticipate our field visits to be based on scheduled milestones and testing. Actual field visit days will be determined as dates become known during construction. We have also included budget for construction support services for electrical and architectural/structural. As previously discussed and approved by the City, the architectural and structural design utilized the entire authorized budget which was intended to also include submittal review and construction inspection. Additionally, the construction support budget to be provided by Conley for the electrical design was allocated for other purposes during the design and bidding phase. These efforts are still required and have been included in the budget request. Post -Construction: The original contract scope included preparing as -built drawings, providing an electronic copy and two hard copies (half-size) to the City. We expanded the scope to include deficiency resolution and project closeout. Contingency: We have included a contingency line item in the event unforeseen construction difficulties arise. This fee includes time for senior involvement and an additional field visit, if needed. We will not utilize this budget unless approved by the City. Exhibit C Budget Summary and Estimated Costs to Complete Task 305 Sub -Tasks Cost Construction Administration $ 14,700 Construction Execution $ 7,420 Post -Construction $ 6,730 Contingency $ 3,600 Architectural and Structural Support $ 4,500 Electrical Engineering Support $ 12,000 ODCs $ 4,500 Budget to Complete Task 305 $ 53,450 Less Budget Remaining ($ 1,500) Total Budget Adjustment Request $ 51,950 Notes: 1. Outside Direct Costs (ODCs) include communication fee, laboratory and equipment rental. 2. 15% markup included on subs. • ITEM TITLE: BUSINESS OF THE CITY COUNCIL YAKIMA, WASHINGTON AGENDA STATEMENT Item No. * 1 For Meeting of June 3, 2008 Consideration of Resolution authorizing execution of agreement with Golder Associates, Inc. for engineering and consulting services for design of the Gardner Park Well SUBMITTED BY: Dave Brown, Water/Irrigation Manager Dave Zabell, Assistant City Manager CONTACT PERSON/TELEPHONE: Dave Brown / 575-6204 SUMMARY EXPLANATION: On August 22, 2006 the City successfully transferred a portion of Ranney Water Right to the Kissel Well, replacing an existing Water Right Permit. The balance of the Ranney Water Right was transferred to three proposed sites for a new well. Subsequently, all necessary environmental documentation has been prepared and a Determination of Non -Significance has been issued. A detailed analysis conducted by the City and Golder Associates identifies Gardner Park as the most suitable site for a new 3,000 gallon per minute well. Attached is a contract to design and prepare the bid documents for development of the new Gardner Park Well. This well will provide water for future needs, supplement the water supply during drought years, supplement the emergency water supply, reduce the need for additional storage, and reestablish beneficial use of the Ranney Water Right to thereby ensuring its continuation. Resolution X Ordinance Contract X Other Specify) Mail to: Chris Pitre; Golder Associates; 18300 NE Union Hill Road.; Redmond, WA 98052-3333 Phone: 425-833- 0777 Funding Source 477 Wat IP Fu • an. PWTF Loan Proceeds APPROVED FOR SUBMITTAL: City Mana STAFF RECOMMENDATION: Approve Resolution authorizing. the City Manager to execute the accompanying contract for the design and production of construction documents by Golder Associates, Inc. of Redmond, Washington for the Gardner Park Well; for the City Manager to execute all other documents related to the design, contract administration and construction for the Gardner Park Well. BOARD/COMMISSION RECOMMENDATION: • COUNCIL ACTION: CITY OF YAKIMA BID DOCUMENTS AND CONTRACT PROVISIONS For Gardner Well Project No. 2132 Bid Opening Wednesday, February 2, 2011 2:OOpm Original ADDENDUM # 1 City of Yakima Gardner Well Project 2132 January 3, 2011 This Addendum #1 introduces and describes the requirement for bidding on two alternatives for connection of the Gardner Well to the City of Yakima water distribution system. Alternative 1A — This alternative consists of the existing design configuration, which utilizes two 72 -inch chlorine contact pipes, as shown on the drawings Alternative 1B — This alternative replaces the two chlorine contact pipes with a single 12 -inch ductile iron pipe, approximately 45 -feet in length. This alternative shall include provision and installation of fittings and appurtenances as necessary to connect the 12 -inch supply pipe exiting the well house to the 12 -inch ductile iron replacement pipeline as shown on the drawings For this alternative, the contractor would not be required to provide or install the fittings and pipes necessary for the 72 -inch chlorine contact pipes A revised Bid Cost Sheet is attached to reflect these alternatives The drawings and other engineering documents have not been updated for this Addendum The bid total for item numbers 1 - 18, not including the cost of either alternative, will be used to select the apparent low bidder After the project is awarded, the City of Yakima will decide which alternative to include 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ADDENDUM #1 BID COST SHEET Gardner Well Proj No. 2132 Line item costs should include all Contractor's overhead and profit and indirect costs. Item Number Bid Item Quantity Unit Total 1 MOBILIZATION/DEMOBILIZATION 1 Lump Sum 8 -inch Gate Valve installed with valve box 2 PUMP AND WELLHEAD (incl housekeeping pad) 1 Lump Sum each 3 WELL HOUSE 1 Lump Sum 4 HVAC (includes plumbing, emergency combination unit and on -demand heater) 1 Lump Sum 6 -inch Ductile Iron Pipe (buried installation) 5 PUMP ROOM PIPING, VALVES, AND APPURTENANCES 1 Lump Sum If 6 CHLORINE INJECTION SYSTEM 1 Lump Sum 7 FLUORIDE INJECTION SYSTEM 1 Lump Sum 8 EXTERIOR PIPING 1 Lump Sum 9 SITE WORK AND STRUCTURES 1 Lump Sum 10 WELL PUMP VFD 1 each 11 SERVICE ENTRANCE (EUSERC) 1 each 12 MAIN BREAKER 1 each 13 SWITCHBOARD 1 each 14 CONTROL PANEL 1 each 15 OTHER MISC. ELECTRICAL 1 each 16 TESTING 1 Lump Sum 17 EQUIPMENT AND LABOR 1 Lump Sum 18 MINOR CHANGES 1 Lump Sum $ 50,000.00 Subtotal State Sales Tax (8.2%) TOTAL Item Number Bid Item Quantity Unit Total 1A1 ALT 1A - CHLORINE CONTACT PIPE 1 Lump Sum 8 -inch Gate Valve installed with valve box State Sales Tax (8.2%) each TOTAL Item Number Bid Item Quantity Unit Total 1B1 ALT 1B - 12 -INCH CONNECTION 1 Lump Sum 8 -inch Gate Valve installed with valve box State Sales Tax (8.2%) each TOTAL Note: 1. Alternative 1A includes the chlorine contact pipe connection as shown in the drawings. Alternative 1B consists of a standard 12 -inch connection to the distribution system in lieu of the chlorine contact pipe. UNIT BID PRICES 12 -inch OS&Y Gate Valve each 8 -inch OS&Y Gate Valve each 6 -inch OS&Y Gate Valve each 8 -inch Gate Valve installed with valve box each 6 -inch Gate Valve installed with valve box each 12 -inch Butterfly Valve installed in valve box each 12 -inch Ductile Iron Pipe (buried installation) If 8 -inch Ductile Iron Pipe (buried installation) If 6 -inch Ductile Iron Pipe (buried installation) If 12 -inch Steel Pipe If 8 -inch Steel Pipe If 7 ADDENDUM # 2 City of Yakima Gardner Well Project 2132 January 20, 2011 This Addendum #2 revises electrical sections 16910 and 16940, drawings E-05 and E-09, and the requirement for bidding on two alternatives for connection of the Gardner Well to the City of Yakima water distribution system as previously described in Addendum #1 Electrical Revisions: The following four items revise the electrical sections as indicated. Item #1: Exhibit E, Section 16910. REVISE paragraph 2.3 C 1 to read "Allen Bradley 1766- L32BXBA" in lieu of "Allen Bradley 1766-L32BXB" Item #2: Exhibit E, Section 16940. REVISE paragraph 1.6 A to add Taurus Controls (Portland, OR) and Superior Custom Controls (Seattle, WA) to the named control panel manufacturers. Item #3: Drawing E-05. Add a vibration sensor attached to the well pump motor with a circuit of 1-2/C#18 STP, 3/4"C from the vibration sensor to the junction box for the well level transducer Revise the circuit between the junction box for the well level transducer and the junction box for the pressure transmitter to be 2-2/C#18 STP, 3/4"C in lieu of, 1-2/C#18 STP, 3/4"C. Revise the circuit between the junction box for the pressure transmitter and the Gardner Well Control Panel (GWCP) to be 3-2/C#18 STP, 1"C in lieu of, 2-2/C#18 STP, 3/4"C Item #4: Drawing E-09. Revise the PLC Base Unit (line GWCP-20) to be 1766-L32BXBA in lieu of 1766-L32BXB. Show the first analog input on the base unit as an input for the motor vibration sensor, connected in a manner similar to the well level on lines GWCP-130 through GWCP-133 on drawing E-10, but with a 500 ohm spanning resistor (of not greater than 2% tolerance) across the analog input terminals Base Bid: This revises Addendum #1. Alternative 1A — This alternative consists of the existing design configuration, which utilizes two 72 -inch chlorine contact pipes, as shown on the drawings. Alternative 1B (Item No. 10 in base bid) — This alternative replaces the two chlorine contact pipes with a single 12 -inch ductile iron pipe, approximately 45 -feet in length. This alternative shall include provision and installation of fittings and appurtenances as necessary to connect the 12 - inch supply pipe exiting the well house to the 12 -inch ductile iron replacement pipeline as shown on the drawings. For this alternative, the contractor would not be required to provide or install the fittings and pipes necessary for the 72 -inch chlorine contact pipes. A revised Bid Cost Sheet is attached to reflect the described Alternate 1B being included in the base bid as Item No. 10. The drawings and other engineering documents have not been updated for this Addendum. The bid total for item numbers 1 - 19, not including the cost of Alternate 1A, will be used to select the apparent low bidder. After the project is awarded, the City of Yakima will decide whether or not to award Alternative 1A. addendum 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 January 2011 ADDENDUM #2 BID COST SHEET Gardner Well Proj No. 2132 Line item costs should include all Contractor's overhead and profit and indirect costs. Item Number Bid Item Quantity Unit Total 1 MOBILIZATION/DEMOBILIZATION 1 Lump Sum 8 -inch Gate Valve installed with valve box 2 PUMP AND WELLHEAD (incl housekeeping pad) 1 Lump Sum each 3 WELL HOUSE 1 Lump Sum 4 HVAC (includes plumbing, emergency combination unit and on -demand heater) 1 Lump Sum 6 -inch Ductile Iron Pipe (buried installation) 5 PUMP ROOM PIPING, VALVES, AND APPURTENANCES 1 Lump Sum If 6 CHLORINE INJECTION SYSTEM 1 Lump Sum 7 FLUORIDE INJECTION SYSTEM 1 Lump Sum 8 EXTERIOR PIPING 1 Lump Sum 9 SITE WORK AND STRUCTURES 1 Lump Sum 10 ALT. 1B 1- 12 -INCH CONNECTION 1 Lump Sum 11 WELL PUMP VFD 1 each 12 SERVICE ENTRANCE (EUSERC) 1 each 13 MAIN BREAKER 1 each 14 SWITCHBOARD 1 each 15 CONTROL PANEL 1 each 16 OTHER MISC. ELECTRICAL 1 each 17 TESTING 1 Lump Sum 18 EQUIPMENT AND LABOR 1 Lump Sum 19 MINOR CHANGES 1 Lump Sum $ 50,000.00 Subtotal State Sales Tax (8.2%) TOTAL Note: Item Number Bid Item Quantity Unit Total 1A1 ALT. 1A - CHLORINE CONTACT PIPE 1 Lump Sum 8 -inch Gate Valve installed with valve box State Sales Tax (8.2%) each TOTAL Note: 1. Alternative 1A includes the chlorine contact pipe connection as shown in the drawings. Alternative 1B is part of the base bid and consists of a standard 12 -inch connection to the distribution system in lieu of the chlorine contact pipe. UNIT BID PRICES 12 -inch OS&Y Gate Valve each 8 -inch OS&Y Gate Valve each 6 -inch OS&Y Gate Valve each 8 -inch Gate Valve installed with valve box each 6 -inch Gate Valve installed with valve box each 12 -inch Butterfly Valve installed in valve box each 12 -inch Ductile Iron Pipe (buried installation) If 8 -inch Ductile Iron Pipe (buried installation) If 6 -inch Ductile Iron Pipe (buried installation) If 12 -inch Steel Pipe If 8 -inch Steel Pipe If 7 ADDENDUM # 3 City of Yakima Gardner Well Project 2132 January 20, 2011 This Addendum #3 revises electrical drawing E-04 and specification 16422 for the City of Yakima Gardner Well, Project #2132. Electrical Revisions: Drawing E-04. Revise the exhaust fan VFDs to be located on the east wall of the electrical room between the HVAC units. Revise the routing of circuits associated with the exhaust fans and these VFDs accordingly. Revise the allocated space for the well pump VFD to extend west along the north wall of the electrical room to the east edge of the window to the pump room, and south to 36" off the north wall. This will provide a space of approximately 155" x 36" for the well pump VFD Drawings will not be modified for this Addendum. Specification 16422: Delete the last sentence of paragraph 1.4 D (page 16422-2). Revise paragraph 0.1 (page 16422-7) to read "Capable of 110% rated current for 1 minute, 150% rated current for 3 seconds, at rated temperature." addendum 3 ADDENDUM # 4 City of Yakima Gardner Well Project 2132 January 31, 2011 This Addendum #4 revises the requirement for bidding on two alternatives for connection of the Gardner Well to the City of Yakima water distribution system as previously described in Addenda #1 and #2 Remove Alternative 1A from Bid: Alternative 1A, which consisted of the design configuration utilizing two 72 -inch chlorine contact pipes as shown on the drawings, is no longer included as an additional item to the bid As previously described in Addenda #1 and #2, Alternative 1B (Item No 10 in base bid), will be used in the bid A revised Bid Cost Sheet is attached to reflect Alternative 1A being removed from the bid Alternative 1B is still included in the base bid as Item No 10 The drawings and other engineering documents have not been updated for this Addendum. Bid date has NOT been changed and will be on Wednesday, February 2, 2011 at 2:00 PM at the City of Yakima, 129 North 2nd Street, Yakima, Washington 98901 addendum 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 January 2011 ADDENDUM #4 BID COST SHEET Gardner Well Proj No. 2132 Line item costs should include all Contractor's overhead and profit and indirect costs. Item Number Bid Item Quantity Unit Total 1 MOBILIZATION/DEMOBILIZATION 1 Lump Sum 8 -inch Gate Valve installed with valve box 2 PUMP AND WELLHEAD (incl housekeeping pad) 1 Lump Sum each 3 WELL HOUSE 1 Lump Sum 4 HVAC (includes plumbing, emergency combination unit and on -demand heater) 1 Lump Sum 6 -inch Ductile Iron Pipe (buried installation) 5 PUMP ROOM PIPING, VALVES, AND APPURTENANCES 1 Lump Sum If 6 CHLORINE INJECTION SYSTEM 1 Lump Sum 7 FLUORIDE INJECTION SYSTEM 1 Lump Sum 8 EXTERIOR PIPING 1 Lump Sum 9 SITE WORK AND STRUCTURES 1 Lump Sum 10 ALT. 1131- 12 -INCH CONNECTION 1 Lump Sum 11 WELL PUMP VFD 1 each 12 SERVICE ENTRANCE (EUSERC) 1 each 13 MAIN BREAKER 1 each 14 SWITCHBOARD 1 each 15 CONTROL PANEL 1 each 16 OTHER MISC. ELECTRICAL 1 each 17 TESTING 1 Lump Sum 18 EQUIPMENT AND LABOR 1 Lump Sum 19 MINOR CHANGES 1 Lump Sum $ 50,000.00 Subtotal State Sales Tax (8.2%) TOTAL Note: 1. Alternative 1B is part of the base bid and consists of a standard 12 -inch connection to the distribution system in lieu of the chlorine contact pipe (formally known as Alternative 1A) UNIT BID PRICES 12 -inch OS&Y Gate Valve each 8 -inch OS&Y Gate Valve each 6 -inch OS&Y Gate Valve each 8 -inch Gate Valve installed with valve box each 6 -inch Gate Valve installed with valve box each 12 -inch Butterfly Valve installed in valve box each 12 -inch Ductile Iron Pipe (buried installation) If 8 -inch Ductile Iron Pipe (buried installation) If 6 -inch Ductile Iron Pipe (buried installation) If 12 -inch Steel Pipe If 8 -inch Steel Pipe If 7 INVITATION TO BID NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that sealed bids will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Yakima, 129 North 2nd Street, Yakima, Washington, 98901 of Yakima, until 2:00 pm on February 2, 2011 and will then and there be opened and publicly read for the construction of. CITY OF YAKIMA Gardner Well Project No. 2132 This work shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials and equipment required to complete the Gardner Well project provided in the bid documents The project includes the installation of the Gardner Well pump, piping, and pump house as shown on the Contract documents. Work shall be completed in accordance with the Standard Specifications, Contract Provisions and Contract Plans Each bid shall be plainly marked "Gardner Well Bid". All bid proposals shall be accompanied by a bid proposal deposit in cash, certified check, cashier's check, or surety bond in an amount equal to five percent (5%) of the amount of such bid proposal Should the successful bidder fail to enter into such contract and furnish satisfactory performance bond within the time stated in the specifications, the bid proposal deposit shall be forfeited to the City of Yakima Plans and specifications may be obtained at the Office of the City Engineer located at 129 North 2nd Street, Yakima, Washington, or by ordering a set by phone at 509-575-6111 or by FAX at 509-576-6314 upon payment of the amount of $100.00 for each set, non refundable. Bidders must register with the City in order to assure receipt of any bid addenda Questions should be directed to the design Engineer Golder Associates Inc. at 425-883-0777. Questions on the plans and specifications will be accepted until January 21, 2011 at 4.00 PM. Responses to questions will be sent on January 31, 2011 to prospective bidders who have registered with the City The City of Yakima in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252, 42 U S C. 2000d to 2000-4 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Transportation, subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, nondiscrimination in federally assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such Act, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, disadvantaged business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color or national origin in consideration for an award The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids and proposals and, to waive irregularities or informalities in the bid or in the bidding. Responsibility and competency of bidders and their subcontractors will be considered in making the award. No bidder may withdraw his bid after the hour set for the opening thereof or before the award of contract, unless said award is delayed for a period exceeding sixty (60) days DATED this day of , 2011 (SEAL) PUBLISHED January 3, 2011 January 10, 2011 ii Deborah Moore CITY CLERK TABLE OF CONTENTS INVITATION TO BID ii SECTION 1 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 SECTION 2 — BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 3 Bid Schedule 4 Bidder's Checklist ,5 Bid Proposal ...... . 6 Bid Cost Sheet. . . 7 Bid Proposal Signature Page .. .......... 8 Bid Deposit.... 9 Bid Bond... g Non -Collusion Affidavit. 10 Non -Discrimination Provision 11 Subcontractor List .. 12 Bidder's Data Form.... 15 City of Yakima — Women and Minority Business Enterprise Policy ......... 16 City of Yakima — Affirmative Action Plan ..... .................. ...18 Bidder's Certification 20 Subcontractor's Certification ......... 21 Materially and Responsiveness .. . ..... 22 Compliance and Enforcement ....... 22 Proposal Form . 24 SECTION 3 —CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 25 Contract.... 26 Contract Bond . .. ......... . 28 Insurance.... 30 Schedule of Working Hours....... 33 Minimum Wage Affidavit 34 Prevailing Wage Affidavit 35 Figure 1 Project Location Map Figure Exhibits Exhibit A — Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance General Special Provisions Exhibit B — Drawing Set Exhibit C — Engineering Technical Specifications and Product Cut Sheets Exhibit D — Architectural and Structural Specifications Exhibit E — Electrical Specifications Exhibit F — City of Yakima Public Waterline General Notes, Specifications for Private Construction of Public Water Mains for City of Yakima, and Sewer Installation Policies iii SECTION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 General Requirements This provides for the procurement, construction, and connection of the Gardner Well to the City of Yakima's water main in accordance with the Contract Provisions, Contract Plans, and the Standard Specifications The project includes, but is not limited to, the installation of the vertical turbine pump, valves, piping, appurtenances, gauges, well head discharge assembly, seal plates, housekeeping pads, well casing extension, air break, and pump building complete with power, lighting, ventilation, drainage, pipe supports, chemical treatment systems, testing, spare parts, control equipment and system, and owner's manuals for the system improvements. The following is made a part of the Contract Provisions and supersedes any conflicting provisions of the 2008 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction adopted January 2008 and the foregoing Amendments to the Standard Specifications The said Standard Specifications and Amendments thereto, the WSDOT Standard Plans and WSDOT Construction Manual, together with the Special Provisions provided hereinafter, covering all work specified are hereby made part of this Contract. The following Special Provisions include. • General Requirements (Section 1 0) • Bidding Requirements (Section 2.0) • Contract Requirements (Section 3.0) • Figure 1 • Exhibits A through F The following paragraph pertaining to the Standard Specifications shall obtain and be made a part of this Contract. Wherever the word "State" or "Contracting Agency" is used it shall mean City of Yakima; that where the words "Secretary (Secretary of Transportation)" are used they shall mean City of Yakima Engineer; that wherever the words "State Treasurer" are used they shall mean City of Yakima Treasurer; that wherever the words "State Auditor" are used they shall mean City of Yakima Auditor 2 SECTION 2 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bid Schedule Advertisement of Notice to Bidders January 3 and January 10, 2011 Issuance of Bid Packet January 3, 2011 Last Day for Questions 4.00 pm, Friday, January 21, 2011 Questions shall be in writing to Golder Associates, Inc 18300 NE Union Hill Road, Suite 200 Redmond, Washington 98052 Email. yakimawell(a�golder.com Fax. 425-882-5498 Receipt of Bids Wednesday, February 2, 2011 2.00 pm City of Yakima, 129 North 2nd Street, Yakima, Washington, 98901 Public Announcement of Bids Friday, February 18, 2011 Note that dates of consideration are tentative and subject to change without notice Please note that the contractor being recommended for selection will be required to attend meetings 4 Bidder's Checklist The bidder's attention is especially called to the following forms which must be executed in full and submitted with the bid• (a) Bid Proposal with Bid and Unit Cost Sheets The unit prices bid must be shown in the space provided Acknowledge all addenda in the space provided. (b) Bid Signature Page To be filled in and signed by the bidder. (c) Bid Bond Deposit or Bid Bond Bid Bond Deposit Sign the Bid Bond Deposit in the space provided if the bid is accompanied by a certified check (payable to the State Treasurer) or cashier's check in the amount of not less than 5% of the total amount bid OR Bid Bond This form is to be executed by the bidder and Surety company The amount of this bond shall be not less than 5% of the total amount bid and may be shown in dollars or on a percentage basis. Provide Power of Attorney for Surety's agent. (d) Non -Collusion Affidavit and Debarment Certification Must be subscribed and sworn to before a Notary Public and included with the Bid Proposal (e) List of Subcontractors, Surety, and Bidder List all required subcontractors proposed for the project and fill in the Surety and Bidder information (f) Bidder's Data Form This form to be completed by the bidder (g) MBE/WBE Form It is requested that the Bidder's Certification of the "Affirmative Action Profile" in the MBE/WBE Form be filled in and signed by the bidder Failure to provide this information WILL NOT render the bid non- responsive. The following forms are to be executed and/or submitted for approval after the Contract is awarded (1) Contract. This Contract to be executed by the successful bidder and the City of Yakima (2) Contract Bond to be executed by the successful bidder and his Surety company Provide Power of Attorney (3) Certificate of Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance must be provided by the successful bidder in accordance with the provisions of the Standard Specifications and Special Provisions (4) Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages to be completed by successful bidder and by any and all subcontractors. (5) Schedule of Working Hours to be executed by the successful bidder. 5 SECTION I PROPOSAL AND FORMS CITY CLERK city of yak ma gardnerweli bid specs.doc 7 1 (This page intentionally left blank for duplex printing.) clly of yakima gardner well bid specs.doc 8 1. BIDDER'S CHECK LIST All of the following documents and forms must be included in a bid proposal. 1) PROPOSAL 2) REPORTING INJURIES & SAFETY RECORD / ✓ 3) BID SCHEDULE 4) CONTRACTOR EXPERIENCE 5) PROPOSED PROJECT PERSONNEL ✓ 6) DRILLING EQUIPMENT TO BE USED 7) PUMPING EQUIPMENT TO BE USED ✓ 8) APPROACH TO DRILLING PRODUCTION WELL 9) FLUID ENGINEER QUALIFICATIONS 10) STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS 11) SUBCONTRACTOR LIST 12) BIDDER'S CERTIFICATION ✓ 13) BID BOND 14) NON -COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT / 15) PROPOSAL SIGNATURE SHEET The terms "OWNER" and "CITY" may be used interchangeably and refer to the City of Yakima. The -terms "ENGINEER," "CONSULTANT" and "HYDROGEOLOGIST" may be used interchangeably and refer to the authorized representative of the City of Yakima. city of yakima gardner well bid specs.doc 9 1.1 Proposal This certifies that the undersigned has examined the location of the project and that the plans, specifications and contract governing the work embraced in this improvement, and the method by which payment will be made for said work, is understood. The undersigned hereby proposes to undertake and complete the work embraced in this improvement, or as much thereof as can be completed with the money available in accordance with the said plans, specifications and contract, and the following schedule of rates and prices. Unit prices for all items, all extensions, and total amount of bid, shall be shown, and be written in ink or typed. Show unit prices in figures only. All units will be in full dollar amounts (no fractions of a dollar will be recognized). If this proposal is accepted, the undersigned hereby agrees to furnish all labor, materials and equipment required to complete the work as stated on the plans and specifications and to enter into contract with the City of Yakima to commence work when issued a written notice to proceed and to complete the work within the specified number of calendar days thereafter. AH work shall be done in accordance with the Standard Specifications of the t of Yakima unless otherwise stated on the plans. A certified check, bank draft or bid bond ayable to the City of Yakima is enclosed in the amount of $ • 57b said amount being not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid. This amount shall become the property of the City of Yakima in the event this proposal is accepted by the City and the undersigned fails to enter into a contract with said City and furnish bond within thirty (30) days after receiving notice of acceptance of this proposal, otherwise said certified check, bank draft or bid bond is to be returned to the undersigned. Receipt of addenda number through*) is hereby acknowledged. The bidder is prepared to submit a financial and experience statement on request. Dated at o,� IAi►A C�- tis day of NOJENI Btu , 2008. Bidder: / OVINE C4-1-rr-t5-t- -715£ (0 O ( .---1 �IAA-� v A- Authorized Official Stmt t-3 /----37-74-6---)13- City, -3 i 4-a—s- City, C}� 90-3 37 State, ZIP Code Name of Principals: —DUO (o ter S WA- c*— CONTRACTOR's License Number: LA -/NE r; L 043 L. wftspl,.4,76,,_, NOTE: 1) If the bidder is a co -partnership, so state, giving firm name under which business is transacted. 2) If the bidder is a corporation, this proposal must be executed by its duly authorized officials. 51eo► I C$7 CA-c,�;z�, A city of yakima 9ardner well bid spacs.doc 10 1.2 Reportable Injuries & Safety Record List all injuries and accidents that have occurred in the last five years that have been reportable according to federal Occupational Health and Safety Administration and/or state Department of Labor and Industries The OWNER reserves the right to invalidate any submittals on the basis of their safety record List your company's L&J Experience Modification Factor - Date of Incident 5 T Nature of Incident. Nature of Personal Injury. Nature of Property Damage - Cause of Incident. Agency Reported to & Case Number: Date of Incident. Nature of Incident. Nature of Personal Injury: Nature of Property Damage: Cause of Incident. Agency Reported to & Case Number: Date of Incident: Nature of Incident - Nature -of Personal Injury - Nature of Property Damage: Cause of Incident: Agency Reported to & Case Number: city of yakima gardner well bid specs.doc 11 1.3 Bid Schedule Flowing artesian conditions are expected Item Number Bid Item Quantity Unit Unit Cost Total 1 Mobilization/Demobilization 1 Lump $4500 $ 351500. Well Installation 2 Drill and Install 24 -Inch Production Casing and 2 -inch Annular Grout Seal 500 Foot $ S40. $ 019 6000 3 Drill 22 -Inch (minimum) Hole for 16 -inch Screen Assembly Plus Sand Pack & Fittings 700 Foot $ 360- $ a,$a-O o0 - 4 Furnish and Install 16 -Inch Nominal Pipe and Sand Pack (excluding sand pack materials), 550 Foot $ j L43 $ 7F650• 5 Furnish and Install 16 -Inch Nominal Screen, Sand Pack (excluding materials), & Fittings 200 Foot $[15� I $ l ��� I 6 Sand Pack (materials only; assume 8-12 CSSI sand pack) 50 Tons $ i 169 . $ 5 .,--/.5(:)- 7 Authorized Hourly Work — Well Construction 60 Hour $ (-1- SO. $ ? '70 00 - 8 Authorized Hourly Work —Well Development 80 Hour $ q$(), ) $ 3 4,, 00 O.. - 9 Authorized Standby Time 10 Hour $ t4 pp. 7 7 $ `I 000 . Pumping Test i 10 Furnish, Install, and Remove Pump 1 Lump $70160. $ `-7? O O O - 11 Complete Two Pumping Tests (8 hr step -rate test and 72 hour constant -rate test) 80 Hour $ LIDO $ 3a)0Do . 12 Discharge Line & Controls 150 Foot $ L -ll 0 _ $ 6 0 00 . Sand Pack Option Sub -TOTAL: $ 1313060:2i' TAX (8.2%): cc $ / 07 666 . TOTAL: ae $ (11,g°, (, 66 •T city of ynkima gardner wolf bld specs.doc 12 1.4 Contractor Experience Provide details on at least three similar projects within the past five years executed by the CONTRACTOR (attach well logs where available) The criteria for similar projects are production wells that are at least • 800 feet deep • 16 -inch diameter. • Constant -rate pumping tests of 24-hour, at a rate of 2,000 gpm Projects must have been worked on by the foreman or lead driller proposed for this prolect- 1 Project Name ✓ 1 - c-t-YelTh Location. Driller. Scope of Work. Reference. Telephone - 2. Project Name Location: Driller. Scope of Work Reference: Telephone 3. Project Name. Location. Driller. Scope of Work: Reference: Telephone. Additional references may be independently obtained by the City city of yakima gardner well bid specs.doc 13 1.5 Proposed Project Personnel Change of personnel will not be allowed without prior approval of the OWNER. 1.6 Drilling Equipment to be Used Drill rig(s) PersonnelName Air compressors (rig and booster) Years Experience Certifications & Qualifications Foreman/Lead Driller r. xcfl•°cfz., C2a� asg 1 Water truck Driller(s) (ia 0-31cti F•,,c,.,,,u,;.� t S Stabilizers and Collars Welder(s) Welders -'221, W.C._i 7.c-11--( Grout Plant Loc1-L (-er ; Pump Installer/Operator(s) 302 a n�6E '� Grout Shoe NlA Drilling Fluid Engineer (if the use of drilling fluids are proposed) �S �� Other Proposed Personnel and Role(s) g-1 (44----fr. Ci-/-i-Lccneric iv 1.6 Drilling Equipment to be Used Drill rig(s) C -44--A• L�A1 6£g i 0 R- N.. SE c ,2CU lP�Tr- Air compressors (rig and booster) 600 //S—b F "7.-0 / D Pipe Truck O' ?,r£ %rfep-fie1L Support Equipment 1?4{4y-I-0£wed ( ei., , r_ z j, L Water truck HiA f Drill string 15/S' DIR,LLcO ecJ S6- Crct. 'R ?c, Stabilizers and Collars 11" Oh Co cL,l-g , (6 ` Welders L o Cf -t C2R.j ,i-F,.2.a )(j -►-e I b -2R..1 Grout Plant Lo6,41_, ,22,) , f sr Grout Pump t U P Grout Shoe NlA Other equipment /f(& v , P"_e. , � r- e Qv fa—co rrD cowl re-rr `T14z5 /9t T is oukti€ g-1 (44----fr. Ci-/-i-Lccneric iv city of yakima gardnar well bid spece.doc 14 1.7 Pumping Equipment to Be Used (Pump curves must be submitted with bid proposal ) Pump(s), including horse power rating Must be able to pump 3,200 gpm Expected head lift may be 400 feet. Attach pump 5 -e e pv "`"" . C O CLV C - curves. Pump column / ,l Motor(s) O O -I-46 .e,4--<_`7 as f w / )\ e5) 7 R -c V E - L - 3G ,'--'-e--_ Flow Measuring Device(s) - certificates of calibration will be required before pumping test ��� >r� T�"� W� C eut l €:1\-f' e "K._ Discharge Line and Erosion Control /7- .r /1-- L,4,�..- friL.A. - ri).ra 44'y4-rx-G-c 1.8 Approach to Drilling Production Well Detail your approach to conducting the drilling and pump testing program for this project (attach additional sheets, if needed). Provide specific details on the: 1) methodology you will employ to drill and set the surface seal minimizing effects to the shallow aquifer; 2) drilling and installing the upper 700 feet of casing; 3) drilling through the aquifer; 4) setting the well screen, and, 5) controlling flowing artesian conditions during all phases of the work. (� SJ R. -R&<- C�S,N G 13�QH4I e i1>i LL. 3E 1 IU LL— (J r r.s G 52P‘(e-ru,. Ct 2LJ L6�T io — US, , , G Wel G -N"% n t) > , Fs ,v+-) C°,x. r17 C u o. -r1- -Q ELmetie> L-�• J j € e) r Cu (}circ v` w, L L f?ec Cd•orlab /)-e-v) (is) e city of yakima gardner well bid specs.doc 15 city of yakima gardnar wall bld spacs.doc 16 it PROPOSAL NO S U NO rl-V61V-1— - -fiantrinff• -------atTroxcr-rtrrz-- Ill) bKir-iTt1,11V1--- al gl MAUI - t 1 rtir/It111L • " 1 - GIM cA(-(117--- 1,1- FUO -1 140 20 1‘,11, -)E -11--1171(F1 G.( 9 88 ._,. 900 ._________ ----- -11l -,_ 8 00 ____ ________ ----------,-___ / 79 8•1 _ •________ • L11,c- i -...„ •-• --. 8) ---.--, 76 ------- •,--... --' ' , --- ••• •-,. ...„....-• ..----- .., - - _,,, ..-- i___----- i ...._ , , , . • 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 Capacity (GriVq Eiieclive Februaly 2006 OLC1411-1C2 0 e 03/1 071-1,H iludp L1i1 0 RPM -,60 'ETITEIENC , C617PH: i 1, -1-5-1-,-,GE 1 , 2A:10 10 :11 -STAGE 1 , 2 -S -17-,E 1---T 1 ST,(.1.11 ,E Impeller 1:11(1-1 /s , 17 1_,E71S,'', i (Bal)t IIA Bow15 D I 1400' d,4 0 3 Bowl L-teral I 1 00" Max 681 330 '+0 DiE-11 stze [80 5000 r-20 5000 Pe 2005 r 1JPBENE ! Lubbock, Tas BOWL PERFORIN,I,CP BASED OH I 1q01\1-2-\ERTED W, -Tr -Ps RATED p01011 ONL IS GI_IL,RANTF:4-) LIFT REFflESELIT H FEP,FORI\V110E1--.1, TEST OF (-7E - I SSEHEL) -`7FFII_ IF, l• COFT,ECTIrA 3 [!,-= )1 = • FOF LESBEF Li/i1qiiin BIDDER'S COMPARABLE REFERENCES 1. Suburban Water Systems: a. Address of Owner: 1211 E. Center Court Dr., Covina, CA 91724 b. Telephone #: (626) 543-2554 c. Name of Project: Well 41201 & Well 11109 d. Location of Project(s): #201, Pico Rivera, CA, and #409, La Mirada, CA. e. Brief Description of Project(s): Construction of 2 production wells: #201 18"x1000' & 111109 18"x1400'. f. Contract Amount: $900,000 g. Date of Completion of Contract: June & July 2005 h. Name, Address, and Telephone # of Architect or Engineer: Hydrology, Engineering, and Geology, Steve Dickey, (951) 377-4586 i. Name of Owner's Project Engineer: Craig Gott 2. Shea Homes: a. Address of Owner: 1001 Summerset Dr., Rio Vista, CA 94571 b. Telephone #: (707) 374-1012 c. Name of Project: Trilogy Well at Rio Vista d. Location of Project(s): Rio Vista, CA e. Brief Description of Project(s): Design, drill and install at 16"x500' well. f. Contract Amount: $400,000 g. Date of Completion of Contract: June 2005 h. Name, Address, and Telephone # of Architect or Engineer: Layne Christensen Company, Tony Morgan, (909) 390-2833,11001 Etiwanda Ave., Fontana, CA 92337 i. Name of Owner's Project Engineer: Steve Bigelow 3. Coyote Springs Investment, LLC: a. Address of Owner: 6295 Wingfield Springs Rd., Sparks, NV 89436 b. Telephone #t (775) 321-5934 c. Name of Project: Well #1 & Well #2 d. Location of Project(s): Coyote Springs, NV e. Brief Description of Project(s): 2 water wells drilled in hard rock to a depth of 1000'. f. Contract Amount: $900,000 g. Date of Completion of Contract: August 2005 h. Name, Address, and Telephone # of Architect or Engineer: None i. Name of Owner's Project Engineer: Rusty Herberger 4. Orange County Water District: a. Address of Owner: 10500 Ellis Ave., Fountain Valley, CA 92708 b. Telephone #: (714) 378-3232 c. Name of Project: MWD Groundwater Storage Program: Area 1 7 d. Location of Project(s): Orange County, CA e. Brief Description of Project(s): 4 — 900' wells with 18" casings. f. Contract Amount: $1,947,000 g. Date of Completion of Contract: July 2005 h. Name, Address, and Telephone # of Architect or Engineer: Orange County Water District, Max Rasouli, (714) 378-3232, 10500 Ellis Ave., Fountain Valley, CA 92708 i. Name of Owner's Project Engineer: Camp, Dresser, McKee (CDM) 5. Mission Springs Water District: a. Address of Owner: 66575 2nd St., Desert Hot Springs, CA 92240 b. Telephone #: (760) 329-6448 c. Name of Project: 900' Zone Well d. Location of Project(s): Desert Hot Springs, CA e. Brief Description of Project(s): 16"x1000' well f. Contract Amount: $385,000 g. Date of Completion of Contract: April 2005 h. Name, Address, and Telephone # of Architect or Engineer: Mission Springs Water District, Gary Brockman, (760) 329-6448, 66575 2nd St., Desert Hot Springs, CA 92240 i. Name of Owner's Project Engineer: Gary Brockman 6. City of Hesperia: a. Address of Owner: 15776 Main Street, Hesperia, CA 92345 b. Telephone #: (760) 947-1477 c. Name of Project: Wells #19, #31, & #32 d. Location of Project(s): Hesperia, CA e. Brief Description of Project(s): 3 — 1000'x18" wells f. Contract Amount: $1,399,000 g. Date of Completion of Contract: August 2005 h. Name, Address, and Telephone # of Architect or Engineer: Richard Slade & Associates, 6442 Coldwater Canyon, Ste. 214, North Hollywood, CA 91606, Richard C. Slade. i. Name of Owner's Project Engineer: Kelly Aiken 7. Jordan Valley Water Conservancy District: a. Address of Owner: 8215 S. 1300 W., West Jordan, UT 84084 b. Telephone #: (801) 565-4367 c. Name of Project: 272 E. Carol Way, 1028 College St., 4670 S. 1590 E., & 1784 E. Creek Rd. d. Location of Project(s): Salt Lake City, UT e. Brief Description of Project(s): 4 Wells - 20" x 800' f. Contract Amount: $1,338,000 g. Date of Completion of Contract: February 2005 3 h. Name, Address, and Telephone # of Architect or Engineer: Hansen, Allen, & Luce, (801) 566-5599, 6771 South 900 East, Midvale, UT 84047, David Hansen i. Name of Owner's Project Engineer: Dave Norman 1.9 Fluid Engineer Qualifications A Professional Engineer license is not required Proposed Fluid Engineer i 1) I 1`v5'' I JR"` N 6 LTJ S Years experience Licenses and Certifications List three references. 1 Name: $ C A -4-e `> Affiliation Phone number - Services provided Date services provided 2 Name Affiliation: Phone number: Services provided Date services provided. 3. Name Affiliation. Phone number: Services provided - Date services provided. Additional references may be independently obtained by the City for the low bidder city of yakima gardner well bid specs.doc 17 1.10 Statement of Bidder's Qualifications State of )ss County of Sr}-", ZN i), r -2(c) �DUGLA L. Cx.sorTS01 , being first duly sworn, deposes and says: I hereby maintain that I have adequate equipment, personnel, financial reserves and experience to complete the work as outlined in City of Yakima Project Number 2132. 1. My permanent place of business is: )) oCl ET) wq-, . a PrII 5 i rp ,, c4,_ 2-53 2. I have been engaged in the contracting business under my present firm name for JOa years. 3. Contracts on hand: (Schedule, contract amounts, and anticipated dates of completion.) L►4-1 iE r-rr.A-,v A& s C oN T re-Yv A-741) s Pro Co ►-.)Tiz T VA-�.0 �7 A f p aTc."( 0,t t LLi c )--) Lf -A -12S 4. The general character of work performed by my company is as follows- �x C 62 -Le 1-7-1-- 5. —'^T 5. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? If so, where and why? Xl c� 6. Have you ever defaulted on a contract? /14 If so, where and why? 7. I have adequate funds to promptly meet obligations incident to the work. List bank reference with address and phone number and credit available. 7,1E S Pc -rt. (6-,.f f3E Vt e_(,) NE T W W us) . LAyr.tc C# e l571 -745 -e -N . Cori I hereby e ify t t t» above isrue and accurate statement: Signed / !� Title 6eneia_O X14 Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 2008 Signed Title My commission expires 20 clly of yaklmn pnrdnar won Ind apocs.doc 18 41- Je-4o>4 Z.c/ic J CALIFORNIA JURAT WITH AFFIANT STATEMENT /rat c�S�t A c t_c�s a ,a cit�L� — A c� ci t. S,ct.t.s t,v t,mt. A A A ..At-, X See Attached Document (Notary to cross out lines 1-6 below) ❑ See Statement Below (Lines 1-5 to be completed only by document signer[s], not Notary) Signature of Document Signer No. 1 State of California County of j /i 4k/344N-2D SNELLIE M. FOX Commission * 1796644 Notary Public - California I Son Bernardino County M/Carrrn.809sMay20.2012 Place Notary Seal Above Signature ocument Signer No. 2 (if any) Subscribed and sworn to (or affirmed) before me on this fn day of A4W/nbe , 20 08 , by Date Month Year (1) c/) )jt /as: L. lac -et, -57--) Name of Signer proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person who appeared bb e me (.) (,) (2) Name of Signer proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the per sn ho .ppeared before me.) Signat OPTIONAL Signature of Notary Pu Though the information below is not -required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. Further Description of Any Attached Document Title or Type of Document: ��l I tAialher aa/H447m Document Date: Signer(s) Other Than Named Above: Number of Pages: OF SIGNER #2 Top of thumb here "d -d w er v v d -er d d ee e• le, IN, e7 ee d e7 d' d ee d d' C d ee ee d H' d' ee er d ee ee G' d 8' -d' NY 6' -- ©2007 National Notary Association • 9350 De Soto Ave., P O. Box. 2402 • Chatsworth, CP 91313-2402 • www.NationalNotary.org Item 45910 Reorder: Cali Toll -Free 1-800-876-6827 1.11 Subcontractor List Prepared in compliance with RCW 39.30 060, as amended. (To be submitted with the Bid Proposal) Failure to list subcontractors who are proposed to perform work as described in Chapter 18 106 RCW, and Chapter 19.28 RCW will result in your bid being non-responsive and therefore void. Subcontractor(s) that are proposed to perform the work as described in Chapterl 8 106 RCW, and Chapter 19.28 RCW must be listed below The work to be performed is to be listed below the subcontractor(s) name. If no subcontractor is listed below, the bidder acknowledges that it does not intend to use any subcontractor to perform those items of work. Subcontractor Name Item Numbers Subcontractor Name Item Numbers Subcontractor Name Item Numbers Subcontractor Name Item Numbers city of yakima gardner well bid specs.doc 19 1.12 Bidders Certification A bidder will not be eligible for award of a contract under this invitation for bids unless such bidder has submitted as a part of its bid the following certification, which will be deemed a part of the resulting contract: btAY7-1 e that: (BIDDER) certifies 1. It intends to use the following listed construction trades in the work under the contract and; liJtZ� \J (Z -c Lt -r (� PO ov (s �,3-/__L as to those trades for which it is required by these Bid Conditions to comply with these Bid Conditions, it adopts the minimum minority and women workforce utilization goals and the specific affirmative action steps for all construction work (both federal and non-federal) in the Yakima, Washington area subject to these Bid Conditions, those trades being: ?� and; 2. It will obtain from each of its subcontractors and submit to the contracting or administering agency prior to the award of any sub -contract under this contract the Subcontractor Certification required by these Bid Conditions. City of yakuna gardner well bid spocs.doc (Signature of Authorized Representative of Bidder) 20 1.13 Bid Bond d bond Herewith find deposit ino e form of icamcertified nt is not less than five percent of the 'to al bid. the amount of $ `7 � . Here .) 7 Sign / - l BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, Layne Christensen Company , as principal, and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company ofAmerica , as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Yakima, as Obligee, in the penal sum of Five Percent of Amount Bid (s,,ofAm,.$'d )Dollars, for the payment of which the Principal and the Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Obligee shall make any award to the Principal for -Gardner Well, Project No. 2132, 2301 Fruitvale Blvd, Yakima, WA according to the terms of the proposal or bid made by the Principal therefor, and the Principal shall duly make and enter into a contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of said proposal or bid and award and shall give bond for the faithful performance thereof, with Surety a and forfeit to approved by the Obligee; or if the Principal shall, in case of failure so to do, pay the Obligee the penal amount of the deposit specified in the call for bids, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect and the Surety shall forthwith pay and forfeit to the Obligee, as penalty and liquidated damages, the amount of this bond. 6thNovember 20 08 SIGNED, SEALED AND DATED THIS DAY OF Layne Christensen Company, 11001 Etiwanda Avenue,, Fontana, 92337 Principal Travel-ers Casualty and Surety Company of America, One Tower, Sq rtford, CT 06183-6014 el i ssa D. Evans, Attorney—in—Fact Surety Surety Phone: 860-277-0111 , 20 Received return of deposit in the sum -of $ air of ysxima tut w611 h,1sptcs.doc 21 • WARNING. THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER POWER OF ATTORNEY TRAVELERS J Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. Seaboard Surety Company St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company Sl. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company ol'America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company Certificate No. Attorney -In Fact No. 019640 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS That Seaboard Surety Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of New York, that St. Paul Fire and Marine insurance Company, SL Paul Guardian Insurance Company and Si. Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Minnesota, that Farmington Casualty Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut, that United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland, that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies"), that the Companies do hereby make, constitute and appoint Melissa D Evans, Patrick T Pribyl, , Mary T Flanigan, Ronald J L Claudia Mandato, Carolyn van Haaren, Laura E. Coon, Jeffrey C Carey, avid M. Kathy L. Fagan, haton, Christy M r rtes R. Teter 111, and Adam J Cantu Clifford B. Young, of the City of Kansas City each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the d executing or uaranteeing bonds and undertakings , State of Missouri , their true and lawful Attorneys) -in -Fact, to sign, execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, recognizances, conditional undertakings and Companies in thein -business of_guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of required or permitted in an}"actions orproceedings allowed by law contracts an g g - IN WITNESS WHEREOF day of the Companies have caused this instrumenttdbe signed and their -corporate seals to be hereto affixed. this 2008 Farmington Casualty Company' Fidelity and Guarantyt.Insurance Company. Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. Seaboard Surety Company St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company State of Connecticut City of Hartford ss. 24th St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company iM J i I -.SEAL o% d.SEAL.sJ By. ce President 24th dayof October 2008 before me personally appeared George W Thompson, who acknowledged himself to this the to be the Senior Vice President of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America. and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, and that he. as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. In Witness Whereof, 1 hereunto set my hand and official seal. My Commission expires the 30th day of June, 2011 58440-5-07 Printed in U S.A. W liA `-' Marie C. Tetreault. Notary Public WARNING THIS POWFR OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT_THE RED BORDER WARNING. THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, which resolutions are now in full force and effect, reading as follows: RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attomeys-in-Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seal bonds, recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking, and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company, provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that any bond, recognizance, contract of indemnity, or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when (a) signed by the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary; or (b) duly executed (under seal, if required) by one or more Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of each of the following officers: President, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents, Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys -in -Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall he valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and -binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached. I, Kori M. Johanson, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary, of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety:Company, of America„and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies this day of NOV 0 6 1008 20 Kori M. Johans Assistant Secretary To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney, call 1-800-421-3880 or contact us at www.travelersbond.com. Please refer to the Attorney -In -Fact number, the above-named individuals and the details of the bond to which the power is attached. WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER CALIFORNIA JURAT WITH AFFIANT STATEMENT .Y,��•�- Yr� - Ash' c�s�s,.os,.c,. ,-c; cs�s_- •�C'.,ccrc`i�� :�c<�.CY�%CS'..�4' S/-` , /-S at,%.t/-*i aS,A .4a ca4 g See Attached Document (Notary to cross out lines 1-6 below) ❑ See Statement Below (Lines 1-5 to be completed only by document signer[s], not Notary) Signature of Document Signer No. 1 State of California County oS 11 &T//3t SHELLIE M. FOX Commission #t 1798644 Notary Public - California San Bernardino County Myco yi.EriesMay20.2012 Place Notary Seal Above Signature of Document Signer No. 2 (if any) Subscribed and sworn to (or affirmed) before me on this 211-:L7day of Able/i 1--1' , 20_0E_, by Date Month Year (1) c_1Lq / L. ueth5 t —r'-) Name of Signer proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person who appeared before me (.) (,) (and (2) Name of Signer proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person who ppeared before me.) Signatur OPTIONAL Signature of Notary Public Though the information below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. Further Description of Any Attached Document Title or Type of Documen 1 OF SIGNER 4#1 Top of thumb here OF SIGNER -#2 Top of thumb here Document Date: Number of Pages: Signer(s) Other Than Named Above: y er -r -or -el -r -e• IV -r er d -r er -r "IV er er r "el 'AV-e!„er -r -el -el-rte e�r es -ef -r r -e -r -r -Or -r -r -er -e ©2007 National Notary Association • 9350 De Soto Ave., P O. Box 2402 • Chatsworth, CA 91313-2402 • www.NationalNotary.org Item 45910 Reorder Call Toll -Free 1-800-876-6827 1.15 Proposal Signature Page CITY OF YAKIMA (Gardner Well) (Project Number 2132) The bidder is hereby advised that by signature of this proposal acknowledged all requirements and signed all certificates contained A proposal guaranty in an amount of five percent (5%) of the approximate estimate of quantities at the above prices and in the attached hereto, payable to the city of Yakima: CASH CASHIER'S CHECK CERTIFIED CHECK 0 u PROPOSAL BOND he/she is deemed to have herein total bid, based upon the form as indicated below, is In the amount of. ,5-07D Receipt is hereby acknowledged of addendum(s) No.(s) SFS' �QO QP 223` PHONE NUMBER WASHINGTON STATE CONTRACTORS LICENSE NUMBER LA - 17-1-E CC- 0 `i3,1- 7 L6 \IATUR / F AA.UTH0RIaErFFICIAL(s) FIRM NAME ( LAJi �F�rRtST�TlS (ADDRESS) 1100) ' I tWA-tsAs).A'` � five i -c+--NA CA . 9-33 7 FEDERAL ID No [ if ( � 11 IP -1017 If I AI Note (1) This proposal form is not transferable and any alteration of the firm's name entered hereon without prior permission from the Secretary of Transportation will be cause for considering the proposal irregular and subsequent rejection of the bid (2) Please refer to section 1-02 6 of the standard specifications, re. "Preparation of Proposal," or "Article 4" of the Instructions to Bidders for building construction jobs. (3) Should it be necessary to modify this proposal either in writing or by electronic means, please make reference to the following project number in your communication — 2132 city of yak,rna gardner well bid specs-dOC 23 (This page intentionally left blank for duplex printing.) city of yakana gardncr wall bid spacs.doc 24 SECTION II CONTRACT DOCUMENTS city of yakima gardner well bid specs.doc 25 (This page intentionally left blank for duplex printing.) city of yakima pardner woll Old spccs.doc 26 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The following forms are to be executed and compliance with the subsections within this section is required after the contract is awarded, a. Contract. This agreement to be executed by the successful bidder b Performance Bond: To be executed by the successful bidder and his surety company c. "Public.Liability and`Property-Damage Insurance. The successful bidder shall submitted certification to the City in accordance with Section 1-07 18 of the Standard Specifications 2.1 Contract THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into in triplicate, this ) day of )r1.& 2008, by and between the City of Yakima, hereinafter called the Owner, and Layqe Cbr/Ei'e-n ar7 , a Corporation, hereinafter called the Contractor WITNESSETH That in consideration of the terms and conditions contained herein and attached and made a part of this agreement, the parties hereto covenant and agree as follows. 1 The Contract -or` -shall do all work and furnish all tools, materials, labor and equipment for THE BID AMOUNT OF $J/it0, (t /i' 0 , for Gardner Well/Project Number 2132, all in accordance with, and .as described in the attached plans and specifications and the 2008 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction which are by this reference incorporated herein and made a part hereof, and shall perform any alterations in or additions to the work provided under this contract and every part thereof The successful bidder is required to -attend a pre -construction meeting within 15 days of notice of selection, begin work within 45 days of award of contract and written notice to proceed, and shall give at least five (5) working days advance notice to the Engineer prior to beginning work. Once started, work shall proceed continuously without interruption until completed, and shall not to exceed 180 days If said work is not completed within 180 days, the Contractor agrees to pay to the Owner the sum specified in the Standard Specifications for each and every day said work remains uncompleted after expiration of the specified time, as liquidated damages. The Contractors shall provide and bear the expense of all equipment, work and labor of any sort whatsoever that may be required for the transfer of materials and for constructing and completing the work provided for in this contract and every part thereof, except such as are mentioned in the specifications to be furnished by the City of Yakima. II The City of Yakima hereby promises and agrees with the Contractor to employ, and does employ the Contractor to provide the materials and to do and cause to be done the above described work and to complete and finish the same according to the attached plans and specifications and the terms and conditions herein contained and hereby contracts to pay for the same according to the attached specifications and the schedule of unit or itemized prices hereto attached, at the time and in the manner and -upon the conditions provided for in this contract. III. The Contractor for himself, and for his heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, does hereby agree to the full performance of all the covenants herein contained upon the part of the Contractor IV It is further provided that no liability shall attach to the City of Yakima by reason of entering into this contract, except as expressly provided herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have caused this agreement to be executed the day and year first herein above written. Countersigned: This - day of CITY OF YAKIMA ems/, er2008 city of yakima gardner well bid specs.doc 27 L O 1eRACjQR r� B Corporation fou y W aabr? (Print Name) (eierJ fY)ana - (President, Owner, etc.) Its 2.2 Performance Bond To City Of Yakima KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS. That we, the undersigned, a Corporation as Principal and a corporation organized -nd existing under the laws of the State of as a surety corporation, and quali ed under the laws of the State of Washington to become surety upon bonds of contractors with municipal corporations, :s surety, are jointly and severally held and firmly bound to the CITY OF YAKIMA in the penal sum of $ .r the payment of which sum on demand we bind ourselves and our successors, heirs, administrators or personal representativ: s, as the case may be. This obligation is entered . to in pursuance of the statutes of the State of Washington, the Ordinances of the CITY OF YAKIMA. DATED at Yakima, Washington, his • day of , 20 Never -the -less, the conditions of th- -bove obligations are such that: WHEREAS, the City Marla. -r and City Clerk of the CITY OF YAKIMA has let or is about to let to the said , the above bounded Principal, a certain ce tract, the said contract being numbered , and providing for (which contract is referred to herein and is made a part hereof as though attached hereto), and,' WHEREAS, the said Principal has accepted, or I about to accept, the said contract, and undertake to perform the work therein provided for in the manner and within the tim set forth; NOW THEREFORE, if the said shall faithfully perform all of the provisions of said contra extensions of time as may be granted under said contract, men, and all persons who shall supply said principal or sub - work, and shall hold said CITY OF YAKIMA, its employees, damage occasioned to any person or property by reason of a any sub -contractor in the performance of said work and shall ind and elected or appointed officials, harmless from any damage or said contract or from defects appearing or developing in the ma contract within a period of one year after its acceptance thereof b obligation shall be void; but otherwise it shall be and remain in full force t in the manner and within the time therein set forth, or within such nd shall pay all laborers, mechanics, sub -contractors and material ntractors with provisions and supplies for the carrying on of said agents, and elected or appointed officials, harmless from any carelessness or negligence on the part of said principal, or nify and hold the CITY OF YAKIMA, its employees, agents, pense by reason of failure of performance as specified in rial or workmanship provided or performed under said the CITY OF YAKIMA, then and in that event this nd effect. Approved as to form: (City Attorney) city of yaklma gardner well bid specs.doc (Contractor) By Its' (Print ame) (President, Owner, etc...) (Surety) By - (Print Name) Its:' 28 • Bond No. 105200595 2.2 Performance Bond To City Of Yakima KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, Layne Chri stensen Company a Del aware Corporation as Principal and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Connecticut as a surety corporation, and qualified under the laws of the State of Washington to become surety upon bonds of contractors with municipal corporations, as surety, are jointly and severally held and firmly bound to the CITY OF YAKIMA in the penal sum of $ * for the payment of which sum on demand we bind ourselves and our successors, heirs, administrators or personal representatives, as the case may be. *One Million Four Hundred Twenty Thousand Six Hundred Sixty Six and 00/100 ($1,420,666.00) This obligation is entered into in pursuance of the statutes of the State of Washington, the Ordinances of the CITY OF YAKIMA. DATED at Yakima, Washington, this 20thday of November , 20 08 , Never -the -less, the conditions of the above obligations are such that WHEREAS, the City Manager and City Clerk of the CITY OF YAKIMA has let or is about to let to the said Layne Chri stensen Company , the above bounded Principal, a certain contract, the said contract being numbered 2132 , and providing for Drill and Install. New Well (which contract is referred to herein and is made a part hereof as though attached hereto), and, WHEREAS, the said Principal has accepted, or is about to accept, the said contract, and undertake to perform the work therein provided for in the manner and within the time set forth; NOW THEREFORE, if the said Layne Christensen Company shall faithfully perform all of the provisions of said contract in the manner and within the time therein set forth, or within such extensions of time as may be granted under said contract, and shall pay all laborers, mechanics, sub -contractors and material. men, and all persons who shall supply said principal or sub -contractors with provisions and supplies for the carrying on of said work, and shaft hold said CITY OF YAKIMA, its employees, agents, and elected or appointed officials, harmless from any damage occasioned to any person or property by reason of any carelessness or negligence on the part of said principal, or any sub -contractor in the performance of said work and shall indemnify and hold the CITY OF YAKIMA, its employees, agents, and elected or appointed officials, harmless from any damage or expense by reason of failure of performance as specified in said contract or from defects appearing or developing in -the material or workmanship provided or performed under.said contract within a period of one year after its acceptance thereof by the CITY OF YAKIMA, then and in that event this obligation shall be void; but otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect. Layne Christensen Company, 11001 Etiwanda Avenue, Fontana, CA 92337 tractor) l .veAleierizt (thettfc ,4l at'1ieJ Approved as to form: C 1c -t (City Attorneyy clly of yaklma gamine* wall bid apecs.doc By: NUI'S L. c.., dt (Print Name) Its: tv c� / `a (President Owner, eta'_.) Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America One Tower Square, Hartford, vaT 06183-6014 (860)277-0111 By: Melissa D. Evans //I/ (Surety) / lL !i✓ (Print Name) Its: Attorney -in -Fact 28 CALIFORNIA ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT a� .•�t�t,cs.V•TN-r./i\•1..",RV-W,Ats�. �t�t,aS.s�t c�t�C!v� t✓, g�c�. s� i SV • ' i s —'• s\N-'t • t s\t/'•,,AV—t sem. Tr�t�t� State of California County of Siff) 6v,I4,/?9 ,'2 c) } 1 � / On'/','7 2// / A4 before me, /)eJ//r' f7. / k , 4h?hZ- Date Here Insert Name and Title of the Officer, personally appeared L. /Ua.-sr'r) Name(p) of Signey SHELLIE M. FOX Commission * 1798644 Notary Public - California I San Bernardino County - MyConvneedesMaa0.2012 t Place Notary Seal Above who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument. I certify under PENALTY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing paragraph is true and correct. WITNESS my hand an official seal. 0) i Signatur OPTIONAL Signature of Notary Public Though the information below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. Description of Attached Document Title or Type of Document: Document Date• Number of Pages: Signer(s) Other Than Named Above Capacity(ies) Claimed by Signer(s) Signer's Name ❑ Individual ❑ Corporate Officer — Title(s) ❑ Partner — ❑ Limited ❑ General ❑ Attorney in Fact ❑ Trustee ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Other Signer Is Representing RIGHTTHUMBPRINT OF SIGNER - Top of thumb here Signer's Name ❑ Individual ❑ Corporate Officer — Title(s) ❑ Partner — ❑ Limited ❑ General ❑ Attorney in Fact ❑ Trustee ❑ Guardian or Conservator ❑ Other Signer Is Representing: RIGHTTHUMBPRINT OF SIGNER Top of thumb here +y s e- , -d<'y vG��'vG�<'LG�< / L ?/L�<'✓G'eiG'✓Gs/ =�f�<`yG'LG'a�p�e:G'eiG'ti -✓GVG'•✓<'!/i-r/<'e/ •t/<�e!' ' S6 'eiG�G�<�/-•.�,-.v,-%G'✓GSL,-✓ ©2007 National Notary Association • 9350 De Soto Ave., P.O. Box 2402 • Chatsworth, CA 91313-2402 • www.NationalNotary.org Item 85907 Reorder Call Toll -Free 1-800-876-6827 • a or TRAVELERSJ WARNING. THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER POWER OF ATTORNEY Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. Seaboard Surety Company St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company Attorney -In Fact No. 219640 St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company Certificate No, 0 0 2 4 32 4 92 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS That Seaboard Surety Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of New York, that St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Minnesota, that Farmington Casualty Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut. that United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland, that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa. and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the `Companies"), and that the Companies do hereby make, constitute and appoint Melissa D Evans, Patrick T Pribyl, Debra J Scarborough, David M Lockton, Christy M. McCart, Mary T Flanigan, Ronald J. Lockton, Clifford B. Young, Claudia Mandato, Carolyn van Haaren, Laura E. Coon, Jeffrey C Carey, Kathy L. Fagan, Charles R. Teter III, and Adam J. Cantu of the City of Kansas City , State of Missouri , their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign, execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, recognizances, conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of=guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted`in any'aetions or -proceedings allowed by law =y IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the°Companies have caused this instrument,to be signed and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed, this 11th day of June 2008 Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty' InsaranceCompany '^ Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. Seaboard Surety Company St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company State of Connecticut City of Hartford ss. St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company .t POR i 4JP A't' tC0R A)t: cs"+ Y W OpPORgT F �`•SEAL,o3 SEAL.a°i S.:wN ! �s_ • By• ce President On this the 11th day of June 2008 before me personally appeared George W Thompson, who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. In Witness Whereof, 1 hereunto set my hand and official seal. My Commission expires the 30th day of June, 2011 58440-5-07 Printed in U S.A. `(1\0kAi i c . Marie C. Tetreault, Notary Public WARNING. THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER WARNING. THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters. Inc Seaboard Surety Company. St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, which resolutions are now in full force ancl effect, reading as follows. RESOLVED. that the Chairman. the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company s name and seal with the Company s seal bonds, recognizances. contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond. recognizance, or conditional undertaking. and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company, provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary' and it is FURTHER RESOLVED. that any bond, recognizance, contract of indemnity. or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when (a) signed by the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President, any Second Vice President. the Treasurer ally Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary or (h) duly executed (under seal, if required) by one or more Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority: and it is FURTHER RESOLVED. that the signature of each of the following officers. President, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, and the seal of the Company may he affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents, Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys -in -Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall he valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any hond or understanding to which it is attached. 1, Kori M. Johanson. the undersigned, Assistant Secretary, of Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., Seaboard Surety Company St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies this Nov 0 ?ON day of , 20 Kori M. Johanstht(Assistant Secretary eft•> .94, jC00. FORAreit,1, .�00.PORAr�, Sr,1 :rett Z n1 SEAL 6 'te SEAL.D `�•,, , To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney, call 1-800-421-3880 or contact us at www travelershond.com. Please refer to the Attorney -In -Fact number, the above-named individuals and the details of the bond to which the power is attached. WARNING. THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER ACORDT. CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 5/1/2009 TE (MM/DDIVYYY) DA 12/4/2008 PRODUCERLockton Companies, LLC -1 Kansas City 444 W 47th Street Suite 900 Kansas City MO 64112-1906 (816) 960-9000 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURED LAYNE CHRISTENSEN COMPANY 1054252 11001 ETIWANDA AVENUE PHONE. (909) 390-2833 FONTANA, CA 92337 INSURER A. ACE AMERICAN INSURANCE CO. A INSURER B: AMERICAN GUARANTEE & LIABILITY* GENERAL X INSURER C: *INSURANCE CO. HDOG23738909 INSURER D: 5/1/2009 INSURER E. ..e,.,, oe,,..ne nnne unrrnuevnrr a ...... n�nw,n..c (•MITDGr`T BETWEEN THF ISSIIINC FK %/WV uV,vw .,...alma,. ------.-••---... THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR ADD'L NSRD TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE (MM/DD/YY) POLICY EXPIRATION DATE (MMIDD/YY) LIMITS A GENERAL X LIABILITY COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY HDOG23738909 5/1/2008 5/1/2009 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 2,000,000 DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES (Ea occurence) $ 500,000 ICLAIMS MADE a OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $ 10,000 X GEN'L IPOLICY CONTRACTUAL PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 2,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 5,000,000 AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER- I ] JERC7 n LOC PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 5,000,000 A AUTOMOBILE X — — X X LIABILITY— ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS— NON -OWNED AUTOS ISA/ -I08233937 5/1/2008 5/1/2009 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ 2,000,000 BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ XXAXXXX BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ XXXXXXX PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ XXXXXXX GARAGE LIABILITY ANY AUTO NOT APPLICABLE AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ XXXXXXX OTHER THAN EA ACC $ XXXXXXX AUTO ONLY AGG $ XXXXXXX B EXCESS/UMBRELLA ] LIABILITY OCCUR CLAIMS MADE DEDUCTIBLE X UMBRELLA FORM $ 3807886-04 5/1/2008 5/1/2009 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 AGGREGATE $ 1,000,000 $ XXXXXXX $ XXXXXXX $ XXXXXXX A A WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED?NO If yes, descnbe under SPECIAL PROVISIONS below WLR C44462692 (AOS) SCF C44462734 (WI) 5/1/2008 5/1/2008 5/1/2009 5/1/2009 TH- TORY LIMITS OER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 5,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 5,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 5,000,000 OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES / EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT / SPECIAL PROVISIONS CITY OF YAKIMA, THEIR AGENTS, EMPLOYEES, AND ELECTED OR APPOINTED OFFICIALS AS ADDITIONAL INSUREDS FOR PROJECT 42132. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION [4231 3973996 CITY OF YAKIMA 2301 FRUITVALE BLVD YAKIMA WA 98902 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILLXKIEJMILTAXMAIL 20 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT,IIDONDMIX INIKOSEMMLXVIONEAVANOWDEEPODRRIKNXMODZOB m4Aemounizt AUTHO PRESENTATIVE e ACORD 25 (2001/08) For questions regarding this certificate, contact the number listed in the 'Producer' section above and speedy the cfe de © ACORD CORPORATION 1988 POLICY NUMBER: HDOG23738909 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 20 10 07 04 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED - OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS - SCHEDULED PERSON OR ORGANIZATION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name Of Additional Insured Person(s) Location(s) Of Covered Operations Or Organization(s): BLANKET WHERE REQUIRED BY CONTRACT CITY OF YAKIMA, ITS AGENTS, EMPLOYEES, AND ELECTED OR APPOINTED OFFICIALS Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. A. Section II - Who Is An Insured is amended to include as an additional insured the person(s) or organization(s) shown in the Schedule, but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" caused, in whole or in part, by' 1 Your acts or omissions; or 2. The acts or omissions of those acting on your behalf; in the performance of your ongoing operations for the additional insured(s) at the location(s) designated above B With respect to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, the following additional exclusions apply* This insurance does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" occurring after 1 All work, including materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with such work, on the project (other than service, maintenance or repairs) to be performed by or on behalf of the additional insured(s) at the location of the covered operations has been completed; or 2. That portion of "your work" out of which the injury or damage arises has been put to its intended use by any person or organization other than another contractor or subcontractor engaged in performing operations for a principal as a part of the same project. CG 20 10 07 04 Attachment Code 423 Certificate ID 3973996 • 2.4 Minimum Wage Affidavit The prevailing rate of wages to be paid to all workmen, laborers, or mechanics employed in the performance of any part of this contract shall be in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 39.12 RCW, as amended. The rules and regulations of the Department of .Labor and Industries are by reference made a part of this contract as though fully set forth herein. Inasmuch as the contractor will be held responsible for paying the prevailing wages, it is imperative that all contractors familiarize themselves with the current wage rates, as determined by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries, before submitting bids based on these specifications. In case any dispute arises as to what are the prevailing rates of wages for work of a similar nature and such dispute cannot be adjusted by the parties in interest, including labor and management representatives, the matter shall be referred for arbitration to the Director of the Department of Labor and Industries of the State and his decision therein shall be final and conclusive and biding on all parties involved in the dispute as provided for by RCW 39 12.060 as amended. Current prevailing wage rules and data can be furnished by the Industrial Statistician upon request. You may submit your request to: Department of Labor and Industries ESAC Division PO Box 44540 Olympia, Washington 98504-4540 Telephone 360-902-5335 I, the undersigned, having been duly sworn, depose, say and certify that in connection with the performance of the work, payment for which this voucher is submitted, I have paid the following rate per hour to each classification of laborers, workmen, or mechanics, as indicated upon the attached list, now referred to and by such reference incorporated in and made an integral part hereof, for all such employed in the performance of such work; and no laborer, workman or mechanic so employed upon such work has been paid less than the prevailing rate of -wage or less than the minimum rate of wages as specified in the principal contract; that I have read the above and foregoing statement and certificate, know the contents thereof and the substance as set forth therein is true to my knowledge and belief Contractor signature ,a /ofnra etrfi-ir4-Hailed Subscribed and sworn to before me on this day of 200 Notary Public in and for the State of Washington residing at Commission Expires city of yakima gardner well bid specs.doc 31 2.5 Non -Discrimination Provision During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows: (1) The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, color, religion, sex or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. (2) The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex or national origin. (3) The contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice, to be provided by the agency contracting officer, advising the labor union or workers' representative of the contractor's commitments under Section 202 of Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. (4) The contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, and of the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. (5) The contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, and by the rules regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit access to his books, records, and accounts by the contracting agency and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders. (6) In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this contract or with any such rules, regulations, or orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated, or suspended in whole or in part and the contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies involved as provided in Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulation, or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law. (7) The contractor will include the provisions of Paragraphs (1) through (7) in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations, or orders 01 the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to Section 204 of Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as the contracting agency may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for noncompliance: Provided however, that in the event the contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by the contracting agency, the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States." city of yakima gardncr wall bld specs.doc 32 0 CALIFORNIA JURAT WITH AFFIANT STATEMENT ,,,,• .v—v; vq r -c . ,: • .• w4-0.•� 4'—v; 'v''• V"".../7.. • . L. See Attached Document (Notary to cross out lines 1-6 below) ❑ See Statement Below (Lines 1-5 to be completed only by document signer[s], not Notary) Signature of Document Signer No. 1 State of California(('� County of lC�/7 6",7147-64/2c) SHELVE M. FOX Commission # 1798644 Notary Public • California +?"•Pv% San Bernardino County L_ _ MyCorrvn EtlpMes % 2o, 2o12 _ � Place Notary Seal Above Signature of Document Signer No. 2 (if any) Subscribed and sworn to (or /aff-irmed) before me on this (� ' day of �p0/'Y,1/�"r , 20 c2' , by Date Month Year (1)%&t�/a5 / _ a)44,-/-5/4') Name of Signer (2) proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person who appearebefore me (.) (,) d Name of Signer proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the per .n who appeared before me.) Signat OPTIONAL Signature of Notary Public Though the information below is not required by law, it may prove valuable to persons relying on the document and could prevent fraudulent removal and reattachment of this form to another document. Further Description of Any Attached Document Title or Type of Document: Document Date: Number of Pages: Signer(s) Other Than Named Above: RIGHTTHU 'OF SIG BPRINT. Top of thumb here RIGHTTHU -74„LOF 1BPRINT 1342'.; .. Top of thumb here �. • • A_. �. �. •\-. �_. •�� �. © 2007 National Notary Association • 9350 De Soto Ave., P.O. Box 2402 • Chatsworth, CA 91313-2402 • www.NationalNotary.org Item 85910 Reorder Call Toll -Free 1-800-876-6827 2.6 Women And Minority Business Enterprise Policy It is the policy of the City of Yakima that women and minority business enterprises shall have the maximum opportunity to participate in the performance of work relating to the City's activities To this end, the City is committed to take all necessary and reasonable steps in accordance with state and federal rules and regulations to ensure women and minority business enterprises the maximum opportunity to compete for and to perform contracts. In order to enhance opportunities for women and minority businesses to participate in certain contractor opportunities with the City of Yakima, and as a recipient of federal and state financial assistance, the City is committed to a women and minority business enterprise utilization program The City is determined to maximize women and minority business opportunities through participation in the competitive bidding process through women and minority business enterprise affirmative action programs administratively established by the City Manager and monitored and implemented in accordance with state and federal rules and regulations All women and minority business enterprise programs shall include specific goals for participation of women and minority businesses in City projects of at least ten percent (10%) of the total dollar value of City contract over $10,000 Goals shall be reviewed and updated annually by the City Manager for applicability and to ensure that the intent of this policy is accomplished This statement of policy will be widely disseminated to all managers, supervisors, minorities and women employed by the City of Yakima as well as to contractors, vendors, suppliers, minorities and women who may seek the City's procurement and construction contracts related to the women and minority business enterprise programs. Contractors associations will be made aware of construction projects affected by this policy through all available avenues to assure that plans/specifications, bid forms and invitations to bid are as widely distributed as possible city of yakima gardner well bid specs.doc 33 RESOLUTION No. I — 48 1 6r A RESOLUTION adopting a "Women And Minority Business Enterprise Policy" for the City of Yakima. WHEREAS, the City of Yakima is the recipient of federal and state assistance which assistance carries with it the obli- gation of contracting with. Women And Minority Business Enter- prises for the performance of public works, and WHEREAS, it is the intention of the City of Yakima that Women And Minority Business Enterprises shall have the maximum practicable opportunity to participate in the performance of such public works, and WHEREAS, the City of Yakima is determined to maximize Women And Minority Business Enterprise opportunities for parti- cipation in its competitive bidding process through the adoption of the "Women And Minority Business Enterprise Policy" statement attached hereto, now, therefore, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF YAKIMA: The City Council hereby adopts the "Women And Minority Business Enterprise Policy", a copy of which is attached hereto and by reference made a part hereof. ADOPTED BY THE CITY COUNCIL this _ day of 1983. ATTEST: 71 4,yvv„ o. Oa m&A-c _kJ Mayor City Clerk city of yakima gardner well bld specs.doc 34 1.! 4. b ]. 27 Affirmative Action -Plan The bidders, contractors and subcontractors will not be eligible for award of a contract under this Advertisement for Bids unless it certifies as prescribed, that it adopts the minimum goals and timetable of minority and women workforce utilization and specific affirmative action steps as set forth by the City of_Yakima, This is directed at increasing minority and women workforce utilization by means of applying good faith efforts to carrying out such steps However, no contractor or subcontractor shall be found to be in noncompliance solely on account of its failure to meet its goals within its timetables, but such contractor shall be given the opportunity to demonstrate that it has instituted all of the specific affirmative action steps specified by the City of Yakima, and has made every good faith effort to make these steps work toward the attainment of its goals, all to the purpose of expanding minority and women workforce utilization on all of its projects in the City of Yakima, Washington In all cases, the compliance of a bidder, contractor or subcontractor will be determined in accordance with its respective obligations under the terms of these Bid Conditions. All bidders and all contractors and subcontractors performing or to perform work on projects subject to these Bid Conditions hereby agree to inform their subcontractors of their respective obligations under the terms and requirements of these Bid Conditions, including the provisions relating to goals of minority and women employment and training Specific Affirmative Action Steps Bidders, contractors and subcontractors subject to this contract must engage in affirmative action directed at increasing minority and women workforce utilization, which is at least as extensive and as specific as the following steps a. The contractor shall notify community organizations that the contractor has employment opportunities available and shall maintain records of the organizations' response. b The contractor shall maintain a file of the names and addresses of each minority and women worker referred to him and what action was taken with respect to each such referred worker, and if the worker was not employed, the reasons therefore. If such worker was not sent to the union hiring hall for referral or if such worker was not employed by the contractor, the contractor's file shall document this and the reasons therefore c. The contractor shall promptly notify the City of Yakima Engineering Division an Contract Compliance Officer when the union or unions with whom the contractor has collective bargaining agreement has not referred to the contractor a minority or woman worker sent by the contractor or the contractor has other information that the union referral process has impeded him in his efforts to meet his goal d. The contractor shall participate in training programs in the area, especially those funded by the Department of Labor. e. The contractor shall disseminate his EEO policy within his own organization by including it in any policy manual; by publicizing it in company newspapers, annual reports, etc., by conducting staff, employee and union representatives' meetings to explain and discuss the policy; by posting of the policy; and by specific review of the policy with minority employees. city of yakima gardner well bid specs-doc 35 f. The contractor shall disseminate his EEO policy externally by informing and discussing it with all recruitment sources; by advertising in news media, specifically including minority news media; and by notifying and discussing it with all subcontractors and suppliers. The contractor shall make specific efforts and constant personal (both written and oral) recruitment efforts directed at all minority or women organizations, schools with minority students, minority recruitment organizations and minority training organizations, within the contractor's recruitment areas. The contractor shall make specific efforts to encourage present minority employees to recruit their friends and relatives. The contractor shall validate all man specifications; selection requirements, tests, etc. j. The contractor shall make every effort to promote after school, summer and vacation employment to minority youth. The contractor shall develop on-the-job training opportunities and participate and assist in any association or employer group training programs relevant to the contractor's employee needs consistent with its obligations under this bid. The contractor shall continually inventory and evaluate all minority and women personnel for promotion opportunities and encourage minority and women employees to seek such opportunities. g. h. k. m. The contractor shall make sure that seniority practices, job classifications, etc., do not have a discriminatory effect. n. The contractor shall make certain that all facilities and company activities are non- segregated. o. The contractor shall continually monitor all personnel activities to ensure that his EEO policy is being carried out. The contractor shall solicit bids for subcontracts from available minority and women subcontractors, engaged in the trades covered by these Bid Conditions, including circulation of minority and women contractor associations. Non cooperation: In the event the union is unable to provide the contractor with a reasonable flow of minority and women referrals within the time limit set forth in the collective bargaining agreements, the contractor shall, through independent recruitment efforts, fill the employment vacancies without regard to race, color, religion, sex or national origin, making full efforts to obtain qualified and/or qualifiable minorities and women. (The U.S. Department of Labor has held that it shall be no excuse that the union with which the contractor has a collective bargaining agreement providing for exclusive referral failed to refer minority or women employees.) In the event the union referral practice prevents the contractor from meeting the obligations pursuant to Executive Order 11246 and 23 CFR Part 230 as amended, and the Standard Specifications, such contractor shall immediately notify the City of Yakima Engineering Department or the City of Yakima Compliance Officer. P. q. clty of yakima gardner well bid specs.doc 36 .1 • 2.8 Subcontractors' Certification Subcontractors' Certification is not required at the time of bid This Certification must be completed by each subcontractor prior to award of any subcontract. that: (SUBCONTRACTOR) certifies 1 It intends to use the following listed construction trades in the work under the subcontract and; As to those trades for which it is required by these Bid Conditions to comply with these Bid Conditions, it adopts the minimum minority and women workforce utilization goals and the specific affirmative action steps for all construction work (both federal and non-federal) in Yakima, Washington, subject to these Bid Condition, those trades being. and; 2. It will obtain from each of its subcontractors prior to the award of any subcontract under this subcontract the Subcontractor Certification required by these Bid conditions. (Signature of Authorized Representative of Subcontractor) city of yakima gardner well bid specs.doc 37 2.9 Materially And Responsiveness The certification required to be made by the bidder pursuant to these Bid Conditions is material, and will govern the bidder's performance on the project and will be made a part of his bid. Failure to submit the certification wilt render the bid non responsive. Compliance and Enforcement Contractors are responsible for informing their subcontractor (regardless of tier) as to their respective obligations under the conditions of the contract here (as applicable). Bidders, contractors and subcontractors hereby agree to refrain from entering into any contract or contract modification subject to Executive Order 11246, as amended on September 24, 1965, with a contractor debarred from, or who is determined not to be a responsible' bidder for, government contracts and federally assisted construction contracts pursuant to Executive Order. The bidder, contractor or subcontractor shall carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of the equal opportunity clause including suspension, termination and cancellation of existing subcontracts as may be imposed or ordered by the administering agency, the contracting agency or the Office of Federal Contract Compliance pursuant to the Executive Order. Any bidder, or contractor or subcontractor who shall fail to cavy out such sanctions and penalties shall be deemed to be in non-compliance with these Bid Conditions and Executive Order 11246, as amended. Nothing herein is intended to relieve any contractor or subcontractor during the term of its contract on this project from compliance with Executive Order 11246, as amended, and the Equal Opportunity Clause of its contract. Violation of any substantial requirement in the affirmative action plan by a contractor or subcontractor covered by these Bid Conditions including the failure of such contractor or subcontractor to make a good faith effort to meet it fair share of the trade's goals of minority and women workforce utilization, and shall be grounds for imposition of the sanctions and penalties provided at Section 209 (a) of Executive Order 11246, as amended Each agency shall review its contractors' and subcontractors' employment practices during the performance of the contract. If the agency determines that the affirmative action plan no longer represents effective affirmative action, it shall so notify the Office of Federal Contract Compliance which shall be solely responsible for any final determination of that question and the Consequences thereof. In regard to these conditions, if the contractor or subcontractor meets its goals or if the contractor or subcontractor can demonstrate that it has made every good faith effort to meet those goals, the contractor of the subcontractor shall be presumed to be in compliance with Executive Order 11246, as amended, the implementing regulations and its obligations under these Bid Conditions and no formal sanctions or proceedings leading toward sanctions shall be instituted unless the agency otherwise determines that the contractor or subcontractor is not providing equal employment opportunities. In judging whether a contractor or subcontractor has met its goals, the agency will consider each contractors or subcontractor's minority and women workforce utilization and will not take into consideration the minority and women workforce utilization of its subcontractors. Where the agency finds that the contractor or subcontractor has failed to comply with the requirement of Executive Order 11246, as amended, the implementing regulations and its obligations under these Bid Conditions, the agency shall take such action city of yakima ganlner well bid specs.doc 38 and impose such sanctions as may be appropriate under Executive Order and the regulations. When the agency proceeds with such formal action, it has the burden of proving that the contractor has not met the requirements of these Bid Conditions, but the contractor's failure to meet his goals shall shift to him the requirement to come forward with evidence to show that he has met the "good faith" requirements of these Bid Conditions by instituting at least the Specific Affirmative Action steps listed above and by making every good faith effort to make those steps work toward the attainment of its goals within its timetables The pendency of such formal proceedings shall be taken into consideration by Federal agencies in determining whether such contractor or subcontractor can comply with the requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and is therefore a "responsible prospective contractor" within the meaning of the Federal Procurement Regulations It shall be no excuse that the union with which the contractor has a collective bargaining agreement providing for exclusive referral failed to refer minority and women employees The procedures set forth in these conditions shall not apply to any contract when the head of the contracting or administering agency determines that such contract is essential to the national security and that its award without following such procedures is necessary to the national security. Upon making such a determination, the agency head will notify, in writing, the Director of the Office of Federal Contractor Compliance within thirty days. Requests for exemptions from these Bid Conditions must be made in writing, with justification, to the: Director Office of Federal Contractor Compliance U.S Department of Labor Washington, D C 20210 and shall be forwarded through and with the endorsement of the agency head Contractors and subcontractors must keep such records and file such reports relating to the provisions of these Bid Conditions as shall be required by the contracting or administering agency or the Office of Federal Contractor Compliance. city of yakima gardner well bid specs.doc 39 (This page intentionally left blank for duplex printing.) city of yakima gardner well bid spacs.doc 40 1 4 EXHIBIT C ENGINEERING TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND PRODUCT CUT SHEETS Engineering Technical Specifications DIVISION 1 01000 01060 01300 01310 01500 01700 01710 DIVISION 2 02727 DIVISION 11 11200 11205 11212 11516 11517 DIVISION 15 15060 15065 15070 15100 15250 15450 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Scope of Work Safety Submittals Construction Schedule Temporary Facilities Contract Closeout Disinfection Requirements SITE CONSTRUCTION Precast Vaults EQUIPMENT Flowmeters Level Transducer and Pressure Transmitter Vertical Turbine Pump Chlorine Injection System Fluoride Injection System MECHANICAL Pipe and Pipe Fittings Pipe Supports Pipe Penetrations Valves and Appurtenances Electrical Heat Trace Tape Emergency Shower and Eyewash Equipment The technical specification sections listed above have been prepared under the direction of the Professional Engineer, registered in the State of Washington, whose seal appears below: Pec. 1ZoIo Golder Associates Golder Associates Inc. 18300 NE Union Hill Road, Suite 200 Redmond, WA 98052 USA Tel: (425) 883-0777 Fax: (425) 882-5498 www.golder.com City of Yakima Gardner Well Engineering Design Source No. S10 Water System ID: 991509 983-1268.400 August 2010 DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01000 SCOPE OF WORK 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 Introduction The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and equipment and means to construct the project entitled• City of Yakima, Gardner Well House Design and Distribution System. The Work shall be constructed as shown on the Drawings and described herein. 1.2 Standards and Policies A. The latest edition and current applicable amendments of the following standards apply to the Scope of Work described herein. ® Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction prepared by the Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT) ® Washington State Chapter of the American Public Works Association (APWA) B. The Contractor shall complete Work in accordance with applicable state and local laws, ordinance, rules, codes, regulations, orders, or similar requirements from the City of Yakima, including• ® City of Yakima Public Waterline General Notes 1 City of Yakima Sewer Installation Policies C. Contractor shall perform all work activities in complete compliance with applicable laws, regulations, and standards D. Contractor shall ensure that all standards for design, manufacture, and installation of equipment under this Scope of Work are appropriate for the Site, including but not limited to locally available electrical power E. Equipment, fabrication, and workmanship shall comply with standards and codes pertinent to the technical area unless indicated otherwise in the contract documents 1.3 Definitions A. The City of Yakima is the "Owner" B. Golder Associates Inc is the "Engineer" C. An employee of the City of Yakima assigned the duty of construction inspection is referred to as the "Inspector". The Inspector will be the Owners' quality assurance and quality control (QA/QC) representative during the construction period, to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents. D. The "Owner's Representative" refers to an employee of the Owner or Engineer who will be responsible for managing and coordinating all aspects of the project. E. The "Site" as referenced herein shall refer to the location of the new well, in Gardner City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/31/2010 983-1268-400 01000-1 01000_Scope of Work Park, at the Southeast corner of Cornell Avenue and Pierce Street, Yakima, Washington 1.4 Permits A. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining any building permits required for performance of the Scope of Work. 2.0 SCOPE OF WORK The Scope of Work for the project includes but is not limited to the following: A. Connecting the new Gardner Park well to the City of Yakima's distribution system This includes. ▪ Providing and installing a new pump in the new well along with a motor and all electrical switchgear and controls. ▪ Providing and installing piping, valves and appurtenances at the new well ▪ Providing and installing chlorination and fluoridation equipment. ▪ Connection of the new well to the existing main in Cornell Avenue via two oversized 72 -inch pipes and a 12 -inch pipe replacement in Cornell B. Construction of a new well house building in Gardner Park, which includes: ® Pump house to enclose all piping appurtenances and electrical equipment. Site improvements around pump house including gravel surfacing, fencing, security features and parking 2.1 Contractor Qualifications A. The Contractor, his subcontractors, and equipment suppliers shall be fully qualified to perform their respective portions of the Scope of Work, and shall have demonstrated at least five years experience in similar work 2.2 Site Facilities A. The Contractor shall provide facilities for storage of Contractor's materials and equipment. This shall include materials delivered to the site for the performance of the Work. The boundaries of the work area shall be defined by the Owner and/or the Owner's Representative B. Contractor shall provide temporary facilities, such as field office, maintenance, sanitary, telephone, and other utilities, for his own use, as specified in Section 15100 The Owner and/or the Owner's Representative will provide potable water and electricity to the Contractor 2.3 Site Security A. The Contractor shall erect temporary fencing at the site. The gate shall be locked at all times when the Contractor is not present. City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/31/2010 983-1268-400 01000-2 01000_Scope of Work B. The Contractor shall mark, barricade or take other safety measures as necessary to prevent tampering with the well and to eliminate dangerous conditions for persons or animals in the area All pits or other excavations shall be properly flagged and barricaded as required to eliminate any potential safety hazards. C. The Contractor shall maintain the site and any related equipment and supply storage areas in a clean and orderly manner in order to prevent injury to people and animals. The Contractor is responsible for the security of the site and his equipment. D. The building shall be in place prior to any system testing 2.4 Access to Work A. The Contractor shall allow the Owner, Engineer, Inspector, and/or Owner's Representative access to all phases of the work at any time to carry out the required testing and observation 2.5 Coordination and Cooperation with Others A. The Contractor shall coordinate his work through the Owner's Representative with any other contractors or other personnel involved in the project. B. The Contractor shall provide full cooperation with others as necessary for smooth and successful construction, startup, and operation of the system. 2.6 Inspection of Work 2.6.1 General A. The Owner's Representative shall have the duties, responsibilities, and the limitations of authority as set forth herein, which will not be extended without written notification by the Owner. 2.6.2 Inspector A. The Inspector will observe, inspect, review, and test the Contractor's work as required to determine compliance with the project requirements. The Inspector will notify the Owner's Representative of his findings. 2.6.3 Authority A. The Owner's Representative may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents, provided that such variations do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, and provided that such variations are consistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents B. The Owner's Representative will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents as the Owner may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with, or reasonably inferable from, the overall intent of the Contract Documents C. Neither the authority to act under this Contract nor any decision made by the Owners' Representative in good faith, either to exercise or not to exercise such authority, shall City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/31/2010 983-1268-400 01000-3 01000_Scope of Work give rise to any duty or responsibility of the Owner, Engineer, Inspector, or Owner's Representative to the Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any other person or organization performing any portion of the Work, or to any surety for any of them 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 General A. The piping and equipment systems shown in the Drawings indicate the approximate horizontal and vertical configuration required The Contractor shall determine the exactly layout of piping, fittings, joints, and equipment necessary to fit actual field conditions B. Locations of drawings shall not be determined by scaling from the Drawings 3.2 Contractor Solely Responsible for Contractor's Work A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, and the safety precautions and programs incident thereto. B. The Owner, Engineer, Inspector, and the Owner's Representative shall not be responsible for these items, nor shall they be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract documents. C. The Owner, Engineer, Inspector, and the Owner's Representative shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any portion of the Work. 3.3 Time for Completion A. This Project shall be physically completed and tested within 180 days working days END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/31/2010 983-1268-400 01000-4 01000_Scope of Work 1 1 SECTION 01060 SAFETY 1 1.0 GENERAL 1 1.1 Health and Safety Requirements This section presents the requirements for safety of the public and on-site personnel I A. Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with all applicable health and safety regulations during the Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all employees, Subcontractors, other persons under his direction, and any other personnel I entering the Work area. Before Work commences, the Contractor shall submit a Health and Safety Plan developed consistent with the Site Health and Safety Plan and meeting all applicable regulations I B. Contractor is responsible for being cognizant of and ensuring compliance with the requirements set forth in 29 CFR 1910 Such responsibility shall apply to both the Contractor's operations and those of the Contractor's Subcontractors. 1 C. When violations of the health and safety requirements contained in this specification are called to the Contractor's attention, the Contractor shall immediately correct the condition to which attention has been directed Such notice, either oral or written, when served on 1 the Contractor or the Contractor's representative(s), shall be deemed sufficient. D. In the event that the Contractor fails or refuses to promptly comply with the compliance I directive issued, the Owner's Representative may issue an order to stop all or any part of the Work. When satisfactory corrective action is taken, an order to resume work will be issued 1 E. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any extension of time, nor to any claim for damage or to additional compensation, by reason of either the directive or the stop work order I F. Failure of the Owner's Representative to order discontinuance of any or all of the Contractor's operations shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the safety of personnel and property I1.2 Submittals A. Before work comences, the Contractor shall submit a Health and Safety Plan in Iaccordance with Section 01300 1.3 Prevention of Contamination IA. Wells to be used for water supply shall require special precautions to be taken by the Contractor to prevent contamination of the well and the surrounding site, including the I following M Materials that will be introduced into the well, such as wellhead extension, pump and components shall be disinfected prior to introduction into the well I M The Contractor shall use a minimum of hydrocarbon products, other than fuel, motor oil, hydraulic oil and grease that is normally used on site 1 I City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 01 983-1268-400 01060-1 060 Safety ■ No hydrocarbon -based lubricants or oils shall be used on drill pipe threads, down -the -hole hammers, or other drilling tools or equipment that will enter the borehole 1.4 Site Safety A. The Contractor is responsible for all aspects of site safety and shall ensure compliance with all applicable Federal, State, and local health and safety regulations The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of personnel on site, including employees of the Owner and Engineer, subcontractors, visitors, and all employees under his direction B. The Contractor shall maintain a first aid kit, fire extinguishers, fall protection, and other safety equipment required for the work by regulation on site at all times. The Contractor shall maintain an adequate spill control kit on site at all times C. The Contractor shall provide a site-specific safety plan to the Owner or Owner's Representative in accordance with Section 01300. D. The Contractor shall hold beginning -of -shift equipment and safety checks, and documented weekly safety "tail -gate" meetings The Contractor shall ensure that every individual, including workers or guests, receives a safety briefing before being allowed on site 1.5 Safety to the Public 1.5.1 Roads and Streets A. Roads subject to interference by the work shall be kept open, or suitable temporary passage through the work shall be provided and maintained by the Contractor. B. The Contractor shall provide, erect, and maintain all necessary barricades, suitable and sufficient flasher lights, flaggers, danger signals, and signs, and shall take all necessary precautions for the protection of the Work and the safety of the public 1.5.2 Road Closure A. Roads closed to traffic shall be protected by effective barricades on which shall be placed acceptable warning and detour signs All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated at night, and all lights shall be kept illuminated from sunset until sunrise 1.5.3 Signs And Barricades A. Specific signs, barricades, and flagger requirements shall meet applicable Washington State and City of Yakima regulations 1.5.4 Dust Control A. The Contractor shall take whatever measures are necessary to prevent dust and air- borne particulates in the work area and adjacent properties All State and local regulations regarding air quality shall be adhered to City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 01060-2 08/05/2010 01060_Safety 1.6 Worker Health and Safety 1.6.1 General A. The Contractor shall not require any employee to work under conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to the worker's health and safety as determined under 29 CFR 1910 or WAC 296-62. The cost of complying with this Section shall be included in the prices bid in the Bid Schedule for the associated items of work. 1.6.2 Responsibility A. The Contractor is responsible for being cognizant of and ensuring compliance with the requirements set forth in the 29 CFR and WAC 296 regulations Such responsibility shall apply to both the Contractor's operations and those of the Contractor's subcontractors. B. When violations of the health and safety requirements contained in this specification are called to the Contractor's attention by the Owner's Representative, the Contractor shall immediately correct the condition to which attention has been directed Such notice, either oral or written, when served on the Contractor or the Contractor's representative(s), shall be deemed sufficient. C. In the event the Contractor fails or refuses to promptly comply with the compliance directive issued, the Owner's Representative may issue an order to stop all or any part of the Work. When satisfactory corrective action is taken, an order to resume work will be issued The Contractor shall not be entitled to any extension of time, nor to any claim for damage or to additional compensation by reason of either the directive or the stop work order Failure of the Owner's Representative to stop any or all of the Contractor's operations shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the safety of personnel and property. 1.6.3 Records A. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of, and shall immediately report to the Owner's Representative in writing, all death, occupational diseases, or traumatic injury to employees, other on-site personnel, or members of the public, and property damage in excess of $2,500, incident to the performance of work under this contract. City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 END OF SECTION 01060-3 08/05/2010 01060_Safety SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS 1.0 GENERAL A. Whenever submittals are required by the Contract Documents, all such submittals shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative. B. Required submittals are identified within these project specific technical specifications. These include, but are not limited to, schedule, plans, product data, and shop drawings, See individual specification sections for specific requirements. 1.1 Submittal Identification A. A unique number shall identify each submittal The identification number shall be used to track the status of any submittal. If resubmission is required, a letter suffix to the original identification number shall be used. The first resubmission shall have the suffix A, second B, etc B. Submittals shall be grouped by Specification section. 1.2 Submittal Procedures A. Submittals requiring Engineer's review and approval shall be submitted prior to procurement, fabrication, or start of the associated construction activity B. Unless instructed otherwise, three (3) copies of submittals shall be sent for Engineer's review; alternatively, electronic/fax submittals may be submitted C. A minimum of 10 calendar days shall be allowed for the Engineer's review, unless stated otherwise in these specifications or on the drawings D. Additional Submittal Requirements 1 Submittals shall identify the project, Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, pertinent drawing sheet and detail number(s), and specification section number, as appropriate Submittals shall also be sequentially numbered 2. Schedule submittals as needed to expedite the project. 3 Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. 4 Space for Engineer review signature shall be provided on the submittal 5 Revise and resubmit submittals as required by Engineer; identify all changes made since previous submittal 6 Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to affected parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions 1.3 Health and Safety Plan The Contractor shall prepare a site-specific health and safety plan in conformance with 29 CFR 1910 and 1926, and WAC 296-62 and 296-155 The health and safety plan shall also address environmental issues as appropriate Contractor's health and safety plan shall be submitted to the Owner and Owner's City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 01300-1 01300 Submittals Representative for review within 7 calendar days following Notice to Proceed. 1.3.1 Material Safety Data Sheets Federal Standard No. 313, as amended, for the preparation and submission of material safety data sheets (MSDS) is hereby incorporated and made a part of these specifications. The Contractor shall submit not less than 7 calendar days prior to job -site delivery of each hazardous material, two sets of MSDS for each hazardous material transported onto the site The information in each MSDS shall be followed to assure safe use, handling, storage, and environmentally acceptable disposal of the commodity being used The cost of complying with this paragraph shall be included in the prices bid in the Bid Schedule for the associated items of work. 1.4 Proposed Substitutes of "Or Equal" Items 1.4.1 Identification of Items Whenever materials or equipment are specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular supplier, the naming of the item is intended to establish the type, function, and quality required If the name is followed by the words "or equal" indicating that a substitution is permitted (i e , if "or equal" is not indicated, substitutes are not allowed), materials or equipment of other suppliers may be accepted by the Owner's Representative if sufficient information is submitted by the Contractor to allow the Owner's Representative to determine that the material or equipment proposed is equivalent or equal to that named. 1.4.2 Declaring Substitutions All proposed "or equal" substitutes shall be listed in the Bid Form at the time of bidding However, the Bid Price to be used for the bid shall be for the item named in the Technical Specifications or on the drawings, and after the Contractor has been selected, substitutes will be evaluated for consideration. Consideration of "or equal" substitutes shall be subject to the following requirements: A. The burden of proof as to the type, function, and quality of any such substitute material or equipment shall be upon the Contractor. B. The Owner's Representative will be the sole judge as to the type, function, and quality of any such substitute material or equipment, and the Owner's Representative's decision shall be final C. The Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to furnish, at the Contractor's expense, additional data about the proposed substitute. D. The Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to furnish, at the Contractor's expense, a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. E. Acceptance by the Owner's Representative of a substitute item proposed by the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents and for adequacy of the substitute item. F. The Contractor shall be responsible for resultant changes and all additional costs which the accepted substitution requires in the Contractor's work, the work of its subcontractors and of others, and shall effect such changes without cost to the Owner 1.4.3 Procedures for Substitute Items After Award of the Contract A. If during the course of the Work, the Contractor believes that there is a substitute item which will perform the intended function equal or better than the required item, the City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 01300-2 01300 Submittals Contractor may request a substitution The Owner's Representative will be the sole judge as to the type, function, and quality of any such substitute material or equipment and the Owner's Representative's decision shall be final B. If the Contractor wishes to furnish or use a substitute item of material or equipment, the Contractor shall make written application to the Owner's Representative C. Unless otherwise authorized in writing by the Owner's Representative, the application shall be submitted at least 30 days prior to the date on which the material must be ordered to arrive on site such that the work is not delayed D. Wherever a proposed substitute material or equipment has not been submitted within said 30 -day period, or wherever the submission of a proposed substitute material or equipment has been judged to be unacceptable by the Owner's Representative, the Contractor shall provide the material or equipment named in the Contract Documents E. The Contractor shall certify that the proposed substitute will adequately perform the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, be similar and of equal substance to that specified, and be suited to the same use as that specified. F. The Owner's Representative will be allowed a minimum of 5 working days to evaluate each proposed substitute G. As applicable, no shop drawing submittals will be made for a substitute item nor will any substitute item be ordered, installed, or utilized without the Owner's Representative's prior written acceptance of the Contractor's application 1.4.4 Application for Substitution The Contractor's application shall contain the following statements and/or information which shall be considered by the Owner's Representative in evaluating the proposed substitution. A. The evaluation and acceptance of the proposed substitute will not prejudice the Contractor's achievement of substantial completion on time B. Whether or not acceptance of the substitute for use in the work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents to adapt the design to the proposed substitute C. Whether or not incorporation or use of the substitute in connection with the work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty D. All variations of the proposed substitute for that specified are identified E. Available maintenance, repair, and replacement service are indicated F. Itemized estimate of all costs that will result directly or indirectly from acceptance of such substitute, including cost of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by the resulting change 1.5 Samples 1.5.1 General Whenever samples are required, the Contractor shall submit not less than 3 samples of each such item or material to the Owner's Representative for acceptance at no additional cost to the Owner's City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 01300-3 01300 Submittals Representative 1.5.2 Identification A. All samples shall be individually, legibly, and indelibly labeled or tagged, indicating thereon all specified physical characteristics and Supplier's names for identification and submittal to the Owner's Representative for acceptance 1.5.3 Selection A. Unless otherwise specified, all colors and textures of specified items will be selected by the Owner's Representative from the manufacturer's standard colors and standard materials, products, or equipment lines, if applicable 1.5.4 Sample Disposition A. Upon receiving acceptance of the Owner's Representative, one set of the samples will be stamped and dated by the Owner's Representative and returned to the Contractor, one set will be retained by the Owner's Representative, and one set of samples shall remain at the job site until completion of the work. 1.6 Record Drawings 1.6.1 Use of / Creation of A. The Contractor shall keep and maintain, at the job Site, one set of Record Drawings On these, the Contractor shall mark daily all project conditions, locations, configurations, and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details shown on the original Contract Drawings, including buried or concealed construction and utility features which are revealed during the course of construction B. Special attention shall be given to recording the horizontal and vertical location of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated, or which were not indicated on the Contract Drawings C. Said record drawings shall be supplemented by any detailed sketches as necessary or as directed to indicate, fully, the work as actually constructed These master record drawings of the Contractor's representation of as -built conditions, including all revisions made necessary by addenda, change orders, and the like shall be maintained daily during the progress of the work. 1.6.2 Access and Submittal A. Record drawings shall be accessible to the Owner's Representative at all times during the construction period and shall be delivered to the Owner's Representative upon completion of the work prior to final acceptance of the work. 1.7 O&M Manual 1.7.1 General The Contractor shall prepare an operations and maintenance (O&M) Manual for the Gardner Well system The manual shall include description of the Gardner Well system and all electrical and mechanical components, maintenance procedures and frequencies, sources for spare parts, and other information City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 01300-4 01300 Submittals required to keep the system operational 1.7.2 Supporting Information Include manufacturer's O&M Manuals for individual components, product literature, and other pertinent information as appendices 1.7.3 Submittal Provide draft O&M Manual to Owner's Representative for review Upon approval, submit 2 copies of the final O&M Manual One of the O&M manuals shall contain original manufacturer's operations and maintenance, literature, and other information END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 01300-5 01300 Submittals 1 SECTION 01310 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 Description ' A. This section specifies the procedures for preparing and revising the construction schedule used by the Contractor for planning and managing construction activities The schedule provides a basis for determining the progress status of the project relative to ' specific dates and completion time B. The schedule shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative within 5 working days after award of contract. The Owner's Representative will review the submitted schedule and return one copy of the marked -up original to the Contractor. If the Owner's Representative finds that the submitted schedule does not comply with specified requirements, the corrective revisions will be noted on the submittal copy returned to the 1 Contractor, and a revised schedule shall be resubmitted 1.2 Schedule Content ' A. The schedule shall include all significant procurement and construction activities and all items of Work. 1 B. Dependencies between activities shall be indicated so that it may be established what effect the progress of any one activity has on the schedule. C. Time for completion and all specific dates and sequencing requirements shall be shown on the schedule Activities making up the critical path shall be identified 1.3 Submittals Submit the construction schedule in accordance with Section 01300. 1.4 Schedule Revisions Revisions to critical path activities on the accepted construction schedule may be made only with written approval of the Owner's Representative. Changes in timing for activities which are not on the critical path 1 may be modified by the Contractor at his discretion, with written notification to the Owner's Representative END OF SECTION 1 1 1 ' City of Yakima Gardner Well — 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 01310-1 01310 Construction Schedule SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 Description This section describes the temporary facilities needed by the Contractor to complete the work. 1.2 Temporary Utilities 1.2.1 General A. The Contractor shall provide such temporary services as may be required for construction The cost for such services shall be included in the associated items in the Bid Schedule. B. The Contractor shall not install temporary service materials in a permanent system without written permission of the Owner's Representative 1.2.2 Electricity, Lighting, and Heating A. Electrical power is available at Gardner Park. This power is available to the Contractor without cost. If additional power beyond the 480V capacity is required, the Contractor shall arrange for such power at no additional cost to the Owner B. The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary lighting at all barricades as required for safety C. The Contractor shall provide any and all heating equipment and fuels required 1.2.3 Water A. The Owner shall provide and maintain an adequate water supply for use on the project for construction purposes at no cost to the Contractor B. The Contractor at his own cost shall provide and install, valve, maintain, and protect such water supply lines as may be required for his operations 1.2.4 Sanitary Facilities A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable, weather -tight, painted sanitary toilet facilities for all workers during the construction period When toilet facilities are no longer required, the Contractor shall promptly remove them from the site and disinfect and clean or treat the area as required B. The Contractor shall provide and maintain facilities in accordance with requirements of applicable local and state health authorities and OSHA. C. The Contractor shall keep all toilet facilities clean and supplied with toilet paper at all times City of Yakima Gardner Well 03/05/2010 983-1268-400 01500-1 01500_Temporary Facilities 1.3 Cleanup The Contractor shall keep the work site free of accumulation of surplus materials and rubbish resulting from his operations and the operations of subcontractors The Contractor shall remove rubbish weekly and at other times as required by the Owner's Representative The Contractor shall remove all tools, equipment, and temporary facilities as soon as practicable when no longer required for execution of the Work. 1.4 Operations and Storage Areas All operations of the Contractor (including storage of materials) shall be confined to areas authorized or approved by the Owner's Representative. Other contractors and employees or agents of the Owner may for all necessary purposes enter upon sites of the Work and premises used by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide and maintain weather -tight storage sheds for his own use All Contractor provided storage sheds shall have substantial floors raised a minimum of 6 inches above the ground surface. The Contractor shall locate all storage sheds as directed by the Owner's Representative The Contractor shall be responsible for vandalism to the Work and the Contractor's equipment, theft and loss of materials from the storage areas. The Contractor shall remove all storage sheds, equipment, etc , from the site immediately after completion of Work. 1.5 Protection and Restoration The Contractor shall protect all structures, roadways, fences, pipelines, trees, and other such items not designated for removal. During the Work progress, the Contractor shall promptly remove from the site all debris and unused materials; and shall, upon completion of the Work, restore those portions of the site not covered by new construction as nearly as possible to their original condition, including the replacement, at the Contractor's expense, of any facility, roadway, or other significant feature at the site which has been damaged by the Contractor 1.6 Parking The Contractor shall make all necessary provisions for off-street parking of all employees on the project within the site limits This includes construction and maintenance, including snow removal, of necessary access roads and parking areas during the construction period The Contractor shall ensure that vehicles are parked in such locations as to avoid interference with normal operations activities END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 03/05/2010 983-1268-400 01500-2 01500_Temporary Facilities SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1.0 GENERAL A. Upon notification by the Contractor that the Work is completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and that he is ready to submit close-out materials and the final request for payment, the Owner's Representative and Engineer will review the project and prepare a project punch list of all items, tasks, procedures, and work to be completed to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents B. When notified by the Contractor that all punch list items have been corrected, the Owner's Representative or Engineer shall make a re -inspection of the Work. If the punch list item correction is found to be incomplete, the Contractor shall correct the deficiencies noted 2.0 SUBMITTALS A. At Contract Closeout, following completion of the Work and prior to release of the retained percentage, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the following closeout documents: ® Project Record documents ® Acceptance testing results ▪ Vendor Operating and Maintenance Manuals Executed "Release & Certificate of Payment" ® Guarantees, Bonds, and Affidavits 3.0 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 3.1 Cleanup A. The Contractor shall remove any accumulated trash, surplus materials, and rubbish resulting from construction operations B. Waste that cannot be disposed of onsite shall be transported offsite and disposed of in a regulated landfill. 3.2 Guarantees, Bonds, and Affidavits A. The Contractor shall submit all written guarantees, bonds, and affidavits required to the Owner prior to final payment. B. Guarantees shall be extended the full length of the required guarantee period. Replacement of work found defective during guarantee period ▪ Repair of inoperative items or adjustments to proper working condition of items not operating properly at the time of final completion City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 01700-1 01700 Contract Closeout 3.3 Acceptance Testing A. The Contractor shall complete all tests required to prove actual operating performance of equipment and systems incorporated into the project. See individual specifications for acceptance testing requirements. B. The Contractor shall submit reports of all tests to the Owner and Owner's Representative prior to final payment. 3.4 Damage to Existing Structures A. Prior to final acceptance by the Engineer, the Contractor shall repair or otherwise return to original condition any parts of the existing facilities which have been damaged during construction to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3.5 Final Review A. The Contractor shall request a final review in writing at least five (5) working days prior to the anticipated date of completion B. The Contractor shall be at the jobsite during the final inspection C. The Owner's Representative will present to the Contractor, after the final review, a list of any items not meeting contract requirements All items on the list must be made acceptable before final payment will be made END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 01700-2 01700 Contract Closeout SECTION 01710 DISINFECTION REQUIREMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 Description Of Work This section describes the disinfection procedures of the wellhead, equipment, piping, appurtenances, and pump 1.2 Submittals A. Submittals shall be provided in accordance with Section 013100 B. Submit a description of the procedures and materials to be used for disinfection The description shall include such details as 1) how the solution will be added; 2) the solution concentration; 3) the solution contact time; 4) how residual chlorine will be measured, 5) where samples will be collected for residual chlorine analysis/bacteriological analysis; and 6) when samples will be collected The description shall also address disposal of the chlorine solution used for disinfection 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 Disinfecting Materials A. Solution water B. Chlorine disinfectant C. Sodium thiosulfate 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 Disinfection A. The Contractor shall prepare disinfectant, washing, and rinsing solutions using the potable water source provided by the City of Yakima B. The Contractor shall neutralize chlorine solutions using an appropriate grade and dosage of sodium thiosulfate or an approved equal. C. The Contractor shall prepare chlorine disinfection solutions conforming to AWWA B300 D. All equipment, materials, piping, appurtenances, and pump to be installed permanently in the well shall be disinfected just prior to installation. E. Disinfection shall be done by spraying all materials and equipment with a chlorine solution with a residual of not less than 200 mg/I per AWWA C654-97 F. After all permanent equipment is installed; the well shall be disinfected in accordance with AWWA C654-97. 1 Chlorinating the water in the well casing throughout the entire depth to provide a chlorine residual of 50 mg/I, 2 Circulating the chlorinated water within the well casing and pump column, and City of Yakima Gardner Well 03/05/2010 983-1268-400 01710-1 01710_Disinfection Requirements 1 I3 Pumping the well to waste via the sanitary sewer system I G. The Contractor shall disinfect facilities per AWWA C651. The chlorine disinfection solution shall have a free chlorine residual of 25 mg/L at the time it is prepared H. The Contractor may utilize any of the methods described in the AWWA Standards. I3.2 Discharge of Chlorine Solution I A. The Contractor shall discharge chlorine disinfectant to the sanitary sewer system via the 6 -inch waste air gap vault. I B. If the chlorine disinfectant cannot be discharged to the sanitary sewer system, the Contractor shall neutralize the chlorine disinfectant solution prior to discharge to the storm sewer system. Neutralization shall be achieved by adding the appropriate grade and dosage of sodium thiosulfate or an approve equal. The dosage of sodium thiosulfate I shall be minimized and shall be determined based on the free chlorine residual measured in the chlorine solution. I C. The Contractor shall accurately determine the chlorine residual, measure the quantity of chemicals to add to the solution, and thoroughly mix the chemicals into the solution prior to discharge D. The Contractor shall discharge the neutralized chlorine solution in an environmentally safe and legal manner in compliance with federal, state, and local regulations. I 3.3 Bacteriological Sampling and Testing The City of Yakima will collect and analyze an appropriate number of samples for coliform organisms (total coliform) after disinfection has been satisfactorily completed. The Contractor shall repeat the Idisinfection process if coliform organisms are detected. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I City of Yakima Gardner Well — 03/05/2010 983-1268-400 01710-2 01710 Disinfection Requirements DIVISION 2 SITE CONSTRUCTION SECTION 02727 PRECAST VAULTS r 1.0 GENERAL ' 1.1 Description This section describes the precast concrete vault for the air gap assembly for the Gardner Well project. ' 1.2 Submittals I A. Submit manufacturer's information on the vault and cover to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this section. IB. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. 1.3 Design Load Requirements I Vaults shall be designed to withstand lateral earth pressures of 75 pcf equivalent fluid density with a triangular distribution on the side walls, snow load (150 psf), and Tight vehicular traffic on the cover. I2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 Air Gap Vault 2.1.1 Precast Concrete Vault A. Vault shall be a 660 -LA model as manufactured by Utility Vault Company (Oldcastle ' Precast), or approved equal. Vault shall be manufacturer's standard product. Concrete used in vaults shall conform to ACI standards with fc' = 3,000 psi minimum 1 2.1.2 Access Top A. Per the drawings, one half of the vault top shall have a grate and frame assembly for ' waste line discharge. The other half shall be a standard locking steel cover B. Grate shall be ductile iron and frame shall be gray iron. Vane grate and frame shall be Product # 00770002 as manufactured by East Jordan Iron Works, provided by Utility ' Vault Company, or approved equal The standard locking steel cover shall be provided by Utility Vault Company, or approved equal ' 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 General ' A. Install vaults and covers as shown on the drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Vault shall be placed on firm subgrade or bedding material to prevent settlement. The subgrade below the vault shall be smooth, flat, and compacted to a firm and unyielding surface The subgrade shall be free of debris, rocks, protrusions, standing water, and other deleterious materials. t City of Yakima Gardner Well — 08/05/2010 02727 983-1268-400 02727-1 Precast Vaults C. The Owner's Representative shall inspect the subgrade prior installation of the vault. 3.2 Air Gap Assembly A. Install air gap assembly as shown on the drawings END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 02727-2 02727 Precast Vaults DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT SECTION 11200 FLOWMETERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 Description This section describes the flowmeters for the discharge line from the well and the ASR bypass line 1.2 Submittals Contractor shall submit all required information in accordance with Section 01300 This shall include, but not limited to A. Submit manufacturer's product information to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this section This shall also include manufacturer's parts list and the Operations and Maintenance manual. B. Submit in accordance with Section 01300 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 Electromagnetic Flowmeter 2.1.1 Manufacturer The approved electromagnetic flowmeter manufacturer and model is Siemens Sitrans MAG 5100W with a Type MAG 5000 signal converter 2.1.2 General A. Flowmeters shall be installed at the locations shown on the drawings A 12 -inch meter shall be installed on the discharge line and an 8 -inch meter shall be installed on the ASR bypass line. B. Calibration data for each flowmeter shall be over the full range of flow The flowmeter shall be calibrated as a unit connected in the same manner as during operational service Calibration shall be performed by the flowmeter manufacturer or qualified independent testing laboratory Equipment used for calibration shall be traceable to National Institute of Standards and Technology or other acceptable standards 2.1.3 Sensor A. Operating principle Utilizing Faraday's Law of Electromagnetic Induction, the flow of liquid through the sensor induces an electrical voltage that is proportional to the velocity of the flow B. Construction. The sensor flow tube and liner material shall be constructed of a composite elastomer (hard and soft rubber) surrounded by two integral coils. Measurement and grounding electrodes shall be 316 stainless steel Connecting flanges shall be carbon steel C. Operating Temp -20 to +200° F. D. Submergence The sensor shall be pedestal sealed against accidental submersion to 3 feet for 30 minutes standard, or permanently submerged to 30 feet when the terminal box is backfilled with a non -setting, transparent potting material City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 11200-1 11200 Flowmeters 2.1.4 Signal Converter A. The signal converter shall be mounted integral to the flow tube B. The display shall be background illumination with alphanumeric 3 -line, 20 -character display to indicate flow rate, totalized values, settings, and faults C. Power supply shall be 115 VAC. D. Operating temperature range shall be -5 to +120 degrees F. E. Output: 4-20 mA into 800 ohms max. One relay rated at 42 VAC/2 A, 24 DC/1 A. Digital (frequency or pulse) for external display of flow rate or totalizer 2.1.5 Sensor and Signal Converter Performance A. Flow Range shall be 1 5 fps to 33 fps for accuracies stated below. B. Accuracy shall be 0.5% of actual flow. C. The maximum distance shall be 900 feet between signal converter and sensor without the use of any additional equipment. D. Bi-directional flow capabilities shall be standard. 2.1.6 Totalizer Totalizer shall consist of two eight -digit counters for forward, net, or reverse flow 2.1.7 Connections The meter head shall be mounted on a flanged connection for ease of removal from the pipe for inspection or service The meter shall be compatible with ANSI/AWWA flanges 2.2 Spare Parts A. One set of manufacturer's recommended spare parts B. Extra operation and maintenance manuals, as required 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 Installation Install meters in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, at the location shown on the drawings END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 11200-2 11200 Flowmeters SECTION 11205 LEVEL TRANSDUCER AND PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 Description This section specifies the downhole level transducer and discharge line pressure transmitter used for the Gardner Well project. 1.2 Submittals A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300 B. Submit detailed manufacturer's information and model numbers for the downhole level transducer and components to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this section. Submittal shall include proposed cable length. C. Submit detailed manufacturer's information and model numbers for the discharge line pressure transducer/transmitter and components to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this section 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 General A. The level transducer shall be lowered in the well to the depth shown on the drawings. B. The pressure transmitter shall be located on the discharge line where shown on the drawings. The transmitter shall be tied into the City's existing telemetry system 2.2 Level Transducer A. The level transducer shall be a vented submersible hydrostatic level transducer designed for small bore applications. B. The level transducer shall be equipped with a vent filter than prevents moisture from entering the vent tube for at least one year without maintenance C. The level transducer size shall not exceed 1 -inch diameter and shall be constructed of stainless steel D. The measurement static accuracy shall be +/- 0.10 feet. E. The level transducer shall have a ported nose cap F. The level transducer output shall be 4-20mA. The transducer output shall interface with the City's telemetry system (see Division 16) G. The cable jacket material shall be polyurethane with a molded polyurethane cable seal H. The level range shall be 0 psi to 200 psi, minimum I. The cable length shall be sufficient enough for the transducer to be installed at the depth shown on the drawings J. The level transducer shall have lightning/surge protection located in the transducer housing and at the surface, and shall be grounded via DIN -rail or ground wire City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 11205-1 08/05/2010 11205_Level Transducer and Pressure Transmitter 1 1 K. The level transducer shall be a KPSITM transducer model 330 with lightning/surge protection option. 1 2.3 Discharge Line Pressure Transmitter I A. The discharge line pressure transmitter shall be a gage type transmitter, rated for 0 to 200 psi, minimum B. The pressure transmitter shall be suitable for liquid service and 1 C. The pressure transmitter shall be 1 -inch with female NPT thread. D. The discharge pressure transmitter materials shall consist of 316 stainless steel with 1 silicone -oil fill Materials shall be in conformance with NEC, NEMA, and FM code and shall be certified as meeting the requirements of ISO 9001. E. The transmitter shall consist of a diaphragm seal. I F. The transmitter output shall be a 2 -wire, 4-20mA digital and shall meet electrical specifications indicated in Division 16 G. The transmitter shall be a Rosemount 2088G Pressure Transmitter with a Rosemount 1 1199 diaphragm seal, or as otherwise supplied by the owner 3.0 EXECUTION 1 3.1 Installation I A. The pressure transducers and level transducer shall be water (H20) calibrated with a measurement range of four times (4 x) the overpressure rating B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, at the depth location shown 1 on the drawings. Fittings and connections shall be the responsibility of the Contractor 3.2 Cleaning And Disinfection 1 3.2.1 Cleaning A. Remove foreign materials including dirt, grease, and other matter Clean, by flushing, I interior of water piping. Upon completion of flushing, completely drain systems at all low points; remove, clean, and replace all strainer baskets; and refill systems 3.2.2 Disinfection IA. Disinfection shall be completed in accordance with Section 01710. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 I - 983-1268-400 11205-2 11205_Level Transducer and Pressure Transmitter SECTION 11212 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP AND MOTOR 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 Summary This section specifies the materials and methods to be used by the Contractor for the new vertical turbine pump and motor 1.2 Submittals A. Submit in accordance with section 01300 B. Submit detailed information on proposed pump, motor, materials, connections, discharge head assembly, seal plate, and well seal to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this section C. Submittal details shall include outline drawings, sectional drawings, and materials for the discharge head assembly and seal plates D. Submit pump curves showing a single line head -vs- capacity curve, efficiency curve, NPSHR curve and brake horsepower curve Brake horsepower curve shall show or include loads due to pump, shaft, and column bearings or other shaft loads to reflect the total brake horsepower requirements at the motor shaft. E. Submittals shall include complete motor information consisting of: 1 Manufacturer, model number, and complete nameplate information 2 NEMA design type, enclosure type, and frame size 3 Winding insulation class, temperature rise, and ambient rating 4 Maximum starts per hour and minimum rest periods 5 Bearing data and lubrication system data 6 Thermal winding switch (thermostat) data and trip temperature 7 Dimensioned outline drawings 8 Connection diagrams (including any accessories) 9 Connection box data, including dimensions, quantity and size of conduit entries, location and orientation on motor 10 Performance data consisting of at a minimum speed torque curve, efficiencies, amperage, and power factor at 100%, 75% and 50% speed, locked rotor amperage F. Submit a Pump and Motor Installation Plan that details the approach for installing the pump, discharge head, seal plate assembly, and motor Approach and methodology shall include descriptions of the 1) proposed sequence to coordinate with housekeeping pad installation, 2) well seal reconstruction, 3) disinfection, and 4) controls used to mitigate flowing artesian conditions G. Submit Operations and Maintenance Manuals in accordance to Section 01300. City of Yakima Gardner Well 09/17/2010 983-1268-400 11212-1 11212 Vertical Turbine Pump and Motor 1 1.3 Environment I The vertical line -shaft turbine pump will be installed at the Gardner Well located in Gardner Park in the City of Yakima, as shown on the Drawings. The intake of the pump shall be set at approximately 440 feet below ground surface (bgs), above the top of the existing 16 -inch casing and screen assembly within the well (starting at 450 feet bgs) I2.0 PRODUCTS I 2.1 Pump 2.1.1 Manufacturer I The pump shall be a Bryon Jackson 17 MQH 5 -Stage, 11 65 -inch impeller or pre -approved equal The motor manufacturer shall be U.S. Electrical Motors or equivalent. I2.1.2 Pump A. Provide one new vertical turbine pump at the Gardner well The units and all components are to come from the same manufacturer and to include motor, base, bowl I assembly, column assembly, discharge head, and all necessary appurtenances. The pump manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified. B. Pump Service. The pump shall be utilized for transferring groundwater from the Gardner I Well for delivery to the City of Yakima distribution system C. Operating Conditions. The pump shall be a complete vertical motor -driven open line shaft turbine pump. The pump shall be capable of the following pump conditions: IPrimary Condition: Maximum Flow: 3,000 gpm (at rated motor full load rpm) I Total Dynamic Head (at max. Q) 655 feet Minimum Pump Efficiency: 80% Maximum allowable speed. 1800 RPM Pump bowl setting 440 ft bgs I Well diameter 1 D 24 -inches (nom ) Maximum shutoff 963 feet or 417 psi I Secondary Condition: Secondary Design Flow 4,000 gpm (at reduced motor rpm) Secondary Design Head 505 feet Minimum Pump Efficiency 79% ITertiary Design Point: Tertiary Design Flow 2,000 gpm (at reduced motor rpm) I Tertiary Design Head 770 feet Minimum Pump Efficiency 73% The pump shall operate over the full range of the pump curve without exceeding the 1 rating of the motor Service factor of the motor shall not be used 2.1.3 Pump Motor I A. The motor shall be a vertical hollow shaft, premium efficiency, 175% high -thrust, 700 HP, 460 volt, three phase, 60 Hz, 1800 RPM, NEMA WP 1 drip -proof enclosure with non- reversing ratchet. The non -reverse ratchet assembly shall use the ball style. Drop pins I and springs are not acceptable The motor shall be designed to operate on 480 -volt, 3- -'111 City of Yakima Gardner Well — 09/17/2010 983-1268-400 11212-2 11212 Vertical Turbine Pump and Motor phase, 60 -hertz power with a 1 15 service factor on sine wave power and 1 0 service factor on PWM power, and shall operate throughout the pump curve without exceeding 90% of the rated motor capacity The motor shall have Class "H" insulation, with Class "B" temperature rise and shall be rated for 50° C ambient. The motor shall be inverter duty rated for use with an 18 pulse input, PWM VFD drive output, and shall meet NEMA MG -1 Part 31 Motor winding insulation shall be rated at least 2000 volts Stator windings shall be VPI (vacuum pressure impregnation) treated The motor shall be furnished with normally closed thermostats in the end windings set to open upon high temperature conditions Thermostats shall be suitable for operation at 120 volts AC and 24 Volts AC or DC Thermostats will be connected to the variable frequency drive controls and shall cause the motor to stop on high temperature Thermostat leads shall be labeled and shall be brought out of the windings to a separate connection box located on the motor frame B. The motor shall be furnished with three RTD temperature sensors embedded in the slots of the stator. One RTD shall be embedded in each phase of the stator winding, and the three RTDs shall be located physically at 120 degrees from each other RTDs shall be 3 - wire, 100 ohm platinum devices RTD leads shall be labeled to permit proper connection, and the leads shall be brought out of the windings to the same separate connection box as the thermostats C. The motor shall be coordinated with the electrical characteristics of the actual VFD used to drive the motor, and the motor shall operate when driven by the actual VFD (without the use of a load reactor) throughout the full speed range of the pump, without excessive (more than 80 degrees C) temperature rise above ambient at 100% Toad The VFD specifications are provided in Section 16422 D. The motor shall be provided with a corrosion -resistant nameplate giving the name of the manufacturer, horsepower, voltage, frequency, speed, efficiency and current for unit at full load E. Thrust bearings shall be sized for a minimum 50,000 hour L-10 bearing life The motor shall be capable of carrying maximum thrust created at shut-off head F. Motor bearings shall be insulated (non -conducting) type to eliminate shaft and other undesirable electrical currents G. The motor shall be furnished with a vibration sensor Vibration sensor shall be a true two -wire 4-20mA output device with output proportional to velocity Sensor range shall be selected by motor manufacturer H. The motor shall be furnished with an oversized connection box to accommodate up to three 4" conduit entries (at the bottom of the conduit box), and with room for termination of the motor leads to up to three parallel motor circuit conductors of VFD cable type construction Motor leads brought to the connection box from the motor shall be of sufficient length to accommodate termination of the motor leads to the motor circuit conductors, and in no case be less than 12" in length I. The motor shall be tested at the factory prior to shipment. Tests shall include standard commercial electrical tests, plus a balance test. J. The motor shall be field tested after installation Tests shall include a balance test, with measurements taken at not less than 30 different speeds, equally spaced throughout the operational speed range of the motor -pump combination. Tests shall include electrical static testing consisting of at least high voltage "megger" test of insulation, polarization index test, and surge test. Tests shall include electrical dynamic testing with the motor operating at full speed, 55 Hz, and 50Hz. Dynamic Testing shall be performed using EXP4000 (or EXP3000) test equipment from Baker Instrument Company. City of Yakima Gardner Well 09/17/2010 983-1268-400 11212-3 11212_Vertical Turbine Pump and Motor 2.1.4 Pump Column A. The pump column shall be a 12 -inch threaded column. The friction loss in the column shall not exceed 5 feet per 100 feet of column, based on the rated capacity of the pump B. The weight and size of the column shall be no less than required in AWWA E101-1. Column pipe shall be furnished in interchangeable sections not over 10 feet in length C. The top and bottom column sections shall not exceed 5' in length D. A rabbited fit clamped spider is provided for accurate centering of inner column or for locating column bearings in each discharge column section E. The line shafting shall be a minimum of 2-3/16" diameter AISI 416 stainless steel. The shaft shall be coupled with AISI 410 stainless steel couplings. F. The pump manufacturer will provide critical speed calculations and assurance that the pump will be constructed such that it will operate over the required speed range and not encounter either the 1st or 2nd critical speed point. 2.1.5 Pump Bowl A. The bowls shall be the industrial, heavy-duty, vertical diffuser multi -stage type, capable of meeting the performance requirements and features as specified. B. The pump bowls shall be of close grained cast iron, having a minimum tensile strength of 30,000 pounds per square inch, free from blow holes, sand holes, and all other faults; accurately machined and fitted to close dimensions C. Bowls are to be coated inside with a smooth vitreous enamel to reduce friction losses, corrosion and sand wear in the water passages and thus gives better efficiency. D. Each intermediate bowl is to be constructed by using a bronze bearing to support the impeller shaft which gives the longest possible life based on the widest range of pump conditions. E. The bronze sleeve type bearings located on each side of the impeller shall have a length over diameter ratio of at least (2). 2.1.6 Impellers A. The impellers shall be of ASTM B148 aluminum bronze enclosed type only, accurately machined and finished, and balanced. B. Impellers shall be securely fastened to the impeller shaft with a stainless steel ring & key mounting The impeller shaft shall be of stainless steel of not less than 12% chrome. C. The impeller shaft shall be supported by water lubricated, bronze bearings. D. Discharge and suction cases shall both be fitted with bearing protector sand caps. E. All bowl bolting shall be of 18-8 stainless steel. 2.1.7 Pre -Lube A. Pump head shall be equipped with a 3/4 -inch pre -lube port. The purpose of the port shall be to provide an access port into the head that will allow the owner/contractor to connect an external water source that will provide lubrication to the Iineshaft prior to starting the pump B. The port shall direct water towards the Iineshaft. Recommended intervals for prelube are 1 minute per 100' of exposed Iineshaft. City of Yakima Gardner Well 09/17/2010 983-1268-400 11212-4 11212 Vertical Turbine Pump and Motor 2.1.8 Strainer A. The suction case shall be fitted with a 14" stainless steel cone strainer supplied with a suction screen that has an area a minimum of 4 times the area of the pump suction The openings in the strainer shall be of proper size to exclude Targe enough items that may clog the impeller 2.1.9 Safety Equipment A. Gears, couplings, projecting set -screws, keys, and other rotating parts, so located that any person can come in close proximity thereto, shall be fully enclosed or properly guarded with an aluminum mesh OSHA approved coupling guard 2.1.10 Stuffing Box A. A cast iron stuffing box shall be provided with a bronze removable stuffing box bushing, galvanized split gland, t -bolts with stainless steel clips and brass nuts B. Stuffing box shall utilize a minimum of five 100% graphite 3300g slade flushless packing rings, compressed around the pump shaft and lubricated by the pumped water 2.1.11 Finishes A. Coat exposed bowl assembly non -alloy exterior surfaces, and column and discharge head inside and outside surfaces with an ANSI/NSF 61 approved high solids epoxy such as a Carboguard 891, or approved equal B. Minimum dry film thickness (MDFT) of the coating system shall be 10 — 12 mils C. Manufacturer's proposed protective coating information shall be provided in the Contractor's submittal information 2.1.12 Factory Performance Testing A. The pump manufacturer shall perform inspections and performance tests on the pumps before they ship from the factory B. These shall be non -witness tests, but the test data and curves shall be forwarded to the Engineer for approval before unit shipment. C. The pumps shall be tested per the Hydraulic Institute Standards 1 6 The pumps shall be tested at a minimum of six (6) points on their curves, recording the minimum following test data. 1 Head —vs- Capacity 2 Bowl Efficiency 3 Brake Horsepower 2.2 Well Seal A. The existing well seal consists of (a) neat cement grout seal in the annular space between the 48 -inch borehole and 36 -inch steel surface casing to 55 bgs and (b) neat cement grout seal between the 36 -inch surface casing and the 24 -inch well casing to approximately 500 bgs B. Any portions of the well seal impacted during pump installation shall be reconstructed in accordance with State and/or local standards and as shown in the Drawings C. The type of grout shall be neat cement. The cement shall conform to API Spec 10, City of Yakima Gardner Well 09/17/2010 983-1268-400 11212-5 11212_Vertical Turbine Pump and Motor 1 1 Class A or G cement (or Class B similar to ASTM C150 Type II) as specified in AWWA A100-06, and shall be mixed with no more than 6 gallons of water per each 94 Ib bag of cement. Up to 5% bentonite by weight (about 4.5 lbs per 94 Ib sack of cement) may be added to prevent shrinkage and improve handling. Up to 2% calcium chloride (about 1.9 lbs per 94 Ib sack of cement) may be added to promote setting. If flowing conditions exist, the grout weight shall be adjusted to ensure an adequate seal is placed. Bentonite shall be mixed with the water prior to mixing with the cement. Grout shall be well mixed and free of lumps. Mixing the neat cement grout off site is permissible provided that material source documentation and proposed mixing ratios are provided to the Engineer at least 24 hours prior to mixing. The grout shall be allowed to set for a minimum of 72 hours before additional work is conducted on the well unless accelerating agents are employed and approved by the supervising licensed well driller or P.E 2.3 Supports and Grouting A. The Contractor shall provide all supports (including concrete housekeeping pad), anchorage, and mounting of the pump and motor, unless otherwise specified in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and requirements of industry standards. B. The Contractor shall design and provide the concrete housekeeping pad. C. The pump and motor shall be anchored to resist the greater of the maximum lateral and vertical forces required by the local governing code This force shall be considered acting at the center of gravity D. The Contractor shall provide all elements required to resist the calculated forces described herein or required by the pump and motor manufacturer. The Contractor shall provide certification that for equipment anchor bolt calculations showing adequacy of bolt sizing and anchor embedment have been performed and signed by a registered structural or civil engineer E. All conduits, piping connections associated with the pump and the well shall be enclosed by the housekeeping pad 2.4 Wellhead Extension and Discharge Head A. The wellhead extension and discharge head assembly shall be designed and provided by the pump vendor for the pump selected B. The discharge head assembly shall be a fabricated steel surface discharge with 150 Ib. ANSI dimension discharge flange and shall support the motor, column, shaft and pump assembly and have a 3 segmented mitered discharge C. The discharge head configuration shall provide a water -tight seal with well casing The discharge head shall be attached (per pump manufacturer) to a single steel seal plate assembly, which is anchor bolted to a concrete block housekeeping pad (see section 2.3). D. Access ports shall be included during the fabrication of the discharge head for pump column pre -lubrication, and a drain port for shaft sealing drainage The pump manufacturer shall assume responsibility for fabrication and sealing of the access ports. The bottom surface of the head shall be machined smooth and the connection of the column to the discharge head shall be with a column adapter flange Threading column directly into head for this set depth is not acceptable. 2.5 Seal Plate and Access Ports City of Yakima Gardner Well 09/17/2010 983-1268-400 11212-6 11212 Vertical Turbine Pump and Motor A. The seal plates and access ports shall be designed and provided by the pump vendor for the pump selected B. The discharge head and seal plate shall be designed for flowing artesian conditions. C. A 2 -inch thick steel top plate shall be provided and the head shall mount to this top plate, per the drawings. The plate shall be connected to the concrete pump base with anchor bolts and leveling nuts D. The 2 -inch space between the top of the concrete housekeeping pad and the bottom plate, shall be filled with a neat cement grout after the pump is installed and leveled. E. Two 2 -inch pipe access ports shall be provided through the steel plates, which will provide access to the (2) 2 -inch sounding tubes used for water level measurement. One of the 2 -inch diameter access ports will house a permanent pressure/level transducer per specification 11205 F. The pressure/level transducer and its cable shall be housed in a 2 -inch stainless steel seamless conduit with straight thread couplings, as shown on the drawings The pipe strings shall be fastened to the column pipe with stainless steel banding, and extend to just above the pump bowls, as shown on the drawings G. Both access ports shall be sealed per the manufacturer 3.0 Execution 3.1 Artesian Flow A. The Contractor is advised that flowing artesian conditions are likely present. The Contractor is responsible for control of flowing artesian conditions at no charge to the Owner 3.2 Pump and Motor A. The Contractor shall install the pump and motor in accordance with manufacturer's instructions The Contractor is responsible for compliance with all applicable local, state, and federal regulations, including Washington State Well Construction Standards (WAC 173-160) and Yakima County Health Department regulations B. Installation shall include all piping, warning signs, and wiring from motor to control panel C. The pump motor shall be rigidly mounted on a common cast iron or fabricated steel baseplate or seal plate designed by the pump vendor and grouted into place on the concrete housekeeping pad per pump vendor's instructions. D. The baseplate, seal plate or leveling blocks supporting the equipment shall be installed, leveled, and grouted in place as designed and specified by the pump vendor The equipment shall be installed, aligned and doweled in place as specified by the pump vendor E. The piping shall be installed and aligned to the equipment connections and the field piping connections F. The Contractor shall coordinate location of electrical conduit and piping penetrations within the concrete pad and housekeeping base. All penetrations shall stub -up on the same side of the equipment as required for connection to the equipment. 3.3 Well Seal A. Contractor shall reconstruct any portions of the existing well seal impacted during pump City of Yakima Gardner Well 09/17/2010 983-1268-400 11212-7 11212_Vertical Turbine Pump and Motor and motor installation, as shown on the Drawings. B. Well seal reconstruction shall be completed under the supervision of the licensed well driller or P.E per State standards (WAC 170-160). C. The annular space around the casing shall be grouted as specified by the applicable State and/or local regulations. Grout shall be placed from the bottom up by methods conforming to WAC 173-160 and AWWA A100-06. Up to 5% bentonite by weight (approximately 4 5 lbs per 94 Ib sack of cement) may be added to prevent shrinkage and improve handling. Up to 2% calcium chloride (about 1 9 lbs per 94 Ib sack of cement) may be added to promote setting If flowing conditions exist, the grout weight shall be adjusted to ensure an adequate seal is placed. Bentonite shall be mixed with the water prior to mixing with the cement. Grout shall be well mixed and free of lumps. Grout shall be placed in one continuous operation, with the entire amount placed before initial set occurs. The density of grout shall be no less than 15 lbs/gal nor greater than 17 6 lbs/gal 3.4 Disinfection A. All equipment and materials to be installed permanently in the well shall be disinfected just prior to installation in accordance with Section 01710. 3.5 Acceptance Testing A. The Contractor shall test the pump in-place to demonstrate its ability to operate at the design flow rate and dynamic head The pump house building must be in place prior to starting the pump test. B. Each pumping unit shall be given a running field test in the presence of the Owner's Representative for a minimum of 2 hours C. Each pumping unit shall be operated at its rated capacity or such other point on its head - capacity curve selected by the Owner's Representative. D. Vibration testing shall be performed by an independent testing firm with testing personnel meeting Qualified Vibration Category 1 certification from the Vibration Institute, and analysis personnel meeting Qualified Vibration Category 11 certification. E. The Contractor shall provide an accurate and acceptable method of measuring the discharge flow and the pressure just downstream of the pumps. F. Tests shall assure that the units and appurtenances have been installed correctly, that there is no objectionable heating, vibration, or noise from any parts, and that all manual and automatic controls function properly G. If any deficiencies are revealed during any tests, such deficiencies shall be corrected and the tests shall be re -conducted 3.6 Spares Contractor shall furnish spare pump packing, gland follower, studs, and nuts END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 09/17/2010 983-1268-400 11212-8 11212 Vertical Turbine Pump and Motor SECTION 11516 CHLORINE INJECTION SYSTEM 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 Description This section specifies the chemical injection system for the chlorination of flows from the Gardner Well to the City of Yakima distribution system The chemical injection system shall be furnished with suitable driver and accessories as specified herein No omission from this chemical injection system specification shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for supplying equipment that shall perform as indicated below 1.2 Submittals A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit detailed manufacturer's information on the chlorine injection system complete with the components, materials and connections to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this section. C. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to, shop drawings, an operations and maintenance manual, electrical details with connection schematics, and catalog data that indicate specific parts and models used 1.3 Environment The chlorine injection system shall be installed in a new well house as shown on the Drawings The pump system shall be a single pre -assembled, package unit in a welded aluminum frame consisting of chlorinator, electrical boxes, centrifugal pump, and solution tank. The solution tank shall have a spill pallet located under the tank. 1.4 Performance Criteria The system shall be capable of the following conditions M Chlorine Delivery Range 0 3 to 2 lbs/hr M Chlorine Residual 1 ppm ® Chlorinator Injection Discharge Point Pressure Range. 85 to 115 psi ® Tablet Capacity. 75 lbs M Solution Tank Capacity: 22 gallons 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 Calcium Hypochlorite Tablet Chlorination System 2.1.1 Manufacturer A. The approved chlorination system shall be the PowerPro Model 3075 by PPG Industries, Inc. B. The tablet chlorinators shall be NSF Standard 60 listed Accu -Tab SI (scale inhibitor) calcium hypochlorite tablets and Accu -Tab chlorinators by PPG Industries, Inc or approved equal The City of Yakima will supply the chlorine tablets. City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/31/2010 983-1268-400 11516-1 11516_Chlorine Injection System C. The chlorine solution delivery pump shall be a Grundfos CRI 5-13 variable frequency drive 2.1.2 General The system shall use an NSF Standard 61 listed erosion feeder, use NSF Standard 60 listed calcium hypochlorite tablets, and shall be capable of meeting all requirements of the Washington State Department of Health. 2.1.3 Inlet and Outlet Components A. The inlet water supply connection with the filter shall be 1 -inch FNPT and shall connect to a fresh water supply of 30 gpm B. A 2.1 -inch brass pressure regulator with tee and gauge shall be installed The inlet pressure gauge shall be Schedule 80 PVC and liquid filled with a pressure range of 0 to 100 psig. C. The inlet solenoid valve shall open and close on signal from the tablet chlorinator system D. A digital flow meter shall be installed. A flow control valve, PVC gate valve type shall be mounted in line with the flow meter. E. The outlet connection shall be 1 -inch FNPT. 2.1.4 Solution Tank The 22 gallon solution tank shall be made of high-density polyethylene The Primary Solution Tank Level Control, which meters the tablet by-pass flow and balances the variation in the water dissolving stream, shall be made from Schedule 80 PVC and 316L stainless steel A. The Secondary High/Low Level Solution Tank Control shall operate as 1 High Level — Closes the inlet solenoid 2 Low Level — Shuts down chlorine solution delivery pump 2.1.5 Chlorine Solution Delivery The solution delivery pump shall be controlled by the process controller A solution injection pump air bleed/tank recycle line, PVC Y -check valve type backflow preventer, and a manual discharge control valve shall be installed 2.1.6 Power Supply The power supply shall be 460 VAC, three phase 2.1.7 Miscellaneous All electrical enclosures shall be NEMA 4X, UL Listed The mounting frame shall be made of aluminum, Type 6061-T 2.1.8 Warranty The manufacturer shall provide a twelve month warranty on all components from the original installation date (or thirteen months from shipment date). If the PowerPro Model 3075 by PPG Industries, Inc. is installed, only Accu -Tab SI tablets shall be used in the chlorination system. Use of any other tablet will invalidate the warranty for the PowerPro Model. The system shall be fully tested to meet required operating conditions by the manufacturer. City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/31/2010 983-1268-400 11516-2 11516_Chlorine Injection System 2.2 Chlorine Monitoring System The chlorine monitoring system will be provided and installed by the City of Yakima. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 Calcium Hypochlorite Tablet Chlorination System A. Contractor shall install the chlorine injection system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as shown on the Drawings. B. Installation shall include all piping, tubing, pumps, valves, the chlorinator, the chemical tank, the aluminum frame, and all other components associated with the chlorine injection system 3.2 Acceptance Testing A. After power is provided, the Contractor shall test the chlorine injection system to demonstrate their ability to operate at the predicted operating conditions or such other point selected by the Owner. B. Contractor shall ensure system is leak -free after installation C. The Contractor shall provide an accurate and acceptable method of measuring the discharge flow Tests shall assure that the unit and appurtenances have been installed correctly, that there is no objectionable heating, vibration, or noise from any parts, and that all manual and automatic controls function properly D. If any deficiencies are revealed during any tests, such deficiencies shall be corrected and the tests shall be re -conducted. END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/31/2010 983-1268-400 11516-3 11516_Chlorine Injection System ' SECTION 11517 FLUORIDE INJECTION SYSTEM 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 Description This section specifies the chemical injection system for the fluoridation of flows from the Gardner Well to ' the City of Yakima Distribution System. The chemical injection system shall be furnished with suitable driver and accessories as specified herein No omission from this specification shall relieve the Contractor of the chemical injection system from supplying equipment that shall perform as indicated ' below 1.2 Submittals ' A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit detailed manufacturer's information on the fluoride injection system complete with the components, materials and connections to demonstrate compliance with the 1 requirements of this section. C. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to, shop drawings, an operations and maintenance manual, electrical details with connection schematics, and catalog data 1 that indicate specific parts and models used. 1.3 Environment ' The fluoride injection system shall be installed in the new wellhouse, as shown on the Drawings The fluoride solution tank shall be located on the floor, within a spill pallet, with the metering pump mounted on the solution tank. ' 1.4 Performance Criteria The pump shall be capable of the following conditions. ® Capacity at Maximum Backpressure. 11 gph at 145 psig, 4 08 mL/stroke ® Pre -Primed Suction Lift: 23 0 ft ' ■ Maximum Stroking Rate 170 strokes/min ▪ Minimum Flow Rate. 7 92 gph 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 Motor -Driven Diaphragm Metering Pump 1 Provide two metering pumps Housing shall be fiberglass -reinforced, PPE plastic housing with NEMA 3 enclosure rating One pump shall be installed and the other shall be held as a spare. 2.1.1 Manufacturer The pumps shall be a microprocessor -controlled, simplex, solenoid -driven, reciprocating, mechanically - actuated diaphragm type, manufactured by ProMinent Fluid Controls, ProMinent® S1 Ca Model Si CAH12035PVT007OUD11100, or approved equal 1 1 City of Yakima Gardner Well — 08/05/2009 983-1268-400 11517-1 11517 Flouride Injection System 2.1.2 Pump Controls A. Stroke length control shall be manually adjusted between 100% and 0% with stroke adjusting knob on the pump control face B. The injection system is controlled by the flowmeter Stroke frequency control shall be manually adjusted in 1 % increments by a multifunction switch The metering pump shall be capable of receiving a pulse input via optional external control cable such that 1 pulse gives 1 pump stroke The metering pump shall be capable of remote ON-OFF operation using the PAUSE function via a voltage -free contact relay through an optional control cable C. A universal control cable with 5 -pin round plug and 5 -wire cable with loose ends shall be provided with each pump Universal control cable for pump control shall be ProMinent Fluid Controls, Part number 1001300, or approved equal D. A relay cable required for the fault contact to the existing SCADA PLC shall be provided. 2.1.3 Pump Diaphragm The diaphragm shall be nylon -reinforced EPDM with PTFE -faced fluid contact surface An elastomer shaft wiper seal shall prevent contamination of the solenoid if the primary diaphragm fails 2.1.4 Liquid End The liquid end shall be constructed of PVDF The suction and discharge valve shall be of the double ball check design The liquid end shall be physically separated from the drive unit by back plate with weep hole creating an air gap 2.1.5 Power Supply The power supply shall be a North American cable and plug, 115 VAC, 60 Hz, single phase The microprocessor is to automatically compensate for supply voltage variations within 10% of the rated voltage such that frequency of the pump remains constant. 2.1.6 Warranty The manufacturer shall provide a two year warranty on the pump drive and a one year warranty on the pump liquid end, including diaphragm and O -rings The pump shall be fully tested to meet rated flow and pressure by the manufacturer 2.2 Upflow Saturator and Sodium Fluoride 2.2.1 Manufacturer A. The saturator shall be Prominent up -flow saturator part number 7740830, or approved equal B. The City of Yakima will supply the sodium fluoride 2.2.2 Tank Assembly A. The saturator shall be of the automatic up -flow type, providing a distribution header at the bottom of the tank, providing about a 4% sodium fluoride solution 1 The tank assembly shall include City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2009 983-1268-400 11517-2 11517_Flouride Injection System a 66 gallon polyethylene tank with an open top hinged lid b '/2 -inch female NPT inlet connection c. Dole Valve d '/2 -inch female NPT isolation and drain valves e Mechanical float valve f. Foot valve assembly and mounting platform g PVC distribution header h. Vacuum breaker B. The mounting platform shall have traded inserts molded into the plastic for mounting the metering pump Systems without pump mounting on top of the tank shall not be allowed C. All wetted components shall be non-metallic 2.2.3 Operating Conditions A. The Upflow Saturator shall meet the following operating conditions: 1 Sodium Fluoride tank capacity. 200 lbs 2 Solution feed rate up to 840 gpd 2.3 Fluoride Monitoring System The fluoride monitoring system will be provided and installed by the City of Yakima. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 Fluoride Injection System Contractor shall install all components of the fluoride injection system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as shown on the Drawings. Installation shall include all piping, tubing, the chemical tank, the pump, the upflow saturator, the fluoride monitor, and all components associated with the portable stand. 3.2 Acceptance Testing A. After power is provided, the Contractor shall test the fluoride injection system to demonstrate their ability to operate at the predicted operating conditions or such other point selected by the Owner. B. Contractor shall ensure system is leak -free after installation The Contractor shall provide an accurate and acceptable method of measuring the discharge flow. C. Tests shall assure that the unit and appurtenances have been installed correctly, that there is no objectionable heating, vibration, or noise from any parts, and that all manual and automatic controls function properly. If any deficiencies are revealed during any tests, such deficiencies shall be corrected and the tests shall be re -conducted. END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2009 983-1268-400 11517-3 11517_Flouride Injection System DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 1 1 SECTION 15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 1.0 GENERAL I1.1 Description Of Work A. This section specifies pipe materials and methods used in construction of the Gardner Well project, this includes: 111 ® Discharge, chemical injection, waste, ASR, and potable water piping inside the pump house building I • Buried source discharge pipe and fittings • Buried waste and relief pipe and fittings • Buried chlorine contact pipe and fittings II• New water main replacement pipe and fittings B. The Owner will relocate the existing fire hydrant and provide the wet tap on the main for Ithe fire hydrant. C. The Owner will provide the tap and meter connection for the pump house building where shown on the Drawings. 111 1.2 Submittals I A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300 B. Submit detailed manufacturer's information, technical data, and/or calculations for all piping, fittings, coating systems, and associated materials, to demonstrate conformance Iwith the appropriate standards and the requirements of these specifications. . Submittals shall include detailed shop drawings of piping, fittings and fabricated bends D. Submit record drawings that include the following. 1. Drawings shall accurately locate structures and control points 2. Drawings shall accurately show the location of all new structures and pipe, I including the location of all valves, couplings, fittings, vaults, cleanouts, thrust blocks, pipe supports, pipe anchorages, and restrained joint pipe 3 Plan drawings shall be at a scale not less than 1/4 inch equals one foot. 1 4 Drawings shall be dimensioned to show relationship between structures and piping and appurtenances. Specific locations of new piping, methods of connection, and methods of pipe penetration shall be shown on the drawings IE. Submit color samples for exterior coatings. 1.3 References All pipe materials and construction methods shall conform to applicable requirements of the documents listed below and of this section. In case of conflict between this section and the listed documents, the 1 requirements of this section shall prevail ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 American National Standard for Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 15060-1 15060_Pipe and Pipe Fittings ANSI/AWWA C105/A21 5 ANSI/AWWA C110/A21 10 ANSI/AWWA C111/A21 11 ANSI/AWWA C115/A21 15 AN S I/AWWA C116/A21.16 ANSI/AWWA C150/A21 50 ANSI/AWWA C151/A21 51 ANSI/AWWA C153/A21 53 ANSI/AWWA C200 ANSI/AWWA C213 ANSI/AWWA C300 ANSI/AWWA C600 ANSI/AWWA C606 AWWA C651 AWWA M9 AWWA M11 AWWA M41 UPC 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 General American National Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe Systems American National Standard for Ductile Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings, 3 In Through 48 Inc, for Water American National Standard for Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipes and Fittings American National Standard for Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe with Ductile Iron or Gray -Iron Threaded Flanges American National Standard for Protective Fusion -Bonded Epoxy Coatings for the Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings for Water Supply Service American National Standard for the Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe American National Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water American National Standard for Ductile Iron Compact Fittings for AWWA Standard for Steel Water Pipe -6 -In. (150 mm) or Larger AWWA Standard for Fusion -Bonded Epoxy for Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines AWWA Standard for Reinforced Concrete Pressure Pipe/Steel- Cylinder Type Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances Grooved and Shouldered Joints Disinfecting Water Mains Concrete Pressure Pipe Steel Pipe — A Guide for Design and Installation Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings — Manual of Water Supply Practices Uniform Plumbing Code A. The Contractor shall provide all necessary pipe, fittings, pipe spools, flanges, pipe supports, valves, and other piping and piping related material which are needed to provided a functional pumping system, meeting these specifications and the AWWA Standards Provide all piping and piping appurtenances, whether or not they are shown on the drawings B. The Contractor shall ensure that fittings and pipe of the proper class and strength are used C. All pipe sizes as shown on the drawings and as specified in this section are in reference to "nominal" diameter, unless otherwise indicated. D. The piping systems shown on the drawings indicate the approximate horizontal and vertical configuration required The Contractor shall determine the exact layout of piping, fittings, and joints necessary to fit actual field conditions. E. Whether shown or not, pipe shall be installed with unions, couplings, and flanged coupling adapters as required to allow placement of the pipe and removal of valves and equipment. F. Expansion joints shall be the type recommended by the manufacturer of each piping system City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 15060-2 15060_Pipe and Pipe Fittings G. Each pipe system, including fittings and couplings, shall be provided by a single manufacturer. H. The polyethylene encasement material for all ductile iron and cast iron pipe shall conform to the most current edition of AWWA C105/ANSI A21.5. 2.2 Black Steel Pipe 2.2.1 General A. Pipe and fittings used inside the pump house station shall be black steel pipe, Schedule 40, manufactured in accordance with the dimensional tolerances and material specifications of current ASTM standards for steel pipe B. Fittings shall be a minimum of 275 pounds pressure rating, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents All flange fittings shall be standard steel -ring or steel -hub and conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C207 Rubber or non -asbestos gasket shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C207 2.2.2 Interior and Exterior Coating A. The interior and exterior surface of the steel shall be coated with fusion -bonded epoxy coating Coating shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C213. The coating shall be certified to meet the requirements of NSF 61 for potable water service. B. The pipe coating exterior located within the pump house shall be painted according to the following schedule ® Supply (Raw) Water - Aqua ® Finished Water - Dark Blue ▪ Waste (branch line to waste drain) - Light Brown ® Chlorine Line (do not paint unions or valves) - Yellow ® Fluoride Line — (do not paint unions or valves) - Light Blue with Red Bands 2.3 Ductile Iron Pipe 2.3.1 General A. Ductile Iron Pipe shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C151, with cement mortar lining conforming to the requirements of AWWA C104/ANSI A24 1. B. Polyethylene encasement shall be installed for all buried ductile iron pipe in strict conformance to the methods described in the most current editions of AWWA C105/ANSI A21.5 and the Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association's "A Guide for the Installation of Ductile Iron Pipe " C. Ductile Iron Class 52 pipe shall be used, except where indicated on the drawings. 2.3.2 Fittings A. Fittings shall be a minimum of 250 pounds pressure rating, mechanical joint or all bell, lined or unlined, either cast iron or ductile iron, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 15060-3 15060_Pipe and Pipe Fittings B. All fittings shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C110/ANSI A21 10 Rubber gasket joints for ductile iron pipe and fittings shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C111/ANSI A21 11 2.4 Reinforced Concrete Cylinder Pipe — Steel Type 2.4.1 General A. Reinforced concrete cylinder pipe for the 72 -inch chlorine contact pipe and 72 -inch by 48 - inch reducers shall conform to AWWA C300. B. Reinforced concrete cylinder pipe shall be the diameter and length (as permissible) shown, and shall be furnished complete with rubber gaskets and all specials as required under the Contract Documents 2.4.2 Pipe Design A. The pipe furnished shall be reinforced concrete cylinder pipe with steel joint rings and rubber gaskets The pipe shall consist of a light gauge steel cylinder with attached steel joint rings surrounded by one or more cages of welded steel reinforcement which are embedded in a portland cement concrete core of uniform thickness B. Pipe design shall be meet the following System Pressure 85 psi to 105 psi Operating Pressure. 115 psi to 130 psi Cover depth —4 5 -feet C. Joint Design Joint rings on straight pipe shall be manufactured so that bells and spigots are perpendicular to the axis of the pipe within ± 1/4 -inch when measured from one side of the pipe. D. The joint rings shall be checked for size and shape on accurate templates before being incorporated in the core Circumferences so measured shall not exceed tolerances specified in AWWA C300 E. Flange fittings shall conform to either AWWA C207 Class E or ANSI B16 5 150 -Ib class Flanges shall have flat faces and shall be attached with bolt holes straddling the vertical axis of the pipe unless otherwise shown Attachment of the flanges to the pipe shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C207 2.5 PVC Pipe A. Chemical supply and dose lines identified on the drawings shall be Schedule 80 PVC pipe conforming to the requirements of AWWA C900-97 2.6 Stainless Steel Pipe A. All pipe identified on the drawings as stainless steel shall be Schedule 40 Type 316 Stainless Steel, conforming to ASTM A312 Fittings shall conform to ASTM A403 B. Stainless steel pipe used to house pressure transducers shall be seamless conduit piping with straight thread couplings City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 15060-4 15060_Pipe and Pipe Fittings 2.7 Side Sewer Connection Pipe and Fittings A. Side sewer pipe shall be solid wall Schedule 40 PVC pipe conforming to the requirements of ASTM D3034. B. Joints for solid wall PVC pipe shall conform to ASTM D 3212 using elastomeric gaskets conforming to ASTM F 477. C. Fittings for solid wall PVC pipe shall be injection molded, factory welded, or factory solvent cemented. 2.8 Compression Tube Fittings A. Compression tube fittings shall be used to seal cables from access ports, as indicated on the drawings Brass or stainless steel fittings shall be used The fitting shall be selected based on cable (tube) OD and pipe size. The compression tube fittings shall be McMaster -Carr type or approved equal. B. A set of reducers may need to be used to reduce the pipe diameter to those offered for compression tube fittings. Reducers shall be standard stainless steel or cast iron fittings 2.9 Restrained Flange Adapter A. A restrained flange adapter shall be installed on the pump discharge, as shown on the drawings. The flange adaptor shall be a Series 2100 Megaflange as manufactured by EBAA Iron Co., or approved equal 2.10 Joints and Joint Restraint A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, mechanical joints or push -on joints may be used Pipe joints shall be rubber gasket type conforming to AWWA C111 and C153. B. Joint restraint for fittings, valves and piping deflection points must be provided. Where shown on the drawings, joint restraint for buried piping deflection points shall utilize thrust blocks, per the City of Yakima Standard Detail W6. Where shown on the drawings or where otherwise required, joint restraint shall utilize EBAA Iron MEGALUG restrained mechanical joints, or approved equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 General A. The Contractor shall be responsible for checking and verifying all existing piping and appurtenance locations whether or not they are shown on the drawings B. The Contractor shall locate and excavate all buried pipes, appurtenances, and points of connection as required. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for complying with the City of Yakima's requirements for working on public waterlines D. The Contractor shall be responsible for complying with the City of Yakima's sewer installation policies during the side sewer connection installation. City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 15060-5 15060_Pipe and Pipe Fittings 3.2 Pipe and Fittings 3.2.1 General A. Black steel pipe and fittings shall be handled and installed in accordance with AWWA M11 B. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be handled and installed in accordance with AWWA M4. C. Reinforced concrete cylinder pipe shall be fabricated in accordance with AWWA C300 and handled and installed in accordance with AWWA M9 The pipe shall be handled by use of cable slings or other devices acceptable to the Engineer, designed and constructed to prevent damage to the pipe D. PVC pipe that connect to the source water line, such as chemical feed and supply lines, shall be handled and installed in accordance with AWWA M23 3.2.2 Coatings A. Black steel pipe and fitting interior and exterior coatings shall be prepared, coated, inspected and repaired in the factory or in the field in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations and ANSI/AWWA C213 B. Ductile iron pipe and fitting exterior coatings shall be prepared, coated, inspected, and repaired in accordance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations Interior surfaces shall be cement mortar lining in accordance with AWWA C104 3.2.3 Joining of Pipe A. Black Steel Certified welders employed by the pump station manufacturer shall perform all pipe welds for black steel pipe and fittings. Piping shall be fabricated utilizing weld tees and/or weld reducing tees to maintain smooth water flows and minimize hydraulic losses in the transition from the pump piping to the buried ductile iron piping B. Ductile iron Mechanical or push -on joints may be used The installation of all joints shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C600 Whenever flange connections are shown on the drawings, called for in the Specifications, or required in the work, the flange and fittings shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C110/ANSI A21 10 for 250 - pound pressure ratings C. Reinforced concrete cylinder pipe shall be joined in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and AWWA M9 3.2.4 Joint Restraint A. Joint restraint shall be installed where the pipe line terminates, or a tee, cross, bend, or similar fitting is installed changing pipe alignment. B. Joint restraint shall consist of poured -in-place concrete thrust blocks as shown on the Standard Details sheet of the drawing set. If poured -in-place thrust blocks are used, all pipe and fittings exposed to concrete shall be double wrapped with 4 -mil polyethylene film prior to placement of the concrete. C. Where shown on the drawings, or approved by the engineer, joint restraint may consist of EBAA Iron MEGALUG, or approved equal The MEGALUG shall be installed per the manufacturer City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 15060-6 15060_Pipe and Pipe Fittings 3.3 Acceptance Testing 3.3.1 General A. Steel piping and valves inside the well house • After the piping and valves have been manufactured, the Contractor shall first test the piping system, including piping, fittings and all valves that make up the well house with high-pressure air. High-pressure air shall be pumped into the piping system and a soap solution shall then be sprayed on any welded joints for leak indication. • After final assembly of the pumps, piping and valves, the Contractor shall hydrostatically test the entire system for leaks at all joints, connections and weld seams per ANSI/AWWA C600 IN Any deficiencies found during the air test or the hydrostatic test shall be repaired and the system shall be retested B. Piping and valves in the field • Contractor shall test all new piping constructed or existing piping relocated as part of this project. Testing shall be performed per ANSI/AWWA C600. C. The Contractor shall provide all test equipment including test pumps, gauges, volumetric measuring equipment, fittings, and other equipment required. Pressure gauges used shall be graduated in increments not greater than five psi and shall have a range of twice the test pressure. Use only gauges and instruments that are in current calibration Temporary blind flanges shall be used to seal the ends of the pipes as required for testing. 3.3.2 Preparation A. Remove from the system any equipment that may be damaged by test pressure Perform pressure testing prior to concealing, insulating, or painting the piping 3.3.3 Test Requirements A. All new or relocated pipelines shall be tested to a minimum pressure of 200 psi for a minimum duration of two hours Visually observe all joints and connections for leakage. 3.3.4 Leakage A. Leakage for a newly -installed main is determined by the following formula. L= Where SD(P)o.5 133,200 L = Allowable leakage in gallons per hour S = Length of pipe tested in feet. D = Nominal diameter of pipe in inches. P = Test pressure in pounds per square inch. B. The duration of each leakage test shall be 2 hours, and during the test the main shall be subjected to the constant test pressure as defined above. The test pump shall be valved to ensure that constant test pressure is maintained throughout the test and all excess City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 15060-7 15060_Pipe and Pipe Fittings water returned to the supply tank. C. If the pressure decreases below the required test pressure during the 2 -hour period, the preceding portion of that test will be declared void. Cracked or defective pipe, gaskets, mechanical joints, fittings, or valves discovered as a consequence of the hydrostatic tests shall be removed and replaced with sound material at the Contractor's expense The test shall then be repeated until the results are satisfactory 3.4 Cleaning And Disinfection 3.4.1 Cleaning A. Remove foreign materials including dirt, grease, and other matter Clean, by flushing, interior of water piping Upon completion of flushing, completely drain systems at all low points; remove, clean, and replace all strainer baskets, and refill systems. 3.4.2 Disinfection A. Disinfection shall be completed in accordance with Section 01710 END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 15060-8 15060_Pipe and Pipe Fittings SECTION 15065 PIPE SUPPORTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 Description This section describes adjustable flange pipe supports for the piping in the Gardner Well House and waste discharge line. 1.2 Submittals A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit detailed manufacturer's technical data for all pipe supports and associated components to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this section 1.3 References All pipe support materials and installation methods shall conform to the most current versions of applicable requirements in the documents listed below In case of conflict between this Section and the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail ANSI/MSS SP -58 ANSI/MSS SP -69 ANSI/MSS SP -89 UPC 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 General Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer Pipe Hanger and Supports - Selection and Application Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices Uniform Plumbing Code A. Pipe and equipment hangers shall be rated to carry the weight of piping in addition to the weight of the fluid within the pipe B. Thrust bracing shall be included for pressure piping supports larger than 4 -inches C. Supports shall be appropriately sized for pipe being supported. 2.2 Flange Support Flange supports shall be used for pipe supports. Flange supports shall be electroplated galvanized steel, manufactured by Material Resources "Standon" Model S89, or approved equal. 2.3 Anchor Bolts Anchor bolts shall be 316 stainless steel. Resin adhesive, Hilti Type HVA, wedge type expansion anchor, Hilti Type HKB; or approved equal. City of Yakima Gardner Well 03/12/2010 983-1268-400 15065-1 15065_Pipe Supports 3M EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. The Contractor shall provide and install all flange supports, anchors, inserts, bolts, nuts, rods, washers, structural attachments, and expansion joints as indicated on the drawings, or as required, to provide a complete system of pipe support in accordance with applicable codes and standards B. Where pipe transitions are required from one elevation to another, the Contractor shall field verify and adjust the pipe and associated support system to provide a complete, safe, and satisfactory installation. C. Pipe support system shall be installed strictly in accordance with standards and codes, piping support system manufacturer's recommendations, and piping manufacturer's recommendations D. All piping shall be rigidly supported and anchored so that there is no movement or visible sagging between supports Flange supports shall be anchored to pump house floor or concrete base, as shown on drawings Anchorage shall be provided to resist thrust due to temperature changes, changes in diameter or direction, or dead ending END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 03/12/2010 983-1268-400 15065-2 15065_Pipe Supports tSECTION 15070 PIPE PENETRATIONS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 Description This Section describes pipe penetrations through the well house building floor and wall surfaces and pre- cast air gap vault. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 Sleeves A. Exterior Wall • Pipes passing through an exterior wall shall be installed using a molded non-metallic high density polyethylene Model CS Century -Line® sleeves as manufactured by PSI, or approved equivalent. 1 • The pre -manufactured sleeve shall be integrally formed hollow water stop and sized having a minimum of four inches larger than the outside diameter of the sleeve itself and allowing 1/2 -inch movement. Each sleeve assembly shall have end caps ' manufactured of the same material as the sleeve itself and installed at each end of the sleeve to prevent deformation during concrete pour End caps shall remain in place to protect the opening from residual debris and rodent entry prior to pipe I B. insertion Floor ' ® Pipes passing through the floor shall be installed using pipe sleeve sized for pipe and penetration diameter. 2.2 Floor and Exterior Wall Seals A. Pipe penetration seals through the exterior walls or floors shall be Link -Seal, manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator (PSI), or approved equal. B. Size of seals shall be appropriate for pipe and penetration diameter as recommended by the manufacturer 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 Interior Wall Pipe Penetration A. Pipes passing through an interior wall may be installed using pipe sleeves, cored holes, or formed holes. B. Contractor shall remove all loose concrete, soil, and other deleterious materials from pipe and concrete surfaces to be sealed. C. Contractor shall seal annulus between pipe and concrete masonry unit wall. Contractor t may infill opening with backer -rod foam, silicone sealant, premixed mortar, or other approved seal material D. Seals shall be smooth and clean ' City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/16/2010 983-1268-400 15070-1 15070_Pipe Penetrations 3.2 Exterior Walls and Floor Penetrations A. Install pipe sleeves in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install manufactured seals at pipe penetrations shown on the drawings C. Install penetration seals in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations D. Regardless of type or method of forming, seating surfaces for seals shall be smooth and clean END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/16/2010 983-1268-400 15070-2 15070_Pipe Penetrations ' SECTION 15100 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES ' 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 Description This section specifies the valves and appurtenances associated with the piping for the City of Yakima Gardner Well project, as indicated on the drawings 1.2 Submittals A. Submit in accordance with section 01300 B. Submit detailed manufacturer's information, including model numbers, components, and materials to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this section. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 General A. All valves shall be manufacturer's standard design unless otherwise specified B. Unless otherwise indicated, the direction of rotation of the wheel, wrench nut, or lever to open the valve shall be to the left (counterclockwise). Each valve body or operator shall be permanently marked with the word OPEN and an arrow indicating the direction to I open C. Unless indicated otherwise, all valves shall be flanged Valves located outside shall be mechanical joints. 1 -inch or 2 -inch ball valves and check valves shall be threaded. ' D. Valves of the same type shall be from a single manufacturer E. All valve materials shall be compatible with the connecting pipe material Wetted parts shall be fabricated of approved corrosion resistant material. Alternatively, all exposed surfaces which will be in contact with water, exclusive of flange faces, may be epoxy - coated ' 2.2 Gate Valves A. Gate valves shall be Mueller A2360 (buried service) and Mueller R2360 (OS&Y vertical t rising stem) where shown on the Drawings. B. Gate valves shall be ductile iron body, resilient -seated valves. Valves shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with AWWA C-509. Interior ferrous surfaces shall be epoxy -coated in accordance with AWWA C-550 All valves shall open counterclockwise. C. Valves located in the pump house building and waste discharge line shall be rising stem. D. Valves for buried service shall be equipped with a standard AWWA operating nut. Valve boxes shall be provided per City of Yakima Standard Detail W2, as needed. 1 1 ' City of Yakima Gardner Well — 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 15100-1 15100 Valves and Appurtenances 2.3 Inline Check Valve A. The check valve on the main 12 -inch water distribution line shall be a 12 -inch silent check valve, specified to open at approximately 1/4 to 1/2 psi and completely close prior to flow reversal B. The valve shall have a cast iron body with bronze trim and stainless steel spring The valves shall have resilient seating (Buna-N). C. The valve shall be flanged with ductile iron 150 Ib flanges D. The 12 -inch check valve shall be an APCO Series 600, Model 612, or approved equivalent. 2.4 Waste Discharge Valve A. The control valve located on the waste discharge line shall be a 6 -inch, globe -style deep well pump control valve The valve shall protect pipelines from surges caused by the starting and stopping of the pump B. The valve shall be a hydraulically operated, pilot controlled, diaphragm valve The valve shall have separate adjustable flow control valves in the pilot system that regulates the opening and closing rates C. The operation of the valve shall be tied into the City's existing control system (see Specification 16422) D. The valve shall be normally open When the pump starts, the solenoid control shall energize and the valve shall begin to close slowly, discharging air and the initial rush of sand and water from the pump column to the atmosphere As the valve closes the pump output will gradually divert to the main line, preventing the development of a starting surge. E. When the pump receives signal to shut down, the solenoid control shall de -energize after a period of time specified by the City and the valve shall begin to open to divert the pump output to the waste discharge line. As the pump pressure gradually decreases, the main line check valve closes slowly preventing shock or slam during the pump stopping cycle. F. The valve shall be equipped with a limit switch on the valve stem which will serve as an electrical interlock between the valve and pump motor When the pump control valve is wide open, the limit switch assembly releases the pump starter and the pump stops G. The valve body and cover shall be ductile iron with bronze trim materials H. The valve shall be flanged, rated for 150 Ib. pressure class I. The pilot control shall be bronze with stainless steel (type 303) trim and Buna-N® synthetic rubber material Refer to Division 16, Specification 16422 for the solenoid control electrical specifications J. The valve shall be similar to the Cla-Val 61-02 Deep Well Pump Control Valve as manufactured by Cla-Val, Newport Beach, California 2.5 ASR Control Valve A. The valve shall be similar to the Cla-Val 49EG-03BCSY Combination Pressure Reducing and Solenoid Shutoff Valve as manufactured by Cla-Val, Newport Beach, California B. The control valve shall be located on the ASR pipeline as shown on the drawing City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 15100-2 15100_Valves and Appurtenances C. The control valve shall be an 8 -inch combination pressure reducing and flow control with solenoid override The control valve assembly shall consist of the following solenoid control, pressure differential control, orifice plate, pressure reducing control, and opening/closing speed controls. D. The solenoid control shall be a direct acting, 3 -way solenoid control that changes position when the coil is de -energized (closed) or energized (open). The solenoid control will apply or relieve pressure in the cover chamber of the auxiliary hytrol. E. The pressure differential control shall be normally open and respond to differential pressure changes sensed across the orifice assembly located downstream of the control valve. F. The pressure reducing control shall be normally open control that sense main valve outlet pressure changes to maintain a relatively constant outlet pressure. An increase in outlet pressure shall close the controls and a decrease in outlet pressure shall open the control The pressure reducing control shall cause main valve cover pressure to vary and the main valve to open and close, hence modulating the outlet pressure G. The speed controls shall control the opening and closing speeds of the main valve H. The control valve shall be equipped with isolation valves to isolate the pilot system from the main line pressure. I. A Y -strainer shall be installed in the pilot supply line to protect the pilot system from foreign particles J. The valve shall be flanged, rated for 150 Ib pressure class K. The valve setting shall be no less than 25 psi. The valve shall be equipped with an anti - cavitation trim if the City of Yakima decides to operate at less than 25 psi 2.6 Air/Vacuum Valve A. The air/vacuum relief valve shall be 3 -inch APCO 140 DAT Series (Model 146 DAT) for vertical turbines or approved equal B. The air/vacuum valve shall be located at the 12 -inch pump discharge to vent air from the pump discharge column. C. The air/vacuum valves for vertical turbine pumps shall vent large quantities of air out thru the orifice when pump starts and close tight when liquid enters then permit large quantities of air to re-enter thru the orifice when pump stops to prevent vacuum forming in the pump suction column D. The main valves parts shall be a cast iron body, cover, and baffle with stainless steel float and BUNA-N seat. E. The baffle shall shield the float from direct impact of air and water to prevent premature float closure. The seat shall slip fit into the baffle or cover and lock in place without any distortion, but easily removable. F. The entire float and baffle assembly must be shrouded with a water diffuser to prevent water slamming the float shut. All outlets to be threaded or flanged G. The float shall be stainless steel center guided (not free floating) for positive seating and rated 1000 psi non -shock service (static). H. The discharge orifice shall be fitted with a double-acting throttling device. Patented , to regulate and restrict air venting and to establish a pressure loading on the rising suction column of water to eliminate damaging shock to the pump, controls and check valve on City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 15100-3 15100_Valves and Appurtenances pump start. On pump stop, the double-acting throttling device shall automatically open, allowing full line unrestricted air re-entry to prevent vacuum from forming in the suction column I. The valve exterior shall be painted with universal primer paint as accepted by the FDA for use in contact with potable water 2.7 Combination Air Release Valve A. The combination air valve shall be an APCO Series 140C (Model 145C) or approved equal. B. The combination air release valve on the 8 -inch ASR bypass line shall automatically open to release trapped air when the inside of the pipeline is filled under pressure as well as prevent vacuum from forming in the pipeline C. The valve shall have a 2 -inch inlet opening with a 3/32 -inch diameter small orifice and a 2—inch diameter large orifice The valve shall have a ductile iron body and cover, with all other parts made of stainless steel or other corrosion -resistant material. D. The valve shall consist of a body, cover, float, needle and seat, and leverage frame. The baffle will be designed to protect the float from direct contact of the rushing air and water to prevent the float from closing prematurely The seat shall be fastened into the valve cover without distortion and shall be easily removed The plug shall be center guided through hex bushing for positive shut-off 2.8 Butterfly Valves A. The butterfly valves shall be Henry Pratt Model 2FPII or approved equal B. The butterfly valves shall be located where shown on the drawings. C. The butterfly valves shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest revision of AWWA C504, Class 150B and conform to NSF Standard 61. The manufacturer shall have produced AWWA butterfly valves for a minimum of five years D. Valve bodies shall be constructed of ASTM A126, Class B cast iron for flanged valves or ASTM A48, Class 40 for wafer style Flanged valves shall be fully faced and drilled in accordance with ANSI Standard B16 1, Class 125 E. Rubber body seats shall be of one piece construction, simultaneously molded and bonded into a recessed cavity in the valve body Seats may not be located on the disc or be retained by segments and/or screws. For wafer style valves, the seat shall cover the entire inner surface of the valve body and extend over the outside face of the valve body to form a flange gasket. F. The valve bearings shall be of a self-lubricating, nonmetallic material to effectively isolate the disc -shaft assembly from the valve body. Metal -to -metal thrust bearings in the flow stream are not allowed G. The valve disc shall be a lens -shaped design to afford minimal pressure drop and line turbulence. Materials of construction shall be ASTM A126, Class B cast iron disc with a stainless steel, type 316 edge Discs shall be retained by stainless steel pins which extends through the full diameter of the shaft to withstand the specified line pressure up to valve rating and the torque required to operate the valve Disc stops located in the flow stream are not allowed City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 15100-4 15100_Valves and Appurtenances H. The valve shafts shall be of stainless steel type 304 At the operator end of the valve shaft, a packing gland utilizing "V" type chevron packing shall be utilized "0" ring and "U" cup packing is not allowed All surfaces of the valve interior shall be clean, dry and free from grease before painting The valve surfaces except for disc edge, rubber seat and finished portions shall be evenly coated with asphalt varnish in accordance with Federal Specification TT -C-494 and AWWA Standard C504 The exterior valve surfaces and actuator shall be evenly coated with a suitable primer to match field coatings J. Hydrostatic and seat leakage tests shall be conducted in strict accordance with AWWA Standard C504. The manufacturer furnishing valves under the specification shall be prepared to provide Proof of Design Test reports to illustrate that the valves supplied meet the design requirements of AWWA C504. 2.8.1 Manual Actuators A. Butterfly valves for buried service on the 12 -inch discharge line shall be manually actuated. Valve boxes shall be provided per City of Yakima Standard Detail W2, as needed B. Manual actuators shall conform to AWWA C504 and shall be Pratt MDT or an approved equal C. The manual actuator shall be a 2 -inch operating nut, self-locking type and shall be designed to hold the valve in any intermediate position between fully open and fully closed without creeping or fluttering D. Actuators shall be equipped with mechanical stop -limiting devices to prevent overtravel of the disc in the open and closed positions E. Actuators shall be fully enclosed and designed to produce maximum pull of 80 -Ib on the handwheel F. Actuator components shall withstand an input of 450 ft -lbs at extreme operator position without damage 2.8.2 Electrical Actuator A. The butterfly valve on the ASR bypass line shall be electrically actuated B. Actuator shall be quarter turn, and shall coordinate with the mechanical characteristics of the valve it operates C. Actuator shall operate from 480 volt three phase, 60 Hz power supply Actuator shall incorporate motor, integral reversing starter, local control facilities, and terminals for remote control and indication. D. Control Power shall be supplied from an integral 24 VDC supply Actuator shall be provided with an integral control station including "Local -Off -Remote" and "Open -Stop - Close" switches Remote mode shall accept dry contacts for open and close commands E. Valve position monitoring shall be provided through four actuator contacts, each of which can be selected to indicate any position of the valve with each contact selectable as normally open or normally closed. Contacts shall be rated 5 amps at 250 VAC, 30 VDC. F. The actuator must provide a local indication of valve position, even when the power supply is not present. G. The electrical actuator shall be Rotork IQT Range 1000 City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 15100-5 15100_Valves and Appurtenances 2.9 Ball Valves A. Ball valves shall be located on the air release and chemical injection line as shown on the drawings B. Ball valves shall be 1/2 -inch and 1 -inch brass full port with NPT thread, where shown. C. Valve materials shall be suitable for use per ANSI/NSF 61-2004 D. Valve shall be rated at a working pressure of 150 psi E. Valve manufacturer shall be Milwaukee Valve Co or approved equivalent. 2.10 Injection Line Check Valves A. Check valves on the chemical injection lines shall be 1 -inch and provide protection against reverse flow and resistance to chemicals B. The check valve materials shall consist of a bronze body, brass retainer, brass stem, and stainless steel spring The check valve threads shall be NPT C. The ball cone check shall be 15% glass filled reinforced PolyTetraFluoroEthylene (RPTFE). D. The check valve shall be rated at a working pressure of 150 psi. E. The check valve manufacturer shall be Apollo or approved equivalent. 2.11 Discharge Line Pressure Gauge A. The pressure gauge on the main 12 -inch water discharge line shall be a manual -read 4 - inch, stainless steel, liquid filled pressure gauge The gauge shall be equipped with a 316 stainless steel snubber screw and pet cock/vent valve The pet cock may consist of a 1/4 -inch stainless steel ball valve, equipped separately A. The gauge shall have a 1/4 -inch NPT connection B. The gauge shall be capable of measuring 1 to160 psi at an accuracy of 1%, full-scale. C. The gauge shall be a Duralife Type 1009 pressure gauge, model # 35 -1009 -SW -02L-160 as manufactured by Ashcroft, or approved equal 2.12 Standard Pressure Gauges A. Pressure gauges shall be installed at locations as shown on the drawings B. Pressure gauges shall be capable of measuring 0 to 200 psi C. The pressure gauge shall be a Dwyer Model SGS F -0722N, or approved equal 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. Clean all valves and fittings of foreign material prior to installation. B. Install all valves in accordance with AWWA Standards and manufacturer's recommendations City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 15100-6 15100_Valves and Appurtenances 3.2 Flanges and Union Installation A. Provide flanges and unions at all final connections. Arrange piping and connections so that area being served may be serviced or totally removed without disturbing adjacent piping beyond final connections and associated shut-off valves. B. Flanges and unions shall be made of same or compatible material as piping systems in which they are installed 3.3 Check Valves Check valves shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendations, applicable AWWA standards, and as shown on the drawings 3.4 ASR Control Valve Setting A. After complete installation of the entire piping system, the Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and setting the valve set point with the manufacturer and the Owner. 3.5 Acceptance Testing A. After installation, pressure test all valves under the conditions for pipe testing as described in Section 15060, to demonstrate no leakage. B. With the piping system fully assembled and all pressure testing successfully completed, perform acceptance testing in the presence of the Owner's Representative. Acceptance testing shall consist of at least 3 cycles of filling, discharging and draining the piping system to demonstrate that all components function as intended under operating conditions Each cycle shall include actuation of all valves 3.6 Cleaning And Disinfection 3.6.1 Cleaning Remove foreign materials including dirt, grease, and other matter. Clean, by flushing, interior of water piping Upon completion of flushing, completely drain systems at all low points; remove, clean, and replace all strainer baskets; and refill systems. 3.6.2 Disinfection Disinfection shall be completed in accordance with Section 01710 END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 15100-7 15100_Valves and Appurtenances SECTION 15250 ELECTRICAL HEAT TRACE TAPE 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 Description Furnish and install a complete UL Listed system of heaters and components approved specifically for pipe heat tracing This section specifies electric heat tracer tape and control for protection of piping against freezing 1.2 References This section contains reference to ANSI/IEEE Standard 515 1 It is a part of this section as specified and modified In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed document, the requirements of this section shall prevail 1.3 Submittals A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300 B. Submit detailed catalog data and installation details for the electric heat tracer tape and components (including insulation) to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this section 2.0 PRODUCTS Heat trace tape shall conform to the requirements of this section The heat trace tape shall be Thermon 8FLX1-OJ Self -Regulating Heat Tape or equal 2.1 Tape A. The tracer tape shall have a thermal rating of 8 watts per foot at 0 degrees F B. The self-regulating heat tape shall consist of two nickel -plated copper bus wires embedded in a radiation cross-linked semiconductive polymer core The heater shall be capable of varying its heat output along its entire length, allowing the heater to cross over itself without overheating The heater shall be covered by a polyolefin dielectric jacket rated 300 Vac at 105°C and a tinned copper braid (12 AWG equivalent wire size). C. The heating cable shall be covered by a polyolefin outer jacket. D. The heater shall operate on a line voltage of 120 Vac without the use of transformers E. The heating cable shall be suitable for use on metallic and nonmetallic piping 2.2 Cable Termination A. Refer to Electrical Specification, Division 16 for cable termination specifications City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 15250-1 15250_Electrical Heat Trace Tape 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. Install heat trace tape at the locations shown on the Drawings B. Refer to the manufacturer's installation instructions for proper installation and layout methods Deviations from these instructions could result in performance characteristics different than intended The tracer tape shall include at least 5 feet of wire coiled inside the building for future electrical hook-up. C. At least 1 -inch of fiberglass insulation shall be provided over the tracer tape. The insulation shall not be installed with staples. Insulation jackets should be closed with adhesive to avoid damage to the heating cable D. Piping shall be pressure tested prior to installation of heating cable Thermal insulation shall not be installed until heating cable installation is complete and a megohmeter (megger) test has been passed. Heat traced lines shall be insulated with 1 -inch insulation promptly after the heat tracing installation. E. System shall be connected to power by the electrician (see Division 16 -Electrical) 3.2 AcceptanceTesting A. Heating cable shall be tested with a megohmeter (megger) between the heating cable bus wires and the metallic ground braid While a 2,500 Vdc megger test is recommended, the minimum acceptable level for testing is 500 Vdc. B. This test should be performed a minimum of three times 1 Prior to installation while the cable is still on reel(s). 2 After installation of heating cable and completion of circuit fabrication kits (including any splice kits) but prior to installation of thermal insulation 3 After installation of thermal insulation but prior to connection to power C. The minimum acceptable level for the megger readings is 20 megohms, regardless of the circuit length. END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/05/2010 983-1268-400 15250-2 15250_Electrical Heat Trace Tape SECTION 15450 SAFETY SHOWER AND EYEWASH EQUIPMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1 1 1 1.1 Description A. Furnish and install the combination emergency shower and face/eye wash equipment and associated piping, supports, valves, and accessories to provide complete, operable, and code compliant installation that is acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction (i e , City of Yakima, Washington Department of Health, and Department of Labor and Industries) B. Emergency shower and eye wash equipment addressed by this specification shall be installed within conditioned or ventilated spaces having ambient temperatures between 60 and 100 degrees Fahrenheit. 1 1.2 Submittals A. Submittals in accordance with Section 01300 1 B. Submit detailed manufacturer's information complete with accessories and installation components to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this section C. Submittals shall also include. 1 ® Record Documents Record actual locations of supply isolation valves, emergency shower and eye wash equipment installed ® Provide full written description of manufacturer's warranty. ® Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. Indicate assembly and support requirements, adjustment and testing procedures. ® Operation and Maintenance Data Include installation instructions, exploded assembly views, servicing requirements, inspection data, installation instructions, spare parts lists, replacement part numbers and availability, location and contact numbers of service depot, for all components installed D. Submittals shall include cleaning, testing and adjustment procedures for all components installed. 1.3 References A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable unless identified by a specific edition date B. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and standards addressed within the following references ® 2006 Edition of the International Plumbing Code ANSI Standard Comply with ANSI Z358 1-2004, "Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment." ® NSF Standard Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components -- Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water 1 1 1 City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/16/2010 983-1268-400 15450-1 15450_Emergency Shower & Eyewash Equipment 1.4 Delivery, Storage, and Handling I A. Accept equipment and materials on Site in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation B. Protect installed equipment from damage and/or entry of foreign materials by temporary I covers during the construction phase of this Project. C. Do not allow use of installed equipment for any reason, other than testing, during the construction phase of this Project. 1 D. Protect all materials before and after installation from exposure to rain, freezing temperatures and direct sunlight. E. Provide manufacturer's drench shower tester for each emergency shower installed 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 General A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and 1 local requirements, and conform to codes .and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction B. Provide emergency equipment as indicated and scheduled on the drawings and as ' specified herein C. Pressure ratings of equipment and related accessories shall be suitable for the anticipated system pressures in which they are installed. 2.2 Combination Emergency Shower and Eye/Facewash Unit A. Combination emergency shower and eye/face wash units shall be Guardian Model 1996 or approved equal B. The combination emergency shower and eye/face wash unit shall be located in the fluoride room where shown on the drawings. 1 C. The combination emergency unit shall include all piping, supports, valves, and accessories to provide complete, operable, and code compliant installation. ' D. The combination emergency unit shall be a barrier -free design constructed of stainless steel (Type 316) Pipe and fittings shall be Schedule 40 type 314 stainless steel. E. The shower component shall be stainless steel 1 inch IPS stay -open ball -type shower ' valve operated by stainless steel pull rod having triangular handle F. The eye wash bowl shall be 10 -inch diameter stainless steel eye wash bowl with , stainless steel spray head assembly with twin, soft flow, eye wash heads and protective ' spray head covers, integral flow control capable of maintaining uniform flow under varying water supply conditions from 30-90 psig; stainless steel 1/2 inch IPS stay -open ball -type eye wash valve hand operated by a large, highly visible safety push handle; G. Emergency equipment activation devices shall be designed so that the flushing water remains on without requiring the use of the operator's hands The valve shall be designed to remain activated until intentionally shut off ' H. Shower head flow rate shall be 20 gallons per minute at a minimum 30 pounds per square inch water pressure. I. Eye Wash unit shall provide flushing fluid at 0 4 gallons per minute at a minimum 30 1 pounds per square inch water pressure. City of Yakima Gardner Well 08/16/2010 1 983-1268-400 15450-2 15450_Emergency Shower & Eyewash Equipment J. Face Wash unit shall provide flushing fluid at 3 gallons per minute at a minimum 30 pounds per square inch water pressure 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 Preparation A. Examine roughing -in for plumbing piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation of the combination emergency unit. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected B. Coordinate location of emergency equipment with Contractor or building manufacturer to allow identification of required clear floor space area for emergency shower access 3.2 Installation A. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations B. Locate emergency equipment on a level surface area for user C. Safety drenching equipment shall not be located within eighteen (18) inches of electrical apparatus, telephones, thermostats, or power outlets D. Emergency shower heads shall be positioned 82 inches — 96 inches from floor The center of the spray pattern shall be located at least 16 inches from wall or nearest obstruction E. Emergency eyewash nozzles shall be positioned 33 inches- 45 inches from floor and at least 6" from wall or nearest obstruction F. Connect potable water supply having a temperature between 60 degrees F and 100 degrees F to emergency equipment. Potable water supply shall be capable of supplying adequate flushing to meet requirements of reference standards G. Provide hydraulic shock absorbers in water supply lines to each emergency shower Locate and size in accordance with PDI -WH -201 Standard and manufacturer's published recommendations H. Provide an accessible ball type shutoff valve in individual water supply line serving safety drenching equipment. Valves shall be labeled for identification and locked in the open position I. Provide and install stainless steel escutcheons on piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations. J. Coordinate with Contractor for location and installation of emergency equipment identification signage and inspection tags 3.3 Acceptance Testing A. Adjust or replace fixture flow regulators for proper flow B. After plumbing connections have been made, test for compliance with requirements Verify ability to achieve required flows and temperatures. C. Report test results in writing END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 15450-3 08/16/2010 15450_Emergency Shower & Eyewash Equipment 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ■ Section 02727 • Section 11200 ■ Section 11205 ■ Section 11212 ■ Section 11516 ■ Section 11517 ■ Section 15065 • Section 15100 • Section 15250 • Section 15450 Product Cut Sheets Precast Vault Flowmeter Level Transducer and Inline Pressure Transmitter Vertical Turbine Pump Chlorine Injection System Fluoride Injection System Pipe Supports Valves and Appurtenances Electrical Heat Trace Tape Emergency Shower and Eyewash Equipment City of Yakima Gardner Well Engineering Design Source No. S10 Water System ID: 991509 983-1268.400 August 2010 1 SECTION 02727 PRECAST VAULTS ee UTILITY VAULT,. COVER No. 64-332P 1,250 lbs. VAULT No. 660 -BL 6,050 lbs. \ Full 180' Open 1t�\\ \ 660 -LA Recessed Lift Handle 1-1-1-1 1-1-1-1-1-1— 1-1—I—I-1-1—I-1—I I—I—I-1-1-1—I—I-1-1-1- 1-1—I—I-1-1—I—I-1—I-1-111-1 I—I-1-1—I—I—I—I—I—I-1-1-1—I-1-1—I- 1—±T±TT1T1T17171717111—T1 11!1±1!++T1711— I -1—I -1-1—I-1 I I I I—I-1-1—I—I—1 —IT1T174111 �� ',1,'�71717171757171— —1-1—�F �I Gf `•.—1—Iiill 6'-0" 5'-6" OPTIONAL COVER SECTIONS 4'-0" AS Req 38" Max. ROUND ACCESS No. 64-38C (Shown) 1,250 lbs. Non Skid Covers Avoiloble 6'-0" 4' 8" HINGE SIDE HINGE SIDE FOR DETAILS, SEE REVERSE SIDE» Items Shown Are Subject To Change Without Notice Issue Date: January 2006 7 LOCKING STEEL COVERS No. 64-2-332P 1,100 lbs. 15 01970-2006 Oldcastle Precast. Inc. Mailing Address PO Box 538 Auburn, WA 98071 Phone: 300.892.1538 Fax: 253.735.4201 Email: uvauburn@oldcastleprecasLcom a d slon of OOIdcastie Plecasi'Is uvauburn.com ee UTILITY VAULT" 660 -LA f A 6' 0" 5' 5" (4) 3/4" Dio. Lift Inserts w/ U V Caps 1 1/2" Dia. Lift Hole 1 Each Side, 2 Sides PLAN VIEW Spring Assisted Golvonized Diamond Plate Cover w/Locking Latch —Golvanized "C" Channel, 5'-0" Lg. 1 Each Side, 2 Sides 0 11 1 i\ 1 1 1 1 1 3/4" Dia. Knockout Each Side. 4 Sides 3' 6" /7" Dio. Knockout 2 Eoch Side, 4 Sides io 9" 0 2" Dia. Ground Rod Knockout 2 Places In FLoor SECTION AA N Galvanized "C" Channel, 3'-0" Lg. 1 Eoch End, 2 Ends wr- Golvonized Pulling Iron 1 Eoch End, 2 Ends SCALE. 1/2" = 1'-0" J r 6" V-6" 6" U END VIEW 9" 15.1 uvauburn.com 1 SECTION 11200 FLOWMETERS © Siemens AG 2008 SITRANS F flowmeters SITRANS F M ® Overview The SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W is an electromagnetic flow sen- sor designed to meet ground water, drinking water, waste water, sewage or sludge applications. Benefits • DN 25 to DN 1200 (1" to 48") • Connection flanges EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501), ANSI, AWWA and AS. • NBR Hard Rubber liner for all water applications • Drinking water EPDM liner with approvals • Hastelloy integrated grounding and measuring electrodes • Increased low flow accuracy for water leak detection, due to coned liner design. • Drinking water approvals • Suitable for direct burial and constant flooding • Build -in length according to ISO 13359 • Easy commissioning, SENSORPROM unit automatically up- loads calibration values and settings. • Designed that patented in-situ verification can be conducted. Using SENSORPROM fingerprint. Siemens FI 01 2009 IN Application The main applications of the SITRANS F M electromagnetic flow sensors can be found in the following fields: • Water abstraction • Water treatment • Water distribution network (leak detection management) • Custody transfer water meters • Irrigation • Waste water treatment • Filtration plant (e.g. reverse osmosis and ultra filtration) • Industrial water applications ® Mode of operation The flow measuring principle is based on Faradays law of elec- tromagnetic induction were the sensor converts the flow into an electrical voltage proportional to the velocity of the flow ® Function • Highly resistant to a wide range of chemicals - Pattern approval OIML R49 (Denmark, Germany) - conforms to ISO 4064 and EN 14154 - MI -001 Custody Transfer approval for billing (EU) • Meets EEC directives: PED, 97/23/EC pressure directive for EN1092-1 flanges • Simple onsite or factory upgrade to 1P68/NEMA 6P of a stan- dard sensor. Integration The complete flowmeter consists of a flow sensor and an asso- ciated transmitter SITRANS F M MAG 5000, MAG 6000 or MAG 6000 I The flexible communication concept USM II simplifies integra- tion and update to a variety of fieldbus systems, e.g. HART, FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS DP -and PA, MODBUS RTU/RS485. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 © Siemens AG 2008 SITRANS F flowmeters SITRANS F M Technical specifications Design Full bore sensor Coned bore sensor Flat face flanges Full bore sensor • EN 1092-1 Nominal size DN 25 ... 40 (1" .. 11/2") DN 50 .. 300 (2" .. 12") DN 350 .. 1200 (14" ... 48") Measuring principle Electromagnetic induction • AWWA C-207 - -10 .. +70 °C (14 .. +158 °F) -10 ... +70 °C (14 ... +158 °F) Excitation frequency 12.5 Hz • DN 50 ... 65 (2' .. 21/2"): 12.5 Hz 1.56 Hz • DN 80 ... 150 (3' ... 6"): 6.25 Hz • DN 200 .. 300 (8" ... 12"): 3.125 Hz Process connection Flanges -40 ... +70 "C (-40 .. +158 °F) -20 ... +50 °C (-4 ... +122 °F) -20 ... +60 °C (-4 +140 °F) Flat face flanges Operating pressure (Abs) • EN 1092-1 PN 40 (580 psi) 232 psi) • DN 50 300: PN 16 (2" ... 12": 230 psi) •DN 200 ... 300: PN 10 (8' .. 12": 145 psi) • PN 10 (145 psi) • PN 16 (230 psi) • ANSI 816.5 Class 150 Ib Pressure drop at 3 m/s (101t/s) Class 150 Ib -20 bar (290 psi) - • AWWA C-207 - -10 .. +70 °C (14 .. +158 °F) -10 ... +70 °C (14 ... +158 °F) - 28" .. 48". Class D • AS4087 PN 16 (230 psi) DN 50 ... 1200 (2' ... 48"), 14 bar (232 psi) Rated Operation conditions Ambient temperature • Sensor • With compact transmitter MAG 5000/6000 • With compact transmitter MAG 6000 I -40 ... +70 "C (-40 .. +158 °F) -20 ... +50 °C (-4 ... +122 °F) -20 ... +60 °C (-4 +140 °F) Operating pressure (Abs) 0.01 .. 40 bar (0.15 ... 580 psi) 0.03 ... 20 bar (0.44 290 psi) 0.01 .. 16 bar (0.15 ... 232 psi) Enclosure rating • Standard • Option IP67 to EN 60529 / NEMA 4X/6 (1 mH2O for 30 minutes) IP68 to EN 60529 / NEMA 6P (10 mH2O continuously) Pressure drop at 3 m/s (101t/s) As straight pipe Max. 25 mbar (0.36 psi) As straight pipe Medium conditions -10 .. +70 °C (14 .. +158 °F) -10 ... +70 °C (14 ... +158 °F) Temperature of medium • NBR • EPDM EMC 89/336 EEC Design Weight See dimensional drawings Material • Housing and flanges • Terminal box • Measuring pipe • Liner • Electrodes • Grounding electrodes standard Carbon steel, St 37.2 Standard Fibre glass reinforced polyamide AISI 304 (1.4301) NBR Hard Rubber (hydro carbon resistent) EPDM Hasteiloy C276 Hastelloy C276 Certificates and approvals Custody Transfer (only together with MAG 5000/6000 CT), order as spe- cial Approvals Drinking water approvals • EPDM • NBR OIML R 49 pattern approval cold water (Denmark and Germany): DN 50 ... 300 (2" 12') MI 001 cold water (EU): DN 50 ... 300 (2" ... 12') CSA/FM Class 1. Div 2 NSF61 (Cold water, US) WRAS (WRc, BS6920 cold water, GB) ACS listed (F), DVGW W270 (D) Belaqua (B) NSF61 (Cold water, US) Approvals PED - 97/23 EC1 , CRN 1) For sizes larger than 600 mm (24") in PN 16 PED conformity is available as a cost added option. The•basic unit will carry the LVD (Low Voltage Directive) and EMC approval. Siemens FI 01 2009 © Siemens AG 2008 SITRANS F flowmeters SITRANS F M Selection and Ordering data Order No. Selection and Ordering data SITRANS F M Flowsensor MAG 5100 W%' " `" `;L i6'- -0':: s SITRANS F M Flowsensor MAG 5100 W Hastelloy electrodes, carbon steel flanges a ,. )mom,";�. Hastelloy electrodes, carbon steel flanges Diameter DN25(1") DN 40 (1 Y2") DN 50 (2") DN 65 (21/2") DN 80 (3") DN 100 (4") DN 125 (5") DN 150 (6") DN 200 (8") DN 250 (10") DN 300 (12") DN 350 (14") DN 400 (16") DN 450 (18") DN 500 (20") DN 600 (24') DN 700 (28") DN 750 (30") DN 800 (32") DN 900 (36") DN 1000 (40") 42" 44" DN 1200 (48") Flange norm and pressure rating to EN 1092-1 PN 10 (DN 200 ... 1200/8" ... 48") PN 16 (DN 50 1200/2" 48") PN 16, non PED (DN 700 1200/28" 48") PN 40 (DN 25 .. 40/1" 11/2") Io ANSI 616.5 class 150 (1" 24") to AWWA C-207 Class D (28" .. 48") to AS 4087 PN 16 Liner material EPDM NBR Hard Rubber Transmitter Sensor for remote transmitter (Order transmitter separately) MAG 6000 I, Aluminum, 18 90 V DC, 115 230 V AC MAG 6000, Polyamid, 11 30 V DC/11 24V AC MAG 6000, Polyamid, 115/230 V AC MAG 5000, Polyamid, 11 ... 30 V DC/11 ... 24V AC MAG 5000, Polyamid, 115/230 V AC 4/60 Siemens FI 01 2009 Communication None HART PROFIBUS PA Profile 3 (only MAG 6000/MAG 6000 I) PROFIBUS DP Profile 3 (only MAG 6000/MAG 6000 I) MOOBUS RTU/RS 485 (only MAG 6000/MAG 60001) FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 (only MAG 6000/MAG 6000 I) Cable glands/terminal box Metric Y2" NPT ► Available ex stock Selection and Ordering data Additional information Please add "-Z" to Order No. and specify Order code(s) and plain text. Order No. Customer specific converter setup Tag name plate, stainless steel fixed with SS wire (add plain text) Tag name plate, plastic (self adhesive) Factory certificate according to EN 10204-2.1 Factory certificate according to EN 10204-2.2 Sensor cables wired (specify cable order no.) Sensor for remote transmitter's junction box potted to 1P68 with wired cable (specify cable order no.) Other postproduction requirements (add desired text) Order code Description Order No. Potting kit for terminal box of SITRANS F M sensors for IP68/NEMA 6P (Not ATEX) MAG 5000/6000 transmitters and sensors are packed in sepa- rate boxes, the final assembly takes place during installation at the customer's place. MAG 6000 I transmitters and sensors are delivered compact mounted from factory Communication module will be pre -mounted in the transmitter Please use online Product selector to get latest updates. Product selector link: wv w.pia-selector.automation.siemens com Please also see wvvw.siemens com!SITRANSFcroerina for practical examples of ordering 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 111 Dimensional drawings © Siemens AG 2008 SITRANS F flowmeters SITRANS F M Nominal size A L PN 10 PN 16 PN 40 Class 150 / AW WA AS [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] 25 1 187 7 4 - - - - 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.87 40 11/2 197 7.8 - - - - 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.87 50 2 188 7 4 - - 200 7.9 - - 200 7.9 200 7.87 65 21/2 194 7.6 - - 200 7.9 - - 200 7.9 200 7.87 80 3 200 7.9 - - 200 7.9 - - 200 7.9 200 7.87 100 4 207 8.1 - - 250 9.8 - - 250 9.8 250 9.84 125 5 217 8.5 - - 250 9.8 - - 250 9.8 250 9.84 150 6 232 91 - - 300 11.8 - - 300 11.8 300 11.81 200 8 257 10.1 350 13.8 350 13.8 - - 350 13.8 350 13.78 250 10 284 11.2 450 17 7 450 17.7 - - 450 17 7 450 17 72 300 12 310 12.2 500 19.7 500 19.7 - - 500 19.7 500 19.69 350 14 382 15.0 550 21.7 550 217 - - 550 21.7 550 21.65 400 16 407 16.0 600 23.6 600 23.6 - - 600 23.6 600 23.62 450 18 438 17.2 600 23.6 600 23.6 - - 600 23.6 600 23.62 500 20 463 18.2 600 23.6 600 23.6 - - 600 23.6 600 23.6 600 24 514 20.2 600 23.6 600 23.6 - - 600 23.6 600 23.6 700 28 564 22.2 700 27.6 700 27.6 - - 700 27.6 700 27.6 750 30 591 23.3 - - - - - - 750 29.5 750 - 800 32 616 24.3 800 31.5 800 31.5 - - 800 31.5 800 31.5 900 36 663 26.1 900 35.4 900 35.4 - - 900 35.4 900 35.4 1000 40 714 28.1 1000 39.4 1000 39.4 - - 1000 39.4 1000 39 4 42 714 28.1 - - - - - - 1000 39.4 - - 44 765 30.1 - - - - - - 1100 43.3 - - 1200 48 820 32.3 1200 47.2 1200 47.2 - - 1200 47.2 1200 47.2 - not available Siemens F1 01 2009 © Siemens AG 2008 SITRANS F flowmeters SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W / 6000 !Compact Nomina size A Al L PN 10 [mm] 25 40 [inch] 1 1'h 2 [mm] 187 197 188 [inch] 74 7.8 74 [mm] 340 350 341 [inch] [mm] 13.4 13.8 13.4 - [inch] PN16 IPN40 [inch] [mm] [mm] 200 7:9 200 200 Class 150/AWWA AS [inch] 7.9 7.9 [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] 7.87 7.87 7.87 7.87 7.87 9.84 9.84 11.81 13.78 17 72 19.69 21.65 23.62 23.62 23.6 23.6 27.6 200 200 200 7.9 7.9 7.9 200 200 200 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 750 800 900 1000 2Yz 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 28 30 32 36 40 42 194 200 207 217 232 257 284 310 382 407 438 463 514 564 591 616 663 714 714 7.6 7.9 8.1 8.5 91 10.1 11.2 12.2 15.0 16.0 17.2 18.2 20.2 22.2 23.3 24.3 26.1 28.1 28.1 347 353 360 370 385 410 437 463 535 560 591 616 667 717 744 779 826 877 877 13.7 13.9 14.2 14.6 15.2 16.1 350 17.2 450 18.2 500 21 1 550 22.1 600 23.3 600 24.3 600 26.3 600 28.2 700 29.3 30.7 800 32.5 900 34.5 1000 34.5 13.8 177 197 21 7 23.6 23.6 23.6 23.6 27.6 31.5 35.4 39.4 200 200 250 250 300 350 450 500 550 600 600 600 600 700 800 900 1000 7.9 7.9 9.8 9.8 11.8 13.8 177 19.7 21 7 23.6 23.6 23.6 23.6 27.6 31.5 I- 35.4 39.4 200 200 250 250 300 350 450 500 550 600 600 600 600 700 750 800 900 1000 1000 7.9 7.9 9.8 9.8 11.8 13.8 177 19.7 21 7 23.6 23.6 23.6 23.6 27 6 29.5 31.5 35.4 39.4 39.4 200 200 250 250 300 350 450 500 550 600 600 600 600 700 750 800 900 1000 31.5 35.4 39.4 44 765 30.1 928 36.5 1100 43.3 1200 - not available 48 820 32.3 983 38.7 1200 47.2 1200 47.2 Siemens Fl 01 2009 1200 47.2 1200 47.2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 © Siemens AG 2008 SITRANS F flowmeters SITRANS F M Weight Nominal size PN 10 PN 16 PN 40 Class 150/AWWA AS [mm] [inch] [kg] [lbs] [kg] [lbs] [kg] [lbs] [kg] [lbs] [kg] [lbs] 25 1 - - 4 9 4 9 4 9 40 1'/2 - - - - 7 15 6 13 7 15 50 2 - - 9 20 - - 8 20 9 20 65 2'/2 - - 10.7 24 - - 11 24 10.7 24 80 3 - - 11.6 26 - - 13 28 11.6 26 100 4 - - 15.2 33 - - 19 41 15.2 33 125 5 - - 20.4 45 - - 24 52 20.4 45 150 6 - - 26 57 - - 29 64 26 57 200 8 48 106 48 106 - - 56 124 48 106 250 10 64 141 69 152 - - 79 174 69 152 300 12 76 167 86 189 - - 110 243 86 189 350 14 104 229 125 274 - - 139 307 115 254 400 16 119 263 143 314 - - 159 351 125 277 450 18 136 299 173 381 - - 182 400 141 311 500 20 163 359 223 491 - - 225 495 189 418 600 24 236 519 338 744 - - 320 704 301 664 700 28 270 595 314 692 - - 273 602 320 704 750 30 - - - - - - 329 725 - - 800 32 346 763 396 873 - - 365 804 428 944 900 36 432 951 474 1043 - - 495 1089 619 1362 1000 40 513 1130 600 1321 - - 583 1282 636 1399 42 - - - - - - 687 1512 - - 44 - - - - - - 763 1680 - - 1200 48 643 1415 885 1948 - - 861 1896 813 1789 • not available With transmitter MAG 5000 and MAG 6000 compact, weight is increased by approximately 0.8 kg (1.8 lbs , with MAG 6000 1, weight is increased by 5.5 kg (12.1 Ib). Siemens FI 01 • 2009 SECTION 11205 LEVEL TRANSDUCER AND INLINE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I) 1 EsterLine°% (Pressure Systems Small Bore Submersible Level Transducer FEATURES • Custom Level Ranges up to 700 ft (210 m) H2O • Accuracy to ±0.05% FS • Analog Outputs of 4-20 mA or VDC • Welded 316 SS or Titanium Construction • Small Diameter, Rugged, and Waterproof • Custom Cable Lengths • Optional Lifetime Lightning Protection APPLICATIONS • Ground Water Monitoring • Ballast Tank Control • Surface Water Monitoring • Dewatering • Down Hole • Level Control The Series 300 family of submersible hydrostatic level transducers is specifically designed for small bore applications and to meet the rigorous environments encountered in ground water level measurements. These transducers provide repeatable, precision depth measurement under most adverse conditions. All KPSI Transducers utilize a highly accurate pressure sensor assembly specifically designed for hostile fluids and gases. The assembly is integrated with supporting electronics in a durable waterproof housing constructed of 316 stainless steel or titanium. The attached electrical cable is custom manufactured to Pressure Systems' specifications and includes Kevlar® members to prevent errors due to cable elongation, and a unique water block feature that self -seals in the event of accidental cuts to the cable. Each transducer is shipped with our latest SuperDry'TM Vent Filter that prevents moisture from entering the vent tube for at least one year without maintenance, even in the most humid environments. These units are designed for installation in a Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D, Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F and G, Class III, Division 1 hazardous location when connected to appropriate apparatus such as those manufactured by R. G. Stahl, Inc., and others. KPSI transducers are type approved by the American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) and are UL, CUL, and FM approved and have a IP 68 and NEMA 6P housing protection rating. The Series 300 is CE compliant to EN 61000-6-4:2001 and EN 61000-6-2:2001. All KPSI Transducer calibrations are traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). Pressure Systems, Inc. 34 Research Drive Hampton, VA 23666 USA Sensing the EnvirsOnmentm www. PressureSgstems. com Order on-line! www.LevelandPressure.com ISO -9001:2000 Certified Phone: 757-865-1243 Toll Free: 800-328-3665 Fax: 757-865-8744 E-mail: sales@PressureSystems.com ® Copyright Pressure Systems. Inc., 2009 j Specifications subject to change without notice. Full Scale Level Ranges2 Proof Pressure Burst Pressure 5 thru 700 (1.5 thru 210) N/A N/A 35 thru 700 (10 thru 210) 10 thru 700 (3 thru 210) 35 thru 700 (10 thru 210) 1.5 2.0 Static Accuracy' Resolution Wetted Materials Compensated Temp Range Thermal Error° Operating Temp Range Protection Rating Excitation Input Current Output Zero Offset Notes: 1 For ranges > 230 ft H2O (70 m H2O), output is 4-20 mA only 2 Intermediate level ranges are available. ±0.05 ±0.10 ±0.25 Infinitesimal ft H2O (m H20) ft H2O (m H20) ft H2O (m H20) x FS x FS %FSO for vented gage reference for sealed gage reference for absolute reference BFSL method 316 SS or Titanium; Delrin®; polyurethane or Viton® 0 to 50 ±0.055 -20 to 60 0 to 50 IP 68, NEMA 6P 9-309 2.5 - 10- 20 3.5 4-20 0-5 ±0.12' < 0.25 °C %FSO/°C oC oC VDC mA max mA VDC mA VDC Delrin® and Viton® are registered trademarks of DuPont. worst case over compensated temperature range when using polyurethane cable when usin. ETFE cable8 for mA, VDC for mA output for VDC output o.tions availablee for mA output for VDC output 3 Static accuracy includes the combined errors due to nonlinearity, hysteresis and nonrepeatability on a Best Fit Straight Line (BFSL) basis, at 25°C per ISA S51 1. 4 Thermal error is the maximum allowable deviation from the Best Fit Straight Line due to a change in temperature, per ISA S51 1 5 For ranges < 12 ft H2O (4 m H2O), maximum thermal error is ±0.1% FSO/°C. 6 Custom VDC output levels can be provided up to 2.5 VDC less than the excitation supply voltage. Contact Customer Service for VDC output availability 7 For ranges <= 5 ft H2O (1 m H2O), zero offset is ±0.25 mA. 8 -20°C to 50°C for level ranges <= 100 ft (70m) H2O when using ETFE cable. 9 Intrinsic safety limits excitation to 28V -2- Specifications subject to change without notice. See Loop Resistance diagram on page 7 20 Tefzel®, Teflon® and Kevlar® are registered trademarks of DuPont. for polyurethane cable for ETFE cable Notes: 10 ETFE is a fluoropolymer (Teflon® derivative) material, Tefzel® or equivalent 11 The power supply needs to be limited to 150 mA to avoid lock up of the gas tube after a suppression event. -3- l Uniquely -Designed Submersible Cable The attached cable can incorporate either polyurethane or ETFE jacket material. The ETFE (Tefzel® or equivalent) cable jacket provides superior chemical resistance and durability over polyurethane. While more expensive and less flexible then polyurethane, ETFE cable can reduce overall maintenance costs when used in applications involving caustic media, high abrasion, or potential cross -contamination. ETFE is a fluoropolymer recommended over Teflon® for such applications due to its superior tensile strength and flexibility while rivaling Teflon's chemical resistance. Both cable types incorporate Kevlar® strength members to prevent errors due to cable elongation. The cable also incorporates a unique liner to prevent water intrusion in the event the cable jacket suffers minor cuts. Cable length is determined from the cable end of the transducer and any length of 5 feet or more may be ordered. Polyurethane cable is attached using a polyurethane molded seal while ETFE cable is attached using a compressed Viton® gland seal. Moisture Protection Our submersible transducers are equipped with custom, vented cable. The vent provides an atmospheric reference for the sensor, which is necessary for ensuring the highest possible accuracy when making a level measurement. It must be noted that if left unprotected, it provides a pathway for water vapor to enter the level transducer. This vapor will condense into water and could create an offset in the transducer output, or cause 'permanent damage. For these reasons, a Series 810 desiccant -filled vent filter is provided free of charge with each Series 300 we ship. Our latest SuperDryTM Vent Filter prevents moisture from entering the vent tube for at least one year without maintenance. Replacement filters are available from the factory. Series 810 SuperDryTM Long Life Vent Filter For those applications where periodic maintenance is not practical, our Series 815 Aneroid Bellows is a direct replacement for the vent filter. This sensitive bellows responds to and transmits changes in atmospheric pressure to the sensor while remaining a maintenance -free, closed system. It should be noted, however, that the bellows may not be a suitable replacement for the desiccant cartridge in applications where extremely high accuracy is required, usually 0.25% or better, or where the bellows may be exposed to extreme temperature changes. The user is cautioned to evaluate a bellows in the intended application. Installation Tips The Series 300 family of submersible transducers may be suspended directly in the media or in a perforated 1" PVC instrumentation still well. When suspending by the cable, users often utilize our cable hanger (PN# 12-90- 0931). This device slides onto the cable from the bare -wire end and is easily positioned anywhere on the cable by pushing the ends together. Once positioned, the cable hanger contracts to provide a snug grip. For applications requiring cable length in excess of 500 feet, consult the factory for proper installation and maintenance. -4- Series 815 Aneroid Bellows 11 CABLE HANGER Nose Cap The ported nose cap with a #8-32UNC-2B threaded hole can be used to attach weights. It was designed for installations where users may encounter sharp, protruding objects. Caution must be exercised when inserting a screw into the nose cap as the maximum insertion length should not exceed 0.175". PORTIO Optional Lifetime Lightning/Surge Protection Lightning/surge protection is offered as an option for output signal versions of 0-5 VDC and 4-20 mA. Full protection is achieved through the use of 2 components. One is located in the 1 inch OD 316 SS housing of the transducer while the other is located at the surface and grounded via DIN -rail or ground wire. This option requires a minimum input voltage of 12 VDC and increases the length of the housing by 5.00". The power supply needs to be limited to 150 mA to avoid lock up of the gas tube after a suppression event. A unit ordered with this option is warranted for the life of the instrument against damage due to voltage surge, when this 2 -part option is properly installed. Display Meter Pressure Systems offers two types of Display Meters to provide a visual readout of a single KPSI transducer having mA or VDC output. Both varieties utilize a red 0.54" LED display with 4 active characters to indicate a numeric range of -1999 to 9999. The units operate from 115 VAC power and provide a 24 VDC supply for power to the transducer. The Model 3019 Digital Readouts provide a sophisticated display of the transducer output with six 14 -segment LED's for display of true alphanumeric characters; the last two used for process descriptors. These readouts offer programmable input configuration, isolated transducer power supply, selectable 2 -point scaling or up to 17 -point linearization, optional 4-20 mA retransmission, and two or four optional 10 -amp SPDT alarm contacts for control. The 3019 has a NEMA 4X front panel with a polycarbonate bezel and a 1/8 DIN aluminum housing measuring 1 9375" H x 3.75 "W x 6.5" D The Model 3620 Pump Controllers provide a more rugged package specifically designed to operate external pumps via two 10 -amp SPDT alarm contacts. The 3620 provides front panel scaling, operates from -20 to 70°C, and uses 120 or 240 VAC. The NEMA 4X rated enclosure can be surface or panel mounted and measures 3.2" H x5.5"Wx2.7"D -5- [19.0mm] #8-32UNC-28 SENSOR DIAPHRAGM I -r— 608 [15.4mm] 5.94 [150.9mm] 7 19 [182.6mm] Molded Cable Seal Configuration for Polyurethane Cable Submersible Cable Exit #8-32UNC-2 B SENSOR DIAPHRAGM �—•— .608 [15.4mrn] 7.08 [179.8mm] • Gland Cable Seal Configuration for ETFE cable -6- Submersible Cable Exit ELECTRICAL TERMINATION 22AWG CONDUCTORS IN A SHIELDED CABLE WITH VENT TUBE 4-20 mA RED + EXCITATION BLACK - EXCITATION RED + EXCITATION 0-5 VDC BLACK - EXCITATION WHITE + SIGNAL ALL DRAIN WIRE SHIELD US APPROVED -7- Loop Resistance, RL (o ) 1750 1500 1250 1000 750 500 250 0 LOOP RESISTANCE vs. LOOP POWER SUPPLY 0 10 20 30 Loop Power Supply Voltage,Vps(V) ABS C E Clirt 3 3 5 ±0.05% FSO Static Accuracy 3 3 0 ±0.10% FSO Static Accuracy 3 2 0 ±0.25% FSO Static Accurac ZEM S Stainless Steel T Titanium .571 Be' 0E1 ;Most to Vented gage Sealed gage (except 335) Absolute exce.t 335 3 0-5 VDC 4 4-20 mA E Custom VDC out ut B Ported nose ca 0 Molded cable seal A Gland cable seal A None B Full Li. htnin. Protection Mtanil x x x x x x 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x. x x x 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A None (sealed/absolute only) B Vent Filter C Aneroid Bellows 1 1 Polyurethane 2 ETFE 1 x x x x (in feet) A psi B ft H2O C m H2O Notes: 1 The part number requires two level range limits, corresponding to the maximum and minimum analog outputs of the transducer, to be specified in pounds per square inch (psi) to three decimal places. The lower level range is typically 000.000 unless otherwise required. For reverse output requirements, enter the lower level range for the maximum output signal and the upper range for the minimum output. Use the following conversion factors: ft H2O / 2.3073 = psi Examples: 10 ft H2O / 2.3073 = 4.334 psi m H2O / 0.703265 = psi 10m H2O / 0 703265 = 14.219 psi For sealed gage reference add local atmosphere when converting to psi. Contact PSI for a Example. 10 ft H2O / 2.3073 +14.7 = 19 034 psi 2 Units of measure on standard PSI label. Contact PSI if private labeling is required. (enter 004.334 in the part number) (enter 014.219 in the part number) ssistance. (enter 019.034 in the part number) Warranty: The Series 300 product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for 2 years from date of shipment Products not subjected to misuse will be repaired or replaced. THE FOREGOING IS IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES. We reserve the right to make changes to any product herein and assume no liability arising out of applications or use of any product or circuit described. Products described In this Specification are not Intended for life support applications. No. 0409 -8- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1) 1 1 1 1 1 ROSEMOUNT 1 Product Data Sheet 00813-0100-4690, Rev KA April 2009 Rosemount 2088 Rosemount 2088 Absolute and Gage Pressure Transmitter • Performance of 0.075% with High Accuracy option • Lightweight, compact design for cost effective installation • Protocols available include 4-20 mA HARTS and 1-5 Vdc HART Low Power • Absolute and gage pressure ranges up to 4000 psi (276 bar) • Rangeability of 20:1 Contents Specifications page 3 Product Certifications page 5 Dimensional Drawings page 8 Ordering Information page 9 Configuration Data Sheet page 11 .L, ( E EMERSON.. www.rosemount.com Process Management Rosemount 2088 Product Data Sheet 00813-0100-4690, Rev KA April 2009 Rosemount 2088 Absolute and Gage Pressure Transmitter Performance of 0.075% with high accuracy option The Rosemount 2088 utilizes our reliable solid-state, polysilicon pressure sensor with a choice of either 316L or Alloy C-276 isolating diaphragms. This design has many benefits, including a reference accuracy of 0.075% and a stability of 0.10% for 12 months. Lightweight, Compact Design Its lightweight, compact design allows the 2088 to be directly connected to a process — providing a quick, easy and cost effective installation. A variety of process connections are available, including multiple threaded connections, our full line of manifolds and remote diaphragm seals that provide solutions for virtually any application. 4-20 mA HART and 1-5Vdc HART Low Power Protocols Available The 2088 utilizes the advantages of HART communication, enabling quick and easy reranging, calibration and troubleshooting. It also features a fully configurable LCD that displays pressure and diagnostic information. The information displayed is directly from the microprocessor which accounts for its accuracy and reliability. Absolute or gage pressure ranges up to 4000 psi (276 bar) and 20:1 rangedown The 2088 is available in either gauge or absolute pressure in ranges to 4,000 psi (276 bar). Higher tumdown means lower inventories by allowing you to measure pressures from 1.5 psi (103 mbar) to 4000 psi (276 bar) with only four transmitter ranges. Rosemount Pressure Solutions Rosemount 3051S Series of Instrumentation Highest performing scalable pressure, flow and level measurement solutions drive better plant efficiency and more productivity Innovative features include wireless, advanced diagnostics, and multivariable technologies. Rosemount 305, 306 and 304 Manifolds Factory -assembled, calibrated and seal -tested transmitter -to -manifold assemblies reduce installation costs. Rosemount 1199 Diaphragm Seals Provides reliable, remote measurements of process pressure and protects the transmitter from hot, corrosive, or viscous fluids. Orifice Plate Primary Element Systems: Rosemount 1495 and 1595 Orifice Plates, 1496 Flange Unions and 1497 Meter Sections A comprehensive offering of orifice plates, flange unions and meter sections that are easy to specify and order. The 1595 Conditioning Orifice provides superior performance in tight fit applications. 2 Rosemount 3051SFA Annubar® Flowmeters and Rosemount 485 Annubar Flowmeter Series The state-of-the-art, fifth generation Rosemount 485 Annubar combined with the Rosemount MultiVariable transmitter technology creates an accurate, repeatable and dependable insertion -type flowmeter. Rosemount 3051SFC Compact Orifice Flowmeters and Rosemount 405 Compact Orifice Flowmeter Series Compact Orifice Flowmeters can be installed between existing flanges, up to a Class 600 (PN100) rating. A conditioning orifice plate version offers installation in tight fit applications requiring only two diameters of straight run upstream after a flow disturbance. Rosemount 3051SFP Integral Orifice Flowmeters and Rosemount 1195 Integral Orifice Flowmeter Series These integral orifice flowmeters eliminate the inaccuracies that become more pronounced in small orifice line installations. The completely assembled, ready to install flowmeters reduce cost and simplify installation. Product Data Sheet 00813-0100-4690, Rev KA April 2009 Rosemount 2088 Specifications Performance Specifications (Zero -based spans, reference conditions, silicone oil fill, and 316L SST isolating diaphragm.) Reference Accuracy • ±0.10% of calibrated span. Includes combined effects of linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability • ±0.075% of calibrated span (high accuracy option) Ambient Temperature Effect Expressed as a total effect per 50 °F (28 °C) Total effect includes zero and span effects. t (0.15% URL + 0.15% of span) from -40 °F to 185 °F (-40 °C to 85 °C) Stability ±0.10% of URL for 12 months Vibration Effect Less than ±0.1% of URL when subjected to vibration of: peak to peak constant displacement of 4 mm (5-15 Hz) and constant acceleration of 2 g (15-150 Hz) and 1 g (150-2000 Hz). Power Supply Effect Less than 0.01% of calibrated span per volt Mounting Position Effect Zero shift of up to 1.2 inH2O (0.30 kPa), which can be calibrated out. No span effect. RFI Effect Less than ±0.25% of upper range limit from 20-1000 MHz at 30 V/m with leads in conduit. Less than ±0.25% of upper range limit from 20-1000 MHz at 10 V/m with unshielded twisted pair (no conduit). Transient Protection Limits IEEE 587 Category B 6 kV Crest (1.2 x 50 µs) 3 kA Crest (8 x 20 µs) 6 kV Crest (0.5 p s by 100 kHz) IEEE 472 SWC 2.5 kV Crest,1 MHz waveform General Specifications Tested to IEC 801-3 Functional Specifications Service Liquid, gas, and vapor applications Ranges Minimum Upper Lower Lower(1) Range Span (URL) (LRL) (LRL) (Gage) 1.5 psi (0,103 bar) 30 psi (2,1 bar) 0 psia -14.7 psig (0 bar) (-1,01 bar) 40 psi 800 psi (2,76 bar) (55,2 bar) 0 psia -14.7 psig (0 bar) (-1,01 bar) (1) Assumes atmospheric pressure of 14.7 psig. Output Code S. 4-20 mA do Code N: 1-5 volt dc, low power (Outputs are directly proportional to the input pressure) Rangedown 20 to 1 Load Limitations Reverse polarity protection is standard. Maximum loop resistance is determined by the power supply voltage as described by the following equations: Max. Loop Resistance = 43.5 (Power Supp y Voltage - 10.5) 1935 g 1500 - 1000 J 500 0 10.5 20 30 40 55 36t'! Power Supply Output Code S (dc Volts) Communication requires a minimum loop resistance of 250 ohms. (1) For hazardous location approvals, power supply must not exceed 36 V. (2) For CENELEC Ex is approval, the power supply must not exceed 30 V. Power Supply Extemal power supply required. Transmitter operates on 10.5-36 V dc with no load (6-14V for Low Power). Reverse polarity protection is standard. Current Draw Output Code N: 5 3 mA without LCD display. Overpressure Limits Rangel. 120 psig max All other ranges: two times the URL 3 Rosemount 2088 Product Data Sheet 00813-0100-4690, Rev KA April 2009 Burst Pressure 11,000 psi for all ranges Zero Elevation and Suppression Zero can be suppressed between atmosphere for gage transmitters or 0 psia for absolute transmitters and upper range limit, provided the calibrated span is equal to or greater than the minimum span, and the upper range value does not exceed the upper range limit. Time Response Time Constant: 200 milliseconds Dead time: < 0.1 s Update rate: 20 times per second minimum Temperature Limits Ambient: -40 to 185 °F (-40 to 85 °C) -4 to 175 °F (-20 to 80 °C) with LCD display(1) (1) LCD display may not be readable and LCD updates will be slower at temperatures below -4 °F (-20 °C). Storage: -50 to 230 °F (-46 to 110 °C) -40 to 185 °F (-40 to 85 °C) with LCD display Process: Silicone fill sensor: -40 to 250 °F (-40 to 121 °C)(1) Inert fill sensor -22 to 250 °F (-30 to 121 °C)(1) Process temperatures above 185 °F (85 °C) require derating the ambient limits by a 1.5:1 ratio. For example, for process temperature of 195 °F (91 °C), new ambient temperature limit is equal to 170 °F (77 °C). This can be determined as follows: (195 °F - 185 °F) x 1.5=15°F, 185 °F - 15 °F = 170 °F (1) 250 °F (140 °C) limit in vacuum service; 130 °F (54 °C) for pressures below 0.5 psia. Humidity Limits 0-100% relative humidity Volumetric Displacement Less than 0.00042 cm3 Turn -on Time 2.0 seconds, no warm-up required Transmitter Security Activating the transmitter security function prevents changes to the transmitter configuration, including local zero and span adjustments. Security is activated by an internal switch. Failure Mode If self -diagnostics detect a sensor or microprocessor failure, the analog signal is driven either high or low to alert the user High or low failure mode is user -selectable with a jumper on the transmitter The values to which the transmitter drives its output in failure mode depend on whether it is factory -configured to standard or NAMUR-compliant operation The values for each are as follows: 4 Standard Operation Output Code Linear Output Fail High Fail Low S dar N with Code C2 0.78 5 V 5 3.44 V 2 4.0 V 3.9 5 15 20.8 I2 21 75 mA 15 3.75 mA Vs 0.77V NAMUR-Compliant Operation Linear Output Fail High Fait Low Output Code S 3.8 5 15 20.5 Physical Specifications 1?._ 22.5 15 3.6mA Electrical Connection 1/2-14 NPT, M20 x 1.5 (CM20), PG 13.5, or G 1/2 female (PF 1/2 female) conduit entry Process Connection 1/2-14 NPT female, DIN 16288 G 1/2 male, RC 1/2 female (PT 1/2 female), M20 x 1.5 (CM20) male Process Wetted Parts Isolating Diaphragm 316L stainless steel or Alloy C-276 Process Connector 316L stainless steel CF -3M (Cast version of 316L SST, material per ASTM_A743) or Alloy C-276 Non -wetted Parts Electronics Housing Low -copper aluminum, NEMA 4X, IP65, IP67,CSA enclosure Type 4X Paint Polyurethane Cover O -rings Buna-N Fill Fluid Silicone or inert fill Weight Output Code S and N: Approximately 2.44 Ib (1 11 kg) Tagging The transmitter is tagged, at no charge, in accordance with customer requirements. All tags are stainless steel. The standard tag is permanently attached to the transmitter Tag character height is 1/8 in. (0.318 cm). A wired tag is available upon request. Accessory Block and Bleed Valve (S5 Option) The Rosemount 306 Integral Manifold is pre -assembled to transmitter and leak checked. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1+ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i) 1 Product Data Sheet 00813-0100-4690, Rev KA April 2009 Rosemount 2088 Product Certifications Approved Manufacturing Locations Rosemount Inc. — Chanhassen, Minnesota, USA Emerson Process Management GmbH & Co. — Wessling, Germany Emerson Process Management Asia Pacific Private Limited — Singapore Beijing Rosemount Far East Instrument Co., LTD — Beijing, China European Union Directive Information The EC declaration of conformity for all applicable European directives for this product can be found at www.rosemount.com. A hard copy may be obtained by contacting our local sales office. ATEX Directive (94/9/EC) Emerson Process Management complies with the ATEX Directive. European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) (97/23/EC) 2088/2090 Pressure Transmitters — Sound Engineering Practice Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) (2004/108/EC) All 2088/2090 Pressure Transmitter EN 61326-1 1997 with Amendments Al, A2, and A3 Hazardous Locations Certifications North American Certifications Ordinary Location Certification for Factory Mutual As standard, the transmitter has been examined and tested to determine that the design meets basic electrical, mechanical, and fire protection requirements by FM, a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as accredited by the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). Factory Mutual (FM) Approvals E5 Explosion -Proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, and D Dust -Ignition -Proof for Class Il, Division 1, Groups E, F, G, Class III, Division 1, indoor and outdoor (Type 4X) hazardous locations; factory sealed. Temperature Class T5 Ta = 85 °C. 15 Intrinsically safe for use in Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G; and Class III, Division 1 when connected in accordance with Rosemount drawing 02088-1018. Non-incendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, 8, C, and D For input parameters see control drawing 02088-1018. Temperature Class T4 Ta = 85 °C; indoor and outdoor (NEMA 4X) hazardous locations. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) All CSA hazardous approved transmitters are certified per ANSI/ISA 12.27.01-2003. C6 Explosion -Proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, and D. Dust -Ignition -Proof for Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G, Class III, indoor and outdoor hazardous locations. CSA enclosure Type 4X; factory seated. Suitable for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D. Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, and D. Temp. Code T3C. Intrinsically safe when connected with approved barriers in accordance with Rosemount drawing 02088-1024. For input parameters see control drawing 02088-1024 European Certifications 11 ATEX Intrinsically Safe Certificate No.: BASOOATEX1166X II 1 G Ex is IIC T5 (Tamb = –55 to 40 °C) Ex is IIC T4 (-Iamb = –55 to 70°C) CE 1180 TABLE 1 Input Parameters Loop/Power = 30 V dc P;=0.9W Special Conditions For Safe Use (x): When the optional transient protection terminal block is installed, the apparatus is not capable of withstanding a 500V rms test to case. This must be taken into account on any installation in which it is used, for example by assuring that the supply to the apparatus is galvanically isolated. N1 ATEX Type n Certification No. BASOOATEX3167X Q II 3 G ExnAnLIIC T5(Ta=-40°C to 70°C) U; = 50 V dc max CE Special Conditions For Safe Use (x): When the optional transient protection terminal block is installed, the apparatus is not capable of withstanding a 500 V r.m.s. test to case. This must be taken into account on any installation in which it is used, for example, by assuring that the supply to the apparatus is galvanically isolated. Rosemount 2088 Product Data Sheet 00813-0100-4690, Rev KA April 2009 ND ATEX Combustible Dust Certificate No.. BASO1ATEX1427X (D111 D Ex tD A20 T105°C (Tamb = -20°C to 85°C) IP66 CC 1180 Vmax = 36 V dc Max = 24 mA Special Conditions For Safe Use (x): 1 The user must ensure that the maximum rated voltage and current (36 volts, 24 mA, D C.) are not exceeded. All connections to other apparatus or associated apparatus shall have control over this voltage and current equivalent to a category "ib" circuit according to EN50020. 2. Cable entries must be used which maintain the ingress protection of the enclosure to at least IP66. 3. Unused cable entries must be filled with suitable blanking plugs which maintain the ingress protection of the enclosure to at least IP66. 4. Cable entries and blanking plugs must be suitable for the ambient range of the apparatus and capable of withstanding a 7J impact test. 5. The 2088/2090 sensor module must be securely screwed in place to maintain the ingress protection of the enclosure. ED ATEX Flameproof Certification No.: KEMA97ATEX2378 © II 1/2 G Ex d IIC T6 (Ta = -40 °C to 40°C) T4 (Ta= -40°0 to 80°C) CC 1180 Vmax = 36 (with Output Code S) Vmax = 14 (with Output Code N) Japanese Certifications E4 TIIS Flameproof Ex d IIC T6 (Tamb = 85 °C) 6 TC15877 2088 with Alloy C-276 wetted parts (with display) TC15875 2088 with SST wetted parts (no display) 1,a -}?9 • 5�- TC15873 2088 with Alloy C-276 wetted parts (no display) TC15871 2088 with SST wetted parts (no display) Australian Certifications 17 SAA Intrinsic Safety Certification No.: AUS Ex 1249X Ex is IIC T4 (Tamb = 70 °C) Ex ia IIC T5 (Taft =40°C) IP66 When connected per Rosemount drawing 03031-1026 TABLE 2. Input Parameters LooplPower !max = 200 mA = 0.01 µF Special Conditions For Safe Use (X): Observe barrier/entity parameters during installation. A passive current limited power source must be used. The power source must be such that Po <_ (Uo ' l0)/4. For modules using transient protection in the terminal assembly (T1 transient protection models), the apparatus enclosure is to be electrically bonded to the protective earth. The conductor used for the connection shall be equivalent to a copper conductor of 4mm2 minimum cross-sectional area. N7 SAA Type n (Non -Sparking) Certificate No.: AUS Ex 1249X Ex n IIC T4 (Tamb = 70 °C) Ex n IIC T5 (Tamb = 40 °C) IP66 Special Conditions For Safe Use (X): Where the equipment is installed such that there is an unused conduit entry, it must be sealed with a suitable blanking plug to maintain the IP66 degree of protection. Any blanking plug used with the equipment shall be of a type which requires the use of a tool to effect its removal. Voltage source shall not exceed 60V ac or 75V dc. E7 IECEx Flameproof (Explosion -Proof) IECEx Certificate number IECEx KEM 06.0021X Ex d 110 T6(Tamb = -20°C to 40°C) Ex d IIC T4(Tamb = -20°C to 80°C) Vmax = 55Vdc li = 23mA 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1-) 1 Product Data Sheet 00813-0100-4690, Rev KA April 2009 Rosemount 2088 NK IECEx Dust Ignition Proof IECEx Certificate number: IECEx KEM 06.0021X Ex tD A22 IP66 T90°C(Tamb = -20°C to 80°C) Vmax = 55Vdc li = 23mA Special Conditions For Safe Use (x): 1. The device contains a thin wall diaphragm. Installation, maintenance, and use shall take into account the environmental conditions to which the diaphragm will be subjected. The manufacturer's instructions for installation and maintenance shall be followed in detail to assure safety during its expected lifetime. 2. Cable entries must be used which maintain the ingress protection of the enclosure to at least IP 66. 3. Unused cable entries must be used which maintain the ingress protection of the enclosure to at least IP 66. 4 Cable entries and blanking plugs must be suitable for the ambient range of the apparatus and capable of withstanding a 7J impact. 5. The 2088/2090 sensor module must be securely screwed in place to maintain the ingress protection of the enclosure Brazil Certifications 12 INMETRO Intrinsic Safety Certification No.. CEPEL-Ex-063/97-1X BR -Ex is IIC T5/T4 E2 INMETRO Flameproof Certification No: CEPEL-Ex-076/97-1 BR -Ex d IIC T6/T5 Combinations of Certifications Stainless steel certification tag is provided when optional approval is specified. Once a device labeled with multiple approval types is installed, it should not be reinstalled using any other approval types. Permanently mark the approval label to distinguish it from unused approval types. KB KH K5 K6 K7 K1 Combination of K5 and C6 Combination of K5, 11, and ED Combination of E5 and 15 Combination of C6, 11, and ED Combination of 17, N7, E7, and NK Combination of 11, N1, ED, and ND Rosemount 2088 Product Data Sheet 00813-0100-4690, Rev KA April 2009 Dimensional Drawings Rosemount 2088 0.75 (20) Clearance for Cover Removal 2 x'/t-14 NPTt Conduit Connection Terminal Connections t 5.0 (127) - 4.3 (110) Max. -► Optional Display Cover Transmitter Circuitry M20 x 1.5 Female (CM20), PG 13.5, and G 1/2 Female (PF 1/2 Female) also available as options. 2 x'/.-20 UNC -2B Mounting Holes Certifications Tag 417 (120) 5.7 (146) Typical Y2-14 NPT Female Process Connection (See Ordering Table for other options.) Mounting Configurations with Optional Mounting Brackets Pipe Mounting Panel Mounting 2 -inch U -Bolt for pipe mounting (clamp shown) 1/4x 11/4 Bolts for transmitter mounting (not supplied) 1.3 (33)�-� — 4.8 (122) - 7.0 (178) 2.8 (71) 631. 1/4x 11/4 Bolts for transmitter mounting (not supplied) 1.3 (33) 131°.6, Dimensions are in inches (millimeters). No 5/16x 1% Bolts ,_for panel mounting (not supplied) 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 11) 1 Product Data Sheet 00813-0100-4690, Rev KA ApriI 2009 Rosemount 2088 Ordering Information Model Product description 2088 Pressure Transmitter Code Transmitter type G Gage Code Pressure Ranges (Range/Min. Span) 2088G 2088A -14.7 to 30 psi / 1.5 psi (-1,01 to 2,1 bar / 103 mbar) -14.7 to 800 psi / 40 psi (-1,01 to 55,2 bar /28 mbar) Code Output S 4-20 mA dc/Digital HAR " Protocol FAigjts Oto 30 psi / 1.5 psi (Oto 2;1 bar / 103 mbar) 0 to 800 psi / 40 psi (0 to 55,2 bar / 2,8 mbar) e Materials of Construction Code Process connection Isolating diaphragm Oil fill 22 316L SST 2B 316L SST 316L SST 316L SST Silicone Inert f'v Code Process connection A•sk-1_ Code %14 NPT Female RC % Female (PT'4 Female) Conduit thread 2 M20 X 1.5 Female (CM20) =may•F S 3 zi.fC. Code Options EY rt. M Integral manifold a Y;7t Diaphragm seal assemblies Wtatrz Mounting brackets Special configuration (software) :4 r 440,134 .fir -1fl ,mss s CN NAMUR alarm and saturation levels, low alarm NRSISPBWIREEMWINEKM6680.SPAth' �:.:r,••:��: Special configuration (hardware) .2 :t 0 r4I, s, r' o or i jl Pflt -'Pi tecflile' t t esi 4F�yir 1 t 9 Rosemount 2088 Product Data Sheet 00813-0100-4690, Rev KA April 2009 Product Certifications N1 ED ATEX Type n ATEX Flameproof r=r K6t5 CSA Explosion -Proof, Dust Ignition proof Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 4 (4; �6 00 u Fv E5 FM Explosion -Proof , Dust Ignition -proof 15 FM Intrinsically safe, Division 2 KB FM and CSA Explosion -Proof, Dust 17 SAA Intrinsic Safety Ignition -proof, Intrinsically Safe, Division 2 . YC.YTv `P,-. vie,f7,4.1 NK IECEx Dust K1 ATEX Flameproof, Intrinsic Safety, Type n, Dust 12 INMETRO Intrinsic Safety NSF drinking water approval M5 LCD display, scaled Special procedures P2 Cleaning for special 0-100% 1 rx tel«; s= service Special certifications Q8 tv�;4cd�Y , 4 A eae1Y ria •�f4 �5 -,�2 =,'S Material Traceability Certification per EN 10204 3.1B -1 1 1 in r fD�e'� L I t !3 3 Toolkit Total System Performance Reports Terminal blocks Typical Model Number: 2088 G 2 S 22 A 1 B4 M5 SRL (1) Materials of Construction comply with recommendations per NAGE MR0175r!SO 15156 for sour oil field production environments. Environmental limits apply to certain materials. Consult latest standard for details. Selected materials also conform to NACE MR0103 for sour refining environments. (2) Not available with Alloy C-276, Materials of Construction code 33 and low power output code N. (3) Use 1/2 - 14 NPT Female Process Connection code A. (4) Assemble -to" items are specified separately and require a completed model number. (5) Not available with low-power Output code N. (6) Only available with Conduit Thread code 4. (7) Requires Materials of Construction code 22 with Process Connection code A. (8) Available with Output code S, stainless steel isolators, and silicone fill. 10 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Product Data Sheet \ 00813-0100-4690, Rev KA April 2009 Rosemount 2088 BOLD = Required Value *= Default Configuration Data Sheet Select only one of the items provided [] One or more of the listed items can be selected Customer Information Customer: Phone No: P.OJReference No.: Contact Name: Fax No./Email: P O. Line Item: Quote No. Model No.: Customer Signoff: Tagging Hardware Tag: Software Tag: Output Information Pressure Units: Analog Output: Range Points: 4mA = Q inH2O Q inHg Q mbar Q Atm Q Linear* O psi * Q bar Q Torr Q kg/cm2 Q Square Root Q Pa Q ftH2O Q kPa Q g/cm2 Q mmH2O 0 inH2O at 4 °C Q mmHg Q mmH2O at 4 °C (0*) 20mA = (URL*)(1) (1) Default values may be different outside the U.S.A. Consult an Emerson Process Management Representative. NOTE Custom configuration information below this note requires C1 option code. Output Information Damping: 0 0.00 seconds 0 0.05 seconds 0 0.10 seconds O 0.20 seconds 01-60 seconds 0 3.20 seconds 0 6.40 seconds 0 12.8 seconds 0 0.40 seconds* 0 25.6 seconds 0 0.80 seconds Transmitter Information Descriptor (16 characters) Message: (32 characters) Date: (Date of Calibration*) 11 Rosemount 2088 Product Data Sheet 00813-0100-4690, Rev KA April 2009 Signal Selection Q 4-20 mA with simultaneous digital signal based on HART protocol* Q Burst mode of HART digital process variable Burst mode output options: Q Primary variable Q All dynamic variables in engineering units 0 Multidrop Communication Q Primary variable in percent of range and mA Q All dynamic variables in engineering units and the primary variable mA value Transmitter Address (1-15): (default = 0) LCD Information(1) LCD Display Type: Q Eng. Units only Q % of Range only Q Custom Display only(2) Q Altemate Eng. Units &% of Range * Q Altemate Eng. Units & Custom Display(2) Q Altemate % of Range & Custom Display(2) (1) Option M5 must be selected within the transmitter model code. (2) LCD Custom Display Configuration information must be completed. LCD Custom Display Configuration: (Required if "Custom Display" is selected as LCD Display Type under LCD Information) Enter Lower Range Value (Include decimal point) (+000.00 *) Enter Upper Range Value (Include decimal point) (+100.00 *) Custom Units - spaces consume A -Z, 0-9, /, *, %, space (%RNGE *) 0 Square Root Custom Display Transfer Function (Independent of Analog Output) 0 Linear* Hardware Selectable Information Alarm Option(1)• Local Zero and Span: Transmitter Security: Q High* Q Enabled* 0Off * Q Low Q Disabled Q On (1) Specify C4 or CN Option in model structure when ordering NAMURcompliant alarm and saturation limits. 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ,M Ma M MO M — M IMO NM NM MI— i — M I G FIELD TERMINAL CONNECTIONS 5.0 (127) 4.3 (110) 1/2-14 NPT CONDUIT CONNECTION C2 PLACES, ZITHER SIZES AVAILABLE) PROCESS CONNECTION DIN 16288 G 1/2 MALE (OPTIONAL) 1.4 (36) OR M20 X 1.5 MALE (CM20 MALE) (OPTIONAL) TRANSMITTER ELECTRONICS REVISIONS REV AB UPDATE DRAWNCO to TYPE 1 STANDARD DESCRIPTION I CHG.NO. APP'0 DATE RTC101411D NM. iz/istoz 3.9 (100) NAMEPLATE CERTIFICATION LABEL _ _ J METER COVER (OPTIONAL) PROCESS CONNECTION 1/2 — 14 NPT FEMALE OR RC 1/2 FEMALE (PT 1/2 FEMALE) (OPTIONAL) BRACKET MOUNTING HOLES (1/4 — 20 UNC) 4.2 (107) 5.4 (140) 4.7 (120) 1.30 (33) !UNLESS OTHERVWSE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS IN INCHES (MM) *ALL DIMENSIONS ARE NOMINAL EME'.: • N. M r,MrA� .• n4S TYPE 1 ROSEIT•NC. CHANHASSEN. MINNESOTA OR. ANN /ARROW 12/m/a Agkitax Farm APP D. DRAM NC 11/16!@ TITLE DIMENSIONAL DRAWING FOR MODEL 20685 PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS APP'D. TACCING APP' D. SPECIAL. Sr FSCM.NO. 04274 DRAWING NO. 02088-1035 sOALEINONEI WT. I SHEET 1 OF 1 SECTION 11212 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP ) I 11111... UN NM r M NI' - - I - r MB MS i I UN MN Customer : PumpTech Item number : City of Yakima Service Vendor reference : 3857-70002 Date . July 27, 2009 FLOWSCe C ERVE Pump Division Capacity : 3000.0 USgpm Specific gravity : 0.999 Head : 655.00 ft Pump speed : 1770 rpm CURVES ARE APPRO%MATE, PUMP IS GUARANTEED FOR ONE SET OF CONDITIONS, CAPACITY. MEAD, AND EFFICIENCY. Pump size & type : 17ETMH Based on curve no. : 88376558 Number of stages : 5 a L (1) 0 v CO 0) 800 600 400 200 0 2000 1800 1600 1400 1200 1000 800 600 400 200 0 Bowl performance shown below is corrected for materials, viscosity and construction. c -- r r 1 1 1 Bowl power Bowl efficiency 112.31 in Maximum MCS 11. 10. 65 in Rate 00 in Minimum NPS 0 2000 Capacity - USgpm Bowl head of 663.7 ft corresponds with 655.011 head at discharge flange adjusled for elevation and friction losses. 4000 100 _50 2 a z 100 90 80 70 60 50 0 40 aci U _30 w r- _2 0 10 0 6000 WinPROS+ V3.3.2 FLOWSERVE Pump Hydraulic Datasheet Customer PumpTech Pump / Stages 17ETMH / 5 Customer reference . Based on curve no. - 88376558 Item number City of Yakima Vendor reference . 3857-70002 . Date - July 27. 2009 Service• Operating Conditions Materials / Specification Capacity . 3000.0 USgpm Water Capacity (CQ=1.00) . - Normal capacity Total Developed Head • 655.00 ft Water head (CH=1.00) NPSH available (NPSHa) 33.4 ft NPSHa less NPSH margin Maximum suction pressure - 0.0 prig Material column code : B30 Pump specification Other Requirements Hydraulic selection No specification Construction No specification Test tolerance Hydraulic Institute Level A Speed Set 1770 rpm Driver Sizing Max Power(MCSF to EOC)with SF Liquid Liquid type Water Liquid description Temperature 60 F Specific gravity / Viscosity 0.999 /1.0 cSt Performance Hydraulic power 501 hp Pump speed 1770 rpm Efficiency (CE=1.00) . 84.9 % NPSH required (NPSHr) 24.7 ft Rated power 590 hp Maximum power 644 hp Driver power 700 hp / 522 kW Casing working pressure • 416.5 psig (based on shut off @ cut dia) Maximum allowable 413.3 psig Bowl & column hydrotest • 520.6 psig Minimum submergence 36.00 in Pump thrust at rated flow • 14017.0 Ibf Impeller diameter Rated 11.65 in Maximum 12.31 in Minimum - 10.00 in Suction specific speed 7030 US units Minimum continuous flow 1413.8 USgpm Maximum head @ rated dia • 963.0 ft Flow at BEP : 3185.7 USgpm Flow as % of BEP 94.2 % Efficiency at normal flow - Impeller dia ratio (rated/max) 94.6 % Head rise to shut off 45.0 % Total head ratio (rated/max) . 86.9 % Boni pxnallvice Moonbet. isa rraclo/ b malafeb, vomsly and maYucban. 800 1()0 m U 1 uf owl powe 600 o. iP 400 — 0 o' 200 0 CURVES ARE APPROXOMT E. PUMP IS GUARANTEED FCR ONE SET OF CONDIT0NS, CAPACITY. HEAD. AND EFFICIENCY. 2000 1800 90 1600 80 1400 70 owl efficiency{ 1200 1000 60 50 -112.31 in MaximuDl Maw_ = m 800 Tg = 600 400 11.65 in Rale .[.faa 40 30 �� — '�� i1 10.00 �� . in Minlmu J �a vv 100 20 200 PSH 50 = coa Z 210 0 0 _�'' Boni Loll d 567.7 A me 0 2000 smrds mill 655OII Mel al dsdu.5e Miny. a4usla0 b elev.., ad 4000 Capacity - USgpm Meow Lamm 6000 wilPROS. V7 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ) 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ir) 1 VERTICAL MOTORS WEATHER PROTECTED TYPE I FRAME: 5000PH, P, PA TYPE: RU 09-2657 EFFECTIVE: 03-JUL-06 SUPERSEDES: NEW AG EO CONDUIT BOX FOR ACCESSORY LEADS AS REOUIRED CD - AF BBJ BE t LI.® - ►� A K •-. . 8 I -BD-� 5600 CUBIC INCH CONDUIT BOX AD AA -S I ZE CONDUIT OTY-3 AC AB -0.! By OUTSIDE DIMENSIONS HEIGHT: 24" WIDTH: 18" DEPTH: 14" TOLERANCES FACE RUNOUT PERMISSIBLE ECCENTRICITY OF MOUNTING RABBET MAXIMUM SHAFT END PLAY 007 F 1 R. 007 F I R 010 FRAME P AG BV CD EO 5008 5012 40 00 63.88 27 00 57 06 78 88 42 00 72 30 6 42 DM -S I ZE CONDUIT FRAME AJ AK +.005 BB MIN BD MAX BE BF 5000PH 5000P3 14.150 13.500 14.750 22.000 13 500 5000PA 26.000 22 000 .25 20 00 24 50 30 50 2 19 .69 69 94 81 VOLTS C/BOX VOLUME (CU.IN.) AB AC AD AF BU 0-4800 3400 36 50 27.88 3 00 10.94 4801-6900 5600 36 13 30.13 4.00 10 81 45" 0 AJ SHEET 1 OF 1 a)ffl OI I- D I BF - 4 HOLES P AC AB BU AD AD AA -S I ZE CONDUIT OTY-2 1 DIMENSIONS MAY VARY 25" DUE TO CASTING AND/OR FABRICATION VARIATIONS 2. DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES ARE SHOWN IN INCHES 3 5000P HAS TWO BOLT CIRCLES 09-2657 U. S. ELECTR ICAL MOTORS imi DO NOT USE FOR CONSTRUCTION DIVISION OF EMERSON ELECTRIC CO. EMERSON PURPOSES UNLESS CERTIFIED AA DM 2 NPT 1/2 NPT 2-1/2 NPT 3/4 NPT 3 NPT 1 NPT 3-1/2 NPT 1-1/4 NPT 4 NPT 1-1/2 NPT 1 DIMENSIONS MAY VARY 25" DUE TO CASTING AND/OR FABRICATION VARIATIONS 2. DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES ARE SHOWN IN INCHES 3 5000P HAS TWO BOLT CIRCLES 09-2657 U. S. ELECTR ICAL MOTORS imi DO NOT USE FOR CONSTRUCTION DIVISION OF EMERSON ELECTRIC CO. EMERSON PURPOSES UNLESS CERTIFIED CATALOG NUMBER: NAMEPLATE DATA MODEL 1 1 FR PH INSUL CLASS HP VOLTS FL AMPS SF AMPS SF SHAFT END BRG 3 F 700 5012P 6219-J/C3 - QTY 1 MAX AMB Asm. Pos. 1 RPM 460 775.0 895.0 NEMA NOM EFFICIENCY GUARANTEED EFFICIENCY 1.15 95.0 94 1 40 C NAMEPLATE PART #• TYPE ID# RUE' OPP END BRG 1775 1l 1 11 DESIGN NOM PF MAX KVAR 89.0 UL DATA (IF APPLICABLE): DIVISION I 1 TEMP CODE 1 VFD DATA (IF APPLICABLE): VOLTS AMPS TORQUE 1 VFD LOAD TYPE 1 VFD HERTZ RANGE 1 VFD SPEED RANGE 1 460 813.8 SERVICE FACTOR NO. POLES VECTOR MAX RPM Radians / Seconds TEAO DATA (IF APPLICABLE): 1 CODE KiloWatt HZ G 522.2 60 CLASS I CLASS II HP 1 422707-006 ENCL WPI 29428 -EJ - QTY 1 (ref: Order#: 664576, Type: IN, Line#: 100) DUTY CONT iI 1 RPM 1 11 1 VOLTS 1 11 FL AMPS SF AMPS II SF 1 DESIGN t 1 CODE 1 NEMA NOM NOM EFFICIENCY 1 PF 1 1 GUARANTEED1 MAX 1 1 HZ t EFFICIENCY KVAR 2072.4LB-FT VT/PWM HP (AIR OVER) I FPM AIR VELOCITY I i 6-60 180-1800 1.00 TORQUE 2 VFD LOAD TYPE 2 VFD HERTZ RANGE 2 VFD SPEED RANGE 2 FL SLIP MAGNETIZING AMPS Encoder PPR Encoder Volts GROUP I GROUP II i 1 HP (AIR OVER 1 1 RPM (AIR OVER) r 1 RPM (AIR OVER 1 1 M/S) M/S) FPM AIR VELOCITY M/S t 1 FPM AIR VELOCITY SEC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ADDITIONAL NAMEPLATE DATA: Decal / Plate WD=499495 Customer PN Notes Non Rev Ratchet NRR Max Temp Rise 80C RISE/RES@1.00SF ' OPP/Upper Oil Cap 30 01728.4 L Thermal (WDG) OVER TEMP PROT 2 SHAFT/Lower Oil Cap GREASE Altitude EPACT Note EPACT Compliance COS Marine Duty Balance 0.08 IN/SEC Arctic Duty 3/4 Load Eff. 95.6 Inrush Limit Motor Weight 4850 Direction of Rotation Sound Level Special Note 1 Vertical Thrust 30900 Special Note 2 Thrust Percentage 300% EHT Special Note 3 Bearing Life 8.8K Special Note 4 Starting Method Special Note 5 Number of Starts Special Note 6 200/208V 60Hz Max Amps SH Max. Temp. 190V 50 hz Max Amps SH Voltage 380V 50 Hz Max Amps SH Watts NEMA Inertia Load Inertia Sumpheater Voltage Sumpheater Wattage Special Accessory Note 1 Special Accessory Note 16 Special Accessory Note 2 Special Accessory Note 17 1 Special Accessory Note 3 Special Accessory Note 18 Special Accessory Note 4 Special Accessory Note 19 Special Accessory Note 5 Special Accessory Note 20 Special Accessory Note 6 Special Accessory Note 21 Special Accessory Note 7 Special Accessory Note 22 Special Accessory Note 8 Special Accessory Note 23 Special Accessory Note 9 Special Accessory Note 24 Special Accessory Note 10 Special Accessory Note 25 Special Accessory Note 11 Special Accessory Note 26 Special Accessory Note 12 Special Accessory Note 27 Special Accessory Note 13 Special Accessory Note 28 Special Accessory Note 14 Special Accessory Note 29 Special Accessory Note 15 Special Accessory Note 30 1 q EMERSON,. Motor Technologies EMERSON MOTOR COMPANY ST LOUIS, MO TYPICAL NAMEPLATE DATA ACTUAL MOTOR NAMEPLATE LAYOUT MAY VARY SOME FIELDS MAY BE OMITTED MOTOR PERFORMANCE MODEL NO. CATALOG NO. PHASE TYPE FRAME NA NA 3 RUE! 5012P ORDER NO. 664576 LINE NO. 100 MPI: 113051 HP: 700 POLES: 4 VOLTS: 460 HZ: 60 SERVICE FACTOR: 1.15 EFFICIENCY (%): S.F. 94.7 FULL 95 3/4 95.6 1/2 95.3 1/4 92.9 POWER FACTOR (%): S.F. 88.9 FULL 89 3/4 87.9 1/2 83.5 1/4 67.5 NO LOAD 5.8 LOCKED ROTOR 20.3 AMPS: S.F. 895 FULL 775 3/4 585 1/2 412 1/4 261 NO LOAD 179.6 LOCKED ROTOR 5025 NEMA CODE LETTER G NEMA DESIGN LETTER # FULL LOAD RPM 1775 NEMA NOMINAL EFFICIENCY (%) 95 GUARANTEED EFFICIENCY (%) 94.1 MAX KVAR 121.6 AMBIENT (°C) 40 ALTITUDE (FASL) 3300 SAFE STALL TIME -HOT (SEC) 16 SOUND PRESSURE (DBA @ 1M) 86 TORQUES BREAKDOWN{% F.L.} 175 LOCKED ROTOR{% F.L.} 60 FULL LOAD{LB-FT} 2072.4 EMER ON. Motor Technologies The Above Data Is Typical, Sinewave Power Unless Noted Otherwise EMERSON MOTOR COMPANY ST LOUIS, MO Emerson Motor Company is a division of Emerson Electric Co. The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co. 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1' 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.) 1 499495 T3 Motor Wiring Diagram T1 DELTA Connection or T2 T3 T1 LEAD CONNECTION TTT Line Each lead may consist of one or more cables having the same lead number. 499495 WYE Connection To reverse direction of rotation interchange connections L1 and L2. Each lead may be comprised of one or more cables. Each cable will be marked with the appropriate lead number. EFFECTIVE: 2/27/96 SUPERCEDES. X736618, 96441, 179879, 284138 Connection Plate: 499495 Connection Decal: 912113 T2 THERMOSTATS 1. MOTOR IS EQUIPPED WITH QTY -3 (1 PER PHASE) NORMALLY CLOSED THERMOSTATS. THERMOSTATS ARE SET TO OPEN AT HIGH TEMPERATURE. ~C 884066 A 2. THERMOSTATS MUST NOT BE USED TO SWITCH ABOVE 18 AMPS AT 24 VDC OR 12 AMPS AT 230 VAC. N. C. THERMOSTATS 41' P1 P2 ACCESSORY LISTING QTY -3 N.C. THERMOSTATS LETT NOTA 1 NGE DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE A REDRAWN ON CAD 10/28/91 U.S. ELECTRICAL MOTORS DIVISION OF E1ERS0N ELECTRIC CO. ST. LOUIS. MISSOURI CUSTOMER CONNECT 1 O D 1 AGRAM MOD 8-NOV-95 UPDATE TEXT C MOD 6 -JUN -00 UPDATED NONE I N DRWN 24 -APR -80. DLH RVSD 6 -JUN -00, RWK APPD 6 -JUN -00. REP a 0 CDG C1 884066 A M - 1 - - S - 11111 ANS N E 111111 NM i NI MN-- - RENEWAL PARTS FRAMES 5008 AND 5012 TYPES: RU, RUE, RUEI, RV4, RVE4, RVEI4 WARNING. BEARINGS: Any disassembly or repair work on explosionproof motors will void the Refer to motor nameplate for the bearing Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. label unless done by the manufacturer, numbers. or a facility approved by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Refer to your nearest U.S. Elecrical Motors office for assistance. PRICES: Parts stocking distributors: refer to USEM renewal parts numerical index. All Others: refer to your nearest USEM parts distributor reference: Renewal Parts Section 700 - 200 RENEWAL PARTS FRAMES 5008 AND 5012 TYPES: RU, RUE, RUE), RV4, RVE4, RVEI4 ITEM NO. QTY NAME OF PART 1 1 Lower Bracket 2 1 Shaft Water Slinger 3 1 Pipe Nipple (Lower Grease Drain) 4 1 Pipe Cap (Lower Grease Drain) 5 1 Grease Zerk Fitting 6 1 Pipe Coupling (Lower Grease Fill) 7 1 Pipe Nipple (Lower Grease Fill) 8 1 Locknut and Lockwasher (Lower Bearing) 9 1 Lower Bearing 10 1 Lower Bearing Cap 11 1 Lower Intake Screen (Only on WP -1) 12 1 Lower Air Deflector 13 1 Rotor Assembly 14 1 Rotor Core 15 1 Rotor Shaft 16 1 Square Key (Bearing Mounting to Shaft) 17 1 Stator Assembly 18 2 Lower Air Intake Cover (Only on WP -1) 19 2 Upper Air Intake Screen (Only on WP -1) 20 1 Gasket (Outlet Box Base to Stator) 21 1 Outlet Box Base 22 1 Gasket (Outlet Box Cover to Base) 23 1 Outlet Box Cover 24 2- (5008)0 (5012) Exhaust Screen 25 1 Upper Air Deflector 26 1 Upper Bracket 27 1 Pipe Nipple (Oil Drain) 28 1 Pipe Cap (Oil Drain) 29 1 Oil Sight Gauge Window WARNING: Any disassembly or repair work on explosionproof motors will void the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. label unless done by the manufacturer, or a facility approved by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Refer to your nearest U.S. Elecricat Motors office for assistance. Copyright © 2002 U.S. Electrical Motors, All rights reserved ITEM NO. QTY NAME OF PART 30 1 Oil Fill Plug (Expanding) 31 1 Bearing Spacer (or Tandem Thrust Bearing) 32 1 Upper Thrust Bearing 33 1 Bearing Mounting 34 1 Dust Cover (Only on Units Without Ratchet) 35 1 Locknut and Lockwasher (Brg Mtg to Shaft) 36 1 Canopy Cap 37 1 Thrust Coupling (Only on Hollowshaft) 38 1 Gib Key (Only on Hollowshaft) 39 2 WP2 Intake Box (Only on WP -2) 40 2 Upper Adapter Flange (Only on WP -2) 41 2 Lower Adapter Flange (Only on WP -2) 42 4 Filter Access Cover (Only on WP -2) 43 4 Intake Screen (Only an WP -2) 44 4 Cover (Flange Access) (Only on WP -2) 45 1 Ratchet Adaptor (Only on Units With Ratchet) 46 1 Connection Spring (Only on Units With Ratchet) 47 1 Stationary Ratchet (Only on Units With Ratchet) 48 1 Pressure Plate (Only on Units With Ratchet) 49 1 Rotating Ratchet (Only on Units With Ratchet) 50 12- (5°014- 8) (5012) Ratchet Ball (Only on Units with Ratchet) 51 1 Ball Retaining Ring (Only on Units With Ratchet) 52 4- (50 8) (5012) Plain Washer (Only on Units With Ratchet) 53 4- (5008) (5012) Die Spring (Only on Units With Ratchet) 54 4- (5008) (5012) Screw (Only on Units With Ratchet) 55 1 Pressurization Baffle BEARINGS. Refer to motor nameplate for the bearing numbers. PRICES: Parts stocking distributors: refer to USEM renewal parts numerical index. Al Others: refer to your nearest USEM parts distributor reference: Renewal Parts Section 700 - 200 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Home Email TYPICAL REED CRITICAL FREQUENCY DATA USEM MODEL NO: NA USEM CATALOG NO. NA Frame: 5012P Type: RUEI REED CRITICAL FREQUENCY: 20 HZ CENTER OF GRAVITY: 34.0 IN DEFLECTION @ CENTER OF GRAVITY: 0.0245 IN UNIT WEIGHT: 4850 LBS. BASE DIAMETER: 24.5 IN. MAXIMUM MOTOR DIAMETER: 40 IN. DATE: 8/11/2009 Copyright © 2000 U.S. Electrical Motors, All rights reserved Agrb MOTORS ILI2/ 1 4 EMERSON. Motor Technologies 1 MINIMUM DOWN -THRUST REQUIREMENT The motor contains an Extra -High -Thrust bearing arrangement that utilizes preload springs to prevent bearing skidding. In order to properly seat the thrust bearing and unload the guide bearing, the motor must be subjected to at least 4500 lbs of external down - thrust during all operation, with exception of momentary excursions of reduced down -thrust or up -thrust at startup and/or shutdown. 1 Failure to provide adequate down -thrust may result in premature damage to the motor bearings that would not be covered under 1 warranty. The pump thrust should be compared to the required motor down- 1 thrust value to ensure that sufficient thrust will be present under all steady-state running conditions (at all anticipated speeds and flow 1 rates). If there are any questions, please contact your US Motors Sales Representative. 1 The motor will be provided with a caution nameplate indicating the same minimum down -thrust noted above. Thrust Bearing: 29428 1 1 1 8/15/05 80-224 1 SECTION 11516 CHLORINE INJECTION SYSTEM r ALIT 1.1.1011 SYSTEM PLAN SYSTEM ELEVATION 20¢ al a 2ID191v 0m .Pro 33 may w19c 22 11:2016 mat S*2L32) le -1101 a MC IN WO 019 N 111 • rno19:6931 v*29516- r rpm Rim VIO IU.3'901ex20 43(4)-903 r201004. x. Da 9m DIM - p X -1 C04 1' W plc .11) III . r 91L00 IK Ice r 2022.0 20-2.P,1®.* DUAL SOLENOID INLET OPTION ALTERNATE PIPING FOR VFD PUMP OPTION BILL OF MATERIAL 307S ITEM 2ww 0609.120! x CO omuu V MO Int .019910 PO m 41' *2030 NIL 8 N1 Net 91121*20x9Ui WW1 11Wad Immo Wm pi sea rpp 012290 121/.44:216 3 1 C7310904202 4*312013 P11120 9200 D2-Iqs-4 3.3149913* t» 1020{ 1491991 x 920920 3K l9 9061 el 120 x 911 P9PA 19161 nc MAXI um 0 Pula. woe MUM perm 1' 0000193 e 491sot 2x0 906 r 9119, Mt 2090.0 n 11 203* 4P50021 1' 9011193 =ay 9116 1 201 IT 012 P0 Mat 209* 1' 1101 We IT 30 -00-2 120*22 11 M r kb PR n rot e x llt 3314109114410* tl312I2PM1 140224 n 9220f 2010193201!.!corp n tutor.! 03 9020 (218 IOU .nc.m 1014P 141024 10 41'20120 At W1119O 1s 30 11 VIII Inc 9061 912 91 Sat K sr Om 92001 201900 0120x.0 12920 IX x 121131120139C a 1(r 0120x.¢1019 11 149190 rx *291.22.3 906 r 9019 IX e 9c 301 .M3* 1904101-1 V9914291 1, gee r31111192.x. Db 6 0001®3* IR 04 I.00a 1919 x l'1920 PC 9:410111,411 wpm 3.19[ 00Iu 1911 1' 19 e xMai 00 e magi 17011 POW 121) MN 0x1 2190162 0340 210[001990 1341 aRIM 1623 00.3 nun -014.1' mum 113 00010 lac 14112 19019 31300 /310 13 1x 10103200 Dem 13910131 1'2±00.12013 214 F +20320 I' K *2002 30Z .3)33111 -In* r 2011 20x1910003 13 11)11. 436 0 20 4 20 5241•2 00 Or 319 M 023'9130190 PUP IOU PER 911 Ref. . RTITINIDI 113)0. M. P0201 7301MIR 709 091209M10 WAY114 200 I2IPIDII Ib tra MAW KA 131311/9/01 090*De( 1310.1)41//0 PP YD MI[. SAE KANVIIwR ppprPlB! AI lb DWG POVERPRO 3015' ' MIMI IMO 1111111 NM INN MI MIMI ME O1111 111111 IMO MIMI OM II=1 V4r20 t i l tr_ o raw 14:°0Mit,....:_, r n O, 'I „ �eo3194e■ �9^i \ 'J'�uiLe Ia� AMP -�—Ij' II /"1, l T` ---Tei.11 Y SYSTEM PLAN SYSTEM ELEVATION 20¢ al a 2ID191v 0m .Pro 33 may w19c 22 11:2016 mat S*2L32) le -1101 a MC IN WO 019 N 111 • rno19:6931 v*29516- r rpm Rim VIO IU.3'901ex20 43(4)-903 r201004. x. Da 9m DIM - p X -1 C04 1' W plc .11) III . r 91L00 IK Ice r 2022.0 20-2.P,1®.* DUAL SOLENOID INLET OPTION ALTERNATE PIPING FOR VFD PUMP OPTION BILL OF MATERIAL 307S ITEM 2ww 0609.120! x CO omuu V MO Int .019910 PO m 41' *2030 NIL 8 N1 Net 91121*20x9Ui WW1 11Wad Immo Wm pi sea rpp 012290 121/.44:216 3 1 C7310904202 4*312013 P11120 9200 D2-Iqs-4 3.3149913* t» 1020{ 1491991 x 920920 3K l9 9061 el 120 x 911 P9PA 19161 nc MAXI um 0 Pula. woe MUM perm 1' 0000193 e 491sot 2x0 906 r 9119, Mt 2090.0 n 11 203* 4P50021 1' 9011193 =ay 9116 1 201 IT 012 P0 Mat 209* 1' 1101 We IT 30 -00-2 120*22 11 M r kb PR n rot e x llt 3314109114410* tl312I2PM1 140224 n 9220f 2010193201!.!corp n tutor.! 03 9020 (218 IOU .nc.m 1014P 141024 10 41'20120 At W1119O 1s 30 11 VIII Inc 9061 912 91 Sat K sr Om 92001 201900 0120x.0 12920 IX x 121131120139C a 1(r 0120x.¢1019 11 149190 rx *291.22.3 906 r 9019 IX e 9c 301 .M3* 1904101-1 V9914291 1, gee r31111192.x. Db 6 0001®3* IR 04 I.00a 1919 x l'1920 PC 9:410111,411 wpm 3.19[ 00Iu 1911 1' 19 e xMai 00 e magi 17011 POW 121) MN 0x1 2190162 0340 210[001990 1341 aRIM 1623 00.3 nun -014.1' mum 113 00010 lac 14112 19019 31300 /310 13 1x 10103200 Dem 13910131 1'2±00.12013 214 F +20320 I' K *2002 30Z .3)33111 -In* r 2011 20x1910003 13 11)11. 436 0 20 4 20 5241•2 00 Or 319 M 023'9130190 PUP IOU PER 911 Ref. . RTITINIDI 113)0. M. P0201 7301MIR 709 091209M10 WAY114 200 I2IPIDII Ib tra MAW KA 131311/9/01 090*De( 1310.1)41//0 PP YD MI[. SAE KANVIIwR ppprPlB! AI lb DWG POVERPRO 3015' ' MIMI IMO 1111111 NM INN MI MIMI ME O1111 111111 IMO MIMI OM II=1 SECTION 11517 FLUORIDE INJECTION SYSTEM 2.2 Sigma/ 1 Diaphragm Metering Pumps 2.2.1 Sigma/ 1 Diaphragm Metering Pumps pk 2 001 Sigma pk.2_104 Sigma Controller P PM_0003_SW The Sigma/1 motor diaphragm metering pump has a high-strength inner metal housing for those com- ponent parts subjected to load as well as an additional plastic housing to protect against corrosion. The capacity ranges between 17-144 I/h at a max. backpressure of 4-12 bar. The output can be adjusted by a self-locking rotary knob in 1 % steps via the stroke length (4 mm). The reproducibility of the metering is better than ±2 % in the stroke length range of 30% - 100% given defined conditions and correct installation. (The notes in the operating instructions must be observed.) The rugged, corrosion -resistant metal -plastic housing is combined with three gearbox ratios, three liquid end sizes and two liquid end materials. The Sigma control type (Si Ca) facilitates control via contact or analogue signals (e.g. 0/4-20 mA) which ensures a good adaptation, also to different metering tasks. For safety -technical reasons, suitable overflow guards are to be installed in all motor metering pumps without integrated overload protections. Sigma Basic Type (Si Ba) The ProMinente Sigma Basic type is a motor driven metering pump with no internal electronic control system. The ProMinent®SIBa has a number of different drive options, including the 3 ph. standard (standard IP 55) motor, or the single phase AC motor. We also supply metering pumps with ATEX-approv- al for use in EXe and EXde zones. Different flanges are always available so that customers can use their own motor to drive the pump. Sigma Control Type (S1 Ca) The ProMinente Sigma microprocessor version (standard IP 65) allows rapid and reliable adjustment to fluctuating metering requirements. The controller has the same control panel as the ProMinente gamma/ L metering pump. The microprocessor controller of the Sigma pumps, featuring the optimum combination of variable AC frequency combined with digital stroking frequency, ensures exact metering even in the lower minimum range due to individual stroke control. The individual pump functions are simply adjusted using the five programming keys. A backlit LCD indi- cates the current operating status, LEDs function as operation or fault indicators and fault indicator or pacing relays monitor the pump function. Central or decentral adjustment is possible with PROFIBUSe and/or an integrated process timer. Diaphragm Failure Indication (A) The liquid end may be supplied with an optional safety diaphragm. A plastic chemical resistant end disc separates the drive housing from the liquid section, and protects the drive against corrosion in case of diaphragm rupture. The new diaphragm rupture system means that the liquid section is hermetically sealed in the event of diaphragm rupture. This has the great advantage that the feed chemicals cannot escape from the pump. In association with the S1 Ca, diaphragm rupture is simultaneously indicated via the LCD. At this point it is possible to opt for continuation of the metering, or to stop the metering pump. Integrated Relief -/Bleed Valve (B) A liquid end variant with integrated hydraulic relief valve is optionally available for pressure ratings 4, 7, 10 and 12 bar. It protects the pump against overload and potential damage with no additional installation. This represents a considerable saving to the operator. The integrated pressure relief valve offers the further advantage of effective bleeding of the injection valve during intake. 1 1.2009 Equipment Catalogue 2009 2-9 dra E Motor Driven Metering Pumps _: 1.., .1 2.2 Sigma/ 1 Diaphragm Metering Pumps )1g 1 e Technical data a 1 1 1 1 1 1 I ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.) 1 Motor Driven Metering Pumps Type With motor 1500 rpm at 50 Hz With motor 1800 rpm at 60 Hz Suc- Perm. Connection, Shipping tion admiss. suction/ weight head pressure pressure suction side side Delivery rate at Max. Delivery rate at max. Max. max. backpressure stroke backpressure stroke rate rate bar I/h ml/ Strokes/ psi 1/h / gph Strokes/ mWC stroke min min bar G -DN kg 12017 PVT 12 a •'t�,s• 17 12035 PVT 12 35 4.0 4.0 73 143 174.0 20/5.3 174.0 42/11.1 88 172 7 1 3/4-10 9 1 3/4-10 9 10050 PVT 10 50 yyi dtc Yk6t3 ?• ci XN;4` 10022 -PVT 10 10044 PVT 10 iia"•t r." 07065 PVT 07042 PVT ierd/ 04084 PVT • 04120 PVT 22 44 7 65 7 42 4 84 4 120 4.0 5.1 5.1 L5i 5.1 9.7 9.7 9.7 200 73 143 200 145.0 60/15.9' 145.0 7y 26/6.9 145.0 53/14.0 100.0 78/20.6' 73 143 200 100.0 50/13.2 58.0 101/26.7 58.0 144/38.0* 240 88 172 240 88 7 6 6 1 3/4-10 9 1 3/4-10 9 1 3/4-10 9 6 1 3/4-10 9 3 1 1-15 ' ,.. 10 172 240 3 3 1 1-15 1 Y 1-15 10 10 • The 60 Hz performance data apply to the Si Ca pump types (because internal 60 Hz operation), however, at max. 200 strokes/min. Material Liquid end Materials in contact with medium Suction/pressure port Gaskets/ Balis ball seat Integrated overflow valve SST Stainless steel 1.4404 pk_2_1 03 Stainless steel 1.4581 PTFE/PTFE Stainless steel 1 4404 Stainless steeVFPM or EPDM Sigma Basic Type Control Functions (S1 Ba) Stroke length actuator/controller Actuator for automatic stroke length adjustment, actuating period approx. 1 sec for 1 % stroke length, 1 k Ohm response signal potentiometer, enclosure rating IP 54. Controller consists of actuator with servomotor and integrated servo control for stroke length adjust- ment via a standard signal. Standard signal input 0/4-20 mA, corresponds to stroke length 0 - 100 %. Automatic/manual operation selection key for manual stroke adjustment. Mechanical status display of actual stroke length value output 0/4-20 mA for remote display. Variable speed motors with integrated speed controller (identcode characteristic V) Power supply 1 ph 230 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.18 kW External control with 0/4-20 mA (see pk_2 103) Speed Controllers see page -a 2-51 Speed controllers in metal housing (identcode characteristic Z) The speed controller assembly consists of a speed controller and a 0.18 kW variable speed motor. Speed Controllers see page -a 2-51 2-10 Equipment Catalogue 2009 1 1.2009 wilme 2.2 Sigma/ 1 Diaphragm Metering Pumps ,_ 2 0t. 2.2.2 identcode. Ordering System Basic Type (Si Ba) Main drive, diaphragm 12017 12035 10050 10022 10044 07065 07042 04084 04120 bar 12 12 10 10 10 7 7 4 4 Sigma Basic Type (Si Ba) Vh (50 Hz) 17 35 50 22 44 65 42 84 120 PVD Stainless steel seal 0 1 S" A" Standard diaphragm, PTF version Double diaphragm with diaphragm rupture indicator (retro fit possible) Multilayer safety diaphragm with visual rupture indicator Multilayer safety diaphragm with rupture signalling (contact) Lc...: (4Sri 0 1 4 5 6 7 No spring With 2 valve springs, Hastelloy C, 0.1 bar With pressure relief valve, FPM seal, no valve spring with overflow valve, FPM gasket with valve springs with overflow valve, EPDM gasket, without valve spring with overflow valve, EPDM gasket, with valve spring 0 Standard threaded connector according to technical data) 1 Union nut and PVC insert 2 Union nut and PP insert 3 Union nut and PVDF insert 4 Union nut and stainless steel insert 7 Union nut and PVDF hose nozzle 8 Union nut and stainless steel hose nozzle 0 M With ProMinen logo standard) Without ProMinent® logo Modified 3 oh, 230 /400 V 50 60 H M N L P R V (0) Z 2 3 1 ph, AC, 230 V/50/60 Hz, 0.09 kW 1 ph, AC 115 V 60 Hz, 0.09 kW 3 ph, 230 V/400 V, 50 Hz, (Exe, Exd) 3 ph, 265 V/440 V, 60 Hz, (Exe, Exd) 3 ph, variable speed motor, 230/400 V, 0.09 kW Variable speed motor with integrated frequency converter 1 pH, 230 V, 50/60 Hz Speed control compl 1 ph 230 V, 50/60 Hz (variable speed motor + FC) No motor, C 42 flange (NEMA) No motor, B5 Gr. 56 (DN) 55 standar 1 Exe motor version ATEX-T3 2 Exd motor version ATEX-T4 A ATEX power end • sensor tandard) Pacing relay (reed relay) Stroke sensor (Namur) for hazardous locations �Ir 1 2 3 4 5 6 Manual (standard) With stroke positioning motor, 230 V/50/60 Hz With stroke positioning motor, 115 V/60 Hz With stroke control motor, 0...20 mA 230 V/50/60 Hz With stroke control motor 4...20 mA 230 V/50/60 Hz With stroke control motor 0..20 mA 115 V/60 Hz With stroke control motor 4...20 mA 115 V/60 Hz • Item 1 and 2=backpressure [bar); item 3, 4, 5=output ▪ Available from 3rd quarter of 2009 1.1.2009 Equipment Catalogue 2009 2-11 Motor Driven. Metering Pumps 1 1 1 1 1.) 1 Motor Driven Metering Pumps Sigma/ 1 Diaphragm Metering Pumps 2.2.3 Identcode Ordering System Control Type (S1Ca) r°tJc4" ' r 12017 12035 10050 Sigma Control Type (S1Ca) The 60 Hz performance data apply to the S1 Ca pump types, however, at max. 200 strokes/min. ve, diaphragm bar 1/h bar Uh 12 20 10022 10 26 12 42 10044 10 53 10 50 07065 7 65 PVDF Stainless steel i PTF seal bar 1/h 07042 7 50 04084 4 101 04120 4 120 tandard diaphragm Double diaphragm with rupture indicator incorporating "Pump stopping" function Double diaphragm with rupture indicator incorporating "Pump alarm" function Multilayer safety diaphragm with visual rupture indicator Multilayer safety diaphragm with rupture signalling; pump stops Multilayer safety diaphragm with rupture signalling; pump emits alarm g6Z,.1: 1;;;- iii: r,I( 4 5 6 7 No spring With 2 valve springs, Hastelloy C, 0.1 bar With pressure relief valve; FPM seal, no valve spring with overflow valve, FPM gasket with valve spring with overflow valve, EPDM gasket, without valve spring with overflow valve, EPDM gasket, with valve spring 0 tan•a • read- • connector acco •ingtot=. nical data) 1 Union nut and PVC insert 2 Union nut and PP insert 3 Union nut and PVDF insert 4 Union nut and stainless steel insert 7 Union nut and PVDF hose nozzle 8 Union nut and stainless steel hose nozzle y ..r. With ProMinen " logo standard) 1 Without ProMinent® logo 1 ph 100-230V, ±10 %, 50/60 Hz A 2 m European 2 m Australian 6 2mSwiss D 2mUSA No relay With fault indicating relay (nominally energised) 1 x changeover 230V -2A With fault indicating relay (normally de -energised) 1 x changeover 230V - 2A As 1 with pacing relay 2x normally open 24 V - 100 mA As 3 with pacing relay 2x normally open 24 V - 100 mA shut-off and warning relays normally close 2x normally open 24 V - 100 mA 4-20 mA output = stroke length x frequency 1 x fault -indicating relay make contact 24 V - 100 mA Power relay normally dosed 1 x changeover 230 V - 8 A Manual + external with pulse control Manual + extemal + pulse control + analogue As 0 + process -timer As 1 + process -timer As 1 + PROFIBUS® DP -interface, D sub 9 as 1 + PROFIBUS®DP interface, M12 No access code With access code • Item 1 and 2=backpressure [ba ]; item 3, 4, 5=output [l/h] •• Ava'lable from 3rd quarter of 2009 ••• For the option PROFIBUS® no relay can be selected nput with pulse eva uation Manual Manual + calibration 2-12 Equipment Catalogue 2009 1.1.2009 2.2 Sigma/ 1 Diaphragm Metering Pumps a) 5 a. 2.2.4 Spare Parts Kits The replacement part kit in general includes the wear parts of the delivery units. Scope of delivery for material PVT 1 x metering diaphragm, 1 x suction valve compl., 1 x pressure valve compl., 2 x valve balls 1 x elastomer gasket kit (EPDM, FPM -B) 2 x ball seat bushing, 2 x ball washer, 4 x formed composite seal Scope of delivery for material SST 1 x metering diaphragm, 2 x valve balls 2 x gasket kit compl. (packing rings, ball seat washers) 4 x formed composite seals Spare parts kits Sigma/ 1 for version with standard/double diaphragm Applicable to Identcode: Type 12017, 12035, 10050 Delivery unit Materials in contact with medium Order no. FM 50 - DN 10 SST 1010554 Applicable to identcode: Type 10022, 10044, 07065 Delivery unit Materials in contact with medium Order no. FM 65 DN 10 SST 1010556 ,a Applicable to Identcode: Type 07042, 04084, 04120 Delivery unit Materials in contact with medium Order no. FM 120 -DN 15 SST 1010558 4 3Y- Metering diaphragm (standard diaphragm) Order no. Sigma/ 1 FM 65 (10022; 10044; 07065) 1010282 Spare parts kit for integrated overflow valve consisting of two Nast. C compression springs and four FPM -A and EPDM O -rings each For material Gaskets Order no. ETS overflow valve 4 bar PVT/SST FPM -A / EPDM 1031199 iz*RIC -41- f :57 ETS overflow valve 10 bar PVT/SST FPM -A / EPDM 1031201 147.61AZIV1W-:'11 _v1411419 1 1.2009 Equipment Catalogue 2009 2-13 Motor Driven Metering Pumps 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 '_ .= 2.2 Sigma/ 1 Diaphragm Metering Pumps i 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1) 1 1 1 1 1 1 11) 1 Motor Driven Metering Pumps Identcode characteristic Motor Data Voltage supply Remarks N 1 ph AC IP 55 • 250-280 V/440-480 V 115 V t5 % 60 Hz 0.09 kW 60 Hz 0.12 kW 'ri L2 3 ph, 112GEExdIICT4 220-240 V/380-420 V 5� Hz 0.18 kW with PTC, speed adjustment range 1:5 T", �, .., ;i ,Y2 P2 3 ph, 112GEExdIICT4 250-280 V/440-480 V 60 Hz 0.18 kW with PTC, speed adjustment range 1:5 VO 1ph, IP55 230Vs10% 50/60 Hz 0.18 kW Variable speed motor with integrated fre- quency converter For further information, please request motor data sheets. Customised motors or customised motor flanges are available on request. Note concerning installation in Ex -zones: With effect from 01.07.2003, only pumps with a suitable identification and rating plate in accordance with ATEX Directive 94/9/EC may be used in areas with potentially explosive atmospheres. The explosion group, category and degree of protection stated on the rating plate must correspond to, or be higher than, the conditions specified in the intended application. 2-14 Equipment Catalogue 2009 1 1.2009 ) ProMinent® Fluoride Saturator Instruction Manual Part Number: 7740830 ProMinent Fluid Controls, Inc. 136 Industry Drive, Pittsburgh, PA 15275-1014 E-mail: sales@prominent.us Phone: 412-787-2484 / Telefax: 412-787-0704 Document Number 7740830-701: Rev. A Doc. Order Number: 7744165 7740830-701-A-001.doc 1 Table of Contents 1. Introduction 3 2. Safety 3 3. Unpacking 3 4. Installation 3 5. Operation 4 6. Cleaning 4 7. Spare Parts List 5 8. Figure & Drawing: Figure 1 — Fluoride Saturator Call Out 6 Drawing: 7740830 General Arrangement Layout 7 Document Number 7740830-701: Rev. A 2 ProMinent° Fluoride Saturator 1. Introduction 1.1. The following document is meant to provide guidance to the customer, engineer and installation contractors with respect to the use and function of the ProMinent° Fluoride Saturator. 1.2. The ProMinent® Fluoride Saturator is for use with crystalline and powder sodium fluoride or potassium permanganate. 1.3. The continuous automatic operation only requires the addition of chemical. 1.4. The ProMinent® Fluoride Saturator treats flows of 15 mgd with 1 mg/L of fluoride or over 18 mgd of water per day with 1 mg/L permanganate. 2. Safety 2.1. Wear protective clothing and glasses when working with or near chemicals 2.2. Flush all components that are in contact with chemicals prior to servicing. 2.3. Secure all chemicals and equipment making them inaccessible to children and pets. 3. Unpacking 3.1. Check all equipment for damage and for completeness against the order upon arrival to the site. 3.2. Report incorrect orders or damage to the seller immediately. 3.3. The following is included for the ProMinent® Fluoride Saturator. • 55 gallon polyethylene tank with cover • Dole valve • Isolation and drain valves • Float valve • Foot valve assembly • Vacuum Breaker • Pump (Sold Separate) 4. Installation (Reference Figure 1): 4.1. Place the tank on a surface that will give it full, flat support with no overhang. 4.2. Place the ProMinent® Fluoride Saturator to facilitate plumbing of the inlet water and overflow connections. 4.3. Install a 1/2" Y -strainer on the inlet water line to the saturator. 4.4. Connect a'/2" NPT tubing connector to the inlet water supply piping. We recommend that you install a shut off valve before this connection for ease of servicing the strainer. Document Number 7740830-701: Rev. A 3 4.5. Connect the inlet water line to the inlet of the ProMinent® Fluoride Saturator. 4.6. Tighten the compression nuts to secure tubing. 4.7. NOTE: the inlet water pressure must not exceed 125 psig. 4.8. Connect 1/2" tubing to the overflow connection on the ProMinent° Fluoride Saturator. 4.9. Route the tubing to the drain or where desired. 4.10. Attach the suction side of the ProMinent° metering pump to foot valve assembly of the ProMinent° Fluoride Saturator. 4.11. Connect the discharge side of the ProMinent® metering pump to the proper injection point. 4.12. Confirm that the appropriate power is available to the metering pump. 5. Operation 5.1. Open the fill lid on the ProMinent° Fluoride Saturator. 5.2. Add 100 pounds of chemical to the tank. ir L 5.3. Mark the level of the chemical on --- '-- .� 2000,`x"` the outside wall of the tank. 5.4. Add an additional 100 pounds of chemical to the tank. 5.5. Again, mark the level of the • chemical on the outside wall of •''�•- the tank. 5.6. Close the fill lid. 5.7. Open the water supply to the ProMinent® Fluoride Saturator. (NOTE: If the hardness in the water causes a scale buildup, use a water softener to treat the water supply to the ProMinent® Fluoride Saturator.) 5.8. Check the level of the chemical in the ProMinent® Fluoride Saturator daily. 5.9. Add more chemical to the tank of the ProMinent° Fluoride Saturator when the chemical is at the 100 pound mark. 5.10. Check the float valve for crystalline deposits regularly, rinse with water if necessary. 6. Cleaning 6.1. Clean the ProMinent° Fluoride Saturator annually or as necessary. Document Number 7740830-701: Rev. A 4 7. Spare Parts List 7.1. ProMinent® Fluoride Saturator 7740830 7.2. IA" PVC Vacuum Breaker w/Viton® Seal, NPT 7740813 7.3. 'A" Brass Dole Valve 2 GPM 7741214 7.4. IA" PVC Mechanical Float Valve with PP bulb 7740831 7.5. 'A" PVC Ball Valve w/ Viton® Seal, NPT & SOC 7000309 7.6. %2" PVC Union, Schedule 80, Viton® S X S 7740551 7.7. %2" x 3/8" PVC Foot Valve w/EPDM Seal 7924549 Document Number 7740830-701: Rev. A 5 METERING PUMP TO BEORD ERED 0EPARF.TELY LIFT UP LID id2' PVC FLOAT VALVE W/PP BULB 112 DRAIN FITTING !Nil !`'X6" NIPPLE I Q' P VC/VITO N VACUUM BREAKER.VALVE 112' B PASS DOL E VALVE 2.pPM 1 PVCWITON NPT BALL VALVE WATER INLET Figure 1 f 1'P'ESTANDOFF FOR PUMP MOUNTING !A!ELDE-0 TO TANK LID SOFT TUBING TO PUMP SUCTON 55 GALLO N SNYDER P ETAN K P/N 579045001 1J3• X 338' P V C FOOT VALVE 112' PEINF.ORr'ED FEMALE ADAPTER VQ1 PLUG DRAIN/OVERFLOW CONNECTION 1' DISTR.IBUTORHUB (1)3W OUTLETS 34' PVC SLOTTED LATERAL 3716 X 010 X9 ©Copyright 2000 by ProMinent Fluid Controls Inc., Pittsburgh, PA All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, published or disseminated by any means (print or electronic file), including storage or retrieval systems without the prior written permission from the publisher. Document Number 7740830-701: Rev. A 6 Document Number 7740830-701: Rev. A Ono 7770830-260 E SECTION A -A TY A PLAN VIEW un UP II Pr CANN ROI NO Voter %P NPNE .CPK ROAr 1.0.E VA PP ELLS P1051TCN VAONW OIEHCEP VALVE 14'iRN6 CCLA 9S PVC NMI NPT BNL PMtO WAtOA IN.a7 NET9IWO PUMP 20 BErAaOt#0 CEP,14 Amy ISOMETRIC VIEW IALOP UNONN PATH GALA AE1ENTaY MOS, OIR!®DDVAAM.Y ay 1. PESTMOW Pd PI/AP MWOWO PLOW TO LAW UP PCPP TAMPS 2O IM&CTICPO* AO PP . PS0Al0N0MDEP PP TAM FISTPM0P1 rcor Ya1E tt2RPKCRCED APPAL ADAPTER MOW] OMNAA ARR.CW 1SAlr6C1101 1.OG.44A1, tM NCAA (f Ya•CpttEfe N441.1' ED lATB1AL EtiGA.IAPY 0 t ALL PIPPPG AHD FITTINGS SIIAILBE VT SCH1. EO INC 0C CRET WELD WITH NTONSEALS UNLESS OTHERWISE IEOWR W BY COAIPONE$TS. 2 ALL OMENSION3 ARE Pa INCHES AND ARE SIRYNN FOR PERK ICE ONLY. 0911106 RENE6O L0 W.'TH A P4N04N7E ALS 0 040179 MN:MAMMY/ LAY4WT ALL APV Pu! P` aw aOAtlatl '"'"'"4" PROMINENT FLUID CONTROLS INC. (SATURATOR TANK) aw TYAm.r. IA1abaA.R011 200LB NaF FLUORIDE S.ATURA.TOR GENERAL AR RANGEi"1ENT CAn1A%Ae.LA. ProMinenr HRILYPNatPA1a►A KNWPI PORP lPcawnauowawwlan mtpS1 COM CAb1M Pvnac WAY NW. $* .Patt CL041n11S!PC A1PnaAKast PAApaA ti s"x 1SAtAnNPN, ,M1`:> ,155. WA oA A4F ~WA 0P TH MY CPA. H T.• dCOJP .1.12 O.; OAIOI:W qq W 7740850-2'00 ATI E 1•11 Ell NIS NMI INN NE Ell 1'11 Ell VIII 1=1 IIIII NIS MINI EMI OM =I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15065 PIPE SUPPORTS Material Resources, Inc. STANDON ADJUSTABLE PIPE SUPPORTS Standon Model 389 Flange Support US PATENT #5110073 ALL MODELS TESTED TO OVER 10,000 POUNDS - COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH A positively attached support designed to meet all or your flanged piping needs.. . • Bolts directly to the flange • Accepts standard IPS pipe - No threading required • Comes complete with anchorable base plate • Laser cut steel for guaranteed fit every time • Available in sizes 2" through 48" - Class 125 flanges • Galvanized finish for extra protection Excellent for Backflow and Meter Installations! The Standon Support is ideal for use on backflow devices and large water meters. It is perfect for retrofitting existing installations, replacing ill fitting concrete blocks etc. The Standon model S89 comes packaged in an easily inventoried box. All mounting instructions are included. STANDON MODEL S-89 ADJUSTABLE PIPE SUPPORT SCH.40 STEEL PIPE (SUPPLIED BY INSTALLER) 2ea-W STAINLESS STEEL CONC. ANCHORS OR STUD ANCHORS -Not included CONCREATE FLOOR fNSTALLATION 1 For product availability and ordering information on these and other products offered by Material Resources lnc. please call: 1)503) 533-5256 or FAX (503) 533-5501 or visit our website at www.standon.net MATERIAL RESOURCES, INC. PO Box 247 Forest Grove, Orion 07116 1 1 Material Resources, Inc. STANDON ADJUSTABLE PIPE SUPPORTS 1 Standon Model S80 flange Support Product Specifacation Sheet ALL MODELS TESTED TO OVER 10,000 POUNDS - COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH rATERIAL - Flange plate: ASTM A36 Collar / base cups: ASTM A53 D.O.M. tubing Thread stud: ASTM A36, rolled thread, grade ASTM A307 Base plate: ASTM A36 sheet steel 1 Optional Material - 100% 304L or 316L Stainless steel 'FABRICATION - All welds: 100% MIG welding, electrode E70XX Plates: 1 FINISH - All supports have corrosion resistant, electro -galvanized finish. Hot dip galvanizing available - specify at time of order. 1 Laser cut, programmed dimensions, radiused corners DIMENSIONS - (note: call manufacturer for 30" through 48" support information) FLANGE HOLE FLG THRD BASE EXTENSION MINIMUM SIZE RADIUS PLATE STUD PLATE PIPE REQ. DIST TO FLOOR 2" 2.375" .250" 1" x 6" 4" x 6" x .25" 2" Sch. 40 7" 2.5" 2.75" .250" 1" x 6" 4" x 6" x .25" 2" Sch. 40 7" 3" 3.00" .250" 1" x 6" 4" x 6" x .25" 2" Sch. 40 7" 4" 3.75" .250" 1" x 6" 4" x 6" x .25" 2" Sch. 40 7" 6" 4.75" .250" 1" x 6" 4" x 6" x .25" 2" Sch. 40 7" 8" 5.87" .250" 1" x 6" 4" x 6" x .25" 2" Sch. 40 7" 10" 7.125" .250" 1" x 6" 4" x 6" x .25" 2" Sch. 40 7" 12" 8.50" 250" 1" x 6" 4" x 6" x .25" 2" Sch. 40 7" 14" 9.375" .375" 1.5" x 6" 8" x 8" x .5" 3" Sch. 40 9.5" 16" 9.625" .375" 1.5" x 6" 8" x 8" x .5" 3" Sch. 40 9.5" 18" 11.375" .375" 2" x 6" 8" x 8" x .5" 4" Sch. 40 10" 20" 12.50" .375" 2" x 6" 8" x 8" x .5" 4" Sch. 40 10" 24" 14.75" .375" 2" x 6" 8" x 8" x .5" 4" Sch. 40 10" NOTE: 250 Drilling pattern supports available - To insure proper Support performance and stability; After final height adjustment is attained, apply tack welds to both IrSTALLATION pport cups and extension pipe. Use E70XX electrode for welds. The base plate should be anchored to the floor with removable anchor bolts. If re -adjustment is required at a later date, remove anchor bolts and rotate entire lower unit using �Ilar nut. Re -anchor base plate. For product availability and ordering information on these and other products offered by Material Resources Inc, please call: (503) 533-5256 or (877) 693-0727 FAX (503) 533-5501 www.standon.net MATERIAL RESOURCES, INC. I 2800 Taylor Way Bldg. 2 C PO Box 241 �( Forest Grove, Orem 81116 SECTION 15100 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES Your Connection to the Future SERIES 2100 Megaflange ® Restrained Flange Adapter U.S. Patent Nos. 4627774 and 5071175 Features and Application: • For use on Ductile iron Pipe, PVC, Steel, and HDPE (with insert). • Minimum 2 to 1 Safety Factor. • Fully restrained. • Time Saving and field adaptable. • Constructed of ASTM A536, 65-45-12 Ductile Iron. • UL listed on sizes 3" through 12". • FM approved on sizes 4" through 12" on C900 Class 150 and Class 200 PVC pipe. • Pipe can be cut to length in the field. • Joint deflection up to 5•. • Easy dismantling allows fast removal of valves, meters or fittings for replacement or repair. • For use on water or wastewater pipelines subject to hydrostatic pressure and tested in accordance with either AWWA C600 or ASTM D2774. • For use on Plain End Pipe. NOT for use on Plain End Fittings. Rev. F APPROVED Members of... A\, AWWA MEMBER AMERICAN FOUNDRY SOCIETY Copyright 2003 © EBAA IRON, Inc. itta 1 m $�Erra��or`h. k\Wictr � w��� ���w�wwwwwwwwwwe ww�: awe%vizewzgyzz„ Restraint Ring Gasket Ring Bolts "L" Assembly G No. Dia, Length MAX Deflection M Shipping Weight 0.7 5,0 4.0 9.2 14 i 'Fra.*,�'�!'Z=4�fI' t�a 0.8 5.0 4.3 12.1 32 1.3 2.0 5.0 20.6 89 18 IOM 24 36 1.3 1.5 5.1 24.7 134 2124 2130'; 2136 1.3 1.0 5.1 31,0 192 2.0 1 * The "P" dimension is measured with the torque•limitingnuts twisted off. N ote: Dimensions are in inches and are subject to change without notice, rest:ra i,n e imp saving and fi.e.ld,..adapta;b,le;: i,pe-ca.n be cut to length at the_jo.b;site Jo=int. deflection to 5°' Can .-be used on Ductile Iron, PVC, and Steel (Se, chart for details) ed,ges securely grip the pipe mu;c;h.:better,than Easy disassembly allows fast removal of valves, replacement or repair :store Rati Two, Series 2112 connecting DI pipe to a Gate Valve Someflan;ge adapters us.e,a star dead mechanical joint' gasket.fo'riboth' an`d th`effnge seal. and. are ;pro; er flanged-:cou pl i:ng:adapters separ e :e`tseal':fr seal:but re n of r stra ii n,e d `a septa ratestrai;ni.n;g:devfi-ces. ,devises. use,"stet scr.:.ews" to: try;: 0: achi ve`.restra?int:`'bu;t'Set screw restraints a -.re ineffective when compared to the -pull-out strength of the standard flanged joint. SEEKS 2100 ME.GAEIANCE R> TRAI D. FLANGE ADAPTER I.S TOTALLY DIFFERENT! Depicting possible gap and deflection capabilities. Series 2100 comes with all the necessary seals and bolts, for a complete and total install yu rst Test,. ested, :to. 7 s .4DR:14,.teste d _to .(451Long.Terto Pressure: .15-01i,;10 PVC si for 1000 hours,wi...r,e Cyclic Pressure Tes ,..DR 18 tested from 94 to 188,.p_si far ,over 1,000,0:00., cycles EL,TEnSTI; G fest8 '9 twice. rate � �.,�;�+otic Test ;sizes tes • °� 10," sizes tested:.iro 4rj 12" size-. tested to.•3' times Flexural' Test !Tested to wish standa b.en.din of NFPA 13-199:1 "Sta::n;daJdz Sete- rAdtlatim wedges SuPerfor Pull -out Resistance Fusion Bonded Casted per applicable requtremenk„ of ANSI/A ! WA 0213 Series210 Ffar;,7a Ada Wetly pfer D let PVCC,a and 'Steal The Series 2100 MEGAFLANGE restrained flange adapter is comprised of two rings. The first is the restraint ring which incorporates wedges around the circumference of the ring to grip the pipe firmly and securely. The wedge style of restraint offers enormous pullout strength when compared to set screw restraints. The resiliency of the wedge style restraint allows the Series 2100 to withstand severe moment Toads. The second ring is the gasket ring which separates the seals dedicated to each sealing surface. This ring allows pipe to be cut to lengths in the field at a tolerance of 0.6 inch or more. And, the gasket ring also enables the joint to deflect during assembly. DEFLECTION Traditional flanged joint connections require a tremendous amount of torque on the bolts to achieve a good seal. The pipe layout must be precisely planed to avoid misalignment errors due to deviations in appurtenances of pipe fabrication. The Series 2100 MEGAFLANGE is a speedy, on-site fabrication tool which is generous in its deflection limits, from 0.5° to 5° depending on pipe size. The deflection capabilities provided by the gasket ring allow offset of almost nineteen inches of an eighteen foot 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 pipe Ductile Iron Pipe Size Pressure SF • 3 L4' 350 5:1 6 b,,„..;;y4.. 350. 4:1 10 Ai 350. .1:1,, 14 P3i0,.‘:'''3; 'At :3.01 18 150 24f.4200 30 150 21 36 48 * Transition gasket required **A Full safety factor is when the restraint and the pipe have been tested to the same requirements of the pipe, (See Megaflange Testing Resull Pressure. SF Pressure SF Pressure SF Pressure SF • • • • • • •, • ' e 200 Full** 150, Full 100 Ful • • 200,.1.,r111,6454,0Va„ptrir9;1:°°,4*''P 00 ' Full 150 :Full _ '100 Jul u A150,350 31 200 Full _ 150 Full 100 ' Ful • • ..,5)45,0;v:;.„ fr.g'.'10.1ritiOrG'WF"rr • •235 FulL 165 Ful 125' rijj 250 Full 250. Fut , 4 0'Full.- '71 zt, ;%,1,ja, • - t ruu • ; , • 235 2,5:1 165 _ Ful lit Full < !'''4.?11" tfir; • , , • Note:Dimensions are in inches and a 1. Identify the pipe. The MEGAFLANGE 2100 Flange Adapter, sizes 4" through 12", is designed for use with ductile iron, PVC (C900 & IPS 0.D. (ASTM D2241)) pipe, and steel pipe. Check to see if the spacers under the screws are in place. If the pipe is ductile iron or C.I. 0.D. PVC (C900) DO NOT REMOVE THE SPACERS. If the pipe is steel or IPS 0.D. PVC, REMOVE THE SPACERS (Sizes 4 though 12). The 3" size is designed for use on ductile iron, IPS 0.D. PVC pipe. Sizes 30" and larger are designed for ductile iron pipe only. There are no spacers on the 3" and the 14" and larger sizes. 2. Cut the pipe to the required length. Clean the end of the pipe for a length of approximately one foot using a wire brush if needed, removing all excess paint and foreign material. Also clean the opposing flange to be connected to the 2100. Place the 2100 restraint ring on the clean pipe with the lip facing the plain end. 3. Lubricate and place the EBAA-Seal Gasket on the clean pipe following the restraint ring. (USE A TRANSITION GASKET IN PLACE OF THE EBAA-SEAL GASKET FOR STEEL PIPE AND IPS O.D. PVC PIPE.) 4. Place the 0 -ring into the groove of the 2100 gasket ring. (This step has already been completed in all sizes except 30" and larger.) Place the gasket ring on the pipe with the 0 - ring facing the pipe end and the gasket recess facing the EBAA-Seal (or transition) Gasket and restraint ring. 5. Bring the pipe and flanges together within the maximum assembled deflection and maximum allowable gap "L" to the flange face. Slide the gasket ring, gasket and restraint ring until contact is made with opposing flange. 6. Insert and tighten all flange bolts. Torque all flange bolts in an alternate manner to the value listed in the Table 1.1. Be sure to make any necessary joint deflection before tightening the actuating screws. Joint deflection should not exceed the maximum allowable deflection. Be sure that deflection of the joint does not cause the end of the pipe to be separated from the opposing flange more than the maximum allowable gap "L". 8. 7. Tighten the actuating screws in an alternating manner until all wedges touch the pipe. Continue tightening the nuts in an alternating pattern until all of the torque -limiting nuts have been twisted off. If removal is necessary, utilize the 5/8" hex head provided. For reinstallation, repeat steps 2 through 7, torquing the actuating screws to 70 ft -lbs or until the hex heads bottom out on the spacers or the gland. Table 1.1 Nominal Pi'eSize 3 FlangeBoltTorques Bolt Torque ft- lbs 45.60 6 24 90.110 EBAA IRON Sales, Inc. P.O. Box 857, Eastland, TX 76448 Tel: (254) 629.1731 Fax: (254) 629.8931 (800) 433.1716 within US and Canada ebaa@eastland.net www.ebaa.com U;10.12 Rev. 8-04 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Mueller Co. 2"-12" MUELLER° A-2360 RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVE - FL. x FL. O Catalog number – A-2360-6 flanged ends O Sizes – 2", 2-1/2", 3", 4", 6", 8", 10", 12" O Meets or exceeds all applicable requirements of ANSUAW WA C509 Standard and is certified to ANSI/NSF 61* ❑ Flanged end dimensions and drilling comply with ANSI B16.1, class 125 ❑ Iron body with nominal 10 mils MUELLER® Pro-GardTMFusion O Epoxy Coated interior and exterior surfaces O Epoxy coating meets or exceeds all applicable requirements of ANSUAWWA C550 Standard and is certified to ANSI/NSF 61 O Iron wedge, symmetrical & fully encapsulated with molded rubber; no exposed iron O Non -rising stem (NRS) O Triple 0 -ring seal stuffing box (2 upper & 1 lower 0 -rings) ❑ Handwheel (2" square wrench nut optional)—open Left or open right O 2"-12" sizes -250 psig (1723 kPa) maximum working pressure, 500 psig (3447 kPa) static test pressure ❑ UL Listed, FM Approved: 200 psig (1379 kPa) – 2-1/2"-12" sizes * Approved for backflow prevention devices by USC (for 2-1/2" - 10" sizes) ) Options 1.) A-2360-6 See pages 10.34 and 10.35 for more information on Resilient Wedge Gate Valve options O Position indicators ❑ Stainless steel fasteners: Type 304, Type 316 ❑ PN 10/16 Drilling ❑ 2" square wrench nut Resilient wedge gate valve parts Catalog Part 'No. Description Material Material standard G-16 Bonnet Bolts & Nuts Carbon Steel ASTM A307 Grade B, Zinc Plated G-41 Stuffing Box Bolts & Nuts Carbon Steel ASTM A307 Grade B, Zinc Plated G-49 Stem 0 -rings (3) Rubber ASTM D2000 G-200 Wrench Nut Cap Screw Carbon Steel ASTM A307 Grade B, Zinc Plated G-201 Stuffing Box Seal Rubber ASTM D2000 G-202 Wrench Nut Cast Iron ASTM A126 CL.B G-203 Stem Bronze ASTM B138 0-204 Hand Wheel (not shown) Cast Iron ASTM A126 CL.B i,G-205 Stem Nut Bronze ASTM B62 G-206 Guide Cap Bearings Celcon G-207 Stuffing Box Cast iron ASTM A126 CL.B G-208 Anti -friction Washers (2) Celcon G-209 Wedge,Cast Ruber Encapsulated Iron* ASTM A126 CL.B G-210** Bonnet Cast Iron ASTM A126 CL.B G-211'* Bonnet 0 -ring Nitrite ASTM D2000 G-212** Body Cast Iron ASTM A126 CL.B * Fully encapsulated in molded rubber with no iron exposed **Previous to 1999 these parts on 4"-12" valves were designed with a gasket instead of an 0 -ring and with additional bolts (2"-3" sizes retain gasket design affecting these parts). Confirm the type of seal when ordering a replacement gasket or 0 -ring. ISEE PAGE 1039 FOR ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS i G-200 G-204 G-207 G-41 6.201 0.208 G-203 G-210" 0.16 G-211" G-205 G.212" G-209 0.206 2"-12" MUELLER®A-2360 RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVE - FL. x FL. r� E Mueller Co. C R O Dimensions A FF uu 1 Rev. 8-04 Dimension* Nominal size 2" 2-1/2" 3 4" 6" 8" 10" 12" A 9.88 12.38 12.38 14.19 18.00 21.50 25.50 28.62 E 6.00 6.00 8.00 11.00 13.00 14.00 16.00 16.00 R 6.00 7.00 7.50 9.00 11.00 13.50 16.00 19.00 FF 7.00 7.50 8.00 9.00 10.50 11.50 13.00 14.00 Q (bore) 2.30 2.80 3.30 4.30 6.30 8.30 10.30 12.30 UU (bolt circle diameter) 4.75 5.50 6.00 7.50 9.50 11.75 14.25 17.00 B (number and size of holes) 4-3/4" 4--3/4" 4-3/4" 8-3/4" 8-7/8" 8-7/8" 12-1" 12-1" Turns to open 8 11 11 14 20.5 26.5 33 38.5 Weight* 37 71 73 96 154 250 400 500 *All dimensions are in inches. A I weights are in pounds and are approximate. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 • Styles and sizes The NueIle? 2366 Seties'IZeglient Wedge 2-12 isavailable as a rion-nsing stem (NRS) ie in 2"-12"' Saes ("A" catalog number prefix), apd• as an OS&Y valve in 2-1/2'!-16" sizes ("R" prefix°). It is also available in tapping ('T"prefix) and cut -in ("C" prefix) styles. 'NOTE; All valves with meChanicaljoint ends. •ate• available less .accessories. A IIIJFM post indicator:stylevalve ("P" prefix) in 47-16" sizes and selected types of end connetions DIMENSIONS FOR MUELLER® RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVE INCHES (Refer to cataloO, for dimensions of valves , • .; Dimensions* A NRS 0 Peo Valve size - Nominal sizes, 2" 2-1/2" 3" 4" 6" 10" 12" ' • • 9.88 12.38 19.50 12.38 19.25 14.19 23.68 18.00 31.38 21.50 38.50 25.50 47.00 26:62' 53.50 E Diameter of. handwheel 6.00 6.00 8.00 11.00 13.00 14.0o 16.00 F Pepth Of socket 11 Radial- end-to-end 3.70 3.70 •.3.70 439 : 10.25 10.75 11.75, :13.43 15.91 '18.40 3.50 3_69 4.12 • 4.46 5.46 .6.79 1c s,k : L Depth ef sec'ket - 0,06 io.ob )475•;:: 88 2.50 2.50 250' 2,50. 2.50 2.50 • is.available (also as a tapping Valve-,--s;,-"1""piefix) • Q..Flaoged , QuOidedierneter ke.:silient wedge valveS[with flangeX flaPge,W)t ?:1 Thii'aded erid",td-Sei•id;' • , „ 7.00 .6.00 9:00 10.50: 13.50 : 13.0 ;. lap flange, and MJ x MJ ends in sizes 10748" (14"-18"- also 6.00 • 7.00 9.00 •13 -mob 19.00 . 5.88 5.99 6.88 with Op -on x slip-on ancIslip-on x flange) are offered with , any Of the f6atpre4 deseribed in thf ' S r9Chrett;• -- • ;,• • ' •, • • • • • •` ' '"1:"•`' " '••, :EE•Vf/SF, • 15-50 19,00 24.50 29.50 35.75 0,5O , .10;0 1862' , utmav details. • 1;:-• -•'i• TIPPthcicat;v,, • 7 - ..,!•• • .562438. -• •5.62 ' 7.00 :1(1.60 12.00' 116:09 , • • 'EFAG.Z 'AC--,-enctito-e4'; 4 • 15.12 ;f,e•90,'", 14,0 0#: 1'9!,i'5': • • -46 . 7." '••!• '2•5 '3.75,•;• Turnsto •••,,`; :Pn4.•1••0'§VP••!'", ' • „, , •••i 14-.44%, 3/ „73 10,91 14 14,.'. 05 :• 26.5 • 14.69, :;;;•:.271:fi • •••‘;i275•••e.-.•••!- 15:71.e '3323" • 46:3 3 .5 •; 40 4 120j: ••,•,1:6V•i:•••i 4115et- ,. SIip3Sjn Rad 3, la '51 '6744 , 456./•••-• • , 3l5 • 3 AtF4 • • e';.• •,ii•t, 9V4 •••••,-, Par ) •294,i,• 3801 45-ACt- 60.0 •- ••• ,•••••• ;41 :ifiigits.are for•NIS va11es rn pepile,p11, erpetTrpxynete. • '''"Wrii!6fiiiiclitaeac.-dttie-Orie Slikrij'I-t • t•--1 44 ••••:,-.-t„,L-: • • , = Ilactiat x Radial k A-2360137. , ' • ' • • S....;` • - - ••• , 7 kr:ILY6q rip Atiud rip A-2361 :77** „...f. 13 1` ,, „,. •, N.--S-----:t11- t ," ;;• % ,, eOhanical Joint ,x • • ID i§0 MOckianicalJoint-x ao"hanical joicit:i . D c5(J'yeehanical,Joint , ' .A,2360-20“ • ,. 2360-25 (wf trarilitii:!n Fe4s) :,•..,:, i' Specialty valva sty)el not illustral,e'ii. • '* Socket depthS }lava been increased on the i .,4. ,•,„ slip-on style to enhance thepipejoiet:- ,e„ Also available Without athesSories or gasket. v 1Bonding screws optional. All sizes "R" prefix valves are 2.360 Series. *Valves with•AgnaGrip connections are thin•mall ductile iron per A1,161//4WWACS15. C=236054 (15cEick C-2360-55 tippOditt • Form 117•3i4:Rev.5/0if2cThrt: ' Ttireglkli Threaded ••; ' -on x Flart0e A-2360-8 • - ••• „., ' " ••• - ' Mairi Office --,- Decatur, 1L, Water bi.ViSion: 1-$00,4231323 4-. .. wcyw.muglIercmpapy.coli-.1 v :e-niaiLmoMinfo@r.riudliercompaii3iiConl- .. ,,.• . Eanada,- Mueller Canada Inc Milton Otitati6 i1Y••905;78',054-1 • - All pritdnOs thusree installed- tied niaininined io accordance with applicable thsthictidn,t ned/or erindards. cppyright,I 99;ltd della- Co. Mueller Co. • AquaGrip xWchanioal Joint. A42361-78"" AquaGr'p-xF1an§p A-230 -76' • Printed itill.S.A. MUELLER° 2300 SERIES RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 1. GENERAL CLASSIFICATION 1.1 MUELLER Resilient Wedge Gate Valves comply with either ANSI/AWWA C509 or C515. 1 2 MUELLER Resilient Wedge Gate Valves through 16" are listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FM) 1 3 MUELLER Resilient Wedge Gate Valves are tested and certified to ANSI/NSF Standard 61. 1.4 MUELLER Resilient Wedge Gate Valves are suitable for ordinary non -shock cold water service. 1 5 MUELLER Resilient Wedge Gate Valves are iron body, fully encapsulated resilient wedge type. 1.6 MUELLER Resilient Wedge Gate Valves are made in the U.S.A. at an ISO9001. 2000 Certified factory. 2. SIZE RANGE, WORKING PRESSURE AND WORKING TEMPERATURE 2 1 2" thru 48" AWWA valves. 2.1 1 250 psi maximum working pressure 2 1 2 1 25F maximum working temperature 2 1 3 33F minimum working temperature 2 2 2-1/2" thru 16" UL/FM valves. 2.2 1 200 psi maximum working pressure (14" and 16" sizes are 250 psi MWP) 2 2 2 125F maximum working temperature 2.2.3 33F minimum working temperature 3. TYPE OF VALVE 3.1 MUELLER Resilient Wedge Gate Valves are either non -rising stem (NRS) (2" thru 48") or rising stem (OS&Y) (2-1/2" thru 16") type. 3 2 MUELLER NRS Resilient Wedge Gate Valves are offered with 0 -ring stem seals. 3 3 MUELLER Resilient Wedge Gate Valves are offered to either open left or open right. 3 4 MUELLER Resilient Wedge Gate Valves with flanged ends are furnished with a hand wheel (A 2" square wrench nut is optional.) Valves with other type ends are furnished with a 2" square wrench nut complying with AWWA C509/C515. 3.5 MUELLER Resilient Wedge Gate Valves of the non -rising stem type are offered with the following end connections: 3.5.1 AguaGrip"' Ends, with integral restraint and compression connection, for plain end of Ductile Iron, C900 PVC, or DIPS PE (DR9 through DRI 7) pipe 3 5 2 Flanged Ends, with flange dimensions and drilling complying to ANSI B16.1 Class 125 (ISO PN 10/PN 16 drilling optional) 3 5.3 Standard Mechanical Joint Ends for cast iron pipe, with end dimensions complying with ANSI/AWWA CI 1 I /A21 11 3 5 4 Slip -On Joint Ends* complete with Mueller Slip -On Gasket, complying with ANSI/AWWA C 1 1 I /A21 11 Fit Ductile Iron pipe manufactured to ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.5 I ; including the plain end of all makes of Cast Iron or Ductile Iron of the slip connection type Also fits classes 150 and 200 Ductile Iron O.D. PVC plastic pipe** 3 5 5 Radial Compression Joint Ends, for I.P. size PVC pipe. 3 5.6 Threaded Ends, with end dimensions complying to ANSI B2 1. 3 5 7 D-150 Mechanical Joint ends with two specially designed gaskets to fit either of two diameters of Cast Iron or Ductile Iron Pipe: duck -tipped rubber gasket for Class 150 pipe or plain rubber gasket for Class D pit cast pipe *Design and dimensions of the joint are manufactured under license of U.S Pipe and Foundry Company * *When using DI 0 D PVC pipe, the gaskets supplied by Mueller must be used with this valve connection Mueller Co. MAIN OFFICE — Decatur, IL 1-800-423-1323 CANADA — Mueller Canada Inc , Milton Ontario (905) 878-0541 www.muellercompany.com (Continued) Printed in U.S.A. Form 11694 Rev. 9/05-2M-1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11) MUELLER® 2300 SERIES RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1-) 1 3 6 MUELLER Resilient Wedge Gate Valves of the rising stem (OS&Y) style have Flanged Ends with flange dimensions and drilling complying with ANSI B16.1 Class 125 (ISO PN I 0/PN 16 drilling optional). 3.7 MUELLER Resilient Wedge Tapping valves have an inlet flange complying with ANSI BI6 1 Class 125 (2" thru 12" also MSS SP -60), and are offered with a Standard Mechanical Joint outlet end with dimensions complying with ANSI/AWWA CI 1 1 /A2.1 1 3.8 MUELLER Resilient Wedge Cut -In valves have D -I 50 Mechanical Joint ends with two specially designed gaskets to fit either of two diameters of Cast Iron or Ductile Iron Pipe. duck -tipped rubber gasket for Class 150 pipe, or plain rubber gasket for Class D pit cast pipe. 4. MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS 4.1 Cap screw 4.1 1 2" thru 12" sizes - Stainless Steel Type 304 4.1 2 14" thru 48" sizes - Steel, SAE J429 Grade 2 Zinc Plated. 4 2 Wrench nut - Cast Iron, ASTM A-126, Class B. 4.3 Handwheel - Cast Iron, ASTM A-126, Class B. 4.4 Stuffing box 4.4 1 2" thru 12" sizes - Cast Iron, ASTM A -I 26, Class B. 4.4.2 14" thru 48" sizes - Ductile Iron, ASTM A-536, Grade 64-45-12. 4.5 Stem 0 -rings - Nitrile, ASTM D2000, 3CH 720. 4.6 Anti -friction washers - Acetal Copolymer. 4.7 Stem 4 7 1 2" thru 16" sizes - Manganese Bronze, CDA Alloy C67600. 4 7.2 18" thru 48" sizes - Bronze, ASTM 13-584, Alloy C86200 or C86400 or C86500. 4.8 Bonnet 4 8.1 2" thru 12" sizes - Cast Iron, ASTM A-126, Class B. 4 8.2 14" thru 48" sizes - Ductile Iron, ASTM A-536, Grade 64-45-12. 4 9 Bonnet seal 4.9 1 2" thru 3" sizes - Flat gasket, Neoprene, ASTM D2000. 4.9 2 4" thru 48" sizes - O-ring, Nitrile, ASTM D2000 4.10 Stuffing box bolts & nuts 4 10.1 2" thru 12" sizes - Stainless Steel Type 304. 4 10 2 14" thru 48" sizes - Steel - Bolts: SAE J429, Grade 2, Nuts. ASTM A-536 Grade B - Plated to ASTM F1941 Class Fe/Zn 12c. 4.11 Bonnet bolts & nuts 4.1 1 1 2" thru 12" sizes - Stainless Steel Type 304 4 1 12 14" thru 48" sizes - Steel - Bolts. SAE J429 Grade 2; Nuts: ASTM A-536 Grade B - Plated to ASTM F 194 I Class Fe/Zn 12c. 4.12 Disc nut - Bronze, ASTM B62 CDA 83600. 4.13 Guide cap bearings - Acetal Copolymer. 4.14 Disc 4 14.1 2" thru 12" sizes - Cast Iron, ASTM A-126, Class B 4 14.2 14" thru 48" sizes - Ductile Iron, ASTM A-536, Grade 64-45-12 4.15 Disc encapsulated 4.15.1 2" thru 36" sizes - SBR ASTM D2000 4.15 2 42" and 48" sizes - EPDM, optional SBR ASTM D2000 4.16 Body 4 16.1 2" thru 12" sizes - Cast Iron, ASTM A 126, Class B. 4 16 2 14" thru 48" sizes - Ductile Iron, ASTM A-526, Grade 64-45-12 4.17 Inside and outside of valve fully coated with MUELLER® PRO-GARD'" Epoxy Coating - coating complies with ANSI/AWWA C550 and is certified to ANSI/NSF Standard 61. Mueller Co. MAIN OFFICE - Decatur, IL 1-800-423-1323 CANADA - Mueller Canada Inc., Milton Ontario (905) 878-0541 www.muellercompany.com (Continued) MUELLER® 2300 SERIES RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 5. DESIGN FEATURES 5.1 Fully unobstructed, oversized (except 16" which is same size) flow way. The sealing mechanism is withdrawn from the flow way in a full open position. No pockets in bottom of flow way to trap sediment or debris. The flow way will permit passage of full-sized shell cutters (except 16" which requires undersized cutter). 5 2 Bronze Disc Nut on non -rising stem valves. 5.3 Anti -Friction Washers on non -rising stem valves —Are located above and below the thrust collar portion of the stem to reduce friction and provide more effective conversion of operating torques into seating loads. 5.4 Stem for non -rising stem valves, with 0 -ring Seals — One 0 -ring is located below the thrust collar of the stem and two are located above the thrust collar, the upper most serving as a dirt seal. The 0 -rings and thrust collar are factory lubricated The two primary 0 -rings seal the thrust collar area from outside contaminants and water, and retain an ample amount of lubricant on the thrust collar and anti -friction washers to reduce operating torque and wear. 5.5 Stem — The threads on the bronze stem are Acme form threads for strength and efficiency. The stem thrust collar is made integral with the stem — and is formed by a heat upset operation for valves through 18" in size; cast in place for 20" and larger valves. 5 6 Upper Stem 0 -ring Replacement — The two 0 -rings above the thrust collar of all MUELLER Resilient Wedge Gate Valves can be replaced with the valve in the fully open position, under pressure, with no leakage. 5 7 Corrosion Resistant —All inside and outside cast iron surfaces are coated with MUELLER® PRO-GARD" Epoxy Coating, 10 mils nominal. MUELLER® PRO-GARD" Epoxy Coating is non-toxic and imparts no taste to water. The coating complies with ANSI/AWWA C550 and is certified to ANSI/NSF Standard 61 G. OPTIONAL FEATURES 6 1 MUELLER 2300 Series Resilient Wedge Gate Valves can be furnished with the following optional designs or features. 6 1 1 Gearing — Required for valves 30" and larger. Valves 4" and larger can be furnished with bevel gearing; valves 14" and larger can be furnished with spur gearing Bevel geared valves are for horizontal installations; spur geared for vertical. Geared valves provide an additional bearing to support the extreme end of the stem. Bevel and spur geared valves are furnished with a grease case Any valve leakage past the stuffing box does not enter the grease case 6 1 2 Bypass valve — Valves 18" or larger The bypass valves are non -rising stem Mueller® Series 2360 Resilient Wedge Valves. The bypass size and location comply with Section 24 of AWWA C500. 6.1 3 Position indicator -Available for NRS valves 4" and larger 6.1.4 Bolts and nuts — Stainless Steel, Type 316 6 1 5 Stem — Silicon bronze - Valves 16" and smaller ASTM B98 C66100; 18" and larger ASTM 8763 C99400 or C99500. 6.1.6 Disc encapsulation — 42" and 48" sizes - SBR D2000 7. TEST PRESSURE 7 1 The pressure test on each MUELLER Resilient Wedge Gate Valve meets the requirements of AWWA Standard C509 for Resilient Seated Valves. 7.1.1 Each MUELLER Resilient Wedge Gate Valve is subjected to two pressure tests. The seat test is at the working pressure of the valve and the shell test at two times the working pressure 7.1 2 Pressure tests at the working pressure shall show NO leakage past the seat from either side of the wedge or at the flange joints. Pressure tests at twice the working pressure shall show NO leakage through the metal or flange joints. 7 1.3 Test pressures are as follows: 2" thru,48" — 250 psi - Seat Test, 500 psi - Shell Test. Mueller Co. MAIN OFFICE — Decatur, IL 1-800-423-1323 CANADA — Mueller Canada Inc., Milton Ontario (905) 878-0541 www muellercompany com 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ' ... 'r.'-'7,-1,:i.t.,-,--...,,. --,.•."-' 4.1.•,.,,,,, - - - :1 • ' - '---Z,:,........,„...., ._ . l'''..,../7. v.1.7;.:,^,---• - ` ' iP.7-. .1;;;,...., ' '7" ,, , *^•se5:."_:::)-'‘'.;-:.-7-'.4it, ' . '"' . '; ;'' 2g,: '- -..•• ---- -,..--.....`, T.. : ---''''':: ' ' '; - .. '...' "..'1A..;::.//: s_ - ---• ;'-.---'.r,: ,..,'4, - ; ti -i," -: . . s' - :' -,-- 2008 Ed:ItIon •RIES rk? SWitrt COS.V. rktVii. tti.ss /Fr 111111tbs• ItoW stoat Ho. v&Lvi. & PRIMER CORP. SCVIRUPNBt.LLArt. , OUGH40 'INCHES • -; • 7 7'4 , 144 _ 420 WRIGHT BLVDIt .• StHAUM11,,,R,c, IL 60193-4599 ' -”,',847.524.9000 • 524.90W • 800.323.6969 website: www.apcovaIves.com • e-mail: • factory@apcovalves.com 2 ... WHY MORE ENGINEERS ARE Hydraulics engineers are concerned in increasing numbers with the problem of water hammer. At best it is a noise nui- sance while in its most virulent form it can tear the finest pumping system apart. What Causes Water Hammer: The conditions responsible for this phenomenon are well known; they occur when a quantity of energy is suddenly released in a confined space. Energy is a function of mass times velocity and relating this to practical hydraulics engineering means that water hammer occurs when a body of water in motion in a pipe is suddenly stopped. One of the circumstances under which this phenomenon most commonly occurs is when a pump is shut down and the forward flow of water reverses under the influence of gravity and commence to run the opposite way until stopped by a check valve. Recognizing this, it becomes obvious that one secret to preventing water hammer due to flow reversal in a system is to provide a check valve which will close before this reversal of flow can take place. APCO Silent Check Valves perform excellently in these applications. The fallowing briefly outlines the characteristics of various types of check valves: Swing Checks The common Swing Check Valve is so designed that it often sees the reversal of flow before closing. This means that the body of water is already in motion and has to be stopped abruptly as the Swing Check Valve closes. Silent Check valves It was to meet this steadily growing problem that the Silent Check Valve evolved. In designing this valve all other charac- teristics were subordinated to the principal need that it must positively close before a reversal of flow takes place, silently. The Silent Check Valve was designed to open at approxi- mately 1/4 to 1/2 psi, which means that when a pump is shut down, a Silent Check Valve will completely close while there is still positive head on the inlet side of approximately 1/2 psi. In this simple manner reverse flow, which is a major cause of water hammer, never gets a chance to start (in contrast to the swing check). Experienced engineers know that it is only possible to achieve perfection in one characteristic in a design at the expense or compromise with other characteristics. We feel that we would be remiss if we did not draw the engineer's attention to the compromise that has been made in perfecting the silent virtues of the Silent Check Valve and elaborate to some extent on the significance of this compromise. This compromise is higher head loss than Swing Check type valves. The attached graph shows the relative head losses for three popular types of check valves. k can be clearly seen that Silent Check Valves do not suffer badly in comparison, especially when it is recognized the slightly higher head loss in the Silent Check Valves means a little more electrical power is used during pumping operation. When comparison is made with prevailing rates for commercial power, this head loss may become an academic rather than a practical concern. These facts show why more engineers are specifying APCO Silent Check Valves for their customer's protection. Typical Silent Check Valve Installation On Vertical Turbine Pumps LOS ANGELES COUNTY SANITARY DISTRICT LOS COYOTES PLANT 2-16" 125# CLASS SILENT CHECK VALVES 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SPEC/ENING SILENT CHECK VALVES. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1) 1 1 1 1 1 1 N 1 Install SILENT CHECK VALVES on Discharge Side of the Pump! STOPS REVERSE FLOW / STOPS WATER HAMMER before it Starts! Typical Silent Check Valve installation note: APCO Silent Check Valves can be installed in any position. Water Hammer can be both destructive and annoying. It is caused when a pump is shut down and the forward flow of water is allowed to reverse and is suddenly stopped by the check valve. By positioning a Silent Check Valve on the discharge side of the pump, the reverse flow (which is one cause of Water Hammer) never has a chance to start. This is because APCO Silent Check Valves are designed to open at approximately 1/4 to 1/2 psi and to completely close before the flow can reverse itself. Short face-to-face dimensions of APCO Silent Check Valves also contribute to compactness in equipment room piping. CHECK VALVES COMPARISON HEAD LOSS 1111101110" CURVES INCREASE N H 0 0 4 W 0 VELOCITY INCREASE ANSI PRESSURE -TEMPERATURE RATINGS TEMP. °F 0to150 -20 to 100 MAXIMUM NON -SHOCK SERVICE PRESSURE, P.S.I. CLASS 125 # 1"-12" 14"-24" 30" -UP CLASS 250 # 1"-12" 30" UP PRESSURE CLASS 150 300 PRESSURE CLASS 150 300 rK PRESSURE CLASS 150 300 400 600 of PRESSURE CLASS 150 300 400 600 -20 to 150 200 250 200 150 150 500 175 125 85 415 300 300 MI11 IMO KM Eli 011111111111111 1!:,572 IIIIN !liais,c. URI MN WS [27.47.5.:rfialiY2NVI.671 ® =MI MI MIMI 1 113 vitci.... a .4_i J.t s s ,2,.IT_. ^r,r.. —.. i i lL..Za.1 _II ;l .,;Oa!' ft 6` 7L. 1Fil0y -E,.t. J�`' 9 500 620 707 670 260 200 195 665 227 590 785 1340 1180 SEAT TEST PSI SHELL TEST PSI 200 150 150 500 300 WV", F E S -11 -"If SERIES 300 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION Cast Iron Body Bronze Trim Stainless Steel Spring OPTIONAL CONSTRUCTION Stainless Steel Ductile Iron or Cast Steel Body with Bronze or Stainless Steel Trim Resilient Seating (Buna-N) SEE FIGURE 1. (OPTIONAL) NOTE: ID OF MATING FLANGE (SEAT SIDE ONLY) SHOULD NEVER BE GREATER THAN SEAT RING OD. 4 * * * *APPROVED Model No. Valve Size .fixe' fi u iii Face to Face No. o Bolts 125# 250# Boh Circle 125# 250# Bolt Size 125# 250# mrurnstranwinnummingramairm s o mss' x i ' r�._,',zatvgIM=Mr1111111170111111M11FIrrill= =MI B" 6 A" 12 ® 5 x11/." OPERATING PRESSURE TO 1500 LB. CLASS IS AVAILABLE PLEASE CONTACT FACTORY FOR HIGHER PRESSURE CLASSES. 250 LB. CLASS 300 LB. CLASS 125 LB. CLASS BOLT CIRCLE 150 LB. CLASS BOLT CIRCLE yA `� ESILIENT SEAT DETAIL FIGURE 1 optional for both wafer or globe styles PRESSURE JOINT IS EFFECTED AFTER INSTALLATION APPLIES TO BOTH WAFER AND GLOBE STYLES. SCREW RETAINS SEAT DURING HANDLING AND SHIPPING. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E STYES SERIES 6 0 0 area approximately 10% greater than Pipe Size Full flow * RESILIENT SEAT DETAIL STANDARD CONSTRUCTION Cast Iron Body Bronze Trim Stainless Steel Spring OPTIONAL CONSTRUCTION Stainless Steel Ductile Iron or Cast Steel Body with Bronze or Stainless Steel Trim Resilient Seating (Buna-N) COMPRESSION MOLDED (NOT GLUED 011 CHEMICALLY BONDED) ONTO THE SEAT ALLOWING METAL TO METAL CONTACT WITH DROP TIGHT RESILIENT SHUT-OFF. NOTE: If special mating flanges are used, ID of mating flange (seat side only) should never be greater than seat ring OD. i 0.4 Model No. Valve Size Flange Diam. Face to Face Bolt Ode Diam. Model No. Valve Size Flange Diam. Face to Face Bolt Circle Diam. Bolts Size No. of Bolts • Max Mating Range ID 603 3" 71/2" 6" 6" 1/2" 4 3'1 6047E EPA • 9', : =' '= 7/" 7,1,. ,%" ; s g : 4%s, 605 5" 10" 81' 81/2 Y." 8 51 „M° d r° jr. .... 9" ` 91/2" ' Y.." i. i8 X64':: 608 8" 131/2" 1014" 11'/." '/." 8 8F 'fl6;10.I g6w ' 16...: > =12»..143." •' . A.. ,rG r 12 .1,03/4't 612 612 12" 19" 14%" 17" 1/2" 12 12'4 $'14.a 16" 251" ;:151/2" 181/2" 1 :UM 20 a1:4'/', 616 16" 23W' 171/2" 21'/." 1" 16 161/2 Maa e „§:•05" 301/2" r.1.8/.": :22'/";, ,1,1', . `:'1;6 ;:_.1:8..% 620 20" 271/2" 2051" 25" 1 W' 20 2074 5 6246 `', =43':. ; 32" .:< 24" 29W 1'/+W , MME ,‘2'41/2 630 30" 381/2" 29'/." 36" 1'/." 28 291/2 NM '36," 46"':';"45" 50" 42%" EmpiEsE.`"36'= 36 42 642 42" 53" 50' 49/" 11/2" 36 42 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION Cast Iron Body Bronze Trim Stainless Steel Spring OPTIONAL CONSTRUCTION Stainless Steel Ductile Iron or Cast Steel Body with Bronze or Stainless Steel Trim Resilient Seating (Buna-N) COMPRESSION MOLDED (NOT GLUED 011 CHEMICALLY BONDED) ONTO THE SEAT ALLOWING METAL TO METAL CONTACT WITH DROP TIGHT RESILIENT SHUT-OFF. NOTE: If special mating flanges are used, ID of mating flange (seat side only) should never be greater than seat ring OD. i ✓yid ° r C F : Model No. Valve Size Flange Diam. Face to Face Bolt Ode Diam. Bolts Size No. of Bolts • Max Mating Range no 6533("���1�C� 8t'/." 6" 67" %" 8 3% MatiEd} [ (� ail [ yj ME EPA 655 5" 11" 81/2" 9'/." 3/." 8 51/2 8" �15p�" 1ai0"" y/ ,162 y,1c�3"-v�r�� + '/6" c658 (5,12 +�8'14 662 12" 201/2' 141/2" 171/2" 11" 16 12'% 6614 2:''5M,. o "if . 14% 666 16" 251" 1746" 221/2" 11/2" 20 161/2 670 20" 301/2" 2074" 27" 1'/." 24 2046 680 30" 43" 291/2" 391/2" 1'/." 28 291/2 zfi8% 36". r ' `4:: ' = 46"; =' x.36' 692 42" 57" 50" 521/2" 21/2" 36 42 OPERATING PRESSURE TO 1500 LB. CLASS IS AVAILABLE. PLEASE CONTACT FACTORY FOR HIGHER PRESSURE CLASSES 6 What makes the APCO Silent Performance Guarantee The graph below shows the comparative head loss through different manufacturers' Silent Check Valves. The figures used to construct this graph were obtained from certified independent laboratory tests for the APCO valves and com- pared against other available published data. The lower losses of APCO Silent Check Valve as indicated by this graph frequently gives rise to the question "How does APCO manage to keep its losses below those of the other valves examined?" Superior performance is never accidental and this question is best answered by the following details. First, every APCO valve is designed with the initial premise that the minimum cross-sectional area shall exceed that of the pipe it serves. In every APCO valve the full cross-sectional area of the most critical points, is greater than the cross- sectional area of the pipe. This is clearly illustrated on the valve drawing of a 5" APCO Silent Check Valve on the adja- cent page. Secondly, APCO has designed many types of valves for hydraulic service for over sixty years and our engineers are espe- cially conscious of the importance of good hydraulic flow lines. Again, an examination of the drawing on the next page will show how very carefully the contours have been worked out to give the best possible hydraulic flow results. Even small details such as streamlining the spokes have been given due consideration. This devotion to design detail makes it readily obvious why the APCO Silent Check Valve can reasonably be expected to have the most favorable flow characteristics of any Silent Check Valve. PRESSURE LOSS CURVE COMPARISON BETWEEN APCO SILENT CHECK VALVES AND OTHER SIMILAR MAKES (ACTUAL TESTS SHOWN FOR A PARTICULAR SIZE) Construction The superior performance characteristics of the APCO Silent Check Valve are matched by its equally superior quality of construction as the following design details will show. N rn w The seat is held by stainless steel screws so that it can be OJ r— taken apart after years of service as easily as the day it was w w made. cc p cnF rn Electrolytic action is eliminated by having the shaft of the plug N w ride in bushings made of the same material as the shaft itself. z a A simple loose guide bushing for the shaft is provided made of the same material as the shaft. This bushing is held in place by the spring, so that in the event it is considered necessary to take the valve apart in the field, the bushings can be easily removed by hand. 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 4 3 m _ rn zcn 2 70 33 "'rn r- 1 Cn 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VELOCITY IN PIPE (F.P.S.) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ti1 Check Valve so outstanding? *APPROVED APCO Silent Check Valves have been thoroughly tested by Factory Mutual Research Corp. As a result, the 300 Series and 600 Series Valves can be used on hazardous fire fighting equipment and fire protection systems with assurance of performance. For such applications, insist on the Factory Mutual Guarantee Label of Approval on your Silent Check Valve. Available on sizes as indicated. Materials of Construction All the materials used in APCO valves are clearly referred to by their appropriate ASTM numbers. APCO offers Ductile Iron as an altemate to the conventional cast iron. A brief technical explanation of the qualities is given below. The Advantages of Ductile Iron Ductile Iron, contrary to its name, is not really a cast iron at all but an alloy developed by the International Nickel Company. Cast Iron has graphite present in lenticular flakes which causes it to be brittle and have a relatively low tensile strength. The graphite in Ductile Iron is present in spheroidal shape making it ductile with a much higher tensile strength. Various types of Ductile Iron are available and we use the one especially recommended for valves. This is Type 65-45-12 Ductile Iron ASTM A536 strength of 65 to 80,000 psi and a yield strength of 45 to 60,000 psi, equivalent to carbon steels, yet retaining the anti -corrosion properties of iron. 5" APCO SERIES 600 SILENT CHECK VALVE WITH MINIMUM 10% GREATER FLOW AREA. ALL APCO SILENT CHECK VALVES 100% HYDROSTATICALLY TESTED TO ANSI STANDARDS COMPARE FLOW AREA OF PIPE BELOW WITH THOSE SHOWN AT DIFFERENT SECTIONS OF THE VALVE Area of 5" Pipe = 20.1 Sq. In. FLOW AREA OF VALVE AT CROSS SECTION UNES SHOWN BELOW E—" 27.1 SQ. IN. D 29.1 SO. IN. 27.2 SQ. IN. B 22.1 SQ. IN. STROKE A 23.1 SO. IN. Bronze Bushing protects against Electrolytic action Smooth flow Body Contour guarantees minimum loss Stainless Steel Spring (Also available in Monel for critical water condition) Stainless Steel Ball & Seat Retaining Screws. e 7 5 3 z 2 N 0 e 3 2 HEAD LOSS CHARACTERISTICS FOR SILENT CHECK VALVES SERIES 300 (CHECK STYLE) r 1'[" 1Y," 2- 2/." 3- 4- 5- 5- 8- . "®M®®@mio�®FEZZ®©vi EMPS11110E39i 88LWG.307,"1",-,314002-.....41330-11.W.1 'FITammii3F.'":J28S71, J1 s tdd33EAl 2f3r S80j?A .170.;.1,E1S19V®O r.g.m9 '7107‘mu2'v1117MMa®die©flmce tlU1VL971:037F.7S1®®€3MElan _1RREEEIRI 0='r'.....-' ',t .,.._-.-Ei IS2301316313CI:IIIIIRW MISEIGIIII1I .ariEli E617eESIM37.1HIEWADA FINIMsL3�r'®gEGERFis�STayirgEogi[q MY °.31L T.&Fa8RMn996:6M102017®IZZOSIOS3E3©4 MAP, UFS ,,®{1E!@6d�'6I7��ffi3II¢� $F�f�3P aiijammiz �jotim MERE t70�6 FF t fi M.r 7ji6V7NEIN0 E AVA , J � " 6Pµtp..®AAt'sv Q9�7yj/{1 tEw al „3;e1 �v.3 LSJ.a®Te ".r_31M-9L-11 �4.td iI CT5:lii' . �. ✓9R..f� L..–.f41Js5e..,: �c3®251P5C . "...,.1" 2®23 i!5 i2 ®CSC B&.`✓<'=`-5(2–�F (fiM,*�E�`' Cio .6352SE:735000..i IMP,WEEP s� : 'M r A 1 EBR � mm VABBEIG t;R nu.N®csxam..1.0.nm• s1 "i ?FIFO L^ 1C5O4LIV2025a0 00119®6bt®19316a8 �EINEIMB1;99 ER godygoil E EIGER 17,...-..1=55508581335818J15��:re •:^?A7^®ffim®®0R1®P7B1C1e®65:1®/1197MIA3:ffi3®®s67Et®®7es9i1 asC'IGIRFiII®.r m®®®89t5iae+ma311 i 11/M 1®LI 3i 1OV,E�1aa6lt A ,08=11 yt. [,...�Zur3t"ai1Cs2F:m9749u1 'LtrTJ."Ls�vAINICA9L'139 M _FIS^.&IRS120G1®r3aIESZE f.1 ' '- I mal I ®9a®IIF. Bri . MEZ:MERU2IBEI1LEIBEIER ,'t' 70.kJt :7 OM JM,.^0'1@03S"..GWZ.....,..,.A 2,2r, V. =', M M. Fli.Gn®�3ss2;: ° -M IRRMEI F..1,„57.: .f ?f; TIMA:" ilik rafff?t13<I f9's N.i•RLIgC; 1P PIT Edd>"PT'i L�'J6 "+, I.139 Pgo G.:F0.00 Ei1 1e6v9 9CLVr.4E6.eJiltJ f 53tJ el:, x c�N6Hrr�-: PI 2 3 7 8910 2 3 4 5 6 7 89100 2 3 4 5 5 7 9 9 1,000 FLOW IN GALLONS PER MINUTE 100,008 8 7 6 50,000 4 3 2 W 2 9 W 6 a 5,00c N 2 3 • 5 5 7 10,000 z et 2 Q C7 3 At left: Typical Silent Check Valve application on vertical turbine pumps (30'. Utah Valley Water Treatment Plant, Orem, Utah. 31000 Q 98 w 7 500 HEAD LOSS CHARACTERISTICS FOR SILENT CHECK VALVES SERIES 600 (GLOBE STYLE) LassvxRr 1 r.I r .teal fs.ArA 1•1 Jrrtnl .•ai w4..h-'I.rK°3nr 100.000 C.... ai3"T"9r-124 f'4 ..._J '!J icazefilimm 88LWG.307,"1",-,314002-.....41330-11.W.1 'FITammii3F.'":J28S71, fai _1RREEEIRI IIQ .Bi '` imim .ariEli Pecl pi HOME .A 1 , J � " 6Pµtp..®AAt'sv oI µ1� tEw al „3;e1 �v.3 LSJ.a®Te ".r_31M-9L-11 �4.td iI CT5:lii' . �. ✓9R..f� L..–.f41Js5e..,: �c3®251P5C . "...,.1" 2®23 i!5 i2 ®CSC B&.`✓<'=`-5(2–�F rimk2J>©=®t$1PJZt Cio .6352SE:735000..i UtIEMInINDIRA : 'M fi'WC'1` : 3i e..3 e. ii A... -A, mal ,'t' 70.kJt :7 OM JM,.^0'1@03S"..GWZ.....,..,.A 2,2r, V. =', M M. Fli.Gn®�3ss2;: G1322 =LIE=e 605 0 302© Mi T9a. Q41?,I F..1,„57.: .f ?f; TIMA:" ilik rafff?t13<I f9's N.i•RLIgC; 1P PIT Edd>"PT'i L�'J6 "+, I.139 Pgo G.:F0.00 Ei1 1e6v9 9CLVr.4E6.eJiltJ f 53tJ el:, x c�N6Hrr�-: 2 10 .2 .3 .5 .6 .7.89 1 3 4 HEAD LOSS IN FEET 6 6 50,000 3 2 910,000 7 6 5,000 3 2 1,000 6 7 6 500 4 3 2 5 6 7 8 910 SERIES 300 WAFER STYLE SILENT CHECK VALVE Wafer Style Silent Check Valves shall be designed with cast iron bodies. bronze seat, bronze plug and stainless steel spring. The valve plug must be center guided at both ends with a through integral shaft and spring loaded for guar- anteed silent shut-off operation. The spring must be helical or conical. Seat and plug shall be hand replaceable in the field for ease of maintenance. The flow area through the body shall be equal to or greater than the cross-section area of the equivalent pipe size. Check Valve must be capable of silent operation when installed in vertical or horizontal position - flow up or down. All materials of construction shall be certified in writing to conform to A.S.T.M. specifications as follows: Body Cast iron ASTM A126 Gr.B Plug & seat Bronze Alloy C90700 Spring Stainless steel ASTM A276 T316 Exterior paint Universal Metal Primer FDA approved for potable water contact Valve to be APCO Series 300 - 1" through 10" Silent Check Valve - Wafer Style. Factory Mutual Approved - sizes 4" 6", 8" and 10" (125 Lb. Class), sizes 4" 6" (250 Lb. Class), as manufactured by Valve and Primer Corporation, Schaumburg. Illinois, USA SERIES 600 GLOBE STYLE SILENT CHECK VALVE Globe Style Silent Check Valve shall be designed with semi -steel bodies, bronze seat, bronze plug and stainless steel spring. The valve plug must be center guided at both ends with a through integral shaft and spring loaded for guaranteed silent shut-off operation. The spring must be helical or conical. The seat and plug shall be hand replaceable in the field for ease of maintenance. The flow area through the body shall be equal to or greater than the cross-sectional are of the equivalent pipe size. All materials of construction shall be certified in writing to conform to A.S.T.M. specifications as follows: Body Cast iron ASTM A126 Gr.B Plug & seat Bronze Alloy C90700 Spring Stainless steel ASTM A276 T316 Exterior paint Universal Metal Primer FDA approved for potable water contact Valve to be APCO Series 600 - 3" through 42" Silent Check Valves - Factory Mutual Approved - sizes 4". 6" 8", 10" 12" and 18", as manufactured by Valve & Primer Corporation, Schaumburg, Illinois. USA VALVE & PRIMER CORPORATION 81420 WRIGH0T BLVD. SCHAUMBURG, IL 60193-4599 847"524.9000 FAX:847.524.9007 800.323.6969 website: www.apcovalves.com • e-mail: factory@apcovalves.com vALVE & PRIMER CORPORATION HERESY RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHANGE ANY COMPONENT PARTS WHICH, IN THE OPINION OS ITS ENOMEER.VG DEPARTMENT, WILL IMPROVE THE PRODUCT OR INCREASE RS SERVICEABILITY. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t Irullr: I 11 1 CLA-VAL" 1 i 1 1 1 ) 1 1 1 i i 1-) 1 - MODEL 61-02 (Full Internal Port) 661-02 (Reduced Internal Port) Deep Well Pump Control valve Schematic Diagram Item Description 1 Powertrol (Main Valve) 2 CSM11-A2-2 Solenoid Control 3 CV Flow Control 4 X105LOW Switch Assembly 5 CK (Isolation Valve) 6 X43 "Y" Strainer 7 Union Note: For main valve option descriptions, refer to 100-02 (61-02) or 100-21 (661-02) Technical Data Sheets. • Prevent Surges in Pipelines • Simple Hydraulic Operation • Adjustable Opening and Closing Speeds • Solenoid Control Can Be Operated Manually • Proven Reliable Design The Cla-Val Model 61-02/661-02 Deep Well Pump Control Valve is designed to protect pipelines from surges caused by the starting and stopping of deep well pumps. This is a hydraulically operated diaphragm valve which is controlled by a solenoid pilot valve. Separate adjustable flow control valves in the pilot system regulate the opening and closing rates. A limit switch on the valve stem serves as an electrical interlock between the valve and the pump motor. The operation of the valve is completely automatic and controlled by the solenoid valve. With the pump off, the valve is wide open. When the pump is started, the solenoid is energized and the valve begins to close slowly, discharging air and the initial rush of sand and water from the pump column to atmosphere. As the valve closes the pump output is gradually diverted into the main line, preventing the development of a starting surge. When it is time to shut-off the pump, the solenoid is de - energized. The pump continues to run while the pump control valve opens slowly, diverting pump output to atmosphere. As pump pressure gradually decreases, the main line check valve closes slowly, preventing shock or slam during the pump stopping cycle. When the pump control valve is wide open, the limit switch assembly releases the pump starter and the pump stops. INDEPENDENT OP vRt:ERATINuvAkp_v_r't INLET Typical Installation Install Model 61-02/661-02 valve as shown. Use a minimum of 1/2" tubing to connect operating pressure connection of the valve to the system side of check valve. Flexible conduit should be used for electrical connections to the solenoid control and the limit switch assembly. A Model 52-02/652-03 Surge Anticipator is recommended for power failure and surge protection. Pump CLA-VAL 61-02/661-02 Pump Control Volvo Discharge to Atmosphere Pressure Supply Line CLA-VAL 52-03/652-03 Surge Anticipator Valve 011111111,4,. Pressure Sensing L CLA-VAL 61-02 Clu k valve Discharge To Atmosphere Discharge To System Aui V AI Sequence Of Operation Pump Off... With pump off, static line pressure holds the main line check valve "B" closed. Line pressure is transmitted through solenoid control "C" and speed control "D" to the lower chamber of valve "A". Upper chamber of pump control valve "A" is vented to atmosphere so valve "A" is held wide open. Starting Cycle... Starting switch closes, pump starts, solenoid "C" energizes and shifts, allowing line pressure to flow into upper chamber of valve "A" through solenoid control "C" and opening speed control "E". Closing speed of valve "A" is controlled by speed control "D" which limits the rate fluid is relieved from under the diaphragm. As valve "A" closes, pumping pressure opens main line check valve "B", gradually permitting full flow. Stopping Cycle... Starting switch opens, solenoid "C" de -energizes and shifts, as pump continues to run, pump pressure flows into lower chamber of valve "A" through solenoid "C" and opening speed control "D". Pressure in upper chamber of valve "A" is relieved to atmosphere through opening speed control "E" and solenoid control "C". As valve "A" opens, flow through main line check valve "B" gradually lessens until valve "A" is wide open and the limit switch "F" shuts off the pump. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1) 1 1 1 1 Model 61-02 (Uses Basic Valve Model 100-02) Model 61-02 Dimensions (In Inches) 100-02 (Angle) J Dimensions (In inches) 066 G6 6 INLET 1"- 00 I"-000 Valve Size (Inches) 2 % 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 24 A Threaded 11.00 12.50 - - - - - - - - AA 150 ANSI 11.00 12.00 15.00 20.00 25.38 29.75 34.00 39.00 41.38 61.50 AAA 300 ANSI 11.62 13.25 15.62 21.00 26.38 31.12 35.50 40.50 43.50 63.24 B Dia. 8.00 9.12 11.50 15.75 20.00 23.62 28.00 32.75 35.50 53.16 C Max. 10.31 11.19 14.25 18.44 21.81 23.38 29.31 32.12 35.00 43.93 D Threaded 5.50 6.25 - - - - - - - - DD 150 ANSI 5.50 6.00 7.50 10.00 12.69 14.88 17.00 19.50 20.69 - DDD 300 ANSI 5.81 6.63 7.81 10.50 13.19 15.56 17.75 20.25 21.75 - E 1.69 2.56 3.19 4.31 5.31 9.25 10.75 12.62 15.50 17.75 F 150 ANSI 3.50 3.75 4.50 5.50 6.75 8.00 9.50 10.50 11.75 19.25 FF 300 ANSI 3.75 4.13 5.00 6.25 7.50 8.75 10.25 11.50 12.75 19.25 G Threaded 4.00 4.50 - - - - - - - - GG 150 ANSI 4.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 8.00 8.62 13.75 14.88 15.69 - GGG 300 ANSI 4.31 4.38 5.31 6.50 8.50 9.31 14.50 15.62 • -16.50 - H NPT Body Tapping f % 3/4 3/ 1 1 1 1 1 1 J NPT Cover Center Plug k f % % 1 1 1'/4 11/2 2 11/2 K NPT Cover Tapping k f 3/4 3/4 1 1 1 1 1 1 Valve Stem Internal Thread UNF 10-32 '/4-28 'k28 %-24 %-24 %-24 %-24 3,6-24 1-20 3/4-16 Stem Travel 0.7 0.8 1.1 1.7 2.3 2.8 3.4 4.0 4.5 6.75 Approx. Ship Wt. Lbs. 65 95 190 320 650 940 1675 2460 3100 6200 X Pilot System 17.00 18.00 21.00 34.00 37.00 39.00 45.00 48.00 50.00 68.00 Y Pilot System 10.00 11.00 12.00 20.00 42.00 44.00 26.00 29.00 30.00 39.00 Z Pilot System 10.00 11.00 12.00 20.00 42.00 44.00 26.00 29.00 30.00 39.00 Model 61-02 Flow Chart (Based on normal now through a wide open valve.) Pressure Drop — psi Cover Capacity 100 80 60 40 30 20 10 6 4 3 Angle Valve Sizes (Inches) Globe Valve Sizes (Inches) 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 r. 1 8 10 12 19 1 24 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000 10,000 20000 Flow Rate - gpm (water) 50,000 Li uid Volume Displaced from Diaphragm Chamber When Valve Opens or Closes Sizes (Inches) 2i4" 3" 4" 6" 8" 10" 12" Displacement .043 gal .080 gal 169 gal .531 gal 1.26 gal 2.51 gal 4.00 gal 14" 16" 24" 6.50 gal 9.57 gal 9.57 gal Selecting The Valve To be effective, this valve must be sized so it relieves to atmosphere that part of the pump discharge head which is in excess of the normal system static pressure. To do this, the valve is sized to permit the full pump discharge through the valve at a pressure low enough to keep the system check valve from opening. As the pump control valve closes, the pumping pressure exceeds the system pressure and gradually flows into the system. We recommend selecting a valve size which will have a pressure loss that is at least 10 psi less than the system static pressure. Use the flow rate which is found on the pump's flow vs discharge pressure chart. Select the flow corresponding to the system static pressure, less 10 psi. Determining Valve Size 1 Determine the system's static pressure (the pressure downstream of the check valve with the pump off); subtract 10 psi, this is the Design Pressure P. 2. From the pump's flow vs. discharge pressure curve, determine the flow (Q) at the Design Pressure P. 3. Using the formula, calculate the Cv. Cv = 4. Select the valve size from the table which has a Cv that is equal to, or greater than, the calculated Cv in step 3 above Example: 1. System Static Pressure with the pump off = 70 psi. 2. Determine the Design Pressure P by subtracting 10 psi (70 psi - 10 psi = 60 psi Design Pressure) 3. From the pump curve we determine that the valve must allow a flow of 800 GPM at 60 psi. 4. Using the Formula: Q Where: Cv =V Example Q = 800 GPM P = 60 psi (70 psi - 10 psi) Cv = 800=103 Valve Selection Chart Cv Values Valve Size Globe Angle 61-02 661-02 61-02 661-02 2'% 85 — 101 — 3 115 62 139 — 4 200 1 136 240 135 6 460 229 541 233 8 770 480 990 545 10 1245 i 930 1575 i — 12 1725 1458 2500 — 14 2300 — 3060 — 16 2940 i 2110 4200 i — 20 — 3400 — — 24 — '. 3500 — — 5. From the table above the best valve choices are: 3" 61-02 Globe Pattern 4" 661-02 Globe Pattern 4" 661-02 Angle Pattern Drain Provisions Each time the valve opens or closes, water is discharged from the solenoid exhaust port, the amount varying with the valve size. Provisions should be made for the disposal of this water. Exhaust tube must be free of any back pressure. Provide an air gap between the solenoid exhaust tube and drain facility. Wiring Diagram Auto -Off -Hand = Selector Switch 1CR = Relay, DPST Normally Open 2CR 3CR SW1 = Relay, DPST Normally Open = Relay, TPST Normally Open = Switch, Remote Start,Automatic SW2 PVS M = Switch, SPDT, Valve Limit Switch Connect to N.C. Terminal = Pilot Valve Solenoid = Pump Motor Starter ote: SW2 and PVS supplied by Cla-Val Co. PVS is the solenoid control mounted on the valve. SW2 is included in the X105L switch assembly which is mounted on the pump control valve cover. AU other electrical items shall be supplied by customer. On very deep wells where more than a few seconds are required for the water to reach the surface, or where it is desirable to delay closing the valve, a time delay relay should be installed in the circuit to the solenoid pilot valve. Auto Off Hand L1 —o SW1 A oho 1CRI COM. N.C. 2CR I r SW t LO. 3CR2 3CR3I 1CRI L2 3CR1 2CR I For simplified field wiring see Model PC -1 Pump Control Data Sheet. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Model 661-02 (Uses Basic Valve Model 100-21) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Model 661-02 Dimensions (In Inches) 100-21 (Angle) Dimensions (In inches) Valve Size (Inches) 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30 A 150 ANSI 10.25 13.88 17.75 21.38 26.00 30.00 34.25 35.00 42.12 48.00 48.00 63.25 AA 300 ANSI 11.00 14.50 18.62 22.38 27.38 31.50 - 36.62 43.62 49.62 49.75 - B Dia. 6.62 9.12 11.50 15.75 20.00 23.62 28.00 28.00 35.44 35.44 35.44 53.19 C Max. 9.25 11.75 15.25 20.25 23.75 27.25 29.31 34.12 35.00 40.25 40.25 56.50 D 150 ANSI - 6.94 8.88 10.69 - - - - - - - - DD 300 ANSI - 725 9.38 11.19 - - - - - - - - E 150 ANSI - 5.50 6.75 7.25 - - - - - - - - EE 300 ANSI - 5.81 7.25 7.75 - - - - - - - - F 150 ANSI 3.75 4.50 5.50 6.75 8.00 9.50 11.00 11.75 15.88 14.56 17.00 19.88 FF 300 ANSI 4.12 5.00 6.25 7.50 8.75 10.25 - 12.75 15.88 16.06 19.00 - H NPT Body Tapping % '% 3/ 3/ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 .J NPT Cover Center Plug 'f F 3A 3/ 1 1 1'44 1'/4 2 2 2 2 K NPT Cover Tapping 3,¢ 'A 3A 3/ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Valve Stem Internal Thread UNF 10-32 74-28 %-28 %-24 %-24 %-24 3,6-24 %-24 14-20 14-20 14-20 %-16 Stem Travel 0.6 0.8 1.1 1.7 2.3 2.8 3.4 3.4 3.4 4.5 4.5 6.5 Approx. Ship Wt. Lbs. 70 135 230 480 785 1410 2215 2215 2300 3400 3600 7700 X Pilot System 16.00 18.00 31.00 36.00 39.00 43.00 45.00 50.00 50.00 56.00 64.00 81.00 Y Pilot System 10.00 11.00 18.00 20.00 22.00 24.00 26.00 26.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 39.00 Z Pilot System 10.00 11.00 18.00 20.00 22.00 24.0a 26.00 26.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 39.00 Model 661-02 Flow Chart (Based on normal flow through a wide open valve.) ii)Cover Capacity 100 80 60 40 0 '0a0 20 0 a 10 1 4 3 2 3 Angle Valve Sizes (Inches) Globe Valve Sizes (Inches) 6 8 8 10 12 .4 16 12 00 24 30 J// 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 200 500 1000 2000 6000 10.000 20000 Flow Rate - gpm (water) 50.000 Liquid Volume Displaced f om Diaphragm Chamber When Valve Opens or Closes Sizes (Inches) 3" 4" 6" 8" 10" 12" 16" 20" 24" 30" Displacement .032 gal .080 gal 169 gal .531 gal 1.26 gal 2.51 gal 4.00 gal 9.57 gal 9.57 gal 29.00 gal Valve Selection These Symbols IAN and $ Indicate Available Sizes Inches 2% 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 mm 65 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 End Detail 40 48 .293 10.8 240 .288 2.54 58 115 .122 4.42 440 Model 61-02 Basic Valve 100-02 Globe 1*i A hili * al A Ai * Idk 2.45 44 Angle * * fit 1I ilIl 1!y * 14 ti 4 Resistance 110 Suggested Flow (gpm) Max. Continuous 300 460 800 1800 3100 4900 7000 8400 11000 2.1 88 25000 Max. Intermittent 370 580 990 2250 3900 6150 8720 10540 13700 31300 Suggested Flow (Liters/Sec) Max. Continuous 19 29 50 113 195 309 441 529 693 1575 Max. Intermittent 23 37 62 142 246 387 549 664 863 Consult Factory for Sizes Not Shown Model 661-02 Basic Valve 100-21 Globe AV* a * £ * It Fri * A * * Angle * f I ft Suggested Flow (gpm) Max. Continuous 260 580 1025 2300 4100 6400 9230 9230 16500 16500 16500 Suggested Flow (Liters/Sec) Max. Continuous 16 37 65 145 258 403 581 581 1040 1040 1040 661-02 is the reduced internal port size version of the 61-02 -Flanged End Detail Only For 100-02 basic valves, suggested flow calculations were based on flow through Schedule 40 Pipe. Maximum continuous flow is approx. 20 tt/sec (6.1 meters/sec) & maximum intermittent is approx. 25 ft /sec (7.6 meters/sec). For 100-21 basic valves, suggested Clow calculations were based on flow through the valve seat. Approx. 26 ft/sec (7.9 meters/sec) is used for maximum continuous flow Maximum continuous flow through the valve seat for the valve seat for the 30" 100-21 is approx. 20 ft/sec (6.1 meters/sec). Pressure Ratings (Recommended Maximum Pressure - psi) Valve Body & Cover Pressure Class Flanged Threaded Grade Material ANSI Standards* 150 Ib. 300 Ib. End** Details ASTM A536 Ductile Iron B16.42 250 400 400 ASTM A216-WCB Cast Steel 816.5 285 400 400 ASTM B62 Bronze B16.24 225 400 400 Note: 'ANSI standards are for flange dimensions only. Flanged valves are available faced but not drilled. **End Details machined to ANSI B2.1 specifications. Materials Component Standard Material Combinations Body & Cover Ductile Iron Cast Steel Bronze Available Sizes 61-02 2W - 24" 2W - 16" 2%i - 16" 661-02 3" - 30" 3" - 16" 3" - 16" Disc Retainer & Diaphragm Washer Cast Iron Cast Steel Bronze Trim: Disc Guide, Seat & Cover Bearing Bronze is Standard Stainless Steel is optional Disc Buna-N® Rubber Diaphragm Nylon Reinforced Buna-N® Rubber Stem, Nut & Spring Stainless Steel For material options not isted, consult factory. Cla-Val manufactures valves in more than 50 different alloys. Pilot System Specifications Temperature Range Water to 180°F Max Materials Standard Pilot System Materials Pilot Control: Bronze ASTM B62 Trim: Stainless Steel Type 303 Rubber: Buna-N® Synthetic Rubber Optional Pilot System Materials Pilot Systems are available with optional Aluminum, Stainless Steel or Monel materials at additional cost. Solenoid Control Specifications Enclosure General purpose NEMA Type 3, Aluminum Note. For other enclosures and NEMA Types, consult factory Housing Body - Aluminum Trim - Stainless Steel Operating Pressure: Maximum pressure 300 psi, for higher pressure consult factory. AC or DC Coil Insulation Class A (molded) AC voltage 15.4 watts DC voltage 16.8 watts Power Consumption Volts (DC) Amperes Volts (AC 60 Hz) Amperes Coil Resi s(Onttance Holding Pull In Holding Inrush 24 .603 24 24 2.88 25.4 0.5 28 .629 15.6 120 .575 5.1 14 1 32 .500 18.6 208 .330 2.93 40 48 .293 10.8 240 .288 2.54 58 115 .122 4.42 440 156 1.38 174 125 .119 4.44 480 .143 1.27 233 250 .072 2.45 Volts Amperes Coil (AC 50 Hz) Holding nrush Resistance 110 48 4.6 15.7 220 .24 2.3 66 240 .22 2.1 88 When Ordering, Please Specify 1. Catalog No. 61-02 or No. 661-02 2. Valve Size 3. Pattern - Globe or Angle 4. Pressure Class 5. Threaded or Flanged 6. Trim Material 7. Solenoid Voltage 8. Desired Options 9. When Vertically Installed Note: For main valve option descriptions, refer to 100-02 (61- 02) or 100-21 (661-02) Technical Data Sheets. CLA-VA[ E-61-02/661-02 (R-12/07) CLA-VAL PO Box 1325 Newport Beach CA 92659-0325 Phone: 949-722-4800 • Fax: 949-548-5441 CLA-VAL CANADA 4687 Christie Drive Beamsville, Ontario Canada LOR 1B4 Phone: 905-563-4963 Fax: 905-563-4040 ,COPYRIGHT ClA•VAL 2007 Pn,aed In USA Spadtiminns subject to Manua wUwo, notiw CLA-VAL EUROPE Chemin des Mesanges 1 CH -1032 RomaneU Lausanne, Switzerland Phone: 41-21-643-15-55 Fax: 41-21-643-15-50 www.cla-val.com Represented By. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CVC in Y _ r ----y= CIA -VAI. CO NEWPORT BEACH, CALIFORNIA CATALOG NO. 49-03/649-03 _.•__ • _. DRANiNC NO. vto 90481 REV. F TYPE OF VALVE AND MAIN FEATURES ��� tb COMBINATION RATE OF FLOW, PRESSURE REDUCING oRATS CFV 9-14-81 AND SOLENOID SHUTOFF VALVE KD 11-5-81 w ¢ APvo CH 11-13-81 Mill To To INLET '�A OUREY — — — — NOT FURNISHED BY CLA-Ni. CO. ------ OPTIONAL FEATURES 6 MI TO INLET �A OUTLET DE ENERGIZE C 1 ENERGIZE TO OPEN TO OPEN REVISED LOCATION OF CK2 (81) (ECO 19381) 1 r---------- 5-------1 j''' 1 3 -111.74T11111-6 fC 7 •-t✓j/ / C D2 D1 I L1 ) / _ rr. r L-iary n —4— I /---f)��hF- B1 / - ") (--) B1 ii— D3 J B2 91 ./' 1 as is ,/ INLET % , ' OUTLET SEE NOTE 4 m A I TO ITEM 1; ADDED 1 NOTE: ORIFICE ATTACHED FLANGE, IS OBTAINED PIPE DIAMETERS PLATE ASSEMBLY MAY BE TO THE MAIN VALVE OUTLET HOWEVER, BETTER CONTROL IF LOCATED 1 TO 5 DOWNSTREAM. -D1SEE REVISION FILE CAT NO. WAS 49-03; ADDED 100-20 (649-03 ITEM N0. BASIC COMPONENTS OTY 100-01 HYTROL (49-03) MAIN VALVE z a 1 100-20 HYTROL (649-03) MAIN VALVE 1 o 2 X58C RESTRICTION ASSEMBLY 1 3 CRA PRESSURE REDUCING CONTROL 1 0 4 X52A-1 ORIFICE PLATE ASSEMBLY 1 W 5 CDHS18 PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL 1 6 CS3 SOLENOID CONTROL 1 7 100-01 HYTROL (REVERSE FLOW) 1 OPTIONAL FEATURE SUFFIX ADDEO TO CATALOG NUMBER A X46A FLOW CLEAN STRAINER 1 B CK2 COCK (ISOLATION VALVE) 4 C CV FLOW CONTROL (CLOSING) 1 ) 0 CHECK VALVE WITH COCK 1 S CV FLOW CONTROL (OPENING) 1 y X43 "Y" STRAINER 1 S °RAKING I5 THE NOT BE USED. COPIED DRANK 15 AIBMITTEO NATION SHONN PROPERTY OF CLA-VAL CO. ANO SAME AND COPIES MADE THEREOF. IF ANY, SHALL BE RETURNED OR REPRODUCED. NOR SHALL THE SUBJECT HEREOF BE DISCLOSED IN ANY MANNER TO ANYONE CONFIOENTIALLY ANO WAY NOT BE USED V4 THE MANUFACTURE OF ANY MATERIAL OR PRODUCT HEREON IS PATENTED OR OTHERNASE PROTECTED, FULL TITLE AND COPYRIGHTS. IF ANY, IN TO IT UPON FOR ANY OTHER THAN AND TO THIS DEMAND. PURPOSE, EXCEPT SUCH MATERIALS ORANING DEUV4RY AND DISCLOSURE HEREOF ARE SOLELY UPON CONDITION THAT THE SAME AS HEREIN AUTHORI2E0, NITHOILT PRIOR %ROTTEN APPROVAL OF CLA-VAL CO AND PRODUCTS FURNSHED TO CLA-VAL CO *TETHER OR NOT THE EQUIPMENT ANO/OR INFORMATION DELIVERED CT SUBMITTED ARE FILLY RESERVED CLA-VAL MALL THIS CR CO.' CVCL 1 02 3 4 DIST. CODE 002 SHEET 2 OF 3 UAL CO. NEWPORT BEACH, CALIFORNIA CATALOG NO. 49-03/649-03 DRAINNC NO, 90481 REV. F 0 a_ a CO U 0 SEE SHEET 1 TYPE OF VALVE AND MAIN FEATURES COMBINATION RATE OF FLOW, PRESSURE REDUCING AND SOLENOID SHUTOFF VALVE DESIGN DRAWN CFV 9-14-81 cHK'o KD 11-5-81 APYD CH 11-13-81 OPERATING DATA I. SOLENOID CONTROL FEATURE: SOLENOID CONTROL (6) IS A DIRECT ACTING, 3—WAY SOLENOID CONTROL THAT CHANGES POSITION WHEN THE COIL IS DE—ENERGIZED OR ENERGIZED. THIS APPLIES OR RELIEVES PRESSURE IN THE COVER CHAMBER OF AUXILIARY HYTROL (7), PROVIDING THE OPERATION SHOWN IN THE rnl 1 ( A1I AIn TA DI C. II. RATE OF FLOW FEATURE: PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL (5) IS NORMALLY OPEN AND RESPONDS TO DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE CHANGES SENSED ACROSS ORIFICE PLATE ASSEMBLY (4). AN INCREASE IN DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TENDS TO CLOSE CONTROL (5) AND A DECREASE IN DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TENDS TO OPEN CONTROL (5). THIS CAUSES MAIN VALVE COVER PRESSURE TO VARY AND THE MAIN VALVE MODULATES (OPENS AND CLOSES) MAINTAINING A RELATIVELY CONSTANT RATE OF FLOW. PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL (5) ADJUSTMENT: TURN THE ADJUSTING SCREW CLOCKWISE TO INCREASE THE RATE OF FLOW. III. PRESSURE REDUCING FEATURE: PRESSURE REDUCING CONTROL (3) IS A NORMALLY OPEN CONTROL THAT SENSES MAIN VALVE OUTLET PRESSURE CHANGES. AN INCREASE IN OUTLET PRESSURE TENDS TO CLOSE CONTROL (3) AND A DECREASE IN OUTLET PRESSURE TENDS TO OPEN CONTROL (3). THIS CAUSES MAIN VALVE COVER PRESSURE TO VARY AND THE MAIN VALVE MODULATES (OPENS AND CLOSES) MAINTAINING A RELATIVELY CONSTANT OUTLET PRESSURE. PRESSURE REDUCING CONTROL (3) ADJUSTMENT: TURN THE ADJUSTING SCREW CLOCKWISE TO INCREASE THE SETTING. 'THIS DRAMNC IS IRE PROPERTY OF CLA-VAL CO. AND SAME AND COPIES MADE THEREOF. IT ANY. SHALL BE RETURNED TO IT UPON DEMAND. DELIVERY AND DISCLOSURE HEREOF ARE SOLELY UPON CONDITION THAT THE SAME SHALL NOT BE USED. COPIED OR REPRODUCED, NOR SHALL THE SUBJECT HEREOF BE DISCLOSED IN ANY MANNER TO ANYONE FOR ANY PURPOSE, EXCEPT AS HEREIN AUTHORIZED. YAIHOUT PRIOR YRITIEN APPROVAL OF CIA.-VAL CO. THIS ORAMNC IS SUBMITIED CCNFIDENTIAILY AND MAY NOT BE USED IN THE MANUFACTURE OF ANY MATERIAL CR PRODUCT OTHER THAN SUCH MATERIALS AND PRCQUCTS FURBISHED TO CLA-VAL CO. WHETHER CR NOT THE EQUIPMENT OR INFORuATICN SHDON HEREON IS PATENTED OR OTHERYASE PROTECTED. FULL TITLE AND COPYRIGHTS, IF ANY, IN AND TO TITS ORAYANG AND/OR INFORMATION DEUVERED OR SUBMITTED ARE FULLY RESERVED CLA-VAL CO.' 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 49E -03/649E-03 SERIES 49D -03/649D-03 SERIES SOLENOID CONTROL (8) AUXILIARY HYTROL (7) POSITION MAIN VALVE (1) POSITION AUXILIARY HYTROL (7) POSITION MAIN VALVE (1) POSITION POSITION PORTS CONNECTED ENERGIZED 1 & 2 OPEN OPEN UNDER COMMAND OF CONTROLS (3) & (5) CLOSED CLOSED DE—ENERGIZED 1 & 3 CLOSED CLOSED OPEN OPEN UNDER COMMAND OF CONTROLS (3) & (5) II. RATE OF FLOW FEATURE: PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL (5) IS NORMALLY OPEN AND RESPONDS TO DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE CHANGES SENSED ACROSS ORIFICE PLATE ASSEMBLY (4). AN INCREASE IN DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TENDS TO CLOSE CONTROL (5) AND A DECREASE IN DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TENDS TO OPEN CONTROL (5). THIS CAUSES MAIN VALVE COVER PRESSURE TO VARY AND THE MAIN VALVE MODULATES (OPENS AND CLOSES) MAINTAINING A RELATIVELY CONSTANT RATE OF FLOW. PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL CONTROL (5) ADJUSTMENT: TURN THE ADJUSTING SCREW CLOCKWISE TO INCREASE THE RATE OF FLOW. III. PRESSURE REDUCING FEATURE: PRESSURE REDUCING CONTROL (3) IS A NORMALLY OPEN CONTROL THAT SENSES MAIN VALVE OUTLET PRESSURE CHANGES. AN INCREASE IN OUTLET PRESSURE TENDS TO CLOSE CONTROL (3) AND A DECREASE IN OUTLET PRESSURE TENDS TO OPEN CONTROL (3). THIS CAUSES MAIN VALVE COVER PRESSURE TO VARY AND THE MAIN VALVE MODULATES (OPENS AND CLOSES) MAINTAINING A RELATIVELY CONSTANT OUTLET PRESSURE. PRESSURE REDUCING CONTROL (3) ADJUSTMENT: TURN THE ADJUSTING SCREW CLOCKWISE TO INCREASE THE SETTING. 'THIS DRAMNC IS IRE PROPERTY OF CLA-VAL CO. AND SAME AND COPIES MADE THEREOF. IT ANY. SHALL BE RETURNED TO IT UPON DEMAND. DELIVERY AND DISCLOSURE HEREOF ARE SOLELY UPON CONDITION THAT THE SAME SHALL NOT BE USED. COPIED OR REPRODUCED, NOR SHALL THE SUBJECT HEREOF BE DISCLOSED IN ANY MANNER TO ANYONE FOR ANY PURPOSE, EXCEPT AS HEREIN AUTHORIZED. YAIHOUT PRIOR YRITIEN APPROVAL OF CIA.-VAL CO. THIS ORAMNC IS SUBMITIED CCNFIDENTIAILY AND MAY NOT BE USED IN THE MANUFACTURE OF ANY MATERIAL CR PRODUCT OTHER THAN SUCH MATERIALS AND PRCQUCTS FURBISHED TO CLA-VAL CO. WHETHER CR NOT THE EQUIPMENT OR INFORuATICN SHDON HEREON IS PATENTED OR OTHERYASE PROTECTED. FULL TITLE AND COPYRIGHTS, IF ANY, IN AND TO TITS ORAYANG AND/OR INFORMATION DEUVERED OR SUBMITTED ARE FULLY RESERVED CLA-VAL CO.' 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CVCL 1 (2) 3 4 DIST. CODE 002 SHEET 3 OF 3 CLAVAL CONEWPORT BEACH, CALIFORNIA • CATALOG NO. 49-03/649-03 DRAWING NO. 90481 REV. F TYPE OF VALVE AND MAIN FEATURES RATE OF FLOW, PRESSURE REDUCING DESIGNCOMBINATION DRAWN CFV 9-14-81 AND SOLENOID SHUTOFF VALVE ova KD 11-5-81 Am CH 11-13-81 OPERATING DATA - CONTINUED IV. OPTIONAL FEATURE OPERATING DATA: SUFFIX A (FLOW CLEAN STRAINER) A SELF-CLEANING STRAINER IS INSTALLED IN THE MAIN VALVE INLET BODY BOSS WHICH PROTECTS THE PILOT SYSTEM FROM FOREIGN PARTICLES. SUFFIX B (ISOLATION VALVES) CK2 COCKS (B1) & (62) ARE USED TO ISOLATE THE PILOT SYSTEM FROM MAIN LINE PRESSURE. THESE VALVES MUST BE OPEN DURING NORMAL OPERATION. SUFFIX C (CLOSING SPEED CONTROL) FLOW CONTROL (C) CONTROLS THE CLOSING SPEED OF THE MAIN VALVE. TURN THE ADJUSTING STEM CLOCKWISE TO MAKE THE MAIN VALVE CLOSE SLOWER. CAD REVISION RECORD - DO NOT REVISE MANUALLY 1-71 SUFFIX D (CHECK VALVES WITH COCK): WHEN OUTLET PRESSURE IS HIGHER THAN INLET PRESSURE, CHECK VALVE (D2) OPENS AND (01) CLOSES. THIS DIRECTS THE HIGHER OUTLET - a PRESSURE INTO THE MAIN VALVE COVER AND THE MAIN VALVE CLOSES. SUFFIX S (OPENING SPEED CONTROL) m FLOW CONTROL (S) CONTROLS THE OPENING SPEED OF THE MAIN VALVE. SEE SHEET 1 TURN THE ADJUSTING STEM CLOCKWISE TO MAKE THE MAIN VALVE OPEN SLOWER. SUFFIX Y (Y -STRAINER) A Y -PATTERN STRAINER IS INSTALLED IN THE PILOT SUPPLY LINE TO PROTECT THE PILOT SYSTEM FROM FOREIGN PARTICLES. THE STRAINER SCREEN MUST BE CLEANED PERIODICALLY. V CHECK UST FOR PROPER OPERATION: ( ) SYSTEM VALVES OPEN UPSTREAM AND DOWNSTREAM. ( ) AIR REMOVED FROM THE MAIN VALVE COVER AND PILOT SYSTEM AT ALL HIGH POINTS. ( ) CK2 COCKS (B1), (B2) & (D3) OPEN (OPTIONAL FEATURE). ( ) PERIODIC CLEANING OF STRAINER (Y) IS RECOMMENDED (OPTIONAL FEATURE). ( ) CORRECT VOLTAGE TO SOLENOID CONTROL (6). ( ) CV FLOW CONTROLS (C) AND (S) OPEN AT LEAST 1/4 TURN (OPTIONAL FEATURE). J 'THIS DRA111NG 15 THE PROPERTY OF CLA-VAL CO. ANO SAME AND COPIES MADE THEREOF. IF ANY. SHAH BE RETURNED TO IT UPON DEMAND. DEUVERY AND DISCLOSURE HEREOF ARE SOLELY UPON CONDITION THAT THE SANE SHALL NOT BE USED, COPi D OR REPRODUCED. NOR SHALL THE SUBJECT HEREOF BE DISCLOSED IN ANY MANNER TO ANYONE FCR ANY PURPOSE. EXCEPT AS HERON AUTHORIZED. WITHOUT PPoOR WRITTEN APPROVAL OF CLA-VAL CO. THIS °RAMC 15 SUBMITTED CONFIDENTIALLY AND MAY NOT BE USED IN THE MANUFACTURE OF ANY MATERIAL OR PRODUCT OTHER THAN SUCH MATERIALS ANO PRODUCTS FURNSHEO TO CLA-VAL CO. WHETHER OR N01 THE EQUIPMENT OR INFORMATION 5110Wx HEREON IS PATENTED OR OTHERWISE PROTECTED, FULL 11111 AND COPYPoGHTS, IF ANY, IN AND TO THIS DRAWING AND/OR INFORMATION DELIVERED OR SUBMITTED ARE FULLY RESERVED CLA-VAL CO.' 2000 I U SERIES, 0 ¥MAAII1FACUIPFDThALt?WA ' • , OVIAAIGE'CONNEBTIONBAVAILABLE .524.9006 • : .FAR:847.524.9007 • 800.323,0§ websiie: www.apcovalves.com • e-mail: factory@apcovalvesf0* Y4 -g, with WATER DIFFUSER EXCLUSIVE! DOUBLE ACTING THROTTLING DEVICE PATENTED WHY USE IT .. . Air must be vented from the pump discharge column to the atmosphere and not forced into the water p lir q system. Without air venting, problems are certain to develop. Air entrapped in the water system 10 will restrict water flow. This results in consumer complaints about air in the water and can cause pressure surges and water hammer with each pump start-up and shutdown. Surges and water 1 hammer are the main cause for costly damage to piping and water system components. 1 WHERE TO USE IT. . 0 Install the Vertical Turbine Air Vacuum Valve on the pump discharge as close to the check valve 0, as possible. (See Bulletin 769: Which Check Valve Should I Use?) FIELD TESTED... After years of laboratory and field testing, under actual operating conditions and in co-operation with leading Vertical Turbine Pump Manufacturers, we determined that no vertical turbine pump installations are identical. Instead, each has its own characteristics, pump capacity, efficiency, well depths and head conditions -- all too many variables for a standard AirNacuum Valve to satisfy. So, APCO developed an Air Valve for Vertical Turbine Pumps using a Water Diffuser, Throttling Device or Surge Check to compensate for the variables. APCO Check Valve WATER DIFFUSER OR SURGE CHECK. Sizes W" through 3" are fitted with 0 water diffusers...larger sizes with © surge checks. APCO water diffusers perform much like water faucet strainers, breaking down the solid water column force into a smooth non-destructive flow. Similarly, surge checks absorb solid water column shock and break it down to smooth non -shock flow into the air valve. In this manner, the water diffuser and surge check facilitate positive water closure of the Vertical Turbine Air Valve without water hammer, shock, or damage to the pump, valves, or other system components. OLD STYLE (ONE WAY) THROTTLING DEVICE Throttling Devices have been used on Vertical Turbine Air Valves for more than sixty years. All have the same operational design weakness of one way flow regulation to restrict air out. Restricting air out is an excellent pump start procedure. It establishes back pressure on the rising column of water, thereby greatly reducing shock, pressure surge and hammer when the water column hits the closed pump discharge check valve. Certainly an excellent procedure to minimize risk of damage to pump, valves and piping, from shock with each pump start. However, what about pump stop procedure? Herein lies the design weakness. On pump stop, the pump discharge check valve closes and the Vertical Turbine Air Valve opens allowing air to re-enter the pump column to prevent vacuum and/or water column separation. As the old style Throttling Device was adjusted to restrict air out, air re-entry also has the same restriction. Result? Vacuum and water column separation can occur damaging pump seals, packings, and gasketed joints. Additionally, the pump may be called to start while the column is still full putting a severe strain on the pump shaft, motors and electrical controls. Solution? EXCLUSIVEnd eNG lectric OUBLE 'DEVICE APCO's Double Acting Throttling Device with Exclusive Throttling Air-Out/Full Flow Air -In design feature. Now, regardless of the amount of air throttling out, there is assured full line capacity air inflow on pump stop to positively prevent vacuum and water column separation in the pump. The Double Acting Throttling Device is highly recommended. OPERATION: The Teflon tapered plug is pushed ahead into the throttle position by a very light weight stainless steel spring and it stays in this position due to the force of air being discharged from the pump suction on pump start. On pump stop, the tapered plug moves from its throttle air -out position to the full air -in position, due to negative pressure inside and atmospheric forces of air rushing in. The desired tapered plug position for throttling air -out is regulated by tuming the stainless steel adjusting screw. When satisfactory throttling of air is achieved, lock the adjusting screw in place with the stainless steel lock nut to prevent tampering. Double Acting Throttling Devices are available for larger sizes as well. 178 SIZE MODEL 1/2" 141DAT 1" 142DAT 2" 144DAT 3" 146DAT l SLOW CLOSING AIR VALVES HOW THEY WORK.. These AirNacuum Valves have large orifices for exhausting air from deep well pump columns on pump start They close when water enters the valve and remain dosed until the water drains and the pressure drops to atmospheric. Then the valve immediately opens to allow air to re-enter the column to prevent vacuum or water column separation. A Slow Closing Air Valve is a standard AirNacuum Valve Q mounted on top of Surge Check ©. The Surge Check Unit operates on the differential between the kinetic energy in the relative velocity flows of air and water. The air passes through unrestricted, but when the water rushes into the Surge Check, the disc closes and slows the rate of water flow into the Air Valve by means of throttling holes in the disc. This insures gentle closing of the AirNacuum Valve and as soon as the valve is closed the Surge Check disc automatically returns to its normal open position ready for the next cycle. See Bulletin 673 for more information on Surge Check Valves APCO Check Valve *40via ow 41, • • 1 • • APCO BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR ISOLATION It is good engineering practice to install isolation Valves below the Air Valve (as shown below). Use APCO Butterfly Valves instead of gate valves for this purpose. APCO Butterfly Valves are reliable, economical and much shorter than gate valves, permitting a savings of height in the pump house. LARGER VALVES SIZES 4" AND LARGER • SERIES 1900 VALVE SIZE MODEL NO. A 17El 1204 go El1208®®®® ®®W ESFMITTil EIETICHEMEMEI B FEU 250L8 507h 50% Seat Detail AirNacuum Valve 125 LB: 14" & Larger SURGE CHECK VALVE GATE VALVE OR BALL VALVE SERIES 1200 C 180 AIRNACUUM VALVES FOR VERTICAL TURBINE PUMP INSTALLATION STEP No. 1 Check the pump curve for G.P.M. capacity at no head condition. STEP No. 2 Enter chart with G.P.M. to determine the size of the valve. STEP No. 3 If valves are to be installed inside the pump house, specify the discharge connection. Sizes 3", 4" and 6" are available with screwed or flanged discharge connections. Size 8" and larger are available with flanged connection only. STEP No. 4 Determine if automatic air release is required. Air Gauge Apco AirNacuum Valve with Double Acting Throttling Device PATENTED Pipe Coupling fP• Apco Meter Blow -off Main Check Tee and Gate Valve valve valve Sample Co ck Air Line Well Casing Pump Column (EXAMPLE ONLY) The selection table shown at left will satisfy typical Deep Well Turbine pump installa- tions which use a Silent Check or Conventional Swing Check valve, as shown above. For High Service Vertical Turbine pump installations which utilize positive shut-off type discharge Check Valves, contact our Engineering Department and a specific size will be recommended. '11 the turbine is scheduled to run for prolonged periods (6-8 hours) without stopping. automatic air release valves should be added. :Air Valves •for-Ue"rficat:_Tu"r. pne�eimps%stjalrNVeti Jarg' '?permit:largequantitiesof : c .5 ;The'!mairrvave paftss5h itie__Yyyt.fil-rsMqt�`,el='i*ei'..Lci'rC,e i�"tft�?wqC�na.[ttf'Jl? dafge.l651% Closure:Ttte:sgat'.shall;slpfL�into=ftie.7aail.oc;covey� : .',:: c=.. i� :�'-"yrs:.... _. ....•:....... -...._ .. :;Sizes^.1%2741ipoLgtj 3 th?eaded::filafiged t:oi TFie-float'sba11:6e: stainles$steel;, ti Tlie disC,harge Qf)fcei"shall?tie=fitted, itht a<G ,-jtwonthe'risiri .cbl mri.otwater.toeltniiriatedama iil. Iito'ttie shall autorrtaticaily_: rpen;,allowing'fulldlne:.uprestdct salr �i2a''eritryit Valve''exterlorfo?l minted„wttki>UnivefsaFMbtal`p`i,}'rr}er;prfjtlT:2'a ;'Materials of.cdsuucyan`hall'be ceftifieipontoiiil'iriy}to`gollgv6Jtn '2ii6lyS:and:Cdve'"- '0oat `" ' <; ' l9ta tess,;ateel._,;,; :<Seat_ y'{, :4•;i =lNater diffus Na's��''�; Fil ouble-Actingilatrotthn ;bevtce Ad.:._Malatilerirg. &''hut -F_. iStal I sssrs screwsteel I 11f: .: '. 'Sra 1GSS!�Stee1 Valve to be_APCO=Ser_ies'.140DAT AirIVatuuirr Valveiwttli 009.6 10 Schaumburg, llfin' i • tom ;Regulateandrgstiict;air:,uerili, hls ;a d cCie s:. valveon purnpstait. On p"dr ,p htoi H i `t?from',. ` forming in the:suption:.Coluiiin FI$A '`;1� � : �l,":,_ for use with 'Potvable>Water:^ _Obtlons:_ hr�f;"{•'-';:. , .: ASTM.A126 t, 'r,•,J$"�:s :ASTM .A4$'Cl'3U::' `t;= ^'ASTM ASTM' Ey,16 .i: ASTM A343431'6;: '<t ry ,.AMS:3E51' ng.9- „_ aRewce.&.WaterDiifuser�a&`"mantifaeti!iii VALVE & PRIMER CORPORATION 1420 S. WRIGHT BLVD. SCHAUMBURGRP, RAIL 6019I3-4599 847.524.9000 FAX:847.524.9007 800.323.6969 website: www.apcovalves.com • e-mail: factory@apcovalves.com NOTE: See Bulletin 613 for Slow Closing Air Valve Specifications. VALVE & PROPER CORPORATION HERESY RESERVES THE MOW TO CHANGE ANY COMPONENT PARTS WHICH.IN TME OPMON OF ITS ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT. WRL IMPROVE TIE PRODUCT OR INCREASE ITS SERVICEABILITY. DIMENSIONS AFIE FOR ILLUSTRATIVE PURPOSES ONLY. PLEASE CONFIRM ALL DIMENSIONAL PIFORMATION 0(15 VALVE & PRIMER CORPORATION ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT. AIR / VACUUM VALVE with DOUBLE ACTING THROTTLING DEVICE AND WATER DIFFUSER G MAX. F B A DIA E 1 'PATENTED in* D NPT NPT PIPE PLUG J-0 0000000000 d'0 00000 000 000 00 oc 00 00 00 000 000 0000 00000 0000000 00000 000000 00000 0000. 000 00. 000 00. 00 00' 00 C NPT' 6.5 SIZE 2" 1' 2" 3" MODEL No, 141DAT 142DAT 144DAT 146DAT A DIA 544 7 9292 STEEL ASTM A307 GR.B ' B82 SEAT 11 152 164 C NPT 1 1 2 3 D NPT z 1 2 3 E 16 12 24 3s F 8 a 12 2e G 4 6 64 82 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 DESIGN FOR: 125 LB. CLASS RATING 200 PSI MAX. NON -SHOCK SERVICE. SPECIFY WORKING PRESSURE PSI AVAILABLE WITH 125 LB. FLANGE INLET. ALSO AVAILABLE FOR 150 LB., 250 LB., 300 LB., AND 600 LB. CLASS RATING. 3" 146DAT DETAIL DET DESCRIPTION MATERIAL 1 BODY CAST IRON ASTM A126 GR.B 2 COVER CAST IRON ASTM A126 GR.B 3 COVER GASKET LEXIDE (non -asbestos) 4 COVER BOLT STEEL ASTM A307 GR.B ' 6 SEAT BUNA-N 14 FLOAT STAINLESS STEEL ASTM A240 T304 24 BAFFLE' 1DELRIN ASTM D4181 26 FLOAT STEM BUSHING 2 BRASS ASTM B16 33 FLOAT STEM BRASS ASTM 816 34 SEAT RETAINING SCREW STAINLESS STEEL 18-8 39 THROTTLING DEVICE * MALLEABLE IRON 41 FLOAT STEM GUIDE 3 BRASS ASTM B16 44 WATER DIFFUSER BRASS (commercial) * DOUBLE ACTING THROTTLING DEVICE (PATENTED) 1 STANDARD MATERIAL ON SIZE 3' IS CAST IRON ASTM A48 CL.30 2 FLOAT STEM BUSHING IS REQUIRED ON SIZE 3' 3 FLOAT STEM GUIDE 15 NOT REQUIRED ON SIZE 3 CERTIFIED BY' DATE DATE 09-01-03 VALVE AND PRIMER CORPORATION DRWG. NO. S-140DAT SPECIFICATIONS OTHER SIDE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SPECIFICATIONS September 1, 2003 SERIES 14ODAT AIR / VACUUM VALVE WITH DOUBLE ACTING THROTTLING DEVICE AND WATER DIFFUSER Air Valves for Vertical Turbine Pumps shall vent large quantities of air out thru the orifice when pump starts and close tight when liquid enters then permit large quantities of air to re-enter thru the orifice when pump stops to prevent vacuum forming in the pump suction column. The main valve parts shall be a body, cover, baffle, float and seat. The baffle shall shield the float from direct impact of air and water to prevent premature float closure. The seat shall slip fit into the baffle or cover and lock in place without any distortion, but easily removable. Sizes Y2" thru 3" - entire float and baffle assembly must be shrouded with a water diffuser to prevent water slamming the float shut. All outlets to be threaded or flanged. The float shall be stainless steel center guided (not free floating) for positive seating and rated 1000 psi non -shock service (static). The discharge orifice shall be fitted with a DOUBLE-ACTING THROTTLING DEVICE, Patented , to regulate and restrict air venting and to establish a pressure loading on the rising suction column of water to eliminate damaging shock to the pump, controls and check valve on pump start. On pump stop, the DOUBLE ACTING THROTTLING DEVICE shall automatically open, allowing full line unrestricted air re-entry to prevent vacuum from forming in the suction column. Valve exterior to be painted with Universal Primer Paint as accepted by the FDA for use in contact with Potable Water. Materials of construction shall be certified conforming to the following A.S.T.M. specifications: Body, cover Baffle [1/2",1" & 2"] Baffle [3"] Float* Seat Water Diffuser Double Acting Throttling Device Housing Adj. Screw & Nut Spring Plug Exterior paint Cast iron Delrin Cast iron Stainless steel Buna-N Brass (Patented) Malleable iron Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Teflon Universal Primer ASTM A126 Gr.B ASTM D4181 ASTM A48 CL -30 ASTM A240 ASTM B16 ASTM A47 ASTM A276 T304 ASTM A313 T316 AMS 3651 FDA Approved for Potable Water Contact *Float design may vary on certain sizes. Note: Other materials available. Valve to be APCO Series 14ODAT Air / Vacuum Valve with Double Acting Throttling Device & Water Diffuser, as manufactured by Valve & Primer Corporation, Schaumburg, Illinois, U.S.A. 1420 S. Wright BLVD. Schaumburg, IL 60193-4599 847-524-9000 FAX 847-524-9007 800-323-6969 VALVE AND PRIMER CORPORATION WEBSITE: www.apcovalves.com EMAIL: factory@apcovalves.com lMN;UFAOffittEp TO AyWA STANDARE)S,T 4,541 _.„” ''•ISOTtAii/dECONNECTIONS -.;(pf111/AILABCE' - .••!!": "Ve - , SERIES 1800 CliTOIVI COMBINATION D'UPLEX POpY VALVE A I 1420 WRIGHT BLVD. • SCHAUMBURG, IL 60193-4599 847.524.9000 • FAX:847.524.9007 • 800.323.6969 website: www.apcovalves.com • e-mail: factoty0apcovalves.com • ,14,1041. • Option: Mushroom caps for outlet MATERIALS USED IN BOTH STYLE COMBINATION AIR VALVES Body, Cover, 1-4" . .. . . . . Ductile Iron Body, Cover, 6-8" Cast Iron Float ... .. . ...... ... Stainless Steel Seat ... ... ...... .... Buna-N Lever Frame (1"-4" size).... . ..... Delrin Lever Frame (6"-8" size) Cast Iron ALL OTHER INTERNAL PARTS STAINLESS STEEL OR BRONZE 8" STYLE BUILT FOR 300 PSI SERVICE 1" THROUGH 6" STYLE SPECIFY IF OPERATING PRESSURES BELOW 50 P.S.I. TO SIZE AIR VALVES FOR PIPELINE SERVICE USE APCO AIR VALVE COMPUTER orAPSLIDE COMPUTER SOFTWARE ILLUSTRATED ABOVE PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS • Height 10" • Width 7" •Length 11" • Weight 35 lbs. INLET 1" PIPE THREAD OUTLET EXCEPT POPPET 14'5C ILLUSTRATED ABOVE PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS • Height 12 1/4" • Width 8" • Length 14" • Weight 75 lbs. INLET 2" PIPE THREAD OUTLET ILLUSTRATED ABOVE PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS • Height 15 1/2" • Width 10" • Length 16" • Weight 100 lbs. INLET 3" PIPE THREAD OUTLET 125 & 250 L8. FLANGES ALSO AVAILABLE HEIGHT FLANGED 161/2" PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS • Height 17 1/8" • Width 11" • Length 18" • Weight 170 lbs. INLET 4" PIPE THREAD OUTLET 125 & 250 LB. FLANGES ALSO AVAILABLE HEIGHT FLANGED 19" ILLUSTRATED ABOVE PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS • Height 27 1/4" • Width 13" • Length 18 3/8" • Weight 205 lbs. INLET 1258,250 LB. FLANGE OUTLET OPTIONS • PLAIN WITH HOOD • THREADED • FLANGED SEE.ABOVE DRAWING PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS • Height 25 3/4" • Width 17 1/2" • Length 22 1/4" • Weight 300 lbs. INLET 125 & 250 L8. FLANGE OUTLET OPTIONS • PLAIN WITH HOOD (AS SHOWN) • FLANGED THERE ARE BASICALLY TWO TYPES OF AIR VALVES: 1 1 TYPE 1. AIRNACUUM VALVES with ()LARGE ORIFICE to vent Targe volumes of air for efficient filling and draining of pipelines. This protects against vacuum and water column separation or pipeline collapse. TYPE 2. AIR RELEASE VALVES with (SMALL ORIFICE for continuous venting of air pockets as they accumulate in a pressurized pipeline. When the above types are combined, the result is a COMBINATION AIR VALVE. The Combination Air Valve is available in a SINGLE BODY DOUBLE ORIFICE shown here, or in a DUPLEX arrangement (see Back Page). The single body is most popular due to its smaller overall size and resulting space saving inside a valve vault. It is available in 1" to 8" sizes. HOW IT WORKS: Sizes 1" through 6" incorporate a poppet (or plug) which rests freely inside the lever frame. The center stem of the poppet has a SMALL ORIFICE through it. When water enters the main valve body it raises the float and float arm which puts the needle, attached to the arm, in contact with the poppet stem while lifting the poppet to the shut-off position against the LARGE ORIFICE. As air accumulates inside the main valve body the water is displaced. The float arm falls away from the poppet stem to expose the small orifice and the pocket of air is vented. Water re-enters the main valve body lifting the float arm back to the shut-off position and the cycle repeats as air accumulates. As long as the main valve body is under pressure, the poppet stays closed because the pressure differential across the large orifice is more than the poppet can overcome. If, however, a negative pressure occurs inside the main valve body, the poppet will drop open to allow air in and prevent a vacuum from forming in the pipeline. Size 8" functions in the same manner, but, instead of a poppet, a float is used for shutting off the large orifice and a separate internal float operated lever mechanism is incorporated with a small orifice for venting smaller pockets of air when the system is pressurized. Every Combination Air Valve is hydrostatically seat and shell tested before it leaves our factory to insure quality performance in the field. WHERE TO INSTALL 1 COMBINATION AIR VALV at peaks and sharp change in gradient due to possibility of column separation and vacuum Ala HYDRAULICALLY CONTROLLED AIR/VACUUM VALVE or where secondary singes due to repining of previously separated water column co Id occur. AIR RE VALVE Apno an long ascending stretch at 1/4 to 1/2 mile intervals TYPICAL PIPELINE SHOWING ITS HYDRAULIC GRADIENT HYDRAULIC & THE POSITION OF NECESSARY AIR VALVES GRADIENT HYDRAULICALLY CONTROLLED AIRNACUUM VALVE where secondary surges due to rejoining of \. previously separated water column could occur. or APCO COMBINATION AIR VALVE----> at peaks and sharp charge in gradient due to possibirrty of column separation and vacuum RE" tEASEVALVE DATUM on long ho zontat and descending stretch at 1/4 to 12 mile intervals APCO AIRNACUUM VALVE at peaks and sharp change in gradient near end o1 line where no significant amount of air is anticipated RESERVOIR OR DISCHARGE AIRNACUUM VALVE an pump discharge before check valve (not necessary for pumps with positive suction head) or hydaufcay CON- TROLLED AIR/VACUUM VALVE where a ckscharge gate valve is normally dosed during Pip start-up to drop head NOTE INSTALLING MANWAYS AT INTERVALS IN LARGER SIZE PIPELINES PROVIDES AN e(CELLENT POINT TO INSTALLAIR VALVES. NOTE Please specify if pressure is below 20 psi. ORIFICE SIZES for 300 psi working pressure • AIRNACUUM VALVE 1N AIR RELEASE VALVE COMBINATION AIR VALVE HYDRAULICALLY CONTROLLED AIRNACUUM VALVE DISCHARGE CAPACITIES FOR COMBINATION AIR VALVE CURVES SHOWN ARE ACTUAL FLOW CAPACITIES AT 14.7 PSI BAROMETRIC PRESSURE AND 70° F TEMPERATURE BASED ON ACTUAL TEST. THESE FIGURES ARE NOT ONLY THE FLOW CAPACmES ACROSS THE ORIFICE BUT FLOW ACROSS THE ENTIRE VALVE IN THE TEST SET-UP, APPROACH VELOCITY TO THE VALVE IS NEGLIGIBLE THEREFORE ACTUAL CAPACITY EXCEEDS THE VALUES SHOWN ON CHART. TEST CONDUCTED BY: PHIWP PETROLEUM COMPANY ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT - TEST DIVISION EOMOND PLANT OCTOBER 1, 1961. 1" 2" 3" 4" 6" an VALVE SIZE AND MODEL NO 143C 145C 147C 149C 150C 151C 0 5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 100 200 300 AIR FLOW THROUGH VALVE IN STANDARD CUBIC FEET OF FREE AIR PER SECOND (SCFS) T.. SERIES 1100A EACH CUSTOM COMBINATION AIR VALVE CONSISTS OF ONE APCO AIRNACUUM VALVE, ONE APCO AIR RELEASE VALVE & OPTIONAL ONE APCO BUTTERFLY VALVE._SHIPPED COMPLETELY PIPED AND ASSEMBLED. SEAT DETAIL AIR/VACUUM VALVE 125 LB: 14" & LARGER 250 LB: ALL SIZES PRICE OF EACH CUSTOM COMBINATION AIR VALVE INCLUDES 1" PIPING AND 1" GATE OR BALL VALVE. SEAT DETAIL AW 125 LB: 14" & LARGER 250 Le: AU. SIZES GATE or BALL VALVE Available in 125, 250, 600 and 900 psi classes for those special jobs where you want the very best! GATE or BALL VALVE COMBINATION AIRNACUUM Custom Combination Air Valves are recommended where operating w/AIR RELEASE VALVE pressures exceed 300 psi or size requirements exceed 4"* VALVE SIZE MODEL N0. x1DTHWill ® maim ®Eli Tr r.. 3' 6" 1806 221'4 221'4 23 Ya 8 �.4 8" 14 t„ 25,i, s, 10" 1810 27 N 261 27 41: 12r' I+ ,tat 324 `d4 3e;EMI REVartgl 14" 1814 41'!a 301/2 301/2 16" '101 4SF 4`;32 ,, :6A 18" 1818 42 34 34 20" [REM 10 1/24�., 24" 1824 53 48 48 .'%S'T':w+j'�'�'4x<C`: Fad -415161t: SIZING To determine the correct size Single Body or Duplex Body Combination Air Valves to use on each high point of the pipeline, refer to Bulletin 610. use the APCO Air Valve Computer (available on request) or you may send a copy of your pipeline profile to our Engineering Department * Another feature to recommend the use of Custom Combination Air Valves is the side mounted Air Release Valve which can be any of four valves as shown in the chart below. With the addition of the Air Release Valve the orifice is much larger and hence the venting capac- ity much greater than the orifices in the single body Combination Air Valve. This is important where large volumes of air are anticipated after the pipeline is filled and operating. TABLE OF ORIFICE SIZES MAXIMUM ORIFICEWHICH CAN BE USEDWITH FOLLOWING PRESSURES COMBINATION AIRNACUUM w/ AIR RELEASE WITH BUTTERFLY VALVE VALVE SIZE MODEL N0. mum ® / sm. 6" 1106A 2234 271/4 27 Y4 8" OA WSW A 10" 1110A 27 Ya 33'h 34 12" ;i=WA- REVartgl 14" 1114A 41 T/a 39' 39' 16" ,, :6A >'1 'li • -Y.A STANDARD ORIFICES ARE IN BLUE nmbit tion AirValy e'a dshall sfiut p ;e orifice•whgn>tl lbat'.and sg0.,11l167; rt:prcenter.gematureastit t- =tae.uide�d, at'iii[nyaive.:;stiall?Fide Cuc Jiir Retease:V Ive`53 :The%iY1ir Release a, jeayy stairilessfee en s: 4D0�1.is:spe ti t oq t1#e nped.fo •speisia irrically 0„Ainir e pe • readyfiir-lnsiallaiion"o constructionvshE °Seats` k ": Eloat's� `Fxterii6Opti . e Series.1800`Cus blTi,y Bittteiily Valve as mania ,. I4 VALVE &PRIMER CORPORATION 1420 WRIGHT BLVD. SCHAUMBURG, IL 60193-4599 847.524.9000 FAX:847.524.9007 800.323.6969 website: www.apcovalves.com • e-mail: factory@apcovalves.com 16pOt42 10v;:ati Cs chum/AinRelease Va{V VALVE & PR44ER CORPORATION HEREBY RESERVES TME RIGHT TO CHANGE ANY COMPONENT PARTS WHICH. N THE OPINION OP ITS ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT, WLL IMPROVE TNF PRODUCT OR INCREASE ITS SERVICEABLrTY. DIMENSIONS ARE FOR 4LUSTRATIVE PURPOSES ONLY PLEASE CORRWM ALL OUAENSIONAL NEORMAT5" MRH VALVE & PRRAER CORPORATION ENONEERWG DEPARTMENT. SCOPE OF LINE: AWWA IN -PLANT RUBBER SEATED BUTTERFLY VALVES Model 2FII Butterfly Valve Monoflange MKII Wafer Butterfly Valve Sizes: 3 through 20 inches Body Style: Wafer -type Pressure Class: - Class 150B per AWWA Standard C504 Working Pressure: 150 psig Rubber Seat: - Bonded seat -in -body extends over inner surface to form self-gasketing feature Actuation Options: - Pratt hand lever - MDT manual actuator with AWWA nut, handwheel or chainwheel - Pratt Dura-Cyl hydraulic or pneumatic cylinder - Pratt Positron electric actuator Model 2FII Flanged Butterfly Valve Sizes: 3 through 20 inches Body Style: Flanged x flanged ends Other Body Style Options: - Mechanical joint - Victaulic - Flanged & mechanical joint - Push -on - Push -on & flanged Pressure Class: - Class 150B per AWWA Standard C504 Working Pressure: 150 psig Flanges: - Flat faced and drilled in accordance with ANSI B16.1, Class 125 standards. Rubber Seat: Bonded seat -in -body Actuation Options: - Pratt hand lever - MDT manual actuator with AWWA nut, handwheel or chainwheel - Pratt Dura-CyI hydraulic or pneumatic cylinder - Pratt Positron electric actuator Monoflange MKII Butterfly Valve Please see the outside back cover for a listing of other Pratt products page 1 Henry Pratt Company 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 FEATURES AND BENEFITS OF PRATT MODELS 2FII AND MKII FEATURE Seat -in -body design Seat molded in recessed body cavity, protected by metal on 3 sides Valve withstood proof -of -design testing of 100,000 cycles - AWWA only requires 10,000 cycle proof -of -design testing Through -disc pinning Symmetrical Tens -shaped disc Nonmetallic bearings Chevron V -type packing BENEFIT - Reduces seat failure due to corrosive buildup in the valve and pipeline. No hardware to loosen. No periodic maintenance required. Rubber protected from flow media to increase seat life. - Proven reliability over the life of the valve - Provides a tight disc -to -shaft pin connection, greatly reducing the possibility of loosening through vibration - Higher Cv : lower head Toss results in energy savings for customer's system - Prevents galvanic corrosion and provides lower coefficient of friction - Self-adjusting, lasts the life of the valve Standard Material Type of Material Body Disc Shaft Specifications for Materials of Construction Cast Iron: ASTM A48, Class 40 (MKII body) ASTM A126, Class B (2FII body) Stainless Steel: ASTM A276 Type 304 (Shaft) 0255 Cast Cast Iron Iron 316 edge SS, Type 304 Other materials available upon request. page 3 Henry Pratt Company J DIMENSIONAL DATA: MODEL 2MII MECHANICAL JOINT END BUTTERFLY VALVE X= PIPE LAYING LENGTH 0 D. PIPE Installation Diagram Note: The following items to be furnished by others unless otherwise specified in contract: Bolts, Glands, Nuts, Gaskets See Note 1. PIPE SIZE PIPE O.D. PIPE I.D. MIN. 4 4.80 3.10 6 6.90 5.69 8 9.05 7.65 10 11.10 9.93 12 13.20 11.70 14 15.30 12.91 16 17.40 14.91 18 19.50 16.95 20 21.60 18.96 -Avaiable in sizes 4 through 20 inches 12 10: 11% 17'%6 91/2 11 8-% 161 41 20 16 17 27%2 12% 1% 14-% 25% 5% All dimensions shown in inches. Mechanical joint end is in compliance with ANSI 21.11. ENSIONAL DATA: MODEL 2MFII MECHANICAL JOINT AND FLANGE END BUTTERFLY VALVE FT -.NO 8 SIZE OF BOLTS GO.BOLT CIRCLE NOM. YA VE SIZE - A C. RugF 00 o..os.uu rs00133 NOL ES N. IAPOER114 40 BOLT OM See Note 1. LAYING PIPE 6 6'% 5'6 11 11 6'A a 116 116 8-% 6-% 9% 9% 41/2 tqi. �,� ., P7 ' !x� y . , i i,, 6.. ' w � w ti s. T t%' "-�' � S � ,f's -•. 10 9 91/2 6 15%6 8% 4% 1% 116 12-1/2 8-% 141 14 6'% 4 111/2 1 21 20%6 9% 5% 1% 1%6 12-1 10-% 18% 18% 6' 18 14'% 151 25 24% 10 : 1 1646 11/26 16-1% 12-1 22' 231 6% PIPE SIZE PIPE O.D. PIPE I.D. MIN. 4 4.80 3.10 6 6.90 5.69 8 9.05 7 10 11.10 9.93 12 13. 11.70 14 30 12.91 16 17.40 14.91 19.50 16.95 ' 20 21.60 18.96 PIPE I.D. Installation Diagram Note: Bolts, Nuts, Glands and Gaskets furnished by others unless otherwise specified in contract. -Available in sizes 6 through 20 inches. All dimensions shown in inches. Note 1 Min. Pipe I.D. value has zero clearance between mating pip • . nd valve disc. Properly sized piping must include appropriate clearance. Valves for the 21st Century page 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ACTUATOR L M N P 0 R NUMBER SIZE OF TURNS MDT -2S 4-11/16 2 2-1/8 2 4-1/2 4-1/4 8-1/4 32 MDT -3S 5-5/8 2-7/16 3-1/4 3-5/32 5-5/8 5-3/8 10-3/8 30 MDT -4S 6-3/8 2-27/32 3-3/8 4 7-5/16 6-3/4 11-5/16 40 MDT -5 7-9/16 3-15/32 4-1/2 5-1/2 8-3/4 10 17 44 VALVE DIMENSIONS VALVE SIZE A 8 C D E F G 3 4-3/4 3-1/4 7-1/2 5 3/4 4--5/8 6 4 5-1/2 3-1/2 9 5 15/16 8-5/8 7-1/2 6 6-1/2 5-1/8 11 5 1 8--3/4 9-1/2 8 7-3/4 6-1/2 13-1/2 6 1-1/8 8-3/4 11-3/4 10 9 9-7/8 16 8 1-3/16 12- -7/8 14-1/4 12 10-1/2 11-3/8 19 8 1-1/4 12--7/8 17 14 11-7/8 12-3/4 21 8 1-3/8 12- -1 18-3/4 16 13-1/2 14-3/8 23-1/2 8 1-7/16 16- -1 21-1/4 18 14-3/8 15-1/4 25 8 1-9/16 16--1-1/8 22-3/4 20 16 16-7/8 27-1/2 8 1-11/16 20--1-1/8 25 0hR� O n O D/2 } I E J TYP A�TUATQR POSITION 01 NOTES G= BOLT CIRCLE C= FLANGE OD BURIED SERVICE NUT 4-1/2 __I:ifMAX F= NO & SIZE OF BOLTS (1 25# STD.LAYOUT STRADDLE CENTERLINE) FLANGE BOLT HOLES ARE 1/8" LARGER THAN BOLT DIAMETER TAPPED HOLES "F" UNC 2B X "E" DEEP VALVE NO. TAPPED HOLES SIZE (EACH FLANGE) 3"-16" ALL THRU HOLES 18" & 20" 2 -TOP; 2 -BOTTOM 1 ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN INCHES. "0" DIMENSION ±1/16" FOR 3" THRU 10" VALVES. "D" DIMENSION ±1/8" FOR 12" THRU 20" VALVES 2. DIMENSIONS AND DRILLING OF END FLANGES CONFORM TO THE AMERICAN CAST IRON FLANGE STANDARDS. CLASS 125 (B161) 3 (RECOMMENDATIONS FOR MATING FLANGES) WHERE INSULATING BUSHINGS ARE USED, IT IS NECESSARY THAT BOLT HOLES BE DRILLED OVERSIZE BY AN AMOUNT EQUAL TO TWO TIMES THE INSULATING SLEEVE THICKNESS TO MAINTAIN THE SAME MINIMUM CLEARANCE FOR BOLTS 4 VALVES MANUFACTURED AND TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AWWA SPECIFICATIONS C -504 -LATEST CLASS 1508. REV DATE BY DESCRIPTION APP. HENRY PRATT COMPANY AURORA. ILL. MODEL 2F11 BUTTERFLY VALVE MDT W/BSN SCALE NONE DATE 12/07/04 DRAWN BY BZ CHECKED BY APPROVED 1 GA=BORDER DRWC. NO. GA -1 1300 REV 0 A/c ENSIONAL DATA: MODEL 2PII PUSH -ON JOINT END BUTTERFLY VALVE F.NO.0 SIZE OF BOLTS - FLANGE 00 X. LAYING LENGTH IPE O.D. See Note 1. Pipe Size Pipe O.D. Min. Pipe ID. 4 4.80 2.61 6 6.90 4.9 8 9.05 .22 10 11.1 9.22 12 .20 10.97 14 15.30 12.56 6 17.40 14.59 Installation Diagram Note: Rubber ring gaskets fumished by others unless otherwise specified in contract. - All dimensions shown in inches. - Available in sizes 4 through 16 inches. - D t :Se through 10" valves, ± ;6' for 12" and larger valves. - The valve end is designed for iron or PVC pipe with cast iron equivalent O.D.s (not for use with IPS O.D ipe.) with "Tyton" (Reg. T.M. or U. 'ipe & Foundry Co.) rubb• ring gasket. DIMENSIONAL DATA: MODEL 2FPII PUSH -ON X FLANGE END BUTTERFLY VALVE F.140 b SIZE OF BOLTS. 25 La STD LAYOUT STRADDLE CLINE ALL HOLES Ua. LARGER THAN SOLIDI, PIPE LAYING LENGTH 0.0. PIPE I.D. See Note 1. Pipe Size Pipe O.D. Min. Pipe I.D. 4 4.80 2.61 6 6.90 4.96 8 9.05 7.22 10 11.10 9.22 12 13.20 10.97 14 15.30 12.56 16 17.40 14.59 Note 1 Min. Pipe I.D. value has zero clearance between mating pipe and valve disc. Properly sized piping must include appropriate clearance Installation Diagram Note: Bolts, Nuts, and Rubber Gaskets fumished by others unless otherwise specified In contract. - AII dimensions shown in inches. - Available in sizes 4 through 12 inches. - D t''/,s" through 10" valves, ± %" for 12" and larger valves. - The valve end is designed for iron or PVC pipe with cast iron equivalent O.D.s (not for use with IPS O.D pipe.) - Use with "Tyton" (Reg. T.M. or U.S. Pipe & Foundry Co.) rubber ring gasket. page 7 Henry Pratt Company 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L_ IQT1000 & 2000 ACTUATORS R73 2.87" 0120 4.72 TERMINAL COVER STOP BOLTS NAME PLATE BATTERY PLUG 57 2224' DISPLAY WINDOW OPTIONAL OIL PLUG JL 06.8(0.27) EARTH POINT OPTIONAL CONDUIT ENTRIES. OPTIONAL OIL PLUG (BEHIND HANDWHEEL) HAND AUTO LOCKING BOLT HOLES 06.5 (1/4") HAND AUTO LEVER HAND WHEEL OPTIONAL OIL PLUG 2.68 t4--48 CoFG 1.89' VIEW ON ARROW "A" CONDUIT ENTRIES TAPPED 2*425x1 Sp (OPTIONAL ADAPTORS FOR M20,1/2".3/4",1"NPT,1 1/4",1 1/2". PG16 6 PG21). OPTIONAL OIL PLUG OPEN/CLOSE SWITCH LOCAL/REMOTE/ STOP SWITCH "A� NOTES: :REGISTERED DESIGN 000034863 :F12/FA12 /F14/FA14 BASE OPTION IS DETAILED TO SUIT THE RELEVENT COUPLING ARRANGEMENTS. rotor* IQT1000, 2000 DATA Date 180905 Scale 1 : 10 IOT2-3 4,1 r- 0176 6.93" IQT1000, 2000 SASES F12 BASE DETAILS 8.15 F12 / FA12 BASES 4 HOLES M12x1.7Spx22 DP MI -SPACED ON A 125 PCO (1505211 F12) 0176 6.93" NOTE POSITION OF 2 M6 CAPSCREWS. REMOVE IN ORDER TO WITHDRAW DRIVE COUPLING. FA12 BASE DETAILS 060 MAX (KEYED SHAFT) 2.36' 41MAX (SQUARE SHAFT) 1.61" 6 L N Winn; F12/FA12 COUPLING DETAILS 4 HOLES 1/2--13UNC x 22 DP MI -SPACED ON A 4.95" PCD (M55 SP -101 FA12) NOTE POSITION OF 2 M6 CAPSCREWS. REMOVE IN ORDER TO WITHDRAW DRIVE COUPLING. 066.9376 1 F14 / FA14 BASES F14 BASE DETAILS FA14 BASE DETAILS 4�45• 4 HOLES M16x2 0px22 DP �� EO5I5211 FD) A 140 PCO } ([505211 F14) 0176 i 011.°' • NOTE POSITION OF 2 M6 CAPSCREWS. REMOVE IN ORDER TO WITHDRAW DRIVE COUPLING. 6.93 8.15 0207 6.15 060 MAX (KEYED SHAFT) 2.36 41MAX (SQUARE SHAFT) 1.61 F14/FA14 COUPLING DETAILS 4 HOLES 5/8--11UNC x 22 OP MI -SPACED ON A 5.5_ PCO (1155 SP -101 FA14) NOTE POSITION OF 2 M6 CAPSCREWS. REMOVE IN ORDER TO WITHDRAW DRIVE COUPLING rotor* IQT1000, 2000 BASES Dote 210605 ScoLe 1:10 IOT2 EIC -2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 IQT1000 & 2000 ACTUATORS WITH FAILSAFE OPTION 30= 207 312 180= 1.18 . 12.28 7.09 TERMINAL COVER 6 BATTERY HOUSING CONDUIT ENTRIES 52 2.05" DISPLAY WINDOW STOP BOLTS NAME PLATE BATTERY PLUG OIL PLUGI - OPT -�- 06.8(1/4") EARTH POINT HAND WHEEL ����•� m OIL PLUG2 - OPT - --- - VIEW ON ARROW "A" CONDUIT ENTRIES TAPPED 2xM2Sxl.5p (OPTIONAL ADAPTORS FOR M20,1/2",3/4",1.NPT,1 1/4",1 1/2% PG16 6 PG21). OPEN/CLOSE SWITCH CONDUIT ENTRY2 - OPT OIL PLUG4 - OPT (BEHIND HANDWHEEL) HAND AUTO LOCKING BOLT HOLES 06.5 (1/4") HAND AUTO LEVER OIL PLUGS - OPT LOCAL/REMOTE/ STOP SWITCH "A" NOTES: :REGISTERED DESIGN 000034863 :F12/FA12 /F14/FA14 BASE OPTION 15 DETAILED TO SUIT THE RELEVENT COUPLING ARRANGEMENTS. rotor* IQT1000,2000 FS DATA Dote 180905 Scale 1 : 10 IOT2F5-2 MI BA -100 N61 BRONZE BALL VALVE TWO-PIECE, STANDARD -PORT 600 PSIG WOG / 150 PSIG SWP * THREADED ENDS MATERIALS LIST ITEM PART MATERIALS ASTM SPEC. 1 Body Cast Bronze B584 Cast Bronze (1 1/2" & 2") B62 2 Tailpiece Forged Brass B16 Cast Bronze (1" & 1 1/4") 8584 Cast Bronze (1 1/2" & 2") B62 3 Ball Brass w/ Hard Chrome Plating B283 4 Seat RPTFE, 15% Glass Filled 2.66 ' 2.84 3.00 65.2 69.6 73.5 ; 5 Stem Brass B124 6 Thrust Washer RPTFE, 25% Glass Filled 7 Packing PTFE 8 Packing Nut Brass B16 9 Handle Steel w/ Zinc Plating Commercial 10 Hand Grip Vinyl Saturated 11 Handle Nut Steel w/ Zinc Plating Commercial * Available with stainless steel trim PRESSURE - TEMPERATURE DATA VALVES RATED FOR VACUUM SERVICE TO 29 INCHES Hg. WORKING TEMPERATURE - C. 10 38 66 93 121 149 177 204 232 luu 600 UNITS 1 1/4" DN6 3/8" DN10 1/2" DN15 3/4" DN20 1" DN25 1-1/4" 1-1)2" 2" DN32 DN40 DN50 INCHES 1 0.38 mm 1 9.7 0.38 9.7 1 0.50 1 12.7 0.76 19.3 48, 41 500 INCHES ' 1.86 mm , 45.6 1.86 45.6 ' 2.19 i 53.7 1.10 27.0 2.64 64.7 1.30 31.9 3.17 77.7 1.58 38.7 3.50 1 3.96 j 4.30 85.8 97.0 ; 105.4 1.74 i 1.97 1 2.15 42.6 48.3 , 52.7 INCHES I 1.00 mm 24.5 1.00 I 24.5 INCHES 1 1.78 1.81 1 mm , 43.6 44.3 1 1.91 46.8 2.08 51.0 400 2.66 ' 2.84 3.00 65.2 69.6 73.5 ; INCHES 3.81 3.81 I 3.81 mm 1 93.3 93.3 11 93.3 p.----___ THREADY- SIZE 1114" NPT 3/8" NPT 11/2" NPT !_ I i 7 7 1 13 4.56 111.7 3/4" NPT 30 4.56 111.7 1" NPT 38 - 6.31 6.31 7.19 154.6 154.6 176.2 1-1/4" NPT '1.112" NPT 2" NPT _ 61 1 87 1 121 \ 34! 300 \IN 271 20, 131 200- 100 Saturated Steam \I 691 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 WORKING TEMPERATURE - F° Seat Material Rating DIMENSIONS 0 oe 0 W aCr' U./ OC t7 z OX fr 0 Chemical Feed and Supply Lines ANSI / NSF 61 BALL VALVE 9EA0 WATER QUALITY 8 6 MSS SP -110 ANSI/NSF61-8 U S SAFE DRINKING WATER ACT (SDWA) ASME A112.4.14 5 B A (DIA) B C D E F Cu UNITS 1 1/4" DN6 3/8" DN10 1/2" DN15 3/4" DN20 1" DN25 1-1/4" 1-1)2" 2" DN32 DN40 DN50 INCHES 1 0.38 mm 1 9.7 0.38 9.7 1 0.50 1 12.7 0.76 19.3 0.88 2.4 1.06 i 1.31 i 1.56 26.9 33.3 39.6 INCHES ' 1.86 mm , 45.6 1.86 45.6 ' 2.19 i 53.7 1.10 27.0 2.64 64.7 1.30 31.9 3.17 77.7 1.58 38.7 3.50 1 3.96 j 4.30 85.8 97.0 ; 105.4 1.74 i 1.97 1 2.15 42.6 48.3 , 52.7 INCHES I 1.00 mm 24.5 1.00 I 24.5 INCHES 1 1.78 1.81 1 mm , 43.6 44.3 1 1.91 46.8 2.08 51.0 2.25 55.1 2.66 ' 2.84 3.00 65.2 69.6 73.5 ; INCHES 3.81 3.81 I 3.81 mm 1 93.3 93.3 11 93.3 p.----___ THREADY- SIZE 1114" NPT 3/8" NPT 11/2" NPT !_ I i 7 7 1 13 4.56 111.7 3/4" NPT 30 4.56 111.7 1" NPT 38 - 6.31 6.31 7.19 154.6 154.6 176.2 1-1/4" NPT '1.112" NPT 2" NPT _ 61 1 87 1 121 e: DN (Uierreter IVoninal) = Metric equivalent size. Rev. 4 E 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The information presented on this sheet is correct at the time of publication. Milwaukee Valve reserves the right to change design, and/or material specifications without notice. For the Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual (IOM) see the engineering section on our website. For the most current information access www.milwaukeevalve.com _[ MILWAUKEE VALVE BV -5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I' 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ives 64 SERIES w.epollovelvae.com Full -Port Brass Ball Valve Air Release and Blow Lines Job Name: Contractor: Job Location: P.O. Number: Engineer: Representative: Tag: Wholesale Distributor: DESCRIPTION The Apollo International 64 Series is an economy full port forged brass ball valve ideal for a wide range of plumbing and heating applications. FEATURES • 100% Factory Tested to MSS SP -110 • Meets ANSI/NSF 61-2004 • Blow-out Proof Stem Design • Adjustable Stem Packing • Secondary 0 -ring Stem Seal • Directive 2002/95/CE (RoHS) Compliant MATERIALS Body Forged Brass (Cu >57%) Retainer Forged Brass (Cu >57%) Ball Brass, Cr plated Stem Brass, Cr plated Seat Ring PTFE Stem Seal NBR 75 Shore A Stem Packing PTFE Packing Nut Plated Steel Packing Gland Brass Handle Zinc Plated Steel Handle Cover FVC Handle Nut Plated Steel ACCESSORY KITS Valve Size Locking Handle 2" Stem Extension Balancing Stop 1/4", 3/8", 1/2" 0 78165902 0 78150101 0 78150601 W, 1" 0 78166002 0 78150201 0 78150701 1-1/4", 1-1/2" 0 78166102 0 78150301 0 78150801 2" 0 78166202 0 78150401 0 78150901 2-1/2", 3" Not Available 0 78150501 0 78151001 4" Not Available • 5'--xPt ct',� PERFORMANCE RATING 600 CWP Max Temperature 366°F (185°C) APPROVALS CSA: W-4" NPT per ANSI 221.15/CGA 9.1 (1/2 psi) 1/4"-4" NPT per ASME B16.44 (5 psi) W-2" NPT per ASME 816.33 (125 psi) 21/2'-4" NPT per ASME B16.38 (125 psi) UL: '/." 1" UL 125, "Guide YSDT" W-1" UL 842, "Guides YRPY,JRBX,MHKZ '/4"-2" UL Subject 258, "Guide VQGU" FM: %"-2" per FM1140 NSF: ANSI/NSF 61-2004, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects." DIMENSIONS Part No. Stze A I B C I D Cv iWL(Ibs.) NPT 64-101 1/4" 0.39 2.02 1 75 3.85 6 0.33 64-102 3/8" 0.39 2.02 1.75 3.85 7 0.30 64-103 1/2" 0.59 2.44 1 88 3.85 19 0.51 64-104 3/4" 0.78 2.71 2.28 4 80 34 0.80 64-105 1" 0.98 3.07 2.44 4.80 50 1.25 64-106 1 1/4" 1.25 3.42 3.07 6.02 104 2.26 64-107 1 1/2" 1 57 3.89 3.34 6.02 268 3.39 64-108 2" 1 96 4.33 3.79 6.37 309 4.25 64-109 2 1/2" 2.56 5.59 5.02 8.07 629 8.60 64-100 3" 3.15 6.45 5.45 8.07 1018 13.35 64-10A 4" 3.94 7 60 6.34 10.23 1622 22.05 SOLDER 64-203 1/2" 0.59 2.53 1.88 3.85 19 0.51 64-204 3/4" 0.78 2.99 2.28 4.80 34 0.78 64-205 1" 0.98 3.58 2.44 4.80 50 1 14 64-206 1 1/4" 1.25 4 09 3.07 6.02 104 2.07 64-207 1 1/2" 1.57 4.56 3.34 6.02 268 3.42 6.4-208 2" 1.96 5.43 3.79 6.37 309 4 49 64-209 2 1/2" 2.56 6.93 5.02 8.07 629 10.00 64-200 3" 3.15 8.09 5.45 8.07 1018 15.00 64-20A 4" 413 10.25 6.34 10.23 1622 25.00 Conbraco Industries, Inc. 701 Matthews Mint Hill Rd. Matthews NC 28106 USA www.aoollovalves.com This specification is provided for reference only. Conbraco reserves the right to change any portion of this specification without notice and without incurring obligation to make such changes to Conbraco products previously or subsequently sold. SS 1077.doc © 1/09 Page 1 of 1 'slues Made'lObe USA w.apollovalves.com (61-100/200 Series) Job Name: MODEL CVB IN-LINE CHECK VALVE Contractor: Job Location: P.O. Number: Engineer: Representative: Tag: Wholesale Distributor: DESCRIPTION The Apollo® CVB Ball Cone® check valves offer reliable protection against reverse flow and exceptional resistance to chemicals and corrosion using proven ASTM quality materials made in the USA. FEATURES • FNPT and MNPT Inlet Option • Spring Actuated • Bronze Sizes'/" to 3" • Tight Shut-off With Liquid Media • Flow Straight -through Design Efficiency • RPTFE Ball Cone® for Chemical Resistance • Made in the USA • Canadian Registration Number 0C11218.5C MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS Part Name Material Body Cast Bronze C84400 Retainer ASTM BI6 Brass Spring AISI 316 Stainless Steel Ball Cone Check RPTFE, 15% Glass Filled Stem ASTM BI6 Brass PERFORMANCE RATING Max Pressure: 400 psi / 125 psi Steam Max Temp: 350°F (176.6°C) Flow Rate (Cv) 1 psi Differential Pressure Size GPM %. .85 3/8" 1.21 14. 1 40 '/," 3.53 1" 6.00 1-1/4" 44 1-1/2" 65 2" 81 2-1/2" 175 3" 265 Conbraco Industries, Inc. 701 Os)\.Yt"D e. I80 9001:2000 REGISTERED 4a use APPLICATIONS Well-suited for a broad range of applications, including saturated steam and chemical service. May be installed in both horizontal and vertical flow with upward flow. Do not use for reciprocating air compressor service. OPTIONS ❑ FNPT x FNPT (61-100 Series) ❑ MNPT x FNPT (61-200 Series) ❑ 0 psig Cracking Pressure (No Spring) ❑ 0.50 psig Cracking Pressure ❑ 5 psig Cracking Pressure (1/4"-1" Only) ❑ 10 psig Cracking Pressure (1/4"-1" Only) 0 Oxygen Cleaned ['Satin Chrome Plate Finish O BSPP Threads (1/2" - 1" Only) ❑ OTHER DIMENSIONS Model Number Item Number Size A MNPT A B C Wt. (Lb) CVB14 61-101-01 1/4" 2.38 2.06 1.12 112 .38 CVB38 61-102-01 3/8" 2.38 2.12 112 1.12 .38 CVB12 61-103-01 %z" 2.56 2.31 1.12 112 .38 CVB34 61-104-01 '/<" 3.12 2.87 2.37 1.50 .75 CVB1 61-105-01 1" 3.87 3.50 1 75 1.93 1 45 CVB114 61-106-01 I 1/4" 4.44 4 19 2.12 2.37 2.75 CVB I12 61-107-01 I 'A" 5.18 4.94 2.50 2.81 3.94 CVB2 61-108-01 2" 6.50 6.00 3.00 3.68 6.30 CVB2I2 61-109-01 2'A" 712 3.87 4.50 14.0 CVB3 61-100-01 3" 8.13 5.31 4.63 16.6 Note: Model CVBM (61-200 Series) is a MNPT x FNPT connection. Matthews Mint Hill Rd. Matthews NC 28105 USA , www.aoollovalves.com • 704-841-6000 Conbraco Industries can accept no responsibility for possible errors in this document and reserves the right to alter its product design or construction without notice and without incurring any obligation to make such changes on Conbraco products previously or subsequently sold. All product specifications are approximate and are provided for reference only. SS1024 © 11/08 Page 1 of 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Series SGS 4" Stainless Steel Industrial Pressure Gage 1.6% Full Scale Accuracy, Brass Wetted Parts 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The Series SGS Gages have dual English/metric scales with ±1.6% full scale accuracy. Series SGS gages are designed with 304 SS housings and brass wetted parts. Units can withstand ambient temperatures up to 149°F (65°C) and process temper- atures up to 257°F (125°C). These gages may be easily liquid filled in the field without the need for a separate kit. A wide selection of ranges are available from full vacuum, compound to 15,000 psi. APPLICATIONS Pneumatics and compressors SPECIFICATIONS Service: Compatible gases and liquids. Wetted Materials: Brass for ranges s1000 psi; 316L SS for ranges greater than 1000 psi. Housing: 304 SS Lens: Plexi -glass Accuracy: ±1 6% full scale. Pressure Limits: 125% full scale for ranges <1500 psi: 115% for ranges 1500 psi and greater Temperature Limits: Ambient. -4 to 149°F (-20 to 65°C), Process. 257°F max. (125°C max.) Size: 4" (100 mm) Process Connection: 1/4" male NPT. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 3 (IP55} Weight: 1 1 Ib (0 49 kg) 66 VISIT OUR WEBSITES. www.dwyer-inst.com • www.dwyer-inst.co.uk • www.dwyer-inst.com.au SECTION 15250 ELECTRICAL HEAT TRACE TAPE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I O 9GIS 001 FLXTM Self --Regulating Heating Cable Application: Freeze Protection FLX self-regulating heating cables are designed to pro- vide freeze protection and temperature maintenance to metallic and nonmetallic pipes, tanks and equip- ment. FLX heating cables are rated for heat outputs of 3, 5, 8 and 10 watts/foot at 50' F (10, 16, 26 and 33 watts/meter at 10°C) when powered at 110 to 120 Vac or 208 to 277 Vac. FLX is a proven, simple, practical solution for both metal and plastic pipes Rugged and Reliable .. . FLX self-regulating cables are protected by a tinned copper braid and a polyolefin outer jacket to provide grounding and additional mechanical protection for the cable An optional fluoropolymer outer jacket is avail- able if additional environmental protection is required. Heat tracing users expect quality products and services from a reputable manufacturer. Thermon exceeds these expectations by operating under the ISO 9001 standard for quality. Ambient Temperature °F Product Specifications Easy to Design ... Whether the application is a small project or a complex network of piping and equipment, designing an elec- tric heat traced freeze protection system is easy with FLX self-regulating cables. The step-by-step design guide leads the reader through determining the heat- ing requirements and number of circuits required to establish a bill of materials. With parallel circuitry, FLX cables do not require piping dimensions and can be cut to length in the field. Heat tracing circuits for field -routed piping can be quickly and easily designed on site. Easy to instal(.. . FLX is installed directly on metallic or nonmetallic piping under conventional thermal insulation with ordinary hand tools. Kits for power connection, end termination and splicing, plus other accessories, are designed for quick and easy installation. Simply pull FLX from the supply reel, install directly on the pipe and complete circuit fabrication. Tee splices may be installed anywhere along the circuit to match the layout of the piping. Self -Regulating Neat Output The self-regulating treat output of the cables varies in response to the surrounding temperature. Variations in the ambient tempera- ture are automatically compensated tor along the entire length or a heat traced pipe. THERMON ... The Heal Tracing Specialists° 100 Thernon Dr. • PO Box 609 • San Marcos, TX 78667-0609 Phone: 512-396-5801 • Facsimile 512-754-2431 • 800 -730 -HEAT www.thermon.com vin Canada call 800-563-8461 FLXTM Self -Regulating Heating Cable Characteristics ... Outer jacket Tinned Copper Braid Bus Wire Product Specifications Radiation Cross -Linked Polyolefin Insulation Radiation Cross -Linked Heating Core Bus wire Metallic braid Outer jacket Minimum bend radius @ 5°F (-15°C) @ -76°F (-60°C) Supply voltage Circuit protection Maximum continuous exposure ternperature Power Output Curves Watts per Foot (w/m) 16 AWG nickel -plated copper tinned copper -0), polyolefin; -F0j, fluoropolymer 30 50 70 90 110 (-1) (10) (21) (32) (43) Pipe Temperature I (°t) Certifications/Approvals. a 0 LISTED 130 150 (54) (66) 0.38" (10 mm) 1.25" (32 mm) 110-120 or 208-277 Vac 30 mA ground -fault protection required power -on. 150°F (65°C); power -off 185°F (85°0 Ratings... 120 VacServce Voltage e: Startn Catalog Temperature • 0 (-18). -324 (98.0) •-348.-(1061:0)-; 3-FLX-1 - 50 00) 377 (114.0) 377 (114.0 377.(1140) 2tir6T-0 2-12 8) 29 -8rl..Xel 150 45...7) 226(6&9)- z - s9: • (1. (W. 191 (58.2) 2-39(728) 0(14' 192t 1 The National Electrical Code and he Canadian Electrical Code require ground-fauft protection of equipment Inc eacn branch circuit supplying elects ic heating equipment. 2. Power outputs ale based on 120. 240 Vac operating voltage under conditions shown. 3. Circuit length:: are bused on start-up at temperatures shown. COMIligrAl Ana1p51 Foran CPD 007-1106 Theimon Manufacturing Co. Printed in U.S.A. 1§gs91 Freeze Protection Systems Accessories TracePlus.' Nonmetallic Kits .. Product Specifications TracePlus kits are designed for terminating self-regulating heating cables with a metallic braid or with a braid and outerjacket. PCA-COM...circuit fabrication kit is designed to fabricate a self-regulating circuit with one power connection boot and one end cap. Up to three heating cables can enter a junc- tion box supported by a PCA -COM kit when additional heater cable connection boots (TBX 30 and end caps (ET -6 or ET -8) are used. The PCA -COM kit components include: • Pipe -mounted junction box support (junction box provided by others) • Heater cable grommet • Power connection boot (TBX 3L) • End caps (one ET -6 for OJ cable and one ET -8 for BC cable) • RTV adhesive • Ground wire extension lead with lug • Wire fasteners • Installation instructions PCS-COM...re-enterable in-line or T -splice kit is designed to fabricate outside -the - insulation splices of self-regulating cables. Each splice kit includes three heater cable connection boots and the end cap needed to complete a T -splice. The PCS -COM kit components include- - NEMA 4X pipe -mounted expediter with splice cover • Heater cable gronunet • 3 heater cable connection boots (1.13X -3U • End caps (one ET -6 for OJ cable arta one ET -8 for BC cable) • RTV adhesive • Wire tasteners • Grounding splice lug • Installation instructions Cable End Termination Kits and Attachment Tapes ... JB-K...nonmetallic junction box is intended for use with the PCA -COM kit. The corro- sion -resistant NEMA 4X unit includes a re- movable gasketed cover and ground lug. ET-6C...is designed for use with self-regu lating cables having an overjacket andjor monitor wire. ET-BC...is designed for use with self-regu- lating cables having a metallic ground braid only. PCS -COM and PCS -COM kits include both end caps. RTV adhesive, caution label and termination instructions. (Also available in bulk are the ET -6 and ET -8 end caps only.) TBX-3L...power connection boot is used to prepare additional heating cable for connection to power. One TBX-3L boot is provided with each PCA -COM kit. Three TBX-3L boots arc provided with each PCS - COM kit. (Also available as the TBX-SLC kit with RTV adhesive and termination instate tions.) THERMON ... The Heat Tracing Specialists' 100 Therrnon Or. • PO Box 609 • San Marcos, TX 78667-0609 Phone: 512-396.5801 • Facsimile: 512-754-2420 • 1 -800 -820 -HEAT www.therrnon.com In Canada call 1-800-563-8461 FT-1L...fixing tape is used for attaching the heating cable to piping every 12" (30 cm) or as required by code or specification. FT -1 L may also by used for attaching pipe - mounted expediters in circuit fabrication and splice kits. Tape is 1/2" (13 mm) wide x 108' (33 m) long. Max. Exposure Temp 185°F (85°C) Min. Installation Temp ... 20°F (-29°) Freeze Protection Systems Accessories Control -thermostats, Control Panel and Aluminum Tape ... B4X-15140...adjustable ambient sensing thermostat is designed for controlling freeze protection of pipes, vessels and equipment. Thermostat has an adjustable range trom 15°F to 140°F (-9'C to 60`C) and can be used to control a single-phase heating cable circuit or to control the coil of a contactor to switch high current and/or voltages for freeze protection heat tracing circuits. En- closure is NEMA 4X epoxy coated die-cast aluminum. Thermostat is rated for 125/ 250/480 Vac with a switch rating of 22 amps. AL-20P...alurninurn tape for continuous (longitudinal) coverage of cable to piping. Tape is designed for improving heat trans- fer to nonmetallic piping. Allow one foot of tape for each foot of heating cable. Tape is 2` (Si mm) wide x 150' (46 m) long. Certifications/Approvals ... SP,, 0 LISTED Approvals apply when used with Thermon electric heat tracing cables. N4X-40...line-sensing thermostat is snap - acting "open -on -rise' and preset at 401 (5°C) Thermostat is rated for 125/250/ 480 Vac with a switch rating of 22 amps and is housed in a NEMA 4X polycarbon- ate enclosure that is predrilled for connec- tion l0 3/4" conduit fitting. Thermostat has tinned copper bulb and capillary CL...caution labels (vinyl -based peel and stick) should be installed on the thermal insulation weather barrier. In accordance with the NEC, electrically heated pipelines and vessels are to be clearly identified "at frequent intervals along the pipeline or ves- sel" Caution labels should be placed at 10'-20' (3-6 m) intervals or as required by code or specification. t j tort% -7s ] [prtiangn Product Specifications Form CPD1017-0105 PDMP...power distribution and monitoring panel is available for one to four circuits with voltage ratings of 120/240, 277 or 480 Vac. Panel includes circuit breaker(s) with 30 mA ground -fault protection', contactor(s)2, indicating lights. and hand,/ off/auto switch (optional alarms are avail- able). The corrosion -resistant NEMA 4X nonmetallic junction box is hinged and lock- able. To meet the specific requirements of an application, panel can be custom de- signed, including circuit requirements, en- closure type, control and monitoring ca- pabilities and specific agency approvals. Contact Thermon for complete information. Notes 1. The National Electrical Code and Canadian Electrical Code require ground -fault protection of equipment for each branch circuit supplying electric heating equipment. Check local codes for ground -fault protection requirements. 2. 120 Vac coil to be controlled by thermostat or electronic control. Thermos Manufacturing Co. Printed in U.S.A. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ) SECTION 15450 EMERGENCY SHOWER AND EYEWASH EQUIPMENT .••• .••• •••. .. ••• : • .• • ,•• • Guardian Safety Stations with Eye/Face Wash ❑ G1996 Safety Station with Eye/Face Wash, All -Stainless Steel Construction APPLICATION: All -stainless steel combination eye/face wash and shower safety station. Stainless steel construction is ideal for highly corrosive environments and clean room applications. Two large FS-Plus"spray-type outlet heads deliver a flood of water for rinsing eyes and face. SHOWER HEAD: 10" diameter stainless steel. SHOWER VALVE:1" IPS Type 316 stainless steel stay -open ball valve. Valve has stainless steel ball and Teflon® seals. Furnished with stainless steel actuating arm and 29" stainless steel pull rod. SPRAY HEAD ASSEMBLY:Two FS -Plus"" spray heads. Each head has a "flip top" dust cover, internal flow control and filter to remove impurities from the water flow. EYE/FACE WASH BOWL: 111/2" diameter stainless steel. EYE/FACE WASH VALVE: 1/2" IPS Type 316 stainless steel stay - open ball valve.Vaive has stainless steel ball and Teflon® seals. PIPE AND FITTINGS: Schedule 4o Type 304 brushed stainless steel. Furnished with orange polyethylene covers for vertical piping for high visibility and corrosion resistance. SUPPLY:1 1/4" NPT female top or side inlet. WASTE: 1 1/4" N PT female outlet. SIGN: Furnished with ANSI -compliant identification sign. oUALITY ASSURANCE: Valve and spray head assemblies are factory assembled and water tested prior to shipment. Available Options ❑ BC Stainless steel cover for eye/face wash bowl. ❑ FC20 Regulates shower flow rate to zo GPM. ❑ AP275-100 ELECTRIC LIGHT AND ALARM HORN Light and alarm horn summon assistance when eye/face wash or shower is activated. ❑ AP250-015 MODESTY CURTAIN Modesty curtain for mounting on safety station. ❑ TMV G3800 thermostatic mixing valve precisely blends hot and cold water to deliver warm (tepid) water as required by ANSI Z358.1-2004. Guardian Equipment 312 447 81oo TELEPHONE 1140 N North Branch St. 312 447 8101 FACSIMILE Chicago, IL 60622 gesafety.conl ER Listed 01496. Units have been tested to and comply with ANSI 2358.1- 2004 ,,,,•,� ..• •.•.. Guardian • .• •• • ••••••• Safety Stations with Eye/Face Wash D G1996 Safety Station with Eye/Face Wash, AII-Stainless Steel Construction STAINLESS STEEL ACTUATING ARM 5" (127mm STAINLESS STEEL_ SHOWER HEAD 90" (2286mm) STAINLESS STEEL BOWL 6" (152mm 5" t-- (127mm) 24" (610mm " IPS STAINLESS STEEL STAY—OPEN BALI VALVE -- 0 0"— (254mm) STAINLESS STEEL PULL ROD (2) FS—PLUS SPRAY HEADS 23— /2" (597mm) STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS STAINLESS STEEL FLAG HANDLE 5" (127mm) DETAIL "A" FLOOR FLANGE (4) 05/8" MOUNTING HOLES ON A 3-1/2" BOLT CIRCLE 011-1/2' (292mm) 36" (914mm) 31" (787mm) 1-1/4" NPT FEMALE INLET NOTES; 1. EACH FS—PLUS SPRAY HEAD HAS A "FUP—TOP" DUST COVER, INTERNAL FLOW CONTROL AND FILTER TO REMOVE IMPURITIES FROM THE WATER FLOW. 2. OUTLET TEE CAN BE POSITIONED AT EITHER 8' OR 20" A.F.F. BY REVERSING PIPE NIPPLES ABOVE AND BELOW LOWER TEE. 9-1/4" 14- (235mm) 8" (203mm) (SEE NOTE 2) 66" (1676mm) I STAINLESS STEEL FLOOR FLANGE (SEE DETAIL "A') Due to continuing product improvement, the information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. All dimensions are t 1/4' (6mm). rev. 0308 1-1/4" NPT FEMALE INLET (PLUGGED) 1/2" IPS STAINLESS STEEL STAY—OPEN BALI VALVE 1-1/4" NPT FEMALE OUTLET Sign Included Shows:Fyc Nash • Guardian Equipment 312 447 8ioo TELEPHONE 1140 N North Branch St. 312447 8101 FxsianE Chicago, IL 60622 gesafety.com ETL istede tested ��� Units have been tested to and comply with ANSI 2338.1- 2004 „P EXHIBIT D ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 000110 TABLE OF CONTENTS Division Section Title # of Pages Division 03 — CONCRETE 033000 CAST -IN PLACE CONCRETE. 12 Division 04 — MASONRY 042000 UNIT MASONRY 15 Division 05 — METALS 054000 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS Division 06 — WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY... 061600 SHEATHING AND COVER BOARD . ..... ..2 .6 6 2 Division 07 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING ...2 071900 WATER AND GRAFFITTI REPELLENTS .. .4 072100 THERMAL INSULATION . . ... 5 072500 WEATHER AND SOUND BARRIERS .. ..... 3 074113 METAL ROOF PANELS . . .......... 13 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM ....... 7 077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES .. .... ... 5 077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES . . 4 078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING . 2 079200 JOINT SEALANTS 7 Division 08 — OPENINGS 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES. . ... . 6 081613 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC DOORS AND FRAMES .. 5 083473 SOUND CONTROL DOOR ASEMEBLIES .. . 8 084523 FIBERGLASS -SANDWICH -PANEL SKYLIGHT ASSEMBLIES . ..7 087100 DOOR HARDWARE ... ... . 10 088000 GLAZING . .. .. .. 6 Division 09 — FINISHES 092900 GYPSUM BOARD AND CEMENT BOARD . 2 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES ... 4 096723 RESINOUS FLOORING. . .. . .. „_6 097700 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS 2 098433 SOUND ASBORBING WALL UNITS . 4 099100 PAINTING .. ... 4 Division 10 — SPECIALTIES 101400 SIGNAGE. 3 102800 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES . 3 104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS . . ....1 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 000110-1 Table of Contents SECTION 000110 TABLE OF CONTENTS Division Section Title # of Pages Division 22 — PLUMBING 220200 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS ... 9 220400 MECHANICAL SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA. 3 Division 23 — HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) 230553 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION . . 2 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING . 5 230594 MECHANICAL SYSTEM COMMISSIONING 2 233113 DUCTWORK 4 233423 POWER VENTILATORS .. 2 233700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 3 239000 FINAL COMPLETION AND PROJECT CLOSEOUT 4 Division 32 — CONCRETE PAVING 321313 CONCRETE PAVING 22 END OF SECTION 000110 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 000110-2 Table of Contents SECTION 000115 LIST OF DRAWINGS The drawings listed below accompanying this specification form a part of the contract. Sheet No. Title A-01 SITE PLAN AND CODE ANALYSIS A-02 FLOOR PLAN AND ROOF PLAN A-03 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A-04 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A-05 BUILDING AND WALL SECTIONS A-06 SCHEDULES, REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AND DETAILS A-07 DETAILS SO 0 STRUCTURAL NOTES S1 1 FOUNDATION PLAN S1.2 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S2 1 STRUCTURAL DETAILS S3 1 STRUCTURAL DETAILS MP -01 MECHANICAL FOUNDATION PLAN, SCHEDULES AND LEGEND MP -02 MECHANICAL ROOF AND FLOOR PLAN, DIAGRAM AND DETAILS END OF SECTION 0000115 City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 1 07/23/2010 List of Drawings DIVISION 03 CONCRETE SECTION 033000 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast -in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1 Footings 2 Foundation walls 3 Slabs -on -grade 4 Housekeeping pads B Related Sections: 1 Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks. 13 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following. blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast - furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements 1 4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data For each type of product indicated. B Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments 1 Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 033000-1 Cast -In -Place Concrete B Material Certificates For each of the following, signed by manufacturers 1 Cementitious materials 2 Admixtures 3 Form materials and form -release agents 4 Steel reinforcement and accessories 5 Curing compounds. 6 Vapor retarders 7 Joint -filler strips 1 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1 Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities " B Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer C ACI Publications Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. 1 ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5 2 ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials " 1 7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 1 FORM -FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete Form -facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints 1 Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials 2 Exterior -grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: a High-density overlay, Class 1 or better b Medium -density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill -release agent treated and edge sealed c Structural 1, B -B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed d B -B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 033000-2 Cast -In -Place Concrete B Rough -Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C Form -Release Agent: Commercially formulated form -release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1 Formulate form -release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form -facing materials. D Form Ties• Factory -fabricated, removable or snap -off metal or glass -fiber -reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1 Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface. 2 Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface 3. Furnish ties with integral water -barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed 2 3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1 For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic -protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports 2 4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material. Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1 Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II, gray B Normal -Weight Aggregates ASTM C 33, Class 1N coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Coarse -Aggregate Size. 3/4 inch nominal 2 Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C Water ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 033000-3 Cast -In -Place Concrete 2 5 ADMIXTURES A. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride 1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B 3 Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D 2 6 VAPOR RETARDERS AND GRANULAR FILL A. Sheet Vapor Retarder Raven Industries "VaporBlock 10" or approved equal, ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure -sensitive tape B Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57. Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 1-1/2" 100 1" 95 - 100 1/2" 25-60 No 4 0-10 No. 8 0 - 5 A. Fine -Graded Granular Material. Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates: Sieve Size Square Opening Percent Passing 3/8" 100 No 100 10-30 No 200 0 - 5 2 7 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete B Water: Potable C Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing and Sealing Compound ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. 2 8 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 033000-4 Cast -In -Place Concrete 2 9 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Limit water-soluble, chloride -ion content in hardened concrete to 1 00 percent by weight of cement. B. Admixtures Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions 1 Use water -reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability 2. Use water -reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 2 10 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Footings Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows: 1 Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2 Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0 45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 4 Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1 5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size B Foundation Walls- Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows: 1 Minimum Compressive Strength. 3000 psi at 28 days 2 Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0 45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch 4 Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1 5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size C. Slabs -on -Grade and Housekeeping pads: Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows 1 Minimum Compressive Strength 3000 psi at 28 days 2 Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 540 Ib/cu yd. 3 Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch 4 Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel -finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice " 2 12 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 033000-5 Cast -In -Place Concrete PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads B Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 C Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows 1 Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth -formed finished surfaces. 2 Class B, 1/4 inch for rough -formed finished surfaces D Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar E Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1 5 horizontal to 1 vertical 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal 2 Do not use rust -stained steel form -facing material F Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips, use strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds G Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations H Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete as indicated on drawings Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items J Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form -release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast -in-place concrete Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 033000-6 Cast -In -Place Concrete 1 Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7 5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges " 3 3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not Tess than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form -removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained 1 Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28 -day design compressive strength. 2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form -facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form -release agent. C When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints Align and secure joints to avoid offsets Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3 4 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. B Granular Course: Place vapor retarder on -top of fine -graded granular material and granular fill, moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch or minus 3/4 inch 3 5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1 Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete B Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete C Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 033000-7 Cast -In -Place Concrete 3 6 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete B. Construction Joints. Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs 2 Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces 3 Use epoxy -bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces C Contraction Joints in Slabs -on -Grade Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1 Sawed Joints Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades Cut 1/8 -inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks D Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: After removing formwork, install joint -filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated 1 Terminate full -width joint -filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated 2 Install joint -filler strips in lengths as long as practicable Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together 3 7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed B Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect. C Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301 D Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1 Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 033000-8 Cast -In -Place Concrete 2 Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301 3 Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate E Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1 Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2 Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3 Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4 Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open -textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. F Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1 When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials 3 Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs G Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1 Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option 2. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas 3 8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -surface irregularities 1 Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. Exception. Sack Finish formed surfaces of Housekeeping pads B Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 033000-9 Cast -In -Place Concrete adjacent formed surfaces Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated 3 9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302 1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces Do not wet concrete surfaces B Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power -driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture 1 Apply float finish to surfaces C Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power -driven trowel Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1 Apply a trowel finish to surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring a Regulator Building, Restroom — Room 104. 2 Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10 -ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch D Trowel and Fine -Broom Finish Apply a first trowel finish to remaining surfaces While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom 1 Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel -finished floor surfaces 3 10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work B Curbs. Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel -troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded C Equipment Bases and Foundations. Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 3 11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures Comply with ACI 3061 for cold -weather protection and ACI 301 for hot - weather protection during curing City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 033000-10 Cast -In -Place Concrete B Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period D Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods 1. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.12 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions 1 Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s) Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry 3 13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports B. Inspections: 1 Steel reinforcement placement. 2 Headed bolts and studs. 3. Verification of use of required design mixture 4 Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing 5 Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature 6 Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs C Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements. 1 Testing Frequency. Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu yd or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive -strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 033000-11 Cast -In -Place Concrete 2 Slump: ASTM C 143/0 143M, one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each days pour of each concrete mixture Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change 3 Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal -weight concrete;one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample 5. Compression Test Specimens ASTM C 31/C 31M. a Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample 6 Compressive -Strength Tests. ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory -cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days a A compressive -strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated 7 Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive -strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive -strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi 8 Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing Reports of compressive -strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28 -day tests 9 Nondestructive Testing. Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete 10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 11 Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements 12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents END OF SECTION 033000 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 033000-12 Cast -In -Place Concrete DIVISION 04 MASONRY SECTION 042000 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 12 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1 Concrete masonry units 2 Decorative concrete masonry units 3 Mortar and grout. 4 Masonry joint reinforcement. 5 Ties and anchors 6 Embedded flashing 7 Miscellaneous masonry accessories B Related Sections 1 Division 07 Section "Water and Graffiti Repellents" for water repellents applied to unit masonry 2 Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" forsheet metal flashing and for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints 13 DEFINITIONS A. CMU(s) Concrete masonry unit(s) 1 4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data For each type of product indicated B Shop Drawings. For the following C Samples for Verification For each type and color of the following: 1 Exposed Decorative CMUs 2 Weep holes and vents. 3 Accessories embedded in masonry 1 5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 042000-1 07/23/2010 Unit Masonry A. Qualification Data. For testing agency B Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following 1 Masonry units a. Include data on material properties material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements 2. Cementitious materials Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes Include description of type and proportions of ingredients 4. Grout mixes Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Joint reinforcement. 6. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. C Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients 1 Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content. 2 Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. 1 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications. Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated. B Source Limitations for Masonry Units Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required C Source Limitations for Mortar Materials. Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate D Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530 1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents 1 7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture -resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 042000-2 07/23/2010 Unit Masonry C Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil 1 8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each days work Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place. 2 Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place B Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns C Stain Prevention Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry 1 Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface 2 Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings 3 Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4 Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry D Cold -Weather Requirements. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold -weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530 1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 1 Cold -Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. E Hot -Weather Requirements Comply with hot -weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530 1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units. Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 042000-3 07/23/2010 Unit Masonry 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Shapes. Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. 1 Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2 Provide square -edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated B Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units 1 Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested according to ASTM E 514 as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24 hours, shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen. a Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) ACM Chemistries, RainBloc. 2) BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Plus. 3) Grace Construction Products, W R. Grace & Co - Conn , Dry -Block C CMUs: ASTM C 90 1 Density Classification: Normal weight. 2 Size (Width). Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions D Decorative CMUs. ASTM C 90 1 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following a Mutual Materials, Inc or approved equal 2 Density Classification: Normal weight. 3 Size (Width). Manufactured to dimensions specified in "CMUs" Paragraph 4. Pattern and Texture: a Standard pattern, ground -face finish. b Single -score pattern, ground -face finish c Standard pattern, split -face finish 5 Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2 3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or ll, except Type III may be used for cold -weather construction Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 042000-4 07/23/2010 Unit Masonry B Hydrated Lime ASTM C 207, Type S C Portland Cement -Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients D Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144 1 For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone E Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404 F Water -Repellent Admixture Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer 1 Products. Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a ACM Chemistries; RainBloc for Mortar. b BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Mortar Admixture c Grace Construction Products, W R. Grace & Co Conn ; Dry -Block Mortar Admixture G Water. Potable 2 4 REINFORCEMENT A. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General. ASTM A 951/A 951 M 1 Interior Walls Mill- galvanized, carbon steel 2 Exterior Walls: Hot -dip galvanized, carbon steel 3 Wire Size for Side Rods. [0.148 -inch] [0.187 -inch] diameter 4 Wire Size for Cross Rods [0.148 -inch] [0.187 -inch] diameter 5 Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties Not more than 16 inches o c 6 Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units B Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single -Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods C Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Veneers Anchored with Seismic Masonry -Veneer Anchors Single 0 187 -inch- diameter, hot -dip galvanized, carbon -steel continuous wire 2 5 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated 1 Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 zinc coating B Adjustable Masonry -Veneer Anchors. City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 042000-5 07/23/2010 Unit Masonry 1. General. Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows a Structural Performance Characteristics. Capable of withstanding a 100-Ibf load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0 05 inch 2 Contractor's Option: Unless otherwise indicated, provide any of the following types of anchors 3 Screw -Attached, Masonry -Veneer Anchors. Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal anchor section. a Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following 1) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur -O -Wal Division; D/A 213 or D/A 210 with D/A 700-708. 2) Heckmann Building Products Inc., 315-D with 316 3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc ; DW -10 or DW-10HS. 4) Wire -Bond; 1004, Type III RJ -711 4. Polymer -Coated, Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene or EPDM washer, No. 10 diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than three exposed threads, and with organic polymer coating with salt -spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours per ASTM B 117 a Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) ITW Buildex; Teks Maxiseal with Climaseal finish 2) Textron Inc , Textron Fastening Systems; Elco Dril-Flex with Stalgard finish. 2.6 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"" and as follows: 1 Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. 2. Fabricate through -wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated to receive counterflashing 3 Fabricate through -wall flashing with drip edge unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed 4 Fabricate through -wall flashing with sealant stop unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by bending metal back on itself 3/4 inch at exterior face of wall and down into joint 1/4 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod 5 Metal Drip Edge. Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 042000-6 07/23/2010 Unit Masonry 6 Metal Sealant Stop. Fabricate from stainless steel Extend at least 3 inches into wall and out to exterior face of wall At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch and down into joint 1/4 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod B. Flexible Flashing: Usethe following unless otherwise indicated C Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following 1 Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing 2 Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal flashing 3 Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing or flexible flashing D Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings As specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim " 1 Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer 2 Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. E Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates 2 7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1, compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated, formulated from neoprene B Preformed Control -Joint Gaskets Made from styrene -butadiene -rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall, size and configuration as indicated C Bond -Breaker Strips Asphalt -saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No 15 asphalt felt) D Weep/Vent Products Usethe following unless otherwise indicated: 1 Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV -resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard a Products Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc , Mortar Maze weep vent. 2) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur -O -Wal Division; Cell Vents 3) Heckmann Building Products Inc ; No 85 Cell Vent. City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 042000-7 07/23/2010 Unit Masonry E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free -draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity 1 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following* a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break b. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur -O -Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop c. Mortar Net USA, Ltd., Mortar Net. 2 Provide one of the following configurations* a. Strips, full -depth of cavity and 10 inches high, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches deep that prevent clogging with mortar droppings b Strips, not less than 3/4 inch thick and 10 inches high, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from clogging with mortar 2 8 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard -strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1 Manufacturers. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc b EaCo Chem, Inc c ProSoCo, Inc. 2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air -entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated 1 Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2 Use portland cement -lime mortar unless otherwise indicated 3 For exterior masonry, use portland cement -lime mortar 4 For reinforced masonry, use portland cement -lime mortar 5 Add cold -weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site C Mortar for Unit Masonry. Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 042000-8 07/23/2010 Unit Masonry 1 For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S 2 For mortar parge coats, use Type S 3 For exterior, above -grade, load-bearing and non -load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls, for interior non -load-bearing partitions, and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N 4 For interior non -load-bearing partitions, Type 0 may be used instead of Type N D Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 1 Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1 15 1 in ACI 530 1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2 Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28 -day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi. 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M E Epoxy Pointing Mortar: Mix epoxy pointing mortar to comply with mortar manufacturer's written instructions 1 Application* Use epoxy pointing mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1 For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. 2 Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified B Before installation, examine rough -in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections C Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated B Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. C Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 042000-9 07/23/2010 Unit Masonry D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor -driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. F Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry. 33 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1 For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch 2 For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3 For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total B Lines and Levels: 1 For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum 2 For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum 3 For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 5 For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 6 For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 7 For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units C Joints: 1 For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch 2 For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed -joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch 3 For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 042000-10 07/23/2010 Unit Masonry 4 For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch Do not vary from adjacent bed -joint and head -joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch 5 For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next. 3 4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets Avoid using less -than -half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations B Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in bond pattern indicated on Drawings, do not use units with less than nominal 4 -inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs C Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4 -inches Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners Do not use units with less than nominal 4 -inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs D Stopping and Resuming Work Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry E Built-in Work. As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items F Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated G Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. H Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated Build non -load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated. 1 Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above 2 Wedge non -load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal Fill joint with mortar after dead -load deflection of structure above approaches final position 3 At fire -rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Division 07 Section "Fire -Resistive Joint Systems " 3 5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 042000-11 07/23/2010 Unit Masonry 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters 3 With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings 4 With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted B Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. D Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct -applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 CAVITY WALLS A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods. 1 Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. a Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder -type reinforcement extending across both wythes 2 Header Bonding: Provide masonry unit headers extending not less than 3 inches into each wythe Space headers not over 8 inches clear horizontally and 16 inches clear vertically 3 Masonry Veneer Anchors: Comply with requirements for anchoring masonry veneers B. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using bonding system indicated on Drawings C. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity D Parge cavity face of backup wythe in a single coat approximately 3/8 inch thick. Trowel face of parge coat smooth. E Coat cavity face of backup wythe to comply with Division 07 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing " F. Apply air barrier to face of backup wythe to comply with Division 07 Section "Modified Bituminous Sheet Air Barriers." 3 7 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 042000-12 Unit Masonry 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o c 2 Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o c in foundation walls and parapet walls 3 Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated C Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. D Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions 3 8 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with masonry -veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1 Fasten screw -attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal fasteners of type indicated Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener 2 Embed tie sections in masonry joints Provide not less than 1 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. 3 Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down 4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o c vertically and [32 inches] [24 inches] o c horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each [3.5 sq. ft.] [2.67 sq. ft.] of wall area Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches, around perimeter 3 9 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in -plane wall or partition movement. B Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows 1 Install preformed control -joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. C Provide horizontal, pressure -relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch 1 Locate horizontal, pressure -relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry 310 LINTELS A. Provide minimum bearing of 6 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 042000-13 07/23/2010 Unit Masonry 3 11 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated Install vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated. B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through -wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2 At masonry -veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge tucked under building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches 3 At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. 4. Install metal drip edges and sealant stops with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for application indicated. 5. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge 6 Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination 7 Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed C Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry. D. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows. 1 Use specified weep/vent products or open head joints to form weep holes 2 Space weep holes 24 inches o c. unless otherwise indicated E Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article F. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated Use specified weep/vent products or open head joints to form vents. 1 Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install through -wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking 3 12 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 042000-14 07/23/2010 Unit Masonry A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated C In -Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D Final Cleaning. After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1 Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2 Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry 3 Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape 4 Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners, remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water 5 Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions 6 Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces 3 13 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. B Waste Disposal as Fill Material Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil - contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed 1 Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension 2 Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste Fill material is specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3 Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade C Excess Masonry Waste Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property END OF SECTION 042000 City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 042000-15 07/23/2010 Unit Masonry DIVISION 05 METALS SECTION 054000 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data B Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members" for calculating structural characteristics of cold -formed metal framing C Comply with HUD's "Prescriptive Method for Residential Cold -Formed Metal Framing." D Comply with AWS D1 3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel " E Protect cold -formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling PART 2 - PRODUCTS 21 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 zinc coated; Grade 33 B Steel Studs: C-shaped, with flange width of not less than 1-5/8 inches, minimum uncoated steel thickness of 0.0329 inch and of depths indicated C Steel Track: U-shaped, minimum uncoated metal thickness same as studs used with track, with flange widths of 1-1/4 inches for studs D. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, Minimum Base -Metal Thickness. 0.033 inch and depths indicated 2.2 ACCESSORIES Accessories Fabricate from the same material and finish used for framing members, of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated B Cast -in -Place Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon -steel hex -headed bolts and carbon -steel nuts; and flat, hardened -steel washers; zinc coated by hot -dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C C Mechanical Fasteners Corrosion -resistant coated, self -drilling, self -threading steel drill screws D Insulation ASTM C 665, Type I, unfaced mineral -fiber blankets E Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD -P-21035 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 054000-1 Cold -Formed Metal Framing PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 FRAMING A. Install framing and accessories level, plumb, square, and true to line, and securely fastened, according to ASTM C 1007. Temporarily brace framing until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections are secured 1 Cut framing members by sawing or shearing, do not torch cut. 2 Fasten framing members by welding or screw fastening 3. Install insulation in built-up exterior framing members 4 Fasten reinforcement plates over web penetrations larger than standard punched openings B Erection Tolerances: Install cold -formed metal framing with a maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and with individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials C Studs Install continuous top and bottom tracks securely anchored at corners and ends Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks Space studs as indicated, set plumb, align, and fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. 1 Install and fasten horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced in rows not more than 48 inches apart. 2 Install steel -sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom track and anchor to structure 3 Install miscellaneous framing and connections to provide a complete and stable wall - framing system 4. Isolate non -load-bearing, curtain -wall framing from building structure using vertical slide clips or deflection track to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. END OF SECTION 054000 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 054000-2 Cold -Formed Metal Framing SECTION 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Related Sections: 1 Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted -channel inserts, wedge -type inserts, and other items cast into concrete 2 Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items built into unit masonry 3 Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing " 4 Division 05 Section "Metal Gratings " B Shop Drawings- Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications 1 Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections Show anchorage and accessory items 1 3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication 14 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another B Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation PART 2 - PRODUCTS City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 055000-1 Metal Fabrications 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General. Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars ASTM A 36/A 36M. B Steel Tubing- ASTM A 500, cold -formed steel tubing C. Steel Pipe. ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide [Type 304] [Type 316] stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc -plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B Steel Bolts and Nuts- Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3; and, where indicated, flat washers C Anchor Bolts- ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated, with nuts, ASTM A 563, and, where indicated, flat washers 1 Hot -dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized D Lag Screws- ASME B18.2 1. E Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18 6.1 F. Plain Washers Round, ASME B18.22 1 G Lock Washers- Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21 1 H Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency I Cast -in -Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot -dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329. 2 4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 055000-2 Metal Fabrications A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. B Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187 C Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107 Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation B Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces C Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work D Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges E Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1 Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals 2 Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap 3 Remove welding flux immediately 4 At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface F Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat -head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated Locate joints where least conspicuous G Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water Provide weep holes where water may accumulate H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items Provide for anchorage of type indicated, coordinate with supporting structure Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads 1 Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6 -inch embedment and 2 -inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o c., unless otherwise indicated City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 055000-3 Metal Fabrications 2 6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work B Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1 Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed C Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with where indicated 2 7 METAL BOLLARDS A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe 1. Cap bollards with 1/4 -inch- thick steel plate. 2 Where bollards are indicated to receive controls for door operators, provide necessary cutouts for controls and holes for wire 3. Where bollards are indicated to receive light fixtures, provide necessary cutouts for fixtures and holes for wire B Prime bollards with primer specified in Division 09 Painting 2.8 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting B. Galvanize plates. 2.9 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete 2 10 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B Finish metal fabrications after assembly C Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 055000-4 Metal Fabrications 2 11 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products 1 Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion B Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels B Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections C Fastening to In -Place Construction Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors D Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction E Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings B Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure 3 3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS A. Fill metal -capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing 1 Do not fill removable bollards with concrete City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 055000-5 Metal Fabrications 1 1 B Anchor bollards in concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink, I nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward bollard IC Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. 1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete 3.4 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES ' A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates ' B Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1 Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations unless otherwise indicated 2 Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain 3 5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 1 A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop ' painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces 1 Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 -mil dry film thickness ' B Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. ' C Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780 END OF SECTION 055000 ' City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 055000-6 Metal Fabrications 1 DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES SECTION 061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 Wood blocking and nailers B. Related Requirements: 1 Division 06 Section "Sheathing " 13 DEFINITIONS A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension B Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following. 1 NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association. 2 WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 3 WWPA. Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details 1. Include data for wood -preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained 2 Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency 3. For fire -retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 061053-1 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 4 For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site 1 5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules - writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated 1 Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber 3 Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated B Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber. 15 percent unless otherwise indicated 2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground 1 Preservative Chemicals Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium 2 For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes B Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material C Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review D Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following. 1 Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 061053-2 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. General. Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire - test -response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners 2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or Tess when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity Use where exterior type is not indicated 3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841 C Identify fire -retardant -treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction 1 For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece D For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes E Application Treat 1 Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar members in connection with roofing 2. Concealed blocking 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1 Blocking 2. Nailers B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No 2 grade lumber of any species C For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades. 1 Western woods, Construction or No 2 Common grade, WCLIB or WWPA. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 061053-3 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry D For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. E For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work 25 FASTENERS A. General Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture 1 Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure -preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners[ with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M] [of Type 304 stainless steel]. B Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C Power -Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272 D Wood Screws ASME B18 6 1 E Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing [ASTM C 1002] [ASTM C 954], length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened F Lag Bolts ASME B18.2 1 G Bolts Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A, with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers H Expansion Anchors Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency 1 Material: Carbon -steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 2 Material Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 2 6 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: Hot -dip, zinc -coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated 2 7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 061053-4 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0 025 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Where wood -preservative -treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. B Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated C Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1 Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels Space clips not more than 16 inches o c F. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows. 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o c with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces 2 Fire block concealed spaces of wood -framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o c Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2 -inch nominal thickness 3 Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq ft. and to solidly fill space below partitions 4 Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet o c. G. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. H Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber 1 Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 061053-5 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1 NES NER-272 for power -driven fasteners. 2 Table 2304 9 1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 3 Table R602 3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602 3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two - Family Dwellings J Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather If, despite protection, inorganic boron -treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA -registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA -registered label B Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA -registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA -registered label END OF SECTION 061053 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 061053-6 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry SECTION 061600 SHEATHING AND COVER BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: ICC -ES evaluation reports for fire -retardant -treated plywood PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Plywood DOC PS 1 B Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2 C Glass -Matt Gypsum Board 2.2 TREATED PLYWOOD A. Preservative -Treated Plywood. AWPA C9 1 Use treatment containing no arsenic or chromium. 2. Kiln -dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. B Fire -Retardant -Treated Plywood: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C27, labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1 Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated 2 Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for roof sheathing and where indicated 3. Use Interior Type A unless otherwise indicated. 4 Identify with appropriate classification marking of a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction C Provide fire -retardant -treated plywood for items indicated on Drawings 2.3 WALL SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing 2 4 ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing. Exterior, Structural I sheathing City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 061600-1 Sheathing and Cover Board B Oriented -Strand -Board Roof Sheathing. Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing 2 5 COVER BOARD: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass -mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch thick A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Certainteed, GlasRoc 2. Georgia-Pacific Corporation, Dens Deck 3. USG; Securock Glass -Mat 2 6 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS A. Fasteners. Size and type indicated. 1 For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M 2 Power -Driven Fasteners. CABO NER-272 B Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: APA AFG-01 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION A. Securely attach to substrates, complying with the following 1 CABO NER-272 for power -driven fasteners 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the IBC B Fastening Methods. 1 Wall and Roof Sheathing: a Nail to wood framing b Screw to cold -formed metal framing C Install cover boards over roof sheathing with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows Offset joints of sheathing below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck 1 Fasten cover boards according to requirements in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification 2 Fasten cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof END OF SECTION 061600 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 061600-2 Sheathing and Cover Board DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 1 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING A. Cold -Applied, Cut -Back (Solvent -Based) Asphalt Dam pproofing: 1 Available Manufacturers. a. Degussa Building Systems, Sonneborn Brand Products b Henry Company c Meadows, W R. Inc 2 Trowel Coats ASTM D 4586, Type I, fibered 3 Brush and Spray Coats ASTM D 4479, Type I, fibered or nonfibered B Cold -Applied, Emulsified -Asphalt Dampproofing 1 Available Manufacturers a Degussa Building Systems, Sonneborn Brand Products b Henry Company c Meadows, W R. Inc 2 Trowel Coats ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1 3 Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1 4 Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1 C Cut -Back Asphalt Primer ASTM D 41 D Emulsified -Asphalt Primer ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as recommended by manufacturer E Asphalt -Coated Glass Fabric ASTM D 1668, Type I City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 071113-1 Bituminous Dampproofing PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work, fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer. B Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing. C. Apply dampproofing to footings and foundation walls where opposite side of wall faces building interior 1. Apply from finished -grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and down a minimum of 6 inches over outside face of footing 2 Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners, changes in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by embedding an 8 -inch- wide strip of asphalt -coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing. Dampproofing coat for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required. D. Cold -Applied, Cut -Back Asphalt Dampproofing. 1 On concrete foundation walls, apply two brush or spray coats, or one trowel coat. E Cold -Applied Emulsified -Asphalt Dampproofing• 1. On concrete foundation walls, apply two brush or spray coats, one fibered brush or spray coat, or one trowel coat. END OF SECTION 071113 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 071113-2 Bituminous Dampproofing SECTION 071900 WATER AND GRAFFITTI REPELLENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes penetrating water-repellent treatments for the following vertical and horizontal surfaces: 1 Concrete unit masonry B. Related Sections: 1 Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for integral water-repellent admixture for unit masonry assemblies 1 3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide water repellents with the following properties based on testing manufacturer's standard products, according to test methods indicated, applied to substrates simulating project conditions using same materials and application methods to be used for Project. B Masonry Sealer Requirements 1 Masonry Absorption. Minimum 98 percent reduction of absorption after 24 hours in comparison of treated and untreated specimens a Concrete Unit Masonry: ASTM C 140. 2 Water -Vapor Transmission Maximum 10 percent reduction in rate of vapor transmission in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM E 96 3 Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry. Maximum 98 percent reduction in leakage rate in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM E 514 4 Durability: Maximum 5 percent loss of water repellency after 2500 hours of weathering in comparison to specimens before weathering, per ASTM G 53 5 Permeability: Minimum 80 percent breathable in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM D 1653 14 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data Include manufacturer's specifications, surface preparation and application instructions, recommendations for water repellents for each surface to be treated, and protection and cleaning instructions Include data substantiating that materials are B Weather and Substrate Conditions Do not proceed with application of water repellent under any of the following conditions, except with written instruction of manufacturer: City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 071900-1 Water and Graffiti Repellents 1 Ambient temperature is less than 40 deg F 2 Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for less than 28 days. 3. Rain or temperatures below 40 deg F are predicted within 24 hours. 4. Application is earlier than 24 hours after surfaces have been wet. 5. Substrate is frozen or surface temperature is less than 40 deg F. 6 Windy condition exists that may cause water repellent to be blown onto 15 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the applicator and water repellent manufacturer, covering materials and labor, agreeing to repair or replace materials that fail to provide water repellency within the specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of coating due to unusual weather phenomena, failure of prepared and treated substrate, formation of new joints and cracks in excess of 1/16 inch (1 5 mm) wide, fire, vandalism, or abuse by maintenance equipment. 1. Warranty Period 5 years from date of Substantial Completion 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain the masonry sealer and the graffiti control product from a single manufacturer PART 2 - PRODUCTS 21 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. BASF, the chemical company 2. Prosoco 3 Rainguard International, 1-866-989-5159 2.2 PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS (BASE COAT) A. Silane/Siloxane-Blend, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, silane and siloxane blend with 400 g/L or less of VOCs. 1 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: a Enviroseal PBT; BASF b Siloxane WB Concentrate, Prosoco c Micro -Seal, Rainguard International City of Yalama Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 071900-2 Water and Graffiti Repellents 2 Coverage: 1 coat, manufacturer's recommended coverage for material (porosity and texture dependent) 2 3 GRAFFITTI REPELLENTS (TOP COAT 1 AND 2) 1 Products. a TagPruf; BASF b Block -Guard & Graffiti Control II, Prosoco c VandlGuard, Rainguard International 2 Coverage: 2 coats, spread rate 3 0-4 5 wet mils per coat PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1 Verify that surfaces are clean and dry according to water-repellent manufacturer's requirements Check moisture content in three representative locations by method recommended by manufacturer 2 Inspect for previously applied treatments that may inhibit penetration or performance of water repellents 3 Verify that there is no efflorescence or other removable residues that would be trapped beneath the application of water repellent. 4 Verify that required repairs are complete, cured, and dry before applying water repellent. B Test pH level according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions to ensure chemical bond to silica -containing or siliceous minerals C Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow -over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plants and grass D Coordination with Sealants Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured 1 Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those used in the work 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cleaning Before application of water repellent, clean substrate of substances that could impair penetration or performance of product according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions and as follows. 1 Concrete Unit Masonry: Remove oil, curing compounds, laitance, and other substances that inhibit penetration or performance of water repellents according to ASTM E 1857 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 071900-3 Water and Graffiti Repellents B. Protect adjoining work, including mortar and sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow - over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live vegetation 3 3 APPLICATION A. Application rate shall be in accordance with manufacturers written recommendations and in accordance with proper coverage rates for warranty requirements B. Apply base coating of water repellent on surfaces indicated for treatment using low-pressure spray equipment. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for using airless spraying procedure, unless otherwise indicated C. Apply two layers of top coating of graffiti repellent over base coating. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions D Apply coatings on the full height of the wall unless otherwise indicated 3 4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Coverage Test: In the presence of Architect, hose down a dry, repellent -treated surface to verify complete and uniform product application A change in surface color will indicate incomplete application. 1 Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when surfaces will be tested 2 Reapply water repellent until coverage test indicates complete coverage 3 5 CLEANING A. Protective Coverings Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces and other protected areas B. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by water-repellent application as work progresses. Correct damage to work of other trades caused by water-repellent application, as approved by Architect. C Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions END OF SECTION 071900 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 071900-4 Water and Graffiti Repellents SECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes. 1 Foam -plastic board insulation 2 Glass -fiber blanket insulation 3 Vapor retarders B Related Sections. 1 Division 07 Section(s) "Metal Roofing Panel" for insulation specified as part of roofing construction. 1 3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data For each type of product indicated 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface -Burning Characteristics. As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency 1 5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources Store inside and in a dry location Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation B Protect foam -plastic board insulation as follows: 1 Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. 2 Protect against ignition at all times Do not deliver foam -plastic board materials to Project site before installation time 3 Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam -plastic board insulation in each area of construction City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 072100-1 Thermal Insulation PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FOAM -PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Extruded -Polystyrene Board Insulation. ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a Dow Chemical Company (The) b. Owens Corning. 2 Type IV, 25 psi B Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates 2.2 GLASS -FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1 CertainTeed Corporation 2 Johns Manville. 3 Owens Corning B. Unfaced, Glass -Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I, with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84, passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics C Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves D Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass -fiber blanket insulation as follows: 1 Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde 2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than 0 05 -ppm formaldehyde 2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Fire -Retardant, Reinforced -Polyethylene Vapor Retarders. Two outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nonwoven grid of nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 22 Ib/1000 sq ft., with maximum permeance rating of 0 1317 perm and with flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of not more than 5 and 60, respectively, per ASTM E 84. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 072100-2 Thermal Insulation 1 Products. Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Raven Industries Inc , DURA-SKRIM 2FR. b. Reef Industries, Inc., Griffolyn T-55 FR. B Vapor -Retarder Tape Pressure -sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor -retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder C Vapor -Retarder Fasteners: Pancake -head, self -tapping steel drill screws, with fender washers D. Single -Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT related to exposure, and Use 0 related to vapor -barrier -related substrates E Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor -retarder manufacturer and has demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated. 2 4 INSULATION FASTENERS A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle -Type Anchors. Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place 1 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following a AGM Industries, Inc , Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers b Gemco; Spindle Type 2 Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0 030 inch thick by 2 inches square 3 Spindle. Copper -coated, low -carbon steel; fully annealed; 0 105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated B Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 072100-3 Thermal Insulation C Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation Remove projections that interfere with placement. D Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness 3 3 INSTALLATION OF BELOW -GRADE INSULATION A. On vertical footing and foundation wall surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions 1 If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade line 3 4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B Foam -Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer C Glass -Fiber or Mineral -Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1 Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends 2 Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members 3 Maintain 3 -inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4 Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves. 5 For metal -framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 6. Vapor -Retarder -Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor -retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation. a Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward interior of construction b Interior Walls: Set units with facing placed as indicated on Drawings. 3 5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission Secure vapor retarders in place City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 072100-4 Thermal Insulation with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose -fiber insulation B Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs. 1 Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor -retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor -retarder manufacturer C Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor -retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders D Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor -retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders 3 6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation END OF SECTION 072100 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 072100-5 Thermal Insulation SECTION 072500 WEATHER AND SOUND BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes' 1. Building wrap 2. Flexible flashing 3. Sound barrier B Related Requirements: 1. Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for sheathing joint and penetration treatment. 2 Division 07 Section "Modified Bituminous Sheet Air Barriers" for sheet air barrier applied over wall sheathing. 1 3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1 For building wrap, include data on air and water -vapor permeance based on testing according to referenced standards 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For water -resistive barrier and flexible flashing, from ICC -ES PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 1 WATER -RESISTIVE BARRIER A. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier; with flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized, and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 072500-1 Weather and Sound Bamers 1 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a DuPont (E I. du Pont de Nemours and Company), Tyvek CommercialWrap b Pactiv, Inc ; GreenGuard Ultra Wrap 2 Water -Vapor Permeance Not less than 150g through 1 sq m of surface in 24 hours per ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method (Procedure A). 3 Allowable UV Exposure Time Not less than three months B. Building -Wrap Tape Pressure -sensitive plastic tape recommended by building -wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. 2.2 Nails and Staples: ASTM F 1667 2 3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch 1 Products Subject to compliance with requirements, [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a DuPont (E I du Pont de Nemours and Company); DuPont Flashing Tape b Grace Construction Products, a unit of W R. Grace & Co - Conn , Vycor Butyl Self Adhered Flashing B Primer for Flexible Flashing. Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for substrate C Nails and Staples ASTM F 1667 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 1 WATER -RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with water -resistive barrier securely fastened to framing immediately after sheathing is installed B Cover sheathing with water -resistive barrier as follows 1 Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control -joint locations. 2 Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4 -inch overlap unless otherwise indicated C Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 072500-2 Weather and Sound Bamers 1 Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2 Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape 3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1 Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer 2 Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width 3 Lap flashing over water -resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings. 4. Lap water -resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings. 5 After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates. END OF SECTION 072500 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 072500-3 Weather and Sound Barriers SECTION 074113 METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1 Concealed -fastener, lap -seam metal roof panels 2 Metal soffit panels B Related Sections: 1 Division 05 Section "Steel Decking" for steel roof deck supporting metal roof panels 2 Division 05 Section "Cold -Formed Metal Framing" for cold -formed metal framing supporting metal roof panels 3 Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for field -formed fasciae, copings, flashings, snow guards and other sheet metal work not part of metal roof panel assemblies 4 Division 07 Section "Roof Specialties" for manufactured fasciae, copings, roof drainage systems, and other roof specialties not part of metal roof panel assemblies 5 Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for field -applied sealants not otherwise specified in this Section 13 DEFINITIONS A. Metal Roof Panel Assembly: Metal roof panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous metal framing, thermal insulation, and accessories necessary for a complete weathertight roofing system 1 4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance Metal roof panels shall comply with performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction B Water Penetration No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at the following test -pressure difference 1 Test -Pressure Difference: 20 percent of positive design wind pressure, but not less than 6.24 Ibf/sq ft. and not more than 12 0 lbf/sq ft. C Hydrostatic -Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 2140 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 074113-1 Metal Roof Panels D Wind -Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind -uplift -resistance class indicated 1. Uplift Rating. UL 90. E Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592: 1 Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures. a. Uniform pressure of 30 Ibf/sq. ft., acting inward or outward. b. Uniform pressure as indicated on Drawings. 2 Snow Loads 30 Ibf/sq ft. 3. Deflection Limits: Metal roof panel assemblies shall withstand with vertical deflections no greater than 1/240 of the span F. Thermal Movements. Allow for thermal movements resulting from temperature changes Base calculations on surface temperatures of solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss wind and snow loads ambient and surface materials due to both 1 Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces G Thermal Performance: Provide insulated metal roof panel assemblies with thermal - resistance value (R -value) indicated when tested according to ASTM C 518. H Energy Performance Provide roof panels with solar reflective index of not less than emissivity not less than 0 75 when tested according to CRRC-1. 1 5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of roof panel and accessory. B. Shop Drawings Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof panels; details of edge conditions, side -seam and endlap joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details Distinguish between factory- and field -assembled work. C. Samples for Verification For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1 Metal Roof and Soffit Panels 12 inches long by actual panel width Include fasteners, clips, battens, closures, and other metal roof panel accessories 2 Trim and Closures: 12 inches long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories 3 Accessories: 12 -inch- long Samples for each type of accessory. 1 6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 074113-2 Metal Roof Panels A. Manufacturer Certificates Signed by manufacturer certifying that roof panels comply with energy performance requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article 1 Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements B Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. C Material Certificates. For thermal insulation and vapor retarders, from manufacturer D Field quality -control reports E Warranties. Samples of special warranties 1 7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For metal roof panels to include in maintenance manuals 1 8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer B Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated C Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal roof panels from single source from single manufacturer D Fire -Resistance Ratings Where indicated, provide metal roof panels identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency 1 Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency 2 Combustion Characteristics. ASTM E 136 1 9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, sheets, metal roof panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed Package metal roof panels for protection during transportation and handling B Unload, store, and erect metal roof panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage C. Stack metal roof panels on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering Store metal roof panels to ensure dryness Do not store metal roof panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. D Protect strippable protective covering on metal roof panels from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of metal roof panel installation City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 074113-3 Metal Roof Panels E Protect foam -plastic insulation as follows. 1 Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times Do not deliver foam -plastic insulation materials to Project site before installation time. 3 Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction 1 10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations. Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit metal roof panel work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements B Field Measurements. Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with metal roof panels by field measurements before fabrication 111 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided. B Coordinate metal roof panels with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of decks, purlins and rafters, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation 1 12 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1 Failures include, but are not limited to, the following a Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing b Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering 2 Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. B Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory -applied finishes within specified warranty period 1. Exposed Panel Finish• Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following. a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244 b. Chalking in excess of a No 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 074113-4 Metal Roof Panels 2. Finish Warranty Period: Twenty -Five (25) years from date of Substantial Completion C Special Weathertightness Warranty. Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks, within specified warranty period. 1. Weathertight Warranty Period Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 1 PANEL MATERIALS A. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot -dip process and prepainted by the coil -coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M 1 Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40, structural quality 2 Surface. Smooth, flat finish 3 Exposed Coil -Coated Finish: a 2 -Coat Fluoropolymer AAMA 621 Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 4 Concealed Finish. Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light- colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0 5 mil B Panel Sealants 1 Sealant Tape: Pressure -sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release -paper backing Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick 2 Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal roof panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer 3 Butyl -Rubber -Based, Solvent -Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311 2.2 FIELD -INSTALLED THERMAL INSULATION A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0 13 perm B Extruded -Polystyrene Board Insulation ASTM C 578, Type IV (25 psi), 1.60-Ib/cu ft. minimum density unless otherwise indicated; with maximum flame -spread and smoke - developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, installed as indicated on drawings City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 074113-5 Metal Roof Panels 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self -Adhering Sheet Underlayment, High Temperature: Butyl or SBS -modified asphalt; slip - resisting -polyethylene surfaced, with release paper backing, cold applied Stable after testing at 240 deg F and passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970 2 4 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING A. Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold -formed metallic -coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 hot -dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance unless otherwise indicated B. Cold -Rolled Furring Channels. Minimum 1 -1/4 -inch- wide flange 1. Nominal Thickness: As indicated. 2. Depth: As indicated. 3. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated -edge type of steel sheet with nominal thickness of 0 040 inch 4 Tie Wire. ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0 062 -inch - diameter wire, or double strand of 0 048 -inch- diameter wire. C Z -Shaped Furring. With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 1 Nominal Thickness: As indicated. D Felts: ASTM D 226, Type 11 (No. 30), asphalt -saturated organic felts E. Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing. Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to substrates. 2 5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Panel Fasteners: Self -tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end -welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory - applied coating Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers B. Bituminous Coating Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15 -mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2 6 CONCEALED -FASTENER, LAP -SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A. General Provide factory -formed metal roof panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners and factory -applied sealant in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 074113-6 Metal Roof Panels B Standing -Seam -Profile, Concealed -Fastener Metal Roof Panels: Formed with raised, curved - top, standing -seam -shaped major rib at panel edge and flat pan between major rib and panel edge 1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AEP Span, Multi -Loc 24 (Basis for design) b Butler Manufacturing, A BlueScope Steel Company c MBCI, A Division of NCI Building Systems d McElroy Metal, Inc e Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation. f. Peterson Aluminum Corporation 2 Material: Aluminum -zinc alloy -coated steel sheet, 0 028 -inch nominal thickness a Exterior Finish: 2 -coat fluoropolymer b Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range 3 Panel Coverage. 24 inches 4 Panel Height: 3.0 inches 5 Joint Type: Snap 6 Rib Shape. Trapezoidal 2 7 METAL SOFFIT PANELS A. General Provide factory -formed metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners and factory -applied sealant in side laps Include accessories required for weathertight installation B Flush -Profile Metal Soffit Panels. Solid panels formed with vertical panel edges and flat pan between panel edges; with flush joint between panels 1 Manufacturers Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following. a AEP -Span, Flush Panel (Basis for Design) b Butler Manufacturing, A BlueScope Steel Company c. MBCI, A Division of NCI Building Systems d McElroy Metal, Inc e Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation f Petersen Aluminum Corporation 2 Material Aluminum -zinc alloy -coated steel sheet, 0 028 -inch nominal thickness a Exterior Finish: 2 -coat fluoropolymer b Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range c Shape Flush/Flat Panel 3 Panel Coverage: 12 inches City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 074113-7 Metal Roof Panels 4 Panel Height: 0.875 inch. 5 Sealant: Factory applied within interlocking joint. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items Match material and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels 2. Closure Strips: Closed -cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin -foam or closed -cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1 -inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction 3 Thermal break Provide thermal spacer blocks and other thermal barriers at concealed clip fasteners. Install as recommended by the Manufacturer. 4. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. B Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material as roof panels, prepainted with coil coating, minimum 0.018 inch thick Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels 2.9 SNOW GUARDS A. Snow Guards: Field -fabricated, noncorrosive units designed to be installed without penetrating metal roof panels, with clamps for anchoring 1. Snow Guards Clamps: Aluminum and stainless-steel clamps attached to vertical ribs of standing -seam metal roof panels, as indicated on drawings a Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following (or approved equal): 1) AlpineSnowGuards (www.alpinesnowquards.com; 1-888-766-4273); S -5-U clamp 210 FABRICATION A. Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements B Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 074113-8 Metal Roof Panels C Fabricate metal roof panel side laps with factory -installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal -to -metal contact, in a manner that will seal weathertight and minimize noise from movements within panel assembly. D Sheet Metal Accessories* Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated 1 Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2 End Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer Rivet joints for additional strength 3 End Seams for Other Than Aluminum. Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder 4 Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards 5 Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view 6 Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of size and metal thickness recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or by metal roof panel manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 211 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes B Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping C Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles, channels, and other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer C Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 074113-9 Metal Roof Panels D Examine roughing -in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal roof panel installation E. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of interfering with insulation attachment. B. Miscellaneous Framing. Install subpurlins, eave angles, furring, and other miscellaneous roof panel support members and anchorage according to metal roof panel manufacturer's written instructions 3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Felt Underlayment: Apply at locations indicated on Drawings, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches B. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3 4 THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Repair tears or punctures immediately before concealment by other work. B Board Insulation. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to cover entire roof Comply with installation requirements in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." 1. Erect insulation and hold in place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 48 inches o c Securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to roof deck with screws spaced 24 inches o c. 3 5 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations B. Thermal Movement. Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structure at one and only one location for each panel Allow remainder of panel to move freely for thermal expansion and contraction Predrill panels for fasteners 1. Point of Fixity: Fasten each panel along a single line of fixing located at eave. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 074113-10 Metal Roof Panels 2. Avoid attaching accessories through roof panels in a manner that will inhibit thermal movement. C Install metal roof panels as follows: 1 Commence metal roof panel installation and install minimum of 300 sq ft. in presence of factory -authorized representative 2 Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted 3 Install panels perpendicular to purlins 4 Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5 Provide metal closures at rake edges and each side of ridge caps 6 Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of all openings 7 Install ridge caps as metal roof panel work proceeds 8 End Splices: Locate panel end splices over, but not attached to, structural supports Stagger panel end splices to avoid a four -panel splice condition. 9 Install metal flashing to allow moisture to run over and off metal roof panels. D Fasteners 1 Steel Roof Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and galvanized -steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior E Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written instructions F Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized -asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer 1 Coat back side of roof panels with bituminous coating where roof panels will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. G Joint Sealers Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 1 Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel Seal side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer 2 Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants " 3 6 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION A. Lap -Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer 1 Apply panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line. 2 Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 074113-11 Metal Roof Panels 3. Provide metal-backed neoprene or EPDM washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal roof panels. 4. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of washer 5 Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes 6 Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal roof panels and between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. 7 Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather -side surface of fastenings on end laps, and on side laps of nesting -type panels; on side laps of corrugated nesting -type, ribbed, or fluted panels, and elsewhere as needed to make panels weatherproof to driving rains 8 At panel end splices, nest panels with minimum 6 -inch end lap, sealed with butyl - rubber sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates. 3 7 METAL SOFFIT PANEL INSTALLATION A. In addition to complying with requirements in "Metal Roof Panel Installation, General" Article, install metal soffit panels to comply with requirements in this article B. Metal Soffit Panels. Provide metal soffit panels full width of soffits Install panels perpendicular to support framing. 1 Flash and seal panels with weather closures where metal soffit panels meet walls and at perimeter of all openings C. Metal Fascia Panels Align bottom of panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self -tapping screws. Flash and seal panels with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits, along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings. 3 8 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1 Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. B Flashing and Trim Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual " Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1 Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather -resistant performance. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 074113-12 Metal Roof Panels 2 Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints) C Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels Fasten and seal to metal roof panels as recommended by manufacturer 3 9 SNOW GUARD INSTALLATION A. Continuous Snow Guards: Attach continuous snow guard to vertical ribs of standing -seam metal roof panels with clamps or set screws Do not use fasteners that will penetrate metal roof panels 1 Provide rows of snow guards, at locations indicated on Drawings 3 10 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances Shim and align metal roof panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8 -inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles 3 11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements B Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements 312 CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions On completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer Maintain in a clean condition during construction B Replace metal roof panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 074113 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 074113-13 Metal Roof Panels SECTION 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes. 1 Formed Products: a. Formed low -slope roof sheet metal fabrications B Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section " Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking 2. Division 07 Section "Metal Roof Panels" for sheet metal flashing and trim integral with metal roof panels 3. Division 07 Section "Roof Specialties" for manufactured roof specialties not part of sheet metal flashing and trim. 1 3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind Toads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance B Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. 1 5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 076200-1 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry B Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 1 SHEET METALS A. General Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping B Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot -dip process and prepainted by the coil -coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M 1 Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40, structural quality 2 Surface- Smooth, flat and with manufacturer's standard clear acrylic coating on both sides 3 Exposed Coil -Coated Finish. a Two -Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621 Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions 4 Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range 5 Concealed Finish. Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0 5 mil 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General. Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated B Fasteners Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self -tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item 1 General- Blind fasteners or self -drilling screws, gasketed, with hex -washer head a Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory -applied coating b Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 076200-2 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 2. Fasteners for Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated Steel Sheet: Hot -dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel. C. Sealant Tape: Pressure -sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. D Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. E Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single -component, solvent -release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked -type expansion joints with limited movement. F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam -cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints G Bituminous Coating. Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187 H Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 2 3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible 1 Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3 Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems 4 Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view B Fabrication Tolerances Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8 - inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles C Fabrication Tolerances. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing." D Sealed Joints Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 076200-3 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints F Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured H Seams Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use Rivet joints where necessary for strength J Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces 2 4 LOW -SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Base Flashing Fabricate from the following materials: 1 Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated Steel 0 028 inch thick. B Counterflashing. Fabricate from the following materials: 1 Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated Steel: 0 022 inch thick. C Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials: 1 Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated Steel: 0 022 inch thick D Roof -Penetration Flashing Fabricate from the following materials 1 Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated Steel 0 028 inch thick PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1 Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2 Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored B For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 076200-4 Sheet Metal Flashing and True C Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General. Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1 Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal 3 Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks 5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6 Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. B Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. C. Expansion Provisions Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. D Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws, metal decking not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. 1 Where sealant -filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures Do not install sealant -type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F 2 Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants " F Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter Pre -tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre -tinning where pre -tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. Do not solder metallic -coated steel sheet. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 076200-5 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 2 Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces 3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements[, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions,] and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual " Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3 -inch centers C Roof Edge Flashing. Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 24 -inch centers D Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated 1 Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 24 -inch centers 2 Anchor interior leg of coping with screw fasteners and washers at 24 -inch centers E. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close -fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten. F Counterflashing. Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of interlocking folded seam or blind rivets and sealant. G Roof -Penetration Flashing Coordinate installation of roof -penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof 3 4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8 -inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles B Installation Tolerances Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing " City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 076200-6 Sheet Metal Flashing and True 3 5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder. C. Clean off excess sealants D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces Maintain in a clean condition during construction E Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 076200 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 076200-7 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim SECTION 077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 12 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1 Reglets and counterflashings B Related Sections: 1 Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking 2 Division 07 Section "Metal Roof Panels" for roof -edge drainage -system components provided by metal -roof -panel manufacturer 3 Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for custom- and site -fabricated sheet metal flashing and trim 4 Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for field -applied sealants between roof specialties and adjacent materials 1 3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Roof specialties shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction B Thermal Movements Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss 1 Temperature Change (Range) 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces 1 4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data For each type of product indicated Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes 1 5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty 1 6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 077100-1 07/23/2010 Roof Specialties 1 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING I A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry 1 B. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof specialties installation. 18 WARRANTY 1 A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes- Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory - Iapplied finishes within specified warranty period 1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: I a b Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244 Chalking in excess of a No 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214 c Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 1 2 Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 1 2 1 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS I A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation. B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to I meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching I 2 color of sheet metal Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 3 Fasteners for Stainless -Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel 4. Fasteners for Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot - Idip zinc -coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant of type, grade, class, I and use classifications required by roofing -specialty manufacturer for each application. 2.2 REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS 1 A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following• 1 1. Castle Metal Products 2. Fry Reglet Corporation. 3 Hickman Company, W P 1 4 Metal -Fab Manufacturing, LLC. B Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and Icounterflashing pieces, from the following exposed metal City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 077100-2 Roof Specialties 1 Zinc -Coated Steel: Nominal [0 022 -inch] [0 028 -inch] thickness 2 Corners Factory mitered and continuously welded 3 Masonry Type, Embedded: Provide reglets with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint. C Counterflashings. Manufactured units of heights to overlap top edges of base flashings by 4 inches and in lengths not exceeding 12 feet designed to snap into reglets and compress against base flashings with joints lapped, from the following exposed metal. 1 Zinc -Coated Steel: Nominal [0 022 -inch] [0 028 -inch] thickness D Accessories: 1 Counterflashing Wind -Restraint Clips Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge E Zinc -Coated Steel Finish: Two -coat fluoropolymer 1 Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range 2 3 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes B Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping C Appearance of Finished Work. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B Examine walls, roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties C Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored D Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Felt Underlayment: Install with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under roof specialties Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 077100-3 07/23/2010 Roof Specialties B. Self -Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install wrinkle free Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation, use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures Apply in shingle fashion to shed water. Overlap edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. C. Polyethylene Sheet: Install with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under roof specialties Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped and taped joints of not less than 2 inches D Slip Sheet: Install with tape or adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under roof specialties. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches 3 3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General. Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions Anchor roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete roof -specialty systems 1 Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation, with limited oil -canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks 2 Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant. 3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture 4 Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted. 5 Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces B Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer 1 Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel roof specialties with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction 2 Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet self -adhering, high-temperature sheet underlayment or polyethylene sheet. 3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof specialties for waterproof performance C Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws D. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roofing -specialty manufacturer. E Seal joints as required for watertight construction Place sealant to be completely concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F 3 4 REGLET AND COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 077100-4 07/23/2010 Roof Specialties A. General: Coordinate installation of reglets and counterflashings with installation of base flashings B Embedded Reglets See Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installation of reglets C Counterflashings Insert counterflashings into reglets or other indicated receivers, ensure that counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with elastomeric sealant. Fit counterflashings tightly to base flashings 3 5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering B Clean and neutralize flux materials Clean off excess solder and sealants C Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing Maintain roof specialties in a clean condition during construction D Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures END OF SECTION 077100 City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 077100-5 07/23/2010 Roof Specialties SECTION 077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Preformed flashing sleeves. 2. Miscellaneous materials B. Related Sections: 1 Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field -formed metal flashing, roof -drainage systems, roof expansion -joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories 2. Division 23 Section "HVAC" 1 3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 14 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles. B Samples. For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, prepared on Samples of size to adequately show color 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation B. Coordinate dimensions with rough -in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. 16 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes- Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of factory -applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1 Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following. a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244 b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal 2. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 077200-1 Roof Accessories PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 1 PREFORMED FLASHING SLEEVES A. Vent Stack Flashing. Metal flashing sleeve, uninsulated, with integral deck flange 1 Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products. b. Milcor Inc ; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc. c Thaler Metal USA Inc. 2 Metal: Aluminum sheet, 0 063 inch thick. 3 Height: 19 inches 4 Diameter: As indicated 5 Finish: Manufacturer's standard 2.2 ROOF ACCESSORIES A. Roof Curbs. Internally reinforced roof -curb units capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, integral metal cant, and integrally formed deck -mounting flange at perimeter bottom 1 Basis-of-Desiqn Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide RC -9 Style, Roof Curb with Built in Cricket, Roof Products & Systems, 484 N. Thomas Drive, Bensenville, IL 60106, Tel: 630-595-7320 or comparable product by one of the following a AES Industries, Inc b. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products c Milcor Inc., Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley. Inc d Roof Products, Inc e Thybar Corporation B Size: Coordinate dimensions on drawings with roughing -in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported C Material: Aluminum -zinc alloy -coated steel sheet, 0.052 inch thick. 1 Finish. Two -coat fluoropolymer 2 Color As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, to match roof panel D Construction: 1 Insulation: Factory insulated with 1 -1/2 -inch -glass -fiber board insulation 2 Liner Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish 3 Factory -installed wood nailer at top of curb, continuous around curb perimeter 4 On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form deck -mounting flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile 5 Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches unless otherwise indicated 6 Top Surface Level around perimeter with roof slope accommodated by sloping the deck -mounting flange City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 077200-2 Roof Accessories 7. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with perimeter curb height tapered to accommodate roof slope so that top surface of perimeter curb is level Equip unit with water diverter or cricket on side that obstructs water flow 2 3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation B Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. C Underlayment: 1. Polyethylene Sheet: 6 -mil- thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397 2. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-Ib/100 sq ft. minimum, rosin sized. D Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and metals being fastened Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated: 1 Fasteners for Zinc -Coated or Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated Steel' Series 300 stainless steel or hot -dip zinc -coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 E Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork. F. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight. G Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single -component, solvent -release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes B Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories D Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions 1. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 077200-3 Roof Accessories 2 Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads 3 Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates. 4 Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or loosening of fasteners and seals B Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1 Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2 Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene sheet. C Preformed Flashing -Sleeve Installation: Secure flashing sleeve to roof membrane according to flashing -sleeve manufacturer's written instructions D Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer 3 3 REPAIR AND CLEANING A. Galvanized Surfaces. Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing according to ASTM A 780 B Touch up factory -primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to Division 09 painting Sections C Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions D Clean off excess sealants E Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures END OF SECTION 077200 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 077200-4 Roof Accessories SECTION 078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals. Product Data and Installer certificates signed by Installer certifying that products have been installed in compliance with requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or comparable product by one of the following. 1. Dow -Corning 2 Grace Construction Products 3 Tremco 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Provide penetration firestopping materials that are compatible with one another, substrates, and penetrating items if any B Penetrations in Fire -Resistance -Rated Walls and Horizontal Assemblies. Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0 01 -inch wg 1 F -Rating at Fire -Resistance -Rated Walls: Not less than that of construction penetrated 2 F -Rating at Horizontal Assemblies: At least 1 hour, but not less than that of construction penetrated. C. Exposed Penetration Firestopping. Provide products with flame -spread and smoke - developed indexes of Tess than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84 D Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 078413-1 Penetration Firestopping PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION A. General. Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated B Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping Include the following information on labels 1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb Notify Building Management of Any Damage " 2 Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency 3. Manufacturer's name 4. Installer's name 3.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE A. Firestopping for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing: Manufacturer Product Name Grace Flamesafe FS 1900 Sealant B Firestopping for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing: Manufacturer Product Name Grace Flamesafe FS 1900 Sealant C Firestopping for Electrical Cables/Groupings of Electrical Cables: Manufacturer Product Name Grace Flamesafe FSP 100 Putty D Firestopping for Cable Trays with Electric Cables Manufacturer Product Name Grace Flamesafe FS 1900 E Firestopping for Groupings of Penetrants Manufacturer Product Name Grace Flamesafe FSP 1000 / FS 1900 END OF SECTION 078413 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 078413-2 Penetration Firestoppmg SECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 Silicone joint sealants 2 Latex joint sealants. B Related Sections: 1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets. 2 Division 07 Section "Expansion Control" for building expansion joints 3 Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints 4. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in pavements, walkways, and curbing. 1 3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. For each joint -sealant product indicated B Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2 -inch- wide joints formed between two 6 -inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants 1 4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data. For qualified Installer B. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer. C Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 079200-1 07/23/2010 Joint Sealants A. Installer Qualifications Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B Source Limitations. Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer 1 6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1 When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint -sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F 2 When joint substrates are wet. 3 Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint -sealant manufacturer for applications indicated 4 Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates 17 WARRANTY A. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1 Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression 2 Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents 4 Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility. Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint -sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience B Liquid -Applied Joint Sealants Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid -applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates 1 Suitability for Immersion in Liquids Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247 Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 079200-2 07/23/2010 Joint Sealants C. Stain -Test -Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. D. Suitability for Contact with Food• Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600 E. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants* As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Single -Component, Nonsag, Neutral -Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT 1 Products. Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a BASF Building Systems; Omniseal 50. b Dow Corning Corporation, [756 SMS] [791] [795] [995] c Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C995 d. Tremco Incorporated; [Spectrem 2] [Spectrem 3] B Single -Component, Pourable, Traffic -Grade, Neutral -Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 100/50, for Use T 1 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following a. Dow Corning Corporation; [890 -SL] [SL Parking Structure Sealant] b. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 900 SL 2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following. a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. b Tremco Incorporated, Tremflex 834 2 4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General. Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing B Cylindrical Sealant Backings. ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed -cell material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 079200-3 07/23/2010 Joint Sealants C Bond -Breaker Tape Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint -filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable 2 5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates B Masking Tape Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint -sealant performance B Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints. Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements 1 Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2 Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air Porous joint substrates include the following: a Concrete b Masonry 3 Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete 4 Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a Metal City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 079200-4 07/23/2010 Joint Sealants B Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal 3.3 A. B C D E INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS General: Comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2 Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3 Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before and replace them with dry materials. Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are sealants and backs of joints sealant application not used between Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed 1 Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1 Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2 Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces 3 Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated 4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193 a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints 3 4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 079200-5 07/23/2010 Joint Sealants A. Evaluation of Field -Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements 3 5 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur 3 6 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work 3 7 JOINT -SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint -Sealant Application. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfacesJS-1 1 Joint Locations: a Isolation and contraction joints in cast -in-place concrete slabs 2 Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, pourable, traffic grade, neutral curing. 3 Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors B Joint -Sealant Application Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS -2 1 Joint Locations: a Control and expansion joints in unit masonry b Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and louvers c Control and expansion joints in overhead surfaces. 2 Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class 50. 3 Joint -Sealant Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors C Joint -Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces JS -3 1 Joint Locations. a Isolation joints in cast -in-place concrete slabs City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 079200-6 07/23/2010 Joint Sealants 2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, pourable, traffic grade, neutral curing. 3. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Joint -Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS -4 1 Joint Locations. a Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors. 2. Joint Sealant: Latex. 3 Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. END OF SECTION 079200 City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 079200-7 07/23/2010 Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 OPENINGS SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. Work under this section comprises of furnishing hollow metal doors and frames, including transom frames, sidelight and window frames with provision for glazed, paneled or louvered openings, fire labeled and non -labeled, as scheduled A. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Related documents, drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to this section B. RELATED SECTIONS 1. 062000 — Finish Carpentry 2. 087100 — Door Hardware 3. 099100 — Painting 12 REFERENCES A. STANDARDS 1. NFPA 80 — Fire Doors and Windows 2. ANSI/SDI-100 — Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames 3. SDI -105 — Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames 4. SDI -107 — Hardware on Steel Doors (reinforcement application) 5. ANSI -A250 4 — Steel Doors and Frames Physical Endurance 6. UL10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies B. CODES 1. NFPA-101 — Life Safety Code 2. IBC 2006 — International Building Code 3. ANSI -A117.1 — Accessible and Usable Building and Facilities 4. ADA — Americans with Disabilities Act 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Submit copies of the hollow metal door and frame shop drawings in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements B. PRODUCT DATA 1. Submit shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door and frame types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 081113-1 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames C. SHOP DRAWINGS 1. Provide a schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and door openings as those on the contract documents Shop drawings should include the following information: a. Material thickness and/or gauge b. Door core material c. Mortises and reinforcements d. Anchorage types. e. Locations of exposed fasteners f. Glazed, louvered and paneled openings g. Mounting locations of standard hardware 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. SUBSTITUTIONS 1. All substitution requests must be submitted within the procedures and time frame as outlined in Division 1, General Requirements Approval of products is at the discretion of the architect and his consultant. B. MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS 1. Manufacturer shall be a member in good standing of the Steel Door Institute (SDI) C. FIRE RATED DOOR ASSEMBLIES 1. All labeled fire door assemblies to be of a type that have been classified and listed in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA80 and test in compliance with NFPA-252, and UL10C A physical label is to be affixed to the fire door at an authorized facility; embossed labels are acceptable on standard 3 sided door frames 2. For openings required to be fire rated exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies, submit manufacturer's certification that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to design, materials and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction 3. Project requires door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive pressure and S -label requirements Specifications must be cross-referenced and coordinated with hardware and other door manufacturers to ensure that total opening engineering is compatible with UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. a. Certification(s) of compliance shall be made available upon request by the Authority Having Jurisdiction 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The supplier shall deliver all materials to the project site; direct factory shipments are not allowed unless agreed upon beforehand Supplier shall coordinate delivery times and schedules with the contractor B. Deliver doors cardboard wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and jobsite storage Provide additional protection to prevent damage to any factory -finished doors Mark all doors and frames with opening numbers as shown on the contract documents and shop drawings City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 081113-2 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames C. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the architect. Otherwise, remove and replace damaged goods as directed D. Store doors and frames at the building site in a dry and secure place 1. Place units on minimum 4" high wood blocking 2. Avoid use of non -vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. 3. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. 4. Provide 1/4" spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. 1.6 WARRANTY A. All doors and frames shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year commencing on the date of final completion and acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide standard hollow metal doors and frames by one of the following. 1. Ceco Corporation 2. Curries Company 3. Fleming Company 4. Steelcraft 2.2 MATERIALS A. All doors and frames shall be manufactured of commercial quality cold rolled steel per ASTM -A366 and A568 general requirements; galvanized to A60 or G60 or galvanealed to A40 minimum coating weight standard per ASTM -A924 Internal reinforcing may be manufactured of hot rolled pickled and oiled steel per ASTM -A569 B. Supports and anchors shall be fabricated of not less that 18 -gauge sheet steel, galvanized where galvanized frames are used C. Where items are to be built into exterior walls, inserts, bolts and fasteners shall be hot dipped galvanized in compliance with ASTM -A153, Class C or D as applicable D. Provide all hollow metal doors and frames receiving electrified hardware with universal molex wiring harness and concealed plug connectors on one end to accommodate up to twelve wires. Coordinate universal molex connectors on end of the wiring harness to plug directly into the electrified hardware and the electric hinge. 2.3 DOORS A. Provide 1 3/4" thick doors of materials and ANSI/SDI-100 grades and models specified below, or as indicated on drawings or schedules: City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 081113-3 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1. Room 104: Level 3 (Extra -heavy duty), Model 2 (Seamless) a. Exterior doors shall be minimum 16 -gauge galvanized or galvanealed steel with both lock and hinge rail edge of door intermittently welded, filledand ground smooth the full height of door. Exterior doors shall be insulated with a solid slab of expanded polystyrene or polyurethane foam permanently bonded to the inside of each face skin The top of all doors shall be closed flush by the addition of a 16 -gauge screwed -in top cap and sealed to prevent water infiltration. The bottom channel shall include weep -holes 1) Ceco: Legion -16 -SEM 2) Curries 707N-16 3) Fleming. D-16 4) Steelcraft: L-16 B. All doors shall be beveled 1/8" in 2" and shall have top and bottom channels of not less than 16 -gauge, flush or inverted, welded to the face sheets Doors shall have a full height 14 -gauge hinge rail reinforcement channel, or individual 10 gauge hinge reinforcements C. All doors to conform to ANSI -A250 4 Level "A" criteria and shall be tested to 1,000,000 operating cycles and 23 twist tests Certification of Level "A" doors is to be submitted with approval drawings by supplier upon request. Do no bid or supply any type or gauge of door not having been tested and passed these criteria 2 4 FRAMES A. Provide hollow metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, of types and styles as shown on the drawings and schedules Conceal fastenings unless otherwise indicated 1 Room 104: Level 2, 16 -gauge, galvanized or galvanealed a. Exterior FrameSecurity Grade Frames. 14 -gauge 1) Ceco: SF Series 2) Curries. M Series 3) Fleming: F Series 4) Steelcraft: F Series B. Fabricate frames with mitered and faces only welded corners, re -prime at the welded areas All welds to be flush with neatly mitered or butted material cuts C. All frames shall have minimum 7 gauge hinge reinforcements, 14 -gauge lock strike reinforcing, and 12 -gauge closer reinforcing D. Provide temporary shipping bars to be removed before setting frames E. Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive three (3) silencers on strike jambs of single frames and two (2) silencers on heads of double frames F. Provide minimum 0 0179" thick steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle Where practical, fit and assemble units in City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 081113-4 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI 100 requirements 1. Clearances shall be no more than 1/8" at jambs and heads except between non fire rated pairs of doors which may be no more than 1/4 " Not more than 3/4" at the bottom of the doors B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non - flush units, from only cold -rolled steel sheet. C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI -117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames " D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot -rolled steel sheet. E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide exposed fasteners with countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts F. Grout Guards: Provide where mortar might obstruct hardware operation. G. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of SDI -107 and ANSI - A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. H. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface -applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface -applied hardware may be done at Project site. Provide internal reinforcements for all doors to receive door closers and exit devices. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the Door and Hardware Institute's (DHI) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames " J. Provide glazing stops with minimum 0 0359 -inch- thick steel or 0 040 -inch - thick aluminum K. Provide non -removable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors L. Provide screw -applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass and other panels in doors PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. B. Comply with provisions of SDI -105, "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Door Frames," unless otherwise indicated Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Except for frames located in existing concrete, masonry, or gypsum board assembly construction, place frames before constructing enclosing walls and ceilings. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 081113-5 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 2. In masonry construction, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors 3. At existing concrete or masonry construction, install at least 3 completed opening anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devices. 4. In metal -stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels In steel -stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 5. Install fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Fit hollow -metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI/SDI 100 Install fire rated doors with clearances specified in NFPA 80 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying primer B. Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames END OF SECTION 081113 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 081113-6 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames SECTION 081613 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Doors. B Fiberglass Door Frames. C. Fiberglass Window Frames. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 079200 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and backup materials B Section 087100 - Door Hardware C. Section 088000 - Glazing. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 523 - Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss B. ASTM D 635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self -Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position C ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials D ASTM E 152 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies E. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies F. SDI 100 - Recommended Specifications for Steel Doors and Frames. G UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies H UL 305 - Standard for Panic Hardware. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Door opening assemblies: 1 USDA accepted 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 B Product Data Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1 Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2 Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3 Installation methods C Shop Drawings: 1 Plans: Indicate location of each door opening assembly in project. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 081613-1 Fiberglass Doors and Frames 2. Elevations: Dimensioned elevation of each type door opening assembly in project; indicate sizes and locations of door hardware, and lites and louvers, if specified 3 Details: Installation details of each type installation condition in project; indicate installation details of glazing, if specified 4. Schedule Indicate each door opening assembly in project; cross-reference to plans, elevations, and details D Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns E Verification Samples For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns F Test Reports Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties G Closeout: Submit warranty documents specified herein 1 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications Company specializing in manufacturing fiberglass doors and frames with a minimum documented experience of ten years B Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installation of fiberglass doors and frames with minimum three years documented experience. 1 7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened, undamaged packaging, with manufacturer's labels intact. B Inspect and report damage to doors at time of delivery C Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation D Store door assemblies in on end, to prevent damage to face corners and edges 18 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's 15 -year warranty against failure due to corrosion from specified environment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 21 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Desiqn Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Standard FRP door and frames from FIB -R -Dor, Div. of Advance Fiberglass, Inc., or comparable product by one of the following: 1) CORRIM Company, Corrosion Immune Fiberglass Doors and Frames, 3331 County Road, A, Oshkosh, WI 549041-1414 2) FIB -R -Dor, Div of Advance Fiberglass, Inc , which is located at: 7516 Counts Massie Rd N Little Rock, AR 72113; Toll Free Tel: 800-FIB-RDOR City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 081613-2 Fiberglass Doors and Frames 2.2 MATERIALS A. Fiberglass Mat: Glass fiber chopped strand, minimum 1.5 ounces per square foot. B Resins. Manufacturer's formulation for fabricating units to meet specified requirements. C Anchors Manufacturer's standard stainless steel expansion anchors for existing openings, and stainless steel masonry tee anchors for new construction D. Fasteners: Stainless steel. E Glazing: Type specified in Section 088000, factory installed. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Non -rated Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Doors (Door 102, Door 103): 1 Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (45 mm). 2 Thermal Insulating Value: 'R' factor 11 3 Construction: a. Core End -grain balsa wood, resin -impregnated b. Door Plates: Molded in one continuous piece, resin reinforced with hand -laid glass fiber mat, nominal 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, minimum 15 mil gel -coated surface. c Door Edges. Minimum 3 layers resin -reinforced glass fiber mat, nominal 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) thick, machine tooled 4 Sizes Indicated on drawings 5. Finish: Smooth gloss surface, minimum value of 88 in accordance with ASTM D 523. a Color: Gray finish B Non -rated Fiberglass Frames (Door 102, Door 103, Window Type A). 1 Construction: One-piece pultruded fiberglass reinforced plastic, minimum 1/4 inch wall thickness, jamb -to -head joints mitered and reinforced with FRP clips and stainless steel fasteners; conforming to SDI requirements for performance equivalent to 16 gage steel frames 2 Frame profile 5-3/4 inches (146 mm) deep, 2 inches (51 mm) wide face; double rabbeted with 5/8 inch (16 mm) high stop 3. Sizes: Indicated on drawings. 4 Finish: Satin Co -Extruded finish, with true and consistent color throughout frame thickness a Color Gray CO -X Finish. b. Color: Dark Brown CO -X Finish C. Frame Anchors: Types recommended by manufacturer for project conditions D Door Hardware: Specified Section 087100 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Doors. 1. Minimum glass fiber to resin ratio. 30 percent. 2 Mortise for lockset, and recess for strike plate in lock stile 3 Embed steel reinforcement for hinges in fiberglass matrix; provide for hinge leaf recesses in hinge stile City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 081613-3 Fiberglass Doors and Frames B. Fiberglass Frames: 1 Mortise for lock strike, and recess for strike plate in lock jamb 2 Reinforce for hinges and other indicated hardware PART 3 EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and clearances are as indicated on approved shop drawings Do not begin installation until openings have been properly prepared B If opening preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding 3.2 PREPARATION A. Acclimate doors and frames to site conditions for a minimum of 24 hours before installation B Do not remove labels from fire -rated doors and frames 3 3 INSTALLATION A. Install door opening assemblies in accordance with approved shop drawings, SDI 100, and manufacturer's printed installation instructions, using installation methods and materials specified in installation instructions B Use anchorage devices to securely fasten sliding door assembly to wall construction without distortion or imposed stresses C Coordinate installation of thermal insulation at shim spaces at frame perimeter D Installation of door hardware is specified in Section 08710 E Install door hardware in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, using through -bolts to secure surface applied hardware F Site Tolerances Maintain plumb and level tolerances specified in manufacturer's printed installation instructions 3 4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors in accordance with door manufacturer's maintenance instructions to swing open and shut without binding, and to remain in place at any angle without being moved by gravitational influence B Adjust door hardware to operate correctly in accordance with hardware manufacturer's maintenance instructions 3 5 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces of door opening assemblies and sight -exposed door hardware in accordance with manufacturer's maintenance instructions B Remove labels and visible markings City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 081613-4 Fiberglass Doors and Frames 3 6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 37 SCHEDULE A. Schedules Refer to Door Schedule indicated on drawings END OF SECTION 081613 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 081613-5 Fiberglass Doors and Frames SECTION 083473 SOUND -CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1 Steel sound -control doors 2 Steel frames and sound -control seals B Related Sections: 1 Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for embedding anchors for sound -control door frames into masonry construction 1 3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated Include sound ratings, construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes B Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1 Elevations of each door design 2 Details of sound -control seals, door bottoms, and thresholds 3 Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses 4 Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses 5 Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware 6 Details of each different wall opening condition 7 Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections 8 Details of accessories 9 Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing 10 Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC -accredited certification body B Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 083473-1 Sound Control Door Assemblies C Source Limitations' Obtain sound -control door assemblies, including doors, frames, sound - control seals, hinges (when integral for sound control), thresholds, and other items essential for sound control, from single source from single manufacturer D. Sound Rating' Provide sound -control door assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested as sound -retardant units by an acoustical testing agency, and have the following minimum rating: 1. STC Rating: STC 50 (single -door 101A) and STC 41 (pair -door 1018) as determined by ASTM E 413 when tested in an operable condition according to ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 1408 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project -site storage Do not use nonvented plastic B Shipping Spreaders: Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded or mechanically attached to jambs and mullions. C. Store doors and frames under cover at Project site Place units in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4 -inch- high, wood blocking Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber 1 If wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide a minimum of 1/4 -inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation 16 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for sound -control door assemblies. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 17 WARRANTY A. All doors and frames shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year commencing on the date of final completion and acceptance. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2 1 STEEL SOUND -CONTROL DOORS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ceco, Sound -Tech Xpress, Series STX50 (door 101A) and STX41P (door 1018) or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Ceco Door; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2 CURRIES Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 3 Fleming Steel Doors & Frames, an ASSA ABLOY Group company 4 Steelcraft City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 083473-2 Sound Control Door Assemblies B Description. Provide flush -design sound -control doors, with manufacturer's standard sound - retardant core as required to provide STC[ and fire] rating indicated Construct doors with smooth, flush surfaces without visible joints or seams on exposed faces or stile edges Fabricate according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 865. 1. Exterior Doors: Fabricate from metallic -coated steel sheet 0 052 -inch nominal thickness, or thicker as required to provide STC rating indicated 2 Interior Doors Fabricate from cold -rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated, 0 048 - inch nominal thickness, or thicker as required to achieve STC rating indicated. 3 Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Doors. Same material as face sheets 4 Top and Bottom Channels Closed with continuous channels of same material as face sheets, spot welded to face sheets not more than 6 inches o c 5. Hardware Reinforcement: Same material as face sheets C Materials. 1 Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable for exposed applications 2 Hot -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects, pickled and oiled 3 Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with G60 zinc (galvanized) or A40 zinc -iron -alloy (galvannealed) coating designation 4. Glazing: As required by sound -control door assembly manufacturer to comply with sound -control[ and fire -rated -door labeling] requirements D Finishes 1 Prime Finish- Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating a Shop Primer. Manufacturer's standard, fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250 10 acceptance criteria, recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate, compatible with substrate and field -applied coatings despite prolonged exposure 2.2 SOUND -CONTROL FRAMES A. Description: Fabricate sound -control door frames with corners mitered, reinforced, and continuously welded full depth and width of frame Fabricate according to ANSI/NAAMM- HMMA 865 1 Weld frames according to NAAMM-HMMA 820 2 Exterior Frames: Fabricate from metallic -coated steel sheet 0 079 -inch nominal thickness, or thicker as required to provide STC rating indicated. 3 Interior Frames: Fabricate from cold -rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated, 0 075 - inch nominal thickness, or thicker as required to provide STC rating indicated 4 Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 865 of same material as face sheets 5 Head Reinforcement: Reinforce frames with metallic -coated steel channel or angle stiffener, 0 108 -inch nominal thickness, welded to head 6 Jamb Anchors. a Masonry Type: Adjustable strap -and -stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0 064 -inch nominal thickness metallic -coated steel with City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 083473-3 Sound Control Door Assemblies corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long, or wire anchors not less than 0.156 inch thick. 7 Floor Anchors Not less than 0 079 -inch nominal thickness metallic -coated steel, and as follows' a Separate Topping Concrete Slabs. Adjustable -type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2 -inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface 8 Plaster Guards: Metallic -coated steel sheet, not less than 0 026 inch thick. B. Materials: 1 Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable for exposed applications. 2 Hot -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects, pickled and oiled. 3 Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with G60 zinc (galvanized) or A40 zinc -iron -alloy (galvannealed) coating designation 4 Supports and Anchors: After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior walls according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B 5 Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners. Provide items to be built into exterior walls, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. 6 Powder -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching sound -control door frames of type indicated 7 Mineral -Fiber Insulation. Insulation composed of rock -wool fibers, slag -wool fibers, or glass fibers C. Finishes: 1 Prime Finish Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. a Shop Primer. Manufacturer's standard, fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250 10 acceptance criteria, recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field -applied coatings despite prolonged exposure 2 3 SOUND -CONTROL HARDWARE A. Description: Provide manufacturer's standard sound -control system, including head and jamb seals, door bottoms, cam -lift hinges, and thresholds, as required by testing to achieve STC rating indicated. 1 Compression Seals: One-piece units; consisting of closed -cell sponge neoprene seal held in place by metal retainer; with retainer cover of same material as door frame; attached to door frame with concealed screws 2 Automatic Door Bottoms: Neoprene or silicone gasket, held in place by metal housing, that automatically drops to form seal when door is closed; mounted to bottom edge of door with screws a Mounting. Mortised or semimortised into bottom of door as required by testing to achieve STC rating indicated City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 083473-4 Sound Control Door Assemblies 3 Door Bottoms. Neoprene or silicone gasket held in place by metal housing, mortised into bottom edge of door 4 Cam -Lift Hinges: Full -mortise template type that raises door 1/2 inch when door is fully open, with hardened pin, fabricated from stainless steel 5 Thresholds Flat, smooth, unfluted type as recommended by manufacturer; fabricated from stainless steel a Finish: Clear anodic finish B Other Hardware. Comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." 2.4 SOUND -CONTROL ACCESSORIES A. Grout: Comply with ASTM C 476, with a slump of not more than 4 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M B Corrosion -Resistant Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15 -mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities 2 5 FABRICATION A. Sound -Control Steel Door Fabrication: Sound -control doors to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal 1 Seamless Edge Construction: Fabricate doors with faces joined at vertical edges by welding, welds shall be ground, filled, and dressed to make them invisible and to provide a smooth, flush surface 2 Exterior Doors: Close top edges flush and seal joints against water penetration. Provide weep -hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape 3 Glazed Liles' Factory install glazed lites according to requirements of tested assembly to achieve STC rating indicated Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of door 4 Hardware Preparation Factory prepare sound -control doors to receive templated mortised hardware, include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware a Reinforce doors to receive nontemplated mortised and surface -mounted door hardware b Locate door hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to NAAMM- HMMA 831, "Recommended Hardware Locations for Custom Hollow Metal Doors and Frames " 5 Tolerances. Fabricate doors to tolerances indicated in ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 865 B Sound -Control Frame Fabrication Fabricate sound -control frames to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 083473-5 Sound Control Door Assemblies 1. Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated from same thickness metal as frames. 2 Provide countersunk, flat- or oval -head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated 3. Floor Anchors Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 4 Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type. Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o c and as follows. 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches in height. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches in height. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches in height. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof more than 96 inches in height. 5 Head Reinforcement: For frames more than 48 inches wide, provide continuous head reinforcement for full width of opening, welded to back of frame at head 6 Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare sound -control frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware. a. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface -mounted door hardware b Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to NAAMM- HMMA 831, "Recommended Hardware Locations for Custom Hollow Metal Doors and Frames " 7 Plaster Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware cutouts and glazing -stop screw and sound -control seal preparations to close off interior of openings in frames to be grouted 8 Tolerances: Fabricate frames to tolerances indicated in ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 865 PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of sound - control door assemblies. B Examine roughing -in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of sound - control door frame connections before frame installation C Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 083473-6 Sound Control Door Assemblies 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded -in shipping spreaders installed at factory Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces B Prior to installation and with installation spreaders in place, adjust and securely brace sound - control door frames to the following tolerances 1 Squareness Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head 2 Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall 3 Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4 Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor C Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface -mounted door hardware 3 3 INSTALLATION A. General Install sound -control door assemblies plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place, comply with manufacturer's written instructions B Frames Install sound -control door frames in sizes and profiles indicated 1 Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged a Install sound -control frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening b Remove temporary braces only after frames or bucks have been properly set and secured c Check squareness, twist, and plumbness of frames as walls are constructed Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances d Apply corrosion -resistant coatings coating to backs of frames to be filled with mortar, grout, and plaster containing antifreezing agents 2 Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors a Floor anchors may be set with powder -actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors, if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings 3 In -Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces 4 Grouted Frames. Solidly fill space between frames and substrate with grout. Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces 5 Installation Tolerances. Adjust sound -control door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 083473-7 Sound Control Door Assemblies a Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b Alignment: Pius or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall c Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall d Plumbness. Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor C Doors' Fit sound -control doors accurately in frames, within clearances indicated below Shim as necessary. 1 Non -Fire -Rated Doors: Fit non -fire -rated doors accurately in frames with the following clearances: a. Jambs: 1/8 inch. b. Head with Butt Hinges: 1/8 inch. c. Head with Cam -Lift Hinges: As required by manufacturer, but not more than 3/8 inch d Sill: Manufacturer's standard. e Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch D Sound -Control Seals Where seals have been prefit and preinstalled in the factory and subsequently removed for shipping, reinstall seals and adjust according to manufacturer's written instructions E. Cam -Lift Hinges: Install hinges according to manufacturer's written instructions F Thresholds Set thresholds in full bed of sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants " 3 4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments' Check and adjust seals, door bottoms, and other sound -control hardware items right before final inspection Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. B Remove and replace defective work, including defective or damaged sound seals and doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable 1 Adjust gaskets, gasket retainers, and retainer covers to provide contact required to achieve STC rating C Clean grout off sound -control door frames immediately after installation D Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying primer END OF SECTION 083473 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 083473-8 Sound Control Door Assemblies SECTION 084523 FIBERGLASS -SANDWICH -PANEL SKYLIGHT ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes aluminum -framed assemblies incorporating fiberglass -sandwich panels as follows. 1 Skylight assemblies B Related Sections. 1 Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for pre -manufactured roof curbs 1 3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum components of panel assemblies B Samples for Verification For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes 1 Sandwich Panel 12 inch x 12" inch unit 2 Factory finished aluminum 5 inch long sections 1 4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data For qualified installer and manufacturer B Warranties Sample of special warranties 1 5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data For panel assemblies to include in maintenance manuals 1 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications. For fiberglass -sandwich panels, a qualified manufacturer whose facilities, processes, and products are monitored by an independent, accredited quality -control agency for compliance with applicable requirements in ICC -ES AC04, "Sandwich Panels," or ICC -ES AC177, "Translucent Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Faced Panel Wall, Roof and Skylight Systems " City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 084523-1 Fiberglass -Sandwich -Panel Skylight Assemblies B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of panel assemblies required for this Project. C Preconstruction Testing: Provide panel assemblies that comply with test -performance requirements indicated, as evidenced by reports of tests performed on manufacturer's standard panel assemblies by a qualified independent testing agency. a. Structural -performance preloading at one-half of the specified maximum test load (ASTM E 330) b. Air infiltration (ASTM E 283). c Water penetration under static pressure (ASTM E 331) d Water penetration under dynamic pressure (AAMA 501 1). e Structural performance at design load (ASTM E 330). 1 7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection b Water leakage c Fiberglass -sandwich panel fiberbloom or delamination d Aluminum -finish checking, crazing, peeling, chalking, and fading of finishes 2 Warranty Period• Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 21 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kalwall Flat Curb - Type, Standard S -Line Skylight or comparable product by one of the following: 1 Kalwall Corporation 2. Major Industries, Inc 3 Structures Unlimited, Inc. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Fiberglass -sandwich -panel assemblies shall withstand the effects of the following forces without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction• 1 Structural loads. 2 Thermal movements 3 Movements of supporting structure 4 Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 084523-2 Fiberglass -Sandwich -Panel Skylight Assemblies 5 Failure includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits b Water leakage c Thermal stresses transferred to building structure. d. Noise or vibration created by wind, thermal, or structural movements e Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components B Structural Loads. 1 Seismic Loads* As indicated on Drawings 2 Wind Loads As indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed 85 mph b Importance Factor 1 15 c Exposure Category: C C Thermal and STC Requirements: 1 Thermal Insulation. U -value = 0.05 BTU/(hr/ft2/°F) 2 Solar heat gain coefficient (based on face sheet color combination). 0.25 3 Acoustic Insulation: 35 STC 2 3 PANEL COMPONENTS A. Face Sheets 1 Translucent faces Manufactured from glass fiber reinforced thermoset resins, formulated specifically for architectural use a Thermoplastic (e g polycarbonate, acrylic) faces are not acceptable b Face sheets shall not deform, deflect or drip when subjected to fire or flame c Face sheets shall not delaminate when exposed to 200°F for 30 minutes per IBC or 300°F for 25 minutes 2. Interior face sheets* a Flamespread. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed, which requires periodic unannounced retesting, with flamespread rating no greater than 50 (20) and smoke developed no greater than 250 (200) when tested in accordance with UL 723/ASTM E 84 b- Burn extent by ASTM D 635 shall be no greater than 1" 3 Exterior face sheets a Color stability* Full thickness of the exterior face sheet shall not change color more than 3 0 (5 0) CIE Units DELTA E by ASTM D 2244 after 5 (3) years {outdoor South Florida weathering at 5° facing south, determined by the average of at least three (3) white samples with and without a protective film or coating to ensure long-term color stability Color stability shall be unaffected by abrasion or scratching b. Erosion Resistance Exterior face shall have a permanent glass erosion barrier embedded beneath the surface to provide long-term resistance to reinforcing fiber exposure Exterior face surface loss shall not exceed 7 mils and 40 mgs when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4060 employing CS17 abrasive wheels at a head load of 500 grams for 1000 cycles - c Strength: Exterior face sheet shall be uniform in strength, impenetrable by hand held pencil and repel an impact equal to 70 (230) ft. lbs without fracture or tear when impacted by a 3-1/4" diameter, 5 Ib free -falling ball per UL 972. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 084523-3 Fiberglass -Sandwich -Panel Skylight Assemblies 4 Appearance: a Exterior face sheets: Smooth, 0 070" thick. Color: Crystal b Interior face sheets Smooth, 0 045" thick. Color: White c Light transmission (based on exterior and interior sheet color): 17% d Face sheets shall not vary more than +/- 10% in thickness and be uniform in color B. Grid Core 1 Thermally broken (aluminum) I-beam grid core shall be of 6063-T6 or 6005-T5 alloy and temper with provisions for mechanical interlocking of muntin-mullion and perimeter Width of I- beam shall be no less than 7/16". The I-beam grid shall be machined to tolerances of not greater than +/- 002". 2. Thermal break: Minimum 1"; thermoset. Urethane poured and de -bridged is not acceptable 3 Nanogel insulation C Laminate Adhesive 1 Heat and pressure resin type adhesive engineered for structural sandwich panel use, with minimum 25 -years field use. Adhesive shall pass testing requirements specified by the International Code Council "Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panel Adhesives." 2. Minimum tensile strength of 750 PSI when the panel assembly is tested by ASTM C 297 after two (2) exposures to six (6) cycles each of the aging conditions prescribed by ASTM D 1037. 3 Minimum shear strength of the panel adhesive by ASTM D 1002 after exposure to five (5) separate conditions a 50% Relative Humidity at 68° F: 540 PSI b 182° F: 100 PSI c. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D 1037 at room temperature 800 PSI d Accelerated Aging by ASTM D 1037 at 182° F: 250 PSI 2 4 PANEL CONSTRUCTION A. Provide sandwich panels of flat fiberglass reinforced translucent face sheets laminated to a grid core of mechanically interlocking thermally broken (aluminum) I -beams The adhesive bonding line shall be straight, cover the entire width of the I-beam and have a neat, sharp edge 1. Thickness. 2-3/4" 2. Grid pattern. Nominal 12" x 20" B Panels shall deflect no more than 1.9" at 30 psf in 10'-0" span without a supporting frame by ASTM E 72 C Panels shall show evidence of withstanding 1200°F fire for minimum one (1) hour without collapse or -flame penetration D. Thermally broken panels: 1. Minimum Condensation Resistance Factor of 80 by AAMA 1503 measured on the bond line 2. Minimum CRF of 90 at center of grid cell E Skylight system shall pass Class A Roof Burning Brand Test by ASTM E 108 (OR Skylight system shall be UL listed as a Class A Roof by UL 790 which requires periodic unannounced inspections and retesting by Underwriters Laboratories ) City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 084523-4 Fiberglass -Sandwich -Panel Skylight Assemblies F Skylight System shall meet the fall through requirements of OSHA 1910.23 as demonstrated by testing in accordance with ASTM E 661, thereby not requiring supplemental screens or railings 2 5 BATTENS AND PERIMETER CLOSURE SYSTEMS A. Closure system Extruded aluminum 6063-T6 and 6063-T5 alloy and temper clamp-tite screw type closure system (Curved closure system may be roll formed.) 1 Skylight perimeter closures shall be factory sealed to panels B Sealing tape: Manufacturer's standard, pre -applied to closure system at the factory under controlled conditions C Fasteners: 300 series stainless steel screws for aluminum closures, excluding final fasteners to the building 2 6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. High -Performance Organic Finish Two -coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2604 and containing not less than [50] [70] percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions 1 Color and Gloss As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2 7 FABRICATION A. Frame System Fabrication: 1 Fabricate components before finishing 2 Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: a Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations b Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered c Internal guttering systems or other means to drain water passing through joints, condensation occurring within components, and moisture migrating within assembly to exterior 3 Fabricate sill closures with weep holes and for installation as continuous component. 4 Reinforce components as required to receive fastener threads B Panel Fabrication Factory assemble and seal panels 1 Laminate face sheets to grid core under a controlled process using heat and pressure to produce straight adhesive bonding lines that cover width of core members and that have sharp edges a White spots indicating lack of bond at intersections of grid -core members are limited in number to four for every 40 sq ft. of panel and limited in diameter to 3/64 inch 2. Fabricate with grid pattern that is symmetrical about centerlines of each panel 3 Fabricate panel to allow condensation within panel to escape 4 Reinforce panel corners City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 084523-5 Fiberglass -Sandwich -Panel Skylight Assemblies PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3.2 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver panel system, components and materials in manufacturer's standard protective packaging B Store panels on the long edge; several inches above the ground; blocked and under cover in accordance with manufacturer's storage and handling instructions 3 3 INSTALLATION A. General. 1 Comply with manufacturer's written instructions 2 Do not install damaged components 3 Fit joints between aluminum components to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion 4 Rigidly secure non -movement joints 5 Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion, electrolytic deterioration, and immobilization of moving joints 6 Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated B. Metal Protection Where aluminum components will contact dissimilar materials, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion -resistant coating or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended in writing by manufacturer for this purpose. C. Install continuous aluminum sill closures with weatherproof expansion joints and locked and sealed corners Locate weep holes at rafters D Install components to drain water passing through joints, condensation occurring within aluminum members and panels, and moisture migrating within assembly to exterior E Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and elevations F Erection Tolerances. Install panel assemblies to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1 Alignment: Limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch where surfaces abut in line, edge to edge, at corners, or where a reveal or protruding element separates aligned surfaces by less than 3 inches; otherwise, limit offset to 1/8 inch. 2 Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet, but no greater than 1/2 inch over total length. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 084523-6 Fiberglass -Sandwich -Panel Skylight Assemblies 3 4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General 1 Water -Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, panel assemblies shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not show evidence of water penetration B Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements C Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements D Prepare test and inspection reports END OF SECTION 084523 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 084523-7 Fiberglass -Sandwich -Panel Skylight Assemblies Section 087100 Door Hardware PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES 1. The work in this section includes furnishing all items of finish hardware as hereinafter specified or obviously necessary for all swinging, sliding, folding and other doors. Except items, which are specifically excluded from this section of the specification or of unique hardware, specified in the same sections as the doors and frames on which they are installed B. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Related documents, drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to this section. C. RELATED SECTIONS 1. Division 08 — Hollow Metal Doors and Frame 2. Division 08 — Sectional Doors 1.2 REFERENCES A. STANDARDS 1. ANSI A156 1 — Butts and Hinges 2. ANSI A156 2 — Bored Locks and Latches 3. ANSI A156 4 — Door Controls — Door Closers 4. ANSI A156 5 — Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products 5. ANSI A156 6 — Architectural Door Trim 6. ANSI A156.7 — Template Hinge Dimensions 7. ANSI A156.16 — Auxiliary Hardware B. CODES 1. NFPA 101 — Life Safety Code 2. IBC 2006 — International Building Code 3. ANSI A117 1 — Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 4. ADA — Americans with Disabilities Act City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 087100-1 07/23/2010 Door Hardware 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Submit copies of finish hardware schedule in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements. B. SCHEDULES AND PRODUCT DATA 1. Schedules to be in vertical format, listing each door opening, and organized into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door opening to function as intended Hardware schedule shall be submitted within two (2) weeks from date the purchase order is received by the finish hardware supplier Furnish four (4) copies of revised schedules after approval for field and file use Note any special mounting instructions or requirements with the hardware schedule Schedules to include the following information. a. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule b. Handing and degree of swing of each door. c. Door and frame sizes and materials d. Keying information e. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item f Elevation drawings and operational descriptions for all electronic openings g. Name and manufacturer of each hardware item h. Fastenings and other pertinent information i. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols and codes contained in schedule j. Mounting locations for hardware when varies from standard 2. Submit catalog cuts and/or product data sheets for all scheduled finish hardware 3. Submit separate detailed keying schedule for approval indicating clearly how the owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled C. SAMPLES 1. Upon request, samples of each type of hardware in finish indicated shall be submitted Samples are to remain undamaged and in working condition through submittal and review process Items will be returned to the supplier or incorporated into the work within limitations of keying coordination requirements D. TEMPLATES City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 087100-2 07/23/2010 Door Hardware 1 Furnish a complete list and suitable templates, together with finish hardware schedule to contractor, for distribution to necessary trades supplying materials to be prepped for finish hardware. E. OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1. Upon completion of construction and building turnover, furnish two (2) complete maintenance manuals to the owner Manuals to include the following items: a. Approved hardware schedule, catalog cuts and keying schedule. b. Hardware installation and adjustment instructions c. Manufacturer's written warranty information 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. SUBSTITUTIONS 1. All substitution requests must be submitted before bidding and within the procedures and time frame as outlined in Division 1, General Requirements Approval of products is at the discretion of the architect and his hardware consultant. B. SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS 1. A recognized architectural door hardware supplier who has maintained an office and has been furnishing hardware in the project's vicinity for a period of at least two (2) years 2. Hardware supplier shall have office and warehouse facilities to accommodate this project. 3. Hardware supplier shall have in his employment at lease one (1) Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is available at reasonable times during business hours for consultation about the project's hardware and requirements to the owner, architect and contractor 4. Hardware supplier must be an authorized factory distributor of all products specified herein 1.5 FIRE -RATED OPENINGS 1. Provide door hardware for fire -rated openings that comply with NFPA 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction Provide only items of door hardware that are listed by Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) or Warnock Hersey (WH) for use on types and sizes of doors indicated 2. Project requires door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive pressure and S -label requirements Specifications must be cross- referenced and coordinated with door manufacturers to ensure that total opening engineering is compatible with UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 087100-3 Door Hardware a. Hardware required for fire doors shall be listed with Underwriters Laboratories for ratings specified b. Certification(s) of compliance shall be made available upon request by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1 6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. MARKING AND PACKAGING 1. Properly package and mark items according to the approved hardware schedule, complete with necessary screws and accessories, instructions and installation templates for spotting mortising tools Contractor shall check deliveries against accepted list and provide receipt for them, after which he is responsible for storage and care Any shortage or damaged good shall be made without cost to the owner. 2. Packaging of door hardware is the responsibility of the supplier As hardware supplier receives material from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set and door numbers to match the approved hardware schedule Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container B. DELIVERY 1. The supplier shall deliver all hardware to the project site; direct factory shipments are not allowed unless agreed upon beforehand Hardware supplier shall coordinate delivery times and schedules with the contractor. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer/contractor until each is satisfied that count is correct. 2. No keys, other than construction master keys and/or temporary keys are to be packed in boxes with the locks C. STORAGE 1. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation 1 7 WARRANTY A. All items, except as noted below, shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against failure due to defective materials and workmanship for a minimum period of one (1) year commencing on the date of final completion and acceptance In the event of product failure, promptly repair or replace item with no additional cost to the owner 1. Cylindrical locksets — Heavy Duty. Five (5) years 2. Exit Devices Five (5) years City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 087100-4 Door Hardware 3. Door closers Ten (10) years 4. Securitron (and approved equals) electrified hardware: Unlimited Lifetime PRODUCTS 1.8 MANUFACTURERS A. Only manufacturers as listed below shall be accepted Obtain each type of finish hardware (hinges, latch and locksets, exit devices, door closers, etc ) from a single manufacturer 1.9 MATERIALS A. SCREWS AND FASTENERS 1. All required screws shall be supplied as necessary for securing finish hardware in the appropriate manner Thru-bolts shall be supplied for exit devices and door closers where required by code and the appropriate blocking or reinforcing is not present in the door to preclude their use. B. HANGING DEVICES 1. HINGES a. Hinges shall conform to ANSI A156 1 and have the number of knuckles as specified, oil -impregnated bearings as specified with NRP (non - removable pin) feature, at all exterior reverse bevel doors. Unless otherwise scheduled, supply one (1) hinge for every 30" of door height. Hinges shall be a minimum of 4 1/2" high and 4" wide; heavy weight hinges ( 180) shall be supplied at all doors where specified. 1) Specified Manufacturer McKinney 2) Approved Substitutes- Bommer, Hager, Stanley C. CYLINDERS AND KEYING 1. CYLINDERS a. Owner will furnish and install all cylinders 2. KEYING a. Owner will provide all keys D. LOCKING DEVICES 1. CYLINDRICAL LOCKSETS — HEAVY DUTY City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 087100-5 Door Hardware a. All locksets shall be Stanley Best 9K Series Heavy Duty Locks- Levers, Grade 1 Certified Furnish with standard 2 3/4" backset. Lock housing shall be fabricated of steel zinc dichromate and stainless steel Latchbolt shall be brass or stainless steel with a minimum 1/2" throw Locks shall be non -handed and fully field reversible 1) Specified Manufacturer Best 9K Series 2) Approved Substitutes Sargent 10 Line, Corbin Russwin CL3300 Series, Schlage ND Series, Yale 5400LN Series 2. LOCKSET STRIKES a. Strikes shall be non -handed and available with curved lip, full lip or ASA type strikes as required Provide strikes with lip -length required to accommodate jamb and/or trim detail and projection E. EXIT DEVICES 1. CONVENTIONAL DEVICES — PUSH RAIL a. All exit devices shall be ANSI A156 3, Grade 1 Certified and shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and bear the UL label for life safety in full compliance with NFPA 80 and NFPA 101 Mounting rails shall be formed from a solid single piece of stainless steel, brass or bronze no less than 0 072" thick Push rails shall be constructed of 0 062" thick material Lever trim shall be available in finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets 1) Specified Manufacturer. Von Duprin, Series 99 2) Approved Substitutes: For consistency with campus hardware, no substitutes allowed F. DOOR CLOSERS 1. SURFACE MOUNTED CLOSERS — HEAVY DUTY a. All door closers shall be ANSI 156 4, Grade 1 Certified All closers shall have aluminum alloy bodies, forged steel arms, and separate valves for adjusting backcheck, closing and latching cycles and adjustable spring to provide up to 50% increase in spring power Closers shall be furnished with parallel arms mounting on all doors opening into corridors or other public spaces and shall be mounted to permit 180 degrees door swing wherever wall conditions permit. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors, where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics 1) Specified Manufacturer LCN Series 4010 or 4110 2) Approved Substitutes For consistency with campus hardware, no substitutes allowed G. DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 087100-6 07/23/2010 Door Hardware 1. WALL MOUNTED DOOR STOPS a. Where a door is indicated on the plans to strike flush against a wall, wall bumpers shall be provided Provide convex or concave design as indicated 1) Specified Manufacturers: McKinney 2) Approved Substitutes' Ives, Quality, Rockwood, Trimco H. GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS 1. Provide continuous weatherseal on exterior doors and smoke, Tight, or sound seals on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide intumescent seals as required to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer 2. Provide threshold units not less than 4" wide, formed to accommodate change in floor elevation where indicated, fabricated to accommodate door hardware and to fit door frames All threshold units shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) a. Specified Manufacturers: McKinney b. Approved Substitutes: Pemko, Reese, Zero I. SILENCERS 1. Furnish rubber door silencers all hollow metal frames, two (2) per pair and three (3) per single door frame 1.10 FINISHES A. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156 18 or traditional U S finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. C. Where specified hardware shall have an antimicrobial coating which permanently suppresses the growth of bacteria, algae, fungus, mold and mildew applied The finish shall control the spread and growth of bacteria, mold and mildew and shall be FDA listed for use in medical and food preparation equipment. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 EXAMINATION City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 087100-7 07/23/2010 Door Hardware A. Contractor shall ensure that the building is secured and free from weather elements prior to installing interior door hardware Examine hardware before installation to ensure it is free of defects. 2.2 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in the following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with the governing regulations. 1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI ) 2. NWWDA Industry Standard I S.1 7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors " B. All hardware shall be applied and installed in accordance with best trade practice by an experienced hardware installer Care shall be exercised not to mar or damage adjacent work. C. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved D. Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. 2.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The hardware supplier shall do a final inspection prior to building completion to ensure that all hardware was correctly installed and is in proper working order 2.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made B Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore to proper function and finish of hardware and doors Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. C. Instruct owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes and usage of any electronic devices City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 087100-8 07/23/2010 Door Hardware 2.5 PROTECTION A. Contractor shall protect all hardware, as it is stored on construction site in a covered and dry place Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame 2.6 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. The following schedule is furnished for whatever assistance it may afford the Contractor; do not consider it as entirely inclusive Should any particular door or item be omitted in any scheduled hardware heading, provide door or item with hardware same as required for similar purposes Hardware supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products as listed in the hardware heading Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door. B. Manufacturer's Abbreviations: 1. HS — HES 2. MC — McKinney 3. LCN — LCN 4. PE — Pemko 5. BE — Best 6. SN — Securitron 7. HA — Hager City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 087100-9 07/23/2010 Door Hardware Hardware Schedule HW Group 1 Single Door, exterior, entrance (SOUND -CONTROL) Qnty 3 Hinges 1 Lockset 1 Closure 1 Smoke gasket 1 Automatic door bottom 1 Threshold 1 Wall stop Type Description T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP ND91 PD06-626 LCN 4111-HCUSH PK33 434APKL 272A (6"x3'-0") Saddle threshold 230W convex wall stop HW Group 2 Pair Door, exterior, entrance (SOUND -CONTROL) Qnty Type Description 4 Hinges each door T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4'/2 NRP 1 set Flush Bolts (top and bottom) 282D 1 latch set ND91 PD06-626 1 blank exit latch ND25D -626 1 astragal 357 SP 84 with SS88 (silicon seal) 1 Smoke gasket 6' x 7' PK33 2 Automatic door bottom 434APKL 1 Threshold 272A (6"x6'-0") Saddle threshold 2 Wall stop 230W convex wall stop Finish Initial 26D MC 626 SCH 689 LCN PE PE PE 626 HA Finish Initial 26 D MC US26D HA 626 SCH 626 SCH PE PE PE PE 626 HA HW Group 3 Single Door, exterior, entrance with panic hardware (Chemical Resistance) Qnty Type Description Finish Initial 4 Hinges 1 Exit Device 1 Closure 1 Smoke gasket 1 Automatic door bottom 1 Threshold 1 Wall stop HW Group 4 Pair Door, exterior, entrance with Qnty Group 4: Single Hinged Exit Doors 3 Hinges each door 1 set Flush Bolts (top and bottom) 1 Exit Device 1 blank exit latch 1 astragal 1 Smoke gasket 6' x 7' 2 Automatic door bottom 1 Threshold 2 Wall stop END OF SECTION 087100 T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 % NRP 8843 ETL LCN 4111-HCUSH PK33 434APKL 272A (6"x3'-0") Saddle threshold 230W convex wall stop panic hardware Type Description 32D MC 32D SA 689 LCN PE PE PE 626 HA Finish Initial T4A3786 4 1/2 X 4 '/2 NRP 282D 8843 ETL ND25D -626 357 SP 84 with SS88 (silicon seal) PK33 434APKL 272A (6"x6'-0") Saddle threshold 230W convex wall stop City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 087100-10 26 D US26D 32D 626 626 07/23/2010 Door Hardware MC HA SA SCH PE PE PE PE HA SECTION 088000 GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 11 SUMMARY A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section 1 Doors 2 Interior borrowed lites B. Related Sections: 1. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" 2 Section 081613 "Fiberglass Doors and Frames" 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. 1 3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B Thermal Movements Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components 1. Temperature Change 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products, 3 inches x3 inches square. 1 Laminated glass with colored interlayer C Glazing Accessory Samples For gaskets and sealants, in 12 -inch lengths D Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location Use same designations indicated on Drawings 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications. A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 087100-1 07/23/2010 Glazing B Source Limitations for Glass Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type C Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method D. Glazing Publications Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards 1 GANA Publications GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's "Glazing Manual " 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass. SIGMA TM -3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use " E Safety Glazing Labeling Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies F. Fire -Protection -Rated Glazing Labeling Permanently mark fire -protection -rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other openings, whether or not glazing passes hose -stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F, and the fire -resistance rating in minutes 1 6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes 17 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass. Manufacturer's standard form in which laminated -glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated -glass standard. 1 Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion PART 2- PRODUCTS 2 1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article Where heat -strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat- treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 087100-2 Glazing "Performance Requirements" Article Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following* a AFG Industries, Inc b. Guardian Industries Corp c Pilkington North America d PPG Industries, Inc.; 2.2 LAMINATED -GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type [GL -L]: Clear laminated glass with two plies of annealed ultraclear float glass (ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality -Q3, Class I, complying with other requirements specified and with visible light transmission not less than 91 percent) 1 Outboard Lite: a Thickness: 6 mm (1/4 inch) 2 Interlayer: Polyvinyl butyral (PVB) plastic interlayer, clear a Thickness: 0 060 inch thick 3 Inboard Lite a. Thickness: 4 mm (5/32 inch) 4. Provide safety glazing labeling. 5 Provide 2 panes of glass, each side of window 2.3 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General. 1 Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience 2 Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3 Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral -curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT 1 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a BASF Building Systems; Omniseal 50 b. Dow Corning Corporation; 795. c Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division, SikaSil-C995 d Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2. 2 Applications: non fire -rated City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 087100-3 07/23/2010 Glazing C Glazing Sealants for Fire -Rated Glazing Products. Products that are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for applications and fire -protection ratings indicated 2 4 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation B Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer C Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5 D Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated E Edge Blocks Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking) F Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open -cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance G Perimeter Insulation for Fire -Resistive Glazing- Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire - protection rating indicated 2 5 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following* 1 Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners 2 Presence and functioning of weep systems 3 Minimum required face and edge clearances 4 Effective sealing between joints of glass -framing members B Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 087100-4 Glazing 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates B Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work. 3 3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances C Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing E Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead F Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches 1 Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2 Provide 1/8 -inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape H Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. J Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 087100-5 07/23/2010 Glazing 3 4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance B Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces C Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass 3 5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass Do not apply markers to glass surface Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces B Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer C Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains, remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer D Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period E Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer END OF SECTION 088000 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 087100-6 Glazing DIVISION 09 FINISHES SECTION 092900 GYPSUM BOARD AND CEMENT BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 1 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Provide in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints B Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, of thickness indicated Regular type unless otherwise indicated 1 Product: a. G -P Gypsum; DensArmor Plus b National Gypsum Company; e2XP Interior Extreme c. USG Corporation; C Fiber Cement Sheathing Fiber cement board complying with ASTM C 1186, Type A, not less than 7/16 -inch thick 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Trim Accessories. ASTM C 1047, formed from galvanized or aluminum -coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper -faced galvanized -steel sheet. For exterior trim, use accessories formed from hot -dip galvanized -steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc 1 Provide cornerbead at outside corners unless otherwise indicated 2 Provide LC -bead (J -bead) at exposed panel edges. 3 Provide control joints where indicated B Aluminum Accessories Extruded -aluminum accessories indicated with Class II, clear anodic finish; AA-C12C22A31 C Joint -Treatment Materials ASTM C 475/C 475M 1 Joint Tape Paper unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer 2 Joint Compounds. Setting -type taping compound and drying -type, ready -mixed, compounds for topping 3 Cementitious Backer Unit Joint -Treatment Materials. Products recommended by cementitious backer unit manufacturer City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 092900-1 Gypsum Board and Cement Board D Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840. 1. Isolate gypsum board assemblies from abutting structural and masonry work. Provide edge trim and acoustical sealant. 2 Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Fasten gypsum panels to supports with screws. B Install cementitious backer units to comply with ANSI A108.11. C. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies. Comply with requirements of listed assemblies D Finishing Gypsum Board. ASTM C 840 1 At concealed areas, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire -resistance -rated assemblies, provide Level 1 finish Embed tape at joints. 2 At substrates for tile, provide Level 2 finish: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges 3 Unless otherwise indicated, provide Level 4 finish Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges E Glass -Mat, Water -Resistant Backing Panels. Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions F Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions G Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns END OF SECTION 092900 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 092900-2 Gypsum Board and Cement Board SECTION 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 Resilient base 1 3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated B Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard -size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required 1 4 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency 1 Critical Radiant Flux Classification Class I, not less than 0 45 W/sq cm 1 6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 096513-1 Resilient Base and Accessories 1 7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods* 1. 48 hours before installation 2 During installation 3 48 hours after installation B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F C Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 1 RESILIENT BASE (RB -1) A. Resilient Base: 1. Manufacturers* Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a Armstrong World Industries, Inc b Flexco, Inc c Johnsonite. d Roppe Corporation, USA. B Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861 1 Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) 2 Manufacturing Method Group I (solid, homogeneous). 3 Style. Cove (base with toe). C Minimum Thickness: 0 125 inch. D. Height: 4 inches. E Lengths Coils in manufacturer's standard length F. Outside Corners Preformed G Inside Corners: Preformed H Finish As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 096513-2 Resilient Base and Accessories 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). a Cove Base Adhesives. Not more than 50 g/L. PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. C Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. D Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3 3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 096513-3 Resilient Base and Accessories C Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material G. Preformed Corners' Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. 3 4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products B Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1 Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces 2 Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3 Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil C Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period D Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion END OF SECTION 096513 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 096513-4 Resilient Base and Accessories SECTION 096723 RESINOUS FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes. 1 Decorative resinous flooring systems B Related Sections: 1 Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed at joints in resinous flooring systems 13 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data For each type of product indicated Include manufacturer's technical data, application instructions, and recommendations for each resinous flooring component required B Samples for Initial Selection• Full range of standard color and textures C Samples for Verification: For each resinous flooring system required, 6 inches square, applied to a rigid backing by Installer for this Project. D Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements E Material Certificates For each resinous flooring component, from manufacturer F Material Test Reports For each resinous flooring system G. Maintenance Data For resinous flooring to include in maintenance manuals 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications. Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of flooring systems required for this Project. 1 Engage an installer who is certified in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer as qualified to apply resinous flooring systems indicated City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 096723-1 Resinous Floonng B Source Limitations: Obtain primary resinous flooring materials, including primers, resins, hardening agents, grouting coats, and topcoats, from single source from single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials, including patching and fill material, joint sealant, and repair materials, of type and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. C. Mockups: Apply field -mockup to verify color and slip resistance selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution Mockup is to be 1. Apply full-thickness mockups on 48 -inch- square floor area selected by Architect. a Include 48 -inch length of integral cove base with inside corner. 2 Simulate finished lighting conditions for Architect's review of mockups 3 Mock-ups are to be demolished and removed unless otherwise indicated D Pre -installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site 1 5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels indicating brand name and directions for storage and mixing with other components. 1 6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting resinous flooring application. B Lighting Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during resinous flooring application C Close spaces to traffic during resinous flooring application and for not Tess than 24 hours after application unless manufacturer recommends a longer period PART 2 - PRODUCTS 21 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 1/8" Dur -A - Quartz Multiple Component, Seamless, Decorative, Slip Resistant, Epoxy Floor System as manufactured by Dur -A -Flex, Inc 1-800-253-3539 (www dur-a-flex.com) or comparable product by one of the following: 1 Crossfield Products Corp, Dex-o-Tex City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 096723-2 Resinous Flooring 2.2 DECORATIVE RESINOUS FLOORING A. Resinous Flooring Abrasion-, impact- and chemical -resistant, decorative -aggregate -filled, epoxy -resin -based, monolithic floor surfacing designed to produce a seamless floor and integral cove base B System Characteristics: 1. Color and Pattern As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range 2 Wearing Surface Textured for slip resistance 3. Overall System Thickness 1/8 inch 4 Federal Agency Approvals. USDA and FDA approved for food-processing environments. C Body Coats 1 Product: Dur -a -Quartz "Broadcast Method" Epoxy Floor System with Bio-Pruf Antimicrobial treatment 2 Resin: Epoxy 3 Application Method Self -leveling slurry with broadcast aggregates a Thickness of Coats 1/8 inch b Number of Coats: One 4 Aggregates: Manufacturer's standard D Topcoat: Sealing or finish coats 1 Product: Dur -a -Glaze #5 with Bio-Pruf Antimicrobial treatment 2 Resin Aliphatic Polyurea 3 Type Clear 4 Finish: Gloss 5 Number of Coats. One. E System Physical Properties Provide resinous flooring system with the following minimum physical property requirements when tested according to test methods indicated: Physical Property Hardness (Shore D) Test Method Result 75-80 ASTM D-2240 Compressive Strength ASTM D-695 ASTM C-579 17,500 psi 12,500 psi Tensile Strength ASTM D-638 ASTM C-307 4,000 psi 2,600 psi Tensile Elongation ASTM D-638 7 50% Flexural Strength ASTM D-790 ASTM C-580 6,250 psi 4,500 psi Flexural Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D-790 6.2 x 10b Linear Shrinkage ASTM D-2566 0 02% Coefficient of Linear Expansion ASTM D-696 2 x 10.5 Bond Strength to Concrete ASTM D-4541 400 psi substrate fails Indentation ML D-3134 025 MAX Impact Resistance ML D-3134 Pass Water Absorption ASTM D-570 0 04% City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 096723-3 07/23/2010 Resinous Flooring 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Heat Resistance Limitation 140°F - 200°F Flammability ASTM D-570 Self Extinguishing Flame Spread/NFPA 101 ASTM E-84 Class A Abrasion Resistance CS17 Wheel 1000 GM Load 1000 Cycles ASTM C-501 24 mg loss Coefficient of Friction Standard Slip -Resistant Orange Peel VOC Content ASTM D-2047 0 9 0 8 0 g/I F. System Chemical Resistance. Test specimens of cured resinous flooring system are unaffected when tested according to ASTM D 1308 for 50 percent immersion in the following reagents for no fewer than seven days: 1 Chlorine: 3 0-5.0PPM, PH=7 4-7 6 Total alkalinity: 60-90PPM Calcium Hardness. 170-200 PPM 2. Re-Juv-Nal by Hillyard Industries, Inc; 2 oz./gal, PH=11 5-12 5 3 Simple Green: ph=9.5; Non-toxic degreaser; 2 oz/gal 4 Freedom Speed stripper- Annual Closure/Cleaning, PH=13 0, Ratio of 1 5 with water 5 Vinegar (mild acid; mixed at 1 5 with water), this will not be necessary after the renovation is completed. 6 Pressure Washer rated for 1000 psi 2 3 ACCESSORIES A. Primer 1 Product: Dur -a -Shield #2 (concrete surfaces) 2 Product: Dur -a -Glaze Tie -Coat (residual areas with old epoxy finish) B. Joint Filler. 1 Product: Dur -a -Glaze #4 (control joints) 2 Product: Dur -a -Glaze #4 with fiberglass scrim (spider cracks) 3 Product: Elast-o-coat with No -Sag #1 and fiberglass scrip (expansion joints) t C. Patching and Fill Material Resinous product 100% solids epoxy/aggregate approved by resinous flooring manufacturer and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated 1 1 1 1 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 PREPARATION A. General: Prepare and clean substrates according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated Provide clean, dry substrate for resinous flooring application City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 096723-4 Resinous Flooring B Concrete Substrates Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form -release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants incompatible with resinous flooring 1. Roughen concrete substrates as follows a Shot -blast surfaces with an apparatus that abrades the concrete surface, contains the dispensed shot within the apparatus, and recirculates the shot by vacuum pickup 2 Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions 3 Verify that concrete substrates are dry and moisture -vapor emissions are within acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions a Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869 Proceed with application of resinous flooring only after substrates have maximum moisture - vapor -emission rate of 3 Ib of water/1000 sq. ft. of slab area in 24 hours b Perform plastic sheet test, ASTM D 4263 Proceed with application only after testing indicates absence of moisture in substrates. c Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170 Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. 4 Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing Verify that concrete substrates have pH within acceptable range. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with application only after substrates pass testing C Resinous Materials Mix components and prepare materials according to resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions D Use patching and fill material to fill holes and depressions in substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions E Treat control joints and other nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from reflecting through resinous flooring according to manufacturer's written instructions 3.2 APPLICATION A. General Apply components of resinous flooring system according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness indicated 1 Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion of resinous flooring system to substrate, and optimum intercoat adhesion 2. Cure resinous flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions Prevent contamination during application and curing processes 3 At substrate expansion and isolation joints, comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions B Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. C Apply reinforcing membrane to substrate cracks City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 096723-5 Resinous Flooring D Integral Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces before applying flooring. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions and details including those for taping, mixing, priming, troweling, sanding, and topcoating of cove base. Round internal and external corners. 1 Integral Cove Base: 4 inches high E Apply self -leveling slurry body coats in thickness indicated for flooring system 1 Broadcast aggregates at rate recommended by manufacturer and, after resin is cured, remove excess aggregates to provide surface texture indicated F Apply topcoats in number indicated for flooring system and at spreading rates recommended in writing by manufacturer 3 3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Core Sampling. At the direction of Owner and at locations designated by Owner, take one core sample per 1000 sq ft. of resinous flooring, or portion of, to verify thickness For each sample that fails to comply with requirements, take two additional samples. Repair damage caused by coring and correct deficiencies. B Material Sampling. Owner may at any time and any number of times during resinous flooring application require material samples for testing for compliance with requirements. 1 Owner will engage an independent testing agency to take samples of materials being used Material samples will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor 2. Testing agency will test samples for compliance with requirements, using applicable referenced testing procedures or, if not referenced, using testing procedures listed in manufacturer's product data. 3 If test results show applied materials do not comply with specified requirements, pay for testing, remove noncomplying materials, prepare surfaces coated with unacceptable materials, and reapply flooring materials to comply with requirements 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect resinous flooring from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer. END OF SECTION 096723 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 096723-6 Resinous Floonng SECTION 097700 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS Part 1 — General 101 Scope: Prefinished FRP (Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic) wall panels for decorative and/or sanitary environments 102 Qualifications: All materials unless otherwise indicated are to be Marlite® Brand 1 03 Environmental Conditions Building should be fully enclosed prior to installation with sufficient heat (70°) and ventilation consistent with good working conditions for finish work 1 04 Delivery and Storage of Materials Materials are to be factory packaged on strong pallets All materials are to be stored lying flat, under cover and protected from the elements Panels should be allowed to acclimate to room temperature (70°) for 48 hours prior to installation 105 Warranty All products shall be warranted to be free from defects for one year after project completion Part 2 - Products 2 01 Manufacturer or approved equal: Marlite FRP panels; Marlite, 202 Harger Street, Dover, OH 44622, (330) 343-6621 2 03 ACCESSORIES A. All trim specified shall be extruded aluminum or extruded rigid PVC and trim profile(s) as indicted on drawings Extruded Aluminum Trim Profiles for 090" thick panels a F 550 SS Inside Corner b F 561 SS Outside Corner c F 565 SS Division d F 570 SS Edge Color: Bright Anodized Part 3 — EXECUTION 3 01 EXAMINATION A. Open cartons and carefully inspect all panels B Contact Marlite with questions or problems 3 02 PREPARATION City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 097700-1 Fiberglass Reinforced Panels A. Panels must be applied over a smooth, solid, flat, clean subwall such as drywall or plywood. 3.03 CONDITIONING A. Panels should be opened and allowed to acclimate for 48 hours prior to installation Room temperature should be approximately 70° F 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Install all panels in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions B All moldings must provide for a minimum 1/8 inch expansion joint to insure proper installation C. C-551 Marlite FRP Adhesive is available in 3 1/2 gallon cans A water- resistant, non- flammable adhesive, C-551 meets ASTM Specification C557 D C-375 Marlite Construction Adhesive is available 3 IA gallon cans. A strong, flexible, water-resistant, solvent based adhesive formulated for fast, easy application, C-375 meets ASTM Specification C557 3 05 Sealant A. See sealant specificaiton 3 04 Maintenance 1 Wipe down using a damp cloth and mild soap solution or cleaner 2 Refer to manufacturer's specific cleaning recommendations Do not use abrasive cleaners END OF SECTION 097700 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 097700-2 Fiberglass Reinforced Panels SECTION 098433 SOUND -ABSORBING WALL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes shop -fabricated, fabric -wrapped panel units tested for acoustical performance, including 1 Sound -absorbing wall panels 13 DEFINITIONS A. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. B SAA. Sound Absorption Average 1 4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of fabric facing, panel edge, core material, and mounting indicated B Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fabric facing from sound -absorbing wall unit manufacturer's full range 1 5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates For each type of sound -absorbing wall unit, from manufacturer B Warranty: Sample of special warranty 1 6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For sound -absorbing wall units to include in maintenance manuals Include fabric manufacturers' written cleaning and stain -removal recommendations 1 7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials from same production run that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents 1 Provide three 2'-6"x2'-6" panels complete in every way with mounting devices, with protective covering 1 8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations. Obtain sound -absorbing wall units from single source from single manufacturer City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 098433-1 Sound Absorbing Wall Units B Fire -Test -Response Characteristics. Provide sound -absorbing wall units meeting the following as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Surface -Burning Characteristics As determined by testing per ASTM E 84. a Flame -Spread Index: 25 or Tess b. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less 2 Fire Growth Contribution. Meeting acceptance criteria of local code and authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 265 1 9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with fabric and sound -absorbing wall unit manufacturers' written instructions for minimum and maximum temperature and humidity requirements for shipment, storage, and handling B Deliver materials and units in unopened bundles and store in a temperature -controlled dry place with adequate air circulation 1 10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations. Do not install sound -absorbing wall units until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work at and above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 1 SOUND -ABSORBING WALL UNITS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide A100 Series Acoustical Panel by Wall Technology, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following: 1 Armstrong World Industries 2 Decoustics Limited; a CertainTeed Ceilings company 3 MBI Products Company, Inc 4 Wall Technology, Inc., an Owens Corning company B Sound -Absorbing Wall Panel Requirements 1 Mounting: Edge mounted with splines secured to substrate a Finish Color at Exposed Edges: Match color of facing material. 2. Mounting. Back mounted with manufacturer's standard metal clips or bar hangers, secured to substrate 3 Core. glass -fiber board with 6-7 pcf density with wood or plywood nailing strips 4. Edge Construction Manufacturer's standard resin hardened, aluminum or high pressure laminate, or wood 5. Edge Profile: Square. 6. Corner Detail in Elevation: Square with continuous edge profile indicated 7. Reveals between Panels: Flush 8 Facing Material: As selected from full -range of manufacturer's standard colors. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 098433-2 Sound Absorbing Wall Units a Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Tek - Wall 1001, Maharam, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following: 1) Knoll, Inc 2) Maharam, Inc. 3) Designtex. Inc. 9 Acoustical Performance Sound absorption NRC > 0.85 according to ASTM C 423 for Type A mounting according to ASTM E 795 10 Nominal Overall Panel Thickness: 2 inches 11. Panel Sizes: 2'-6"x2'-6" and 2'-6"x8'-0" as indicated on drawings 2.2 FABRICATION A. General: Use manufacturer's standard construction except as otherwise indicated; with facing material applied to face, edges, and back border of dimensionally stable core; and with rigid edges to reinforce panel perimeter against warpage and damage 1 Glass -Fiber Board Cores: Chemically harden core edges and areas of core where mounting devices are attached B Facing Material: Apply fabric facing fully covering visible surfaces of unit; with material stretched straight, on the grain, tight, square, and free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive, or other visible distortions or foreign matter 1 Square Corners Tailor corners 2 Fabrics with Directional or Repeating Patterns or Directional Weave: Mark fabric top and attach fabric in same direction so pattern or weave matches in adjacent units. C Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units Plus or minus 1/16 inch for the following: 1 Thickness 2 Edge straightness 3. Overall length and width 4. Squareness from corner to corner 5 Chords, radii, and diameters PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine fabric, fabricated units, substrates, areas, and conditions, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of sound - absorbing wall units B Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install sound -absorbing wall units in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other units, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 098433-3 Sound Absorbing Wall Units B Comply with sound -absorbing wall unit manufacturer's written instructions for installation of units using type of mounting devices indicated. Mount units securely to supporting substrate. C Align and level fabric pattern and grain among adjacent units. 3 3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb and Level: Plus or minus 1/16 inch. B Variation of Panel Joints from Hairline. Not more than 1/16 inch wide 3 4 CLEANING A. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials B Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions END OF SECTION 098433 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 098433-4 Sound Absorbing Wall Units SECTION 099100 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals. 1 Product Data Include printout of MPI's "MPI Approved Products List" with product highlighted 2 Samples PART 2 - PRODUCTS 21 PAINT A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Columbia Paint product indicated or comparable product by one of the following: 1 Benjamin Moore 2 Columbia Paint 3 Rodda Paints 4 Sherwin Williams B C MPI Standards Provide materials that comply with MPI standards indicated and listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." Material Compatibility. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and with substrates 1 For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated D Use interior paints and coatings that comply with the following limits for VOC content: 1 Flat Paints and Coatings 50 g/L 2 Nonflat Paints, Coatings 150 Insert value g/L 3 Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals 250 g/L 4 Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. E Colors- As selected PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 PREPARATION A. Comply with recommendations in MPI's "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 099100-1 Painting 1 1 1 1 B. Remove hardware, lighting fixtures, and similar items that are not to be painted Mask items that cannot be removed Reinstall items in each area after painting is complete C Clean and prepare surfaces in an area before beginning painting in that area Schedule painting so cleaning operations will not damage newly painted surfaces. 3.2 APPLICATION 1 A. Comply with recommendations in MPI's "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. Paint exposed surfaces, new and existing, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. 2 Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only 3 Paint the back side of access panels 4. Color -code mechanical piping in accessible ceiling spaces 5. Do not paint prefinished items, items with an integral finish, operating parts, and labels unless otherwise indicated. C. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1 Use brushes only for exterior painting and where the use of other applicators is not practical. 2. Use rollers for finish coat on interior walls and ceilings D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 1. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance 3 3 EXTERIOR PAINT APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Steel: 1 Semigloss, Alkyd Enamel: Two coats over rust -inhibitive primer: MPI EXT 5.1D a. Surface Prep: Solvent Cleaning (SSPC-SP1) followed by Commercial Blast Cleaning (SSPC- SP6) with hand or power tool cleaning as required to SSPC-SP11 b. Coat 1 MPI # Manufacturer Label Product Name Code 79 Columbia Paint Industrial Brushable Metal Primer 07-0266-P c. Coat 2 & 3: MPI # Manufacturer Label Product Name Code 94 Columbia Paint Premium Pro Alkyd Int/Ext Semi- 03 -241 - Gloss Enamel WB City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 099100-2 07/23/2010 Pamtmg a Color: Manufacturer's full range of standard colors b Location. Hollow metal doors and frames, non -galvanized metal fabrications B Galvanized Metal: 1 Semi -gloss Latex: Two coats over waterborne galvanized -metal primer: MPI EXT 5 3H a Surface Prep• MPI # Manufacturer Label Product Name Code 25 Columbia Paint Jasco Metal Etch 0700- Primer — White 0703 b Coat 1. MPI # Manufacturer Label Product Name Code 134 Columbia Paint Industrial Universal H2O Metal 05 -0550 - Primer — White PP c Coat 2 & 3. MPI # Manufacturer Label Product Name Code 11 Columbia Paint Masterpiece Ext. 100% Acrylic 01 -242 - Semi -Gloss WB d Color: Manufacturer's full range of standard colors a Location: Sheet metal, HVAC duct, galvanized metal fabrications 3 4 INTERIOR PAINT APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Steel. 1. Eggshell High Performance Latex: Two coats over alkyd anticorrosive primer MPI INT 5 1R. a Surface Prep Solvent Cleaning (SSPC-SP1) followed by Commercial Blast Cleaning (SSPC- SP6) with hand or power tool cleaning as required to SSPC-SP11 b Coat 1 MPI # Manufacturer Label Product Name Code 79 Columbia Paint Industrial Brushable Metal Primer 07-0266-P c Coat 2 & 3: MPI # Manufacturer Label Product Name Code 139 Columbia Paint High Performance Acry-Shield Eggshell Enamel 05-265 d Color: Manufacturer's full range of standard colors Location. Hollow metal doors and frames, non -galvanized metal fabrications City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 099100-3 Painting 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B Gypsum Board 1. Eggshell High Performance Latex: Two coats over primer/sealer: MPI INT 9.2B. a. Surface Prep' Remove sand, dust, dirt, oil, grease, wax, silicone, glue, and all other foreign matter b Coat 1 MPI # Manufacturer Label Product Name Code 50 Columbia Paint Premium Pro Basecoat Wallboard 02 -734 - Primer Sealer PP c. Coat 2 & 3: MPI # Manufacturer Label Product Name Code 139 Columbia Paint High Performance Acry-Shield Eggshell Enamel 05-265 d Color Manufacturer's full range of standard colors e. Location• Gypsum board walls and ceilings END OF SECTION 099100 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 099100-4 Painting DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES SECTION 101400 SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals Product Data, Shop Drawings, and Samples. B Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U S Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines 1.2 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated B Shop Drawings* Show fabrication and installation details for signs 1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories 2 Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign. C Samples: For each sign type and for each color and texture required 1 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements. Comply with applicable provisions in ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 21 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, of alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. B Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell -cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing). C Polycarbonate Sheet: Of thickness indicated or 1/4" minimum, manufactured by extrusion process, coated on both surfaces with abrasion -resistant coating: 1 Impact Resistance. 16 ft-Ibf/in per ASTM D 256, Method A. 2 Tensile Strength: 9000 Ibf/sq in per ASTM D 638 3. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 340,000 Ibf/sq in per ASTM D 790. 4. Heat Deflection: 265 deg F at 264 Ibf/sq. in. per ASTM D 648 5 Abrasion Resistance 1 5 percent maximum haze increase for 100 revolutions of a Taber abraser with a load of 500 g per ASTM D 1044. D Applied Vinyl: Die -cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils with pressure - sensitive adhesive backing, suitable for exterior applications 2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following. 1 ASI-Modulex, Inc 2. Bunting Graphics, Inc. 3. Gemini Incorporated. City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 101400-1 07/23/2010 Signage 4 Metal Arts; Div of L&H Mfg Co 5 Mohawk Sign Systems B CAST CHARACTERS: Produce characters with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs Alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated Comply with the following requirements 1 Character Material. Aluminum a Clear Anodic finish: Manufacturer's standard Class 1 clear anodic coating, 0 018 mm or thicker, over a satin (directionally textured) mechanical finish, complying with AAMA 611 2 Letterform shall be "Helvetica" 3 Size of letters and numbers as indicate on drawings or schedule 4 Thickness. 1 inch 5 Color(s). As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range 6 Mounting. Flush, concealed studs, non -corroding for substrates encountered C FABRICATION 1 General Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated a Welded Connections Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop welding Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of exposed side Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and contact surfaces b Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration c Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous 2 3 PANEL SIGNS A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mohawk Sign Systems or comparable product by one of the following: 1 APCO Graphics, Inc. 2 Gemini Incorporated 3 Mohawk Sign Systems 4 National Signage Affiliates B TACTILE AND BRAILLE SIGN• Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols complying with ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117 1 Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille Produce precisely formed characters with square - cut edges free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded shape 1 Panel Material. Opaque acrylic sheet. a Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range 2 Raised -Copy Thickness. Not less than 1/32 inch a Color Contrasting Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range 3 Mounting: Unframed a. Wall mounted with two -face tape 4 Edge Condition• Beveled 5 Corner Condition Square 6 Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are UV and water resistant for three years for application intended City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 101400-2 Signage 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 Letterform shall be "Helvetica" 8 Size of letters and numbers: as indicate on drawings or schedule 9. Copy position As indicated on drawings 2.4 ACCESSORIES Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous -metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance Use toothed steel or lead expansion -bolt devices for drilled -in-place anchors Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. PART 3 - EXECUTION & INSTALLATION A. Locate signs where indicated or directed by Architect. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion and other defects in appearance B. Wall -Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply 1 Two -Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl -covered or rough surfaces 2. Silicone -Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl -covered surfaces. 3. Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer. 4. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide matching opaque plate on opposite side of glass to conceal mounting materials C Dimensional Characters Mount characters at'/" projection distance from wall surface D Signage Schedule Location Door Sign Type Tactile Copy Changeabl e Copy Graphic Symbols Exterior 101a T&B PUMP ROOM n/a n/a Exterior 101b T&B PUMP ROOM n/a n/a Exterior 102 T&B CHLORINE ROOM n/a n/a Exterior 103 T&B FLUORIDE ROOM n/a n/a Exterior 104 T&B ELECTRICAL ROOM n/a n/a Exterior n/a Cast Gardner Well House n/a n/a See Note 1 Sign Type (See sign type elevations on drawing set, unless noted otherwise) Cast = Dimensional (Cast) Letters T&B = Panel (Tactile & Braille) Sign General Schedule Notes and Abbreviations. 1. Braille copy to match Tactile copy unless noted otherwise 2 n/a (not applicable, or "no, does not apply" 3 Quantity is one complete sign per line on schedule, unless otherwise noted Note 1. 1 text lines, 12" high characters, see exterior elevations for placement END OF SECTION 101400 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 101400-3 Signage SECTION 102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1 Public -use washroom accessories 1 3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data For each type of product indicated Include the following: 1 Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation 2 Material and finish descriptions 3 Manufacturer's warranty 1 4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer 16 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories B Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 102800-1 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel. ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031 -inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. B Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper - and -theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. 2.2 PUBLIC -USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1 American Specialties, Inc 2 Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc 3. Bradley Corporation 4. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. B Stainless Steel Shelf 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Bobrick B-298 2 Description: 8 inch deep shelf 3. Length. 24 inches 4 Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No 4 finish (satin) 5 Shelf: Not less than nominal 0 05 -inch- thick stainless steel 6. Quantity. (3) — Chlorine, Fluoride and Electrical Room C. Hat and Coat Hook 1 Basis -of -Design Product: Bobrick B-682 2 Description: single hook with concealed wall plate 3. Length: 1 inch wide by 6-1/2 inch high 4 Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No 4 finish (satin). 5 Quantity: (3) — Chlorine, Fluoride and Electrical Room 6 D Shelf with Mop and Broom Holders and Hooks 1 Basis -of -Design Product: Bobrick B-239 2. Description. 8 inch deep shelf with hooks and spring-loaded rubber cam mop holders 3 Length 34 inches 4. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0 05 -inch- thick stainless steel 5 Number of Hooks: (4) 6 Number of Mop Holders. (3) 7. Material and Finish Stainless steel, No 4 finish (satin) 8. Quantity. (1) Pump room 2 3 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion -resistant backing plates PART 3 - EXECUTION City of Yakima Gardner Well. 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 102800-2 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessones 3 1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation Replace damaged or defective items B Remove temporary labels and protective coatings C Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations END OF SECTION 102800 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 102800-3 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories SECTION 104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals Product Data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND BRACKETS A. Portable Fire Extinguishers. FE 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsons; MP5 with optional mounting bracket #818, or comparable product by one of the following: a. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. b. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. d. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products. 2 Products: Wall Hung exposed Fire extinguisher 3 Multipurpose Dry -Chemical Type UL -rated 2-A.10-B:C, 5 -Ib nominal capacity, in enameled -steel container. B Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked - enamel finish PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION A. Install mounting brackets in locations indicated at 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher heights or height acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B Install fire extinguishers in mounting brackets as indicated on drawings END OF SECTION 104416 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 104416-1 Fire Extinguishers DIVISION 22 PLUMBING SECTION 220200 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 — GENERAL 1 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The scope of work in this section is to include all labor and materials required to complete the entire mechanical work as herein specified, and/or indicated on related drawings. Each mechanical section of the specifications is subject to all provisions of the complete Contract set of documents. 1.2 PERMITS AND PLAN REVIEWS. A. Unless addressed differently in Architectural or frontal document sections, the Contractor shall pay for permits and plan reviews Permit and Plan Review costs shall be included in the bid price. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. For the actual fabrication, installation, and testing of work under this division use only thoroughly trained and experienced workmen completely familiar with the items required, and manufacturer's current recommended methods of installation. 1.4 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION: A. The Contractor shall verify the installation requirements of all mechanical equipment from the submittals and installation instructions provided with the equipment. The Contractor shall verify these requirements and coordinate them with the electrical, control, plumbing, HVAC, and other related Contractors prior to mechanical, control, plumbing, or electrical rough -in If there is a discrepancy between the drawings, and installation materials or methods in the installation instructions, the more stringent shall apply. The Contractor shall contact the Engineer for additional clarification if necessary. 1 5 MECHANICAL DRAWINGS A. Drawings are partly diagrammatic and do not necessarily show the exact location of all new piping and existing utilities, unless specifically dimensioned. B Riser diagrams showing piping and/or ductwork connections are schematic only and do not attempt to show exact details or physical arrangement of the equipment. They shall not be used for obtaining quantities of lineal runs of piping. C. Location of the piping and ductwork shall be checked to determine that it clears all openings and structural members, that it may be properly concealed and that it clears cabinets, lights and all equipment having fixed locations. No extra payments will be allowed where piping and/or ductwork must be offset to avoid other work, or where minor changes are necessary to facilitate installation The drawings show the various piping and duct systems schematically, and do not attempt to show details of all piping and ductwork, or to show all offsets that may be required. No added compensation will be permitted for variations due to field conditions The Contractor shall carefully check City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 220200-1 Mechanical General Provisions space requirements to ensure that equipment, ducts, pipes, etc can be installed in the space allotted prior to fabrication or ordering Lines that must pitch, or that must have a constant elevation, shall have the right-of-way over lines not so restricted The Contractor shall install piping and ducts in such a manner as to conform to structure, avoid obstructions, preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear, without further instructions or cost to the Owner D Drawings do not attempt to show complete details of building construction which affect the mechanical installation Contractor shall refer to the Architectural, Structural and Electrical drawings and specifications for additional information and building details which affect installation of his work. E The specifications and plans are complementary, and anything called for in either is as binding as if called for in both Items not specifically mentioned in the specification or noted on the drawings, but which are necessary to make a complete working system shall be included Contractor claims for additional payment for such items will not be allowed F All dimensions are inches unless marked otherwise G The locations of existing concealed lines and connection points have been indicated as closely as possible from available information The Contractor shall assume that such connection points are within a 10 -foot radius of the indicated location Where connection points are not within this radius, the Contractor shall contact the Architect for a decision before proceeding or may proceed at his own expense Contractor shall verify invert elevations at connection points to existing concealed piping as soon as possible Contractor shall notify Architect of actual inverts before proceeding with related piping work. 16 DEFINITIONS A. "Provide" shall mean "furnish and install " B "Indicated" shall mean "indicated elsewhere in contract documents " C "Concealed" shall mean hidden from sight as in trenches, chases, furred space or above suspended ceilings D "Exposed" shall mean not concealed as defined above E "Engineer" shall mean "the Mechanical Engineer " F The terms "Contractor" and "Mechanical Contractor" are used in the mechanical specifications to assist the General Contractor in defining the portions of their work which are primarily mechanical Coordinating the specific obligations of all subcontractors, particularly where the scope of work of two trades interface, and ensuring all work required by the contract documents is included in the bids is the responsibility of the General Contractor 1 7 TEMPORARY HEAT/VENTILATION A. The Contractor shall not use permanent heating/ventilating units for temporary heat/ventilation unless approved by the Owner Should the units be used for temporary heat/ventilation without the Owner's permission, the Contractor may be City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 220200-2 Mechanical General Provisions instructed to remove and replace the units, or provide cleaning/repair to the owners satisfaction B. If approved for use by the Owner, the permanent heating/ventilating units shall be protected from dust by installing filters air tight over all return grilles, and only after the ductwork is complete and sealed C. The heating/ventilating units and ductwork shall then be cleaned prior to Owner acceptance. 1 8 SCHEDULE OF VALUES: A. Within two weeks after awarding of the contract, the Contractor shall submit a Schedule of Values to the Owner and Architect listing the category of each item and its respective cost (material and labor cost shall be listed separately for each item) within the awarded contract amount. Each category shall include its proportional share of Contractor's overhead and profit, with a total of all categories, equaling 100% of the contract amount. The Schedule of Values shall include all of the following categories which are applicable to this project: 1. Mobilization, detailing and engineering 2 Galvanized steel ductwork and fabricated plenums 3. HVAC equipment: a Exhaust fans b Wall hung AC units 4 Finish HVAC - grilles, diffusers 5 Insulation 6. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 7. As -Built Drawings 8 Air Balance Agent (Provide name of the firm to be used) 9 Commissioning Agent (Provide name of the firm to be used) 10 Project Closeout (i e punch list items) 1 9 CODES, FEES AND RELATED COSTS. A. All materials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable codes, specifications, local ordinances, industry standards and utility company regulations B. If building codes, state laws, local ordinances, industry standards and/or utility company regulations conflict with the contract documents, the most stringent shall govern. Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect in writing of any such difference. C Should the Contractor perform any work that does not comply with the local ordinances, industry standards and utility company regulations, he shall bear all costs arising in correcting the deficiencies. D The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and payment for all permits, licenses, and inspection certificates required in accordance with provisions of contract documents, and shall pay all fees for the utility connections as required for this part of the work. 1 10 LISTED EQUIPMENT A. Materials used under this contract, unless specifically noted otherwise, shall be new and of the latest and most current line of the specific model produced by the manufacturer Outdated "new" equipment is not acceptable Each item of equipment City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 220200-3 Mechanical General Provisions shall be of the best quality of its respective kinds and shall conform to the latest Standard Specifications of the American Society for Testing Materials B Electrically driven or electrically connected equipment shall be of a type which shall conform to any applicable standards of the national bureau of Standards of the United States Department of Commerce or the standards of the Underwriters Laboratories or another nationally recognized testing laboratory. Equipment items shall bear the UL label or equivalent where it is available. All gas-fired equipment shall be AGA approved and so labeled unless equipment can be dual fuel C It shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor (through project suppliers and equipment manufacturers) to purchase and install only equipment bearing the UL label whenever that equipment so labeled is available Should any equipment be installed without the proper UL label, the contractor shall bear the entire cost of correction to the satisfaction of the State Electrical Inspector with jurisdiction 1.11 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions of equipment or materials shall be made only with the written prior approval of the Architect. The Architect or Engineer must receive prior approval requests at least seven (7) days prior to bid date unless otherwise instructed in the architectural sections of this specification Items approved for bidding will be listed in the addendum(s), items not approved will not be listed B Throughout these specifications, various materials, equipment, apparatus, etc are specified by manufacturer, brand name, and type or catalog number Such designation is to establish standards of desired quality and construction and shall be the basis of the bid Substitution approval is an acceptance of manufacturer recognition only No attempt has been made to check each item as to special features, capacities, or physical dimensions required by this project. It shall be the responsibility of the supplier, manufacturer, and Contractor to verify all requirements before submitting for final approval Submittal review by the Engineer, is to assist the Contractor in providing an equal product. Submittal acceptance and does not relieve the Contractor from all submittal requirements if the product is subsequently discovered as inferior to the specified product. C Where two or more manufacturers are listed, the choice will be up to the Contractor Where more than one manufacturer is listed, and only one manufacturer's catalog number is indicated, materials supplied by the other manufacturer(s) must maintain that standard of quality and construction D The Contractor shall bear full responsibility for substituted equipment and materials, and how they relate to the Engineer's design The Contractor shall also assume the cost of any redesign, in the form of changes to the drawings, and the work of any other trade due to substitution of material and shall provide additional materials as required to properly install any equipment substitutions If additional design is required by the Engineer to accommodate substituted equipment, the Engineer shall be compensated by the Contractor at their standard hourly rate 1 12 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS A. As -built drawings shall be brought up-to-date at the end of each working day As -built drawings not kept current shall be cause to withhold payments from the Contractor City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 220200-4 Mechanical General Provisions B. All change orders, addendum items and clarifications to the contract shall be noted on the as -built drawings and shall include all revisions accomplished by these items 1 13 PROTECTION AND CLEANING. A. All equipment and material installed by the Contractor shall be properly protected from damage during the course of construction. Enamelware or china fixtures which are plastered around and/or over shall be covered with heavy wrapping paper thoroughly secured All fixtures and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned before final inspection B Equipment shall be stored in a manner acceptable to the manufacturer. Should any equipment become damaged during storage, the contractor shall replace that piece of equipment at no cost to the owner C All temporary openings in pipes and ducts shall be capped or sealed during construction Caps shall be removed for final connections 114 PAINTING A. Unless otherwise noted, all painting of mechanical equipment, piping, etc. shall be left in prime coat or unfinished. Equipment specified herein that has a factory finish specified shall be furnished in accordance with the respective specification. B The Contractor shall be responsible for touch-up of all paint defects on mechanical equipment received from the factory. All shipping markings shall be removed or painted out. All paper shipping tags shall be removed 115 ACCESSIBILITY. A. Damper operators, thermometers, pressure gauges, cleanout fittings, and indicating equipment or specialties requiring reading, adjusting, inspection, repairing, removal, or replacement shall be conveniently and accessibly located with reference to finished building B Provide aisles between equipment and ducts, electrical gear, etc. for complete service and inspection of equipment. Provide minimum clearances for line voltage panels provided with or fixed to mechanical equipment per NEC 1 16 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ROOM PRECAUTIONS - A. Ductwork or piping for mechanical systems shall not be installed in any switchgear room, transformer vault, telephone room, or electrical closet, except as indicated 1 17 ELECTRICAL PANELS A. No piping or ductwork shall be run over any electrical panel Contractor shall be required to move at his expense any pipe or duct run over an electrical panel regardless of where diagrammatically indicated on the drawings. 1.18 SUPPLEMENTAL STEEL. A. Provide supplemental support steel to span building structural elements as necessary for equipment foundations, supports, hangers, etc. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 220200-5 Mechanical General Provisions 1 19 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Make final connections to equipment identified as Owner furnished and Contractor installed, and equipment scheduled or indicated on the drawings and in these specifications, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and shop drawings Refer to details on the mechanical drawings for additional installation information Manufacturer provided installation recommendations and code requirements shall supersede details and specifications in the event of a conflict. 1.20 INSTALLATION AND ALIGNMENT A. All equipment shall require the following attention in addition to factory installation and maintenance instructions 1 Check all equipment for damage upon arrival. 2 Check equipment for complete components 3 Check fans, motors, and drives for proper alignment. 4 Check motors for proper voltage, horsepower, and phase 5 Check V -belt drives for proper belts and alignment. 6 Lubricate all bearings per manufacturer's recommendations or once per month where equipment is being used for temporary heat and ventilation 7 Check fan wheels for proper balance on startup Fans not properly balanced shall be replaced or rebalanced by technicians capable of this work. 1.21 BARRICADES & BRIDGES A. The Contractor shall furnish barricades for this work. B Barricades shall be erected to meet all state and local requirements and standards C The Contractor shall erect temporary bridges and supports as required to accommodate vehicle and pedestrian traffic over open trenches or obstructions D All temporary supports and bridges shall be constructed of sufficient strength to safely accommodate the normal vehicle or pedestrian traffic 1.22 TEST LOG DATA. A. The Contractor shall keep a three-ring notebook in the construction job office for the sole purpose of filing test data B The test data shall include the testing and flushing of all piping on the project as well as the results of any other testing required by this specification C The Contractor's Superintendent and the Architect's representative or the code authority having jurisdiction shall sign all log data test entries D Test log shall be forwarded to the Architect at project closeout. 1 23 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and patching of existing or new building walls, floors and roof required to install the mechanical systems shall be the responsibility of this contractor This work includes but is not limited to patching of holes left by the removal of mechanical utilities, equipment, and fixtures All patching shall match the existing construction, City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 220200-6 Mechanical General Provisions and shall be made in accordance with the existing manufacturer's requirements as required to maintain any existing warranty if one exists B. Negligent damage to existing or new structures by the Contractor shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense. C Precautions shall be taken to protect adjacent areas from dust and dirt. 1.24 CLEANUP A. Upon the completion of the work hereinafter specified and at times during the progress of the work or when requested by the Architect, the Contractor shall remove all surplus materials, debris, and rubbish resulting from his operations, and shall leave the entire building and involved portions of the site, insofar as the work of the contract is concerned, in a neat, clean and acceptable condition as approved by the Architect. B The Contractor shall be expected to police his day-to-day operation and maintain a clean and safe working area. 1.25 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS• A. The Contractor shall provide wall, floor and ceiling access doors as required to maintain and repair all equipment. 1 Acceptable Manufacturers Mifab B. The Contractor shall provide duct access doors as required, by the ductwork sections of the specifications 1.26 SAFETY AND PROTECTION A. The Engineer has not been retained or compensated to provide design and construction review services relating to the Contractor's safety precautions or to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures required for the Contractor to perform his work. The Contractor will be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours The Architect's observations of the Contractor's performance are not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures in, on or near the construction site. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to comply with "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction," Volume 36, No 75, Part II of the Federal Register by the U S Department of Labor Contractor shall be responsible for providing all such safety measures and shall consult with the state or federal safety inspector for interpretation whenever in doubt as to whether safe conditions do or do not exist or whether he is or is not in compliance with state or federal regulations. B Provide OSHA, and local or state safety agency compliant drive and shaft guards for all exposed, rotating drive shafts and drive connections between motors and driven equipment including fans, pumps, compressors, etc. Guards shall include heavy-duty steel frames securely fastened for easy removal to the equipment frame. Guards, in general, shall be solid sheet metal with tachometer cutout at shafts where applicable Guards for double width fans and for air cooled compressors, etc , shall be heavy mesh or expanded metal to permit airflow. Guards may be provided by the equipment manufacturer or fabricated by this Contractor to the manufacturer's clearances, configurations, etc. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 220200-7 Mechanical General Provisions 127 GUARANTEE A. The Contractor shall guarantee all work included in this section for a period of one year after date of Certificate of Substantial Completion During that period, all defects due to faulty materials or workmanship and damage to other work, resulting from the defects, or the correction of it, shall be remedied at the Contractor's expense 1 28 ELECTRICAL WORK AND COORDINATION A. Motors and equipment to be provided with electrical characteristics as shown on the mechanical drawings. Electrical equipment, in particular motors, to be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1 29 MAGNETIC STARTERS A. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish and install all motor starters required for mechanical equipment, except where they are identified to be provided and installed by the Electrical Contractor in the electrical contract documents All starters shall be sized per NEMA standards B All motor starters provided on mechanical equipment shall comply with the requirements outlined in the electrical contract documents 1 30 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish and install all fused and non-fused disconnects required for mechanical equipment, except where identified to be provided and installed by the Electrical Contractor in the electrical contract documents All disconnects and fuses shall be sized per NEMA standards B All fused disconnect switches provided on mechanical equipment shall comply with the requirements outlined in the electrical contract documents 1 31 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING AND CONNECTION A. Connection and control diagrams for mechanical and control equipment to be furnished under the mechanical specifications and be submitted for review Wiring provided and installed under the mechanical sections shall conform to the electrical sections of these specifications Control panels provided under the mechanical specifications to comply with UL standards and to be UL labeled B Safety disconnects provided with mechanical equipment shall meet the requirements specified under the electrical sections Switches to be located in a convenient position at or adjacent to the equipment, and to not obstruct the removal of access panels, doors, or other operating parts of the mechanical equipment. C Control devices are specified under the mechanical sections Control devices are defined as those, which sense or regulate the temperature or flow of air or water including thermostats, dampers, modulating valves, pressure switches, or flow switches, etc 1 Line voltage wiring (above 50 volts) required for control devices to be provided and installed by this Contractor Line voltage wiring to be installed in conduit furnished and installed by this Contractor Refer to the electrical specifications for material and methods. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 220200-8 Mechanical General Provisions 2 Low voltage wiring (under 50 volts) required for control devices to be provided and installed by this Contractor. Refer to electrical specifications for material and methods END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 220200-9 Mechanical General Provisions SECTION 220400 MECHANICAL SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA PART 1 — GENERAL 11 DESCRIPTION A. Submit shop drawings, product data, and samples required by Contract Documents B Make submittals promptly on all mechanical equipment and systems in such sequence as to cause no delay in the work. C Details shall be identified by reference to sheet and detail, schedule or room numbers shown on Contract Documents D All materials and equipment must be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the design engineer and architect before being released for shipment. 1 Provide mechanical submittals in 3 -ring binders comprised of the following, with index tabs corresponding to location in the specification or on the drawings Electronic submittals will be accepted as a single PDF file, but must include a searchable index to allow the engineer to "flip" directly to any submittal item without scrolling through the entire submittal a Ventilation including all materials, equipment, temperature controls, and balancing firm INCOMPLETE BOUND SUBMITTALS AND SUBMITTALS PROVIDED IN LOOSE FORM WILL BE REJECTED PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 1 PRODUCT DATA: A. Preparation 1 Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models 2 Show performance characteristics and capacities. 3 Show dimensions and clearances required 4 Show wiring, piping, and control diagrams 5 Provide manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams 6 Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information which is not applicable to the work 7 Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the work B Submission. 1 Send ONE copy of the submittals to the Engineer for review The engineer will review the copy, retain it for the file, and return a submittal review log outlining approval and resubmittal requirements for all items in the submittal The contractor will resubmit on items as required until the entire submittal is accepted as a whole, at which point the contractor will make the required number of copies for distribution City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 220400-1 Mechanical Shop Drawings and Product Data 2. The Contractor shall coordinate with the division 1 section of the specifications for the total number of copies to be provided, if not defined in division 1, provide 5 final sets to the Architect at the completion of the submittal review process. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES: A. Review shop drawings, product data and samples prior to submission B Determine and verify. 1 Field measurements 2. Field construction criteria 3. Catalog numbers and similar data 4. Conformance with specifications C. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents. D Substitutions from the requirements outlined in the contract documents will only be allowed through the prior approval process E. Begin no fabrication or work which requires submittals until return of submittals with Architect acceptance F Submittals shall contain 1 The date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions 2 The project title and number 3 The contract identification a. The names of. 1 Contractor 2. Supplier 3 Manufacturer G Reference each product or piece of equipment by section number and paragraph number if in specifications If not in specifications, reference plan, detail, schedule, and symbol numbers shown ITEMS NOT REFERENCED AS REQUIRED WILL BE REJECTED PRIOR TO REVIEW H Field dimensions and clearance requirements clearly identified as such. Deviations from Contract Documents shall be conspicuously identified, so as to be easily recognized by the reviewer J Identification of revisions on resubmittals shall be conspicuously identified, so as to be easily recognized by the reviewer. K Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying review of submittal, verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents L Materials and equipment without prior approval will not be acceptable. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 220400-2 Mechanical Shop Drawings and Product Data 3.2 ENGINEER'S REVIEW A. The engineer will review each submittal indicating that one of the following categories applies to the submittal with the corresponding action to be taken by the contractor 1 No Exception Taken 2 Furnish as Corrected 3 Revise and Resubmit 4 Rejected B The engineer's submittal log includes the following clarification and explanation by way of this specification 1 Corrections or comments or acceptance during this review do not relieve the contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents The contractor is responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordinating his work with that of all other trades, and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner 3 3 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals which require resubmission shall be identified in the submittal log and returned to the Contractor with corrections noted thereon B Make any corrections or changes in the submittals and resubmit following the procedure listed above END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 220400-3 Mechanical Shop Drawings and Product Data DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) SECTION 230553 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 — GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates B Tags 12 REFERENCES A. ASME Al 3 1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems 1 3 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to the submittal requirements described in the architectural and mechanical sections of the specification B Product Data Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required PART 2 - PRODUCTS 21 NAMEPLATES A. Acceptable Manufacturers Seton NamePlate Corp , Brimar B Description Laminated plastic with engraved white letters minimum 1/4" high on black background 2.2 TAGS A. Acceptable Manufacturers Seton NamePlate Corp , Brimar B Metal Tags Brass with stamped letters, tag size minimum 1'/2' diameter with smooth edges Letters and numbers shall be minimum 1/2" high PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials 3 2 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion B Install tags with corrosion resistant chain C Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 230553-1 Mechanical Identification D Identify all major mechanical equipment, including but not limited to, fans, cooling units, and water heaters, with plastic nameplates The intent of this specification is to identify all equipment exactly as it was identified on the drawings and in the specifications E Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 230553-2 Mechanical Identification SECTION 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1 — GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems B Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems 12 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to the submittal requirements described in the Architectural and Mechanical sections of the specification B Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within 30 days after award of Contract. The balancing agency shall be chosen from the list of approved agencies and shall not be affiliated with nor be an employee of the mechanical contractor C If requested by engineer prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required Sample forms, qualifications of balancing personnel, equipment to be used with calibration history, test procedures to be utilized for each system 1 Each test instrument shall have been calibrated by an approved laboratory or the manufacturer 2 The architect has the right to request instrument recalibration or the use of other instruments and test methodology where the accuracy of readings is questionable D Report. 1 Submit a draft copy of report to the contractor and the engineer at the earliest possible date Coordinate with the contractor and engineer to address and correct any system deficiencies resulting in performance not within +10% or -5% of design. After deficiencies are addressed and final balancing completed on the areas addressed, provide final copies for Architect/Engineer final review, and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals 2 The balancing report shall include a coordinated set of drawings which show locations of all outlets, dampers, grilles, boxes, balancing valves, control valves, etc, if not directly coordinated with the contract document room numbers and equipment identification E Provide report with index page and cover F Test Reports Indicate data on AABC or NEBB forms 1 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform total system balance in accordance with AABC National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance or NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems 14 QUALIFICATIONS City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 230593-1 Air testing and Balancing A. Agency- Company certified with AABC or NEBB with minimum three years experience 15 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work before Substantial Completion of Project. B. Air balance work shall not commence prior to the engineer receiving verification that the specified leakage rate has been attained 16 SCOPE A. Air Balancing will be required on all diffusers, grilles, louvers, and equipment with airflows indicated on the drawing Balancing scope shall include all equipment, new or existing, that has airflows identified, or are supplying outlets with airflows identified PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 1 APPROVED AGENCIES A. Maiani Construction Services B. Test Comm 3.2 VERIFICATION OF AIR LEAKAGE A. Air balance shall not commence until the Mechanical contractor has furnished proof of compliance with the leakage allowance specified in other sections of this specification. 3 3 EXAMINATION A. The Air Balance Contractor shall coordinate with the Mechanical contractors to verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions: 1 All systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2 Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters 5 Duct systems are clean of debris. 6 Fans are rotating correctly 7 Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8 Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 9 Air outlets are installed and connected 10. Duct system leakage is minimized. 3 4 ADJUSTING A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions B. Permanently mark settings of dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored Set and lock memory stops. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 230593-2 Air testing and Balancing C After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified D Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings E At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner or Architect. 3 5 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities B Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. Where the installation does not allow for a single traverse of the main supply/return/exhaust duct, provide multiple traverses as close to the fan as practical to determine total airflow. All fans shall have traverses taken to determine total airflow 1 Provide all raw data gathered during traverse reading(s) in the form of a grid drawing with the data listed on the grid corresponding to where it was taken in the duct. Include this information in the balance report. C Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets D Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise E Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers F Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds Provide drive changes required Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation G Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters H Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions 3 6 SCHEDULES A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing shall include all equipment having airflow or water flow volumes listed Equipment requiring testing, adjusting and balancing shall include, but not be limited to Wallmount Room Air Conditioning Units Fans Air Inlets and Outlets B Report Forms 1 Title Page a Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency b Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 230593-3 Air testing and Balancing c Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency d Project name e Project location f Project Architect g Project Engineer h. Project Contractor i Report date 2 Summary Comments. a Nomenclature used throughout report 3 Instrument List: a Instrument b Manufacturer c. Model number d Serial number e. Range f Calibration date 4 Electric Motors. a. Manufacturer b. Model/Frame c. HP/BHP d Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load e RPM f. Service factor g. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 5 V -Belt Drive: a. Identification/location b. Required driven RPM c Driven sheave, diameter and RPM d Belt, size and quantity e Motor sheave diameter and RPM f Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual 6 Air Moving Equipment a Location b Manufacturer c. Model number d Serial number e Air flow, specified and actual f Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual g Inlet pressure h. Discharge pressure i Sheave Make/Size/Bore j Number of Belts/Make/Size k. Fan RPM 7 Return Air/Outside Air Data a Identification/location b. Design air flow c. Actual air flow 8 Exhaust Fan Data. a Location b Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Air flow, specified and actual f Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual g. Sheave Make/Size/Bore h. Number of Belts/Make/Size i. Fan RPM City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 230593-4 Air testing and Balancing 9 Duct Traverse. a. System zone/branch b Duct size c Area d Design velocity e Design air flow f Test velocity g Test air flow h Duct static pressure 10 Air Distribution Test Sheet: a Air terminal designation b Room number/location c Terminal type d Terminal size e Area factor f Design air flow g Test (final) air flow h Percent of design air flow 3 7 FINAL TESTS A. Recheck Tests. Tests may be required to demonstrate accuracy of data recorded in the certified reports If requested by the Engineer or Owner, the contractor shall recheck, in the presence of the Engineer or Owner, random selections of data recorded in the certified report. Points and areas for recheck shall be selected by the Engineer or Owner Measurement and test procedures shall be the same as approved for work forming basis of certified report. Selections for recheck (specific plus random), in general, will not exceed 20 percent of the total number tabulated in the report. B Retests If random tests elicit a measured flow deviation outside of the +10% or -5% of design, at 10 percent or more of the rechecked selections, the report shall be rejected In the event the report is rejected, the balancing agency shall verify all points recorded in the balance report and resubmit to the engineer The engineer shall be compensated at his hourly rate for additional retesting of the system This work shall be done at no additional cost to the owner C Markings of Settings Following approval of certified reports by the engineer, the settings of all valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices shall be permanently marked by the contractor, so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time Devices shall not be marked until after acceptance of certified reports. END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 230593-5 Air testing and Balancing SECTION 230594 MECHANICAL SYSTEM COMMISSIONING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Commissioning of mechanical systems per the Washington State Energy Code (WSEC) B Commissioning is a systematic process of verification and documentation, that ensures that the selected building systems have been designed, installed, and operate per plan and in conformance with the WSEC C. The intent of this specification is to allow the limited Commissioning required by the WSEC to be performed by a qualified Commissioning Agent, which may or may not also be the qualified Air Balance Contractor. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to the submittal requirements described in the Architectural and Mechanical sections of the specification. B Submit the name of the Commissioning agency for approval within 30 days after award of Contract. The commissioning agency shall be chosen from the list of approved agencies and shall not be affiliated with nor be an employee of the mechanical contractor, but is allowed to be the qualified Air Balance Contractor. C If requested by engineer prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outlines indicating commissioning procedure Sample forms or past projects, qualifications of personnel, and test procedures to be utilized. D. Report. 1 Submit a draft copy of report to the contractor and the engineer at the earliest possible date Coordinate with the contractor and engineer to address and correct any system deficiencies. After deficiencies are addressed and final commissioning is completed, provide final copies for Architect/Engineer final review, and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals 2 The commissioning report shall include a coordinated set of drawings which show locations of all equipment being commissioned, if not directly coordinated with the contract document room numbers and equipment identification. E Provide report with index page and cover. F Test Reports Indicate data on BCA or approved forms 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform commissioning in accordance with the WSEC City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 230594-1 Mechanical System Commissioning 14 QUALIFICATIONS A. Agency. Company certified with the Building Commissioning Association, BCA. 15 SEQUENCING A. Sequence work to coincide with the completion and testing of the controls, and startup of the equipment. Commissioning to be completed before Substantial Completion of Project. 16 SCOPE A. Commissioning will be required on all new or modified systems with new or revised airflows, or equipment indicated on the drawings, and in conformance with the WSEC section 1416 B Provide the following information as a minimum, see WSEC Section 1416 for specific procedures and reporting requirements of each section 1 A Commissioning Plan 2 System Testing and Balancing (if by the same contractor) 3 Equipment Functional Perfiormance Testing 4 Controls Functional Performance Testing 5. A Preliminary Commissioning Report 6 Post Construction Documentation 7 A Final Commissioning Report PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 1 APPROVED AGENCIES A. Maiani Construction Services B Test Comm 3.2 EXAMINATION A. The Commissioning agent shall coordinate with the Mechanical contractor to verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions 1 All systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition 2 Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable 3 Air balance work is complete, or near completion 3 3 SCHEDULES A. Equipment Requiring Commissioning shall include all equipment required to be Tested, Adjusted and Balanced per that specification section, and the controls operating it. END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 230594-2 Mechanical System Commissioning SECTION 233113 DUCTWORK PART 1 — GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pressure Classifications B. Metal ductwork C. Duct hangars D Duct tests 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Field variation of duct configuration or sizes is permitted to avoid interference with building structure, provided aspect ratio (H/W) is not appreciable altered. Substantial variations shall be reviewed with the engineer prior to fabrication. Size spiral seam round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts B The contractor shall verify intended duct routing is free of obstructions through coordination with other trades and careful field measurements prior to fabrication No extra payment will be allowed for ductwork fabricated and found to be unusable due to building structure interference or conflict with other trades. 13 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to the submittal requirements described in the Architectural and Mechanical sections of the specification 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. 15 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Construct ductwork to NFPA standards and applicable Mechanical Code. 1 7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 233113-1 07/23/2010 Ductwork B Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealants PART 2- PRODUCTS 21 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Ducts ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock -forming quality, with total weight of galvanized coating for both sides being not less that 1-1/4 ounces per square foot. 2.2 PRESSURE —VELOCITY CLASSIFICATIONS A. Round, rectangular and flat oval ductwork upstream of a fan shall be constructed to the inlet static pressure scheduled for the fan. Round, rectangular and flat oval ductwork downstream of a fan shall be constructed to the discharge static pressure scheduled for the fan Pressure classifications shall be based on the scheduled fan static, but not less than 2" B Construction methods for pressure classes shall conform to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards 2 3 ROUND AND FLAT OVAL GALVANIZED STEEL DUCTWORK FABRICATION A Round Ducts Ducts with spiral lock seams shall be used for round and flat oval ducts, where the pressure class is over 2" Spiral duct shall also be used for pressure classes up to 2" for ductwork larger than 14" diameter, and for all round and flat oval ductwork exposed in a finished space Longitudinal seam ductwork is allowed in concealed locations up through 14" diameter, on pressure classes up to 2" B Construction Duct construction, metal gauges and reinforcement shall conform to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards (Metal and Flexible) and NFPA 90A, except as otherwise indicated or modified in this specification Gauge of sheet metal shall be based on maximum cross-sectional dimension C Seams and Joints Shall be made and sealed per the ductwork and sealant manufacturers recommendations D Side branches shall be 45° lateral type, saddle type branches are not allowed E Elbows for round ducts shall be adjustable seam type Elbow centerline radius shall be a minimum of 1 5 times the cross section diameter Elbows shall be constructed with five pieces for 60° through 90° turns, three pieces for turns less than 45°, and two pieces for turns less than 30° F Reinforcing of flat oval ducts shall be in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards (Metal and Flexible) and NFPA 90A. 2 4 RECTANGULAR GALVANIZED STEEL DUCTWORK CONSTRUCTION A. General. Provide all rectangular ductwork as shown, including transition pieces from rectangular to round B Gauge. Rectangular ductwork shall conform to the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards (Metal and Flexible) Manual C Construction. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 233113-2 Ductwork 1. Seams Do not use standing seams for ducts other than plenums Ductmate as manufactured by Ductmate Industries, Inc. may be used for transverse joints. 2. Diagonal Creasing Provide diagonal creasing on all panels wider than 18". At Contractor's option, in place of diagonal creasing required for panels wider than 18", all such panels may have machine formed transverse nibbed stiffening on 12" centers, provided such stiffening accomplishes stiffness and freedom from buckling or breathing, and does not lessen airtightness at seams and joints 3 Comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards (Metal and Flexible) construction recommendations D Bracing Duct construction, metal gauges and reinforcement shall conform to the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards (Metal and Flexible) Manual except as otherwise indicated in this specification Ducts shall not pulsate or vibrate when in operation. E. Fittings 1. Elbow: All rectangular ductwork elbows shall be radiused, or mitered with turning vanes Radiused ducts shall have a smooth long flow radius, with a minimum centerline radius equal to 1 5 times the depth of the duct in the plane of the turn. 2. Side Branch: 45° entry (rectangular), Conical or 45 ° entry (round). 2 5 HANGERS FOR SHEETMETAL WORK. A. General- Provide hangers, supports and anchor bolts for all sheetmetal ducts and equipment in conformance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards (Metal and Flexible) 2.6 DUCT TESTS A. Duct pressure testing shall be inconformance with the applicable State Energy Code, and as a minimum shall include the following Leak testing shall be performed by the balancing agency, and the documentation shall include all calculations used to determine allowable leakage. 1. All single -zone duct systems serving less than 5,000 square feet, and having more than 25% of the single -zone duct surface area in an unconditioned space shall be pressure tested to less than 6% of the fan flow 2 All ductwork that is designed to operate at a static pressure exceeding 3", shall be leak tested. 3 Allowable leakage shall be calculated per the following formula, and verified with testing in accordance with SMACNA Duct Leakage test Procedures - 1985, and reported to the Artchitect. Verification documentation shall include the.leakage calculation a Lmax=CLP0.65 1 Lmax Maximum permitted leakage in cfm/ft2 duct surface area 2 CL=Duct leakage class, cfm/100 ft2 at 1" water column (a) CL=6 for rectangular sheetmetal and flexible ducts. (b) CL=3 for round and flat oval sheetmetal ducts 3. P=Test pressure, which is equal to the duct design pressure class in water column PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 233113-3 07/23/2010 Ductwork 1 B Mounting and supporting of ducts, equipment, accessories and appurtenances shall be I provided, including but not limited to structural supports, hangers, vibration isolators, stands, clamps and brackets, access doors and dampers 1 C On galvanized steel ductwork visible in a finished space, ductwork shall be free from any damage, seams shall be located on the top of the duct, and joints shall be cut clean and I square, and assembled with an inner alignment sleeve Ductwork hangars shall neatly and uniformly spaced and installed D Field Changes to Ductwork Changes such as those required to suit the size of factory- ' fabricated equipment actually furnished shall be designed to minimize losses in pressure and performance due to sudden expansion and contraction E Offsets in Ductwork. All offsets necessary in ductwork are not shown on the drawings 1 Provide all offsets required without additional cost to the owner Offset angles to be as small as possible F Duct Sizes are inside clear dimensions For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining G Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and I maintenance activities H Connect diffusers and grilles to low pressure ducts with 3 feet maximum length of insulated flexible duct. 1 I During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system 1 END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 I 983-1268-400 233113-4 Ductwork SECTION 233423 POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof Exhausters 12 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to the submittal requirements described in the Architectural and Mechanical sections of the specification. B Product Data• Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted and sound power levels at rated capacity. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF EXHAUSTERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers Cook, Greenheck, ACME, Penn Ventilator, Breidert, Carnes B Product Requirements. 1 Performance Ratings Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal 2 Sound Ratings AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal 3 Fabrication- Conform to AMCA 99 4 UL Compliance- UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705 C Fan Unit: V -belt or direct driven as indicated in schedule, with spun aluminum housing; resilient mounted motor; 1/2' mesh, 16 gage aluminum birdscreen, square base to suit roof curb with continuous curb gaskets D Roof Curb 12" high of aluminum construction with continuously welded seams, built in cant strips, interior baffle with acoustic insulation, curb bottom and factory installed nailer strip E Electrical Characteristics and Components 1. Motor. Mount on vibration isolators out of the airstream Shall be of the heavy duty, permanently lubricated, sealed ball bearing type 2 Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70. 3 Disconnect Switch Factory wired, non -fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected motor and solid state speed controller for direct drive units Mount speed controller within fan housing. F Backdraft Damper. Gravity actuated unless specified as motorized in the fan schedule Aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with nylon bearings. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 233423-1 Power Ventilators G Fan Wheel Shall be centrifugal backward inclined, statically and dynamically balanced H. Sheaves For V -belt drives, provide cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position, fan shaft with self aligning pre -lubricated ball bearings PART 3 - EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B Secure exhausters to structure with stainless steel lag screws C. Extend ducts to exhausters through structure, counterflash duct to opening D Install flexible connections between fan inlet and ductwork, support ductwork independent of fan Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel, with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running E. Provide sheaves required for final air balance F Install backdraft dampers on inlet to roof and wall exhausters not having factory provided dampers G Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling exhauster fans and as indicated H Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 233423-2 Power Ventilators SECTION 233700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 — GENERAL 1 1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Diffusers B. Registers/grilles. C Louvers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to the submittal requirements described in the Architectural and Mechanical sections of the specification B Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with architectural reflected ceiling drawings, and providing the appropriate frame types in all diffusers, grilles and registers 13 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer. Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2 1 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Krueger, Tuttle & Bailey, Titus, Carnes, Price B Type Square, stamped, louvered diffuser with round neck, designed to discharge air in one to four way pattern as indicated C. Frame Surface mount or T -bar as required by ceiling type D Fabrication Steel or aluminum as scheduled, with baked enamel off-white finish. 2.2 WALL AND CEILING SUPPLY GRILLES A. Acceptable Manufacturers Titus, Tuttle & Bailey, Krueger, Carnes, Price B Type• Streamlined individually adjustable blades to discharge air along face of grille, double deflection C Frame. 11/4" border width with either countersunk screw mounting and gasket or T -bar mounting as required by ceiling type D Fabrication. Steel or aluminum as scheduled with baked off-white enamel finish. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 233700-1 Air Inlets and Outlets 1 1 2 3 WALL AND CEILING EXHAUST/RETURN GRILLES A. Acceptable Manufacturers Titus, Tuttle & Bailey, Krueger, Carnes, Price B Type Streamlined blades, 3/4" minimum depth, 1/2" maximum spacing, with blades set at 35° Install grille with blades obscuring line of sight to duct from traffic areas C. Frame 11/4" border width with either countersunk screw mounting and gasket or T -bar mounting as required by ceiling type. 1 D Fabrication Steel or aluminum as scheduled with baked enamel off-white finish 2 4 LOUVERS 1 A. Acceptable Manufacturers Ruskin, Penn Ventilator, Arrow United Industries, Greenheck, 1 American Warming & Ventilating B Type 6" deep with drainable blades on 35° slope , heavy channel frame, expanded aluminum with extruded aluminum frame birdscreen with 1/2" square mesh Screen shall be removable for cleaning C Fabrication Extruded aluminum, welded assembly, with factory finish as scheduled, color to be selected by architect. Jambs shall be constructed with integral downspouts to sill D Mounting Furnish with exterior flange and anchors matching wall construction for installation 1 E Performance. Louver shall pass a maximum free area velocity of 875 fpm with less than 12" w g. pressure drop and carry less than 01 ounces of water per square foot of free area during a 15 minute period based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA Publication 511 PART 3 - EXECUTION 111 3 1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions 1 B Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. Diffusers are shown in their approximate desired location, although, exact location must be compatible with the ceiling system, light fixtures, etc The contractor shall coordinate the diffuser locations with the reflected ceiling plans no extra payment will be allowed for "minor 1 relocation" as required C Connect diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection consisting of one of the following 1 Hard connections to be with galvanized sheetmetal with attachment screws, and duct sealant. 2 Secure flex duct to steel duct and diffusers/grilles with one plastic draw band securing the inner liner of the flex duct to the diffuser collar. Place two sheetmetal screws on opposite sides of the duct or diffuser/grille collar to prevent the draw band from slipping off. A second draw band shall secure the outer insulation cover to the duct or diffuser/grille collar, with the insulation between the layers pulled back and concealed Flexible ducts shall have not more than one 90 degree offset. City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 233700-2 Air Inlets and Outlets D Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly E Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. F. Return/Exhaust Grille/Register Installation• When located near the floor in wall direct fins down; when located near the ceiling in wall direct fins up, when located in the ceiling direct the fins toward the nearest wall END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 233700-3 Air Inlets and Outlets SECTION 239000 FINAL COMPLETION AND PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 — GENERAL 11 GENERAL A. Comply with all general requirements, Division 1 B Complete all mechanical requirements (including posting instructions, operational instruction periods, operation and maintenance instructions, balancing, and control work) prior to request for final inspection C. Contractor shall review all plans, specifications, change orders, and directives to determine that all work has been properly performed on the site D Contractor shall correct any known deficiencies which have been noted during construction and determine prior to request for final inspection that all work has been performed E The Contractor shall review the punchlists generated by the engineer and provide verification of completion by signing and dating each item prior to request for a final observation visit. The engineer will review the signed punchlists and determine if a final observation visit is warranted Should the engineer find discrepancies between the actual installation and the completion indicated in the signed punchlists, the engineer will halt his final observation, and the contractor will compensate the engineer at their then effective hourly rate for all expenses incurred as a result of the incomplete work prior to conducting another observation visit. The Contractor will then reissue the signed punchlists and final observation trip request. This process will continue until such time as the engineer is able to complete his final observation PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 1 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. At the completion of the project, at such time as designated by the Architect, an operational and maintenance instruction period for Owner shall take place This Contractor shall have present during this entire period his superintendent, foremen of various portions of the project, and manufacturer's service representatives (factory trained) for all equipment requiring periodic maintenance All operational and maintenance instructions shall be presented under direct supervision of the Architect. Prior to the O&M instruction period, all systems shall be started up and inspected by the contractor, and shall be fully operational B Contractor shall provide sign -in sheet and shall be responsible for having all parties present sign in After instruction is complete and accepted by Owner, Contractor shall provide Owner a letter indicating that the instructions have been accepted and Owner shall sign same Provide line items for each system demonstrated Both parties shall initial each item Copies shall be sent to the Architect. C. The Contractor's personnel do not qualify as factory trained representatives City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 239000-1 Final Completion and Project Closeout 1 1 1 2 2 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The contractor shall prepare and submit Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals for mechanical systems provided under this contract. Comply with Division 1 requirements for procedures and requirements for preparation and submittal of manuals. ' B. Manual binder shall have permanent lettering of a contrasting color Information to be included on the binder is as follows ' The front cover shall be lettered as follows: MECHANICAL ' OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL (PROJECT NAME) (CITY AND STATE) (YEAR) IOWNER: (NAME) ARCHITECT (NAME) MECHANICAL ENGINEER. DUMAIS • ROMANS, INC I GENERAL CONTRACTOR (NAME) MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR: (NAME) ' The spine shall be lettered as follows. MECHANICAL O&M MANUAL (Year) (Project Name) 1 C. Provide a master index at beginning of Manual showing items included Use plastic tab indexes for sections of Manual ' D Cover section shall consist of name, address, and phone number of Project Architect, General Contractor, Mechanical Engineer, Mechanical Contractor and all Mechanical Sub -Contractors. E Provide a separate section for each section of the specifications Provide index for each section listing equipment included Include all items specified in Sections 15010 through 15995 Provide a list of equipment suppliers with address and phone number. F Include in each section a copy of the approved submittal, followed by descriptive literature (manufacturer's O&M data) of each manufactured item Literature shall show all information listed below, and any data not relevant to the specific equipment installed shall be lined out. Data sheets shall be original, or very clear photocopies G One (1) copy of the manual shall be submitted for review and approval by the Engineer After approval, submit three (3) copies of the manual to the Owner for approval unless otherwise directed by Division 1 requirements Information to be included in the manual. ' 1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of all replaceable parts City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 239000-2 Final Completion and Project Closeout 2 Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routing and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping shut- down, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. 3 Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions 4 Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules 5 Schematic control diagrams (as -built status) for each automatic control system Mark correct operating setting for each control instrument on these diagrams. 6 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Report. 7 Test records and certifications 8 Instruction period checklist. 9 Warranty information. 11 Factory startup certification sheets 2 3 POSTING INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor shall provide to the Architect a letter indicating a list of operating instructions to be posted for his review, comments and additions prior to the preparation of the instructions 2 4 CERTIFICATES A. Provide a certificate to the Owner with a copy to the Architect showing the signed acceptance of each system by the Public Inspector having jurisdiction. 2 5 TEST LOG A. Provide test log for Architect's review and recommendations to Owner 2 6 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES A. Provide original copies to Owner B Include duplicates in Maintenance and Operation Manual with equipment data 2 7 BALANCING REPORT A. Provide prior to final inspection PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 239000-3 Final Completion and Project Closeout END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 239000-4 Final Completion and Project Closeout DIVISION 32 CONCRETE PAVING 1 1 ' SECTION 321313 CONCRETE PAVING 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 1. Walks 2 Outside equipment pads U B. Related Sections. 1. Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for general building applications of concrete 1.3 DEFINITIONS I A. Cementitious Materials Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast -furnace slag. I1 4 ACTION SUBMITTALS IA. Product Data: For each type of product indicated B LEED Submittals: I1 Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content. I 2. Design Mixtures for Credit ID 1 For each concrete mixture containing fly ash as a replacement for portland cement or other portland cement replacements For each design mixture submitted, include an equivalent concrete mixture that does not contain Iportland cement replacements, to determine amount of portland cement replaced C Shop Drawings Indicate pavement markings, lane separations, and defined parking spaces Indicate, with international symbol of accessibility, spaces allocated for people with 1 disabilities D. Samples for Initial Selection• For each type of product, ingredient, or admixture requiring color selection Cityof Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 321313-1 Concrete Paving 1 1 1 E Other Action Submittals: 1 Design Mixtures. For each concrete paving mixture Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments 1 5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data. For qualified [Installer of detectable warnings] [ready -mix concrete manufacturer] [and] [testing agency] B Material Certificates For the following, from manufacturer: 1 Cementitious materials 2 Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories 3 Fiber reinforcement. 4 Admixtures 5 Curing compounds 6 Applied finish materials 7 Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive 8 Joint fillers. C Material Test Reports: For each of the following 1 Aggregates [ Include service -record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali -aggregate reactivity.] D Field quality -control reports 1 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Detectable Warning Installer Qualifications. An employer of workers trained and approved by 1 manufacturer of stamped concrete paving systems B Ready -Mix -Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications. A firm experienced in manufacturing 1 ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1 Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities" (Quality Control Manual - Section 3, "Plant Certification Checklist") C Testing Agency Qualifications Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated 1 Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP -1 or an equivalent certification program D Concrete Testing Service. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform material evaluation 1 tests and to design concrete mixtures E ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301 M) unless otherwise indicated 1 City of Yakima Gardner Well 07/23/2010 983-1268-400 321313-2 Concrete Paving 1 F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution 1. Build mockups of full-thickness sections of concrete paving to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, and color; curing; and standard of workmanship. 2 Build mockups of concrete paving in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, build mockups where directed by Architect and not less than [96 inches (2400 mm) by 96 inches (2400 mm)] <Insert dimensions> [ Include full-size detectable warning.] 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing 4 Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. G Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>. 1. Review methods and procedures related to concrete paving, including but not limited to, the following: a. Concrete mixture design. b. Quality control of concrete materials and concrete paving construction practices c. <Insert agenda item> 2 Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with concrete paving to attend, including the following a Contractor's superintendent. b Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures c. Ready -mix concrete manufacturer. d Concrete paving subcontractor e Manufacturer's representative of stamped concrete paving system used for detectable warnings. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities B Pavement -Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of [40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for oil-based materials] [55 deg F (12.8 deg C) for water-based materials], and not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C) PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS A. Form Materials Plywood, metal, metal -framed plywood, or other approved panel -type materials to provide full -depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces. City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 321313-3 07/23/2010 Concrete Paving 1 Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves with a radius of 100 feet (30 5 m) or less [ Do not use notched and bent forms.] B. Form -Release Agent: Commercially formulated form -release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces 2 2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than [25] <Insert number> percent. B Plain -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from [as -drawn] [galvanized -]steel wire into flat sheets C Deformed -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet. D Epoxy -Coated Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A, plain steel E Reinforcing Bars ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. F Galvanized Reinforcing Bars ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class II zinc coated, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and bending; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) deformed bars G Epoxy -Coated Reinforcing Bars ASTM A 775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) deformed bars H Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed bars; assembled with clips. Plain -Steel Wire ASTM A 82/A 82M, [as drawn] [galvanized] J Deformed -Steel Wire ASTM A 496/A 496M K. Epoxy -Coated -Steel Wire ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated, [plain] [deformed] L. Joint Dowel Bars ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420) plain -steel bars[; zinc coated (galvanized) after fabrication according to ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class I coating] Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs M Epoxy -Coated, Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain -steel bars N Tie Bars ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed O Hook Bolts. ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4 6), internally and externally threaded Design hook -bolt joint assembly to hold coupling against paving form and in position during concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt. P Bar Supports Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place Manufacture bar City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 321313-4 07/23/2010 Concrete Paving supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified, and as follows. 1 Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs 2 For epoxy -coated reinforcement, use epoxy -coated or other dielectric -polymer -coated wire bar supports. Q Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating, compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement. R. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project: 1 Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, [gray] [white] portland cement [Type 1] [Type II] [Type I/11] [Type III] [Type V] [ Supplement with the following:] a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, [Class C] [or] [Class F]. b Ground Granulated Blast -Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120 2 Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, [Type IS, portland blast -furnace slag] [Type IP, portland-pozzolan] cement. B. Normal -Weight Aggregates ASTM C 33, [Class 4S] [Class 4M] [Class 1N] <Insert class>, uniformly graded Provide aggregates from a single source[ with documented service - record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar paving applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials] 1 Maximum Coarse -Aggregate Size. [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [1 inch (25 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)] nominal 2 Fine Aggregate Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Exposed Aggregate: Selected, hard, and durable; washed, free of materials with deleterious reactivity to cement or that cause staining, from a single source, with gap -graded coarse aggregate as follows. 1 Aggregate Sizes [3/4 to 1 inch (19 to 25 mm)] [1/2 to 3/4 inch (13 to 19 mm)] [3/8 to 5/8 inch (10 to 16 mm)] <Insert dimensions> nominal 2. Aggregate Source, Shape, and Color: <Insert requirements> D Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M. E. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. F. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0 1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material 1 Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 321313-5 07/23/2010 Concrete Paving 2. Retarding Admixture ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B 3 Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D 4. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F 5 High -Range, Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G 6 Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. G. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral -oxide pigments or colored water -reducing admixtures, color stable,[ free of carbon black,] nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis 1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following] a ChemMasters b. Davis Colors c Dayton Superior Corporation d Elementis Pigments e Hoover Color Corporation f Lambert Corporation g LANXESS Corporation h. QC Construction Products Scofield, L. M. Company. Solomon Colors, Inc k. Stamperete International, Ltd SureCrete Design Products m <Insert manufacturer's name> 2 Color- [As indicated by manufacturer's designation] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color> 2 4 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Synthetic Fiber: [Monofilament] [or] [fibrillated] polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete paving, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, [1/2 to 1-1/2 inches (13 to 38 mm)] <Insert dimensions> long 1 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following] a Monofilament Fibers - 1) Axim Italcementi Group, Inc , FIBRASOL II P. 2) Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Fiberstrand 100, Fiberstrand 150 3) FORTA Corporation; [FORTA ECONO-MONO] [or] [FORTA Mighty - Mono] 4) Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn , Grace MicroFiber 5) Metalcrete Industries, Polystrand 1000 6) QC Construction Products; QC FIBERS 7) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 321313-6 07/23/2010 Concrete Paving b Fibrillated Fibers: 1) Axim Italcementi Group, Inc ; FIBRASOL F. 2) Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Fiberstrand F 3) FORTA Corporation, [FORTA Econo-Net] [or] [FORTA Super -Net] 4) Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn ; Grace Fibers. 5) Propex Concrete Systems Corp.; Fibermesh 300 6) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. 2 5 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, [Class 3, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry] [or] [cotton mats] B Moisture -Retaining Cover ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap -polyethylene sheet. C. Water: Potable D Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete 1 Products' Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc , Caltexol CIMFILM. b BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Confilm. c ChemMasters; Spray -Film. d Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm e Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74) f Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm g Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar h Kaufman Products, Inc ; VaporAid Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc ; E -CON. k Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold. m Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM n. Sika Corporation, Inc ; SikaFilm o SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film p Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid q TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation, TK -2120 TRI -FILM r. Unitex; PRO -FILM. s. Vexcon Chemicals Inc ; Certi-Vex EnvioAssist. t. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]. City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 321313-7 07/23/2010 Concrete Paving a. Anti -Hydro International, Inc ; A -H Curing Compound #2 DR WB b ChemMasters; Safe -Cure Clear c Conspec by Dayton Superior; [D.O.T. Resin Cure] [DSSCC Clear Resin Cure]. d Dayton Superior Corporation; Day -Chem Rez Cure (J -11-W). e Edoco by Dayton Superior; [DSSCC Clear Resin Cure] [Resin Emulsion Cure V.O.C. (Type I)] f Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Kurez W VOX. g Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420 h Lambert Corporation, AQUA KURE - CLEAR. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc , L&M CURE R. j. Meadows, W. R., Inc , 1100 -CLEAR SERIES k Nox-Crete Products Group, Resin Cure E I. SpecChem, LLC, PaveCure Rez. m Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem Clear. n Tamms Industries, Inc , Euclid Chemical Company (The), TAMMSCURE WB 30C o. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; [TK -2519 WB] [TK -2519 DC WB] p Vexcon Chemicals Inc., Certi-Vex Enviocure 100 q <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> F White, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B, dissipating 1 Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a Anti -Hydro International, Inc.; A -H Curing Compound #2 WP WB b ChemMasters; Safe -Cure 2000. c Conspec by Dayton Superior; [D.O.T. Resin Cure White] [DSSCC White Resin Cure] d Dayton Superior Corporation; Day -Chem White Pigmented Cure (J -10-W) e Edoco by Dayton Superior; Resin Emulsion Cure V 0 C (Type II) f Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Kurez VOX White Pigmented g Kaufman Products, Inc , Thinfilm 450. h Lambert Corporation, AQUA KURE - WHITE L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc , L&M CURE R-2. Meadows, W. R., Inc ; 1100 -WHITE SERIES k SpecChem, LLC; PaveCure Rez White Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem White m Vexcon Chemicals Inc ; Certi-Vex Enviocure White 100 n <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> 2 6 RELATED MATERIALS A. Joint Fillers [ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber] [or] [ASTM D 1752, cork or self -expanding cork] in preformed strips B Slip -Resistive Aggregate Finish Factory -graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive aggregate of fused aluminum -oxide granules or crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide, unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 321313-8 07/23/2010 Concrete Paving C Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive. ASTM C 881/C 881M, two -component epoxy resin capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces; of class suitable for application temperature, of grade complying with requirements, and of the following types. 1. [Types I and II, non -load bearing] [Types IV and V, load bearing], for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete E Chemical Surface Retarder: Water-soluble, liquid, set retarder with color dye, for horizontal concrete surface application, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of concrete to a depth of 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) 1. Products. Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. ChemMasters; Exposee. b. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Delay S. c. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Etch (J-73) d Edoco by Dayton Superior; True Etch Surface Retarder e Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Surface Retarder Formula S f. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Expose. g Meadows, W. R., Inc., TOP -STOP h Metalcrete Industries; Surftard Nox-Crete Products Group; CRETE-NOX TA. Scofield, L. M. Company; LITHOTEX Top Surface Retarder k Sika Corporation, Inc., Rugasol-S I. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Etch m TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK -6000 Concrete Surface Retarder. n. Unitex; TOP -ETCH Surface Retarder. o Vexcon Chemicals Inc ; Certi-Vex Envioset. p <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>. F Pigmented Mineral Dry -Shake Hardener: Factory -packaged, dry combination of portland cement, graded quartz aggregate, color pigments, and plasticizing admixture Use color pigments that are finely ground, nonfading mineral oxides interground with cement. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a Anti -Hydro International, Inc.; A -H S -Q Hardener b BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC; Mastercron c. ChemMasters; ConColor. d Conspec by Dayton Superior; Conshake 600 Colortone. e Dayton Superior Corporation, Quartz Tuff f Euclid Chemical Company (The) an RPM company; Surflex. g Lambert Corporation, COLORHARD. h L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc ; QUARTZPLATE FF i. Metalcrete Industries; Floor Quartz. City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 321313-9 07/23/2010 Concrete Paving Scofield. L. M. Company; LITHOCHROME Color Hardener. k. Southern Color N.A., Inc , Mosaics Color Hardener Stamperete International, Ltd , Color Hardener m. Symons by Dayton Superior; Hard Top n. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> 2 Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designation] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color> G Rock Salt: Sodium chloride crystals, kiln dried, coarse gradation with 100 percent passing 3/8 -inch (9 5 -mm) sieve and 85 percent retained on a No 8 (2 36 -mm) sieve 2 7 DETECTABLE WARNING MATERIALS A. Detectable Warning Stamp: Semirigid polyurethane mats with formed underside capable of imprinting detectable warning pattern on plastic concrete; perforated with a vent hole at each dome 1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following] a Advanced Surfaces Inc b Matcrete Precision Stamped Concrete Tools c Southern Color N.A., Inc d Stamperete International Ltd e Superior Decorative by Dayton Superior f. <Insert manufacturer's name> 2 Size of Stamp. One piece [matching detectable warning area shown on Drawings] [24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm)] [24 by 36 inches (610 by 914 mm)] [24 by 48 inches (610 by 1220 mm)] [26 by 26 inches (660 by 660 mm)] [26 by 36 inches (660 by 914 mm)] <Insert dimensions> B Liquid Release Agent: Manufacturer's standard, clear, evaporating formulation designed to facilitate release of stamp mats 1 Products. Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a Advanced Surfaces Inc , Liquid Release. b Matcrete Precision Stamped Concrete Tools; Liquid Release Agent. c Southern Color N.A.. Inc , SCC Clear Liquid Release d Stamperete International Ltd ; Stamperete Liquid Release e Superior Decorative by Dayton Superior; Pro Liquid Release f <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> 2 8 PAVEMENT MARKINGS A. Pavement -Marking Paint: Alkyd -resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with AASHTO M 248, [Type N] [Type F] [Type S]; colors complying with FS TT -P-1952 City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 321313-10 07/23/2010 Concrete Paving 1. Color: [White] [Yellow] [Blue] [As indicated] <Insert color> B Pavement -Marking Paint: MPI #32 Alkyd Traffic Marking Paint. 1 Color: [White] [Yellow] [Blue] [As indicated] <Insert color> C Pavement -Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with FS TT -P-1952, Type II, with drying time of less than [three] [45] minutes. 1 Color: [White] [Yellow] [Blue] [As indicated] <Insert color>. D Pavement -Marking Paint: MPI #97 Latex Traffic Marking Paint. 1 Color [White] [Yellow] [Blue] [As indicated] <Insert color>. E. Glass Beads. [AASHTO M 247, Type 1] [FS TT -B-1325, Type 1A] 2 9 WHEEL STOPS A. Wheel Stops: Precast, air -entrained concrete, 2500 -psi (17.2-MPa) minimum compressive strength, [4-1/2 inches (115 mm) high by 9 inches (225 mm) wide by 72 inches (1820 mm) long] <Insert dimensions> Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside and holes for anchoring to substrate 1 Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter, 10 -inch (254 -mm) minimum length B. Wheel Stops: Solid, integrally colored, 96 percent recycled HDPE, or commingled postconsumer and postindustrial recycled [rubber] [or] [plastic]; UV stabilized; [4 inches (100 mm) high by 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 72 inches (1820 mm) long] <Insert dimensions>. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside and holes for anchoring to substrate. 1 Color: [Black] [Yellow] [Gray] [Green] [Blue] <Insert color> 2. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter, 10 -inch (254 -mm) minimum length. 3 Adhesive: As recommended by wheel stop manufacturer for application to concrete pavement. 2 10 PREFORMED TRAFFIC -CALMING DEVICES A. Speed [Bumps] [Humps] [Cushions] <Insert drawing designation>: Solid, integrally colored, 100 percent postconsumer or commingled postconsumer and postindustrial recycled [rubber] [or] [plastic]; UV stabilized. Provide holes for anchoring to substrate 1 Bump Size: Modular [2 inches (50 mm) high by 10 inches (254 mm) wide by 72 inches (1800 mm) long] <Insert dimensions>, with overall length as dimensioned on Drawings. 2. [Hump] [Cushion] Size: Modular assemblies [3 inches (75 mm) high by 12 feet (3.7 m) in overall width] [4 inches (100 mm) high by 14 feet (4.3 m) in overall width] <Insert dimensions>, with overall length as dimensioned on Drawings. 3 Color: [Black] [Yellow] <Insert color>. City of Yalama Gardner Well 983-1268-400 321313-11 07/23/2010 Concrete Paving 4 Mounting Hardware Galvanized -steel [lag screw, shield, and washers; 1/2 -inch (13 -mm) diameter, 8 -inch (200 -mm) minimum length] [hardware as standard with device manufacturer for use with concrete paving] 5. Adhesive [As recommended by device manufacturer] <Insert requirement>. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), for each type and strength of normal -weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field experience 1 Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method. 2. When automatic machine placement is used, determine design mixtures and obtain laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements B Proportion mixtures to provide normal -weight concrete with the following properties 1 Compressive Strength (28 Days) [4500 psi (31 MPa)] [4000 psi (27.6 MPa)] [3500 psi (24.1 MPa)] [3000 psi (20.7 MPa)] <Insert strength> 2 Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: [0.45] [0.50] <Insert ratio> 3 Slump Limit: [4 inches (100 mm)] [5 inches (125 mm)] [8 inches (200 mm)] <Insert dimension>, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm) C Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal -weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows: 1 Air Content: [5-1/2] [4-1/2] [2-1/2] percent plus or minus 1 5 percent for 1 -1/2 -inch (38 - mm) nominal maximum aggregate size 2. Air Content: [6] [4-1/2] [3] percent plus or minus 1 5 percent for 1 -inch (25 -mm) nominal maximum aggregate size 3 Air Content: [6] [5] [3-1/2] percent plus or minus 1 5 percent for 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) nominal maximum aggregate size D Limit water-soluble, chloride -ion content in hardened concrete to [0.15] [0.30] percent by weight of cement. E Chemical Admixtures Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions 1 Use [water -reducing admixture] [high -range, water -reducing admixture] [high - range, water -reducing and retarding admixture] [plasticizing and retarding admixture] in concrete as required for placement and workability 2 Use water -reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions F Cementitious Materials:[ Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast -furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent.][ Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:] 1 Fly Ash or Pozzolan: 25 percent. 2. Ground Granulated Blast -Furnace Slag: 50 percent. City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 321313-12 07/23/2010 Concrete Paving 3 Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan, and Ground Granulated Blast -Furnace Slag. 50 percent, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. G Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than [1.0 Ib/cu. yd. (0.60 kg/cu. m)] [1.5 Ib/cu. yd. (0.90 kg/cu. m)] <Insert requirement> H Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup 2 12 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M[ and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M] Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work 1 When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. B Project -Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum -type batch machine mixer. 1 For concrete batches of 1 cu. yd (0 76 cu m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released 2 For concrete batches larger than 1 cu. yd. (0 76 cu m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu yd. (0 76 cu m). 3 Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixing time, quantity, and amount of water added. PART 3 - EXECUTION 31 EXAMINATION A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances B Proof -roll prepared subbase surface below [concrete paving] <Insert locations> to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding 1 Completely proof -roll subbase in one direction[ and repeat in perpendicular direction]. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h). 2 Proof -roll with a pneumatic -tired and loaded, 10 -wheel, tandem -axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13 6 tonnes) 3 Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of [1/2 inch (13 mm)] <Insert dimension> according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving " C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 321313-13 07/23/2010 Concrete Paving 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete 3 3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B Clean forms after each use and coat with form -release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage 3 4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. B Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond -reducing materials C Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. D Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction E Zinc -Coated Reinforcement: Use galvanized -steel wire ties to fasten zinc -coated reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material F Epoxy -Coated Reinforcement: Use epoxy -coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy -coated reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M G Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2 -inch (50 -mm) overlap of adjacent mats 3 5 JOINTS A. General Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated 1 When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints unless otherwise indicated City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 321313-14 07/23/2010 Concrete Paving B. Construction Joints. Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints. 1 Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated Do not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated. 2 Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated 3 Butt Joints: Use [bonding agent] [epoxy bonding adhesive] at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 4 Keyed Joints Provide preformed keyway -section forms or bulkhead forms with keys unless otherwise indicated Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete 5 Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. C. Isolation Joints. Form isolation joints of preformed joint -filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated 1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of [50 feet (15.25 m)] <Insert dimension> unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3 Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated 4 Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 5 Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint -filler sections together 6 During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. D Contraction Joints: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows[, to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete paving] 1 Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a [1/4 -inch (6 -mm)] [3/8 -inch (10 -mm)] radius Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes [ Eliminate grooving -tool marks on concrete surfaces.] a Tolerance. Ensure that grooved joints are within [3 inches (75 mm)] <Insert dimension> either way from centers of dowels 2 Sawed Joints Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8 -inch- (3 -mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks a Tolerance: Ensure that sawed joints are within [3 inches (75 mm)] <Insert dimension> either way from centers of dowels. 3 Doweled Contraction Joints Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 321313-15 07/23/2010 Concrete Paving E Edging After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a [1/4 -inch (6 -mm)] [3/8 -inch (10 -mm)] radius Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes [ Eliminate edging -tool marks on concrete surfaces.] 3 6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation[, steel reinforcement,] and items to be embedded or cast -in B Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface[ and steel reinforcement] before placing concrete Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces C Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. D Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete E Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing F Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place G Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M) by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping 1 Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies[, reinforcement,] or side forms Use only square -faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating [reinforcement] [dowels] [and] joint devices H Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open -textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments J Curbs and Gutters: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing K. Slip -Form Paving Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce paving to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing 1 Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of slip -form paving machine during operations L Cold -Weather Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures Comply with ACI 306 1 and the following: City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 321313-16 07/23/2010 Concrete Paving 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 2 Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3 Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures M. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301 M) and as follows when hot -weather conditions exist: 1 Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option 2 Cover steel reinforcement with water -soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete 3. Fog -spray forms[, steel reinforcement,] and subgrade just before placing concrete Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3 7 FLOAT FINISHING A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations. B Float Finish. Begin the second floating operation when bleed -water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations Float surface with power - driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float -finished concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture. 2. Medium -to -Fine -Textured Broom Finish. Draw a soft -bristle broom across float - finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine -line texture 3 Medium -to -Coarse -Textured Broom Finish. Provide a coarse finish by striating float - finished concrete surface 1/16 to 1/8 inch (1 6 to 3 mm) deep with a stiff -bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic 3 8 SPECIAL FINISHES A. Monolithic Exposed -Aggregate Finish: Expose coarse aggregate in paving surface as follows. 1 Immediately after float finishing, spray -apply chemical surface retarder to paving according to manufacturer's written instructions 2. Cover paving surface with plastic sheeting, sealing laps with tape, and remove when ready to continue finishing operations 3 Without dislodging aggregate, remove mortar concealing the aggregate by lightly brushing surface with a stiff, nylon -bristle broom Do not expose more than one-third of the average diameter of the aggregate and not more than one-half of the diameter of the smallest aggregate City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 321313-17 07/23/2010 Concrete Paving 4 Fine -spray surface with water and brush. Repeat cycle of water flushing and brushing until cement film is removed from aggregate surfaces to depth required. B Seeded Exposed -Aggregate Finish: Immediately after initial floating, spread a single layer of aggregate uniformly on paving surface Tamp aggregate into plastic concrete and float finish to entirely embed aggregate with mortar cover of 1/16 inch (1 6 mm). 1 Spray -apply chemical surface retarder to paving according to manufacturer's written instructions 2 Cover paving surface with plastic sheeting, sealing laps with tape, and remove sheeting when ready to continue finishing operations 3 Without dislodging aggregate, remove mortar concealing the aggregate by lightly brushing surface with a stiff, nylon -bristle broom Do not expose more than one-third of the average diameter of the aggregate and not more than one-half of the diameter of the smallest aggregate 4 Fine -spray surface with water and brush Repeat cycle of water flushing and brushing until cement film is removed from aggregate surfaces to depth required C Slip -Resistive Aggregate Finish: Before final floating, spread slip -resistive aggregate finish on paving surface according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1 Uniformly spread [25 Ib/100 sq. ft. (12 kg/10 sq. m)] [40 Ib/100 sq. ft. (19.5 kg/10 sq. m)] [60 Ib/100 sq. ft. (29 kg/10 sq. m)] <Insert rate of application> of dampened, slip -resistive aggregate over paving surface in two applications Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not force below surface 2 Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of slip -resistive aggregate over paving surface with mechanical spreader, allow to absorb moisture, and embed by power floating Follow power floating with a second slip -resistive aggregate application, uniformly distributing remainder of material at right angles to first application to ensure uniform coverage, and embed by power floating 3 Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by slip -resistive aggregate manufacturer Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing 4 After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or abrasive stone and water to expose nonslip aggregate D Rock -Salt Finish After initial [floating] [troweling] [brooming], uniformly spread rock salt over paving surface at the rate of 5 Ib/100 sq ft. (0 2 kg/10 sq m) 1 Embed rock salt into plastic concrete with [roller] [or] [magnesium float] <Insert tool> 2 Cover paving surface with 1 -mil- (0 025 -mm-) thick polyethylene sheet and remove sheet when concrete has hardened and seven-day curing period has elapsed 3 After seven-day curing period, saturate concrete with water and broom -sweep surface to dissolve remaining rock salt, thereby leaving pits and holes E Pigmented Mineral Dry -Shake Hardener Finish After initial floating, apply dry -shake materials to paving surface according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows. 1 Uniformly spread dry -shake hardener at a rate of [100 Ib/100 sq. ft. (49 kg/10 sq. m)] <Insert rate of application>, unless greater amount is recommended by manufacturer to match paving color required 2 Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of dry -shake hardener over the concrete surface with mechanical spreader; allow hardener to absorb moisture and embed it by power floating Follow power floating with a second application of pigmented mineral City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 321313-18 07/23/2010 Concrete Paving dry -shake hardener, uniformly distributing remainder of material at right angles to first application to ensure uniform color, and embed hardener by final power floating. 3. After final power floating, apply a hand -trowel finish followed by a broom finish. 4 Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by dry -shake hardener manufacturer Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing. 3 9 DETECTABLE WARNINGS A. Blockouts Form blockouts in concrete for installation of detectable paving units specified in [Section 321400 "Unit Paving"] <Insert Division number and Section title> 1 Tolerance for Opening Size: [Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus] <Insert requirement> B Stamped Detectable Warnings: Install stamped detectable warnings as part of a continuous concrete paving placement and according to stamp -mat manufacturer's written instructions 1 Before using stamp mats, verify that the vent holes are unobstructed. 2. Apply liquid release agent to the concrete surface and the stamp mat. 3. Stamping [While initially finished concrete is plastic] [After application and final floating of pigmented mineral dry -shake hardener], accurately align and place stamp mats in sequence Uniformly load, gently vibrate, and press mats into concrete to produce imprint pattern on concrete surface Load and tamp mats directly perpendicular to the stamp -mat surface to prevent distortion in shape of domes. Press and tamp until mortar begins to come through all of the vent holes. Gently remove stamp mats 4 Trimming After [24] <Insert number> hours, cut off the tips of mortar formed by the vent holes 5 Remove residual release agent according to manufacturer's written instructions, but no fewer than three days after stamping concrete. High -pressure -wash surface and joint patterns, taking care not to damage stamped concrete Control, collect, and legally dispose of runoff 3 10 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures B Comply with ACI 306 1 for cold -weather protection C Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture Toss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq m x h) before and during finishing operations Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing D Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface E Curing Methods. Cure concrete by [moisture curing] [moisture -retaining -cover curing] [curing compound] [or] [a combination of these] as follows: City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 321313-19 07/23/2010 Concrete Paving 1 Moisture Curing. Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a Water b Continuous water -fog spray c Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12 -inch (300 -mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers 2 Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm) and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive Immediately repair any holes or tears occurring during installation or curing period using cover material and waterproof tape 3 Curing Compound Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions Recoat areas that have been subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period 3 11 PAVING TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows: 1 Elevation. 3/4 inch (19 mm) 2 Thickness Plus 3/8 inch (10 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) 3 Surface: Gap below 10 -foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch (13 mm) 4 Alignment of Tie -Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge. 1/2 inch per 12 inches (13 mm per 300 mm) of tie bar 5 Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels. 1 inch (25 mm) 6 Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch (6 mm) 7 Alignment of Dowel -Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge 1/4 inch per 12 inches (6 mm per 300 mm) of dowel 8 Joint Spacing 3 inches (75 mm) 9 Contraction Joint Depth Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus 10 Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus 3 12 PAVEMENT MARKING A. Do not apply pavement -marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect. B Allow concrete paving to cure for a minimum of [28] <Insert number> days and be dry before starting pavement marking C Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. D Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce markings of dimensions indicated with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils (0 4 mm) City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 321313-20 07/23/2010 Concrete Paving 1. Apply graphic symbols and lettering with paint -resistant, die -cut stencils, firmly secured to concrete surface. Mask an extended area beyond edges of each stencil to prevent paint application beyond stencil Apply paint so that it cannot run beneath stencil 2 Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet markings at a rate of 6 Ib/gal (0 72 kg/L) 3 13 WHEEL STOPS A. Install wheel stops in bed of adhesive applied as recommended by manufacturer. B Securely attach wheel stops to paving with not less than two [galvanized -]steel dowels located at one-quarter to one-third points Install dowels in drilled holes in the paving and bond dowels to wheel stop Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop 3 14 PREFORMED TRAFFIC -CALMING DEVICES A. Install preformed speed [bumps] [humps] [cushions] in bed of adhesive applied as recommended by manufacturer for heavy traffic. B. Securely attach preformed speed [bumps] [humps] [cushions] to paving with hardware spaced as recommended by manufacturer for heavy traffic. Recess head of hardware beneath top surface. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections B Testing Services Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements 1 Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each [100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m)] [5000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m)] or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day a When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive -strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used 2. Slump. ASTM C 143/C 143M, one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each days pour of each concrete mixture Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3 Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4 Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 4 deg C) and below and when it is 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5 Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M, cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample 6 Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M, test one specimen at seven days and two specimens at 28 days City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 321313-21 07/23/2010 Concrete Paving a A compressive -strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days C. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive compressive -strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive -strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3 4 MPa) D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing Reports of compressive -strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28 -day tests E Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete F Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. G Concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. H Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements Prepare test and inspection reports 3 16 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect. B Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory paving areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive C Protect concrete paving from damage Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur D Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections END OF SECTION 321313 City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 321313-22 07/23/2010 Concrete Paving EXHIBIT E ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRICAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16060 Grounding 16120 Conductors and Cables 16130 Raceways and Boxes 16140 Wiring Devices 16210 Electrical Utility Service 16280 Power Filters and Conditioners 16410 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 16422 Motor Controllers 16440 Panelboards 16443 Switchboards 16460 Dry Type Transformers 16510 Interior and Exterior Lighting 16910 Programmable Logic Controller Hardware 16940 Control Panels 16950 Radio Telemetry The technical electrical specifications sections listed above have been prepared under the direction of the Professional Engineer, registered in the State of Washington, whose seal appears below: Conley Engineering, Inc. Consulting Electrical Engineers P.O. Box 8326 205 North 40th Avenue, SUITE 201 Yakima, Washington 98908 TEL: (509) 965-9872 FAX: (509) 965-9873 1 ' SECTION 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes. I 1. General requirements for electrical work. I a. Systems Descriptions b. Area classifications 1 c. Submittals d. Records Ie. Coordination B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to 1 1. General Conditions. I 2. Division 2 - Site Work. 3. Division 11 - Equipment. 1 4. Division 13 — Pre -Engineered Concrete Masonry Unit Building 5. Division 15 - Mechanical. 1' C. Installation of systems and equipment is subject to clarification as indicated in reviewed shop drawings and field coordination drawings. 1 1.3 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTIONS A. Provide the labor, materials, and equipment necessary to furnish, install, and I place into operation the power, lighting, instrumentation, control, alarm, and associated electrical systems of this Contract. B. Provide functioning systems in compliance with manufacturer's instructions, 1 performance requirements specified or indicated, and modifications resulting from reviewed shop drawings and field coordinated drawings. I C. Connect motors, instrumentation, controls, meters, and any other electrical device installed or provided as part of the project. ID. Provide complete 480Y/277, and 120/240 volt power distribution systems including raceways, wiring, and power supply to equipment: City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 I 983-1268-400 16010-1 16010_Basic Electrical Requirements E. Provide complete interior lighting system including all lighting equipment, raceways, wiring, and switching equipment: F. Provide complete building exterior lighting system including all lighting fixtures, raceways, wiring, photoelectric and switching equipment. G. Provide complete process control systems including programmable logic controllers (PLCs), individual controllers, monitoring and/or metering equipment, instrumentation equipment, and associated raceways, wiring, control panels, enclosures, and similar items. H. Test, adjust and calibrate equipment and start-up all electrical equipment, instrumentation equipment, and its associated mechanical attachments as necessary to place the project into operation. Mark and identify circuits, equipment, and enclosures with wire numbers, nameplates, and warning signs. 1.4 AREA CLASSIFICATIONS A. Areas of the project are classified as "damp" or "wet" in accordance with Article 100 - Definitions of the NEC. Areas include, but are not limited to below grade vaults, maintenance holes or pull holes. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Outdoor Areas: 1. Those locations on the Project site where the equipment is normally exposed to wind, dust, rain, snow, or similar natural environmental conditions. B. Indoor Areas. 1. Those locations on the Project site where the equipment is normally protected from wind, dust, rain, snow, and similar natural environmental conditions. C. Shop Fabricated: 1. Manufactured or assembled equipment for which a NRTL test procedure has not been established. D. NRTL. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory. E. NEC: National Electrical Code 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When a specific code or standard has not been cited, the applicable codes and standards of the following code -making authorities and standards organizations apply: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16010-2 16010_Basic Electrical Requirements 2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 3. American National Standard Institute (ANSI). 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 5. ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc (ETL). 6. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 7. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 8. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IES). 9. Instrument Society of America (ISA). 10. Joint Industrial Council (JIC). 11. Lightning Protection Institute (LPI). 12. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 13. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 14. Occupational, Health and Safety Administration (OSHA). 15. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). B. In case of conflict or disagreement between codes, standards, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, drawings and specifications, or within either document itself, the more stringent condition governs. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals as soon as practicable after the date of notice to proceed, but prior to purchase, fabrication, or installation of materials or equipment. Make submittals grouped by Specification sections in accordance with Division 1. B. Product Data: 1. Provide manufacturer's product technical data, including, but not limited to: a. Identification of the manufacturer. b. Manufacturer's product descriptive bulletin. c. Current, voltage, nameplate, load, impedance, and other electrical data pertinent to the Project and necessary to assure compliance with the Specifications and Drawings. d. Equipment dimensions. C. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings containing detailed drawings, diagrams and instructions for installing, operating and maintaining the material and equipment proposed for installation in the electrical work. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16010-3 16010_Basic Electrical Requirements 1 See individual Division 16 sections for specific requirements. 2. Prior to submittal, coordinate the electrical equipment (particularly motor control equipment, panelboards, control panels, and instrumentation) and materials, with other applicable equipment and systems of the contract documents, particularly process equipment and systems. Any modifications to the electrical equipment or other equipment, due to the use or submittal of process or other equipment which is different from that specified or shown on the drawings, shall be reflected in the submittal of the electrical equipment so affected. a. Where electrical equipment submitted by the contractor is a different size than the scaled dimensions shown on the plan, section or elevation drawings of the Contract Documents, or requires clearance for ventilation (or other reasons), the Contractor shall mark and submit copies of the Contract Documents showing the actual size of the proposed equipment and its placement drawn to scale in red pencil on the copies. b. Where equipment dimensions, layout, conduit routing, or conductor and conduit quantities, sizes or types are required to be different than indicated on the contract drawings to accommodate the submitted equipment, the submittal shall clearly indicate the required changes (increased sizes, ratings of equipment or devices) and shall note that they are being provided to accommodate the submitted equipment without additional cost. The submittal shall indicate increased ratings, and/or sizes. 3. Provide technical drawings as follows. a. Provide diagrams and drawings similar to the Contract Drawings and named in a similar fashion for all technical drawings submittals. b. Use diagrams and symbols on shop drawings which conform to Joint Industry Conference (JIC) Electrical Standards for Industrial Equipment and/or NEMA, Industrial Control Systems, ANSI and IEEE standards, latest revisions. Prepare drawings on size A, B or D sheets in a format similar to the Contract Documents or other nationally recognized drawing standards. c. Provide electrical elementary wiring diagrams for the electrical control systems showing the wiring of electrical control items, such as starters, control systems, interlocks, switches, and relays. d Provide scaled and dimensioned panel or enclosure face layout drawing, panel/subpanel material of construction, dimensions, and weight; conduit and wiring access locations; and material wiring and terminal block drawings for each control panel. e. Provide schematic interconnection diagrams and/or Process Instrumentation Drawings (PID) diagrams for each separate control system or control panel. Each control diagram shall show a schematic representation of process equipment and locations of City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16010-4 16010_Basic Electrical Requirements switches, meters, automatic valves, and indicators, controllers and recorders. Correct operating settings and ranges for each control instrument shall be marked on these diagrams. D. Clearly indicate on submittals that equipment or material is NRTL listed or is constructed utilizing listed or recognized components. Where a NRTL standard has not been established clearly identify that no NRTL standard exists for that equipment. E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See specific sections for information specific to each type of equipment which is to be included in O&M manuals. 2. Provide preliminary manuals to the Engineer for review in the quantities indicated in Division 1 no later than when the electrical equipment is shipped to the job site. Drawings and Bill of Materials included in preliminary manuals shall show "as shipped" wiring and components. Provide final manuals with Record Drawings of the work upon completion of the work, folded and punched for insertion into the manual after they are reviewed by the Engineer. 3. Manuals for the electrical system consist of 3 -ring binders labeled with the job name and the Contractor's name with tab dividers for each major type of equipment. a. Provide manufacturer's installation, operation, maintenance, and service information for each item of equipment furnished under Division 16. b. Assemble and index each section listing the contents individually on the tab divider for that section. c. Compile a spare parts list and a suppliers index for each section and assemble in the section provided. d. Assemble records of tests, measurements, and calibration settings made for each device. Provide Record ("As Built") Drawings of the work upon completion of the work. Fold, punch, and insert these records into the manual after they are reviewed by the Engineer. e. Include a 4 disc half binder page, Univenture or equal after the table of contents. Include on CD -R, DVD -R, or DVD+R media all PDF files used as sources to print items included with the O&M manual. Place the PDF files within folders named for the corresponding section of the O&M manual and named to sort alphabetically in the same order as the O&M manual contents (e.g. "Tab 04 — Motor Controllers"). Name the PDF files to describe their contents (e g. "PLC User Manual — Allen Bradley 1100.pdf'). Author the disc media in a single finalized session using the ISO 9660 format with Joliet extensions. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16010-5 16010_Basic Electrical Requirements 1.8 RECORDS A. Maintain and annotate on the job at all times a separate set of Record Drawings in accordance with the General Conditions. Show changes from the Contract Documents plan drawings including: routing of hidden raceways, stubouts, actual fixture and equipment locations, equipment sizes and dimensions and building or structure outline changes. Review the drawings with the Engineer as the work progresses whenever requested. At the end of the project, forward to the Engineer a complete set of drawings marked in red pencil in a manner consistent with the Contract Drawings, indicating the changes made on the job. Equipment furnished under this Contract for use on future work and all concealed materials, including conduits, shall be dimensioned, on the record drawings, from visible and permanent building features B. Record voltage, current, and megohmeter and ground ohmer resistance test measurements made on the electrical work, the trip units, fuses, and overload relay elements installed in the equipment. Record the setting of all pressure, flow, level, and similar instrumentation and control devices. When the project is operating, turn over these records to the Engineer. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate and schedule connecting electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. B. Coordinate installing electrical identifying devices and markings prior to installing acoustical ceilings and similar finishes that conceal such items. C. Coordinate the electrical work with the requirements of equipment provided under other Divisions. Portions of the electrical design are based upon the equipment specified in other Divisions. Where modifications to the specified electrical system or systems are required to accommodate actual electrical requirements of equipment which is specified under other Divisions of the Contract but which has electrical requirements different from those specified for the equipment, make modifications to the electrical system or systems required to accommodate the equipment, and pay for all such changes. No additional payment or "extras" are allowed for changes required to accommodate substitutions or changes proposed by the Contractor. D. Where changes in the work, or substitutions in material or equipment specified under this Division are proposed, ensure that sizes, weights, openings, etc., are provided that do not require changes in the work outside this Division. If changes to work outside this Division are required to accommodate substitutions or changes proposed by the Contractor, submit complete descriptions of these changes for approval by the Engineer, and pay for all such changes. No additional payment or "extras" are allowed for changes required to accommodate substitutions or changes proposed by the Contractor. E. Coordinate the installation of electrical equipment with other trades: 1. Accurately locate outlets, switches, control stations, panelboards and similar devices with respect to equipment, doors, partitions, cabinets and the finished work of others. Verify dimensions and locations with the civil, City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16010-6 16010_Basic Electrical Requirements structural, mechanical, and general Drawings, shop drawings/suppliers and trades. 2. Arrange for the building in of anchors, supports, sleeves, or other equipment and materials during concrete pours, framing, precasting or other structure construction. 3. Where equipment cannot be built-in during construction, arrange for chases, slots, sleeves, box -outs, openings, etc., as required to allow installation of equipment after structure construction is complete. 4. Where penetration of completed construction is required, obtain approval from structural Engineer for penetration (drilling, cutting, shooting, punching) of structural components prior to penetrating the component. 5. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. F Coordinate electrical work with work under other Divisions. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Cooperate in locating equipment to avoid interference with work of others, and plan this work to harmonize with the work of other trades so that all work may proceed as expeditiously as possible. No extras are allowed because of moving work required to avoid interference with work of other trades or contractors. G. Coordinate connecting electrical circuits to components furnished under other Divisions. Coordinate the location of motors, switches, panel connections and other points of connection with the equipment manufacturers or vendors prior to conduit installation, and route circuits to the actual connection point. Remove and reinstall conduit, outlet boxes and other electrical connections, even if removal and reinstallation of building materials is necessary, where electrical connections are not made to the appropriate equipment location. H. Coordinate installing electrical identification after completion of finishing where identification is applied to field -finished surfaces. I. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors where electrical items requiring access are concealed by finished surfaces. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Ensure that equipment is not used as steps, ladders, scaffolds, platforms, or for storage - either inside or on top of enclosures. B. Protect nameplates on electrical equipment from defacing. C. Repair, restore, or replace damaged, corroded and rejected items at no additional cost to the Owner. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16010-7 16010_Basic Electrical Requirements 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to individual Division 16 sections. 1 Provide equipment, which is of a similar type, made by one manufacturer throughout the project unless otherwise noted in the Specifications. B. Submit requests for substitution in writing. 2.2 APPROVALS AND LABELING A. Provide material or equipment approved and labeled for the purpose for which it is to be used by a nationally recognized electrical testing laboratory (NRTL) or other organization acceptable to the State of Washington Department of Labor and Industries. 1. Where NRTL test procedures have been established for the product type, provide electrical equipment approved under that procedure and bearing the NRTL label. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide new materials and equipment which are standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such equipment. Provide similar items of equipment of the same quality from a single manufacturer. Where systems are specified, provide components of the system from a single manufacturer. B. Trade names and catalog numbers may be used in the Drawings or Specifications to establish quality standards and basis of design. 1. Other listed manufacturers in the applicable specification sections with equal equipment may be acceptable. 2. If no other manufacturer is listed then any manufacturer of equal equipment may be acceptable. C. Where voltage, current, power, temperature or other ratings are specified that do not correspond to standard ratings of the manufacturer selected by the Contractor, furnish the next rating level which increases the capacity of the device or material in question. D. Furnish materials, devices, equipment or supplies of materials that are inherently non -corrosive or are coated or covered in a manner, acceptable to the Engineer, which renders them non -corrosive. Material that may cause rusting, bleeding, or streaking on a building surface shall not be used. E. Provide materials and equipment which do not contain polychlorinated biphenyls, asbestos or other hazardous or detrimental materials. F. Fabricate equipment or devices in the field equivalent in every respect to manufactured items used for the same purpose Use electrical devices and enclosures which are NRTL listed and labeled or recognized. Where cutting, City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16010-8 16010_Basic Electrical Requirements drilling, grinding, or similar actions are performed on galvanized or painted metal, regalvanize or repaint, respectively, to match original finish. G. Equipment Dimensions and Clearances: 1. Dimensions indicated for electrical equipment and dimensions indicated for the installation of electrical equipment are restrictive dimensions. Verify that equipment will fit within the indicated locations and spaces. Do not use equipment that impinges upon required clearances, reduces actual clearance, or exceeds the indicated dimensions. a. Except as approved in writing by the Engineer. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Make arrangements for and pay for necessary permits, licenses, and inspections. B. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code, National Electrical Safety Code, and applicable state and local regulations and ordinances. C. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the NECA "NEIS" (National Electric Installation Standards). D. Equipment Access: 1. Install equipment so it is readily accessible for operation and maintenance. 2. Access to equipment shall not be blocked or concealed by conduits, supporting devices, boxes, or other items. 3. Do not install electrical equipment such that it interferes with normal maintenance requirements of other equipment. E. Equipment shall be installed plumb, square and true with the building construction and shall be securely fastened. F Install materials and equipment in a manner, location and construction that does not produce galvanic action or any other materials corroding or eroding action. Equipment fabricated from aluminum shall not be placed in direct contact with earth or concrete. G. Outdoor wall -mounted equipment and indoor equipment mounted on earth or water bearing walls shall be provided with corrosion -resistant spacers to maintain 1/4 IN separation between the equipment and the wall. H. Screen or seal all raceways or other openings into equipment to prevent the entrance of moisture, rodents and insects. Drawings indicate the approximate location and arrangement of electrical equipment and the approximate location of other equipment requiring electrical City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16010-9 16010_Basic Electrical Requirements work. The general arrangement of panelboards, outlets and other equipment is diagrammatic and approximate as to locations. To avoid interference with structural members and equipment of other trades, it may be necessary to adjust the intended location of electrical equipment. Where minor changes are required because of structural or finish conditions or for the convenience of the Owner, provide such changes without additional expense to the Owner. Unless specifically dimensioned or detailed, the Contractor may, at his discretion, make minor adjustments in equipment location without obtaining the Engineer's approval. Minor adjustments are defined as a distance not to exceed. 1. 1 FT at grade, floor and roof level in any direction in the horizontal plane. 2. 1 FT for equipment other than lighting at ceiling level in any direction in the horizontal plane. 3. 1 FT for lighting fixtures at ceiling level in any direction in the horizontal plane. 4. 1 FT on walls in a horizontal direction within the vertical plane 5. Changes in equipment location exceeding those defined above require the Engineer's approval. 6. Particular attention shall be paid to door swings, piping, radiation, ductwork, and structural steel: a. In general, waste and vent lines and large pipe mains and ductwork shall be given priority for the locations and space shown. b. Electrical lighting fixtures shall, in general, be given priority for ceiling space. c. No additional compensation will be allowed for the moving of misplaced outlets, wiring, or equipment. 3.2 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate equipment after completion of work. B. Provide assistance to the Engineer during the demonstration or observation of equipment by operating devices and equipment, opening enclosures for inspection, checking record drawing information, and similar tasks, as necessary in the Engineer's judgment to verify all work provided. END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16010-10 16010_Basic Electrical Requirements SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Supporting devices for electrical components. 2. Electrical enclosures. 3. Electrical identification. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Cleaning and finish touchup painting. 6. Testing 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item below according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7, or a full member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA). 1. Testing Agency Field Supervision: Use persons currently certified by NETA or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies, or equal, to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. B. Comply with NEC for components and installation. C. Listing and Labeling Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed and Labeled". As defined in the NEC, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16050-1 16050 -Basic Materials and Methods 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, handle, and store electrical materials and equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions B. Provide dry, heated storage for materials and equipment intended to be installed indoors and for equipment that requires electric heaters to mitigate water condensation and like hazards. C. Ensure that equipment is not used as steps, ladders, scaffolds, platforms, or for storage - either inside or on top of enclosures. D. Protect materials and equipment from damage, corrosion, or disfiguring, protect nameplates on electrical equipment from defacing. Repair, restore, or replace damaged, corroded and rejected items at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Provide channel and angle support systems, hangers, anchors, sleeves, brackets, fabricated items, and fasteners for secure support of electrical components 1. Material. a. Outdoors, Wet and Damp locations. Stainless Steel. b. Other locations: Steel, except as otherwise indicated, protected from corrosion with zinc coating, cadmium plating, or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative finish or inherent material characteristics. B. Conduit clamps: one hole or beam clamps 1. Rigid Steel Conduit. cast iron clamps with cast iron "foot". 2. EMT: stamped steel clamps C. Anchors. cadmium plated or galvanized steel in dry areas; stainless steel or hot dipped galvanized steel in damp or wet areas. 1. Lag screws or Type A tapping screws for wood. 2 Toggle bolts with springhead for light loads in masonry. 3. Thru-bolt with fender washers for heavy loads in masonry. 4. Toggle bolts with springhead for hollow partitions. 5. Self drilling anchors with threaded studs for concrete. 6 Clamps or U -bolts for structural steel. 7. Self drilling anchors with extension rods for hollow tile over concrete. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16050-2 16050 -Basic Materials and Methods 8. Hanger rods: 1/4 -inch diameter or larger threaded steel, except as otherwise indicated. D. Sleeves: 1. PVC, schedule 40. 2. 0.0276 -inch or heavier galvanized sheet steel, round tube, closed with welded longitudinal joint. 3. ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. 4. Cast iron, with weep rings. 2.2 ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURES A. Enclosures for Use with Electrical Equipment: 1. Standards. a NEMA ICS -6, Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. b. UL 508, Industrial Control Equipment. 2. Provide NEMA enclosure types as indicated on the contract documents. Where the enclosure type is not indicated on the contract documents provide enclosures as follows. a NEMA 12: Use in unclassified (non -hazardous and non -corrosive) indoor locations which are neither wet nor damp. b. NEMA 3R. Use with HVAC equipment in wet or outdoor locations. B. Shop or Factory Finishes: 1. Exteriors of painted enclosures shall be ANSI gray. 2. Interiors of painted enclosures shall be white. 2.3 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Manufacturer's Standard Products: Where more than one type is listed for a specified application, selection is Contractor's option, but provide single type for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NEC and these Specifications. B. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables. Self- adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 inch wide. C. Underground Line Warning Tape. Permanent, bright -colored, continuous - printed, vinyl tape with the following features: 1. Size: Not less than 4 mils thick by 6 inches wide. a. Compounded for permanent direct -burial service. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16050-3 16050 -Basic Materials and Methods D. Tape Markers. Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters. E. Color -Coding Cable Ties. Type 6/6 nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme F Engraved, Plastic -Laminated Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate punched for mechanical fasteners 1/16 -inch minimum thick for signs up to 20 sq. in., 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. Engraved legend in white letters on black face. G. Fasteners for Plastic -Laminated and Metal Signs: Self -tapping stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel No. 10/32 machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. H. Wire markers: machine printed, black ink, alpha -numerical identifiers on yellow polyolefin shrink tubing Kroy K4350 Shrink Tube, or approved equal. 2.4 TOUCHUP PAINT A. For Equipment: Provided by equipment manufacturer and selected to match equipment finish. B. For Non -equipment Surfaces: Matching type and color of undamaged, existing adjacent finish. C For Galvanized Surfaces Zinc -rich paint recommended by item manufacturer. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install the equipment and materials in a neat and workmanlike manner employing workmen skilled in the particular trade and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and industry standards. Maintain adequate supervision of the work by a person in charge at the site during any time that work under this division is in process or when necessary for coordination with other work. B. Install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated. Mount enclosures for individual units at fifty-four inches above floors to centerline of controls. C. Install items level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, except where otherwise indicated. D. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. E. Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, securely fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware to the building structure. Attach enclosures with a minimum of three fasteners, and more if the manufacturer so recommends. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16050-4 16050 -Basic Materials and Methods 1. Attach enclosures mounted on equipment with machine screws or clamps as required. Do not drill equipment frames or sheets without permission of supplier/manufacturer or the Engineer. 2. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps, or any other items. 3. Select fasteners so the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of the proof -test load. 4. Stand equipment off wall surfaces a minimum of one-quarter inch where enclosures are mounted on walls in wet areas (outdoors, below grades, etc.) with neoprene, fiberglass or plastic shim washers. F. Give right of way to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. G. Sleeves: Install for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls, except where core -drilled holes are used. Install for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire -rated gypsum walls and of all other fire -rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls. H. Make all penetrations of electrical work through walls and roofs water and weather -tight. I. Install concrete pads and bases according to requirements of Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete " J. Firestopping. Apply to cable and raceway penetrations of fire -rated floor and wall assemblies. Perform firestopping to reestablish the original fire -resistance rating of the assembly at the penetration. 3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING METHODS A. Support electrical equipment, devices and materials from framing members or structure with sufficient clearance for maintaining and servicing. 1. Provide backing plates, and/or framing material to support equipment, devices and materials which are located between the framing members which are part of the building or facility structure. 2. Provide metal structure fabricated of structural shapes such as C -channel or tubing for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers, and other devices except where components are mounted directly to structural features of adequate strength. B. Raceway Supports. Comply with NFPA 70 and the following requirements. 1. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selecting and installing supports. 2. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U bolts, clamps, attachments, and other City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16050-5 16050 -Basic Materials and Methods 1 hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods 111and conduits. 3. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket -type hangers. 4. Spare Capacity: Size supports for multiple conduits so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in the future. 1 5. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable iron pipe hangers or clamps 1 6 In vertical runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals. 1 7. Use double nuts or jam nuts with regular nuts on threaded rods and bolts. 8. Trim rod ends to within 1/4 inch after installation of last nut, clamp or 1 similar hardware smooth cut ends or install cap nut. C Fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware securely to the building or 1 structure. Provide all necessary anchoring devices and supports: 1. Use supports as detailed on the Drawings and as specified: 1 a. Where not detailed on the Drawings or specified, use supports and anchoring devices rated for the equipment load and as recommended by the manufacturer. b. Base rating and size of supports and anchoring devices on dimensions and weights verified from approved equipment submittals. Select anchoring devices, fasteners, and supports so the load applied to any anchoring device, fastener, or support does not exceed 25 percent of the proof -test load. 1 2. Attach floor mounted enclosures with a minimum of four fasteners, and more if the manufacturer so recommends. Locate fasteners as close as practical to the corners of the enclosure. Install outdoor slab or pad mounted equipment with a HDPE, EPR, or bitumastic sheet under the portion of the enclosure which rests or bears on the concrete 3. Do not cut, or weld to, building structural members. 4 Do not mount safety switches and external equipment to other equipment enclosures, unless enclosure mounting surface is properly braced to accept mounting of external equipment. D. Provide concrete foundations or pads required for electrical equipment: 1 1. Floor -mounted equipment shall be mounted on a 4 IN high concrete housekeeping pad except the concrete base shall be shortened in height by the thickness of the channel base when equipment is provided with channel bases such as typically provided with motor control centers and switchboards. Pad shall be poured on top of the finished floor or slab. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16050-6 16050 -Basic Materials and Methods E. Install hangers, inserts, supports, and anchors prior to installation of fireproofing. F. Miscellaneous Supports: Install metal structure fabricated of structural shapes such as C -channel or tubing for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers, and other devices except where components are mounted directly to structural features of adequate strength. G. Support raceway, equipment, and devices from framing members or structure with sufficient clearance for maintaining and servicing. Provide backing plates, and/or framing material to support equipment, devices and materials which are located between the framing members which are part of the building or facility structure. H. Cable supports - provide cable ties and straps for clamping, tying, securing and banding wires and cables in all junction boxes, panelboards and terminal cabinets. Support each circuit independently; group phases of three phase circuits. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labels where indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations indicated on the Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout the Project. C. Self -Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before applying. D. Tag or label power circuits for future connection and circuits in raceways and enclosures with other circuits. Identify source and circuit numbers in each cabinet, pull box, junction box, and outlet box. Color coding may be used for voltage and phase indication. E. Identify Paths of Underground Electrical Lines: During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker located directly above power and communication lines. Where multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope do not exceed an overall width of 16 inches, use a single line marker. F. Provide engraved phenolic name plates (white with black background) on equipment enclosures giving the name and circuit identification of the enclosed device/equipment in one-quarter inch letters. G. For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules with explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker. H. Provide electrical danger, caution, warning or safety instruction signs in accordance with applicable building Code. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16050-7 16050 -Basic Materials and Methods 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the trades involved. B. Repair disturbed surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. 3.5 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING A. Clean dirt and debris from all surfaces Thoroughly vacuum the interior of enclosures to remove dirt and debris. B. Replace nameplates damaged during installation. C. Apply touch-up paint as required to repair scratches, etc. Field paint as necessary. Thoroughly clean damaged areas and provide primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive coats. 3.6 TESTING A. Testing shall be performed by a person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association. B. Additional testing requirements specific to other sections are specified in those sections. C. Test electrical equipment after installation but before it is energized and placed in service. Report all test results in writing. Where tests disclose a defect in the work, rework or repair work at no additional expense to the Owner and retest to confirm the rework or repair until retesting confirms that the defect has been corrected Test in accordance with the manufacturer's installation and testing instructions and the applicable electrical standards (i.e., NEMA, IEEE, ISA, ANSI, or other) for the class of equipment. 1. Test the equipment and electrical circuits for proper connection, continuity, and absence of undesirable shorts and grounds. Test wire and cable installation, when complete and seventy-two hours prior to energization of the system. Check for continuity, visual damage, marking, and proper phase sequence before performing insulation testing. 2 Megger equipment bus work, switches, breakers and circuits phase -to - phase and phase -to -ground disconnecting and reconnecting equipment which cannot be meggered as required. The minimum acceptable steady-state value is 50 megohms. Record ambient temperature and humidity during testing. 3. Test operation, calibration, and settings of the meters, relays and indicating devices. 4. Test all operating controls for proper operation. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16050-8 16050 -Basic Materials and Methods 5. Test auxiliary equipment, i.e., heaters, thermostats, lights, and illuminated indicating devices and lamps, and audible alarm devices which are an integral part of equipment to verify that they function properly. 6. Adjust installed equipment for proper operation of all electrical and mechanical components. 7. Take load readings on each panelboard after loads are connected. Record these measurements to give the maximum reading for each phase and neutral obtained with lighting, appliances, motors, and other loads, connected to the panels in service. 8. Check fuses with an ohmmeter; Ring out wiring and busing; Check operation of control and safety interlocks; Check grounding of potential transformers, current transformers, lightning and surge arresters, Check control connections at terminal blocks, relays, meters, switches, etc. 9. Test motor driven equipment motors before energization. Insulation test shall consist of megohmeter check phase—to—ground, per IEEE Standard 43 and polarization index test manufacturer's recommendations. a. Perform load tests of each motor and prepare a written report of the findings showing the following 1) Nameplate Ratings (horsepower), (speed), (voltage), (phase), (ampere rating of motor at full load). 2) Measured Load in amperes on each phase b. For load tests for each pump/blower/process equipment motor 1) Note the operating conditions at the time of the test. 2) Note the suction and discharge conditions (pressure, temperature, humidity, where such conditions affect load). 10. After installation, all equipment shall be tested as recommended by the manufacturer. D. Rework or repair equipment which performs unsatisfactorily during or as a result of testing at no additional expense to the Owner. Replace equipment and systems found inoperative or defective and retest: 1. If equipment or system fails retest, replace it with products which conform with Contract Documents. 2. Continue remedial measures and retests until satisfactory results are obtained. 3. Remedial measures and retests will be done at no cost to the Owner. E. Demonstrate to the Owner that the electrical installation is working by operating all electrical systems and equipment. Simulate control and emergency conditions, artificially where necessary, for complete system tests. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16050-9 16050 -Basic Materials and Methods END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16050-10 16050 -Basic Materials and Methods SECTION 16060 GROUNDING 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment and basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other Sections of these Specifications. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. 1. Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables" for requirements for grounding conductors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General. Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Field tests and observation reports certified by the testing organization and indicating and interpreting the test reports for compliance with performance requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications. A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7, or a full member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA). 1. Testing Agency Field Supervision: Use persons currently certified by NETA, or equal, to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. B. Comply with NEC. C. Comply with UL 467. D. Listing and Labeling. Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled As defined in the NEC, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16060-1 16060_Grounding 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS A. Governing Requirements. Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantities indicated are in excess of NEC requirements, the more stringent requirements and the greater size, rating, and quantity indications govern. 2.2 WIRE AND CABLE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables." Conform to NEC Table 8, except as otherwise indicated, for conductor properties, including stranding. B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green color insulation. C. Grounding -Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable, bare or varnish coated. D. Antenna and Antenna Mast Grounding: solid copper, bare or varnish coated E. Ground Rods 3/4 inch diameter, 10 foot long, copper clad steel. 2.3 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS A. Pressure Connectors. High -conductivity -plated units. B. Bolted Clamps. Heavy-duty type. C. Exothermic -Welded Connections Provided in kit form and selected per manufacturer's written instructions for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items. Burndy, Thermoweld, or Cadweld. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Equipment Grounding Conductors. Comply with NEC Article 250 for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, except where specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NEC are indicated 1. Install insulated equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the items below. a. Service and Feeders. 1) Bond the conductor full size to the equipment to which the circuit connects and to the raceway if it is metallic. b Single-phase motor or appliance branch circuits. c. Three-phase motor or appliance branch circuits. d. Flexible raceway runs. 2. Nonmetallic Raceways. Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16060-2 16060_Grounding cables. Bond the conductor at each end to grounded metallic raceway or equipment. B. Separately Derived Systems: Where NEC requires grounding, ground according to NEC Paragraph 250-30. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Ground electrical systems and equipment according to NEC requirements, except where Drawings or Specifications exceed NEC requirements. B. Ground the secondary electrical system to the building structure, metallic piping system and supplemental grounding electrodes. Coordinate grounding connections made to the water system with the mechanical work and install bonding jumpers wherever deemed necessary. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. General. Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. 1. Use electroplated or hot -tin -coated materials to assure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. B. Exothermic -Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections, except those at test wells. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Clean all varnish, oxide, scale, concrete, etc. from conductors before firing joints. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. C. Equipment Grounding -Wire Terminations. Make the grounding conductor connections to motors or equipment ten horsepower and above, or twenty amperes and above, with conductor termination and a 5/16 inch minimum bolt tapped to the motor frame or equipment housing. Ground connection to smaller motors and equipment may be made by fastening the conductor termination to a connection box. D. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations. Where metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a metallic, insulating grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at both entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, except as otherwise indicated City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16060-3 16060_Grounding E Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. Where these requirements are not available, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. F Compression -Type Connections. Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by manufacturer of connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Testing Agency: Engage an independent electrical testing organization to perform tests described below. B. Tests: 1. Subject the completed grounding system to a megger test at each service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. Measure ground resistance not less than 2 full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests by the 2 - point method according to IEEE 81. 2. Equipment grounding connections shall be checked by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer with a Biddle ground ohmmeter. C. Maximum grounding resistance values are as follows: 1. Main Service (grounding electrode): 3 ohms. D. Excessive Ground Resistance: Where resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Engineer. Check connections of affected equipment and conductors. Replace, repair, or correct defective connections or conductors. Provide additional ground rods where the grounding electrode resistance is greater than specified Revise and retest until resistance is within specifications. E. Report. Prepare test reports, certified by the testing organization, of ground resistance at each test location. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16060-4 16060_Grounding SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and Tess. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General. Submit each item in this article according to the conditions of the contract. 1. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. 2. Product data: for low voltage instrument wire, VFD cable. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: Utilize an independent testing agency meeting OSHA criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories, Title 29, Part 1907; or which is a full - member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by NETA, or equal, to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. B. Listing and Labeling: Provide wires and cables specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NEC, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. C. Comply with NEC. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING WIRES AND CABLES A. UL -listed building wires and cables with conductor material, insulation type, cable construction, and rating as specified in Part 3 "Wire and Insulation Applications" Article. B. Thermoplastic Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 5. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16120-1 16120 Conductors and Cables C. Cross -Linked Polyethylene Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 7. D. Ethylene Propylene Rubber Insulation Material. Comply with NEMA WC 8. E. Conductor Material: Copper. F. Stranding: 1. Class B for power applications. 2. Class C for control applications. G. Size and Type: 1 Solid or stranded conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller gauge power circuits, 2. Stranded conductor for larger gauge than No. 10 AWG power circuits. 3. Stranded conductors for control circuits. 4. Grounding conductors. solid conductor in sizes No. 6 AWG and smaller gauge; stranded in No. 4 AWG and larger gauge. H. Cords' Type SO, size #14 or larger. 2.2 INSTRUMENTATION AND SPECIALTY WIRE A. Low voltage instrument wire. 600 volt rated, multi -conductor cable with overall neoprene or PVC jacket. Individual conductors PVC or polyethylene insulated, with or without nylon overcoat. 1. Unshielded instrument cable Belden 9486 (18 gauge), 9488 (14 gauge) or equal, Alpha or NEC. 2. Shielded single pair instrument wire (2/C#18) Belden 9341 or equal, Alpha or NEC. B. VFD Cable: Low voltage, shielded power cable. Three conductor copper cable rated 600 volt, with crosslinked thermosetting polyethylene insulation on each conductor, three bare grounding conductors (one in each interstice), with a corrugated copper shield and overall PVC jacket. Tamaqua Cable Products VFD Power Cable, or equal. C. Specialty wire. As specified in the section describing the system it serves. 2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Provide UL -listed, factory -fabricated wiring connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. B. Conductor Taps: 1. Solid Conductors size 18 through 10 AWG: Twist on insulated spring connectors. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16120-2 16120 Conductors and Cables 2. Stranded Conductors size 18 through 6 AWG: insulated, solid barrel, crimp type plated copper alloy connectors. 3. Conductors size 4 AWG and larger: plated copper alloy compression splicing sleeves installed by high pressure compression tools and insulated with heat shrink Raychem sleeves. 4. Outdoors or wet areas: wire splice kits, epoxy resin, hardener, and mold. 3M Scotchcast or equal. C. Terminations. suitable for 75 degree Celsius rated copper conductor. 1. Service and feeder circuits: compression indent barrel connectors with one or two hole spade lug ends. 2. Conductor size 18 through 10 AWG: insulated, solid copper barrel, crimp type, plated copper alloy spade tongue terminal, made for the wire size and terminal on which they are installed and crimped with an approved plier or tool for the connector. 3. Conductor size 8 AWG and larger compression, indent, solid copper barrel, one or two hole lugs. D. Motor connections: 1. Less than 30 HP. insulated, solid barrel, crimp type, ring tongue plated copper alloy. 2. 30 HP and greater. insulated, mechanical tap blocks, with removeable port and screws. ILSCO, or equal. 2.4 INSULATING MATERIALS A. Fillers: 3M Scotchfill, or equal. B. Tape. 7 mil vinyl plastic tape, Scotch 33+, or equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine raceways and building finishes to receive wires and cables for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of wires and cables. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 WIRE AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Type USE/RHW/RHH, in raceway. B. Branch circuits: Motors type USE/RHW/RHH others THHN/THWN or XHHW, in raceway. Type THHN/THWN solid may be used for 120 volt lighting and receptacle branch circuits in sizes #12 AWG and #10 AWG City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16120-3 16120 Conductors and Cables C. Grounding Conductors (other than equipment grounding conductors). bare copper with varnish coat. D Equipment Grounding Conductors. Same type insulation and conductor as the circuit conductors supplying the equipment to be grounded. E. Class 1 and 2 Control Circuits: Type MTW/THWN, size #14 AWG or larger, in raceway. F. Instrumentation Circuits. Shielded or unshielded instrument cable, as indicated on the Contract Documents. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install wires and cables in raceway system, according to manufacturer's written instructions and NECA's "Standard of Installation", after raceway system is complete, and following "Examination" article of this section. B. Provide individual neutral conductors for each circuit. Common neutral conductors for multi branch circuits are not permitted unless specifically shown on the drawings. C. Install service, feeder, and motor circuits continuously without splices from equipment terminal to equipment terminal or motor lead. 120 and 277 volt single phase branch circuits may be spliced at taps. Do not splice circuits at other locations without written permission from the Engineer. D. Install instrumentation and control circuits continuously except for termination on terminal strips in control panels or terminal cabinets. E. Color code conductors as follows. 1. Grounding conductors: Green. 2. 480/277 volt, three phase systems. a. Phase A - brown b. Phase B - orange c Phase C - yellow d Neutral - gray 3. 208Y/120 volt, three phase systems. a. Phase A - black b. Phase B — red c. Phase C - blue d. Neutral - white City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16120-4 16120 Conductors and Cables 4. Use wire with insulation of required color for conductors of #8 AWG and smaller. For wire larger than No.8 AWG which is not available in specified colors, use self-adhesive, wrap-around cloth type markers of solid colors to code the conductors. When conductors are marked in this manner, mark each conductor at all accessible locations such as panelboards, junction boxes, pullboxes, auxiliary gutters, outlets, switches, and control centers. 5. Do not use white or green color for any power, lighting, or control conductor not intended for neutral or grounding purposes. a. Low voltage control circuits, or 18 AWG or smaller control conductors, may use green or white singly or as part of a trace color in addition to the base color. 6. Use control wiring of colors different than power wiring or supplied with a trace of color in addition to the basic color of the insulation. Use the same color scheme throughout a given system for any control or signal wires performing the same function. 7 Connect circuit conductors of the same color to the same phase throughout the installation. Viewing all equipment from the front, make connections so phase color sequence is in the same order as that for panelboards, switchboards, motor control centers, etc. F. Install wiring to equipment neutral and grounding blocks on the bottom or furthest back row first. Leave unconnected blocks accessible for future neutral or grounding connections. G. Leave six inches or more of free conductor at each connected device or equipment terminal and nine inches of free conductors at each unconnected outlet. Tape free ends of conductors at unconnected outlets and coil neatly in outlet box. H. Install wires neatly in enclosures. Bend or form wires in neat runs from conduits to terminals. Arrange wires so that they may be grouped by conduit or function in the enclosure. Install cable ties and straps to support and bundle wires in enclosures. Arrange wires to allow wire tags and numbers to be easily read without bending or flexing wiring. I. Install grounding conductors in non-metallic raceways, and in flexible conduit connecting to mechanical equipment. J. Pulling Conductors. 1. Make all cable pulls by hand. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire/cable grips, or wrapping extra conductor into an eye, that will not damage cables or raceway. 2. Use manufacturer -approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16120-5 16120 Conductors and Cables and sidewall pressure values. Install pullboxes where necessary to prevent exceeding manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Cut cable or conductor ends off after pulling and clean all lubricant and/or pulling compound from conductors before terminating. K. Support cables according to Section 16050 "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." L. Seal around cables penetrating fire -rated elements with approved fire -stopping materials. M. Identify wires and cables according to Section 16050 "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 1 At each connection, except at motors, tag for phase rotation. 2. At each motor tag for winding lead numbers. Make all phase rotation changes for motor direction changes at the motor to maintain correct color phase sequence in equipment. 3. In each enclosure or box where more than one ungrounded power conductor is spliced or connected, tag for panelboard identification and pole number. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Use the proper high pressure compression tool for terminating indent type compression connectors or terminations on conductors of size #8 AWG or larger gauge. Use an approved pliers or tool for crimping connectors for conductors of size #10 AWG or smaller gauge. B. Make splices or bolted connections with filler, and tape that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced Insulate to same thickness as connectors being spliced or connected. C. Wiring at Outlets. Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack. D. Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer, and in compliance with other Sections of Division 16. E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. F. Make connections so phase color sequence at equipment, when viewed from the front, is in the same order as that for panelboards, switchboards, or other distribution equipment. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality -control testing. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16120-6 16120 Conductors and Cables B. Test installation of wires and cables before electrical circuitry has been energized. 1. Procedures. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Remove and replace conductors with visible damage on conductor insulation ends due to installation in an incomplete or damaged conduit system such as, but not limited to, missing bushings or burrs on conduit ends. C. Correct malfunctioning conductors, cables, and connections at Project site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new materials and retest. END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16120-7 16120 Conductors and Cables SECTION 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. 1 Raceways include the following: a. RMC b. PVC coated, rigid steel conduits. c EMT. d. FMC. e. LFMC. f. RNC. 2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets include the following a. Device boxes. b. Outlet boxes. c Pull and junction boxes. d Cabinets and hinged -cover enclosures. B. Related Sections include the following 1. Section 16050 "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for raceway and box supports. 2. Section 16140 "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes. 3. Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables" for conductors installed in raceways and boxes. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16130-1 16130_Raceways and Boxes C. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. D. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. E. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General. Submit each item in this article according to the conditions of the contract. 1. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, hinged -cover enclosures, and cabinets. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Listing and Labeling. Provide raceways and boxes specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NEC, Article 100. 2 Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. B. Comply with NECA's "Standard of Installation." C. Comply with NEC. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways and boxes with other construction elements to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. RMC: 1. Conduit: Hot dipped galvanized steel with threaded ends meeting ANSI C80.1. 2. Couplings unsplit, NPT threaded steel cylinders with galvanizing equal to the conduit. 3. Nipples: same as conduit, factory made through eight inches, no running threads. B. PVC -Coated Rigid Steel Conduit and Fittings. NEMA RN 1. C. EMT: 1. Conduit: Galvanized steel tubing meeting ANSI C80.3. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16130-2 16130_Raceways and Boxes 2. Couplings. steel, cast iron, or malleable iron compression type employing a split, corrugated ring and tightening nut, with integral bushings and locknuts No indent or setscrew type. D. FMC. 1. Conduit. flexible, galvanized steel convolutions forming a continuous raceway. 2 Connectors. galvanized steel or galvanized malleable iron, screw in ferrule, approved for grounding. E. LFMC. 1. Conduit. flexible, galvanized steel convolutions forming a continuous raceway, covered by a liquid tight PVC layer. Electri-Flex Type LA or American Sealtite, Type UA, or approved equal. 2. Connectors. a. All locations: 1) Galvanized steel or galvanized malleable iron, screw in ferrule which covers the end of the conduit inside and out, insulated throat, approved for grounding Provide with gland nut with integral ground lug for connectors to motors rated 10 horsepower and larger. F. Fittings. NEMA FB 1, compatible with conduit/tubing materials. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 or 80 PVC. B. Fittings NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or conduit/tubing type and material. 2.3 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES A. Concealed in dry (not wet, corrosive, or hazardous) Locations* Stamped steel, deep drawn one piece (without welds or tab connections), galvanized, with knockouts for conduit or connector entrance, meeting NEMA OS 1, and with plaster or extension rings to suit construction and application. B. Outdoors, below grade, wet locations, or exposed in indoor locations which are not hazardous. galvanized, cast iron alloy or cast aluminum box, one piece, with threaded holes or hubs, and with neoprene gaskets. Covers shall be of the same material and finish as the device box. 1. Surface mount boxes have integral mounting lugs. 2.4 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Dry locations. Stamped steel, deep drawn one piece (without welds or tab connections), galvanized, with knockouts for conduit or connector entrance, City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16130-3 16130_Raceways and Boxes meeting NEMA OS 1. Boxes 6"x6"x4" or larger may be code gauge fabricated steel continuously welded at seams and painted after fabrication. B. Wet locations, outdoors, or below grade : 1. FRP plastic with gasketed screw -down cover. 2. Cast -Metal Boxes meeting NEMA FB 1, with gasketed screw down cover. 3 Boxes 6"x6"x4" or larger may be code gauge fabricated stainless steel continuously welded at seams and hot -dipped galvanized after fabrication with floor seams and with rubber gasketed covers. Covers shall be of the same material and finish as the device box. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES 1. Conduit bodies shall be cast or malleable iron, hot dipped galvanized. Covers shall be of the same material and finish as the fitting. Appleton, Crouse Hinds, OZ Gedney, or equal. 2. Locknuts and conduit bushings shall be malleable iron. Sealing locknuts shall be steel. Appleton, Crouse Hinds, OZ Gedney, or equal 3. Conduit sealing bushings shall be OZ Gedney Type CSM series. Cabinet sealing bushing shall be OZ Gedney Type GRK. 4. Conduit sealing fittings, drains and breathers shall be OZ Gedney Type EY and DB, or equal Appleton or Crouse Hinds. 5. Through wall and floor seals shall be OZ Gedney FS and WS series. 6. Cord grip connectors shall be OZ Gedney CGA, or equal Appleton or Crouse Hinds. 7 External Cable Grip. Woven wire mesh type made of high-strength galvanized or stainless steel wire strand and matched to cable diameter and with attachment provision designed for the corresponding connector. 8. Conduit spacers for direct buried or encased in concrete raceways shall be Underground Devices, Inc. "Wunpeece Spacers", or equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and spaces to receive raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of raceway installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 WIRING METHODS A. Where the manufacturer of equipment provided by the Contractor recommends or requires rigid metal conduit for circuits associated with the equipment, provide City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16130-4 16130_Raceways and Boxes rigid metal conduit for the entire circuit, even if other conduit types would otherwise be permitted under these specifications. B. Outdoors: Use the following wiring methods. 1. Exposed: RMC. 2. Underground RNC, RMC or PVC coated rigid steel, except use only PVC coated rigid steel where rigid steel conduit is indicated on the Contract Documents for underground circuits. Where RNC or RMC is used, transition to PVC coated rigid steel at stub up locations and at entrances to buildings or other locations where the raceway changes from buried to encased in concrete or exposed conditions. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): LFMC. Do not use flexible conduit in place of elbows offsets or fittings to attach to equipment. See below for further requirements for the installation of raceway terminations and connections using flexible connections. C Indoors. Use the following wiring methods' 1. Exposed raceway runs in areas which are dry, above grade, and not exposed to the process: EMT or RMC. 2. Exposed in other areas- RMC. 3 Damp or Wet Locations RMC. 4. Concealed. a. In wood frame walls- EMT or RMC. b In masonry walls. RNC or RMC. c. In accessible building spaces: EMT or RMC. d. Below slab -on -grade floors. PVC coated RMC or RNC. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): FMC; except where RMC is used, use LFMC. Do not use flexible conduit in place of elbows, offsets, or fittings to attach to equipment. See below for further requirements for the installation of raceway terminations and connections using flexible connections. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide a raceway for each circuit indicated. Do not gang raceway into wireways, pullboxes, junction boxes, etc., without specific approval. Do not group home runs or circuits without approval of the Engineer. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16130-5 16130_Raceways and Boxes B. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 inch trade size for underground circuits and communications circuits, % inch trade size for other circuits. C. Install rigid metal conduit unless other raceways are shown on the Contract Documents, are required by Code, or are permitted under these specifications. RMC or RNC may be used for straight runs run underground under concrete slabs. Provide PVC coated rigid steel elbows for all PVC runs. D. Provide rigid metal conduit for conduit runs containing cables from VFDs. Provide long radius sweep elbows to match cable bending requirements of VFD cable manufacturer. E. Install conduit as a complete, continuous system without wires, mechanically secure and electrically connected to all metal boxes, fittings and equipment. Blank off all unused openings using factory made knockout seals. F. Install conduit exposed, except in finished areas or unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Do not install raceway below grade/slab unless specifically shown on the Drawings as being installed below grade/slab. G. Install exposed raceways in lines parallel or perpendicular to the building or structural members lines except where the structure is not level. Follow the surface contours as much as practical. Do not install crossovers or offsets that can be avoided by installing the raceway in a different sequence or a uniform line. Provide adequate headroom. 1. Run parallel or banked raceways together, on common supports where practical. 2. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same centerline to make bends parallel. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways. H. Raceway concealed above ceilings, furred spaces, etc., which are normally inaccessible may be run at angles not parallel to the building lines. Wherever practical, route conduit with adjacent ductwork or piping and support on common racks. Base required strength of racks, hangers, and anchors on combined weights of conduit and piping. J. Where several circuits follow a common route, stagger pullboxes or fittings, or if shown grouped in one box, individually fireproof each conduit. K. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes or other heat sources operating at temperatures above one - hundred degrees Fahrenheit. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. L. Where conduits cross building expansion joints, use suitable sliding or offsetting expansion fittings. Unless specifically approved for bonding, use a suitable bonding jumper. For sizes one inch and smaller, a half -loop of flexible conduit between boxes or fittings may be used. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16130-6 16130_Raceways and Boxes M. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 1. Provide anchors, hangers, supports, clamps, etc. to support the raceways from the structures in or on which they are installed. Do not space supports further apart than ten feet. 2. Provide sufficient clearance to allow conduit to be added to racks, hangers, etc. in the future. 3 Support raceway within three feet of every outlet box, junction box, gutter, panel, fitting, etc. 4. Raceway in "wet" areas shall have clamp backs or other appropriate spacers to hold them a minimum of 1/2 inch off the surface. Install concealed raceway in wall or ceiling construction and/or place below the slab in a shallow trench. N. Embed raceway in masonry in the hollow core. Horizontal runs in the joint are not permitted. 0. Underground raceway runs 1. Install RNC or RMC where underground runs are shown. 2. Install conduit run below slab in a trench. Do not run conduit just below the slab or at the edge of the slab. 3. Run as straight as practicable Make changes in direction and/or grade of sufficient length to allow a gradual change (three foot radius minimum). Make slight offsets with five degree couplings 4. Provide conduit spacers for underground raceways where more than one conduit is placed in a trench. 5. Run trench true, and clear of stones or soft spots. Place three inches of fine sand in the trench bottom and tamp into place. Provide preformed plastic spacers on top of sand spaced five feet on center. After the raceway is placed in the trench, backfill six inches with sand, then with native earth backfill passing a No. 8 sieve, free of stones. Do not tamp on top of the conduit until the final backfill is placed. Tamp or water settle the final backfill to finish the grade Compact the backfill as specified under Division 2 "Earthwork". 6. Mark direct buried conduit by a one inch thick concrete ribbon painted red or yellow or a strip of yellow marking tape placed a minimum of twelve inches below grade during backfilling of the trench. 7 Clean underground and embedded conduit two-inch size and above with a wire brush or swab, followed by a mandrel not less than twelve inches long and approximately one-quarter inch smaller in diameter than the conduit internal diameter. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16130-7 16130_Raceways and Boxes P Where raceway exits from grade or concrete, provide the following. 1. For equipment to be moved into place at a later date, install a coupling flush with the floor slab and a threaded flush plug. 2. In "wet" areas, provide rigid steel conduit or elbow coated with 20 mils PVC for a minimum of 24 inches before exiting. Extend rigid steel conduit 2" or 3" beyond exiting point from grade or concrete. 3. For runs exiting from grade, slabs or encasement in dry areas such as under a building slab, provide a rigid steel elbow and adapter. In "wet" areas, use elbows 20 mil PVC coated 4. Do not extend plastic conduit above grade, into buildings, or equipment. Q. Stub -ups: 1. Where conduits are stubbed up into open bottom equipment, do not extend the conduit, including end fittings, more than 3 inches above the bottom of the enclosure. Stub conduits to a uniform height (plus or minus 1/8 inch) and align conduit centers within plus or minus 1/4 inch in rows parallel or perpendicular to the building structure. 2. Locate stub -ups directly under the section gutter into which the conductors they contain are to be routed. Terminate conduit with an insulating, grounding type bushing bonded to the ground bus of the equipment. 3. Protect stub -ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange stubups so that no curved portion of bends are visible above the finished slab. R. Use factory bends or elbows unless offsets or angles make use of field bends necessary. For field bends: bend and offset metal conduit with hickey or power bender, standard elbows, conduit fittings or pull boxes; bend PVC by hot box bender and, for PVC two inches in diameter and larger, expanding plugs. Make elbows, offsets and bends uniform and symmetrical. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated. S. Support conduit connections to motors or other equipment independently of the motor or equipment. Rise or drop vertically to the nearest practicable point of connection to the unit. Run vertical drops to the floor and fasten with a floor flange. Unsupported drops are not permitted. Horizontal runs on the floor or on equipment are not permitted. Drop or rise at the appropriate closest location. Run conduit on equipment frames or supports to closely follow the contours of the equipment. Locate conduit to maintain access to all equipment services and adjustment points and so as not to interfere with operation of the equipment. T Connect conduit to hubless enclosures, cabinets and boxes with double Iocknuts and with insulating type bushings. Use grounding type bushings where connecting to concentric or eccentric knockouts. Connect to enclosures, boxes and devices from below in wet areas. Make conduit connections to enclosures City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16130-8 16130_Raceways and Boxes at the nearest practicable point of entry to the enclosure area where the devices are located to which the circuits contained in the conduit will connect. U. Penetrations for raceways 1. Do not bore holes in floor and ceiling joists outside center third of member depth or within two feet of bearing points. Holes shall be one inch diameter maximum. 2. Penetrate through building wall or surfaces with a PVC or sheet metal sleeve with at least 1/4" greater interior diameter (ID) than conduit exterior diameter (OD), set flush with walls, pack with fiberglass and seal with silicone sealant and cover with escutcheon plate. 3. Penetrate through poured -in-place walls and free slabs, with a cast iron or, (above -grade only) Schedule 40 black pipe sleeve with retaining ring or washer. Set sleeves flush with forms or edges of slab. Pack around conduit with fiberglass and seal with silicone sealant. For penetrations below exterior grade, provide a floor or wall sealing fitting on the interior of the building wall.. 4. Penetrate through roofs with core drill hole 1/2 inch to 1 inch larger than conduit, flash with neoprene, caulk conduit in place and seal with silicone sealant under flashing. Sleeve roof opening where non -concrete roof construction occurs. V. Raceway terminations and connections: 1. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight. 2. Make connections waterproof and rustproof by application of a watertight, conductive thread compound. Clean threads of cutting oil before applying thread compound. 3. PVC Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits. a. Apply PVC adhesive by brush. 4 Make raceway terminations tight. Use bonding bushings or wedges at connections subject to vibration. Use bonding jumpers where joints cannot be made tight. 5. Cut ends of conduit square with hand or power saw or pipe cutter. Ream cut ends to remove burrs and sharp ends. Make conduit threads which are cut in the field to have same effective length and same thread dimensions and taper as specified for factory -cut threads. 6. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 18 inches of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Install flexible conduit in a straight length. Do not use flexible City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16130-9 16130_Raceways and Boxes 1 I conduit in place of elbows, offsets, or fittings to attach to fixed equipment. With the Engineer's approval, longer lengths of flexible conduit may be used for connection to items of equipment which require longer lengths I for installation and removal of the equipment for maintenance or replacement purposes. Recessed and semi -recessed lighting fixtures may use up to 6 feet of flexible conduit, or 11 feet of pre -manufactured I lighting "whips". Use liquid -tight flexible metal conduit in wet or damp locations. Do not strap flexible conduit to structures or other equipment. 7. Provide double locknuts and insulating bushings at conduit connections Ito boxes and cabinets. Align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against the box. Use grounding type bushings where connecting to concentric or eccentric knockouts. In "wet" areas, I use locknuts of the sealing type or use Myers hubs. 8. Connect conduits to enclosures at the location of the gutter or device to I which the contained conductors will be routed. Route or stub conduits to motors and/or mechanical equipment directly to the connection and locate as close as possible to equipment terminals. 1 9. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into the hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so the coupling I is square to the box and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed. I 10. Place conduits at panelboards in the rear line of knockouts where possible. W. Keep conduits clean and dry and close each end left exposed. When blowing I through conduits, cover electrical components installed in enclosures to avoid blowing dirt or water into equipment. Use temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways. IX. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc -coated steel or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200 -Ib tensile strength. Leave at Ileast 8 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. Y Seal interior of raceways around conductors at (1) where conduits pass from warm to cold or from moist locations, such as the boundaries of air conditioned I or refrigerated spaces and where conduits enter or exit buildings from outdoor areas, reservoirs, manholes, underground vaults, including underground ducts or conduit runs or (2) where otherwise required by NFPA 70. 1 1. Methods used to seal interior of raceways around conductors shall be as follows. IIa. Install raceway sealing fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions. Locate fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations. For non -hazardous areas, fill with expansive foam or IDucseal. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush ICity of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16130-10 16130_Raceways and Boxes steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. b. Seal conduits using expansive foam or Duct Seal where conduits enter through the bottom of motor control centers and control panels. c. Seal conduits using expansive foam or Ducseal for individual items of equipment where it is not practical to install raceway seal fittings such as building mounted convenience receptacles. d. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. Z. Device and Outlet Boxes 1. Coordinate box locations with building surfaces and finishes to avoid bridging wainscots, joints, finish changes, etc. 2. Recess boxes in the wall, floor, and ceiling surfaces in finished areas. Set boxes plumb, level, square and flush with finished building surfaces within one -sixteenth inch for each condition. Set boxes so that box openings in building surfaces are within one-eighth inch of edge of material cut-out and fill tight to box with building materials. Back boxes with structural material to prevent rotation on studs or joists. Use gang boxes wherever more than one device is used at one location. 3. Attach boxes to building structure with a minimum of two fasteners. Provide attachments to withstand a force of one -hundred pounds applied vertically or horizontally. 4 Set recessed boxes at the following heights to the bottom of the box, except where noted otherwise. a. Convenience outlet receptacles at sixteen inches, b. Lighting switches, dimmers, etc. at forty-four inches above floor. 5. Set exposed device boxes four feet above the finished floor to top of the box. 6. Set boxes for lighting switches at 44 inches above the finished floor and within one foot of the door opening on the strike or lock side of the door or on the side closing last. 7 Arrange boxes used in wet areas to drain moisture away from devices or enclosures for equipment and make conduit connections from below AA. Install hinged -cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16130-11 16130_Raceways and Boxes 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. 3.5 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips, scratches, and abrasions. END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16130-12 16130_Raceways and Boxes SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes various types of receptacles, connectors, switches, and finish plates 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. No submittals are required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NEC for devices and installation. B. Listing and Labeling. Provide products that are listed and labeled for their applications and installation conditions and for the environments in which installed. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2.0 MATERIALS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include the following 1. Wiring Devices. a. Cooper Wiring Devices b. Bryant Electric, Inc. c. Hubbell Inc. d Killark Electrical Mfg. Co. e. Leviton Mfg. Co., Inc. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16140-1 16140_Wiring Devices f. Pass & Seymour/Legrand. g. Crouse -Hinds h. Paragon i. Mulberry j. Square -D 2.2 WIRING DEVICES A. Comply with NEMA Standard WD 1, "General Purpose Wiring Devices." B. Enclosures. NEMA 1 equivalent, except as otherwise indicated. C. Color: Ivory except as otherwise indicated or required by Code. D. Receptacles, Straight -Blade and Locking Type. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with Federal Specification W -C-596 and heavy-duty grade of UL Standard 498, "Electrical Attachment Plugs and Receptacles." Provide NRTL labeling of devices to verify compliance. 1. General purpose Convenience Outlets a. Duplex receptacle configuration b. Nylon face c. Staked screw terminals for line, neutral, and ground connections. d. Provisions for split bus e. NEMA 5-15R or 5-20R 2. Special Purpose Receptacles a. Staked screw terminals for line, neutral, and ground connections. b. NEMA configuration as indicated. E. Receptacles, Straight—Blade, Special Features: Comply with the basic requirements specified above for straight -blade receptacles of the class and type indicated, and with the following additional requirements: 1. Ground -Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacles: UL Standard 943, "Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters," with integral NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacle arranged to protect only the connected receptacle and no other receptacles connected on the same circuit. F Snap Switches: Quiet—type ac. switches, NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL Standard 20 "General Use Snap Switches," and with Federal Specification W—S-896. 1. Lighting Switches. 120/277V ac only, rated 20 amperes. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16140-2 16140_Wiring Devices G. Motor rated switches: horsepower rated for application indicated. H. Photocells. Three wire devices with adjustable aperture or lighting level operation. They shall be designed for conduit box mounting. They shall be rated 120 volt, 20 amps. Tork, Crouse -Hinds, or equal. Wall Plates: Single and combination types that mate and match with corresponding wiring devices. Features include the following. 1. Color: Matches wiring device except as otherwise indicated. 2. Plate—Securing Screws. Metal with heads colored to match plate finish. 3. For areas with concealed electrical construction stainless steel, except as otherwise indicated. 4 For areas with exposed electrical construction: Galvanized steel. J. Device Box Covers. Cast aluminum or cast iron to match box to which installed. K. Limit Switch 1. Magnetic door switch (for intrusion at building doors). Square D SGA8040 with 7062 magnet actuator, or equal. 2. Industrial limit switch (for fan control or intrusion at building doors). Square D Class 9007 Type C, with lever arm. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Arrangement of Devices Except as otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and grounding terminal of receptacles on bottom Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. 1. See "Raceways and Boxes" Section for mounting height of devices. B. Install devices and assemblies plumb, level, flush and secure. Provide spacers on device screws to flush yokes or flanges to surface of wall within 1/16 inch where boxes are not flush with the wall surface. Install wiring devices such as receptacles to withstand 50 pounds force applied perpendicular to the device face with a maximum deflection of 1/16 inch. C. Install switches with the "Off' position down. Install three and four way switches so the load is "off' when all switch handles are down D. Connect phase, neutral, and grounding wires to devices with full loops around screws installed to tighten with tightening of the screw. Trim insulation to within one-eighth inch of screw terminal. E. Flush mounted devices and wall plates: City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16140-3 16140_Wiring Devices 1. Provide spacers on device screws to flush yokes or flanges to surface of wall within 1/16 inch where boxes are not flush with the wall surface. 2. Protect devices and assemblies during painting. 3. Install wall plates after painting is complete. Install with an alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch to plumb. Install at flush mounted devices so that all four edges are in continuous contact with finished wall surface without the use of mats or similar devices. Do not use plaster fillings. F. Use corrosion resistant devices outdoors. 3.2 GROUNDING A. Connect receptacle or switch ground lug to device box for devices other than isolated ground type. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing 1. Test wiring devices for proper connections, polarity and ground continuity. Perform this testing with testing equipment designed for testing polarity and connections. 2. Operate each operable device at least 6 times. 3. Test ground -fault circuit interrupter operation with local fault simulations, using a tester designed for such testing, and according to manufacturer recommendations. Testing with integral test switches on the receptacle is not sufficient for this testing. B. Replace damaged or defective components, and retest. 3.4 CLEANING A. General: Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly painted wall plates or devices. END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16140-4 16140_Wiring Devices SECTION 16210 ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes' The electrical service and connection to the commercial power Utility system (Pacific Power) and the work required in conjunction with Pacific Power for their revenue metering. B. Related Sections The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section' 1. Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables" for service entrance conductors not provided by the utility. 2. Section 16410 "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Beakers" for equipment used as Service Entrance Equipment. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Primary Circuits' conductors provided by Pacific Power. Trenching, conduit and backfill provided by Contractor. B. Power transformers' provided by Pacific Power. Vaults, excavation and backfill provided by Contractor. C. Secondary Circuits to Service Points. conductors provided by Pacific Power. Trenching, conduit, and backfill provided by Contractor. D. Revenue Meters' provided by Pacific Power. E. EUSERC Enclosure: 1. Provide equipment as required by Pacific Power for their revenue metering. 2. Provide accessory equipment and wiring as required by Pacific Power. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16210-1 16210_Electrical Utility Services 1 1 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Coordinate with Pacific Power to ensure that their metering and service requirements are met. 1. The Contractor is responsible for any work necessary to place the services in operation as a complete installation. Provide any materials required and do any work necessary that is not provided or completed by Pacific Power. 2. Service charges or construction fees required by Pacific Power for the new electrical service to the project shall be paid to Pacific Power by the Owner. 3. Provide excavation, backfill and conduit for Pacific Power's primary and secondary circuits. Locate the trench for such circuits as directed by the utility. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Pacific Power will. 1. Install the primary conductors and primary distribution and switching equipment. 2. Install the secondary conductors. 3. Install the power transformers. 4. Install the revenue meters B. The Contractor is responsible to install the following. 1. Current transformers and potential transformers furnished by Pacific Power. 2. EUSERC enclosure, including current transformer or other enclosures associated with Pacific Power's revenue metering equipment. 3. Pads or vaults associated with Pacific Power's transformers. 4. Install the primary and secondary conduits to the service. END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16210-2 16210_Electrical Utility Services SECTION 16280 POWER FILTERS AND CONDITIONERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section. t2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes power filtering and conditioning equipment, whether individually mounted or group mounted in panelboards, and similar equipment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Product Data for equipment, devices, and accessories specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency. Utilize an independent testing agency meeting OSHA criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories, Title 29, Part 1907; or which is a full - member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA). B. Source Limitations: Obtain equipment of each type specified from one source and by a single manufacturer C. Comply with NEC for components and installation. D. Listing and Labeling Provide equipment and devices specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled". As defined in the NEC, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering equipment that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors - a. General Electric Co b Eaton Electrical City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16280-1 16280 Power Filters and Conditioners c. Square -D Co. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. B. SURGE AND LIGHTNING ARRESTERS 1. General Electric Company Catalog No. 9L15 ECA001 for single phase, and 9LECC001 for three phase, or equal. 2.2 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS A. TVSS devices shall provide surge current diversion paths for all modes of protection; L -N, L -G and N -G in WYE systems. Each mode including N -G shall be fused with a 200kAIR UL recognized surge rated fuse and incorporate a thermal cutout device. Audible diagnostic monitoring shall be by way of audible alarm. This alarm shall activate upon a fault condition. An alarm on/off switch shall be provided to silence the alarm. An alarm push to test switch shall be provided. B. Minimum surge current capability (single pulse rated) per phase shall be 250kA per phase UL 1449 Suppression Voltage Ratings shall be. VOLTAGE L -N L -G N -G 480Y/277V 600V 600V 600V C. Minimum EMI/RFI filtering shall be -50dB at 100 kHz with an insertion ratio of 50:1 using MIL -STD -220A methodology. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in the distribution switchboard as shown on the drawings. TVSS devices shall be integral to the distribution switchboard and shall be part of the listed equipment to meet the requirements of Article 230.71 (A) of the 2005 National Electrical Code and shall be installed by the electrical distribution equipment manufacturer's factory. B. Connect equipment, devices and components to wiring system and to ground as indicated and as instructed by manufacturer. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. C. Identify each item of equipment according to requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency Provide the services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform specified field quality -control testing. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16280-2 16280 Power Filters and Conditioners B. Testing: After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1. Procedures. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.19 for surge suppressors. Certify compliance with test parameters. C. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest. END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16280-3 16280 Power Filters and Conditioners SECTION 16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes switches and circuit breakers, whether individually mounted or group mounted in switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, and similar equipment. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section• 1. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for attachment plugs and receptacles, and snap switches used for disconnect switches. 2. Division 16 Section "Basic Materials and Methods" for enclosure types. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Product Data for disconnect switches, circuit breakers, and accessories specified in this Section. B. Maintenance data for tripping devices to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 16010. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: Utilize an independent testing agency meeting OSHA criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories, Title 29, Part 1907; or which is a full - member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA). B. Source Limitations: Obtain disconnect switches and circuit breakers from one source and by a single manufacturer. C. Comply with NEC for components and installation. D. Listing and Labeling: Provide disconnect switches and circuit breakers specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled". As defined in the NEC, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. E. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Space for installation of enclosed circuit breakers is limited. Drawings indicate typical dimensions for equipment, City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 16410-1 8/13/2010 16410_Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers including clearances between circuit breakers and adjacent surfaces and items. Enclosed circuit breakers with larger dimensions may be acceptable, but it is the responsibility of the Contractor to submit detailed drawings showing the required revisions to the structural, process, mechanical, electrical , and other plans to accommodate equipment with larger dimensions. The Contractor shall coordinate the size of enclosed circuit breakers with the available space and required clearances and shall verify that the proposed equipment can be installed in the available space with the required clearance prior to making a submittal. Equipment of dimensions larger than the available space with the required clearance shall not be submitted. The decision of the Engineer as to the acceptability of equipment with larger dimensions than as shown on the Plans will be final. If deemed acceptable, it is the Contractor's responsibility to provide any required revisions to the structural, process, mechanical, electrical, and other designs without additional cost to the Owner. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with additional requirements noted in this section, manufacturers offering switches and circuit breakers that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Disconnect switches, safety switches, and circuit breakers: a. Eaton Corp., Cutler -Hammer Products. b General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution and Control Division. c Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. Square D Co. 2.2 SWITCHES A. Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 600 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, Class R rejection fuse clips, enclosure consistent with environment where located, handle lockable with 2 padlocks, and interlocked with cover in CLOSED position. Switch horsepower rated where used in motor circuits. B. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, with enclosure types as described in Section 16050, unless indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents. C. Enclosed, Non -fusible switch, 600A and smaller. NEMA KS 1, Type HD, enclosure consistent with environment where located, handle lockable with 2 padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. Switch horsepower rated where used in motor circuits. 2.3 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Molded -Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with lockable handle. City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 16410-2 8/13/2010 16410_Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers B. Characteristics: Frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and auxiliary devices as indicated with interrupting rating to meet available fault current. 1. Main and feeder breakers shall be molded case breakers with thermal magnetic trip. 2. Motor circuit breakers shall be magnetic only trip with adjustable trip setting. 3. Branch circuit breakers shall be molded case, thermal -magnetic trip, trip - free with non -interchangeable, non-adjustable trip unless otherwise noted. C. Application Listing. Appropriate for application, including switching lighting loads (SWD) or heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment (HACR). D. Circuit Breakers, 200 A and Larger. Trip units interchangeable within frame size. E. Circuit Breakers, 400 A and Larger: Provide field -adjustable, short- and long- time trip units, each separately and individually adjustable for both time and pickup. F. Molded -Case Switch: Where indicated, molded -case circuit breaker without trip units. G. Lugs: Mechanical lugs and power -distribution connectors suitable for conductors of the material, number and size provided. H. Accessories: 1. Ground Fault Trip: for main circuit breakers of 1000 A and greater, and where required by code. I. Enclosure. per application, as described in Section 16050, unless otherwise specified or required to meet environmental conditions of installed location. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install switches and circuit breaker enclosures level and plumb in locations as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. For equipment at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on structural—steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks conforming to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." C. Install wiring between switches, circuit breakers, control, and indication devices. D. Connect switches and circuit breakers and components to wiring system and to ground as indicated and as instructed by manufacturer. City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 16410-3 8/13/2010 16410_Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. E. Identify each switch and circuit breaker according to requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Provide the services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform specified field quality -control testing. B. Testing: After installing switches and circuit breakers and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7 6 for molded -case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. C. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Set field -adjustable circuit -breaker trip and transfer switch setting ranges as indicated or as directed by the Engineer. 1. Set trip to 1.25 times the full load circuit amps for non -motor circuits, 2 times the full load motor amps for thermal -magnetic circuit breakers on motor circuits, or lowest setting which permits starting and running for magnetic only circuit breakers on motor circuits. B. Provide fuses for fused disconnect switches to coordinate with manufacturer's listed maximum fuse size for equipment supplied by the disconnect switch. 3.4 CLEANING A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, and abrasions. END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 16410-4 8/13/2010 16410_Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers SECTION 16422 MOTOR CONTROLLERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes ac motor—control devices rated 600 V and Tess that are supplied as enclosed units, or as individual units for mounting in equipment specified under other sections. B. Related Sections. The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Section 16050 "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for general materials and installation methods. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Product Data for motor controllers and accessories specified in this Section. 1. For variable frequency drives, submittals shall be custom prepared by the VFD manufacturer for this specific application, and shall include the following a. Equipment dimensions, including stub -up locations, shipping splits and shipping weights. b. Spare parts list c. Manufacturer's published installation, set-up and configuration, operation, and maintenance manuals. d. Wiring diagrams specific to the application of the drive under this Contract. e. Initial configuration and program parameters specific to the application of the drive under this Contract, including all parameters that will be set to other than manufacturer's default values, and that demonstrate the drive is capable of operating in the manner intended by the project design. B. Shop Drawings: submit complete Elementary Wiring Diagrams and One Line Diagrams of control and power wiring, specific to the actual motor or item to be controlled, which clearly indicate field wiring and field wired devices, and wiring provided as part of the manufacturer's assembled unit. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16422-1 16422 Motor Controllers C. Field Test Reports' Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements. D. Maintenance data for tripping devices to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 16010. E. Load—Current and Overload—Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full—load currents. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations' Obtain similar motor—control devices through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Comply with NEC. C. Listing and Labeling Provide motor controllers and circuit breakers specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the NEC, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. D. Product Selection for Restricted Space. Space for installation of a variable frequency drive is limited. Drawings indicate typical dimensions for equipment, including clearances between variable frequency drdive and adjacent surfaces and items. A variable frequency drive with larger dimensions may be acceptable, but it is the responsibility of the Contractor to submit detailed drawings showing the required revisions to the structural, process, mechanical, electrical, and other plans to accommodate equipment with larger dimensions. The Contractor shall coordinate the size of the variable frequency drive with the available space and required clearances and shall verify that the proposed equipment can be installed in the available space with the required clearance prior to making a submittal. Equipment of dimensions larger than the available space with the required clearance shall not be submitted. The decision of the Engineer as to the acceptabaility of equipment with larger dimensions than as shown on the Plans will be final. If deemed acceptable, it is the Contractor's responsibility to provide any required revisions to the structural, process, mechanical, electrical, and other designs without additional cost to the Owner. Note that the width (west to east) of the electrical room in the Cutler Way Booster Pump Station has been increased from 7'4" to 8'8". E. Power circuits for the units are designed to be bottom entry, bottom exit. Control circuits are designed to be bottom entry, bottom exit. Communication circuits are designed to be top entry, top exit. If there is insufficient space to accommodate bottom entry and exit in the units, control circuits to telemetry control panel and incoming power feed may be top entry, but power and control circuits to the motors must be bottom exit. Submittals must include plan drawings of the enclosure top and bottom showing available space for conduit entry and exit. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16422-2 16422 Motor Controllers 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices and control circuits to which they connect. B. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each motor controller with the ratings and characteristics of the supply circuit, the motor, the required control sequence, and the duty cycle of the motor and load. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Spare Fuses and Incandescent Indicating Lamps: Furnish 1 spare for every 5 installed units, but not less than 1 set of 3 of each kind. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers. Subject to compliance with additional requirements of this section, manufacturers offering motor controllers ( not including 18 pulse variable frequency drives) that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following. 1. Allen—Bradley Co., Industrial Control Group. 2. Eaton Electrical (Cutler -Hammer) 3. General Electric 4. Siemens 5. SquareD Co. B. Available Manufacturers for 18 Pulse Variable Frequency Drives: Subject to compliance with additional requirements of this section, manufacturers offering 18 pulse variable frequency drives that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. ABB 2. Allen—Bradley Co., Industrial Control Group. 3. Eaton Electrical (Cutler -Hammer) 4. Siemens (Type W Drive) 5. Square D City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16422-3 16422 Motor Controllers 2.2 MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, nonreversing, across the line, combination starters, unless otherwise indicated. Minimum size NEMA 1. IEC rated devices are not allowed. B. Control Circuit: 120 V; obtained from integral control power transformer, unless otherwise indicated. Include a control power transformer with adequate capacity to operate connected pilot, indicating and control devices, plus 100 percent spare capacity. C. Combination Controller. Factory—assembled combination controller and disconnect switch with or without overcurrent protection as indicated. 1. Circuit—Breaker Disconnect: NEMA AB 1, motor—circuit protector with field—adjustable short—circuit trip coordinated with motor locked—rotor amperes. D. Overload Protection. Three overload elements of melting alloy type selected to provide Class 10 protection for the actual motor furnished. Units are manual reset type with an external reset mechanism provided in the starter enclosure front. Provide two separate auxiliary contacts with each overload protection unit 1. One normally closed for use in the motor starting circuit. 2. One normally open for signaling overloads to plant control system. E. Phase protection: provide a phase failure relay to protect against single phasing, over voltage, undervoltage, phase reversal and phase unbalance. Relay shall have two independent contacts. one normally open for use in the motor starting circuit and one normally closed for signaling phase failure to telemetry. 2.3 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS A. The variable frequency drive shall be UL or ETL listed and labeled and shall comply with the latest applicable standards of ANSI, NEMA, IEEE, and the National Electrical Code. B. The adjustable frequency controller shall be a space vector sine -coded Pulse - Width Modulated (PWM) design. Modulation methods which incorporate "gear - changing" techniques are not acceptable. The final responsibility of distributor or packager modifications to a third -party standard product shall reside with the VFD manufacturer. The VFD shall be manufactured within the United States of America to alleviate concerns of future serviceability and parts availability. C. The VFD system must fit in the space indicated on the drawings. D. The VFD input rating (if provided by the manufacturer) shall not exceed the rating of the feeder circuit supplying the VFD (as shown on the One Line Diagram on the Drawings), or the Contractor shall increase the rating of the feeder circuit (circuit breaker, conductors, conduit, and other devices/equipment City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16422-4 16422 Motor Controllers (without additional cost to the Owner) as required for the VFD input rating to meet this requirement. E. Conduit entries into the drive enclosure must be coordinated with the number and location of those shown on the drawings F. The VFD system shall consist of a harmonic/power factor correction unit (if required to meet these specifications), input rectifier -grade phase -shifting transformer, Clean Power 18 -pulse minimum converter section, output inverter and control logic section. All components listed including power factor correction / harmonic filter and transformer shall be integral to the VFD lineup, factory wired and tested as a complete system. 1. VFDs shall meet all requirements as outlined in the 1992 edition of IEEE 519 for each individual and total harmonic current & voltage distortion and as indicated in this specification. As per Table 10.2 of IEEE 519- 1992, VFDs shall not add more than 3% total harmonic voltage distortion while operating at full load and speed from the utility source. 2. Harmonic compliance shall be verified with onsite field measurements of both the voltage and current harmonic distortion at the drive input terminals with and without the VFD operating. A recording type Fluke 41 or equivalent harmonic analyzer displaying individual and total harmonic currents and voltages must be utilized. 3. The variable frequency drive(s) when installed and operating at the Owner's facility, shall not cause excessive voltage and/or current total harmonic distortion (THD) levels greater than allowed by the serving utility on the serving utility's electrical system at the point of common coupling. The point of common coupling for this requirement is defined as the utility's revenue metering equipment. a. The voltage and current total harmonic distortion limits shall be as listed in IEEE 519 (1992), unless modified by the serving utility The serving utility is Pacific Power. b. The drives shall be provided with necessary harmonic mitigation equipment including, but not limited to, line reactors, passive filtering components, and/or isolation transformers, as required to meet this specification. These devices and/or equipment shall be provided for each drive. "Sharing" of internally or externally mounted devices/equipment is not permitted. c. Harmonic compliance shall be verified with onsite field measurements of both the voltage and current harmonic distortion at the drive input terminals with and without the VFD operating. A recording type Fluke 41 or equivalent harmonic analyzer displaying individual and total harmonic currents and voltages must be utilized. G. The drive unit shall have an input circuit breaker, interlocked with the enclosure door, with through -the -door handle to provide positive disconnect of incoming AC power. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16422-5 16422 Motor Controllers H. The drive system shall be 96% efficient at full load and full speed and 95.5% efficient at 51% load and 80% speed. Losses to be utilized in drive system efficiency calculation shall include input transformer, harmonic filter and power factor correction if applicable, VFD converter and output filter if applicable. Auxiliary controls, such as internal VFD control boards, cooling fans or pumps, shall be included in all loss calculations. The drive shall provide variable speed control of a standard NEMA MG 1, Design B, 3-phase, induction motor by adjusting output voltage and frequency. It shall have an output voltage regulator to maintain correct output V/Hz ratio despite incoming voltage variations. Output power shall be of suitable capacity and wave form to provide stepless speed control of the specified three phase 480 volt motors throughout a continuous speed range under variable or constant load (as applicable) not exceeding the motor's full load rating. J. The controller shall be suitable for use with any standard NEMA -B 3 phase squirrel -cage induction motor having a 1.15 Service Factor (on sine power). The drive shall be capable of being located up to 300 feet from the motor without requiring special cabling or separate motor protection devices. If special cabling or separate motor protection devices are required, they shall be supplied by the VFD supplier at the VFD manufacturer's expense. At any time in the future, it shall be possible to substitute any standard motor (equivalent horsepower, voltage and RPM) in the field. K. The VFD shall be supplied with a transformer to provide phase shifting for a Clean Power 18 pulse or higher converter bridge. The phase shift transformers required shall be factory wired and mounted within the VFD enclosure as an integral part of the VFD assembly. Transformers external to the VFD enclosure are not acceptable. Separate isolation transformers arranged in delta/delta, delta/wye will not be acceptable. The converter section shall be 18 -pulse minimum utilizing diodes. The converter shall be a clean power controller which inherently provides sinusoidal current to the inverter section with minimal harmonics to flow back to the incoming power source. L. The inverter output shall be generated by IGBTs (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors). Pulse Width Modulation strategy will be of the space vector type implemented to generate a sine -coded output voltage. The VFD shall not induce excessive power losses in the motor. The worst case RMS motor line current measured at rated speed, torque and voltage shall not exceed 1.05 times the rated RMS motor current for pure sine wave operation. M. The drive shall have an output reactor to reduce overshoot peak voltage, and reduce motor heating due to high harmonic frequency voltages. N. Features 1. 480 volt, 3 phase 60 Hz input. a. Voltage Dip Ride -Through. VFD shall be capable of sustaining continued operation with a 40% dip in nominal line voltage. Output speed may decline only if current limit rating of VFD is exceeded. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16422-6 16422 Motor Controllers 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I b. Power Loss Ride -through. VFD shall be capable of a minimum 3 cycle power loss ride -through without fault activation. I 2. Pulse -width modulated output. a. Full wave diode bridge convertor converts incoming voltage to controlled DC voltage which is inverted to an adjustable frequency 1 output. b. Capable of providing variable or constant volts/Hz excitation up to I nominal 60 Hz rating. 1) Variable Torque Output Rating: 3-phase, 6 to 60 Hz, with 1 voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range. 2) Constant Torque Output Rating: 3-phase, 6 to 60 Hz, with 1 torque constant as speed changes. 3. All VFD components shall be factory mounted and wired on a free I standing dead front, grounded, NEMA -1 enclosure, suitable for mounting on a concrete housekeeping pad. 4. Operates in an ambient temperature of 0-40 degrees Celsius. 1 5. Maintains displacement power factor of 0.95 or better over the entire speed range. 1 6. Controller shall be suitable for and coordinated with the thermal, electrical, and mechanical characteristics of the motor actually furnished and to which it is connected. I7. Coordinate the drive capability with the torque characteristics (variable or constant torque) of the actual equipment furnished which is driven by the 1 motor to which the drive is connected. O. Protection 1 1. Capable of 110% rated current continuous, 150% rated current for one minute, at rated temperature. 1 2. Includes self -diagnostics for detection of failed circuitry. a. Fault detection trip circuits to prevent damage to the unit and the I connected motor. b. Upon tripout the drive automatically resets and attempts to restart one time. This feature shall be programmable as to number of 1 retries, and shall be capable of being disabled. c. Upon return of power after an outage, the drive shall automatically I restart if no fault condition exists, and the start command is present. 1 City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16422-7 16422_Motor Controllers 1 3. Electronic circuits and circuit boards shall be conformally coated to resist degredation by chemically corrosive agents which may be present in a water treatment facility environment. 4. In addition to other specified standard protective functions provide the following: a. Instantaneous overcurrent and overvoltage trip. b Undervoltage and power loss protection. c. Power unit overtemperature alarm and protection. Upon sensing an overtemperature condition, the VFD is to automatically trip. d. Electronic motor inverse time overload protection. e. Responsive action to motor winding temperature detectors or thermostatic switches A dry contact (NC) input to the VFD is required. f. When power is restored after a complete power outage, the VFD shall be capable of catching the motor while it is still spinning and restoring it to proper operating speed without the use of an encoder. g. The VFD shall be protected from damage due to the following, without requiring an output contactor: 1) Three-phase short circuit on VFD output terminals. 2) Loss of input power due to opening of VFD input disconnect device or utility power failure during VFD operation. 3) Loss of one (1) phase of input power. h. The VFD shall continue to operate at a reduced capacity under a single-phase fault condition. The VFD shall be able to withstand the following fault conditions without damage to the power circuit components. 1) Failure to connect a motor to the VFD output. 2) VFD output open circuit that may occur during operation. 3) VFD output short circuit that may occur during operation. j. Motor overload protection. Adjustable and capable of NEMA 250, Class 10 performance. k. Fault current protection of AC to DC rectifier section. Adjustable current limit of 50-110% of full load rating. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16422-8 16422 Motor Controllers 1 1 m. Stall prevention. n. Surge protection from input line AC transients (lightning arrestor). 1 o. Electrical isolation between power and logic circuits. P. Control 1 1. Microprocessor based digital logic control fully programmable from the front panel with nonvolatile memory for the programmed functions. The I control logic section shall be fully digital and not require analog adjustment pots or fixed selector resistors. A power failure will not necessitate a reload of any drive parameter or configuration. 1 2. Speed Control a. Speed reference 1 1) Internal speed reference (from keypad) 2) External speed reference (from terminal board) 1 3) PID reference utilizing an external process variable and internal or external setpoint. 1 b. 3 selectable critical speed avoidance bands with programmable bandwidths. I c. Auto start functions: On/Off, Delay On/Off. Operable from a 4- 20mA signal or from the PID output, command, or feedback signal. 1 d. Speed Profile: Programmable entry and exit points. Programmable entry and exit speeds. I e. Programmable loss of signal control: Stop, maintain last speed, or default to preselected setpoint. I f. Minimum speed is field adjustable from 0 to 100 percent of motor rpm. I g. Minimum speed is field adjustable from 0 to 100 percent of maximum rpm. h. The minimum speed (zero point) and the maximum speed (span) 1 are independently field adjustable. i. The speed increases or decreases at a linear time ramp, I independently adjustable for acceleration and deceleration control. 1) acceleration time adjustable from 0-300 seconds. 1 2) deceleration time adjustable from 0-300 seconds. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16422-9 16422_Motor Controllers The controller shall be capable of operation in remote and local modes. Selection of mode shall be from front of panel controls. 1) In local mode the drive is started and stopped from the front of drive controls (keypad or pushbuttons), and the speed setpoint is entered to the controller via the front panel controls. 2) In remote mode the drive is started or stopped by a remote dry contact(s), and speed control is provided via terminal board inputs. See the Drawings for additional information on speed control in remote mode. 3. A door -mounted membrane keypad with integral 2 -line, 24 character LCD display shall be furnished, capable of controlling the VFD and setting drive parameters. The keypad shall include the following features: a. The digital display must present all diagnostic message and parameter values in English engineering units when accessed, without the use of codes. b. The digital keypad shall allow the operator to enter exact numerical settings in English engineering units. A plain English user menu (rather than codes) shall be provided in software in nonvolatile memory as a guide to parameter setting and resettable in the field through the keypad. c. All drive setting adjustments and operation parameters shall be stored in a parameter log which lists allowable maximum and minimum points as well as the present set values. The following digital door -mounted keypad indications may be selectively displayed 1) Speed demand in percent. 2) Output current in amperes. 3) Output Frequency in hertz. 4) Input voltage. 5) Output voltage. 6) Total 3-phase KW. 7) Kilowatt hour meter. 8) lapsed time running meter. 9) RPM. 10) DC bus voltage. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16422-10 16422 Motor Controllers 4. The following control functions shall be provided on the front of the drive enclosure, either as discrete devices or as part of a digital display keypad unit: a. Local/Off/Remote mode selection b. Manual start/stop c. Manual speed control d. "POWER ON" light e. "RUN" light f. VFD "fault" light g. VFD "reset" pushbutton h. Overcurrent, Overvoltage, Undervoltage, and Overtemperature indication i. Speed indicating meter, calibrated in RPM to indicate speed of the converter powered motor j. Voltmeter k. Ammeter I. Run Time meter 5. The following system configuring settings shall be provided and field adjustable, without exception, through the keypad/display unit. Except for Motor Nameplate Data, all parameters must be adjustable while the processor is on-line and the drive is running. a. Motor Nameplate Data. 1) Motor frequency. 2) Number of poles. 3) Full load speed. 4) Motor volts. 5) Motor full load amps. 6) Motor HP. 7) Current limit, max. b. VFD Configuration Parameters. 1) Independent accel/decel rates. 2) Max/Min speed (frequency). 3) Catch -a spinning load selection. 4) No load boost. 5) Full load boost. 6) Volts/Hertz ratio. 7) Overspeed trip. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16422-11 16422 Motor Controllers 1 8) Overload trip curve selection. 9) Overload trip time selection. 6 In addition to other specified basic features provide the following: a. Low frequency voltage boost b. Coast to rest c. Insensitive to line rotation d. Slip compensation e. Jump frequency 7 Input/Output signals. Include the following inputs and outputs a. Two wire discrete input for motor temperature fault (requiring a normally closed contact signaling high temperature on opening). A high motor winding temperature condition shall cause the drive to fault. b. Two wire discrete input for drive start (call). c. Two wire discrete input for drive enable. Removal of the enable signal shall not require resetting of the drive in order for drive operation to resume upon return of the enable signal. d. Two wire input for speed reference selection (potentiometer or 4- 20mA input). 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 e. Two wire discrete input for fault from remote devices (loss of signal). f. Discrete output for drive run. g. Discrete output for drive fault. h. 3 wire potentiometer analog input for speed reference. Two analog inputs (4-20mA) programmable for speed reference, and/or measured process variable. j. Two analog outputs (4-20mA) each programmable for speed, or amps. 8. Provide communications to the drive via an RS -485 (single pair) port. The communications shall support drive control and monitoring via the Modbus/RTU industrial protocol The monitoring functionality shall include the ability to monitor real time output frequency, output current, and output power in addition to the status of the I/O connected to the drive, and current and past fault codes It shall be possible to monitor the VFD while the control is via terminal board or the keypad. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 ' 983-1268-400 16422-12 16422 Motor Controllers 1 Q. Spare Parts. Provide spare parts for each drive consisting of (at a minimum) the manufacturer's recommended spare parts, plus (if not included in the manufacturer's recommendations) one spare controller main board for each different type of board, one set of power output semiconductor devices (IGBTs) for each different type of drive, one spare base driver board for each different type of board, one set of power semiconductor devices (diodes, SCRs, or similar) used -in -the power conduction path (AC to DC conversion), one spare keypad assembly, and three spare fuses for each type of fuse in the unit. R. Provide complete documentation of each drive including operation and maintenance manuals, as shipped drawings specific to the drive with non - applicable information clearly marked as non -applicable, and a listing of the configuration/programming parameters as programmed in the drive at the time of project acceptance. S. Any modifications of the standard drive which are necessary to meet the requirements of this specification shall be provided by the manufacturer. Distributor or system integrator changes to the VFD manufacturer's product are specifically disallowed. 2.4 ENCLOSURES A. Description: Surface—mounted or free standing enclosures per the application as described in Section 16050 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Devices are factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated. B. Provide auxiliary devices meeting the requirements of Section 16050 "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods". 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Select features of each motor controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, drive, and load; and configuration of pilot device and control circuit affecting controller functions. B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled. C. Use fractional—horsepower manual controllers for single—phase motors, unless otherwise indicated. D. Hand—Off—Automatic Selector Switches. In covers of manual and magnetic controllers of motors started and stopped by automatic controls or interlocks with other equipment. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16422-13 16422 Motor Controllers 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install independently mounted motor—control devices according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Location. Locate controllers within sight of motors controlled, unless otherwise indicated. C. For control equipment at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on structural—steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks conforming to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." D. Motor—Controller Fuses: Install indicated fuses in each fusible switch. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify motor—control components and control wiring according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install wiring between motor—control devices according to Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables." B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. C. Connect hand—off—automatic switch and other automatic control devices where available. 1. Unless shown otherwise, connect selector switches to bypass only the manual and automatic control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in the hand position. 2. Unless shown otherwise, connect selector switches with motor—control circuit in both hand and automatic positions for safety—type control devices such as low— and high—pressure cutouts, high—temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings. Tighten field— connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to manufacturer's published torque—tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.6 START-UP AND TRAINING SERVICES A. Provide the services of the manufacturer's factory authorized representative for start up of variable frequency drives and training of the Owner's personnel for operation and maintenance of the drives. 1 Inspect the installation of each drive for conformance with the manufacturer's recommended installation practices. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16422-14 16422 Motor Controllers 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2. Program and/or configure each drive to properly operate the actual motor to which it is connected. Set programming parameters such as motor horsepower, voltage, current, code letter, full Toad amps, and similar items. Coordinate with the operational requirements of the process equipment and set parameters such as minimum and maximum speed, ramp times, span and range of analog inputs, and similar items. Document all programming and configuration parameters and include in the O&M manuals for the project. 3. Test the operation of each drive after fully programming/ configuring the drive. Reprogram and/or reconfigure and then retest as required to obtain proper operation of the driven equipment and control of the process. Document the final configuration and programming parameters after successful startup and provide copies of the documentation to the Engineer. 4. Provide a minimum of eight hours training to the Owner, at the Owner's facility, prior to start-up of the drives. Training shall cover installation, maintenance, operation, and problem troubleshooting for each type of drive provided, and shall delineate differences between individual drives where configuration, programming, or control functions are different for otherwise similar model drives. 5. Provide a minimum of eight hours additional training, program revisions, and maintenance at the Owner's facility approximately one to three months after completion of the project. 6. Provide a minimum of eight hours additional training, program revisions, and maintenance at the Owner's facility approximately 12 months after completion of the project, but prior to expiration of the warranty. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: After installing motor controllers and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, Sections 7.5, 7.6, and 7.16 Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units, and retest. 3.8 CLEANING A. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. Clean devices internally, using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16422-15 16422 Motor Controllers 1 SECTION 16440 I PANELBOARDS 1.0 GENERAL 1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes lighting and power panelboards and associated auxiliary I equipment rated 600 V and less. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section16050 "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for general materials and installation methods. 2. Section 16410 "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers" for circuit I breakers installed in panelboards. 1.3 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, accessory item, and component specified. 1 B. Shop Drawings: For panelboards Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations. Show tabulations of installed devices, major features, and voltage I rating. Include the following. 1. Enclosure type and mounting. 2. Bus configuration and current ratings 1 3 Short-circuit current rating. I 4. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices and auxiliary components. C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards and inclusion in the 1 maintenance manuals specified in Division 16. Submit final versions prior to closeout of project. III D Maintenance Data. For panelboard components to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Divisions 16. Include manufacturer's written instructions for testing circuit breakers 1 1 City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 I 983-1268-400 16440-1 16440 Panelboards 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: Utilize an independent testing agency meeting OSHA criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories, Title 29, Part 1907; or which is a full - member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association. B. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled". As defined in the NEC, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. C. Comply with NEC. D. Comply with NEMA PB 1. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Keys: Provide 3 spares of each type for panelboard cabinet lock. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Eaton Corp.; Westinghouse & Cutler -Hammer Products. 2. General Electric Co., Electrical Distribution & Control Div. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D Co. 2.2 PANELBOARD FABRICATION A. Enclosures: Surface -mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, 20" minimum width, of NEMA type complying with Section 16050 for the location installed. B. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps or screws. Front for surface - mounted panelboards shall be same dimensions as box. Fronts for flush panelboards shall overlap box, unless otherwise indicated. C. Directory Frame. Metal, mounted inside each panelboard door. D. Bus: Hard drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity. Insulated, bondable, full size neutral bus unless otherwise indicated. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch -circuit equipment ground conductors. Bonded to box. E. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type. F. Main Breaker: Vertical mounting. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16440-2 16440 Panelboards G. Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances, for the overcurrent protective device ampere ratings indicated for future installation of devices. 2.3 DISTRIBUTION, LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH -CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Feeder and Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt -on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. Feeder circuit breakers 200 amps and larger shall have long and short time trip units, each trip unit separately and individually adjustable for both time and pickup. B. Doors: 1. Dry locations. In panelboard front, with concealed hinges. Secure with flush catch and tumbler lock, all keyed alike. 2.4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. In accordance with Section 16410, except as modified herein. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessory items according to NEMA PB 1.1. 1. Setup, adjust and fasten in place flush trim and interiors. 2. Install circuit breakers as shown on the "Circuit Schedule" for each panelboard. Record all circuit breaker installation deviations from the "Circuit Schedule" which result from changes or additions to the work and show on the Record Drawings the actual size and pole position of all circuit breakers installed. B. Mounting Heights. Top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. C. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount flush panelboards uniformly flush with wall finish Space surface mounted panelboard with washers of neoprene or fiberglass to shim out from irregular surfaces or from damp surfaces. D. Circuit Directory: Prepare panelboards directories neatly typewritten in the same pole sequence as the panelboard stamping. Send a copy to the Engineer for his records. Prior to typing the final directories, verify room and equipment names and numbers with the Owner and modify circuit descriptions of areas/spaces to conform with the Owner's desires. Obtain approval of names and numbers before typing and installing. E. Do not remove knockouts for breaker positions unless a breaker is to be installed. Where twistouts or knockouts are removed in error, provide a circuit breaker (one pole, twenty ampere) to fill each position removed. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16440-3 16440 Panelboards 1 1 1 F. Provision for Future Circuits: Install panelboards in such a manner as to leave access to the box, knockouts, etc. for future circuit additions. Install conduits in rearmost knockouts, install neutral and ground bus wires in rear or least accessible locations first, leaving access for future additions. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Panelboard Nameplates. Label the exterior of each panelboard with engraved laminated -plastic or metal nameplates mounted with corrosion -resistant screws. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows. 1. Make insulation -resistance tests of each panelboard bus, component, and connecting supply, feeder, branch and control circuits. 2. Make continuity tests of each circuit. 3. Testing of circuit breakers shall only be required for main circuit breakers or circuit breakers 100 Ampere and larger. B. Testing Agency: Provide services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform specified testing. C. Testing: After installing panelboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.6 for molded -case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and retest. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Set field -adjustable circuit -breaker trip ranges as indicated, or requested by the Engineer. END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16440-4 16440 Panelboards SECTION 16443 SWITCHBOARDS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes power distribution switchboards and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V and less. B. Related Sections include the following. 1. Section 16050 "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for general materials and installation methods. 2. Section 16280 "Power Filters and Conditioners" for SPD (surge protective devices) installed in Switchboards. 3. Section 16410 "Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers" for circuit breakers installed in Switchboards. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. For each type of switchboard, accessory item, and component specified. B. Shop Drawings: For switchboards. Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations. Show tabulations of installed devices, major features, and voltage rating. Include the following. 1. Enclosure type and mounting. 2. Bus configuration and current ratings. 3. Short-circuit current rating of switchboard. 4. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices and auxiliary components. 5. Time current curves for each circuit breaker installed in the switchboard. 6. Switchboards submitted with dimensions larger than the available space for installation will be rejected. C. Maintenance Data. For switchboard components to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for testing circuit breakers. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16443-1 16443 Switchboards 1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency: Utilize an independent testing agency meeting OSHA criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories; or which is a full -member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association. B. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. C. Comply with NFPA 70. D. Comply with NEMA PB 2. E. Comply with UL 891 F. Switchboards, and the equipment contained within them, shall be factory assembled and wired as complete units by the manufacturer at the manufacturer's factory, except where shipping splits are required for shipping of the units. This requirement pertains to control wiring, metering equipment and wiring, and similar items and wiring located within the switchboard. G. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Space for installation of switchboards is limited. Drawings indicate typical dimensions for switchboards, including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and items. Switchboards with larger dimensions may be acceptable, but it is the responsibility of the Contractor to submit detailed drawings showing the required revisions to the structural, process, mechanical, electrical, and other plans to accommodate centers with larger dimensions. The Contractor shall coordinate the size of the switchboards with the available space and shall verify that the proposed switchboard is capable of being installed in the available space prior to making a submittal. Switchboards of dimensions larger than the available space shall not be submitted. The decision of the Engineer as to the acceptability of switchboards with larger dimensions than as shown on the Plans will be final. If deemed acceptable, it is the Contractor's responsibility to provide any required revisions to the structural, process, mechanical, electrical, and other designs without additional cost to the Owner. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following• 1. Eaton Corp.; Cutler -Hammer Products. 2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16443-2 16443 Switchboards 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D Co. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Enclosures: Free standing, steel, self-supporting, front access, deadfront, NEMA PB 2, Type 1 1 Each section fabricated to be plumb, square and aligned with adjacent sections without twisting, shimming or otherwise stressing the structure. 2. Entire structure finished as a unit with phosphate inhibitor, zinc chromate primer and baked gray enamel finish. 3. Provide complete channel base on all sides. 4. Access plates all have rolled edges and are screw attached. 5. Wiring gutters are hinged with'/ turn fasteners. 6. Each section has a nameplate giving. a. ampere rating of phase and neutral bussing b. short circuit current rating c. voltage rating d. system type (3 phase 3 wire, or 3 phase 4 wire) e. manufacturer's shipping order and/or serial number with date manufactured. B. Bus: Hard drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity. Insulated, bondable, full size neutral bus unless otherwise indicated. C. Main, Neutral, and Subfeed Lugs. Indent compression type, suitable for copper conductors. D. Equipment Ground Bus: 1/" x 2" copper with (minimum) 2 lugs for connections at each end. Bonded to enclosure. E Service Equipment Approval Listed for use as service equipment for switchboards with main service disconnect(s). F. Future Devices. Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances, for the overcurrent protective device ampere ratings indicated for future installation of devices. G. Special Features: Where shown on the Contract Document include the following features 1. Subfeed lugs in the size and quantity necessary to supply the loads shown. 2.3 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, handle lockable, meeting requirements of Section 16410. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16443-3 16443 Switchboards 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1. Characteristics: Frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and auxiliary devices as indicated and interrupting capacity equal or greater than the switchboard rating. 2. Lugs: Compression lugs and power -distribution connectors for copper conductors of number and size indicated. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install switchboards and accessory items according to NEMA PB 2. 1. Install switchboard plumb, level, and aligned across all sections. 2. Setup, adjust and fasten in place covers, trim and interiors. B. Do not remove knockouts or access plates for breaker, meter, switch or similar equipment or device positions unless equipment or a device is to be installed. C. Provision for Future Circuits: Install switchboards and conduit connections in such a manner as to leave access to the enclosure for future circuit additions. Place conduit in rear line where possible. D. Wiring in Switchboard Gutters: Run neatly parallel and perpendicular to enclosure. Arrange conductors into groups, and bundle and wrap with wire ties. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field -installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." B Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard with engraved laminated - plastic or metal nameplates mounted with corrosion -resistant screws. 3.3 GROUNDING A. Connect equipment grounding conductors to ground bus. B. Ground the switchboard per the requirements of the National Electrical Code and as indicated on the Drawings. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 16443-4 8/13/2010 16443 Switchboards 1 Make insulation -resistance tests of each switchboard bus, component, and connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits. 2. Make continuity tests of each circuit. B. Testing: After installing switchboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. 1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, Section 7 6 for molded -case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and retest. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Set field -adjustable switches and circuit -breaker trips as required for selective coordination. 1. Where circuit breakers are included in the short circuit coordination study, set the trip as recommended in the coordination study. 3.7 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16443-5 16443 Switchboards 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16460 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes dry -type distribution and specialty transformers rated 1000 V and Tess. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit the following. 1. Nameplate ratings 2. Mounting methods 3. Dimensioned plans, sections, elevation views and minimum clearances B. Wiring Diagrams. Submit manufacturer's wiring diagrams and clearly identify terminals for tap changing and connecting field -installed wiring. C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for tests specified in Part 3. D. Maintenance Data: Include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Employ an independent testing agency meeting the requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Control," and meeting OSHA criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories, Title 29, Part 1907; or a full -member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association. B. Listing and Labeling: Provide transformers specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled". As defined in NEC, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated -type unit throughout periods City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16460-1 16460 Transformers during which equipment is not energized and is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide transformers by one the following: 1. Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corp. 2. Square D, Groupe Schneider. 3. Tierney Transformer. 4. GE 5 Siemens 2.2 TRANSFORMERS, GENERAL A. Description. Factory -assembled and -tested, air-cooled units of types and sizes specified, designed for 60 -Hz service. B. Cores. Grain -oriented, nonaging silicon steel. C. Coils: Continuous copper windings without splices, except for taps. D. Internal Coil Connections. Brazed or pressure type. E. Enclosure. Complies with Section 16050 and NEMA 250 for the environment in which installed. 2.3 GENERAL-PURPOSE ENERGY EFFICIENT DISTRIBUTION AND POWER TRANSFORMERS A. Comply with NEMA ST 20 and list and label as complying with UL 1561. B. Comply with energy standards set forth in NEMA Standard TP -1. C. Cores: One leg per phase D. Windings. One coil per phase in primary and secondary. E. Insulation Class: 150 deg C class for transformers smaller or equal to 15 kVA. 1. Rated Temperature Rise: 80 deg C maximum rise above 40 deg C. F Taps: For transformers 3 kVA and larger, full -capacity taps in high-voltage windings are as follows: 1. Taps, 3 through 25 kVA. Two 5 -percent taps below rated high voltage. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16460-2 16460 Transformers 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2.4 FINISHES A. Indoor Units: Manufacturer's standard paint over corrosion -resistant pretreatment and primer. 2.5 CONTROL AND SIGNAL TRANSFORMERS I A. Units comply with NEMA ST 1 and are listed and labeled as complying with UL 506. 1 B. Ratings Continuous duty. If rating is not indicated, provide capacity exceeding peak load by 50 percent minimum. C. Description. Self -cooled, 2 windings. I2.6 FINISHES 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A. Indoor Units: Manufacturer's standard paint over corrosion -resistant pretreatment and primer. B. Outdoor Units: Comply with ANSI C57.12.28. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests. Design and routine tests comply with referenced standards. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Arrange equipment to provide adequate spacing for access and for circulation of cooling air per manufacturer's recommendations. B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.2 GROUNDING 1 3.3 1 1 1 A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Grounding" and NEC for materials and installation requirements. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test to ensure transformer is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances, is installed according to the Contract Documents, and is suitable for energizing. B. Report: Submit a written report of observations and tests. Report defective materials and installation. C. Tests. Include the following minimum inspections and tests according to manufacturer's written instructions. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91 for test methods and data correction factors. ICity of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 1 16460-3 16460 Transformers 1 Inspect accessible components for cleanliness, mechanical and electrical integrity, and damage or deterioration. Verify that temporary shipping bracing has been removed. Include internal inspection through access panels and covers. 2. Inspect bolted electrical connections for tightness according to manufacturer's published torque values or, if not available, those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3. Insulation Resistance. Perform winding to winding and winding to ground megohmmeter tests of each primary and secondarywinding. D. Test Failures. Compare test results with specified performance or manufacturer's data. Correct deficiencies identified by tests and retest. Verify that transformers meet specified requirements. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at utilization equipment throughout normal operating cycle of facility Record primary and secondary voltages and tap settings and submit with test results. END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16460-4 16460 Transformers SECTION 16510 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes interior lighting fixtures (including fixtures normally mounted on the building), lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, and accessory materials such as frames, lenses, diffusers, hangers, spacers, stems and canopies, auxiliary junction boxes and other miscellaneous hardware as required for complete installation of all lighting equipment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Fixture. A complete lighting unit, exit sign, or emergency lighting unit. Fixtures include lamps and parts required to distribute light, position and protect lamps, and connect lamps to power supply. B. Average Life: The time after which 50 percent fails and 50 percent survives under normal conditions. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General. Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data describing fixtures, lamps, ballasts, and emergency lighting units. Arrange Product Data for fixtures in order of fixture designation. Include data on features and accessories and the following: 1. Outline drawings indicating dimensions and principal features of fixtures. 2. Electrical Ratings and Photometric Data: Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps. C. Maintenance data for fixtures to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NEC and that are listed and labeled by UL where available. B. Listing and Labeling: Provide fixtures, and accessory components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled for their indicated use and installation conditions on Project. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16510-1 16510_Interior and Exterior Lighting 1. Special Listing and Labeling: Provide fixtures for use in damp or wet locations that are specifically listed and labeled for such use. 2. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled". As defined in the NEC, Article 100. 3. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications. A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. C. Coordinate fixtures, mounting hardware, and trim with ductwork, insulation, ceiling system and other items, including work of other trades, required to be mounted on ceiling or in ceiling space. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses. 1% of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Ballasts: 2% of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 3. Globes and Guards. 5% of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in the Lighting Fixture Schedule. 2.2 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL A. No visible labels, trademarks or monograms on the exterior of the lighting fixtures or on lens or diffusers B. Metal Parts. Free from burrs, sharp corners, and edges. C. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, except as indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access. Smooth operating without the use of tools, intended for finger operation, free from light leakage at seams, joints or junctions visible in the installed condition under operating conditions; and arranged to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in operating position. E. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectance as follows, except as otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16510-2 16510_Interior and Exterior Lighting 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film. 90 percent. F. Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or water white, annealed crystal glass, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Plastic: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 2. Lens Thickness: 0.125 inch minimum; except where greater thickness is indicated. 3. Pattern for plastic lenses. K12 prismatic refractors. Pattern No. 12 is not acceptable. 4. Approved manufacturers: a. Holophane b. KSH Plastics c. Carolite Plastics d. Plaskolite, Inc. G. Provide gaskets on all trims and housings of "wet" location fixtures. Provide non- corrosive type plaster rings, hangers, trim and hardware in wet locations. H. Fixture Supports a. Provide hook hangers for fixtures where indicated or specified consisting of an integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking type plug. Fluorescent Ballasts: Electronic integrated circuit, solid-state, full -light -output, energy-efficient type compatible with lamps and lamp combinations to which connected. 1. Certification by Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL). 2. Labeling by Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CBM). 3. Type: Class P with automatic reset integral protector device set to limit cast temperature to one -hundred -ten degrees Celsius maximum under abnormal conditions, high power factor. 4. Sound Rating. "A" rating. 5. Voltage: Match connected circuits. 6. Lamp Flicker Less than 5 percent. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16510-3 16510_Interior and Exterior Lighting 7 Minimum Power Factor: 90 percent. 8 Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of Ballast Current: Less than 12 percent. 9. Conform to FCC Regulations Part 15, Subpart J for electromagnetic interference. 10. Multilamp Ballasts and maximum ratings. Use 2, 3, or 4 lamp ballasts for multilamp fixtures where indicated, with maximum input wattage ratings per Ansi C82.2 as follows: a. 1 lamp F32T8-32 watts. b. 2 lamp F32T8-62 watts. c. 3 lamp F32T8-92 watts. 11. Lamp -ballast connection method does not reduce normal rated life of lamps. 12. Low -Temperature Fluorescent Ballasts. Comply with above requirements, except ballast may be Class P electromagnetic type. Starting temperature is minus 20 deg C or colder. 13. Manufacturers: a. Advance b. General Electric c. Motorola J. High -Intensity -Discharge (HID) Fixtures: Conform to UL 1572. K. Encapsulation. Manufacturer's standard epoxy -encapsulated model designed to minimize audible fixture noise. 2.3 LAMPS A. Provide lamps for each fixture which comply with ANSI C78 series that is applicable to each type of lamp. B. Fluorescent Color Temperature and Minimum Color -Rendering Index (CRI). 4100 K and 85 CRI, except as otherwise indicated. C. Noncompact Fluorescent Lamp Life. Rated average is 20,000 hours at 3 hours per start when used on rapid start circuits. D Manufacturers: 1. General Electric 2. Phillips 3. Sylvania City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 8/13/2010 16510-4 16510_Interior and Exterior Lighting 2.4 FUSES A. Provide fuses in fixtures mounted more than eight feet above floor or operated at 277 volts. B. Fast acting, current limiting fuses, coordinated with the ballast and lamp operating characteristics, so as to avoid false tripping, yet provide fault clearing before damage occurs to the fixture. Bussman Type HFL in-line fuse holder and Bussman Type GLR fuse, sized at two -hundred percent of the ballast current rating. 2.5 FINISHES A. Manufacturer's standard, except as otherwise indicated, applied over corrosion - resistant treatment or primer, free of streaks, runs, holidays, stains, blisters, and similar defects. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Coordination with other work. 1. Coordinate lighting fixture size and design, frame requirements, and hanging or mounting devices for project mounting conditions before ordering lighting fixtures. Consult the Drawings for details of ceiling and wall construction; provide lighting fixtures suitable for the particular type of ceiling or wall at each location. 2. Adjust light fixtures as required - near piping, equipment, etc., to protect from physical damage and provide sufficient clearance to install lamps and to maintain Tens, reflectors, ballasts, etc.. Where pendant mounted fixtures are in conflict with ducts and piping, coordinate the location and mounting heights of the fixtures to the available space left between the various ducts and piping. 3. Locate fixtures so that doors and other equipment will not damage them at any time. 4 Prepare irregular surfaces for mounting. B. Fixture support 1. Install fixtures with supports, brackets and trim as recommended by the fixture manufacturer to suit the particular building construction and use. Align each fixture to ceiling structure. 2. Install surface mounted fixtures tight to the ceiling construction. Provide shims or spacers as required to keep surface mounted fixture from warping or twisting due to uneven surfaces. For suspended fixtures, use stems and chain attachments that cannot be displaced from hangers by an upward force. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16510-5 16510_Interior and Exterior Lighting 3. Provide fixture hangers and attachments on bracket mounted fluorescent fixtures in addition to raceway connections. Provide a minimum of two per fixture at the quarter points for fixtures of eight feet or less. Install additional hangers where recommended by the fixture manufacturer. 4. Secure surface fixtures to ceiling system, roof structure or slabs with a fastener such as lag screw, lag bolt, toggle bolt, cinch anchor or stud to support the fixture plus one -hundred pounds at each support. Nails or similar fasteners are not approved for lighting fixture support. 5. Do not support fixtures from ceiling material other than structural or framing material. Provide supports, spacers, channels, etc., necessary to support lighting fixtures where fixtures are located so that they cannot be connected directly to structure members. Provide additional framing to directly support fixtures where construction is such that mounting channels, strongbacks or bridging is required to support fixtures. Provide additional support material which matches the structure material. 6. Provide outlet boxes or other supports for lighting fixtures which are of sufficient strength to support at least four times the weight of fixture or one -hundred pounds, whichever is greater. Support all fixtures weighing more than fifty pounds independently of outlet box. 7 Do not support fluorescent fixtures with forty-eight inches or longer lamps from outlet box ears. Provide suitable fixture stud in box for each fixture. 8. Support all surface mounted fixtures more than eighteen inches wide at or near each corner, in addition to support from outlet box. C. Install fluorescent bi-pin lamps in sockets after polarity, voltage and connections have been checked with a bi-pin tester or volt meter. Fluorescent bi-pin lamps shall be installed with correct rotation of lamps as indicated by indents or tabs. D. Install fixtures in rows or grids true to line. Install fixtures in a common area at the same level or grade. Install continuous runs of fixtures straight and true with joining straps, couplings, and nipples. Maintain spacing for fixtures as dimensioned or shown on the reflected ceiling plan and do not arbitrarily change because of ceiling pattern, etc . Symbols on Drawings which are undimensioned show approximate locations and care shall be used to locate fixtures on centers of spaces, at the quarter points, or as indicated. Any changes in fixture layout must be approved in writing by the Engineer. E. Lamping: Where specific lamp designations are not indicated, lamp units according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Ground the lighting units. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque -tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16510-6 16510_Interior and Exterior Lighting 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replaced damaged fixtures and components. B. Tests. Verify normal operation of each fixture after fixtures have been installed and circuits have been energized with normal power source. C. Replace or repair malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until all units operate properly. D. Report results of tests. E. Replace fixtures that show evidence of corrosion during Project warranty period. F. Provide replacement lamps for all lamps which fail prior to completion of the work. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean fixture lens, diffusers, enclosures on fixtures. Dirty enclosures, lens or diffusers shall be removed, washed and rinsed as recommended by fixture manufacturer. 3.5 LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE A. Lighting Fixture Schedule is shown on the Drawings. END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16510-7 16510_Interior and Exterior Lighting SECTION 16910 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER HARDWARE 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes' 1. Programmable logic controller (PLC) control system(s), including a. hardware, installation, shop testing, field testing, and demonstration. b. PLC programming will be completed outside the Construction Contract by others. B. Related Sections include the following 1. Section 16940 "Control Panels" for control panels housing PLC equipment. 2. Section 16950 "Radio Telemetry" for radio telemetry equipment used for PLC to PLC communications. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Referenced Standards. 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems. b. ICS 1 1, Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control. c. ICS 4, Terminal Blocks for Industrial Use. d. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). a. National Electric Code (NEC). 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16910-1 16910_Programmable Logic Controller 1. The system includes central processing units (CPUs), input/output (I/O) modules, communication modules, power supplies, and associated accessory items to provide a complete and functional control system. B. Performance Requirements 1. The installed system shall be capable of performing the functional and operational algorithms required for control of the process. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Manufacturer's data sheets for each hardware component including specific model numbers for each device, and size of memory provided in each CPU. 2. Manufacturer's installation manual, operation and maintenance manual(s) for each component and/or device. B. Shop Drawings. 1. Drawings a. System diagram showing the arrangement, connection and interconnection of all PLC system components. b. Wiring diagrams for the PLC equipment in each control enclosure showing devices, wiring internal to the center, terminal blocks, and distinguishing field wiring from wiring internal to the enclosure. c. System communications diagram showing equipment communications bus interconnections, including terminal numbers for cables not factory terminated. 2. Schedule of system I/O including the following data: a. I/O point, with name, tag number, and indication of type and the characteristics of the I/O signal. 3. Listing of spare parts provided with the system. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See Section 01300. 2. Provide specific information including: a. Manufacturer's published operation and maintenance manual, and troubleshooting guide. b. Information for obtaining assistance and troubleshooting, parts ordering information, and field service personnel requests. 3. Include final system drawings, and final I/O lists. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16910-2 16910_Programmable Logic Controller 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications. 1. Installer has experience successfully installing and starting up a minimum of three water system installations of similar size and scope. Installer shall be Technical Systems, Total Energy Management, Control Freek, or Townsend Controls. B. Shop Testing 1. The PLC hardware and interconnection wiring will be tested during the Control Panel shop test as described in Section 16940. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products by the following manufacturer 1 Allen Bradley MicroLogix 1400 Series. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Conform to NEMA ICS 1.1 for installation and application of the PLC system. B. The equipment consists of fully integrated microprocessor units specifically designed for operation in unconditioned audible noise and high vibration areas. 1. Includes analog, digital, and communications interfaces for interface directly with ISA or other industry standard transducers, actuators, and communications equipment without the need for intervening conditioning devices. C. Equipment operates in 32 to 104 Degrees Fahrenheit temperature and 5 to 95 percent relative humidity, non -condensing. Equipment does not require cooling fans or other heating or conditioning equipment to operate within this environmental range. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Provide components as indicated. B. Provide all incidental materials and equipment required for a complete, functional, and successfully operating PLC system. These items include, but are not limited to: 1. items ordinarily furnished as part of a complete system C. PLC System Central Processor Unit (CPU): 1. Allen Bradley 1766-L32BXB. D. Input/output (I/O) Modules. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16910-3 16910_Programmable Logic Controller 1. I/O modules for control panels provided under this Section: a. 24 VDC Discrete input modules 1) Allen Bradley 1762-IQ8 b. Analog Input modules: 1) Allen Bradley 1762-IF4 c. RTD Input modules: 1) Allen Bradley 1762-IR4 d. Analog output modules: 1) Allen Bradley 1762-0F4 E. Operator Interface: Allen Bradley Panelview Plus 1000. Catalog number 2711 P- B10C4D2. F. PLC device arrangement: 1. Component placement: a. Comply with NEMA ICS -6 for mounting, ventilation, and grounding. b. Locate power supplies with sufficient clearance for circulation of cooling air. c. Do not place CPU or I/O modules directly above the power supply. d. Locate devices supplied with line power (transformers, power supplies, surge suppressors, etc.) to keep power wire runs within the enclosure as short as possible. e. Place circulating fans or cooling equipment, if required, close to major heat generating devices. 2. Wiring: a. Run wiring within the enclosure in wireways and label wires at both ends. 1) Wireways have removable covers. b. Separate AC power wiring from low-level DC wiring, I/O power supply wiring, and I/O wiring or cables. c. Grounding: 1) Ground I/O modules to a central ground bus. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16910-4 16910_Programmable Logic Controller 1 2) Ground the enclosure to the ground bus. 1 d. Factory wire all I/O module points, including spares, to labeled terminals. 1 e. Termination requirements* 1) Make field device connections to I/O modules by I terminating all field wiring on labeled terminals within the enclosure. 2) Terminals are suitable for terminating #12 through #18 1 AWG conductors. 3) Provide minimum 20% spare unlabeled terminals. 1 4) Provide terminals for individual termination of each signal shield. 1 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Provide all accessories required, whether indicated or not, for a complete PLC1 control system to accomplish the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. 1. Interconnection cables: For communications and programming. 1 B. Provide one complete copy of the manufacturer's programming software for the 1 PLC, licensed to the Owner, along with one copy of the manufacturer's programming manuals for each model or series of PLC. C. Provide one complete copy of the manufacturer's communications software 1 program, licensed to the Owner. 2.5 EXTRA MATERIALS 1 A. Provide the following extra materials* 1. Provide one spare processor module for each type of processor module 1 furnished. Provide at least one spare. 2. Provide one spare I/O card for every 10 cards, or fraction thereof, of each 1 type of card installed. Provide at least one spare. 3. Provide a list of the manufacturer's recommended spares for I maintenance purposes. Include in the list any special tools and test equipment necessary or recommended by the manufacturer for the maintenance of the complete system. Provide any recommended spares not supplied above along with the recommended special tools and test I equipment. 1 City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 1 983-1268-400 16910-5 16910_Programmable Logic Controller 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install PLC control system in the control panels (See Section 16940) in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 SHOP TESTING A. A shop test shall be conducted to test, verify and demonstrate access to and functionality of the PLC system. In conjunction with the Engineer, test each I/O point for proper operation. Test each discrete I/O point in the "on" and "off' position. Test each analog point at three values (0.5%, 50%, and 99.5%). Testing shall be performed at the field wiring terminals for each I/O point. The Engineer shall provide a laptop computer to monitor the PLC central processor unit during the shop test. 3.3 FIELD TESTING A. A field test shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer to test, verify and demonstrate access to and proper functionality of the PLC system after installation at the site. Test each I/O point for proper operation, where possible operating the actual field device to provide the signal to the PLC. Test each discrete I/O point in the "on" and "off" position. Test each analog point at a minimum of three values (nominally 0.5%, 50%, and 99.5%). 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate the system in accordance with Section 16010 END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16910-6 16910_Programmable Logic Controller SECTION 16940 CONTROL PANELS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes. 1 Control panels (whether provided under Division 16, or provided, or specified to be provided, with equipment specified under other Divisions). 2. Control panels specified under this Section include. a. Gardner Well Control Panel (GWCP) B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section 1. Section16050 "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for general materials and installation methods. 2. Section 16910 "Programmable Logic Controller Hardware" for PLC equipment for pump control and coordination. 3. Section 16950 "Radio Telemetry" for radio telemetry equipment used for SCADA communications. 1.3 REFERENCES A. Referenced Standards: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) a. ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems. b ICS 4, Terminal Blocks for Industrial Use. c. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. d. Publication No.250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V maximum). 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a National Electric Code (NEC) 3. Joint Industrial Council a. JIC-EMP-1 City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16940-1 16940 Control Panels 1 ' 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Control Panels 1. The system includes new control panels for control and/or monitoring of the process equipment. Control panels, whether provided under Division 16 or other Divisions, shall meet the requirements of this Section. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 01300. ' 2. Dimensioned and to -scale panel layout drawings. 3. Materials of construction. 1 4. Drawings showing conduit and wiring access locations. 5. Elementary wiring diagrams and terminal block drawings, differentiating Ibetween panel and field wiring. 6. Bill of Materials including the reference name or number, quantity, complete English language description, manufacturer, model number, Ilocal supplier and wiring or piping reference. Information shall include manufacturer name, catalog descriptions, wiring and piping diagrams, dimensional drawings, anchoring details, installation instruction, and test 1 results. 7. Listing of spare parts provided with the system. 1 8. Product Information: including manufacturer name, catalog descriptions, ratings, wiring and piping diagrams, dimensional drawings, anchoring details, installation instruction, and test results. I 9. Loop diagrams with all components connected per ISA standards. 1 10. Nameplate text. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1 1. See Section 01300. 2. Provide manufacturer's operating and maintenance manuals for each Idevice or item provided. 3. Recommended spare parts stocking list including those provided with system. I4. Record Drawings of completed control panels. I1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Control panels supplied under this Section shall be provided by a single ' manufacturer, unless provided with equipment specified under Division 11. The City of Yakima Gardner Well 1 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16940-2 16940 Control Panels Control Panel shall be supplied by Total Energy Management (Richland, WA), Townsend Controls (Pasco, WA), Control Freek (Spokane Valley, WA), TSI (Lynnwood, WA) or approved equal. B. Provide control panels bearing the label of a testing laboratory recognized by the State of Washington, or otherwise acceptable to the State of Washington Department of Labor and Industries. C. Submit and obtain approval of shop drawings and make approved shop drawings available prior to placement of conduits in slabs to ensure placement is coordinated with panel access locations. D. Test panels in the presence of the Engineer prior to shipment to project site. Notify the Engineer at least two weeks before testing. Testing shall be performed at the panel fabricator's shop. 1. Provide a test plan at time of notification of testing. 2 The entire assembled panel shall be meggered and tested to be free from grounds and shorts. 3. Controllers, circuits and interlocks shall be rung out and tested to assure that they function correctly before the panel is tested. Each device and control loop shall be tested and demonstrated to function properly in each mode (such as "hand", "local", "automatic"). Discrete input signals shall be tested in both the "on" and "off" state. Analog signals (4-20 milliamp, or similar type) shall each be tested at not less than three values (4.0 mA, 12 mA, and 20 0 mA). Test results shall be documented. 4. Correct, replace, or repair panel wiring, and/or components until testing demonstrates proper operation. Do not ship panels to the site until testing has demonstrated satisfactory operation of the panels to the Engineer. 5. Provide updated and complete 'as shipped' drawings at the time of final testing. The Engineer shall review the drawings against the panel construction at the time of final testing. Drawings which do not reflect the actual construction of the panel will need to be revised and reviewed again by the Engineer against the actual construction prior to shipment of the panel to the job site. 'As shipped' drawings which require revisions shall be submitted to the Engineer for review prior to the actual field review of these drawings against the panel construction. This process of revision and review of the drawings will be repeated as necessary to produce drawings which reflect the actual construction of the panel at the time of shipment. Do not ship panels to the site until the 'as-shipped' drawings are updated, complete, and reflect the actual 'as-shipped' status of the panel. 6. Attention of the Contractor is directed to the fact that more than one shop test and/or review of the panel wiring/drawings may be required. If the first shop test is not satisfactory, or results in the need to make revisions to the panel and/or 'as-shipped' drawings that cannot be affected during the course of the shop test, then a repeat shop test and/or review of the drawings against the construction will be required. The presence of the City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16940-3 16940 Control Panels Engineer at up to two shop tests/reviews will be without cost to the Contractor. If more than two shop tests/reviews are required, then the Contractor shall be required to reimburse the Engineer for the Engineer's costs for the third and each subsequent shop test/review. E. Revise all drawings upon completion of the work to show "as shipped" condition of the panel. F. Conduct a field test of the panel in the presence of the Engineer after installation of the panel at the site. Testing shall be conducted by physically actuating signaling devices (where possible), installing temporary jumpers, or artificially imposing signals on the field wiring. The purpose of the test is to establish proper operation of the field devices, the integrity of the field wiring, and proper connection of field devices to the panel. The Engineer may choose to install a program in the PLC at the time of testing to facilitate determination of proper operation of the control and monitoring systems. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer to provide for as complete a testing of the control and monitoring systems as is practical prior to placing the panel on line for actual control and/or monitoring of the process. The Contractor shall make corrections or repairs to the wiring and/or devices as necessary to provide proper operation of the system. 1. Provide Engineer 2 weeks notice prior to field testing. G. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Space for installation of control panels is limited. Drawings indicate typical dimensions for equipment, including clearances between control panels and adjacent surfaces and items. Control panels with larger dimensions may be acceptable, but it is the responsibility of the Contractor to submit detailed drawings showing the required revisions to the structural, process, mechanical, electrical, and other plans to accommodate equipment with larger dimensions. The Contractor shall coordinate the size of control panels with the available space and required clearances and shall verify that the proposed equipment can be installed in the available space with the required clearance prior to making a submittal. Equipment of dimensions larger than the available space with the required clearance shall not be submitted. The decision of the engineer as to the acceptability of equipment with larger dimensions than as shown on the Plans will be final. If deemed acceptable, it is the Contractor's responsibility to provide any required revisions to the structural, process, mechanical, electrical, and other designs without additional cost to the Owner. Note that the width (west to east) of the electrical room in the Cutler Way Booster Pump Station has been increased from 7,4: to 8'8". 1.7 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. After completion of shop assembly and testing, enclose panels in heavy-duty polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection from dust and moisture. Place dehumidifiers inside the polyethylene covering. B. Skid -mount the equipment for final transport. Show shipping weight on shipping tags, together with instructions for unloading, transporting, storing, and handling on job site. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16940-4 16940 Control Panels 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Control panel enclosures are factory UL labeled enclosures fabricated into a rigid, self supporting structure. B. Hinges* Stainless steel. C. Nameplates* Phenolic. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Fuses 1. Control power fuses are FRN for ratings above ten amperes and FNQ for ten amperes and below. FRN fuses are mounted in phenolic blocks with a fuse puller mounted adjacent to them. FNQ fuses are mounted in a buss HPC fuseholder. Label all fuseholders with fuse identification number and fuse size and type. Provide three spare fuses of each type and size in each panel. Provide box mounted on panel interior marked "SPARE FUSES" to hold the spares. B. Pilot devices (control units and stations)* heavy duty, oil -tight type per NEMA ICS -1, pilot lights push -to -test transformer type 1. Allen-Bradley 2. Cutler -Hammer 3. Furnas 4. General Electric 5. Square D 6. ABB C. Relays 1. Control relays for switching 120 VAC power circuits shall be electro- mechanical machine tool, heavy-duty type per NEMA ICS Standard with 120 volt coils and double -break contacts rated B-300 by NEMA standards* Finder 60 Series, General Electric CR 120, Gould -ITE J10, Square D Company Class 8501, Type G or equal Equip relays with surge suppressers. IEC rated relays are not permitted. 2. Control relays for logic control circuits shall be permitted to be enclosed octal or 11 pin socket mounted type relays. Coils shall be rated 120 VAC or 24 VDC (as required). Contacts shall be double break type rated B300 by NEMA standards. Potter -Brumfield, Finder or equal. 3 Time delay relays shall be octal DINrail mount electronic relays Finder or equal. City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 8/13/2010 16940-5 16940 Control Panels D. Terminals 1. Phenolic barrier type strip screw terminals for power circuits. ABB or approved equal. 2. Rail mounted, thermoplastic or thermoset insulating frame, compression clamp style terminal blocks for control and instrumentation circuits. ABB, or approved equal. E. Power supplies: 1. 24 VDC: shall be 120 VAC input, 24 VDC output. Power supplies shall be switching type. Weidmuller, CP SNT 120W 24V 5A, Sola SDN2.5-24- 100P, SDN4-24-100LP, or equal. Ensure the power supply has adequate current capacity to charge fully discharged batteries and adjustable output voltage to match battery float voltage. Alternatively, provide a power supply with special provisions to charge batteries. 2. 12 VDC: shall be 24VDC input, 12 VDC output. Sola 30SD12N, or equal. F. Batteries shall be 7 Amp -hour capacity, 12 volt sealed rechargeable units. Yuasa NP7-12, or equal G. Ethernet switches shall be DIN rail mounted with at least 4 100 Base TX / 10 Base T ports and shall be powered from 24VDC. B&B Electronics EIR-308 or equal. H. Circuit breakers shall be ABB S201, Cutler Hammer WMS, or approved equal. I. Power surge arrestor shall be General Electric Tranquell secondary arrestor 9L15ECA001, or approved equal. J. Conductors* 1. Class C stranded copper conductors of SIS or MTW insulation (for 120 VAC or 24 VDC power or discrete signal circuits). 2. Stranded #18 AWG copper conductor with thermoplastic insulation, foil or stranded wire shielding, and overall gray PVC jacket (for analog instrumentation circuits). K. Wireways shall be a minimum of one inch wide and three inches deep with removable snap on covers and perforated walls for easy wire entrance. Wireways shall be constructed of non-metallic materials with a voltage insulation in excess of the maximum voltage carried therein. L. RJ -45 Bulkhead Passthrough shall have a CAT 5e 8P8C Jack on both sides of the bulkhead. Jack must be installed to maintain enclosure rating (NEMA 1 or 12) and allow Cat 5e compliant channels (at least suitable of 100Base-TX signaling) between internal switch and external computer connected with Cat 5e patch cords. Provide with suitable dust cover from same manufacturer. Provide Molex part numbers 0847000001 (Double Jack) and 084700003 (Dust Cover) or equal. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16940-6 16940 Control Panels M. DIN Rail mounted RS -232 to RS -485 convertor shall be B&B Electronics 485DRCi, or equal. N. Protocol convertor shall be capable of Allen Bradley DF1 Full duplex and SquareD Symax protocols. The unit shall be powered by 24 VDC. Miille OMNII- COMM model 266-300-210, or equal. O. Communications cables shall be provided as noted on the Drawings. Cables shall be factory made. Shop fabricated cables are not acceptable. P. Wireways Panduit, Panel Channel or equal. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Panel Nameplates and Identification: 1. Identify each item on the control panel with rectangular nameplates. 2. Provide nameplates of rigid phenolic plastic laminate with engraved lettering or engraved metal plate with filled lettering. Use black background with white lettering. 3. Minimum letter height is 1/2 inch for instrument description and 1/4 inch height for instrument tag number. 4 Provide each panel with a 2" by 10" (minimum) main nameplate with1 inch high lettering with panel identification. 5. Abbreviations are not permitted unless approved by the Engineer or specifically shown on the nameplates, schedules, or drawings. 6 Install nameplates plumb and parallel to the lines of doors or structure to which they are attached. Attach to the sheet metal structure by a thin coat of adhesive and sheet metal screws Make adhesive and screw application in a manner to avoid buckling or distorting nameplates due to use of excessive adhesive or over tightening of screws. 2.4 SPARE PARTS A. Provide one spare for each of the following components. 1. Power Supplies 2. Protocol convertor 3 Ethernet Switch 4. RS -232 to RS -485 convertor 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. General. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16940-7 16940 Control Panels 1. Control panels shall be factory or shop fabricated units completely assembled, wired and tested before shipment to the job site. 2. Panel construction, in general, shall meet JIC EMP -1 standards and applicable NEMA and IEEE standards. 3. The panels shall be constructed in accordance with electrical testing laboratory standards and shall be so labeled (the standards of a recognized electrical testing laboratory). 4. Size panels for the enclosed equipment and the available space for mounting of the panel, but not smaller than as shown on the Contract Documents. 5. Panels shall be descaled, cleaned and primed in preparation for painting. Painting shall consist of one coat of flat white enamel in the interior and two coats of hard finish exterior enamel, gray in color for the exterior. Paint shall be suitable for field touch-up. Spare paint (one quart) shall be provided for touch-up purposes. B. Component Installation. 1. Minimize welding to panel fronts and avoid distortion of panel metal. 2. Reinforce around areas of the enclosure weakened by openings or mounting of heavy equipment/components. 3. Accurately and cleanly cut or nibble cut-outs, and finish free of sharp edges or burrs. Make cutouts plumb, level, and on-line vertically or horizontally within 1/32 of an inch where components are in rows or columns. 4. Provide minimum 1-5/8 inches spacing between horizontal rows of externally mounted components; 1-1/2 inches minimum between vertical columns of components. 5. The distance from the bottom row of components to the floor shall be not less than 36 inches, unless specifically shown as less. In general, all indicating lights, pushbuttons,and similar control devices, shall be mounted in accordance with the sequence of operation from left to right and top to bottom. 6. Provide minimum 1/4 inch spacing between components mounted on the panel sub -plate. Provide minimum spacing between the component and the wire duct of 1-1/2 inches above and one inch below. Provide additioanl space if required to access terminals, adjusting screws, and similar items. 7. Components mounted in the interior, and not DIN rail mounted, shall be shall be fastened to the interior subpanel using machine screws, lockwashers and nuts plus adhesive to insure vibration -free attachment. Components mounted to DIN rail shall be securely mounted the DIN rail, and shall have the DIN rail fastened to the interior subpanel using sheet metal screws with lock washers, or machine screws with lockwashers and City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16940-8 16940 Control Panels nuts. Utilize terminal end blocks as necessary to prevent unwanted sliding of devices along DIN rail. 8. Interior component mounting and wiring shall be grouped as much as possible by function and then by component type. Interiors shall be so arranged that control relays, terminal blocks, fuses, etc., can be replaced or added without disturbing adjacent components. C. Panel Wiring: 1. Line voltage (120 volt or higher) wiring in panels shall be Class C stranded copper conductor with Type MTW or SIS insulation. Color coding of insulation shall be black for power, white for 120V neutrals, red for AC controls which derive their source from within the panel, yellow for AC controls which derive their source external to the panel, blue for low voltage DC controls, green for grounding conductors. 2. Instrumentation wiring for DC analog circuits shall be stranded #18 AWG, minimum size copper conductor with conductor insulation of thermoplastic with foil or stranded wire shielding and overall gray PVC jacket. 3. Shop or factory wire panels to identified terminal blocks equipped with screw type lugs. 4. Provide raceways for panel wiring. a Size raceways per the requirements of NEC. b. Provide panel wireways between each row of components, and adjacent to each terminal strip. c. Wireways shall be a minimum of one inch wide and three inches deep with removable snap -on covers and perforated walls for easy wire entrance. Wireways shall be constructed of non- metallic materials with a voltage insulation in excess of the maximum voltage carried therein. Panduit type LG, Panel Channel or equal. 5. Provide wire bending space per NEMA ICS 6. 6 Label wiring within the panel with wire numbers and run in wiring duct neatly tied and bundled with tie wraps or similar materials Identify each wire termination, including all jumpers, with permanently marked, heat shrink type wire markers. Arrange wire labels to permit reading of identification when installed. Apply heat per manufacturer's instructions to create a tight fit of the label to the wire 7 Connect wiring internal to the panel to the "inside" of the terminal strip. Connect field wiring to the "outside' of the terminal strip. Wires to enclosure door mounted components are considered as internal wires. Connect no more than two wires to any one control terminal point. Provide terminal jumpers where more than two wires terminate at the same point. City of Yakima Gardner Well 983-1268-400 8/13/2010 16940-9 16940 Control Panels 8. Arrange wiring inside the panel to separate low voltage control signals of the milliamp-millivolt or other low energy type from inductive power circuits 9. Connect grounds and shields of circuits which derive power internal to the panel to a panel common ground bus which shall be grounded by the electrical contractor in the field. 10. Physically separate signals entering controllers for amplification as control outputs from all line voltage wiring and shield with continuous foil shielding or enclose them in metal raceway. 11. Provide necessary power supplies for control equipment. 12. Termination requirements: a. Terminate panel wiring on device or terminal block screw terminals using slip-on spade tongue insulated crimp (compression) terminators. b. Terminate panel wiring on compression clamp style terminals using slip-on stud insulated crimp (compression) terminators, c. Stranded conductors shall not be terminated bare to terminals or devices. d. Provide terminal strips for the termination of panel wiring not directly connected to panel mounted devices. e. Terminals shall facilitate wire sizes as follows: 1) AC Voltage applications: Wire size 12 AWG and smaller. 2) Other: Wire size 14 AWG and smaller. f. Label each I/O terminal to indicate tag number of the conductor and connected device. g. Provide terminals for individual termination of each signal shield. Do not connect shield to ground in the panel unless specifically shown as connected to ground on the loop diagram, or directed by the Engineer. h. Provide 20 percent excess terminals of each type for future expansion. i. In general, mount terminal strips on the bottom horizontal edge of the sub -plate. Mount additional terminal strips, if required, on a thirty degree angle bracket at the bottom of the sub -plate. Where terminal strips are mounted side-by-side, elevate one set of terminals 1-1/2 inches above the sub -plate to allow wire to pass underneath. J. Provide a minimum of two inches between terminal strips and wireways or between terminal strips. City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16940-10 16940 Control Panels 1 D. Panel Lighting and Power: 1 1. Provide one convenience electrical outlet where shown on wiring diagram or panel elevation. 2. Provide one fluorescent light fixture with switch where shown on wiring diagram or panel elevation. 3.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Shop test panels in the presence of the Engineer prior to shipment to project site. Notify the Engineer at least ten working days before testing. Testing shall be performed at the panel fabricator's shop. The Contractor shall conduct a rehearsal of the shop test prior the arrival of the Engineer and shall verbally certify that they believe there are no readily apparent obstacles to performance of the test. (In this case, some examples of readily apparent obstacles would be panel mounted equipment lacking power wiring or panel mounted equipment inadvertently wired to work under either primary or backup power, but not both. 1 1. Provide a test plan at time of notification of testing. Coordinate the time of testing of the panels with the Construction Schedule. 1 2. Each assembled panel shall be meggered and tested to be free from grounds and shorts before the shop test. 3. Controllers, circuits and interlocks shall be rung out and tested to assure that they function correctly before the panel is shipped. Each device and control loop shall be tested and demonstrated to function properly in each mode (such as "hand", "local", "automatic"). Discrete input signals shall be tested in both the "on" and "off" state. Analog signals (4-20 milliamp, or similar type) shall each be tested at not less than three values (4.08 mA or 0.5%, 12 mA or 50%, and 19.92 mA or 99.5%). Test results shall be documented. Test discrete outputs by forcing the output on and off via the programming software. Measure the resistance (for relay outputs) or voltage (for active outputs) between the output terminals. Document proper operation of each output. 4. Test analog inputs by applying voltage or current to the input at not less than three values, including at just above minimum range, at just below maximum range, and midrange. (For a 4 to 20 mA device, the current values shall be tested at 4.5 mA, 12.5 mA, and 19.5 mA). Document actual register values for each applied input value at each input. 5. Provide signal generators, multimeters, and other test equipment as required to verify proper operation of the assembled panel. Simulate input signals, both discrete and analog, to verify operation of control and monitoring circuits. 6. Demonstrate that: a. The PLC is fully operational The engineer shall provide the PLC testing program to the Panel Fabricator within one week of notification of the shop test. The Control Panel Fabricator shall load the PLC programs into the respective PLC and demonstrate IICity of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16940-11 16940 Control Panels proper operation of the PLC. In no case shall testing be performed without an operating program functioning in the unit under test. Test discrete inputs by shorting across the input terminals. Document that each input performs properly. b. Each I/O module is recognized by the base unit and is fully functional. c. Communications ports on the PLC base unit (or processor module) are fully functional. 7. Correct, replace, or repair panel wiring, and/or components until testing demonstrates proper operation. Do not ship panels to the site until testing has demonstrated satisfactory operation of the panels. 8. Provide updated and complete 'as shipped' drawings at the time of final testing. The Engineer shall review the drawings against the panel construction at the time of final testing. Drawings which do not reflect the actual construction of the panel will need to be revised and reviewed again by the Engineer against the actual construction prior to shipment of the panel to the job site. 'As shipped' drawings which require revisions shall be submitted to the Engineer for review at testing notification, prior to the actual field review of these drawings against the panel construction. This process of revision and review of the drawings will be repeated as necessary to produce drawings which reflect the actual construction of the panel at the time of shipment. Do not ship panels to the site until the 'as -shipped' drawings are updated, complete, and reflect the actual 'as -shipped' status of the panel. 9. Attention of the Contractor is directed to the fact that more than one shop test and/or review of the panel wiring/drawings may be required. If the first shop test is not satisfactory, or results in the need to make revisions to the panel and/or 'as -shipped' drawings that cannot be effected during the course of the shop test, then a repeat shop test and/or review of the drawings against the construction will be required. The presence of the Engineer at up to two shop tests/reviews will be without cost to the Contractor. If more than two shop tests/reviews are required, then the Contractor shall be required to reimburse the Engineer for the Engineer's costs for the third and each subsequent shop test/review. 10. Submit the results of the test in a formal document within two weeks following satisfactory performance of the test. The test results shall document all problems encountered in running the test, corrective action taken, and the detailed results of each phase of the test. B. Field Test. 1. Conduct a field test of the panel. Testing shall be conducted by physically actuating signaling devices (where possible), installing temporary jumpers, or artificially imposing signals on the field wiring. The purpose of the test is to establish proper operation of the field devices, the integrity of the field wiring, and proper connection of field devices to the panel. The Control Panel Fabricator shall coordinate with the City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16940-12 16940 Control Panels Engineer to provide for as complete a testing of the control and monitoring systems as is practical prior to placing the panel on line for actual control and/or monitoring of the process. The Contractor and/or Control Panel Fabricator shall make corrections or repairs to the wiring and/or devices as necessary to provide proper operation of the system. If testing indicates that field devices require modifications to connectors or contact action, the Contractor shall make the wiring or connection modifications as necessary to coordinate with the PLC program and contract documentation. 2. If testing indicates that the equipment functions properly but that changes to the PLC program are required, the Engineer will revise the program(s) and provide the new program(s) for installation in the PLC. The Contractor and/or Control Panel Fabricator shall be prepared to install up to 3 revised programs into each PLC during startup/commissioning without additional cost to the Owner. 3 Submit the results of all tests in a formal document within two weeks following satisfactory performance of the test. The test results shall document all problems encountered in running the test, corrective action taken, and the detailed results of each phase of the test. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Anchor panels rigidly in place with approved anchorage devices. B. Install wall or stanchion mounted panels level and plumb. 3.4 RECORDS A. Revise all drawings upon completion of installation and startup, showing "as built" conditions including the labeling of field wiring connections 1. Submit primary copy of these drawings for inclusion into the Operations and Maintenance Manual END OF SECTION City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16940-13 16940 Control Panels SECTION 16950 RADIO TELEMETRY EQUIPMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes telemetry radios, and related hardware and accessories such as: antennas, antenna feed line, radio feed line, connectors, suppressors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 16940 — Control Panels for control panels in which telemetry radios will be located. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data. 1. Manufacturer's information for hardware. 2. Manufacturer's installation and programming manuals. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1. Provide specific information including: a. Manufacturer's installation and programming manual. b. Information for obtaining assistance from the manufacturer. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements. 1. Provide complete and functioning radio system to match existing system. This includes providing and/or installing the following. a. radio transceivers (furnished by City, installed by Contractor). b. Antennas (furnished by City, installed by Contractor). c. Antenna Feedlines d. Lightning Surge Arrestors e. Cabling and hardware to interface each transceiver with a PLC City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16950-1 16950_Radio Telemetry Equipment f. Other components and accessories as required to ensure reliable performance of the Radio Telemetry System B. Performance Requirements 1. The installed system will provide stable and reliable communications between the PLCs, and computer(s), either installed as part of this project or existing. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NEC for devices and installation. B. Listing and Labeling: Provide products that are listed and labeled for their applications and installation conditions and for the environments in which installed. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. C. Qualifications. 1. The installer shall be proficient in the installation and configuration of radio telemetry systems similar to that specified herein, including a. Antenna feedline installation and end connector termination b. Antenna mounting 2.0 MATERIALS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products by the following manufacturers. 1. Lightning Surge Arrestor Polyphaser 2. Antenna Feedline. a. Andrews Heliax. b. Times Microwave c. Or approved equal 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Radio telemetry sites shall include. 1. Polyphaser Model IS-B5OLN-C1 Protector. 2. Coaxial antenna feedline: City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16950-2 16950_Radio Telemetry Equipment 1 a. Antenna feedline from the antenna to the lightning arrestor. Times Microwave LMR -400, LMR -500, LMR -600, or equal. ' b. Flexible antenna jumper from the lightning arrestor to the radio. 3. Communications cable. ' a. RS232 Serial Cables with Appropriate Genders/Connectors 2.3 SPARES A. Provide one spare for each of the major components. 1. Lightning Arrestor 2. Flexible antenna jumper 3. Communications Cables of each type 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 CONFIGURATION A. The Engineer will provide radio program configuration information for installation ' by the Contractor. 3.2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION A. Antenna feedline 1. Feedline shall be sized such that signal losses between the antenna and the transceiver do not exceed 3dB (this includes through connectors and the lightning arrestor). 2. Torque antenna feedline connections as per Manufacturers' recommendations . 3. Measure the transmitted power through the feedline prior to weatherproofing the connection of the feedline to the antenna. See Paragraph 3.3 for information on the measurement. B. Antenna. 1. Mount antenna per the manufacturer's requirements and recommendations as shown on the contract drawings. 2. Provide a ground conductor from antenna to the building ground system, install as shown on the contract drawings. 3. Orient each YAGI antenna towards the master site to maximize signal strength. C. Spread Spectrum Radio City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16950-3 16950_Radio Telemetry Equipment 1 1 Mount the radio in the Telemetry Control Panels as shown on the I contract drawings. D. Weatherproofing I 1. Weatherproof the antenna feedline to antenna connection. Weatherproofing shall not be performed until satisfactory test results have been obtained for radio communications, signal, noise, and 1 reflected power for the complete installation per paragraph 3.3. a. Clean the connection of dirt and debris, and dry all surfaces. I Wrap each connection with butyl rubber tape such as Andrews Vapor -Seal or Vapor Wrap extending at least 2" onto the antenna lead and 1" on to antenna connector. b. Overwrap the butyl tape with heat shrink tubing extending at least 1/2" beyond the tape. c. Overwrap the heat shrink with Scotch 33+ vinyl tape using at least 1/2 lap and extending at least 1" beyond the heat shrink. d. Apply a coat of Scotchkote electrical coating. 1 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test, verify and demonstrate the complete configuration of the Radio Telemetry 1 System. 1. Test, verify and demonstrate communications between each PLC and the I master PLC and between the HMI and master PLC. 2. Test and document installed reflected power, signal and noise levels 1 Reflected power greater than 3 indicates poor terminations. Re -terminate and retest until value is 3 or less. Create a one page report documenting these statistics for each installed antenna. 1 END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 City of Yakima Gardner Well 8/13/2010 983-1268-400 16950-4 16950_Radio Telemetry Equipment EXHIBIT F CITY OF YAKIMA PUBLIC WATERLINE GENERAL NOTES, SPECIFICATIONS FOR PRIVATE CONSTRUCTION OF PUBLIC WATER MAINS FOR CITY OF YAKIMA, AND SEWER INSTALLATION POLICIES 10/01/09 CITY OF YAKIMA PUBLIC WATERLINE GENERAL NOTES 1 All public waterline pipe shall be Class 52 ductile iron. Ductile iron pipe shall be cement - mortar lined and shall conform to ANSI A-21.11 and shall be U.S. Tyton joint pipe or approved equal. Rubber ring gaskets shall conform to ANSI A-21.11. All Cast Iron fittings and flanged Ductile Iron fittings shall be Class 250 and all Ductile Iron mechanical joint fittings shall be class 350 conforming to ANSI/AWWA C110/A-21 10 and ANSUAWWA C153 A-21.53. Mortar lining shall be same thickness as for pipe. 2. No public water valves shall be opened or closed (operated) by anyone but the City of Yakima Water/Irrigation Division staff. 3. All public waterlines shall have a minimum of 4.5 feet of cover. 4. All mechanical joints shall be restrained with Romac GripRing restraint system. In addition, all tees, bends and ends of waterlines shall be blocked with poured in place concrete thrust blocks in accordance with the City of Yakima specifications unless alternate restraint systems have been previously approved. All fittings in contact with concrete shall be wrapped in plastic 5 All fire hydrant leads longer that one full length of pipe shall be equipped with a restraint gasket (US Pipe Field Lok) at all bell joints. 6. Direct -buried line valves of 12" size and larger shall be butterfly valves. All smaller, direct - buried lme valves shall be resilient wedge gate valves. All valves shall be designed to AWWA specifications and shall have a standard 2" square -operating nut unless otherwise shown on plans. All valves shall be designed for at least 150 psi working pressure and shall open counter clockwise. 7 All waterline facilities shall be thoroughly flushed, pressure tested and chlorinated and a potable water test (Bac-t) shall be approved by the City of Yakima prior to any connection to existing water system. Flushing of chlorinated water into storm dram system is not allowed unless de -chlorinated. 8. All waterline, fittings and valves used for final waterline connections to the existing water system shall be swabbed with 300ppm chlorinated solution. 9. Contractor shall notify all affected water customers 24 hours prior to any water system shutdown for final waterline connections. Coordinate with City of Yakima Water/Irrigation Division. 10. The City of Yakima Water/Irrigation Division shall make all water main taps unless previously approved by City of Yakima. 11. The City of Yakima Water/Irrigation Division shall install all water services unless previously approved by City of Yakima. 1 SPECIFICATIONS FOR PRIVATE CONSTRUCTION OF PUBLIC WATER MAINS FOR CITY OF YAKIMA 1998 The latest edition of the Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction prepared by the Washington State Department of Transportation and the Washington State Chapter of the American Public Works Association and all currant applicable amendments is, by this supplemented hereinafter. Each section of the Standard Specifications shall be considered as much a part of these Specifications as if they were actually set forth herein. NOTE: Division 1 of the APWA Supplement of the WSDOT/APWA Standard Specifications shall take precedence over these sections of Division 1 to which they apply. All sections of the Standard Specifications shall apply to this project as appropriate, except as modified by these Special Provisions. All measurement and payment sections within the Standard Specifications are deleted for privately funded construction projects. The Developer shall be responsible for payment of all costs for the project and for procuring his contractor. 2-07 WATERING 2-07.3(A) Water Supplied From Hydrants The Contractor shall secure permission from and comply with all requirements of the water utility before obtaining water from fire hydrants. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer as soon as permission has been granted. The contractor shall use hydrant wrenches only to open hydrants. He shall also make certain that the hydrant valve is open full, since a partially opened valve causes damage. A metered hydrant connection furnished by the water utility shall be used as an auxiliary valve on the outlet line for control purposes. Fire hydrant valves must be closed slowly to avoid a surge in the system, which creates undue pressure on water lines. The Contractor shall carefully note the importance of following these directions. If one of the Contractor's employees damages a hydrant the Contractor shall immediately notify the water utility so that the damage can be repaired as quickly as possible. Upon completing the use of the hydrants, the Contractor shall notify the water utility so that the hydrants may be inspected for possible damage. The Contractor will repair any damage resulting from the use of the hydrants by the Contractor, to the satisfaction of the water utility. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment and tools, except the metered hydrant connection, that may be necessary to meet the requirements of the water distribution agency pertaining to hydrant use. Violation of these requirements will result in fines and will lay the Contractor liable for damage suits because of malfunctioning of damaged fire hydrants, in the event of fire. The Contractor shall convey the water from the nearest convenient hydrant or other source at his own expense. 5-04 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 5.04.3 Construction requirements 5-04.3(7) Preparation of Aggregates 5-04.3(7)A Mix_Design Delete reference to Section 9-03.8(6)A 5-04.3(10)B Control This section is revised to read: For asphalt concrete Classes A, B, E, F and G, where paving is in traffic lanes, including lanes for ramps, truck climbing, weaving speed changes and left turn channelization and the specified compacted course thickness is greater than 0.10 foot, the acceptable level of compaction shall be a minimum of 91 percent of the maximum density as determined by WSDOT 705/AASHTO T209. The level of compaction attained will be determined as the average of not less that 5 nuclear density gauge tests taken on the day the mix is placed (after completion of the finish rolling) at randomly selected locations within each lot. The quantity represented by each lot will be no greater than a single day's production or approximately 400 tons, whichever is less. Control Tots not meeting the minimum density standard shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory material. Cores may be used as an alternative to the nuclear density gauge tests. When cores are taken by the Engineer at the request of the contractor, the request shall be made by noon of the first working day following placement of the mix. The Engineer shall be reimbursed for the coring expense at the rate of $75 per core when the core indicates the acceptance level of compaction within a lot has not been achieved. At the start of paving, if requested by the Contractor, a compaction test section shall be constructed as directed by the Engineer to determine the compatibility of the mix design. Compatibility shall be based on the ability of the mix to attain the specified minimum density (91 percent of the maximum density determined by WSDOT Test Method 705/AASHTO t209). Following determination of compatibility, the Contractor is responsible for the control of the compaction effort. If the Contractor does not request a test section, the mix will be considered compatible. Asphalt Concrete Classes A, B, E, F and G constructed under conditions other than listed above shall be compacted on the basis of a test point evaluation of the compaction train. The test point evaluation shall be performed in accordance with instructions from the Engineer. The number of passes with an approved compaction train, required to attain the maximum test point density, shall be used on all subsequent paving. The Contractor shall provide adequate platforms to enable samples to be obtained without the Engineer entering the hauling vehicle. Acceptance testing for compliance of asphalt content will use the Nuclear Asphalt Gauge procedure: WSDOT Test Method 722-T Acceptance testing for compliance of gradation will use the Quick Determination of Aggregate Gradation Using Alternative Solvent Procedure: WSDOT Test Method 723-T. Asphalt Concrete Class D and pre -leveling mix shall be compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer. In addition to randomly selected locations for the tests of the control lot, the Engineer reserves the right to test any area which appears defective and to require the further compaction of areas that fall below acceptable density readings. These additional tests shall not impact the compaction evaluation of the entire control lot. 5-04.3(13) Surface Smoothness Add to last paragraph: This work consists of adjusting utility structures to finished grade. The contractor shall furnish and install new castings on existing public utility structures and monument cases that are being adjusted. Utility Castings shall not be adjusted until the contractor completes the pavement, at which time the center of each structure shall be relocated from references previously established. The asphalt concrete pavement shall be cut and removed to a neat circle, the diameter of which shall be equal to the outside diameter of the frame plus 2 feet. The new frame shall be placed on cement concrete blocks or adjustment rings and wedged up to the desired grade. The base materials shall be removed and class 3000 cement concrete shall be placed within the entire volume of the excavation up to, but not to exceed 1 1/2 inches below the finished pavement surface. The concrete, the edges of the asphalt concrete pavement, and the outer edge of the casting shall be painted with hot asphalt cement. Class G asphalt concrete shall then be placed and compacted with hand tampers and a patching roller. The completed patch shall match the existing paved surface for texture, density and uniformity of grade. The joint between the patch and the existing pavement shall be painted with hot asphalt cement or asphalt emulsion and shall immediately covered with dry sand before the asphalt cement solidifies. 5-04.3(17) Paving under Traffic Revise the last sentence to read: All costs in connection with performing the work in accordance with these requirements, including the cost of temporary pavement marking, shall be borne by the contractor or developer. 5-04.4 Measurement This section is deleted for private construction projects. 5-04.5 Payment This section is deleted for private construction projects. 5-04.5(1) Quality Assurance Price Adjustment This section is deleted for private construction projects. 5-04.5(1)A Price Adjustment for Quality of AC Mix This section is deleted for private construction projects. 5-04.(1)B Price Adjustments for Quality AC Compaction This section is deleted for private construction projects. 7-09 PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR WATER MAINS 7-09.2 Materials This section is revised to read: Ductile Iron Pipe: Ductile iron pipe shall conform with the requirements of SECTION 9-30.1(1) of the Standard Specifications except that it shall be Special Thickness Class 52 with cement mortar lining complying with ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.50, C151/A21.51 and C104/A21.4, most current editions. Joints shall be rubber gasket push -on type (Tyton Joint), conforming to ANSI/AWWA CIII/A21.11, most current edition. Fittings for Ductile Iron Pipe: Fittings shall be mechanical joint in accordance with Section 9-30.2(1) of the standard specifications. Fittings shall have cement mortar lining and be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 and C110/A21.10, most current edition. Connection Couplings: Couplings for DI pipe, either transition or straight couplings shall be compression type flexible couplings conforming to SECTION 9-30.2(7) of the Standard Specifications and ANSI/AWWA C219, most current edition 7-10 TRENCH EXCAVATION, BEDDING, AND BACKFILL FOR WATER MAINS 7-10. 1(1)D Backfill materials Add the following: Imported select backfill as directed by the Engineer shall be crushed gravel, placed and compacted in layers as directed by the Engineer. The crushed gravel backfill shall conform to crushed surfacing top course meeting the requirements of SECTION 9-03.9(3). 7-10.2 Materials Delete entire section and replace with: Bedding 9-03.15 Imported Select Backfill 9-03.9(3) Top Course 7-10.3(5) Grade and Alignment Change depth of cover in the first sentence of second paragraph to 4.5 feet. 7-10.3(9) Bedding the Pipe Revise the first sentence to read: Bedding material for ductile iron pipe may be select native granular material free from wood waste, organic material, and other extraneous or objectionable materials and shall have a maximum dimension of 2 inches. 7-10.3(10) Backfilling Trenches Add the following: Street crossing trenches and other locations as directed by the Engineer shall be backfilled for the full depth of the trench with Crushed Surfacing Top Course meeting the requirements of SECTION 9-03.9(3). 7-10.3(11) Compaction of Backfill Delete the first paragraph and add the following: Mechanical compaction shall be required for all trenches. Water settling may be substituted for mechanical compaction at the discretion of the Engineer. The Contractor is hereby cautioned that time extensions shall not be granted due to unstable trench backfill conditions caused by excessive water settling. The Contractor shall be responsible for correcting such conditions caused by his own construction activities. The density of the compacted material shall be at least 95% of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D 698 Tests (Standard Proctor). Placement of courses of aggregate shall not proceed until density requirements have been met. The first 500 feet of trench backfill operations shall be considered a test section for the Contractor to demonstrate his backfilling and compaction techniques. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 3 working days prior to beginning trench excavation and backfill operations and the Engineer will arrange for in-place density tests to be taken on the completed test section in accordance with the above requirements. No further trenching will be allowed until the specified density is achieved in the test section. Passing in-place density tests in the test section will not relieve the Contractor from achieving the specified densities throughout the project. 7-10.4 Measurement This section is deleted for private construction. 7-10.5 Payment This section is deleted for private construction. 7-11 PIPE INSTALLATION FOR WATER MAINS 7-11.3(9)A Connection to Existing Mains Add the following: The Water/Irrigation Division shall furnish and install new tapping sleeves and valves to existing mains up to and including 12 inch. Costs including materials and labor, as determined by the Customer Services Manager, shall be paid at the Customer Services Office in City Hall before the work is scheduled. The Contractor shall notify the Water Division at least fourteen (14) calendar days prior to the start of construction. Should the Water/Irrigation Division be unable to install the tap, at the discretion of the Water/Irrigation Division, the tap may be installed by a contractor familiar with tapping domestic water mains. The tapping sleeve shall be epoxy coated and the tapping valve shall be resilient seat. All taps greater than 12 inch shall be preformed by a contractor familiar with tapping domestic water mains. Mechanical joints to all fittings and valves shall be connected with a ROMAC "Grip Ring" accessory pack per manufacturer's printed specifications and instructions, or thrust blocking shall be as shown on the Standard Details. 7-11.3(11) Hydrostatic Pressure Test The first sentence shall be replaced with the following: All water mains and appurtenances shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 180 psi. 7-11.3(12)N Final Flushing and Testing This section is supplemented with the following: The Developer will pay for costs for bacteriological testing. City Engineering Inspector with a Contractor Representative will collect bacteriological tests. 7-11.3(12)P Work by City Water/Irrigation Division Personnel (New Section) The Contractor shall notify the City Water/Irrigation Division 48 hours prior to the beginning and completion of the water main construction. The City Water/Irrigation Division will open and close all existing valves upon notification from the Contractor. 7-12 VALVES FOR WATER MAINS 7-12.2 Materials The second paragraph is supplemented with the following: The approved resilient seated gate valve manufacturers are: Clow, Dresser, Waterous, and Mueller. The approved butterfly valve manufacturers are: Pratt, Mueller, and M&H. Valve Boxes: The top section of the valve boxes shall be Rich Model 940-B, or equal, 18 inches high. The bottom section shall be a Rich Model R-36, or equal, 36 inches high. Extension section shall be Rich Model 044, or equal, 12 inches high. 7-12.3 Construction Details Add the following: Valves: Upon completion of all work in connection with this Contract, all valves involved in this work shall be opened and the Engineer so notified. Valve Boxes: Valve boxes should be set to position during backfilling operations so they will be in a vertically centered alignment to the valve operating stem. The top of the box will be at final grade. 7-14 HYDRANTS 7-14.2 Materials Section 7-14.2 of the Standard Specifications shall be deleted in its entirety. The Contractor may purchase hydrants from the City of Yakima. Hydrants shall meet all provisions of the City of Yakima Municipal Code 10.10.050, which by this reference is made a part of these Special Provisions. A copy of this code is attached. The City of Yakima will accept hydrants of the following manufacturers: Mueller Model A 423, Super Centurion 200 M & H 929 7-14.3(1) Setting Hydrants This section is supplemented with the following: The hydrant shall be set to the correct elevation on a concrete block base 12" x 12" x 6" thick, which has been placed on undisturbed earth. Around the base of the hydrant, the Contractor shall place 0.25 CY of drain rock ranging in size from 3/4 -inch to 172 -inch, said drain rock being for the purpose of allowing free drainage of the hydrant. 7-14.3(2) Hydrant Connections This section is revised to read: Hydrants shall be connected to the main with 6 -inch ductile iron pipe unless otherwise specified. Each hydrant lateral shall include an auxiliary resilient seat gate valve and valve box located 2.5 feet from the main. 7-14.3(2)A Hydrant Restraint This section is modified as follows: Delete second sentence. All hydrants shall be connected to the water main, auxiliary valve and hydrant with ROMAC "Grip Ring" accessory pack per manufactures printed specifications and instructions. 7-15 SERVICE CONNECTIONS 7-15.1 General This Section is revised to read: This work consists of installing the service connections from the water main to the vicinity of the customer's future meter location. The work includes making a service tap to the water main, 3/4" and 1" taps to be "direct tap" and 1 '/z" and larger use tapping saddles, installing service line, corporation stop and curb stop valves, and (where indicated on the Plans) installing meter setter assembly and stubbing the service line 5 feet beyond the meter setter. 7-15.2 MATERIALS Section 7-15.2 of the Standard Specifications shall be revised as follows: Saddle: As per Section 9-30.6(1). Corporation Stop: Ford Ball Valve corporation stops, with pack joints, or equivalent. Curb Stop: Ford Ball Valve Curb Stop, with pack joints, or equivalent. Water Meter Box: 18 inch diameter, Schedule 80 P.I.P. x 3 -feet long. Standard City of Yakima lid and frame. Service Line: Per Section 9-30.6(3)A or Crosslinked Polyethylene Tubing, ASTM 877-89, Wirsbo-Pex or equivalent with 16 gauge insulated solid copper tracing wire strapped to tubing and connected to corporation cock. Water Meter Setters: See City of Yakima Standard Detail. Compression Fitting: Per Section 9-30.6(4). Water Meters: All water meters to be supplied and installed by the City of Yakima. 7-15.3 Construction Details Revise this Section as follows: Change the minimum of depth of cover in the first sentence of the second paragraph to 4.5 feet. Add the following paragraphs: Where service connections are shown on the Plans to include a meter setter and box, the Contractor shall install the meter setter assembly and a box flush to the surrounding grade and in accordance with details shown on the City of Yakima Standard Detail. The meter setter shall always be placed within public right of way. Typically, the meter setter box shall be 2 feet inside the street right of way line, unless fencing or other obstacles dictate a different location. The Contractor shall make every effort to keep the meter setter location uniform. The service line shall be extended beyond the meter location to a point on adjacent property 5 feet outside of the meter box. Before backfilling the meter setter, a 1 -inch diameter PVC pipe blank shall be installed in the meter location. The PVC pipe blank shall be 7-3/4 inches long. The in leg and out leg of the meter setter at the meter location shall be maintained at the same height as indicated on the standard detail. Contractor may contact the City of Yakima Water/Irrigation Division to obtain a pattern for assembling a jig that maintains the correct height of meter setter when backfilling. The PVC pipe blank and the meter setter jig shall be removed after backfilling is completed. A 1 1/2" thick piece of extruded polystyrene insulation board cut to fit snugly inside of the meter tile shall be placed over the meter setter. Where service connections are shown on the Plans to have no meter setter and box, the Contractor shall terminate the service connection with a curb stop at the location of the future meter, and shall mark that point by a 5 -foot steel fence post set in the ground as shown on the City of Yakima Standard Detail. 7-15.4 Measurement This section is deleted for private construction projects. 7-15.5 Payment This section is deleted for private construction projects. 8-30 REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT (NEW SECTION 8-30.1 Description The work shall consist of repair or replacement of any private rockery, irrigation, topsoil, turf, or other miscellaneous items within or adjacent to the project area, as directed by the Engineer. This Section does not relieve the Contractor from the obligations of Section 1-07.16(3) Fencing, Mailboxes, and Incidentals. 9-30 WATER DISTRIBUTION MATERIALS 9-30.1 Pipe 9-30.1(1) Ductile Iron Pipe The last sentence of paragraph 1 is replaced with the following: Ductile iron pipe shall be Special Thickness Class 52 with cement mortar lining complying with ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.50, C151/A21.51 and C104/A21.4 most current editions. 9-30.3 Valves 9-30.3(1) Gate Valves This section is replaced by the following: Gate valves, sized 3 -inch through 8 -inch, shall be resilient seated gate valves conforming to ANSI/AWWA C 509 latest edition. The valves shall have mechanical joint connections including accessories, or flanged connections, as noted on the Plans. 9.30.3(3) Butterfly Valves This section is modified as follows: All valves 12 inch and over shall be butterfly valves conforming to ANSI/AWWA C504, latest edition except tapping valves. DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNITYAND ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT 129 North Second Street, 2nd Floor Yakima, Washington 98901 (509) 575-6126 * Fax (509) 576-6576 SEWER INSTALLATION POLICIES "Building sewers must be connected to the City sewer main by means of a saddle or other approved connection". The hole in the main must be carefully drilled (not beaten or chiseled) in order to achieve a continuous, smooth surface for drainage". "Manholes may not generally be used for connecting side sewers to the main sewer line. Prior written approval of the Wastewater Division must be obtained for this method of connection". This policy will take effect on January 1, 2000. Definition "Side Sewer" or "Building Sewer" is the horizontal piping of the drainage system which extends from the building to the public sewer main. Permits A plumbing permit is required for the installation, alteration, repair or replacement of any side sewer connected to the City of Yakima sewer system. If you hire a contractor to do the work, make sure the contractor is licensed with the State of Washington. You can verify this by contacting the contractor registration office at (509) 454- 3760. It is suggested that the contractor obtain the permit. Call Before You Dig Before starting any excavation work, call the Underground Utilities Council at 1-800-553-4344 at least 48 hours in advance. They will make sure all existing utilities in the excavation area are located and marked. Materials Sewer pipe and fittings may be of Schedule 40 ABS, Schedule 40 PVC, ASTM 3034 PVC, or other materials approved by the Code Administration Manager. Unless the pipe is stamped DWV, it must be used ONLY OUTSIDE the building. Size Generally, a sewer line from the house to the sewer main is four (4) inches in diameter. A three (3) inch diameter pipe may be used in some cases. Check with your plumber or the Offices of Code Administration (509) 575-6126. t Cleanouts There shall be a cleanout within two feet of the building and every 100 feet thereafter. An additional cleanout shall also be provided at each aggregate change of direction exceeding 135 degrees. All cleanouts must be installed to allow cleaning in the direction of flow. All required cleanouts shall be extended to grade. There shall be a backflow valve installed between the building and cleanout for each side sewer installation. Grade Horizontal drainage piping shall be run in practical alignment and a uniform slope of not less than one-fourth (1/4) of an inch per foot or two (2) percent toward the point of disposal. For piping 4" or greater, you may use a slope of one-eighth (1/8) of an inch per foot. Location The side sewer must be located on the same property as the building served by such sewer, unless it is in a legal easement. Sewer and Water Pipes Building sewers and drainage piping of clay or materials which are not approved for use within a building shall not be run or laid in the same trench as the water pipes unless both of the following requirements are met: (1) The bottom of the water pipes, at all points, shall be at least twelve 12) inches above the top of the sewer or drain line. (2) The water pipe shall be placed on a solid shelf excavated at one side of the common trench with a minimum clear horizontal distance of at least twelve (12) inches from the sewer or drain line. EXCEPTION: If ABS Schedule 40 DWV pipe is used for the side sewer, the water and sewer lines can be in the same trench with no separation required. Depth Side sewer lines shall be installed at least one (1) foot below the surface of the ground. Backflow Devices Drainage piping serving fixtures which have flood level rims located below the elevation of the next upstream manhole cover of the public sewer serving such drainage piping shall be protected from backflow of sewage by installing an approved type backwater valve. Fixtures above such elevation shall not discharge through the backwater valve. Backwater valves must be accessible. Bedding Building sewer piping shall be laid on a firm bed throughout its entire length, and any such piping laid in made or filled-in ground shall be laid on a bed of approved materials and shall be adequately supported to the satisfaction of the Administrative Authority. Abandoned Septic Systems Every cesspool, septic tank and seepage pit which has been abandoned or has been discontinued otherwise from further use shall have the sewage removed and be completely filled with earth, sand, gravel, concrete or other approved material. The top cover shall be removed before filling. Connecting to the Sewer Main Sewer main connections shall only be made by State licensed contractors with a current City of Yakima Side Sewer Installers License. Homeowners can connect to existing stubs. This information is not a complete statement of all Codes, Laws, or Rules and it is not a substitute for the Uniform Plumbing Code. Please consult with the City of Yakima Code Administration Office, (509) 575-6126, to be sure that you understand all requirements before beginning work. 12/31/2009 2 21 PM 1 02/02/2012 15:53 5036204315 SCOTT H00KLAND LLP Douglas R. Hnnkland t Tara M. Johnson Thomas J. Murphy Michael J. SGOI.I SCOTT ♦ HOOKLAND LLP LAWYERS MpilinR Address: Post Office Box 23414, Tigard, Orogon 97281 Street ',areas: 9185 SW Rnrnh:ttn Street, Tigard, Oregon 97223 Telephone: 503-620-4540 ♦ t acslmlle: 503-620-4315 www, scott-hookland.com February 2, 2012 SENT CONCURRENTLY VIA FACSIMILE NO. 509-576-6614, EMAIL c/o: ccouncil@ci.yakima.wa.us FIRST CLASS MAIL AND CERTIFIED MAIL NO. 7010 1060 0000 8126 0565 RETURN RECEIPT RE UESTED City of Yakima 129 N. Second Street Yakima, WA 98901 SENT CONCURRENTLY VIA FACSIMILE NO. 509-576-6335 EMAIL: mi.cah- cawley@ci-yakima,wa.us FIRST CLASS MAIL AND CERTIFIED MAIL NO. 7010 1060.0000 8126 0572 RETURN RECEIPT RE UESTED Micah Cawley, Mayor City of Yakima 129 N. Second Street Yakima, WA 98901 l K PAGE01/09 *Also ndmined In Washington and tnn1(, 4Also achnilvd In WnshI,, ton, Idaho nod Alaska SENT CONCURRENTLY VIA FACSIMILE NO. 509-576-6335, EMAIL c/o: ccou.nci.l@ ❑i .yakima . wa . us FIRST CLASS MAIL AND CERTIFIED MAIL NO. 7010 1060 0000 8126 0589 RETURN RECEIPT REQUESTED City Council City of Yakima 129 N. Second Street Yakima, WA 98901 RE: Notice of First Amended Claim Claim Against Bond Project: Prime Contractor: Prime Contractor's Surety: Our File: of Retainage Lien and Gardner Well - Project No. 2.132 William Charles Construction Company, LLC, dba William Charles West Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America. CED295 Dear Mayor and City Council and City: As you know, this firm represents Consolidated Electrical Distributors, Inc. ("CED"), a material supplier to Jack Hornor. Electric Inc., a subcontractor to William Charles Construction Company, LLC, dba William Charles West, on the above referenced project. 02/02/2012 15:53 5036204315 February 2, 2012 Page 2 SCOTT HOOKLAND LLP PAGE 02/09 I enclose CED's Notice of First Amended Claim of Retainage Lien and Claim Against Bond, together with Exhibits "A" and "B" thereto. Very truly yours, Doug. Hook.land Enc DRH/daf cc: Consolidated Electrical Distributors, Inc. w/enc. via email William Charles Construction Company, LLC, dba William Charles West, Attn: Jonie Donovan, via first class mail Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Attn: Sherri Cooper, Senior Claim Representative, via first class mail Jeff Cutter, City of Yakima, via first class mail and email jcutter@ci.vaki.ma.wa 02/02/2012 15:53 5036204315 SCOTT HOOKLAND LLP PAGE 03/09 NOTICE OF FIRST AMENDED CLAIM OF RETAINAGE LIEN AND CLAIM AGAINST BOND TO: City of Yakima, Washington RE: Notice of First Amended Claim of Retainage Lien and Claim Against Bond Project Gardner Well - Project No. 2132 Prime Contractor: William Charles Construction Company, LLC, dba William Charles West Prime Contractor's Surety: Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that Consolidated Electrical Distributors, Inc. ("CED") has an amended claim in the principal sum of Ninety Six Thousand One Hundred Sixteen and 13/100 Dollars ($96,116.13*) against both the retained percentage taken from William Charles Construction Company, LLC, dba William Charles West ("WCW") for the work on project known as Gardner Well - Project No. 2132, City Contract No. IR2180 ("Project"), and against the bond taken from WCW as principal and prime contractor and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, as surety, having Bond No. 105488006 ("Bond"). The name of WCW's surety on this Project is Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America. This notice also constitutes an amended claim against (1) any other payment bond, performance bond, or other bond provided by the prime contractor on the Project pursuant to RCW 39.08 or otherwise, and (2) any release of retention bond provided on the Project pursuant to RCW 60.28 or otherwise. /// /1/ /11 Page 1 - NOTICE OF FIRST AMENDED CLAIM OF RETAINAGE LIEN AND CLAIM AGAINST BOND 02/02/2012 15:53 5036204315 SCOTT HOOKLAND LLP PAGE 04/09 CED furnished electrical and related construction materials beginning on or about June 15, 2011, and ending on or about December 8, 2011, at the request of Jack Hornor Electric Inc., a subcontractor to WCW on the Project An invoice breakdown of CED's amended claim is attached and incorporated herein as Exhibit "A". A copy of the Bond is attached and incorporated herein as Exhibit "B". This notice amends that Notice of Claim of Retainage Lien and Claim Against Bond dated January 20, 2012, in the principal amount of $90,756.13 ("Claim"). Except as amended herein, the Claim remains unmodified and in full force and effect. DATED this day of February, 2012. Consolidated Electrical Distributors, Inc. % Scott ♦ Hookland LLP P.O. Box 23414 Tigard, OR 97281 By: Dou= as R. Jdookland As CED's Attorney *Interest accrues on the principal amount of $96,116.13 at the rate of 18% per annum beginning thirty-one (31) days after invoice date, until paid. cc: William Charles Construction Company, LLC, dba William Charles West w/enc. by email, facsimile, first class mail and certified mail Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America w/enc_ by email, facsimile, first class mail and certified mail Page 2 - NOTICE OF FIRST AMENDED CLAIM OF RETAINAGE LIEN AND CLAIM AGAINST BOND 02/02/2012 15:53 5036204315 SCOTT HOOKLAND LLP *** MAY NOT REPRESENT ALL UNPAID ITEMS *** STATEMENT CONSOLIDATED ELIC DISTRIBUTORS REMIT TO; PO BOX 5560 www.Gednw.Com KENT, WA 98064 JACK HORNOR ELECTRIC INC GARDNER WELL 1212 N 16TH AVE YAKIMA, NA 98902-348 AGE DATE CODE REFERENCE 90 10/03/11 9477-643956 90 10/04/11 9477-643817 90 10/04/11 9477-644038 90 10/05/11 9477-643875 90 10/05/11 9477-644134 90 10/06/11. CRM 9477-270282 90 10/06/11. 9477-644268 90 10/13/11 9477-644679 90 10/13/11 9477-644741 90 10/19/11 9477-644723 90 10/19/11 9477-644878 90 10/20/11 9477-645210 90 10/21/11 9477-644971 90 10/21/11 9477-645276 90 10/24/11 9477-645352 90 10/25/11 9477-645511. 60 10/26/11 9477-645608 60 10/26/11 9477-645639 60 10/27/11 9477-645637 60 10/27/11 9477-645732 60 10/31/11 CRM 9477270346 60 10/31/11 9477-646128 60 11/01/11 9477-645567 60 11/01/11 9477-645631 60 11/02/11 9477-646348 60 11/03/11. 9477-646048 60 11/03/1.1 9477-646421 60 7.1/04/11 9477-644075 30 12/14/11 9477-649496 00 01/25/12 SVC 9477-862304 TOTAL DUE 97,477.47 PAY THIS AMOUNT CURRENT 1,361.34 1 - 30 LOCATION 9477 CUSTOMER P.O. # KEN WADE INV 644038 KEN GARDNER WELL GARDNER WELL GARDNER WELL GARDNER WELL CODE: CSR=CASH RECD o CRM=CREDYT MEMO GARDNER WELL GARDNER WELL GARDNER WELL GARDNER INV 645639 GARDNER NELL GARDNER WELL GARDNER WELL GARDNER WELL WADE/GARDNER GARDNER WELL KEN PAST DUE 5,360.00 31-60 o CDC..DISC CHABOEBACK ACCOUNT NO. 86-38582 PP.GE 1 DATE 02/02/12 Refer no in.,o,Aeea for terms. A gorvicc Charae wS1L be made C,r P ast Duo nrcount~ tinaae Cheek ofA the invoice? you oro paying and ?ntd a afPY or thin $tntcmnnt along with year remi Zfnnco to the addtn55 printed abovo. DISCOUNT AMOUNT .00 592.00 .00 652.15 .00 229.64 .00 61.22 .00 48.32 .00 191.13- .00 76,681.46 .00 869.63 .00 71.00 .00 140.59 .00 45.00 .00 64.61 .00 825.92 .00 18.37 .00 74.14 .00 148.14 .00 163.23 .00 142.99 .00 75.24 .00 1.62 .00 15.13- .00 18.48 .00 8,656.23 .00 746.85 . 00 4,2.0 . 00 25.38 .00 42.21 .00 563.71 .00 5,360.00 .00 1,361.34 PAST DDE 10,425.01 61 - 90 PAST DUE 80, 331.1.2 OVER 90 PAGE 05/09 o DED.bEDUCTION o SVC=•SERVICE CHARGE EXHIBIT PAGE_._L_OF�_ 02/02/2012 15:53 5036204315 SCOTT HOOKLAND LLP Contract Bond , BOND TO CITY OF YAKIMA KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, William Charles West as principal, and Travelers Cesualta as a Surety coryoration organiaed qua existing der der the the laws ofsof the the StatetofeWashi gtonGto�become Surety upon ons (contra t and qualified for the payment of which sum on bonds of contractors with municipal corporations, as Surety, are jointly and severally held andfirmly bound to the City of Yakima in the penal sum of $ demand we bind ourselves and our successors, belts, adminlStrators, or personal representatives, as the case may be. This obligation is entered into in pursuance of the statutes of the State of Washington and the Ordinances of the City of Yakima. 2011. Dated,at Kerixxewy3Xof Fck , Washington, this 2� day .g FJa_ ,-' Nevertheless, the.condltions of the above obligation are such that: 2011, the k'ebruarr 23+ _ WHEREAS, under and pursuant to action of the City of Yakima, on y �� City Manager and City Clerk of said City of theYakima above boundenPrincipal, about Char e� Wept a oertain Contract, the said Con - ii -act being numbered City Contract No. IR2180, and providing for the construction of Gardner Well - Project No. 2132 (which Contract is referred to herein and 'Is made a pert hereof as though attached hereto), and WHEREAS, the said Principal nn ri al has for in thecma or is and out to olan ceptme set t, the iddrtContract, and undertake to perform the work that Q shall NOW, THEREFORE, df the said William Chalee 47e forth, or within such ext all provisionsaf time as fma d Contract in be granted the manner and within underr said Contract, t and hall pay ell tlabore s, mechanics, such axle mechanics, subcontractors and material men and all industrial Insuraforms, and theoln of said work, ersons who shall supply sald principal or subcontractors with provisions and suppliesreason of, and shall Indemnify and hold the City,./g1 Yakima harmless from any damage or or rl developing Io the failure of performance as specified in skid' Contract or from defects app material or workmanship provided or performed under said Contract within a period of one year after its acceptance thereof by then City ofYakima, force and effeatd in that event this obligation shall be void; but otherwise it shalt be and re Boma 105488006 SURETY:Travelers Casualty & Surety of Amari By J �7/r• Name: Vick S. Busher (Please Print or Type) Agent: Wl� items-xiauny, Tnc . Address: PO Box 5466, Rockford, IL 61125-0466 28 (SEAL) ATTEST: Nam_ Debbie L . McTtinn' Y (Pease Print or Type) PAGE 06/09 EXHIBIT 1---8 PAGE.. _OF 02/02/2012 15:53 5036204315 CONT TOR: By: Name' I . • imia'•11111 _ ICeith Larson. (Pfense Print or Typo) SCOTT HOOKLAND LLP PAGE 07/09 riourm••—•,- 29 a EXHIBIT' PAGE c OF 1 1 1 1 1 1 111 1;1 • 14 02/02/2012 15:53 5036204315 TRAVELERS, J .' Astencydn Fart No. SCOTT HOOKLAND LLP WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY 2 INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER POWER OF ATTORNEY Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul fire gild Mftrine Insurance Company St- Paul Guardian insurance Company 222024 PAGE 08/09 St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Comply of America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company Ccrttticate Na. 003954478 an nce Company rind St. Paul Mercury Insurance )tNOw ALL are co o PAT E 1tganized undcr the law of the State of Minnesota tha That Si Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Farmington Casut. Paul alty Company, mpany,�Tra Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and Tweets 8a ca ty and duly of Company o under the laws of the State of Connecticut, that United States Fidelity and Guaranty gtavelers Casualty end Surety Company of America are corporations duly organized pany y der cumv duly Org the la is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland, that Fidelity and Guaranty insurance Company z d under the corporation ti the State of organized un Wisconsin the laws of the State of Iowa, and that 1?idelity grid Guaranty Insnraifcc Uoderwritxirs, '2%- nen collectively called the "Companies"), and that the Companies do hereby make, constitute and appoint '�. ,Corutie L. NZarty, David L. Townsend, John C. Pick, 7udi0 L. 2:iet', Jude'X•rbselnor, Steven R. Johnson, Margaret A. Howard, j Qtld Vicki S F3uslccr e+kty Ifmoeft n State of - l)i►lois , their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, of the City of �$,o P execute, seal and acknowledge any esti all bends, recopnlzances, conditional undertakings and Ana is [hair separatelige capacityrnt c more than theonereof is behalf above, to msia i -e s obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in thalrbus�ss o uarnatecixR the fidelity of persons. guaranteeing �° performance of Other weitat8 P °Ly ens i , >� qF ceedlags allowed by law. ,Contracts and cttecutinp, or gttaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or peFdn n • ona k9 ' GG,, 18th :';IIS WITNESS R'gEltTDF, the Companies have caused this in o�tltd'be silincr.ttbd thei gotporate seals to be hereto Affixed, this P 0 r•:.ay of January 7 10 �sA FarmningtoCastutlty Gently •�y� CW9 Fidelity and Guaratttyltsuotol�4 Fidellty,rard Guaranty :ns e'U St. Pau1'Flre and Marine Intmxnncc Company St. Paul Gnardian insurance Company St. Paul Mercury Disuratuce Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company' of America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company Ij .Stata,of Connecticut rCity of Hartford ss. By: Ge Thompson, rhePtesiden January 2010 , before me personally appeared George W. Thompson, who acknowledged On this the 1Rthni day of . hlmaeif to be the Senior Vice President of Farmington Casually Company. Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance ContnanY, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters. EXHIBIT .3 PAGE 3 OF 02/02/2012 15:53 5036204315 SCOTT HOOKLAND LLP __--ter_.._. _._ ._, STATE OF ILLINOIS COUNTY OF WINNEBAGO, Before me, a. Notary Public, personally carne Vicki S. Busker oSurewn to me, avelers and lrn,own to be P,.tCorney-�~Fact of rthe State o£ Coty and nnecticut whichCompany of America,, a corporation u7. executed the attached bond as Surety, who deposed and said that her signature and the corporate seal of: the said Surety were affixed by order and that the execution of theauthority of said Surety's Board of Directors, attached bond is the :Free act and deedof said Surety. Given under my hand and seal this 23rd day of February, 2011 "OFFICIAL SEAL" DEBBIE L McKINNEY `•Notary Public, State Of IIGnc s My Commission Expires 04424/12 .Ay PAGE 09/09 EXHIBIT PAGE___OF'-� 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 City of Yakima 129 North 2nd Street Yakima, Washington 98901 Bid Proposal Gardner Well, Project No. 2132 A Proposal of WI i O-/1. .J' CL -(4)..S Weit (hereinafter called "BIDDER"), organized and existing under the laws of the State of L Jltik(2 doing business as e_orr/s-,ro..t-` 1 To the CITY OF YAKIMA, Washington, (hereinafter called "OWNER") In compliance with your Advertisement for Bids, BIDDER hereby proposes to perform all work for the construction of the Gardner Well, Project No. 2132, in strict accordance with the CONTRACT DOCU- MENTS, within the time set forth therein, and at the prices stated below By submission of this BID, each BIDDER certifies, in the case of a joint BID each party thereto certifies as to its own organization, that this BID has been arrived at independently, without consultation, communication, or agreement as to any matter relating to this BID with any other BIDDER or with any competitor BIDDER hereby agrees to commence work under this Contract within ten (10) calendar days after NOTICE TO PROCEED and to fully complete the PROJECT in accordance with Section 1-08 5 of these Special Provisions BIDDER further agrees to pay as liquidated damages the sum specified for each working day thereafter as provided in SECTION 1-08 9 of the Standard Specifications. BIDDER acknowledges receipt of the following ADDENDA. 1.. 3, `I BIDDER agrees to perform all the work described in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS for the following lump sum amounts and accompanying unit cost prices - 1 Insert "a corporation," "a partnership," p p," or "an individual" as applicable 6 BID COST SHEET Gardner Well Proj No. 2132 Line item costs should include all Contractor's overhead and profit and indirect costs. Item Number Bid Item Quantity Unit Total/ 1 MOBILIZATION/DEMOBILIZATION 1 Lump Sum / 2 PUMP AND WELLHEAD (incl housekeeping pad) 1 Lump Sum each 3 WELL HOUSE 1 Lump Sum j/ 4 HVAC (includes plumbing, emergency combination unit and on -demand heater) 1 Lump Sum / 6 -inch Ductile Iron Pipe (buried installation) 5 PUMP ROOM PIPING, VALVES, AND APPURTENANCES 1 Lup mSum If 6 CHLORINE INJECTION SYSTEM 1 ,Lump Sum 7 FLUORIDE INJECTION SYSTEM 1 / Lump Sum 8 EXTERIOR PIPING 1� Lump Sum 9 CHLORINE CONTACT PIPE i r1 Lump Sum 10 SITE WORK AND STRUCTURES 1 Lump Sum 11 WELL PUMP VFD // 1 each 12 SERVICE ENTRANCE (EUSERC) / 1 each 13 MAIN BREAKER �/ 1 each 14 SWITCHBOARD / 1 each 15 CONTROL PANEL / 1 each 16 OTHER MISC. ELECTRICAL 1 each 17 TESTING1 Lump Sum 18 EQUIPMENT AND LABOR ;/, 1 Lump Sum Subtotal J. State Sales Tax (8 2%) TOTAL UNIT BID PRICES 12 -inch OS&Y Gate Valve each 8-inch'OS&Y Gate Valve each 6 -inch OS&Y Gate Valve each '8 -inch Gate Valve installed with valve box each 6 -inch Gate Valve installed with valve box each 12 -inch Butterfly Valve installed in valve box each 12 -inch Ductile Iron Pipe (buried installation) If 8 -inch Ductile Iron Pipe (buried installation) If 6 -inch Ductile Iron Pipe (buried installation) If 12 -inch Steel Pipe If 8 -inch Steel Pipe If 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 January 2011 ADDENDUM #4 BID COST SHEET Gardner Well Proj No. 2132 Line item costs should include all Contractor's overhead and profit and indirect costs. Item Number Bid Item Quantity Unit Total 1 MOBILIZATION/DEMOBILIZATION 1 Lump Sum •/ 000 2 PUMP AND WELLHEAD (incl housekeeping pad) 1 Lump Sum 42-7/000©QO /// 33 WELL HOUSE 1 Lump Sum % 3 00 t 4 HVAC (includes plumbing, emergency combination unit and on -demand heater) 1 Lump Sum ,.D `7 00 237 5 PUMP ROOM PIPING, VALVES, AND APPURTENANCES 1 Lump Sum 6 100 6 CHLORINE INJECTION SYSTEM 1 Lump Sum / .a 7 FLUORIDE INJECTION SYSTEM 1 Lump Sum /S00 0 200 8 EXTERIOR PIPING 1 Lump Sum 3600 9 SITE WORK AND STRUCTURES 1 Lump Sum 2- ? c®o llll 10 ALT. 1B1- 12 -INCH CONNECTION 1 Lump Sum 6-00' 11 WELL PUMP VFD 1 each / (3 c°70 -3e 12 SERVICE ENTRANCE (EUSERC) 1 each V! 06,0 13 MAIN BREAKER 1 each fi 600 14 SWITCHBOARD 1 each /J,©0 15 CONTROL PANEL 1 each ?y ge° 16 OTHER MISC. ELECTRICAL 1 each a> /0 0 17 TESTING 1 Lump Sum 2.,/eO0 18 EQUIPMENT AND LABOR 1 Lump Sum(S p CO 19 MINOR CHANGES 1 Lump Sum $ 50,000.00 Subtotal /a/037 23 -7, ` State Sales Tax (8.2%) — ! TOTAL , /42,'2.o2_990 �C� Note• 1. Alternative 1B is part of the base bid and consists of a standard 12 -inch connection to the distribution system in lieu of the chlorine contact pipe (formally known as Alternative 1A) UNIT BID PRICES 12 -inch OS&Y Gate Valve 2,0e0 each 8 -inch OS&Y Gate Valve WOO each 6 -inch OS&Y Gate Valve (j each 8 -inch Gate Valve installed with valve box Fel° each 6 -inch Gate Valve installed with valve box 5-©© each 12 -inch Butterfly Valve installed in valve box /SW ° each 12 -inch Ductile Iron Pipe (buried installation) 33 i QC If 8 -inch Ductile Iron Pipe (buried installation) . OC) If 6 -inch Ductile Iron Pipe (buried installation) g.00 If 12 -inch Steel Pipe 2C • 00 If 8 -inch Steel Pipe t' 20 If 7 '0 Z,o,C3,g. CITY OF YAKIMA, WASHINGTON Gardner Well CITY PROJECT NO 2132 Bid Proposal Signature Page W/LS G(i st BIDDER (CONTRACTOR) BY I €b(Uafq t , 2011 DATE AUT ORIZED OFFICIAL'S SIGNATURE TITLE Ke -1 c rSort (Please print or type name) ADDRESS 51 2v lal fir. S r r 20 ! /MMJ LK, (k) g133(, E-mail address - Phone (-- 6 ) 70 3 — ?o 3( FAX. (Soy) K r' SaM3 (,U i/it0-04CLCcf(L3co-es e• C.cA2� CONTRACTOR LICENSE NUMBER li) Z LLZc�► q (� Q(-1 NOTE (1) If the bidder is a co -partnership, so state, giving firm name under which business transacted If the bidder is a corporation, this proposal must be executed by its duly authorized officials (2) Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of all addenda, if any, in the space provided on the first page of this proposal (3) If no bid is submitted, kindly mark "NO BID" on the cover and return. (4) Bidder shall include Bid Bond/Bid Deposit and notarized Non -Collusion Affidavit and Debarment Certification with Bid Proposal 8 Bid Deposit Herewith find deposit in the form of a certified check or cashier's check in the amount of $ , which amount is not less than five percent (5%) of our total bid for this project. Sign Here OR Bid Bond KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS That we as Principal, and , as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF YAKIMA, as Obligee, in the penal sum of Dollars, for the payment of which the Principal and the Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents The condition of this obligation is such that if the Obligee shall make any award to the Principal for Gardner Well — City Project No 2132 according to the terms of the proposal or bid made by the Principal therefore, and the Principal shall duly make and enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of said proposal or bid and award and shall give bond for the faithful performance thereof, with Surety or Sureties approved by the Obligee, or if the Principal shall, in case of failure so to do, pay and forfeit to the Obligee the penal amount of the deposit specified in the call for bids, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect and the Surety shall forthwith pay and forfeit to the Obligee, as penalty and liquidated damages, the amount of this bond SIGNED, SEALED, AND DATED THIS DAY OF , 2011 Principal Surety , 2011 9 Bid Deposit Herewith find deposit in the form of a certified check, cashiers check, cash or bid bond in the amount of $ which amount is not less than five percent (5%) of the total bid Sign Here OR Bid Bond KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS. That we, William Charles West, 5920 W. Clearwater Avenue, Suite 201, Kennewick, WA 99336, as principal, and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, 215 Shuman Boulevard, Naperville, IL 60563, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Yakima, as Obligee, in the penal sum of $ Five Percent of Bid Amount (5%), Dollars, for the payment of which the Principal and the Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents The condition of this obligation is such that if the Obligee shall make any award to the Principal for Gardner Well — City Project No 2132, according to the terms of the proposal or bid made by the Principal therefor, and the Principal shall duly make and enter into a contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of said proposal or bid and award and shall give bond for.faithful performance thereof, with Surety or Sureties approved by the Obligee, or if the Principal shall, in case of failure so to do, pay and forfeit to the Obligee the penal amount of the deposit specified in the call for bids, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect and the Surety shall forthwith pay and forfeit to the Obligee, as penalty and liquidated damages, the amount of this bond SIGNED, SEALED AND DATED THIS 2nd DAY OF February, 2011 Travelers Casualt Suret Co. of Am- ica Vicki S. f sker, Attorney -in -Fact 9 William Charles West Princ.p-I eith Larson, President • TRAVELERSJm WARNING. THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER POWER OF ATTORNEY Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company Attorney -In Fact No. 222024 Certificate No. 0037597 9 6 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS That St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Minnesota, that Farmington Casualty Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut, that United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland. that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies"), and that the Companies do hereby make, constitute and appoint Connie L. Marty, David L. Townsend, John C. Pick, Judith L. Zier, Julie Tresemer, Steven R. Johnson, Margaret A. Howard, and Vicki S Busker of the City of Rockford/Freeport , State of Illinois their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign, execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds. recognizances, conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed, this 18th day of January ' ' 2010 State of Connecticut City of Hartford ss Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company ig ft OFPOR.,? . SEAL,J St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company By. ce President On this the 18th day of January 2010 , before me personally appeared George W Thompson, who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer In Witness Whereof, 1 hereunto set my hand and official seal My Commission expires the 30th day of June, 2011 58440-4-09 Printed in U.S.A. W.(" C . Marie C. Tetreault. Notary Public WARNING. THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER WARNING. THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER ' 11 This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St Paul Mercur1 y Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company. which resolutions are now in full force and effect, reading as follows. RESOLVED that the Chairman the President. any Vice Chairman. any Executive Vice President any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company s seal bonds. recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond. recognizance. or conditional undertaking. and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED. that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President. any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company, provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED. that any bond, recognizance, contract of indemnity, or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking shall he valid and binding upon the Company when (a) signed by the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer. any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary; or (b) duly executed (under seal, if required) by one or more Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority: and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of each of the following officers. President, any Executive Vice President. any Senior Vice President. any Vice President. any Assistant Vice President, any Secretary any Assistant Secretary, and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents, Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys -in -Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached 1 Kori M Johanson. the undersigned, Assistant Secretary. of Farmington Casualty Company. Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc St Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies this 2nd day of F`bru ary , 20 11 O 9 T.7.!!S4N P �NSUq 9 `• ro; CON VOR4,Fjm `�PPORAT�. ? SEALS) Kori M Johansdu,(Assistant Secretary To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney, call 1-800-421-3880 or contact us at www.travelersbond.com. Please refer to the Attorney -In -Fact number, the above-named individuals and the details of the bond to which the power is attached WARNING. THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER i i i 1 STATE OF ILLINOIS COUNTY OF WINNEBAGO Before me, a Notary Public, personally came Vicki S. Busker known to me, and known to be Attorney -in -Fact of Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, a corporation in the State of Connecticut which executed the attached bond as Surety, who deposed and said that her signature and the corporate seal of the said Surety were affixed by order and authority of said Surety's Board of Directors, and that the execution of the attached bond is the free act and deed of said Surety. Given under my hand and seal this 2nd day of February, 2011 Notary Public ssssssssisssssss�e.o.,, Wyg, "OFFICIAL SAL' MARGARET A. HOWARD R e Notary Public, Stan Ielinois My Commission E74p:r ;s 03/14/11 �ssaosrsasso�s.'r.,a>s--<.., . _ :.r,*�.+.3'sa•rsa� STATE OF WASHINGTON COUNTY OF ) ss. Non -Collusion Affidavit NON -COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 1(.1LI4-1' 1 C_/lV'Sg (1 , being first duly sworn, on oath says that the bid above submitted is a genuine and not a sham or collusive bid, or made in the interest or on behalf of any person not therein named; and the said bidder further says that the said bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any bidder on the above work or supplies to put in a sham bid, or any other person or corporation to refrain from bidding; and that said bidder has not in any manner sought by collusion to secure to themselves an advantage over any other bidder or bidders. Signed add s�t-(r��� firmed) before me on 4 I Notary Public State of Washington CARRIE L SULLIVAN My Appointment Expires Mar 3, 2014 10 (Contractor's Signature) , 2011, by C;a-Irr � S l (Va Notary Public 4 A�/ 2.01r 4 My Appointment Expires 4/14.k', /l Non -Discrimination Provision During the performance of this Contract, the contractor agrees as follow. The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The Contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, color, religion, sex or national origin Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following. employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination, rates of pay or other forms of compensation, and selection for training, including apprenticeship The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause The Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin The Contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice, to be provided by the agency contracting officer, advising the labor union or workers' representative of the Contractor's commitments under Section 202 of Executive Order No 11246 of August 24, 1965, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. The Contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order No 11246 of August 24, 1965, and of the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor The Contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order No 11246 of August 24, 1965, and by the rules regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit access to his books, records, ar cgatatbyathe.contsaotir g..agenc r and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation ascertain compliance with such #ules, regulations, and orders • In the event of the Contractor's noncompliance with the ondiscrimnation,clauses of this'Cortract or with any such rules, regulation, or orders, this Ctrac( may be canceled, terminated, or suspended in whole or in part and the Contractor •martier €redia d' incl gibirror` further Government contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in Executive Order No. 11246 of August 24, 1965, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies involved as provided in Executive Order No 11246 of August 24, 1965, or by rule, regulation, or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law The Contractor will include the provisions of Paragraphs (1) through (7) in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to Section 204 of Executive Order No 11246 of August 24, 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor The Contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as the contracting agency may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for noncompliance; provided, however, that in the event the Contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by the contracting agency, the Contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States 11 Subcontractor List To be Submitted with the Bid Proposal Project Name. CITY OF YAKIMA GARDNER WELL Project No 2132 Failure to list subcontractors who are proposed to perform the work of heating, ventilation and air conditioning, plumbing, as described in Chapter 18.106 RCW, and electrical as described in Chapter 19.28 RCW will result in your bid being non-responsive and therefore void. Subcontractor(s) who are proposed to perform the work of heating, ventilation and air conditioning, plumbing, as described in Chapter 18.106 RCW, and electrical as described in Chapter 19.28 RCW must be listed below. The work to be performed is to be listed below the subcontractor(s) name. If no subcontractor is listed below, the bidder acknowledges that it does not intend to use any subcontractor to perform those items of work. Subcontractor Name Categories of Work , w,4?-c,t-r , r w.j :7-0411 II ries^ I 'r G Subcontractor Name Categories of Work H tm D /e, 1-1,0fneg Subcontractor Name Categories of Work ?i c „u h ; ., G tvfjoi q !" Subcontractor Name Categories of Work f-' " f' ZnS/M/4/i•#11,9yne- WtIS4: 434 Subcontractor Name Categories of Work Subcontractor Name Categories of Work 12 To be Submitted with the Bid Proposal Categories of work exceeding ten percent (10%) of the contract price to be performed by the prime contractor must be listed below U14-1(-4- � f J Prime Contractor Name l.)J i 1,(l Gunfl U1- J 'S (,IJ Q S t Categories of Work J / 13 Surety If the Bidder is awarded a construction Contract on this bid, the Surety who provides the Contract Bond will be: & tl el tlir s Gid u 0,( CLll.ci ye 4— limy, whose address is: 5-5-C 5o;,et,, .r► t1r'l(.e. R( Fock,Card 4- CoIIZ� Street City State Zip Bidder The name of the Bidder submitting this Bid is W I l LUUL OJAu1(t$ Iry est whose address is 5 Z } W. (q q7 33(9 Street City State Zip which is the address to which all communications concerned with this Bid and with the Contract shall be sent. The names of the principal officers of the corporation submitting this Proposal, or of the partnership, or of all persons interested in this Proposal as principals are as follows t v1 L c. fe• C S i (,(:t%fi,t, 14 Bidder's Data Form The following information will be verified by the City of Yakima. 1. Past experience with similar type work, include names, addresses, and telephone numbers of clients, locations of jobs performed, project descriptions, and contract amounts a&Nose f f(k—f 2 Past maintenance services performed on similar systems, include names, addresses, and telephone numbers of clients, locations where service performed, and service descriptions ►litatYtktt cQ <LIMP"A ` c 6(7 IA vViiir wn Wit ii CA u t' flVe' r \J , e c '4'l'4 4-e , rt c l ur: 1,wi4c r In. Yc �vr►�•� eV5i 4, Y �,%,tt [�- /I�AA LI i �:+-1.1 t tiA4A-41 1 1. Dc4.- r cc L Q ti vile -t— (i f u/ b �cvA Ntiov etiiIt /[.-C v-Qrll.i.lIlei WL/ 11:!tvvit,44L/. 3 Are you currently a named party in any pending litigation? If so, please identify the civil action number and jurisdiction (10 4 List key personnel, including supervisory personnel, to be used on this project and their individual experience and certifications ;r1ci� PQ4 ' ' , t i %lee•,✓ 5 rr.e, t L 5. c. l U'trfii. L: (',4to_ri u:iA te,l r.✓ N Uc',,.; s )`p,/,r:a,,,,tt' ii"O e L1' 5 Provide Washington state Contractor's registration (license) number u)Li-LjCw X110 (a NOTE Complete this Bidder's Data Form and submit with Bid. Failure to submit any or all of the foregoing information will be cause for rejection of the bid affected 15 City of Yakima — Women and Minority Business Enterprise Policy It is the policy of the City of Yakima that women and minority business enterprises shall have the maximum opportunity to participate in the performance of work relating to the City's activities. To this end, the City is committed to take all necessary and reasonable steps in accordance with state and federal rules and regulations to ensure women and minority business enterprises the maximum opportunity to compete for and to perform contracts. In order to enhance opportunities for women and minority businesses to participate in certain contractor opportunities with the City of Yakima, and as a recipient of federal and state financial assistance, the City is committed to a women and minority business enterprise utilization program The City is determined to maximize women and minority business opportunities through participation in the competitive bidding process through women and minority business enterprise affirmative action programs administratively established by the City Manager and monitored and implemented in accordance with state and federal rules and regulations All women and minority business enterprise programs shall include specific goals for participation of women and minority businesses in City projects of at least ten percent (10%) of the total dollar value of City contract over $10,000. Goals shall be reviewed and updated annually by the City Manager for applicability and to ensure that the intent of this policy is accomplished This statement of policy will be widely disseminated to all managers, supervisors, minorities, and women employed by the City of Yakima as well as to contractors, vendors, suppliers, minorities, and women who may seek the City's procurement and construction contracts related to the women and minority business enterprise programs Contractors associations will be made aware of construction projects affected by this policy through all available avenues to assure that plans/specifications, bid forms, and invitations to bid are as widely distributed as possible 16 Resolution No. D-4816 RESOLUTION NO. D" 4 8 1 6 A RESOLUTION adopting a "Women And Minority Business Enterprise Policy" for the City of Yakima. WHEREAS, the City of Yakima is the recipient of federal and state assistance which assistance carries with it the obli- gation of contracting with Women And Minority Business Enter- prises for the performance of public works, and WHEREAS, it is the intention of the City of Yakima that Women And Minority Business Enterprises shall have the maximum practicable opportunity to participate in the performance of such public works, and WHEREAS, the City of Yakima is determined to maximize Women And Minority Business Enterprise opportunities for parti- cipation in its competitive bidding process through the adoption of the "Women And Minority Business Enterprise Policy" statement attached hereto, now, therefore, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF YAKIMA: The City Council hereby adopts the "Women And Minority Business Enterprise Policy", a copy of which is attached hereto and by reference made a part hereof. ADOPTED BY THE CITY COUNCIL this .. F a day of 1983. ATTEST: ,4L City Clerk 17 . cMLt Mayor City of Yakima — Affirmative Action Plan The bidders, contractors, and subcontractors will not be eligible for award of a Contract under this Advertisement for Bids unless it certifies as prescribed, that it adopts the minimum goals and timetable of minority and women workforce utilization and specific affirmative action steps as set forth by the City of Yakima. This is directed at increasing minority and women workforce utilization by means of applying good faith efforts to carrying out such steps. However, no contractor or subcontractor shall be found to be in noncompliance solely on account of its failure to meet its goals within its timetables, but such contractor shall be given the opportunity to demonstrate that it has instituted all of the specific affirmative action steps specified by the City of Yakima, and has made every good faith effort to make these steps work toward the attainment of its goals, all to the purpose of expanding minority and women workforce utilization on all of its projects in the City of Yakima, Washington. In all cases, the compliance of a bidder, contractor, or subcontractor will be determined in accordance with its respective obligations under the terms of these Bid Conditions. All bidders and all contractors and subcontractors performing or to perform work on projects subject to these Bid Conditions hereby agree to inform their subcontractors of their respective obligations under the terms and requirements of these Bid Conditions, including the provisions relating to goals of minority and women employment and training Specific Affirmative Action Steps Bidders, contractors, and subcontractors subject to this Contract must engage in affirmative action directed at increasing minority and women workforce utilization, which is at least as extensive and as specific as the following steps The contractor shall notify community organizations that the contractor has employment opportunities available and shall maintain records of the organizations' response. The contractor shall maintain a file of the names and addresses of each minority and women worker referred to him and what action was taken with respect to each such referred worker, and if the worker was not employed, the reasons therefore. If such worker was not sent to the union hiring hall for referral or if such worker was not employed by the contractor, the contractor's file shall document this and the reasons therefore The contractor shall promptly notify the City of Yakima Engineering Division and Contract Compliance Officer when the union or unions with whom the contractor has collective bargaining agreement has not referred to the contractor a minority or woman worker sent by the contractor or the contractor has other information that the union referral process has impeded him in his efforts to meet his goal The contractor shall participate in training programs in the area, especially those funded by the Department of Labor. The contractor shall disseminate his EEO policy within his own organization by including it in any policy manual, by publicizing it in company newspapers, annual reports, etc , by conducting staff, employee and union representatives' meetings to explain and discuss the policy; by posting of the policy; and by specific review of the policy with minority employees. The contractor shall disseminate his EEO policy externally by informing and discussing it with all recruitment sources; by advertising in news media, specifically including minority news media; and by notifying and discussing it with all subcontractors and suppliers. 18 The contractor shall make specific efforts and constant personal (both written and oral) recruitment efforts directed at all minority or women organizations, schools with minority students, minority recruitment organizations and minority training organizations, within the contractor's recruitment areas The contractor shall make specific efforts to encourage present minority employees to recruit their friends and relatives. The contractor shall validate all man specifications; selection requirements, tests, etc The contractor shall make every effort to promote after-school, summer, and vacation employment to minority youth The contractor shall develop on-the-job training opportunities and participate and assist in any association or employer group training programs relevant to the contractor's employee needs consistent with its obligations under this bid The contractor shall continually inventory and evaluate all minority and women personnel for promotion opportunities and encourage minority and women employees to seek such opportunities. The contractor shall make sure that seniority practices, job classifications, etc , do not have a discriminatory effect. The contractor shall make certain that all facilities and company activities are non -segregated The contractor shall continually monitor all personnel activities to ensure that his EEO policy is being carried out. The contractor shall solicit bids for subcontracts from available minority and women subcontractors, engaged in the trades covered by these Bid Conditions, including circulation of minority and women contractor associations Non-cooperation. In the event the union is unable to provide the contractor with a reasonable flow of minority and women referrals within the time limit set forth in the collective bargaining agreements, the contractor shall, through independent recruitment efforts, fill the employment vacancies without regard to race, color, religion, sex or national origin, making full efforts to obtain qualified and/or qualifiable minorities and women (The U S Department of Labor has held that it shall be no excuse that the union with which the contractor has a collective bargaining agreement providing for exclusive referral failed to refer minority or women employees) In the event the union referral practice prevents the contractor from meeting the obligations pursuant to Executive Order 11246 and 23 CFR Part 230 as amended, and the Standard Specifications, such contractor shall immediately notify the City of Yakima Engineering Department or the City of Yakima Compliance Officer 19 Bidder's Certification A bidder will not be eligible for award of a contract under this invitation for bids unless such bidder has submitted as a part of its bid the following certification, which will be deemed a part of the resulting contract: lJ 1(i ✓Ces nest (BIDDER) certifies that: 1 It intend to use the following listed construction trades in the work under the contract: ,av4fed v) fit 1r" br and; 3.As to those trades for which it is required by these Bid Conditions to comply with these Bid Conditions, it adopts the minimum minority and women workforce utilization goals and the specific affirmative action steps for all construction work (both federal and non-federal) in the Yakima, Washington area subject to these Bid Conditions, those trades being. 1Dr,.4 ► la j - p %a'. and; 2 It will obtain from each of its subcontractors and submit to the contracting or administering agency prior to the award of any sub -contract under this Contract the Subcontractor Certification required by these Bid Conditions. Signature of Authorized Representative of Bidder) 20 Subcontractor's Certification Subcontractor's Certification is not required at the time of bid. This Certification must be completed by each subcontractor prior to award of any subcontract: certifies that: (SUBCONTRACTOR) 1 It intends to use the following listed construction trades in the work under the subcontract: and, 4.As to those trades for which it is required by these Bid Conditions to comply with these Bid Conditions, it adopts the minimum minority and women workforce utilization goals and the specific affirmative action steps for all construction work (both federal and non-federal) in the Yakima, Washington area subject to these Bid Conditions, those trades being and; 2 It will obtain from each of its subcontractors prior to the award of any subcontract under this subcontract the Subcontractor Certification required by these Bid Conditions (Signature of Authorized Representative of Bidder) 21 Materially and Responsiveness This certification required to be made by the bidder pursuant to these Bid Conditions is material, and will govern the bidder's performance on the project and will be made a part of this bid Failure to submit the certification will render the bid non-responsive. Compliance and Enforcement Contractors are responsible for informing their subcontractor (regardless of tier) as to their respective obligations under the conditions of the contract here (as applicable). Bidders, contractors and subcontractors hereby agree to refrain from entering into any contract or contract modification subject to Executive Order 11246, as amended on August 24, 1965, with a contractor debarred from, or who is determined not to be a responsible bidder for government contracts and federally assisted construction contracts pursuant to Executive Order The bidder, contractor or subcontractor shall carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of the equal opportunity clause including suspension, termination and cancellation of existing subcontracts as may be imposed or ordered by the administering agency, the contracting agency or the Office of Federal Contract Compliance pursuant to the Executive Order Any bidder, contractor or subcontractor who shall fail to carry out such sanctions and penalties shall be deemed to be in non-compliance with these Bid Conditions and Executive Order 11246, as amended. Nothing herein is intended to relieve any contractor or subcontractor during the term of its contract on this project from compliance with Executive Order 11246, as amended, and the Equal Opportunity Clause of its contract. Violation of any substantial requirement in the affirmative action plan by a contractor or subcontractor covered by these Bid Conditions, including the failure of such contractor or subcontractor to make a good faith effort to meet its fair share of the trade's goals of minority and women workforce utilization, shall be grounds for imposition of the sanctions and penalties provided at Section 209(a) of Executive Order 11246, as amended. Each agency shall review its contractors' and subcontractors' employment practices during the performance of the contract. If the agency determines that the affirmative action plan no longer represents effective affirmative action, it shall so notify the Office of Federal Contract Compliance which shall be solely responsible for any final determination of that question and the consequences thereof In regard to these conditions, if the contractor of subcontractor meets it goals, or if the contractor or subcontractor can demonstrate that it has made every good faith effort to meet those goals, the contractor or the subcontractor shall be presumed to be in compliance with the Executive Order 11246, as amended, the implementing regulations and its obligations under these Bid Conditions and no formal sanctions or proceedings leading toward sanctions shall be instituted unless the agency otherwise determines that the contractor or subcontractor is not providing equal employment opportunities In judging whether a contractor or subcontractor has met its goals, the agency will consider each contractor's or subcontractor's minority and women workforce utilization and will not take into consideration the minority and women workforce utilization of its subcontractors Where the agency finds that the contractor or subcontractor has failed to comply with the requirement of Executive Order 11246, as amended, the implementing regulations and its obligations under these Bid Conditions, the agency shall take such action and impose such sanctions as may be appropriate under Executive Order and the regulations When the agency proceeds with such formal action, it has the burden of proving that the contractor has not met the requirements of these Bid Conditions, but the contractor's failure to meet its goals shall shift to it the requirement to come forward with evidence to show that it has met the "good faith" requirements of these Bid Conditions by instituting at least the Specific Affirmative Action steps listed above and by making every good faith effort to make those steps work toward the attainment of its goals within its timetables The pendency of such formal proceeding shall be taken into consideration by 22 Federal agencies in determining whether such contractor or subcontractor can comply with the requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and is therefore a "responsible prospective contractor" within the meaning of the Federal Procurement Regulations. It shall be no excuse that the union with which the contractor has a collective bargaining agreement providing for exclusive referral failed to refer minority and women employees The procedures set forth in these conditions shall not apply to any contract when the head of the contracting or administering agency determines that such contract is essential to the national security and that its award without following such procedures is necessary to the national security Upon making such a determination, the agency head will notify, in writing, the Director of the Office of Federal Contractor Compliance within thirty (30) days. Requests for exemptions from these Bid Conditions must be made in writing, with justification, to: Director Office of Federal Contractor Compliance U.S Department of Labor Washington, D C 20210 and shall be forwarded through and with the endorsement of the agency head Contractors and subcontractors must keep such records and file such reports relating to the provisions of these Bid Conditions as shall be required by the contracting or administering agency or the Office of Federal Contractor Compliance 23 Proposal Form GARDNER WELL CITY OF YAKIMA PROJECT NO. 2132 The Bidder is hereby advised that by signature of this proposal, he/she is deemed to have acknowledged all requirements and signed all certificates contained herein A proposal guaranty in an amount of five percent (5%) of the total bid, based upon the approximate estimate of quantities at the above prices and in the form as indicated below, is attached hereto. CASH ❑ IN THE AMOUNT OF CASHIER'S CHECK ❑ DOLLARS CERTIFIED CHECK ❑ ($ ) PAYABLE TO THE STATE TREASURER PROPOSAL BOND Ifiit IN THE AMOUNT OF 5% OF THE BID ' Receipt is hereby acknowledged of addendum(s) No (s) Cs -u9) rin-.9o3 j PHONE NUMBER (b►)'1$3_trtte( FAX NUMBER 2.. , and 3 'i SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED OFFICIALS FIRM NAME � <<Ia-vn. c,(4.6,J(Ls LU-' (ADDRESS) 0120 tJ1 aect.(u)k.i- i 4(Ae `gi, 2.0� STATE OF WASHINGTON CONTRACTORS LICENSE NUMBER LO LLa-cw �� 3 0 E-1 FEDERAL ID NO Zo' (a(j';u Note (1) This proposal form is not transferrable and any alteration of the firm's name entered hereon without prior permission from the Secretary of Transportation will be cause for considering the proposal irregular and subsequent rejection of the bid (2) Please refer to Section 1-02 6 of the Standard Specifications, re. "Preparation of Proposal," or "Article 4" of the Instructions to Bidders for building construction jobs. (3) Should it be necessary to modify this proposal either in writing or by electronic means, please make reference to the following proposal number in your communication. 24 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4' , OWNER Confederated Tribes and Bands of the Yakama Nation OWNERCONTACTAND PHONE NUMBER ° ' Bill Sharp 509.865.5121 ext 6355 .-- .: PROJECT- Lyle and Castile Falls Fishway LOCATION - '- Lyle, WA , -,'VALUE -, $ 10,613,374.00 • -DESIGN `o - .J _,ENGINEER/ARCHITECT Harbor Consulting Engineers -EACONTACL =' John Hutchins E%A CONTACT PHONE # 206.709.2397 , STATUS In Process - START/STOP 03/10-03/11 DESCRIPTION - New fish ladder, fish lift, adult capture facility, & new equipment building. Includes 48" HDPE piping, mechical piping, large gates ans hydraulic system CLAIMS'. none • Sunnyside Division Board of Control Don Schramm 509-837-6980 Lateral Improvement Project Sunnyside, WA $ 2,956,418.00 RH2 Mike Pleasants Complete 08/10-02/11 Installation of approx 9,500ft 72-78" welded steel pipe, 14,800ft 34-63" HDPE pipe, 2,40ft 6-18" HDPE pipe, 300ft 6-10" PVC pipe. none Waste Management Sam lines 541-454-2030 Wenatchee Transfer Station Wenatchee, WA $ 114,365.00 Wallis Engineering Mike Conway Complete 07/10-12/10 Modification to existinf facility, upgrade utilities, site concrete, asphalt and retaining walls. Upgrade building exterior. none Confederated Tribes and Bands of the Yakama Nation Bill Sharp 509.865.5121 ext 6355 Castile 4&5 Sill Modifications Castile Falls, WA $ 58,354.00 Harbor Consulting Engineers John Hutchins 206.709.2397 Complete 10/10-12/10 Modify existing concrete sill w/steel extension/second notch. none City of Prosser Gary Lauerman 509-838-8568 Prosser Pool Demolition Prosser, WA $ 112,313.00 ALSC Architects Gary Lauerman 509-838-8568 Complete 10/10-11-10 Demo portion of existing concrete pool tank, concrete deck pool mechanical equip/piping. Remove/salvage wood frame structure. none . OWNER City of Yakima WILLIAM CHARLES WEST OWNER CONTACT AND" - . PHONE NUMBER , _ , Max Linden 509.575.6077 EMPLOYEE EXPERIENCE , PROJECT . . •: Yakima WWTP upgrade LOCATION . - Yakima, WA • VALUE . .: - $8,198,458.00 . - " DESIGN- ENGINEER/ARCHITECT Black and Veatch E/A CONTACT Sean Goris s ,E/A CONTACT.PHONE # 503.699.7556 -. ,. STATUS _ .. Complete , START/STOP 4/06-03/08 . DESCRIP.TION- Upgrade to existing WWTP, included new solids handling facility, polymer system, centrifuge pumps, blowers. Site improvements and demolition CLAIMS none PROJECT PLOYEEE &POSITION ON' Carrie Sullivan- Project Manager, Keith Larson, Vice President City of Woodland , 360.225.7999 Woodland WTP & Ranney Well Pump Improvements Woodland, WA $660,197 00 Gibbs & olsen 360.425.0991 Complete 03/07-08/07 Addition of water treatment to existing system, inlucded piping, fittings, valves and pumps none Jim Swanger- Superintendent, Keith Larson - Vice President City of Warden Mike Tompson 509.349.2326 EDB Mitigation Transmission Line and Well 67 Warden, WA $806,438 Gray & Osborne Ron Reiland 509.453.4833 Complete 09/06-12-06 Construction of Well house, installation of turbine pumps with VFD and discharge piping, HDPE pipe and PVC transmission main none Carrie Sullivan- Project Manager, Keith Larson, Vice President City of Mesa 509.265.4253 Mesa Booster pump station Mesa, WA $2,000,000 Spink Engineering 509.946.1581 Complete 04/06-10/06 Construction of Well house, installation of pumps and associated piping none Chad Wheeler- Project Manager City of College Place 509.525.0510 City of College Place College Place, WA $4,150,000 USKH 509.328.5139 Complete 02/07-03/08 New Well house, telemetry system, new pumps, piping, & sitework none Chad Wheeler- Projec t Manager City of Zillah Tim Tilley 509.829.5055 Zillah Reservoir and Pump Station Zillah, WA $1,500,000 Huibregtse, Louman Associates, Inc. Steve Sziebert 509.966.7000 Complete 02/08-11/018 0.61 MG Reservoir, 2 new booster pump stations and transmission lines none Chad Wheeler- Projec t Manager SECTION 3 -CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 25 Contract THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into in triplicate, this �{- day of 1,-4,112.d 'fir;;; .17.., 2011, by and between the City of Yakima, hereinafter called the OWNER, and Wet t.�. 5Gb_t=R LES Ams ` 7 , hereinafter called the CONTRACTOR;F Y.1 WITNESSETH:`•`„4i. 44 That in considerationofythe terms and conditions contained herein and attached and made a part of this Agreement, the parties hereto covenant and agree as follows The CONTRACTOR shall do all work and furnish all tools, materials, and equipment for Gardner Well - City Project No. 2132, in accordance with and as described in the attached Plans and Specifications and the 2008 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, which are by this reference incorporated herein and made a part hereof, and shall perform any alterations in or additions to the work provided under this Contract and every part thereof. Work shall start within ten (10) calendar days after Notice to Proceed and shall be completed in the timeframe set forth in Section 01000 - Scope of Work provided in Exhibit B of this Contract. The first chargeable working day shall be the date set forth in the Notice to Proceed or the first day the Contractor begins work, whichever comes first. If said work is not completed within the time specified, the CONTRACTOR agrees td,'gay to the OWNER for each and every working day said work remains uncompleted after expiration ;of.the specified time, liquidated damages as determined in Section 1-08.9 of the -2008 Stende d Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction ” The CONTRACTOR shall provide and bear the expense of all equipment, work, and, labor of any sort whatsoever that may be required for the. transfer -of materials and for constructing and completing the work provided for in this Contract and every part thereof, .except such as are mentioned in the Specifications to be furnished by the OWNER.` II. The OWNER hereby promises and agrees with the CONTRACTOR to employ, and does employ the 'CONTRACTOR tb'provide the materials and to do" and cause to be done the 'above described work and to complete and finish the same according to the attached Plans and Specifications and the terms and conditions herein contained; and hereby contracts to pay for the same according to the attached Specifications and the schedule of unit or itemized prices hereto attached, at the time and in the manner and upon the conditions provided for in this Contract. III The CONTRACTOR for himself, and for his/her heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns does hereby agree to the full performance of all the covenants herein upon the part of the CONTRACTOR. IV. It is further provided that no liability shall attach to the OWNER by reason of entering into this Contract, except as expressly provided herein. V. CONTRACTOR is an independent contractor and not an employee of the OWNER. The OWNER has designated the Contract performance and the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the details of that work. The parties recognize the CONTRACTOR has unique skills not otherwise available to the OWNER to accomplish the purpose of the Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall supply all equipment and supplies necessary to accomplish the Contract. The parties recognize that the purpose of the Contract is not within the regular course of business of the OWNER. The parties state that the right of control over the activities necessary to perform the Contract is with the CONTRACTOR. 26 IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be executed the day and year first herein above written. OWNER. Cit f Yakima, Washington (SEAL) B Y 1 ATTEST Name R. A. Zais, Jr. Title City Manager CONTRACTOR.iWiad gC l/4SACJ By' N.me (Please Print or Type) Address i S/zoo katioa 7,015,4 FAX. t 7*3f+kf AVy7 3 yon /L/�cOttC //, ► it r tft- Phone E-mail Address Employer Identification Number•,' 347/3A0 27 kaTrkzi_LK,F4__) Name Deborah J. Koster Title• City Clerk (SEAL) ATTEST Java da►,r 1 , 4.444,il -f-frsT (Please Print or Type) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bondi 105488006 Contract Bond BOND TO CITY OF YAKIMA KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, William Charles West as principal, and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Connecticut , as a Surety corporation, and qualified under the laws of the State of Washington to become Surety upon bonds of contractors with municipal corporations, as Surety, are jointly and severally held and firmly bound to the City of Yakima in the penal sum of $ 1,122.290.76 for the payment of which sum on demand we bind ourselves and our successors, heirs, administrators, or personal representatives, as the case may be. This obligation is entered into in pursuance of the statutes of the State of Washington and the Ordinances of the City of Yakima Dated at Kennewick , Washington, this 23rd day of February , 2011. Nevertheless, the conditions of the above obligation are such that: WHEREAS, under and pursuant to action of the City of Yakima, on February 23, , 2011, the City Manager and City Clerk of said City of Yakima has let or is about to let to the said w;11iaID Charles West , the above bounden Principal, a certain Contract, the said Con- tract being numbered City Contract No. IR2180, and providing for the construction of Gardner Well — Project No. 2132 (which Contract is referred to herein and is made a part hereof as though attached hereto), and WHEREAS, the said Principal has accepted, or is about to accept, the said Contract, and undertake to perform the work therein provided for in the manner and within the time set forth; NOW, THEREFORE, if the said William Charles West shall faithfully perform all the provisions of said Contract in the manner and within the time therein set forth, or within such extensions of time as may be granted under said Contract, and shall pay all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors and material men and all industrial insurance premiums, and all persons who shall supply said principal or subcontractors with provisions and supplies for the carrying on of said work, and shall indemnify and hold the City of Yakima harmless from any damage or expense by reason of failure of performance as specified in said Contract or from defects appearing or developing in the material or workmanship provided or performed under said Contract within a period of one year after its acceptance thereof by the City of Yakima, then and in that event this obligation shall be void; but otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect. SURETY: Travelers Casualty & Surety (SEAL) By: of Ameri Name: Vick' S. Busker (Please Print or Type) Agent: Williams—Manny, Inc. Address. PO Box 5466, Rockford, IL 61125-0466 28 ATTEST: 0 Name. Debbie L.I�cK' y innv (Please Print or Type) CONT ~^ ' TOR: /„4, ' By: Name.' Keith Larson (Please Print or TypaF Appred out Form: C 29 1 • TRAVELERS J Attorney -In Fact No. WARNING THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER POWER OF ATTORNEY Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company 222024 St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company Certificate No. 003954478 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS. That St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Minnesota, that Farmington Casualty Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company. and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut, that United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland, that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies"), and that the Companies do hereby make, constitute and appoint Connie L. Marty, David L. Townsend, John C. Pick, Judith L. Zier, Julie Tresemer, Steven R. Johnson, Margaret A. Howard, and Vicki S. Busker of the City of Rockford/Freeport , State of Illinois , their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign, execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, recognizances, conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law 18th IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed, this day of January 2010 State of Connecticut City of Hartford ss Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company By- Georg- Thompson, 'enior ice President On this the 18th day of January 2010 before me personally appeared George W Thompson, who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company. Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, and that he. as such, being authorized so to do. executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal My Commission expires the 30th day of June, 2011 58440-4-09 Printed in U.S.A. C . ��- Marie C. Tetreault. Notary Public WARNING. THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER WARNING. THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, which resolutions are now in full force and effect, reading as follows. RESOLVED. that the Chairman. the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seal bonds, recognizances, contracts of indemnity. and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking, and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company, provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that any bond, recognizance, contract of indemnity, or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when (a) signed by the President. any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary; or (b) duly executed (under seal, if required) by one or more Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of each of the following officers. President, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents, Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys -in -Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached 1, Kori M Johanson. the undersigned, Assistant Secretary, of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, 1 have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies this 23rd day of February Kori M JohansdolAssistant Secretary ,2011 To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney, call 1-800-421-3880 or contact us at www.travelersbond.com Please refer to the Attorney -In -Fact number, the above-named individuals and the details of the bond to which the power is attached. WARNING. THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER STATE OF ILLINOIS COUNTY OF WINNEBAGO Before me, a Notary Public, personally came Vicki S. Busker known to me, and known to be Attorney -in -Fact of Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, a corporation in the State of Connecticut which executed the attached bond as Surety, who deposed and said that her signature and the corporate seal of the said Surety were affixed by order and authority of said Surety's Board of Directors, and that the execution of the attached bond is the free act and deed of said Surety. Given under my hand and seal this 23rd day of February, 2011 y�• 1)) Notary Public "OFFICIAL SEAL" DEBBIE L McKINNEY Notary Public, State Of Iilinote My Commission . ires 04/24/12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 coRI CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE OP ID VI RBLAC-1 DATE(MMIDD/YYYY) 03/01/11 PRODUCER Williams -Manny, Inc . P 0 Box 5466 555 S. Perryville Rd. Rockford IL 61125-0466 Phone: 815-398-6800 Fax:815-398-1733 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURED William Charles West 5920 W Clearwater Ave, Ste 201 Kennewick WA 99336 I INSURER A. American Contrctrs Ins. Co/RRCs A INSURER B: St Paul/Travelers 19038 INSURER C: ill Janis National Insurance Co GL10000028 PRIMARY GL10X00028 EXCESS FOLLOW FORM INSURER D: 06/01/11 06/01/11 INSURER E. $ 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 COVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. ABOVE FOR THE POLICY RESPECT TO WHICH TO ALL THE TERMS, POLICY EFFEC'rriv DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) PERIOD INDICATED. THIS CERTIFICATE MAY EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS P LI fT DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) NOTWITHSTANDING BE ISSUED OR OF SUCH LIMITS INSH LTR ADU'L INSRO TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER A GENERAL LIABILITY COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY GL10000028 PRIMARY GL10X00028 EXCESS FOLLOW FORM 06/01/10 06/01/10 06/01/11 06/01/11 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 X PREMSES (Eaocccurence) 5100000 CLAIMS MADE X OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5 0 0 0 X XCU Included PERSONAL BADV INJURY $2000000 X Blkt Contractual GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 4000000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 4000000 7 POLICY X P£0 LOC Emp. Liab 1000000 B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS 5807B635 06/01/10 06/01/11 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ 1000000 X BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ X BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ X PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ GARAGE LIABILITY ANY AUTOOTHER AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ THAN EA ACC $ AUTO ONLY- AGG $ C EXCESS 1 UMBRELLA LIABILITY BE9613312 06/01/10 06/01/11 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 X OCCUR CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE $ 5000000 DEDUCTIBLE RETENTION $ $ $ $ ' WORKERS AND EMPLOYERS' ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE)--I OFFICER/MEMBER (Mandatory If yes, describe SPECIAL COMPENSATION LIABILITYY / N EXCLUDED? I f WA EMPLOYERS LIABILITY SEE GL ABOVE WC SIAM- U1H- TORY LIMITS ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ In NH) under PROVISIONS below E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ B OTHER Leased/Rented Eqpt QT6305867B054 0`6/01/10 06/01/11 Per Item 1000000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES / EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT / SPECIAL PROVISIONS City of Yakima, and its officers, elected officials, employees, agents, volunteers and Golder Associates as additional insureds for Project # 2132 - Gardner Well. CANCELLATION City of Yakima 129 N.2nd Street Yakima WA 98901 I CYAKI 01 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL E-NDCAVeR-TO MAIL 3 0 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, .- - -- .. _- - - .. - ... AUTHORIZ PRE/TATIVE D ti.w b 1988-2b09 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD POLICY NUMBER: GL08000037 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED -- OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS (FORM B) This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART. SCHEDULE Name of Person or Organization: City of Yakima, its agents, employees and elected or appointed officials (If no entry appears above, information required to complete this endorsement will be shown in the Declarations as applicable to this endorsement.) WHO IS AN INSURED (Section II) is amended to include as an insured the person or organization shown in the Schedule, but only with respect to liability arising out of "your work" for that insured by or for you. CG 20 10 11 85 Copyright, Insurance Services Office, Inc., 1984 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s) If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s) DISCLAIMER This Certificate of Insurance does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. ACORD 25 (2009/01) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 f - - RD A CO - �T,= �I. '�U�R�A ____ :,CE� �IFI;CATE:'�� P P R, 'za,....�,,...: ..a::aars,,. ....... ......:.:�,:,. r :Evn,r •,>.!�`, � ,.:,.ra; �::-`•...: ,-:; .'o ti tit}rt DATE MMIDDNY ,. ,n-,.o,,,'-'�,�J,•' , r �• .- ,Y: PRODUCER Williams -Manny, Inc . P 0 Box 5466 555 S . Perryville Rd. THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. Rockford IL 61125-0466 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE William Charles, Ltd. -Bonds Phone:815-398-6800 Fax:815-398-1733 COMPANY A St Paul/Travelers INSURED COMPANY B William Charles Construction Co. LLC, dba William Charles COMPANY C West 5920 W Clearwater Ave, Ste 201 Kennewick WA 99336 1 COMPANY D - , „:,i.-, ., ...y .. v:,a--- - - ,C.� -: 'sa.. .rl, n^ -,:,, �,rs; .n,�: `:r• xai-rg- .y� . :�: ;t:,..o_ tin.;:'.`"=.54;,1:T` �;'^.tYi,.,',�s ;`a�:. {: r••+..: 1.. - ,,. , •'�2L•.`..1�:.. �+ 4:_',.:3::.t:L:.:.:..,:::Y:•,.."- ., . ...... .. ... . .a....n-_„2.�.P..�i'.`:>[:,.._:i.r.._.... r.., .....,::4:. .,,_..-e. ,..,... YF_``v. P .t.r,-SS:i� COV 't^" .::o-' ::::ai<:?3;-;« s.1.;r.^:e.. :.�,:4...:. ,x=: i?.�r ;z:.:- ::,•'y`";;.« 3 y'.` THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE (MMIDDNYI POLICY EXPIRATION DATE (MM/DDNY) COVERED PROPERTY LIMITS CAUSES PROPERTY OF LOSS BASIC BROAD SPECIAL— EARTHQUAKE FLOOD BUILDING PERSONAL PROPERTY BUSINESS INCOME EXTRA EXPENSE BLANKET BUILDING BLANKET PERS PROP BLANKET BLDG & PP $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ TYPE CAUSES INLAND MARINE OF POLICY OF LOSS NAMED PERILS OTHER -$ $ $ $ $ $ TYPE CRIME OF POLICY — $ $ BOILER & MACHINERY $ $ A X OTHER Builders Risk QT6609509L121TIL11 04/01/11 04/01/12 A Builders Riek 1122291.00 LOCATION OF PREMISES/DESCRIPTION OF PROPERTY Corner of Pierce and Cornell Avenue, Yakima, WA 98901 SPECIAL CONDITIONS/OTHER COVERAGES City of Yakima - Gardner Well City Project 2132 CER_ATEt LDRw,_>g.,,E cvMhcY CYAKI01 City of Yakima „C :.. .,,,.. '' ( .�,$ / 4v;T'nEca YcS)r SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL-ENBEAVOfl-TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, 129 N.2nd Street • ••, _ • , „- _... Yakima WA 98901 i4',.. . ..T .. . ,.rna..,.. ..t..,..-_. ..< .. .. 1.. _ Iw.: .<..:..., .r_.,. ,..t.iri.. 4 ,t. �`a�< C. R .2. 1195 �- ... _. ..... .,7. _. ./,..,. :».:.r-, - .., ::t.: a,-...,+,:^�....-, -. ., r . ,s_a. __.... AUiORIZPRES TATIVE ,.e.. tii ,.1. ;`T - s;r'Q 4r :i 0 ,.x v«., ..A 'R _C R RPTNI: 9 ..., .. r. _ ` A : - _ K,.n .., w. _......r _..... _. ..,... .r1„ ... ... ..:) ..... ' A» CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 OP ID VI RBLAC-1 DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) 03/01/11 PRODUCER Williams -Manny, Inc. P 0 Box 5466 555 S. Perryville Rd. Rockford IL 61125-0466 Phone:815-398-6800 Fax:815-398-1733 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURED William Charles Construction Company, LLC dba William Charles West 5920 W Clearwater Ave, Ste 201 Kennewick WA 99336 INSURER A: Steadfast Insurance Company 16535 INSURER 8: INSURER C' INSURER D: INSURER E. COVERAGES THE ANY MAY POLICIES. LTR POLICIES REQUIREMENT, PERTAIN, 2 NSRC OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED NOTWITHSTANDING TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER DATE MM(DDClYYYY) DATE (MM/DO WY) LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ UAMAtot IUHhNItU PREMISES (Ea occurence) $ CLAIMS MADE IX] OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $ PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ GENERAL AGGREGATE 5 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: POLICY X PRO- LOC JECT PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ —1 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ BODILY INJURY (Per person) BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ GARAGE LIABILITY ANY AUTO AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN EA ACC $ AUTO ONLY: AGG $ EXCESS! UMBRELLA LIABILITY OCCUR [---} CLAIMS MADE DEDUCTIBLE RETENTION $ EACH OCCURRENCE $ AGGREGATE $ $ $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY Y / N ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory in NH) II yes, describe under SPECIAL PROVISIONS below WCStAIU- OIH• TORY LIMITS ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE 5 E.L. DISEASE . POLICY LIMIT $ E E OTHER Environmental Liab Professional Liab E0C3999313 E0C3999313 06/01/10 06/01/10 06/01/11 06/01/11 5000000 5000000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS !LOCATIONS / VEHICLES/ EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT / SPECIAL PROVISIONS RE: City of Yakima Project #2132 - Gardner Well ICERTIFICATE HOLDER 1 CANCELLATION City of Yakima 129 N.2nd Street Yakima WA 98901 IACORD 25 (2009/01) 1 CYAKI01 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ItEmPA,,C0 TO MAIL 3 0 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BY7 F II AUTHORIZ) PRESEI�TATIVE D'- t W.// 1988-2b09 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s) DISCLAIMER This Certificate of Insurance does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. ACORD 25 (2009/01) COMMERCIAL LIABILITY CGL—ENDORSEMENTS 1ST REPRINT JUNE 1991 POLICY NUMBER: ABC 123 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED -OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS (FORM B) 4 This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART ON SCHEDULE O Name of Person or Organiiation: CITY OF YAKIMA, ITS AGENTS, EMPLOYEES, AND ELECTED OR APPOINTED OFFICIALS (If no entry appears above. information required to complete this endorsement will be shown in the Declara- tions as applicable to this endorsement.) WHO IS AN INSURED (Section II) is amended to include as an insured the person or organization shown In the Schedule, but only with respect to 'lability arising out of "your work" for that insured by or for you. Agent Signature Date CG 20 10 11 85 CG 20101185 Copyright, Insurance Services Office, Inc., 1984 Vt.H.208 32 Schedule of Working Hours In accordance with SECTION 1-08 0(2) HOURS OF WORK (APWA ONLY), the normal straight time working hours for this project will be between 07:00 a.m. to 08:00 p.m., five days per week. It is understood that normal straight time working hours shall not exceed 40 hours per week, regardless of the number of days worked per week. All hours worked in excess of 40 hours per week shall be considered as overtime hours subject to the reimbursement provisions of SECTION 1-08 0(3) REIMBURSEMENT FOR OVERTIME WORK OF CONTRACTING AGENCY EMPLOYEES as modified by the Special Provisions. Overtime hours are defined as any hours in excess of or outside of the above normal straight time working hours when the Contractor and/or his subcontractors are on the project site performing work. I hereby certify that my subcontractors have been notified of the normal straight time working hours provisions of this project and understand that Engineer/Contracting Agency costs for overtime hours will be deducted from amounts due to me for work performed on the project. Contractor Date 33 Minimum Wage Affidavit STATE OF WASHINGTON) ) ss Minimum Wage Affidavit COUNTY OF YAKIMA ) I, the undersigned, having been duly sworn, depose, say and certify that in connection with the performance of the work, payment for which this voucher is submitted, I have paid the following rate per hour to each classification of laborers, workmen, or mechanics, as indicated upon the attached list, now referred to and by such reference incorporated in and made an integral part hereof, for all such employed in the performance of such work; and no laborer, workman or mechanic so employed upon such work has been paid less than the prevailing rate of wage or less than the minimum rate of wages as specified in the principal contract; that I have read the above and foregoing statement and certificate, know the contents thereof and the substance as set forth therein is true to my knowledge and belief. Subscribed and sworn to before me on thisd. day of Notary P : I nd for the State of I.l)Ch,t_ tO?') Washington residing at 4:ceV1 r uJ,-C c Notary Public State of Washington NORMA G. GARCIA MY COMMISSION EXPIRES SEPTEMBER 22, 2014 34 , 2011 Prevailing Wage Affidavit The prevailing rate of wages to be paid to all workmen, laborers, or mechanics employed in the performance of any part of this contract shall be in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 39 12 RCW, as amended The rules and regulations of the Department of Labor and Industries are by reference made a part of this contract as though fully set forth herein The current schedule of prevailing wage rates for the locality or localities where this contract will be performed, as determined by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries, are included in these contract documents Inasmuch as the contractor will be held responsible for paying the prevailing wages, it is imperative that all contractors familiarize themselves with the current wage rates, as determined by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries, before submitting bids based on these specifications In case any dispute arises as to what are the prevailing rates of wages for work of a similar nature and such dispute cannot be adjusted by the parties in interest, including labor and management representatives, the matter shall be referred for arbitration to the Director of the Department of Labor and Industries of the State and his decision therein shall be final and conclusive and biding on all parties involved in the dispute as provided for by RCW 39 12 060 as amended Current prevailing wage rules and data can be furnished by the Industrial Statistician upon request. You may submit your request to Department of Labor and Industries ESAC Division PO Box 44540 Olympia, Washington 98504-4540 Telephone 360-902-5335 (http://www.lni.wa.qov/PrevailinqWaqe4w.aqes/20_101/co39.a.sp, March 3,, 2010) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 35 ' 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 _WefLocaton Map.mxd 13/2/20101 BVANG-JOHNSON Golder Associates h.L// i. �'I1�� (,,,,_,Li__� -N f/_ , I ,_ --I1-1- L` LJJ < i ` 4 __./ ! LI,Jr__ [lir„.,_,,. , T �_ l,' _ -Z , it —1 1 -- +- I Yakima Firing Canter TTrgiF¢servallon j -_ v NN Yakima \ , ,1 -� � - t_... / -, 1 r U �✓ - ? I / j �: • ,, ✓ I _ Ridge C y ., �_ 1 <—�, ✓,_Z G y�.�.� J > ` - SU - ^ -_ Yakima Ridger( , _- Cowiche Cr.,. �J -'� y \� }-rl_ .a f. :� �, _: ,, II- %Sp i Cowiche ... Mountain , f I \�---1----17--r-,- 1- i .. �(` r � I-_ _ 5 11 .� ob' -�x�ti=z.; lT=. �- n . :T_,i �_ l I1 G_ is �;_ ! ._ _ a Y\ � �100 c,- Manis_Well _ y I „ j a- �T j II�_ 1 mace eights._ eig t -- __ --r[[ II IT •�' I �' ' f .c.' II � = -I ',1± ; [ •' I i - i 1 ', I : ' nr � IYakima -_:�J.� 1l a _ I,N t < '_".;------a. �L7 1 --- -. I j� LI 7T� ; �iNn 1•�1J �r ` �l f ---� _ -- �' 'i --- fj = SS eLyVellIll'1GardneraWelll--- _� /r n, flow Cr.ir_!',_. Wide.Ho -------.;._. , . -- l-•_ -„ _ . Airport Weil' J_� `�l _ tl j }} 11 }} _• I �° J Moxey Valle ; �� I i ,\ , ----- --, -. . \ - , _ , .. Union *, ��__ • y�r cT. .� ac t Gaps zee i / ¢.A -to, ,��-u_ __ -L =- \' • H I Pr. � �'.. \�. ! ” xtm° �I_i4 - oje i ct=Locatiion -z,r. L._ -/Ah aAv.,- fir' -- .. _ _ �\ ; . — I . Ahtanun Rattlesnake -`\ Hills ii ' 1 LEGEND This figure was originally produced in color. Reproduction0 2 in black and white may result in a loss of information. Scale in Miles Service Area Map Projection. Washington State Plane FIGURE N South Zone NAD 1983 PROJECT LOCATION MAP Source: r City of Yakima, SOURCE NO. S10 Golder Associates Inc. YAKIMA/GARDNER WELL ENGINEERING/WA _WefLocaton Map.mxd 13/2/20101 BVANG-JOHNSON Golder Associates EXHIBIT A PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE INSURANCE GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISION 1-07.18 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE INSURANCE Delete this section in its entirety, and replace it with the following: 1-07.18 INSURANCE (May 10, 2006 APWA GSP) 1-07.18(1) GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall obtain the insurance described in this section from insurers approved by the State Insurance Commissioner pursuant to RCW Title 48 The insurance must be provided by an insurer with a rating of A-: VII or higher in the A.M Best's Key Rating Guide, which is licensed to do business in the state of Washington (or issued as a surplus line by a Washington Surplus lines broker) The Contracting Agency reserves the right to approve or reject the insurance provided, based on the insurer (including financial condition), terms and coverage, the Certificate of Insurance, and/or endorsements B. The Contractor shall keep this insurance in force during the term of the contract and for thirty (30) days after the Physical Completion date, unless otherwise indicated (see C. below) C If any insurance policy is written on a claims made form, its retroactive date, and that of all subsequent renewals, shall be no later than the effective date of this Contract. The policy shall state that coverage is claims made, and state the retroactive date Claims -made form coverage shall be maintained by the Contractor for a minimum of 36 months following the Final Completion or earlier termination of this contract, and the Contractor shall annually provide the Contracting Agency with proof of renewal If renewal of the claims made form of coverage becomes unavailable, or economically prohibitive, the Contractor shall purchase an extended reporting period ("tail") or execute another form of guarantee acceptable to the Contracting Agency to assure financial responsibility for liability for services performed. D. The insurance polices shall contain a "cross liability" endorsement substantially as follows: 1 The inclusion of more than one insured under this policy shall not affect the rights of any insured as respects any claim, suit, or judgment made or brought by or for any other insured or by or for any employee of any other insured. This policy shall protect each insured in the same manner as though a separate policy had been issued to each, except that nothing herein shall operate to increase the company's liability beyond the amount or amounts for which the company would have been liable had only one insured been named. E The policies of insurance for general, automobile, and pollution policies shall be specifically endorsed to name the Contracting Agency and its officers, elected officials, employees, agents and volunteers, and any other entity specifically required by the Contract Provisions, as additional insured(s). F. The Contractor's and all subcontractors' insurance coverage shall be primary and non-contributory insurance as respects the Contracting Agency's insurance, self-insurance, or insurance pool coverage G All insurance policies and Certificates of Insurance shall include a requirement providing for a minimum of 45 days prior written notice to the Contracting Agency of any cancellation in any insurance policy. H. Upon request, the Contractor shall forward to the Contracting Agency a full and certified copy of the insurance policy(s). I. The Contractor shall not begin work under the contract until the required insurance has been obtained and approved by the Contracting Agency. J Failure on the part of the Contractor to maintain the insurance as required shall constitute a material breach of contract, upon which the Contracting Agency may, after giving five business days notice to the Contractor to correct the breach, immediately terminate the contract or, at its discretion, procure or renew such insurance and pay any and all premiums in connection therewith, with any sums so expended to be repaid to the Contracting Agency on demand, or at the sole discretion of the Contracting Agency, offset against funds due the Contractor from the Contracting Agency K. All costs for insurance shall be incidental to and included in the unit or lump sum prices of the contract and no additional payment will be made 1-07.18(2) ADDITIONAL INSURED All insurance policies, with the exception of Professional Liability and Workers Compensation, shall name the following listed entities as additional insured(s) • the Contracting Agency and its officers, elected officials, employees, agents, and volunteers • Golder Associates Inc. The above -listed entities shall be additional insured(s) for the full available limits of liability maintained by the Contractor, whether primary, excess, contingent or otherwise, irrespective of whether such limits maintained by the Contractor are greater than those required by this Contract, and irrespective of whether the Certificate of Insurance provided by the Contractor pursuant to 1-07 18(3) describes limits lower than those maintained by the Contractor. 1-07.18(3) SUBCONTRACTORS Contractor shall ensure that each subcontractor of every tier obtains and maintains at a minimum the insurance coverages listed in 1-07 18(5)A and 1-07 18(5)B Upon request of the Contracting Agency, the Contractor shall provide evidence of such insurance 1-07.18(4) EVIDENCE OF INSURANCE The Contractor shall deliver to the Contracting Agency a Certificate(s) of Insurance and endorsements for each policy of insurance meeting the requirements set forth herein when the Contractor delivers the signed Contract for the work The certificate and endorsements must conform to the following requirements 1 An ACORD certificate or a form determined by the Contracting Agency to be equivalent. 2 Copies of all endorsements naming Contracting Agency and all other entities listed in 1- 07 18(2) as Additional Insured(s), showing the policy number The Contractor may submit a copy of any blanket additional insured clause from its policies instead of a separate endorsement. A statement of additional insured status on an ACORD Certificate of Insurance shall not satisfy this requirement. 3 Any other amendatory endorsements to show the coverage required herein 1-07.18(5) COVERAGES AND LIMITS The insurance shall provide the minimum coverages and limits set forth below Providing coverage in these stated minimum limits shall not be construed to relieve the Contractor from liability in excess of such limits All deductibles and self-insured retentions must be disclosed and are subject to approval by the Contracting Agency The cost of any claim payments falling within the deductible shall be the responsibility of the Contractor (*******) This section is supplemented with the following• The Certificate of Insurance shall stipulate that the policies named thereon cannot be canceled unless at least forty-five (45) days written notice has been given to the Contracting Agency The Certificate shall not contain the following or similar wording regarding cancellation notification: "Failure to mail such notice shall impose no obligation or liability of any kind upon the company, its agents, or representatives." 1-07.18(5)A COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY A policy of Commercial General Liability Insurance, including Per project aggregate Premises/Operations Liability Products/Completed Operations — for a period of one year following final acceptance of the work. Personal/Advertising Injury Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Liability Stop Gap / Employers' Liability Explosion, Collapse, or Underground Property Damage (XCU) Blasting (only required when the Contractor's work under this Contract includes exposures to which this specified coverage responds) Such policy must provide the following minimum limits. $1,000,000 Each Occurrence $2,000,000 General Aggregate $1,000,000 Products & Completed Operations Aggregate $1,000,000 Personal & Advertising Injury, each offence Stop Gap / Employers' Liability $1,000,000 Each Accident $1,000,000 Disease - Policy Limit $1,000,000 Disease - Each Employee 1-07.18(5)B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY Automobile Liability for owned, non -owned, hired, and leased vehicles, with an MCS 90 endorsement and a CA 9948 endorsement attached if "pollutants" are to be transported. Such policy(ies) must provide the following minimum limit: $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit 1-07.18(5)C WORKERS' COMPENSATION The Contractor shall comply with Workers' Compensation coverage as required by the Industrial Insurance laws of the state of Washington 1-07.18(5)D COVERAGE FOR WORKING ON, OVER, OR NEAR NAVIGABLE WATERS (May 10, 2006 APWA GSP) Not required for this contract. 1-07.18(5)E ALL RISK BUILDER'S RISK (May 10, 2006 APWA GSP) Contractor shall purchase and maintain Builders Risk insurance covering interests of the Contracting Agency, the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub -subcontractors in the work. Builders Risk insurance shall be on a all-risk policy form and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and physical loss or damage including flood, earthquake, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief and collapse The Builders Risk insurance shall include coverage for temporary buildings, debris removal, and damage to materials in transit or stored off-site Such insurance shall cover "soft costs" including but not limited to design costs, licensing fees, and architect's and engineer's fees. Builders Risk insurance shall be written in the amount of the completed value of the project, with no coinsurance provisions. The Builders Risk insurance covering the work shall have a deductible of $5,000 for each occurrence, which will be the responsibility of the Contractor. Higher deductibles for flood, earthquake and all other perils may be accepted by the Contracting Agency upon written request by the Contractor and written acceptance by the Contracting Agency Any increased deductibles accepted by the Contracting Agency will remain the responsibility of the Contractor The Builders Risk insurance shall be maintained until final acceptance of the work by the Contracting Agency The Contractor and the Contracting Agency waive all rights against each other any of their Subcontractors, Sub -subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by Builders Risk insurance or other property insurance applicable to the work. The policies shall provide such waivers by endorsement or otherwise 1-07.18(5)F EXCESS OR UMBRELLA LIABILITY (May 10, 2006 APWA GSP) The Contractor shall provide Excess or Umbrella Liability coverage at limits of $1 million per occurrence and annual aggregate This excess or umbrella liability coverage shall apply, at a minimum, to both the Commercial General and Auto insurance policy coverage This requirement may be satisfied instead through the Contractor's primary Commercial General and Automobile Liability coverage, or any combination thereof 1-07.18(5)G POLLUTION LIABILITY (May 10, 2006 APWA GSP) The Contractor shall provide a Pollution Liability policy, providing coverage for claims involving bodily injury, property damage (including loss of use of tangible property that has not been physically injured), cleanup costs, remediation, disposal or other handling of pollutants, including costs and expenses incurred in the investigation, defense, or settlement of claims arising out of. • Contractor's operations related to this project; and/or • Remediation, abatement, repair, maintenance or other work with lead-based paint or materials containing asbestos; and/or • Transportation of hazardous materials away from any site related to this project. Such Pollution Liability policy shall provide the following minimum coverage $1,000,000 Each Loss and Annual Aggregate 1-07.18(5)H PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY (May 10, 2009 APWA GSP) The Contractor and/or its Subcontractor and/or its design consultant providing construction management, value engineering, or any other design -related non -construction professional services shall provide evidence of Professional Liability insurance covering professional errors and omissions Such policy must provide the following minimum limits $1,000,000 Per Claim If the scope of such design -related professional services includes work related to pollution conditions, the Professional Liability insurance shall include Pollution Liability coverage If insurance is on a claims made form, its retroactive date, and that of all subsequent renewals, shall be no later than the effective date of this Contract.